第一品:根本法门品显示巴利原文
1. Mūlapariyāyavaggo
根本法门经注显示巴利原文
1. Mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
1 至于“如是我闻”等,为序分。其中,“evaṃ”是不变词,“me”等为名词。在“Ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati”一句中,“vi”是前缀,“harati”是动词。依这些方式,应先了知诸词之解析。显示巴利原文
1. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādikaṃ nidānaṃ. Tattha evanti nipātapadaṃ. Metiādīni nāmapadāni. Ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharatīti ettha vīti upasaggapadaṃ, haratīti ākhyātapadanti iminā tāva nayena padavibhāgo veditabbo.
就义理而言,“evaṃ”一词本身,有譬喻、教导、随喜、呵责、领受、方式、指示、决定等众多不同的意义类别。正如其在各处所出现的那样:——“如此生者,应作众多善”(《法句经》53)等处,用于譬喻。“你应如此前进,你应如此后退”(《增支部》4.122)等处,用于教导。“世尊,正是如此!善逝,正是如此!”(《增支部》3.66)等处,用于随喜。“这个贱民女,竟如此这般地处处称赞那剃头沙门”(《相应部》1.187)等处,用于呵责。“‘是的,尊者!’诸比丘如此回应世尊”(《中部》1.1)等处,用于领受话语。“尊者!我如是了知世尊所开示之法”(《中部》1.398)等处,用于方式。“来,年轻人,你前往沙门阿难之处,到后以我之言,问候沙门阿难:‘善生童子多德亚之子,问候尊者阿难:少病、少恼、身轻、有气力、安住轻利。’并应如是说:‘若尊者阿难出于慈悯,能光临善生童子多德亚之子之住处,那实在太好了’”(《长部》1.445)等处,用于指示。“卡拉玛们!你们如何看待?这些法是善,还是不善?”“不善,尊者。”显示巴利原文
Atthato pana evaṃ-saddo tāva upamūpadesasampahaṃsanagarahaṇavacanasampaṭiggahākāranidassanāvadhāraṇādianekatthappabhedo. Tathāhesa – ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccena kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti evamādīsu (dha. pa. 53) upamāyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.122) upadese. ‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.187) garahaṇe. ‘‘Evaṃ bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) vacanasampaṭiggahe. ‘‘Evaṃ byākho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.398) ākāre. ‘‘Ehi tvaṃ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ, ānandaṃ, appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha – ‘subho māṇavo todeyyaputto, bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ, appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’ti, evañca vadehi sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.445) nidassane. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vāti? Akusalā, bhante. Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vāti? Sāvajjā, bhante. Viññugarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vāti? Viññugarahitā, bhante. Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotīti? Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) avadhāraṇe. Svāyamidha ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇesu daṭṭhabbo.
其中,从“方式”的意义上说,“evaṃ”一词阐明了此义:世尊的语汇,具足种种理趣的精妙,由众多不同的意乐而生起,义理与文句圆满,具备各种神变,其法义与开示的体证甚深;它顺应一切众生各自的语言而达于耳际——谁能以一切方式完全了知呢?唯有先以全部心力生起渴望听闻的意乐,而后才说:“如是我闻:我也曾以某一种方式听闻过。”显示巴利原文
Tattha ākāraṭṭhena evaṃsaddena etamatthaṃ dīpeti – nānānayanipuṇaṃ anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ atthabyañjanasampannaṃ vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīraṃ sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathamāgacchantaṃ tassa bhagavato vacanaṃ sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātuṃ, sabbathāmena pana sotukāmataṃ janetvāpi evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi ekenākārena sutanti.
以“指示”的意义,为表明“我并非自然生者,也并非由我亲自证得此法”,而说“如是我闻,我也曾这样听闻”,以此指示了接下来所要宣说的整部经典。显示巴利原文
Nidassanaṭṭhena ‘‘nāhaṃ sayambhū, na mayā idaṃ sacchikata’’nti attānaṃ parimocento evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi evaṃ sutanti idāni vattabbaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ nidasseti.
以“决定”的意义,为了显示自身记忆与受持的能力堪与世尊所称赞的——“比丘们!在我的声闻比丘中,多闻第一、具足正行者第一、具念第一、坚定第一、侍者第一的,就是阿难”(《增支部》1.219-223),以及与法将军所称赞的——“尊者阿难是义理巧者、法巧者、音节巧者、语词巧者、前后连贯巧者”(《增支部》5.169)相符,由此令众生生起渴望听闻之心,而说:“如是我闻:而且那内容,不论在义理上还是音节上,不增不减,道理正是这样,不应看成别的样子。”显示巴利原文
Avadhāraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando, gatimantānaṃ, satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.219-223) evaṃ bhagavatā, ‘‘āyasmā ānando atthakusalo dhammakusalo byañjanakusalo niruttikusalo pubbāparakusalo’’ti (a. ni. 5.169) evaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ca pasatthabhāvānurūpaṃ attano dhāraṇabalaṃ dassento sattānaṃ sotukamyataṃ janeti ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ, tañca kho atthato vā byañjanato vā anūnamanadhikaṃ, evameva na aññathā daṭṭhabba’’nti.
“me”一词见于三种意义。例如:“以偈颂吟唱之食,不应为我所食”(《经集》81)等,义为“由我”。“善哉,尊者世尊!请为我略说法要”(《相应部》4.88)等,义为“为我”。“你们要成为我的法之继承人,比丘们!”(《中部》1.29)等,义为“我的”。而在此处,“由我听闻”与“我的听闻”二义都适合。显示巴利原文
Me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hissa ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 81) mayāti attho. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante bhagavā, saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.88) mayhanti attho. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) mamāti attho. Idha pana ‘‘mayā suta’’nti ca ‘‘mama suta’’nti ca atthadvaye yujjati.
“suta”(闻)一词,无论加不加前缀,都有“行走”“闻名”“漏湿”“积集”“修习”“耳识所识”“耳门随转识”等多种不同意义。正如在“随军队而行”等中,义为“行走者”;在“见闻法者”等(《小部》11)中,义为“闻名于法者”;在“有漏男子对有漏女子”等(《波罗夷》657)中,义为“漏湿对漏湿”;在“你们已积集了众多福德”等(《法句经》7.12)中,义为“积集”;在“那些乐于禅那的智者”等(《法句经》181)中,义为“修习禅那者”;在“所见、所闻、所觉”等(《中部》1.241)中,义为“耳识所识”;在“持闻者、积闻者”等(《中部》1.339)中,义为“持守耳门随转所识”。而在此处,其义为由耳门随转而“领受”或“领受了”。当“me”字表示“由我”义时,便适合理解为:“如是,此由我听闻——即由我依耳门随转而领受。”当“me”表示“我的”义时,便适合理解为:“如是,此由我听闻——即我的依耳门随转的领受。”显示巴利原文
Sutanti ayaṃ suta-saddo saupasaggo ca anupasaggo ca gamana-vissuta-kilinna-upacitānuyoga-sotaviññeyya-sotadvārānusāraviññātādianekatthappabhedo. Tathā hissa ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11) vissutadhammassāti attho, ‘‘avassutā avassutassāti’’ādīsu (pāci. 657) kilinnā kilinnassāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) jhānānuyuttāti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) sotaviññeyyanti attho. ‘‘Sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa sotadvārānusārena ‘‘upadhārita’’nti vā ‘‘upadhāraṇa’’nti vāti attho. Me-saddassa hi mayāti atthe sati ‘‘evaṃ mayā sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhārita’’nti yujjati. Mamāti atthe sati ‘‘evaṃ mama sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhāraṇa’’nti yujjati.
在这三个词中,“evam(如是)”是显示耳识等识的作用;“me(我)”是显示具有该识的补特伽罗;“sutam(闻)”则遮遣了未听闻的状态,显示无减、无增、无颠倒的执取。同样,“evam”是显示依耳门随转的识流,以种种方式于所缘中转起的情形;“me”是显示自我;“sutam”是显示法。这里的要义是:“这依种种方式于所缘中转起的识流,并非我另造了什么,而是那‘法’被听受了。”显示巴利原文
Evametesu tīsu padesu evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassanaṃ. Meti vuttaviññāṇasamaṅgipuggalanidassanaṃ. Sutanti assavanabhāvappaṭikkhepato anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Tathā evanti tassā sotadvārānusārena pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattibhāvappakāsanaṃ. Meti attappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsanaṃ. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo ‘‘nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā mayā na aññaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ pana kataṃ, ayaṃ dhammo suto’’ti.
同样地,「evam」是所应开示的说明;「me」是补特伽罗的说明;「sutam」是补特伽罗行为的说明。此即是说:我将要解说的经典,是我如是听闻的。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti niddisitabbappakāsanaṃ. Meti puggalappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti puggalakiccappakāsanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ suttaṃ niddisissāmi, taṃ mayā evaṃ sutanti.
「evam」是指:某个心相续由于种种行相的转起,而执取了种种义理和言辞,这便是对种种行相的说明。因为「evam」只是一种行相的施设,「me」是对作者的说明,「sutam」是对所缘境的说明。以此,以种种行相转起的心相续,以及具足该心的作者,便对所缘境完成了执取与决断。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso. Evanti hi ayaṃ ākārapaññatti, meti kattuniddeso, sutanti visayaniddeso. Ettāvatā nānākārappavattena cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgino kattuvisaye gahaṇasanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ hoti.
或者,可以这样理解:「evam」是补特伽罗行为的说明;「sutam」是识行为的说明;「me」是兼具此二行为的补特伽罗的说明。此处要义为:我,作为一个具足听闻之识的补特伽罗,依于识而获得听闻行为这一名称,故称为「听闻」。显示巴利原文
Atha vā evanti puggalakiccaniddeso. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso. Meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – mayā savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā puggalena viññāṇavasena laddhasavanakiccavohārena sutanti.
此处,「如是」与「我」是就真实、最高义而言不存在的施设。因为在究竟上,此处有什么是真实存在的,可以用「如是」或「我」来指称呢?而「闻」是存在的施设。因为此处由耳所获取的那个内容,在究竟上是存在的。显示巴利原文
Tattha evanti ca meti ca saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññatti. Kiñhettha taṃ paramatthato atthi, yaṃ evanti vā meti vā niddesaṃ labhetha? Sutanti vijjamānapaññatti. Yañhi tamettha sotena upaladdhaṃ, taṃ paramatthato vijjamānanti.
同样,「如是」与「我」是依此依彼而说,故为依止施设;「闻」是依于所见等而说,故为类比施设。此处,以「如是」一词表示不迷乱,因为迷乱的人无法通达种种行相。以「闻」一词表示对所听闻的不忘失,因为如果他所听闻的被忘失了,那么过了一段时间他就不会承认‘我听闻了’。这样,由于不迷乱而成就慧,由于不忘失而成就念。其中,以慧为前导的念能够决定音节,以念为前导的慧能够通达义理;凭借这两者兼备的能力,具足义理与音节,能守护法藏,因此成就了法藏师的身份。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti ca meti ca taṃ taṃ upādāya vattabbato upādāpaññatti. Sutanti diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato upanidhāpaññatti. Ettha ca evanti vacanena asammohaṃ dīpeti. Na hi sammūḷho nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hoti. Sutanti vacanena sutassa asammosaṃ dīpeti. Yassa hi sutaṃ sammuṭṭhaṃ hoti , na so kālantarena mayā sutanti paṭijānāti. Iccassa asammohena paññāsiddhi, asammosena pana satisiddhi. Tattha paññā pubbaṅgamāya satiyā byañjanāvadhāraṇasamatthatā, satipubbaṅgamāya paññāya atthapaṭivedhasamatthatā, tadubhayasamatthatāyogena atthabyañjanasampannassa dhammakosassa anupālanasamatthato dhammabhaṇḍāgārikattasiddhi.
另一种解释方式——以「如是」一词显示如理作意,因为不如理作意的人,对种种行相便无通达。以「闻」一词显示心无散乱,因为心散乱者便无有听闻。确实,心散乱的补特伽罗,即使别人用尽所有圆满的言辞对他说,他也会说:‘我没有听闻,请再说一遍。’其中,由如理作意成就自己正确的誓愿与过去所造的福德,因为未立正誓者,或过去未积福德者,即无如理作意。由无散乱成就对正法的听闻与对善士的亲近。因为心散乱者不能听闻,不亲近善士者便无听闻。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – evanti vacanena yoniso manasikāraṃ dīpeti, ayoniso manasikaroto hi nānappakārapaṭivedhābhāvato. Sutanti vacanena avikkhepaṃ dīpeti, vikkhittacittassa savanābhāvato. Tathā hi vikkhittacitto puggalo sabbasampattiyā vuccamānopi ‘‘na mayā sutaṃ, puna bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. Yoniso manasikārena cettha attasammāpaṇidhiṃ pubbe ca katapuññataṃ sādheti, sammā apaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā tadabhāvato. Avikkhepena pana saddhammassavanaṃ sappurisūpanissayañca sādheti. Na hi vikkhittacitto sotuṃ sakkoti, na ca sappurise anupassayamānassa savanaṃ atthīti.
另一种解释方法:说「evam」,是因为当某个心相续以种种形态转起,而能把握种种义理与音节时,便称为对种种形态的说明。这种良善的形态,不会出现在没有正确立下誓愿的人身上,也不会出现在过去未曾积集福德的人身上。因此,以「evam」这句——以此良善形态,显示自身成就后一双明的圆满;以「sutam」一词,则通过听闻的关系,显示成就前一双明的圆满。为何这样说?因为如果住在不适之处,又缺少善士的提携,便没有听闻的机会。如此一来,由后一双明的成就,成就了他的意乐清净;由前一双明的成就,成就了他的加行清净。以意乐清净,成就证悟的善巧;以加行清净,成就教法的善巧。如此,一位加行与意乐清净、具足教证二法的人,他所说的话,犹如日出前的曙光,又如善业生起时的如理作意,足以作为世尊法语的前导。因此,为了在适当之处安立因缘,他说了‘如是我闻’等语。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – yasmā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddesoti vuttaṃ. So ca evaṃ bhaddako ākāro na sammā appaṇihitattano pubbe akatapuññassa vā hoti, tasmā evanti iminā bhaddakena ākārena pacchimacakkadvayasampattiṃ attano dīpeti, sutanti savanayogena purimacakkadvayasampattiṃ. Na hi appatirūpadese vasato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa vā savanaṃ atthi. Iccassa pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyā āsayasuddhi siddhā hoti. Purimacakkadvayasiddhiyā payogasuddhi. Tāya ca āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhi, payogasuddhiyā āgamabyattisiddhi. Iti payogāsayasuddhassa āgamādhigamasampannassa vacanaṃ aruṇuggaṃ viya sūriyassa udayato yonisomanasikāro viya ca kusalakammassa arahati bhagavato vacanassa pubbaṅgamaṃ bhavitunti ṭhāne nidānaṃ ṭhapento evaṃ me sutantiādimāha.
另一种解释方法:以「evam」这句能显示通达种种形态的话,表明他自己具备义无碍解与辩无碍解的成就;以「sutam」这句能显示通达所闻种类差别的话,表明他具备法无碍解与词无碍解的成就。而且,当他说出「evam」这句显示如理作意的话时,他其实是在表明:‘这些法,都是我用意遍察、以见善加通达的。’当他说出「sutam」这句显示听闻关系的话时,他其实是在表明:‘众多法,被我所听闻、受持,并以语言反复熟习。’如此,借由这两句话显示了义理与音节的圆满,从而令人们对听闻生起恭敬心。要知道,若有人对义理与音节皆圆满的法,不怀恭敬心而听闻,将被隔绝于巨大的利益之外。所以,先引发恭敬,接着便应殷重、恭敬地来听闻正法。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – evanti iminā nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakena vacanena attano atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. Sutanti iminā sotabbabhedapaṭivedhadīpakena dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ . Evanti ca idaṃ yonisomanasikāradīpakaṃ vacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘ete mayā dhammā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā’’ti dīpeti. Sutanti idaṃ savanayogadīpakaṃ vacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘bahū mayā dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitā’’ti dīpeti. Tadubhayenapi atthabyañjanapāripūriṃ dīpento savane ādaraṃ janeti. Atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇañhi dhammaṃ ādarena assuṇanto mahatā hitā paribāhiro hotīti ādaraṃ janetvā sakkaccaṃ dhammo sotabboti.
再者,以‘如是我闻’这整句话,具寿阿难不将如来所宣说的法执为己作,从而超越非善人之地;他承认自己是声闻,从而进入善士之地。同样地,他令心脱离非正法,将心安立于正法。他表明‘这仅是我所听闻,正是彼世尊的话语’,由此使自己远离过失,指出根本的导师,确立胜者之教,安立法的传承。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ me suta’’nti iminā pana sakalena vacanena āyasmā ānando tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammaṃ attano adahanto asappurisabhūmiṃ atikkamati, sāvakattaṃ paṭijānanto sappurisabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asaddhammā cittaṃ vuṭṭhāpeti, saddhamme cittaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. ‘‘Kevalaṃ sutamevetaṃ mayā tasseva pana bhagavato vacana’’nti dīpento attānaṃ parimoceti, satthāraṃ apadisati, jinavacanaṃ appeti, dhammanettiṃ patiṭṭhāpeti.
再者,他说“如是我闻”,既不承认法是自身所生,也由此开显了前句的含义:“这是我在彼世尊面前亲自领受的。彼世尊是具足四无畏的自信者,是持十力者,是安住牛王位者,是作狮子吼者,是一切众生中最上者,是法主,是法王,是法之增上者,是法灯,是法皈依,是胜妙转法轮者,是正自觉者。这是他所说的话。因此,对于这话中的义理、法、文句或字词,都不应存有任何疑惑与犹豫。”如此,他灭除一切天、人对这法的无信,令他们成就信心。因此,下面这几句被说出:显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti attanā uppāditabhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto purimavacanaṃ vivaranto ‘‘sammukhā paṭiggahitamidaṃ mayā tassa bhagavato catuvesārajjavisāradassa dasabaladharassa āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyino sīhanādanādino sabbasattuttamassa dhammissarassa dhammarājassa dhammādhipatino dhammadīpassa dhammasaraṇassa saddhammavaracakkavattino sammāsambuddhassa vacanaṃ, na ettha atthe vā dhamme vā pade vā byañjane vā kaṅkhā vā vimati vā kattabbā’’ti sabbadevamanussānaṃ imasmiṃ dhamme assaddhiyaṃ vināseti, saddhāsampadaṃ uppādetīti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
他摧破无信,增长教法中的信心;
“如是我闻”,乔达摩的弟子如此说。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vināsayati assaddhaṃ, saddhaṃ vaḍḍheti sāsane; Evaṃ me sutamiccevaṃ, vadaṃ gotamasāvako’’ti.
‘一’是对数量的限定说明;‘时’是对时间的限定说明。‘一时’连用,则表示一种非限定性的指示。其中,‘时’这个字——显示巴利原文
Ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso. Samayanti paricchinnaniddeso. Ekaṃ samayanti aniyamitaparidīpanaṃ. Tattha samayasaddo –
这个‘时’字,可用作:集会、刹那、时段、群体、原因、邪见等义;
在“获得”(paṭilābha)、“断除”(pahāna)和“通达”(paṭivedha)这些意义上,也能见到它的用法。
显示巴利原文 Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissati.
正如在‘或许我们明天也可以依时机与因缘前往’等语句中(《长部》1.447),samaya是‘集会’的意思。在‘比丘们,确实只有一个刹那与一个时机适合修梵行’等语句中(《增支部》8.29),是‘刹那’的意思。在‘暑热之时,酷热之时’等语句中(《波逸提》358),是‘时节’的意思。在‘大集会于森林中’等语句中,是‘聚集’的意思。在‘跋达利,于你而言,这个因缘也尚未通达:世尊住在舍卫城,世尊也会这样知晓我——“名为跋达利的比丘,在导师的教法中,于修学上不是圆满的行者”;跋达利,于你而言,这个因缘也尚未通达’等语句中(《中部》2.135),是‘原因’的意思。在‘那时,游方者优伽诃马那——沙门文荼之子,住在末利夫人园中的丁杜卡讲堂,宣说各种议论’等语句中(《中部》2.260),是‘见解’的意思。显示巴利原文
Tathā hissa ‘‘appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) samavāyo attho. ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) khaṇo. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’tiādīsu (pāci. 358) kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’ntiādīsu samūho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi, bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati, ‘bhaddāli, nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya na paripūrakārī’ti, ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.135) hetu . ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.260) diṭṭhi.
“于现法中所得的意义,以及于来世中所得的意义;”
“因为通达了这些意义,坚住者便被称为智者。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko; Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī’’ti. –
在“由正断除慢而作尽苦边”等处(《中部》1.24),是“断除”的意思。在“苦的逼迫义、有为义、热恼义、变易义、现观义”等处(《无碍解道》3.1),是“通达”的意思。而在此处,“samaya”是“时节”的意思。因此,在年、季节、月、半月、夜、日、上午、正午、下午、初夜、中夜、后夜乃至须臾等这些由时间差别所构成的各种时中,它被说为“一时”。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.129) paṭilābho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.24) pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 3.1) paṭivedho. Idha panassa kālo attho. Tena saṃvacchara-utu-māsaḍḍhamāsa-ratti-diva-pubbaṇha-majjhanhika-sāyanha- paṭhamamajjhimapacchimayāma-muhuttādīsu kālappabhedabhūtesu samayesu ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti.
在此,虽然这些经中的任何一部是在哪一年、哪一季节、哪一月、哪一半月、哪夜分或哪日分所说的,长老都以智慧完全了知、完全确认,但若说成“如是我闻:在某年、某季、某月、某半月、某夜分、某日分”,则不易记忆,也不易诵习或教授他人,且需要多说许多话。因此,他便以“一时”这一个词涵盖那个意义。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi etesu saṃvaccharādīsu samayesu yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ yamhi yamhi saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe rattibhāge divasabhāge vā vuttaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ therassa suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitaṃ paññāya. Yasmā pana ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ asukasaṃvacchare asukautumhi asukamāse asukapakkhe asukarattibhāge asukadivasabhāge vā’’ti evaṃ vutte na sakkā sukhena dhāretuṃ vā uddisituṃ vā uddisāpetuṃ vā, bahu ca vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā ekeneva padena tamatthaṃ samodhānetvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
或者,还有这些时间:入胎时、诞生时、生悚惧时、出家时、苦行时、降魔时、正觉时、现法乐住时、说法时、般涅槃时等等。这些都是世尊在天界与人间极其显著、种种不同时期的时间。在这些时间中,它指的是被称为“说法时”的那个“一时”。而在智慧与悲悯作用的时间中,有“黎明时分”;在自利与利他行的修行时间中,有“利他行时”;在聚会大众所应作的二事中,有“法谈时”;在教导与修持的时间中,有“说法时”;在这些时间中,针对其中的某一个,而说为“一时”。显示巴利原文
Ye vā ime gabbhokkantisamayo jātisamayo saṃvegasamayo abhinikkhamanasamayo dukkarakārikasamayo māravijayasamayo abhisambodhisamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo desanāsamayo parinibbānasamayoti evamādayo bhagavato devamanussesu ativiya suppakāsā anekakālappabhedā eva samayā, tesu samayesu desanāsamayasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti. Yo cāyaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākiccasamayesu aruṇākiccasamayo, attahitaparahitapaṭipattisamayesu parahitapaṭipattisamayo, sannipatitānaṃ karaṇīyadvayasamayesu dhammikathāsamayo, desanāpaṭipattisamayesu desanāsamayo, tesupi samayesu aññataraṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
那么,为何此处不像阿毗达摩中那样,用“yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara”(于欲界时)的处格,也不像其他经文那样,用“yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi”(诸比丘,于任何时,比丘远离诸欲……)的处格,以及律藏中“tena samayena buddho bhagavā”(尔时,佛陀世尊)的具格,而唯独用了对格,说成“ekaṃ samayaṃ”(一时)呢?因为在阿毗达摩及这里所引的诸经中,“samaya”兼具“依据”之义,以及“通过状态标示状态”之义。即,作为依据的“samaya”,既有时节义,亦有集合义;其处所说的触等诸法,正是藉由名为“刹那和合因”的“时”之状态,来显示诸法自身的状态。为阐明此义,便于那些处采用了处格表述。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha yathā abhidhamme ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara’’nti ca ito aññesu suttapadesu ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’ti ca bhummavacanena niddeso kato, vinaye ca ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’ti karaṇavacanena, tathā akatvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti upayogavacananiddeso katoti. Tattha tathā idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Tattha hi abhidhamme ito aññesu suttapadesu ca adhikaraṇattho bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavati. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho ca samūhattho ca samayo, tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena tesaṃ bhāvo lakkhīyati, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha bhummavacananiddeso kato.
在律藏中,则成立因义与作具义。也就是说,制立学处的那个时机,即使舍利弗等圣者也难以了知;世尊以彼“时”作为因、作为作具,一边制立学处,一边观待制戒的因缘,而安住于各处。为显明其中含义,故于彼处用了具格来表述。显示巴利原文
Vinaye ca hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi so sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo sāriputtādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena ca sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha karaṇavacanena niddeso kato.
然而,在此处以及其他同类的情形中,则成立完全联结的意义。即,世尊在宣说此经或其他任何经典的一切时刻,都确实毫无间断地以悲心而安住于那一时刻。为表明此义,便于此处采用了对格来表述。显示巴利原文
Idha pana aññasmiñca evaṃjātike accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā imaṃ aññaṃ vā suttantaṃ desesi, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ idha upayogavacananiddeso katoti.
因此,如此说:显示巴利原文
Tenetaṃ vuccati –
着眼于种种别别义理,或以处格、或以具格来表述;
而此处,依对格所说之‘时’,与余处不同。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhitvā, bhummena karaṇena ca; Aññatra samayo vutto, upayogena so idhā’’ti.
古代的老师们则这样解释:‘tasmiṃ samaye’(于彼时)、‘tena samayena’(以彼时)、‘ekaṃ samayaṃ’(一时),这些只是言词表达上的差异,其意义在任何情况下都是处格。因此,即使说‘ekaṃ samayaṃ’(一时),也应理解为‘ekasmiṃ samaye’(在某一时刻)的意思。显示巴利原文
Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’ti vā – ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vā – ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vā abhilāpamattabhedo esa, sabbattha bhummameva atthoti. Tasmā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttepi ‘‘ekasmiṃ samaye’’ti attho veditabbo.
“世尊”(bhagavā)是指导师。因为在世间,对导师便称为“bhagavā”。而这位导师由于具足一切最殊胜的功德,为一切众生之导师,所以应知他就是“世尊”。古德也曾说:显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti garu. Garuñhi loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vadanti. Ayañca sabbaguṇavisiṭṭhatāya sabbasattānaṃ garu, tasmā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti veditabbo. Porāṇehipi vuttaṃ –
“‘bhagavā’一词最为殊胜,‘bhagavā’一词最为无上;
他具足敬重与恭敬,因此被称为‘世尊’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ; Garugāravayutto so, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
具足福德、断尽烦恼、成就诸德,以种种功德而区分;
受用者、已弃去者,故于诸有中称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti. –
应依此偈颂,详细了知该词的含义。这一含义在《清净道论》的“佛随念论”中已有阐述。显示巴利原文
Imissā gāthāya vasenassa padassa vitthārato attho veditabbo. So ca visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vuttoyeva.
至此,以“如是我闻”一语,令所闻之法显现,即令世尊的法身现前。以此安慰那些因不见导师而忧伤之人:“此圣教未与导师分离,这就是你们的导师。”显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā cettha evaṃ me sutanti vacanena yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ dassento bhagavato dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karoti. Tena – ‘‘nayidaṃ atikkantasatthukaṃ pāvacanaṃ, ayaṃ vo satthā’’ti satthu adassanena ukkaṇṭhitaṃ janaṃ samassāseti.
由“一时,世尊”之言,显示彼时世尊已不存在,以此证成色身的般涅槃。借此警醒那些骄慢于生命之人:“如此圣法的宣说者、具足十力、身如金刚聚合的世尊,也已般涅槃;更有何物可令我对生命生起期望?”从而令其对正法生起精进。显示巴利原文
Ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavāti vacanena tasmiṃ samaye bhagavato avijjamānabhāvaṃ dassento rūpakāyaparinibbānaṃ sādheti. Tena ‘‘evaṃvidhassa nāma ariyadhammassa desako dasabaladharo vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo, sopi bhagavā parinibbuto, kena aññena jīvite āsā janetabbā’’ti jīvitamadamattaṃ janaṃ saṃvejeti, saddhamme cassa ussāhaṃ janeti.
“如”之语,指示教法成就;“我闻”,指示声闻成就;“一时”,指示时节成就;“世尊”,指示说法者成就。显示巴利原文
Evanti ca bhaṇanto desanāsampattiṃ niddisati. Me sutanti sāvakasampattiṃ. Ekaṃ samayanti kālasampattiṃ. Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ.
“乌迦陀住”中的“乌迦陀”,“乌迦”意为灯炬。此城因在“吉祥日、良辰、善宿,切勿错过”的夜晚,燃灯高举时所建,故得名“乌迦陀”,意即点燃并擎持灯炬建造而成。此处用的是表附近的处格。“住”者,通指威仪住、天住、梵住、圣住等一切住法中的安住状态。而在这里,则是指行走、站立、坐、卧等某一种威仪的结合。因此,世尊无论是站着、走着、坐着还是躺着,都应理解为“住”。因为世尊能以一种威仪中断另一种威仪的相续,不令色身衰损而令其相续,故称为“住”。显示巴利原文
Ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharatīti ettha ukkāti dīpikā, tañca nagaraṃ ‘‘maṅgaladivaso sukhaṇo sunakkhattaṃ mā atikkamī’’ti rattimpi ukkāsu ṭhitāsu māpitattā ukkaṭṭhāti vuccati. Daṇḍadīpikāsu jāletvā dhārīyamānāsu māpitattāti vuttaṃ hoti, tassaṃ ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgiparidīpanametaṃ. Idha pana ṭhānagamananisinnasayanappabhedesu riyāpathesu aññatarairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. Tena ṭhitopi gacchantopi nisinnopi sayānopi bhagavā viharaticceva veditabbo. So hi bhagavā ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā viharatīti vuccati.
在“幸运林”一词中,“幸运”是因幸运而得名,意思是具足美好繁荣与可爱之处。由于这片林苑的庄严华美,人们带着饮食等物,整日在那里举办节庆与集会,享受欲乐,并在此处希求种种美好的愿望,如“愿我们得子,愿我们得女”,且皆能如愿以偿。如此,这片林因具足美好繁荣与美好可爱,故名为“幸运”。再者,也因众人所爱乐,故为“幸运”。“林”的意思是令人爱乐,即依自身的殊胜令有情生起敬奉与爱意;或者“林”意为恳请,因种种花香弥漫、令人陶醉的杜鹃等鸟类的鸣叫,以及被微风轻摇的树枝、树梢、嫩叶与树叶,这一切仿佛在向一切众生请求:“来吧,请享用我吧!”幸运即是林,故称“幸运林”,在此幸运林中。林又分为种植与自然生长两种:其中,竹林精舍、祇园等是种植的;盲林、大林、安阇那林等则是自然生长的。此处的这片林,也应当知道是自然生长的。显示巴利原文
Subhagavaneti ettha subhagattā subhagaṃ, sundarasirikattā sundarakāmattā cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa hi vanassa sirisampattiyā manussā annapānādīni ādāya divasaṃ tattheva chaṇasamajjaussave karontā bhogasukhaṃ anubhonti, sundarasundare cettha kāme patthenti ‘‘puttaṃ labhāma, dhītaraṃ labhāmā’’ti, tesaṃ taṃ tatheva hoti, evaṃ taṃ sundarasirikattā sundarakāmattā ca subhagaṃ. Apica bahujanakantatāyapi subhagaṃ. Vanayatīti vanaṃ, attasampadāya sattānaṃ bhattiṃ kāreti, attani sinehaṃ uppādetīti attho. Vanute iti vā vanaṃ, nānāvidhakusuma-gandhasammodamattakokilādivihaṅgamābhirutehi mandamālutacalitarukkhasākhāviṭapapallavapalāsehi ca ‘‘etha maṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti sabbapāṇino yācati viyāti attho. Subhagañca taṃ vanañcāti subhagavanaṃ. Tasmiṃ subhagavane. Vanañca nāma ropimaṃ, sayaṃjātanti duvidhaṃ. Tattha veḷuvanajetavanādīni ropimāni. Andhavanamahāvanaañjanavanādīni sayaṃ jātāni. Idampi sayaṃjātanti veditabbaṃ.
在“沙喇王树下”一句中,沙喇树亦可单称沙喇。如经中所说:“比丘们,譬如某个村庄或城镇附近有一片大沙喇林,且被蓖麻树所覆盖。”(《中部》1.225)以及“在双沙喇树之间”(《长部》2.195)。沙喇树亦指林中最殊胜的树。如偈颂所说:显示巴利原文
Sālarājamūleti ettha sālarukkhopi sāloti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre mahantaṃ sālavanaṃ, tañcassa eḷaṇḍehi sañchanna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.225) ‘‘antarena yamakasālāna’’nti ca (dī. ni. 2.195) vanappatijeṭṭhakarukkhopi. Yathāha –
在你的领土之上,在你的园林之地;
笔直挺拔的沙喇巨树,有着悦目的蓝色光辉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taveva deva vijite, tavevuyyānabhūmiyā; Ujuvaṃsā mahāsālā, nīlobhāsā manoramā’’ti. (jā. 2.19.4);
此处“沙喇”亦可泛指任何树木。如经中说:“那时,诸比丘,那摩卢瓦种子落于某棵沙喇树根处。”(《中部》1.469)而在此处,则特指林中最殊胜之树。用“王”字,正是为了确立其最胜的地位。如经中说:“婆罗门,如法安住的榕树王啊……”(《增支部》6.54)关于复合词,有两种释法:沙喇中的王,称为“沙喇王”;或沙喇本身因最胜即为王,亦名“沙喇王”。“树下”意指附近。因为“根”这个词,在“拔除其根,哪怕小如须芒草茎”(《增支部》4.195)等处,指真正的根;在“贪是不善根”(《长部》3.305)等处,指不共之因;而在“乃至正午日影移动、无风处树叶飘落,即以此为树下”等处,则是指附近。此处正是指附近,因此意义应这样理解:在沙喇王的近处。显示巴利原文
Yo koci rukkhopi. Yathāha ‘‘atha kho taṃ, bhikkhave, māluvabījaṃ aññatarasmiṃ sālamūle nipateyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.469). Idha pana vanappatijeṭṭhakarukkho adhippeto. Rājasaddo panassa tameva jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ sādheti. Yathāha ‘‘suppatiṭṭhitassa kho brāhmaṇa dhammika nigrodharājassā’’ti (a. ni. 6.54). Tattha dvedhā samāso, sālānaṃ rājātipi sālarājā, sālo ca so jeṭṭhakaṭṭhena rājā ca itipi sālarājā. Mūlanti samīpaṃ. Ayañhi mūlasaddo, ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyya, antamaso usiranāḷimattānipī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.195) mūlamūle dissati. ‘‘Lobho akusalamūla’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.305) asādhāraṇahetumhi. ‘‘Yāva majjhanhike kāle chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūla’’ntiādīsu samīpe. Idha pana samīpe adhippeto, tasmā sālarājassa samīpeti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
于此或许有人会问:若世尊住在乌迦陀,便不应说“在幸运林沙喇王树下”;若住在那里,便不应说“在乌迦陀”,因为世尊不可能同一时间住于两处。然而,不应作如是观。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – yadi tāva bhagavā ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati, ‘‘subhagavane sālarājamūle’’ti na vattabbaṃ, atha tattha viharati, ‘‘ukkaṭṭhāya’’nti na vattabbaṃ, na hi sakkā ubhayattha ekaṃ samayaṃ viharitunti. Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
我们之前不是已说过“此处所用的是表示邻近的处格”吗?因此,就像在恒河、耶牟那河附近活动的牛群,被称为“在恒河而行、在耶牟那河而行”,此处也是如此。那座位于乌迦陀附近的幸运林沙喇王树下,世尊正在该处安住,便被称为“住于乌迦陀的幸运林沙喇王树下”。显示巴利原文
Nanu avocumha ‘‘samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacana’’nti. Tasmā yathā gaṅgāyamunādīnaṃ samīpe goyūthāni carantāni ‘‘gaṅgāya caranti, yamunāya carantī’’ti vuccanti, evamidhāpi yadidaṃ ukkaṭṭhāya samīpe subhagavanaṃ sālarājamūlaṃ, tattha viharanto vuccati ‘‘ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati subhagavane sālarājamūle’’ti. Gocaragāmanidassanatthañhissa ukkaṭṭhāvacanaṃ, pabbajitānurūpanivāsaṭṭhānanidassanatthaṃ sesavacanaṃ.
其中,阿难尊者通过提到“乌迦陀”,说明世尊对在家众的摄护;通过提到“幸运林”等,说明世尊对出家众的摄护。同样,通过前者(提到乌迦陀)表明接受资具,从而远离了自我折磨的修行;通过后者(提到幸运林)表明舍离对场所的欲染,从而显示了远离沉溺欲乐的方便。前者表明专注于宣说正法,后者表明倾心于远离。前者显示了以悲悯摄受,后者显示了以智慧出离。前者表明致力于成就众生的利益与安乐,后者表明在利益、安乐他人时,内心无所染着。前者以如法舍离安乐的相,作为安住轻利;后者以专修超人法的相,作为安住。前者表明对人间多有饶益,后者表明对诸天多有饶益。前者表明生于世间、于世间成长,后者表明不为世间所染。再者,依‘诸比丘,有一人出现于世间,是为众多人之利益、为众多人之安乐、为悲悯世间、为诸天与人之义利、利益、安乐而生。是何等人?即是如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者’(《增支部》1.170)这一说法,前者显示世尊圆满成就了降生世间的目的,后者显示世尊安住于与出生之地相应的居所。因为世尊始生于蓝毗尼林,再于菩提道场成正觉——无论世间还是出世间的诞生,都发生于林中,所以此处也显示了。显示巴利原文
Tattha ukkaṭṭhākittanena āyasmā ānando bhagavato gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇaṃ dasseti, subhagavanādikittanena pabbajitānuggahakaraṇaṃ. Tathā purimena paccayaggahaṇato attakilamathānuyogavivajjanaṃ, pacchimena vatthukāmappahānato kāmasukhallikānuyogavivajjanupāyadassanaṃ. Purimena ca dhammadesanābhiyogaṃ, pacchimena vivekādhimuttiṃ. Purimena karuṇāya upagamanaṃ, pacchimena paññāya apagamanaṃ. Purimena sattānaṃ hitasukhanipphādanādhimuttataṃ, pacchimena parahitasukhakaraṇe nirupalepanaṃ. Purimena dhammikasukhāpariccāganimittaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ, pacchimena uttarimanussadhammānuyoganimittaṃ . Purimena manussānaṃ upakārabahulataṃ, pacchimena devānaṃ. Purimena loke jātassa loke saṃvaḍḍhabhāvaṃ, pacchimena lokena anupalittataṃ. Purimena ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṃ. Katamo ekapuggalo, tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti (a. ni. 1.170) vacanato yadatthaṃ bhagavā uppanno, tadatthaparinipphādanaṃ, pacchimena yattha uppanno, tadanurūpavihāraṃ. Bhagavā hi paṭhamaṃ lumbinivane, dutiyaṃ bodhimaṇḍeti lokiyalokuttarāya uppattiyā vaneyeva uppanno, tenassa vaneyeva vihāraṃ dassetīti evamādinā nayenettha atthayojanā veditabbā.
“在那里”(tatrāti)意在指明地点与时间。也就是说,世尊在哪个时间安住,就是在那个时间;在哪棵沙喇王树下安住,就是在那个沙喇王树下。或者说,它意在指明值得说法的地点与时间。因为世尊不会在不适当的地点或不适当的时间说法。诸如“婆醯耶,此时尚非时”(《优陀那》10)等经文,便是此处的佐证。其中的“kho”只是用作语助词。所谓“世尊”(bhagavā),是出于世间的敬重。“比丘们”(bhikkhū)则指那些适合听法之人。此外在此处,应依“所谓比丘,即是乞士;随顺乞食之行,故称比丘”(《波罗夷》45)等释词方式来理解词义。“呼唤”(āmantayī)的意思是称呼、发言、唤醒,这里是“招呼”的含义。但在其他语境下,也作“告知”解,例如:“诸比丘,我告知你们,我宣示你们。”也作“召请”解,例如:“来,比丘,你以我语去唤舍利弗来。”(《增支部》9.11)。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti desakālaparidīpanaṃ. Tañhi yaṃ samayaṃ viharati, tatra samaye. Yasmiñca sālarājamūle viharati, tatra sālarājamūleti dīpeti. Bhāsitabbayutte vā desakāle dīpeti. Na hi bhagavā ayutte dese kāle vā dhammaṃ bhāsati. ‘‘Akālo kho tāva bāhiyā’’ti (udā. 10) ādicettha sādhakaṃ. Khoti padapūraṇamatte avadhāraṇe ādikālatthe vā nipāto. Bhagavāti lokagarudīpanaṃ. Bhikkhūti kathāsavanayuttapuggalavacanaṃ. Apicettha, ‘‘bhikkhakoti bhikkhu, bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhū’’tiādinā (pārā. 45) nayena vacanattho veditabbo. Āmantesīti ālapi abhāsi sambodhesīti ayamettha attho. Aññatra pana ñāpanepi hoti. Yathāha ‘‘āmantayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave’’ti. Pakkosanepi. Yathāha ‘‘ehi tvaṃ bhikkhu mama vacanena sāriputtaṃ āmantehī’’ti (a. ni. 9.11).
“比丘们”是表示呼唤的方式。此词是基于他们成就了乞食惯行等功德而说的。据声明学者们所认为,比丘或是具备乞食惯行功德者,或是具备乞食法性功德者,或是善于乞食的功德者。世尊通过这个表明他们具备乞食惯行等功德的称呼,指出了他们所过的是下劣与殊胜之人皆所依止的生活,以此来调伏掉举与沮丧的心态。而且,“比丘们”这一称呼,是以柔和的目光、出于悲心而最先流出,令那些比丘面向自己;同时,这个表明将要说法的称呼,也令他们生起听法的意愿;并且,以此唤醒的意义,促使他们好好地听闻与作意。因为佛陀教法的成就,系于好好地听闻与作意。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhavoti āmantanākāradīpanaṃ. Tañca bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhattā vuttaṃ. Bhikkhanasīlatāguṇayuttopi hi bhikkhu bhikkhanadhammatāguṇayuttopi. Bhikkhane sādhukāritāguṇayuttopīti saddavidū maññanti. Tena ca nesaṃ bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhena vacanena hīnādhikajanasevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatadīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti. Bhikkhavoti iminā ca karuṇāvipphārasommahadayanayananipātapubbaṅgamena vacanena te attano mukhābhimukhe karoti. Teneva ca kathetukamyatādīpakena vacanena nesaṃ sotukamyataṃ janeti. Teneva ca sambodhanaṭṭhena sādhukaṃ savanamanasikārepi ne niyojeti. Sādhukasavanamanasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampatti.
若问:在诸天与人皆在场时,为何只呼唤比丘?答:因为他们是上首、最殊胜、最亲近、常随侍者。世尊的说法虽为一切大众所共有,然而在大众中,比丘是上首,因为他们最先出现;最殊胜,因为他们从出家开始,便随学导师之行,并领受全部教法;最亲近,因为在座中离导师最近;是常随侍者,因为他们经常在导师身边活动。而且,他们是堪受说法的法器,能依所教而修行。特别而言,这里的说法是针对某些特定的比丘,所以只呼唤他们。显示巴利原文
Aparesupi devamanussesu vijjamānesu kasmā bhikkhūyeva āmantesīti ce. Jeṭṭhaseṭṭhāsannasadāsannihitabhāvato. Sabbaparisasādhāraṇā hi bhagavato dhammadesanā. Parisāya ca jeṭṭhā bhikkhū, paṭhamuppannattā. Seṭṭhā, anagāriyabhāvaṃ ādiṃ katvā satthucariyānuvidhāyakattā sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā ca. Āsannā, tattha nisinnesu satthusantikattā. Sadāsannihitā, satthusantikāvacarattāti. Apica te dhammadesanāya bhājanaṃ, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattisabbhāvato. Visesato ca ekacce bhikkhūyeva sandhāya ayaṃ desanātipi te eva āmantesi.
于此,可能会生起这样的疑问:世尊说法时,为何先招呼比丘们,而不直接说法呢?这是为了唤起他们的注意。因为比丘们纵使心中想着其他事、心意散乱,或者正在观察法、思惟业处而坐,若不先招呼便说法,他们可能无法分辨:“这个开示为何而说、以何为缘而说、因何事而说”,或者可能错误地接受,或者根本不接受。因此,为了唤起他们的注意,世尊先招呼,而后再说法。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – kimatthaṃ pana bhagavā dhammaṃ desento paṭhamaṃ bhikkhū āmantesi, na dhammameva desetīti. Satijananatthaṃ. Bhikkhū hi aññaṃ cintentāpi vikkhittacittāpi dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāpi kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontāpi nisinnā honti, te anāmantetvā dhamme desiyamāne – ‘‘ayaṃ desanā kinnidānā kiṃpaccayā katamāya aṭṭhuppattiyā desitā’’ti sallakkhetuṃ asakkontā duggahitaṃ vā gaṇheyyuṃ, na vā gaṇheyyuṃ. Tena nesaṃ satijananatthaṃ bhagavā paṭhamaṃ āmantetvā pacchā dhammaṃ deseti.
“尊者”(Bhadante)既是敬称,也是对导师的回应之词。此处,世尊说“诸比丘”时,是在对诸比丘而唤;诸比丘说“尊者”时,则是对世尊的回应。同样,世尊唤“诸比丘”,他们则回应“尊者”。“诸比丘”是世尊令他们作答,“尊者”乃是他们所给的回答。那些比丘,正是世尊所唤的对象。“他们回应世尊”,意为他们回应了世尊的呼唤,即面对世尊而谛听、承受、领解。“世尊这样说”,是说世尊宣说了如今所诵出的这整部经典。显示巴利原文
Bhadanteti gāravavacanametaṃ, satthuno paṭivacanadānaṃ vā, apicettha bhikkhavoti vadamāno bhagavā te bhikkhū ālapati. Bhadanteti vadamānā te bhagavantaṃ paccālapanti. Tathā bhikkhavoti bhagavā ābhāsati. Bhadanteti te paccābhāsanti. Bhikkhavoti paṭivacanaṃ dāpeti, bhadanteti paṭivacanaṃ denti. Te bhikkhūti ye bhagavā āmantesi. Bhagavato paccassosunti bhagavato āmantanaṃ paṭiassosuṃ, abhimukhā hutvā suṇiṃsu sampaṭicchiṃsu paṭiggahesunti attho. Bhagavā etadavocāti bhagavā etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ avoca.
至此,阿难尊者所安立的序分,可谓是为令顺易趋入这部义理与文句圆满、彰显佛陀教法深睿智慧的经典而作。犹如为了便利涉入那盛开红莲与青莲、水净甘美的莲池,所铺设的平整洁白石板、如散落珍珠般铺满白沙、围以齐整栏楯与精美墙垣的渡口;又如同为了便登那座仿佛直抵星宿般高巍的殊妙宫殿,而累砌的阶道,其象牙覆面平滑柔软,金藤盘绕,众宝光芒交相辉映,璀璨夺目;又宛若为了通达那处处传出金镯、脚环相扣之声,杂以言语、笑声与甜美话音,家人往来出入,具大自在与资财庄严的宅邸,而安立的大门,其门闩宽厚坚固,由金、银、宝石、珍珠、珊瑚等流溢的光芒所照耀。此序分以说法之时、说法之处、说法之主、与会之众及说法因缘而为庄严。其释义已周全。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca yaṃ āyasmatā ānandena kamalakuvalayujjalavimalasādurasasalilāya pokkharaṇiyā sukhāvataraṇatthaṃ nimmalasilātalaracanavilāsasobhitaratanasopānaṃ vippakiṇṇamuttātalasadisavālikākiṇṇapaṇḍarabhūmibhāgaṃ titthaṃ viya suvibhattabhittivicitravedikāparikkhittassa nakkhattapathaṃ phusitukāmatāya viya, vijambhitasamussayassa pāsādavarassa sukhārohaṇatthaṃ dantamaya-saṇhamuduphalaka-kañcanalatāvinaddha- maṇigaṇappabhāsamudayujjalasobhaṃ sopānaṃ viya, suvaṇṇavalayānūpurādisaṅghaṭṭanasaddasammissitakathitahasitamadhurassaragehajanavicaritassa uḷāraissariyavibhavasobhitassa mahāgharassa sukhappavesanatthaṃ suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimuttāpavāḷādijutivissaravijjotita-suppatiṭṭhitavisāladvārabāhaṃ mahādvāraṃ viya ca atthabyañjanasampannassa buddhānaṃ desanāñāṇagambhīrabhāvasaṃsūcakassa imassa suttassa sukhāvagāhaṇatthaṃ kāladesadesakavatthuparisāpadesapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ, tassa atthavaṇṇanā samattā.
经的安立释显示巴利原文
Suttanikkhepavaṇṇanā
至此,世尊以“诸比丘,我为汝等宣说一切法的根本总持”等语所提出的这部经,解释的时机已至。然而,此经的解释,须待审察经典的安立方得分明,因此,我们先来审察经典的安立。经典安立有四种:由自心所愿、由他心所愿、随之所问、随缘而生。显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo’’tiādinā nayena bhagavatā nikkhittassa suttassa vaṇṇanāya okāso anuppatto. Sā panesā suttavaṇṇanā yasmā suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicārayissāma. Cattāro hi suttanikkhepā attajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo pucchāvasiko aṭṭhuppattikoti.
“由自意”:指那些世尊并未受人请求,纯粹出于自己的心意而说出的经典。比如《希望经》《衣经》《大念处经》《大六处分别经》《圣种经》,以及《正勤经》的摄颂、《神足、根、力、觉支、道支经》的摄颂等。这些经典的出处就称为“由自意”。显示巴利原文
Tattha yāni suttāni bhagavā parehi anajjhiṭṭho kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva kathesi. Seyyathidaṃ, ākaṅkheyyasuttaṃ, vatthasuttaṃ, mahāsatipaṭṭhānasuttaṃ, mahāsaḷāyatanavibhaṅgasuttaṃ, ariyavaṃsasuttaṃ, sammappadhānasuttantahārako, iddhipādaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgasuttantahārakoti evamādīni. Tesaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
“由他意”:指那些世尊观察了别人的意乐、堪忍力、心态、志向与觉悟的可能性之后,随顺对方的心意而说出的经典。例如,世尊思惟:“罗睺罗那些令解脱成熟的法已经圆满,我现在应进一步教导罗睺罗,令他灭尽诸漏”(《相应部》4.121),这样观察后,便说了《小罗睺罗教诫经》《大罗睺罗教诫经》《转法轮经》《界分别经》等。这些经典的出处就称为“由他意”。显示巴利原文
Yāni pana ‘‘paripakkā kho rāhulassa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, yaṃnūnāhaṃ rāhulaṃ uttari āsavānaṃ khaye vineyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.121) evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ khantiṃ manaṃ abhinīhāraṃ bujjhanabhāvañca avekkhitvā parajjhāsayavasena kathitāni. Seyyathidaṃ, cūḷarāhulovādasuttaṃ, mahārāhulovādasuttaṃ, dhammacakkappavattanaṃ, dhātuvibhaṅgasuttanti evamādīni. Tesaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
“由请问”:指有的人来到世尊面前,诸如四众弟子、四种种姓,以及龙、金翅鸟、乾闼婆、阿修罗、夜叉、四大王天、三十三天乃至大梵天等天人,他们请问:“尊者,人们所说的‘觉支、觉支’是什么?”“尊者,人们所说的‘盖、盖’是什么?”“尊者,这些就是五取蕴吗?”“对于人来说,什么是最上的财富?”(《经集》183)等种种问题。世尊被这样请问之后,为其开示了《觉支相应》等经典,还有《天相应》《魔相应》《梵相应》《帝释问》《小吠陀罗》《大吠陀罗》《沙门果》《旷野》《针毛夜叉》《粗毛》等经典。这些经典的出处就称为“由请问”。显示巴利原文
Bhagavantaṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā catasso parisā cattāro vaṇṇā nāgā supaṇṇā gandhabbā asurā yakkhā mahārājāno tāvatiṃsādayo devā mahābrahmāti evamādayo ‘‘bojjhaṅgā bojjhaṅgā’’ti, bhante, vuccanti. ‘‘Nīvaraṇā nīvaraṇā’’ti, bhante, vuccanti. Ime nu kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā. ‘‘Kiṃ sūdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’ntiādinā (su. ni. 183) nayena pañhaṃ pucchanti. Evaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā yāni kathitāni bojjhaṅgasaṃyuttādīni. Yāni vā panaññānipi devatāsaṃyutta-mārasaṃyutta-brahmasaṃyutta-sakkapañha-cūḷavedalla-mahāvedalla-sāmaññaphala- āḷavaka-sūciloma-kharalomasuttādīni, tesaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo.
“由缘事”:指那些依于所发生的某一因缘而宣说的经典。例如《法嗣经》《小狮子吼》《月喻》《子肉喻》《木堆喻》《火堆喻》《泡沫喻》《波利质多罗树喻》等。这些经典的出处即称为“由缘事”。显示巴利原文
Yāni panetāni uppannaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca kathitāni. Seyyathidaṃ, dhammadāyādaṃ cūḷasīhanādaṃ candūpamaṃ puttamaṃsūpamaṃ dārukkhandhūpamaṃ aggikkhandhūpamaṃ pheṇapiṇḍūpamaṃ pāricchattakūpamanti evamādīni. Tesaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo.
在这四种经的出处中,这部经正是属于“由缘事”的出处。因为世尊是依某一件事而说出这部经的。依哪一件事呢?依于学习教法而生起的慢心。据说,有五百位婆罗门,精通三部吠陀,后来他们听闻了世尊的说法,看到了感官欲乐的过患与出离的功德,便在世尊座下出家。不久,他们便学习掌握了全部的佛语,于是依凭自己对教理的学习而生起了慢心,心想:“不管世尊说什么,我们很快就能明白。因为世尊所说的,无非就是三种文义、四类句法、七种语法变化,除此之外再没有别的了。这样说来,对我们而言,根本没有任何难解之句。”他们对世尊不恭敬了,从那以后,不再常常去承事世尊,也不常去听法。世尊了知他们这种心念后,心中明白:“这些人若不破除这个慢心障碍,是绝不可能证悟道或果的。”于是,善于说法的世尊为了摧破他们的慢心,便以他们依于教理之学而生的慢心为缘起,宣说了这部《一切法根本总持》。显示巴利原文
Evamimesu catūsu nikkhepesu imassa suttassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo. Aṭṭhuppattiyañhi idaṃ bhagavatā nikkhittaṃ. Katarāya aṭṭhuppattiyā? Pariyattiṃ nissāya uppanne māne. Pañcasatā kira brāhmaṇā tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū aparabhāge bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ sutvā kāmesu ādīnavaṃ nekkhamme ca ānisaṃsaṃ sampassamānā bhagavato santike pabbajitvā nacirasseva sabbaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā pariyattiṃ nissāya mānaṃ uppādesuṃ ‘‘yaṃ yaṃ bhagavā katheti, taṃ taṃ mayaṃ khippameva jānāma, bhagavā hi tīṇi liṅgāni cattāri padāni satta vibhattiyo muñcitvā na kiñci katheti, evaṃ kathite ca amhākaṃ gaṇṭhipadaṃ nāma natthī’’ti. Te bhagavati agāravā hutvā tato paṭṭhāya bhagavato upaṭṭhānampi dhammassavanampi abhiṇhaṃ na gacchanti. Bhagavā tesaṃ taṃ cittacāraṃ ñatvā ‘‘abhabbā ime imaṃ mānakhilaṃ anupahacca maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā sacchikātu’’nti tesaṃ sutapariyattiṃ nissāya uppannaṃ mānaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā desanākusalo bhagavā mānabhañjanatthaṃ sabbadhammamūlapariyāyanti desanaṃ ārabhi.
“一切法根本总持”(sabbadhammamūlapariyāya)即一切法的根本解说。其中“一切”意为无余、全部。这个“一切”一词,正是表示无余的意思,无论用在哪里,都显示与那里相关联的全部事物毫无遗漏。例如:“一切色无常,一切受无常”“属于自身所有的诸法”等。而“法”一词,则出现在教理、真理、定、慧、本性、自性、空、福德、犯戒、所应知等多种场合。如:“比丘学习法,也就是经、应颂……”(《增支部》5.73)中的“法”,是指教理;“见法者、知法者”(《长部》1.299)中的“法”,是指真理;“这般的那些世尊是法”等处,是指定。显示巴利原文
Tattha sabbadhammamūlapariyāyanti sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ mūlapariyāyaṃ. Sabbesanti anavasesānaṃ. Anavasesavācako hi ayaṃ sabba-saddo. So yena yena sambandhaṃ gacchati, tassa tassa anavasesataṃ dīpeti. Yathā, ‘‘sabbaṃ rūpaṃ aniccaṃ sabbā vedanā aniccā sabbasakkāyapariyāpannesu dhammesū’’ti. Dhamma-saddo panāyaṃ pariyatti-sacca-samādhi-paññā-pakati-sabhāvasuññatā-puññāpatti-ñeyyādīsu dissati. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇāti suttaṃ geyya’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) hi dhammasaddo pariyattiyaṃ vattati. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammo viditadhammo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.299) saccesu. ‘‘Evaṃ dhammā te bhagavanto’’tiādīsu samādhimhi.
具此四法者,猴王,正如你一般;
谛、法、坚忍与布施——见此法者,即超越生死。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yassete caturo dhammā, vānarinda yathā tava; Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, diṭṭhaṃ so ativattatī’’ti. –
在“Ādīsu”等(本生经 1.1.57)中,此词用以表示“慧”。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (jā. 1.1.57) paññāya.
在“生法、老法,又是死法者”等句中,「法」指本性。在“善法”(《法集论·论母》)等句中,「法」指自性。在“然而,于彼时,有其法”(《法集论》121)等句中,「法」指空。在“善行之法带来安乐”(《本生》1.10.102)等句中,「法」指福德。在“二不定法”(《波罗夷》443)等句中,「法」指犯戒。在“一切法之一切相状现于世尊佛陀的智门之前”等句中,「法」指所应知。而在此处,「法」是指自性。这里的词义是:因为它能持守自己的特征,所以称为「法」。「根」字的含义已广为解说。而在当前语境中,它应被看作“不共因”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Jātidhammā jarādhammā, atho maraṇadhammino’’tiādīsu pakatiyaṃ. ‘‘Kusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1.tikamātikā) sabhāve. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kho pana samaye dhammā hontī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 121) suññatāyaṃ. ‘‘Dhammo suciṇṇo sukhamāvahātī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.10.102) puññe. ‘‘Dve aniyatā dhammā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 443) āpattiyaṃ. ‘‘Sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ āgacchantī’’tiādīsu ñeyye. Idha panāyaṃ sabhāve vattati. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Mūla-saddo vitthārito eva. Idha panāyaṃ asādhāraṇahetumhi daṭṭhabbo.
「说示」一词,在“将此记持为蜜丸之说示”(《中部》1.205)等句中,用于教说。在“婆罗门!确实有一种说示,依此说示,如理说我者会说沙门乔达摩是无业论者”(《波罗夷》3)等句中,用于因。在“阿难!今日轮到谁去教诫比丘尼?”(《中部》3.398)等句中,用于机会。而在此处,它既用于因,也用于教说。因此,“一切法根本说示”应理解为:指一切法的不共因——即那个称为因的东西;或者指关于一切法的因的教说。又因为这部经是需要深入领会其义的,所以不应认为四地的自性法就是一切法。此处的意趣是:包含在身见范围内的三地之法,才应当被毫无遗漏地了知。显示巴利原文
Pariyāyasaddo ‘‘madhupiṇḍikapariyāyoti naṃ dhārehī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) desanāyaṃ vattati. ‘‘Atthi khvesa brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo, yena maṃ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya akiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo’’tiādīsu (pārā. 3) kāraṇe. ‘‘Kassa nu kho, ānanda, ajja pariyāyo bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.398) vāre. Idha pana kāraṇepi desanāyampi vattati. Tasmā ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ asādhāraṇahetusaññitaṃ kāraṇanti vā sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ kāraṇadesananti vā evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo. Neyyatthattā cassa suttassa, na catubhūmakāpi sabhāvadhammā sabbadhammāti veditabbā. Sakkāyapariyāpannā pana tebhūmakā dhammāva anavasesato veditabbā, ayamettha adhippāyoti.
「vo」这个词,可见于自指、宾格、工具格、与格、属格以及仅作填充词的用法中。例如,在“阿那律,你们是否和合、融洽?”(《中部》1.326)中,表示自指;在“去吧,比丘们!我遣散你们”(《中部》2.157)中,表示宾格;在“你们不应住在我附近”(《中部》2.157)中,表示工具格;在“比丘们!我将为你们开示林野之说示”(《中部》1.190)中,表示与格;在“舍利弗,你们的一切善说”(《中部》1.345)中,表示属格;在“诸位圣者,凡是你们清净的身业”(《中部》1.35)中,仅仅是填充词。而在此处,应视为与格。显示巴利原文
Voti ayaṃ vo-saddo paccattaupayogakaraṇasampadānasāmivacanapadapūraṇesu dissati. ‘‘Kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.326) hi paccatte dissati. ‘‘Gacchatha, bhikkhave, paṇāmemi vo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) upayoge. ‘‘Na vo mama santike vatthabba’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) karaṇe. ‘‘Vanapatthapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.190) sampadāne. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsita’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) sāmivacane. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35) padapūraṇamatte. Idha panāyaṃ sampadāne daṭṭhabbo.
“比丘们”一语,是依于应诺而对现前比丘众的再次称呼。“我将开示”是宣说法的允诺。此句意为:“比丘们!我将为你们开示一切法的根本因”,或者,依第二种方式,“我将为你们开示因的教说”。“你们谛听之”即:我正在宣说的那个意义、那个因、那个教说,你们应当仔细听闻。“善作意之”:此处“善”与“善哉”同义。而“善哉”一词,可用于祈请、接受、随喜赞叹、美好、坚固等场合。如在“尊者!唯愿世尊为我略说法要”(《相应部》4.95)等处,是表示祈请;在“那位比丘欢喜、随喜世尊所说后,言:‘善哉!尊者’”(《中部》3.86)等处,是表示接受;在“善哉!善哉!舍利弗”(《长部》3.349)等处,是表示随喜赞叹。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhaveti patissavena abhimukhībhūtānaṃ punālapanaṃ. Desessāmīti desanāpaṭijānanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, bhikkhave, sabbadhammānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ tumhākaṃ desessāmi, dutiyena nayena kāraṇadesanaṃ tumhākaṃ desessāmīti. Taṃ suṇāthāti tamatthaṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ taṃ desanaṃ mayā vuccamānaṃ suṇātha. Sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti ettha pana sādhukaṃ sādhūti ekatthametaṃ. Ayañca sādhu saddo āyācanasampaṭicchanasampahaṃsanasundaradaḷhīkammādīsu dissati. ‘‘Sādhu me bhante bhagavā, saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.95) hi āyācane dissati. ‘‘Sādhu, bhanteti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) sampaṭicchane. ‘‘Sādhu, sādhu sāriputtā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.349) sampahaṃsane.
好乐正法的国王是善,具足智慧的人是善;
不欺骗朋友是善,不作恶是安乐。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sādhu dhammarucī rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamaddubbho, pāpassākaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti.
在《本生经》(2.18.101)等处,“sādhu”表示“美好”。而在“那么,婆罗门,请善听闻”(《增支部》5.192)这样的句中,同一个“sādhuka”既可表示“加强语气”,也可表示“命令”。此处亦然,这个词应理解为兼具加强与命令的意味。它亦可用于“美好”之义。从加强义来说,即“请听闻此坚固之法,善加执持、掌握”;从命令义来说,即“依我教导而听”;从美好义来说,即“请听闻此善妙、殊胜之法”——经文之义即如此开显。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (jā. 2.18.101) sundare. ‘‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, sādhukaṃ suṇāhī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.192) sādhukasaddoyeva daḷhīkamme, āṇattiyantipi vuccati. Idhāpi ayaṃ ettheva daḷhīkamme ca āṇattiyañca attho veditabbo. Sundaratthepi vattati. Daḷhīkaraṇatthena hi daḷhamimaṃ dhammaṃ suṇātha suggahitaṃ gaṇhantā. Āṇattiatthena mama āṇattiyā suṇātha. Sundaratthena sundaramimaṃ bhaddakaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāthāti evaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti.
“善作意”指转向、作意,即:心不散乱地倾听,用心投入。此处,“请聆听那(法)”一句为遮止耳根的散乱;“请善作意”则通过加强作意的指令遮止意根的散乱。其中,前一句旨在避免执取文句的颠倒,后一句旨在避免执取义理的颠倒。前一句策励听闻法,后一句策励对所闻法进行忆持、审察等。前一句亦表明“此法文句完备,故应听闻”;后一句则表明“此法深具义理,故应作意”。或者,将“善”字贯通前后二句:因法于教说甚深、于法义甚深,故“请善聆听”;因法于义理甚深、于证悟甚深,故“请善作意”——应以此理解二句的关联。显示巴利原文
Manasikarothāti āvajjetha, samannāharathāti attho, avikkhittacittā hutvā nisāmetha citte karothāti adhippāyo. Idānettha taṃ suṇāthāti sotindriyavikkhepavāraṇametaṃ. Sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti manasikāre daḷhīkammaniyojanena manindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ. Purimañcettha byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ. Purimena ca dhammassavane niyojeti, pacchimena sutānaṃ dhammānaṃ dhāraṇūpaparikkhādīsu. Purimena ca sabyañjano ayaṃ dhammo, tasmā savanīyoti dīpeti. Pacchimena sāttho, tasmā manasi kātabboti. Sādhukapadaṃ vā ubhayapadehi yojetvā yasmā ayaṃ dhammo dhammagambhīro desanāgambhīro ca, tasmā suṇātha sādhukaṃ, yasmā atthagambhīro paṭivedhagambhīro ca, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
“我将说”意为“我将开示”。在“请聆听那(法)”中所承诺的开示,并非仅以简略的方式说,而是亦将详加解说——这便是“我将说”所表达之义。因此,这些词语正是表示简略说与详细说的用语。正如鹏耆舍长老所说:显示巴利原文
Bhāsissāmīti desessāmi. ‘‘Taṃ suṇāthā’’ti ettha paṭiññātaṃ desanaṃ na saṃkhittatova desessāmi, apica kho vitthāratopi naṃ bhāsissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti, saṅkhepavitthāravācakāni hi etāni padāni. Yathāha vaṅgīsatthero –
他以简略而开示,亦以详尽而宣说;
其音声犹如沙鹆鸟,展现无碍辩才。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saṃkhittenapi deseti, vitthārenapi bhāsati; Sāḷikāyiva nigghoso, paṭibhānaṃ udīrayī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.214);
如此闻说后,那些比丘心生殷切,回应道:“是的,世尊!”——他们如此回应世尊,即已领受导师之教。于是,世尊便对他们开示了以“于此,诸比丘”为起始的整部经典。其中,“于此”是一处所指陈的虚词。该词在不同语境下,有时指世间,例如:“如来出现于此世间”(《长部》1.190);有时指教法,例如:“诸比丘,即于此教法中,有沙门,亦于此教法中有第二沙门”(《增支部》4.241);有时指场所,例如:……显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte ussāhajātā hutvā evaṃ bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ satthu vacanaṃ sampaṭicchiṃsu, paṭiggahesunti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha nesaṃ bhagavā etadavoca etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ idha bhikkhavotiādikaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ avoca. Tattha idhāti desāpadese nipāto. Svāyaṃ katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.190). Katthaci sāsanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (a. ni. 4.241). Katthaci okāsaṃ. Yathāha –
我今安住于此地,已证天神之身;
而今又重获新生,贤者,当如是了知。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato; Punarāyu ca me laddho, evaṃ jānāhi mārisā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.369);
有些处仅作足句之用。如经中所说:‘诸比丘,于此,我食已、饱满而回绝。’(《中部》1.30)但此处应解为是依‘世间’而宣说。显示巴利原文
Katthaci padapūraṇamattameva. Yathāha ‘‘idhāhaṃ – bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’ti (ma. ni. 1.30). Idha pana lokaṃ upādāya vuttoti veditabbo.
2 “比丘们”这一呼唤,是世尊为依先前所许诺的那样开示法,而再次招呼比丘们。将这两部分合在一起,便成“比丘们,于此世间”之义。至于“未闻的凡夫”,这里的“未闻”应理解为:既缺乏教法的了知,也缺乏证得的了知。何以故?若对蕴、界、处、谛、缘起、念处等法,未依学习、提问而作抉择,以断除妄执,则没有教法的了知;对依修行所应证得的法,尚未证得,则没有证得的了知。正是由于缺少教法的了知与证得的了知,故称为“未闻”。这种……显示巴利原文
2.Bhikkhaveti yathāpaṭiññātaṃ desanaṃ desetuṃ puna bhikkhū ālapati. Ubhayenāpi, bhikkhave, imasmiṃ loketi vuttaṃ hoti. Assutavā puthujjanoti ettha pana āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo assutavā iti. Yassa hi khandhadhātuāyatanasaccapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānādīsu uggahaparipucchāvinicchayarahitattā maññanāpaṭisedhako neva āgamo, paṭipattiyā adhigantabbassa anadhigatattā neva adhigamo atthi. So āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo assutavā iti. Svāyaṃ –
或者,此“人群”因被包含在众多凡夫之中,故称为凡夫。
显示巴利原文 Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti.
他确是由于产生种种不同烦恼等多种原因而成为凡夫。正如经中所说:‘因产生种种烦恼,所以称为凡夫;因具有众多未被破坏的身见,所以称为凡夫;因仰望众多导师的面容,所以称为凡夫;因未脱离一切诸趣,所以称为凡夫;因造作种种不同的行,所以称为凡夫;因被种种瀑流冲走,所以称为凡夫;因被种种热恼所苦,所以称为凡夫;因被种种燃烧焚烧,所以称为凡夫;因对五种欲功德染着、贪求、耽着、沉醉、深陷、黏着、附着、系缚,所以称为凡夫;因被五盖覆盖、遮蔽、笼罩、封闭、隐藏、掩盖,所以称为凡夫。’(《大义释》51)或者,因被包含在那不可计数、背向圣法、行持卑劣法的众生当中,所以称为凡夫。又或者,凡夫是与那些具足戒、闻等功德的圣者们完全分离、毫不相干的众多人群,因此称为凡夫。显示巴利原文
So hi puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Yathāha – puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā, puthu avihatasakkāyadiṭṭhikāti puthujjanā, puthu satthārānaṃ mukhamullokikāti puthujjanā, puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti puthujjanā, puthu nānābhisaṅkhāre abhisaṅkharontīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāoghehi vuyhantīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāsantāpehi santappantīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāpariḷāhehi paridayhantīti puthujjanā, puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattā giddhā gadhitā mucchitā ajjhosannā laggā lagitā palibuddhāti puthujjanā, puthu pañcahi nīvaraṇehi āvuṭā nivutā ovutā pihitā paṭicchannā paṭikujjitāti puthujjanāti (mahāni. 51). Puthūnaṃ vā gaṇanapathamatītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjanā. Puthu vā ayaṃ, visuṃyeva saṅkhaṃ gato, visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi janotipi puthujjano. Evametehi ‘‘assutavā puthujjano’’ti dvīhipi padehi yete –
佛陀——日种姓者,曾说有两种凡夫:
一种是盲凡夫,一种是善凡夫。
显示巴利原文 Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjanoti. –
应知此二种凡夫中,所说实指盲凡夫。于‘不见诸圣’等句中,‘圣者’谓:因已远离烦恼,故称圣;因不趣不善处,行于善道,且为含天神在内之世间所应供养,故称佛陀、独觉佛及如来弟子为圣者;此处或单指佛陀为圣者。如经所说:‘比丘们,于含天世间……如来乃称为圣。’此中所言‘善士’,当知指独觉佛与如来弟子。他们具足出世间功德,为贤善之人,故称善士。或可总括——佛陀、独觉佛、如来弟子——皆用此二称谓。实则佛陀既是圣者亦是善士,独觉佛及如来弟子亦复如是。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Dve puthujjanā vuttā. Tesu andhaputhujjano vutto hotīti veditabbo. Ariyānaṃ adassāvītiādīsu ariyāti ārakattā kilesehi, anaye nairiyanato, aye iriyanato, sadevakena ca lokena araṇīyato buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca buddhasāvakā ca vuccanti, buddhā eva vā idha ariyā. Yathāha ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… tathāgato ariyoti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1098). Sappurisāti ettha pana paccekabuddhā tathāgatasāvakā ca ‘‘sappurisā’’ti veditabbā. Te hi lokuttaraguṇayogena sobhanā purisāti sappurisā. Sabbeva vā ete dvedhāpi vuttā. Buddhāpi hi ariyā ca sappurisā ca, paccekabuddhā buddhasāvakāpi. Yathāha –
实是知恩、感恩的智者,
是善友与忠实的伴侣;
于受苦者,恭敬履行应作之事,
如此之人,即被称为善士。”(《本生经》)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro, Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hoti; Dukhitassa sakkacca karoti kiccaṃ, Tathāvidhaṃ sappurisaṃ vadantī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
“善友与忠实的同伴”——仅此便称为佛弟子;而知恩等功德,则是独觉佛与佛陀所具备的。此外,若有人并无见圣者的习性,也不乐于见圣者,当知这便是“不见圣者”。“不见”有两种:以眼不见和以智不见,此处意指以智不见。因为仅凭肉眼或天眼见到圣者,纵使见到也等同未见。这类眼只能摄取色相,无法以圣者的本质为所缘。狗、豺狼等也能以眼见到圣者,但并不因此成为见圣者之人。显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotīti ettāvatā hi buddhasāvako vutto, kataññutādīhi paccekabuddhā buddhāti. Idāni yo tesaṃ ariyānaṃ adassanasīlo, na ca dassane sādhukārī, so ariyānaṃ adassāvīti veditabbo. So ca cakkhunā adassāvī ñāṇena adassāvīti duvidho, tesu ñāṇena adassāvī idha adhippeto. Maṃsacakkhunā hi dibbacakkhunā vā ariyā diṭṭhāpi adiṭṭhāva honti. Tesaṃ cakkhūnaṃ vaṇṇamattaggahaṇato, na ariyabhāvagocarato. Soṇasiṅgālādayopi ca cakkhunā ariye passanti. Na ca te ariyānaṃ dassāvino.
这则本生故事如下:据说,在质多山,有一位漏尽者长老的侍者,是位年长的出家人。一天,他随长老一同托钵后,拿着长老的衣钵从后面跟上来,问长老:“尊者,所谓的圣者是什么样子呢?”长老回答:“在此,有些人即便年迈,持着圣者的衣钵,伴行随侍、履行义务,却仍不识圣者。朋友,圣者就是这般难识啊。”虽然长老这样说,他仍未能了悟。因此,以眼见并非真见;以慧见才是真见。正如世尊所说:“婆迦梨,见此腐臭之身有何益?婆迦梨,见法者即见我。”(《相应部》3.87)因此,纵然以眼得见,若不以慧观见诸圣者所见之无常等相,不证得诸圣者所证悟之法,即因未见成圣之诸法及圣性故,当知此名为“不见圣者”。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ vatthu – cittalapabbatavāsino kira khīṇāsavattherassa upaṭṭhāko vuḍḍhapabbajito ekadivasaṃ therena saddhiṃ piṇḍāya caritvā therassa pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā piṭṭhito āgacchanto theraṃ pucchi ‘‘ariyā nāma, bhante, kīdisā’’ti. Thero āha ‘‘idhekacco mahallako ariyānaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vattapaṭipattiṃ katvā sahacarantopi neva ariye jānāti, evaṃ dujjānā, āvuso, ariyā’’ti. Evaṃ vuttepi so neva aññāsi. Tasmā na cakkhunā dassanaṃ dassanaṃ, ñāṇena dassanameva dassanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘kiṃ te, vakkali, iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena, yo kho, vakkali , dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.87). Tasmā cakkhunā passantopi ñāṇena ariyehi diṭṭhaṃ aniccādilakkhaṇaṃ apassanto ariyādhigatañca dhammaṃ anadhigacchanto ariyakaradhammānaṃ ariyabhāvassa ca adiṭṭhattā ‘‘ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti veditabbo.
“对圣法不通晓”:即于念处等种种圣法不精通。而“在圣法中未调伏”——在此,显示巴利原文
Ariyadhammassa akovidoti satipaṭṭhānādibhede ariyadhamme akusalo. Ariyadhamme avinītoti ettha pana –
“律”有两种,而一一律中各有五种;
由于他不具备这一点,因此被称为“未调伏者”。
显示巴利原文 Duvidho vinayo nāma, ekamekettha pañcadhā; Abhāvato tassa ayaṃ, ‘‘avinīto’’ti vuccati.
律有防护律与断律两种。此两种律中,每一种又各分为五种。防护律有五种:戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护。断律有五种:彼分断、镇伏断、正断、止息断、出离断。显示巴利原文
Ayañhi saṃvaravinayo pahānavinayoti duvidho vinayo. Ettha ca duvidhepi vinaye ekameko vinayo pañcadhā bhijjati. Saṃvaravinayopi hi sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidho. Pahānavinayopi tadaṅgapahānaṃ vikkhambhanapahānaṃ samucchedapahānaṃ paṭippassaddhipahānaṃ nissaraṇapahānanti pañcavidho.
其中,“以此巴帝摩卡律仪,具足、圆满具足”(《分别论》511),此为戒防护。“守护眼根,于眼根上修防护”(《长部》1.213等),此为念防护。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto’’ti (vibha. 511) ayaṃ sīlasaṃvaro. ‘‘Rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) ayaṃ satisaṃvaro.
“阿逸多,”世尊说,“世间诸流,”
“念是对它们的阻碍;”
“我说,那便是诸流的抑制。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā) Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, Paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1041);
这便是智抑制。“能忍耐寒热”(《中部》1.23;《增支部》4.114;6.58),这是忍抑制。“不随顺已生起的欲寻”(《中部》1.26;《增支部》4.114;6.58),这是精进抑制。所有这一切抑制,由于各自所要抑制、所要调伏的身恶行等,以其抑制的作用而称为“抑制”,以其调伏的作用而称为“律”。如此,当知抑制律首先分为五种。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ñāṇasaṃvaro. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ khantisaṃvaro. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ vīriyasaṃvaro. Sabbopi cāyaṃ saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ vinetabbānañca kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato ‘‘saṃvaro’’, vinayanato ‘‘vinayo’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ tāva saṃvaravinayo pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo.
同样地,在名色分别等观智中,这些观智与所断的烦恼处于对立,犹如灯光与黑暗相对,每一种观智慧即断除对应的过患。具体而言:以名色分别断除有身见;以缘摄受断除无因见与非等因见;此后,以度疑清净断除疑惑;以思惟名色聚集断除“我、我所”的执取;以道非道智见清净断除于非道所生起的道想;以观见生起断除断见;以观见灭去断除常见;以观见怖畏断除对怖畏处的无怖想;以观见过患断除味想;以厌离观断除喜乐想;以欲解脱智断除不欲解脱;以舍智断除不舍;以随顺智断除与法住及涅槃相违的状态;以种姓智断除执取诸行之相。此即称为“彼分断”。显示巴利原文
Tathā yaṃ nāmarūpaparicchedādīsu vipassanāñāṇesu paṭipakkhabhāvato dīpālokeneva tamassa, tena tena vipassanāñāṇena tassa tassa anatthassa pahānaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīnaṃ, tasseva aparabhāgena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvassa, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhaye abhayasaññāya, ādīnavadassanena assādasaññāya, nibbidānupassanāya abhiratisaññāya, muccitukamyatāñāṇena amuccitukamyatāya, upekkhāñāṇena anupekkhāya, anulomena dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ nibbāne ca paṭilomabhāvassa, gotrabhunā saṅkhāranimittaggāhassa pahānaṃ, etaṃ tadaṅgapahānaṃnāma.
通过近行定与安止定等不同层次的定,在修习时能遮止那些盖障等法的生起,犹如以棍棒击碎水面浮藻一般,由此断除它们,这称为「镇伏断」。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattibhāvanivāraṇato ghaṭappahāreneva udakapiṭṭhe sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, etaṃ vikkhambhanapahānaṃ nāma.
由于四圣道的修习,证得各道者于各自心相续中,依《法集论》第277则等所说“为断除诸恶见……”的方法,令属于集的一群烦恼毕竟不再转起而被彻底断除,这称为「正断」。而在证果刹那,烦恼止息的状态,这称为「止息断」。已经出离一切有为法、断除一切有为法的涅槃,这称为「出离断」。所有这一切断,以舍弃之义而为“断”,以调伏之义而为“律”,故总称为「断律」。或者,由于各个断除烦恼者各自成就的律,也称「断律」。如此,应知断律有此五种。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato attano attano santāne ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhikassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattibhāvena pahānaṃ, idaṃ samucchedapahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ kilesānaṃ, etaṃ paṭippassaddhipahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pahīnasabbasaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ etaṃ nissaraṇapahānaṃ nāma. Sabbampi cetaṃ pahānaṃ yasmā cāgaṭṭhena pahānaṃ, vinayanaṭṭhena vinayo, tasmā ‘‘pahānavinayo’’ti vuccati. Taṃtaṃpahānavato vā tassa tassa vinayassa sambhavatopetaṃ ‘‘pahānavinayo’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ pahānavinayopi pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo.
如此,此律概略而言有两种,若加分别则有十种。由于这位无闻凡夫的防护(戒)已毁坏,且应断的烦恼未断,因此他并无此律。由于无律,他便被称为「未调御」。这个道理同样适用于‘不见善士’、‘不熟知善士法’、‘在善士法中未调御’。实际上,这些说法在意义上并无差别。正如经典所说:‘圣者即是善士,善士即是圣者。圣者法即是此善士法,此善士法即是圣者法。圣者律即是善士律,善士律即是圣者律。凡所谓圣者或善士,圣者法或善士法,圣者律或善士律,这些都是同义词,同一含义,相同、相等、同类,所指即为同一事物。’显示巴利原文
Evamayaṃ saṅkhepato duvidho, bhedato ca dasavidho vinayo bhinnasaṃvarattā pahātabbassa ca appahīnattā yasmā etassa assutavato puthujjanassa natthi, tasmā abhāvato tassa ayaṃ avinītoti vuccatīti. Esa nayo sappurisānaṃ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinītoti etthapi. Ninnānākaraṇañhi etaṃ atthato. Yathāha ‘‘yeva te ariyā, teva te sappurisā. Yeva te sappurisā, teva te ariyā. Yo eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo, so eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo. Yo eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo, so eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo. Yeva te ariyavinayā, teva te sappurisavinayā. Yeva te sappurisavinayā, teva te ariyavinayā. Ariyeti vā sappuriseti vā, ariyadhammeti vā sappurisadhammeti vā, ariyavinayeti vā sappurisavinayeti vā esese eke ekatthe same samabhāge tajjāte taññevā’’ti.
有人问:“然而世尊为什么说‘比丘们,我将为你们开示一切法的根本门’,却没有直接开示,反而这样开示凡夫:‘比丘们,在此,无闻凡夫不曾见到圣者……’呢?”这是为了以人作为所依的说法方式来阐明其中的含义。因为世尊的说法方式共有四种:以法为所依的说法、以法为所依而涉及人的说法、以人为所依而涉及人的说法、以人为所依的说法。从法和人这两个方面来区分,便有这四种说法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kasmā pana bhagavā sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’ti vatvā taṃ adesetvāva ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti evaṃ puthujjanaṃ niddisīti? Puggalādhiṭṭhānāya dhammadesanāya tamatthaṃ āvikātuṃ. Bhagavato hi dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā, dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanāti dhammapuggalavaseneva tāva catubbidhā desanā.
其中,诸如:“比丘们,有这三种受。哪三种?乐受、苦受、不苦不乐受。比丘们,这就是三种受。”像这样的说法,应知即是“以法为所依的说法”。“六界、这个人、六触处、十八意行、四所依。”像这样的说法,应知即是“以法为所依而涉及人的说法”。“比丘们,世间存在这三种人。哪三种?盲者、一眼者、二眼者。比丘们,什么样的人是盲人呢?”像这样的说法,应知即是“以人为所依而涉及人的说法”。“比丘们,什么是恶趣怖畏?比丘们,在此,有一类人这样思惟:‘身恶行在未来确实会有恶劣的果报。’……乃至……使自己保持清净。比丘们,这就称为恶趣怖畏。”像这样的说法,应知即是“以人为所依的说法”。显示巴利原文
Tattha, ‘‘tisso imā, bhikkhave, vedanā. Katamā tisso? Sukhā vedanā dukkhā vedanā adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, tisso vedanā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.250) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā veditabbā. ‘‘Cha dhātuyo ayaṃ putiso cha phassāyatano aṭṭhārasa manopavicāro caturādhiṭṭhāno’’ti (ma. ni. 3.343) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Tayome, bhikkhave, puggalā santo saṃvijjamānā lokasmiṃ. Katame tayo? Andho ekacakkhu dvicakkhu. Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo andho’’ti? (A. ni. 3.29) evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Katamañca, bhikkhave, duggatibhayaṃ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco iti paṭisañcikkhati, kāyaduccaritassa kho pāpako vipāko abhisamparāyaṃ…pe… suddhamattānaṃ pariharati. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, duggatibhaya’’nti (a. ni. 4.121) evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā.
在此,因为凡夫是对所缘未遍知的人,而此经所要阐述的一切法的根本——虚妄之想,正是以未遍知为根源,所以先指出凡夫,再以人为所依的说法来阐明那个含义。因此应知,世尊这样开示凡夫:“比丘们,在此,无闻凡夫不曾见到圣者……”显示巴利原文
Svāyaṃ idha yasmā puthujjano apariññātavatthuko, apariññāmūlikā ca idhādhippetānaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ mūlabhūtā maññanā hoti, tasmā puthujjanaṃ dassetvā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya tamatthaṃ āvikātuṃ, ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti evaṃ puthujjanaṃ niddisīti veditabbo.
像这样说明了凡夫之后,现在为了显示他在大地等事物中,由一切有身法所产生的认为,而说出「地是地……」等词。其中,地有四种:相地、有聚地、所缘地和假名地。在「贤友,什么是内地界?即内、自身的硬、粗糙性」(《分别论》173)等经文中,所说的是相地。在「若掘地或令掘」(《波逸提》85)等经文中,所说的是有聚地。而发等二十种身分,以及铁、铜等外部事物,因为它们与显色等聚集在一起而成为地,所以称为有聚地。又在「某人认知地遍」(《长部》3.360)等经文中出现的,是所缘地,也称为相地。得到地遍禅那的人投生天界,依其转生而获得「地天神」的名称,应当知道这是假名地。在这里,这四种地全都可以得到。在这四种地当中,这个凡夫从任何地来认知它:他以「这是地」的想来认知,以地的部分来认知,执取世间的言说,依靠想颠倒而认知它为「地」。这样,他完全不离开地的部分,而以「有情」、「有情的」等方式去认知。为什么他会这样认知呢?不该这么问,因为凡夫犹如疯狂者,他会以任何方式执取任何事物。而这里的原因,只是没有见过圣者等差别。或者,就像世尊随后所说的那样:「因为对它未遍知」(《中部》1),世尊自己已经说出了原因。显示巴利原文
Pathavīvāravaṇṇanā
“从地认知地后”的意思是:他以这种颠倒的想认知该地之后,由于“想是戏论的因”(《经集》880)这句话,于后时,以变得强有力的渴爱、慢、见这三种戏论——在此处用“认为”一名来表述——而认为、构想、分别,以种种方式颠倒地执取。因此说“认为地”。为了粗略地显示他这样认为时的那些认为,便以“此发、此毛”等方式,说明了分为二十种的内地。又如《分别论》中所说:“其中,什么是外地界?即外部的硬、粗糙、固状、坚硬性,非所执受的。即:铁、铜、锡、铅、银、珍珠、宝石、琉璃、螺、石、珊瑚、银、黄金、琉璃、玛瑙、草、木、砂砾、陶片、大地、岩石、山”(《分别论》173),这样说明了外地。对于内所缘三聚中的相地,也在此一并作意义论究。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ puthujjanaṃ niddisitvā idāni tassa pathavīādīsu vatthūsu sabbasakkāyadhammajanitaṃ maññanaṃ dassento, pathaviṃ pathavitotiādimāha. Tattha lakkhaṇapathavī sasambhārapathavī ārammaṇapathavī sammutipathavīti catubbidhā pathavī. Tāsu ‘‘katamā ca, āvuso, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu? Yaṃ ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ kakkhaḷaṃ kharigata’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 173) vuttā lakkhaṇapathavī. ‘‘Pathaviṃ khaṇeyya vā khaṇāpeyya vā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 85) vuttā sasambhārapathavī. Ye ca kesādayo vīsati koṭṭhāsā, ayolohādayo ca bāhirā. Sā hi vaṇṇādīhi sambhārehi saddhiṃ pathavīti sasambhārapathavī. ‘‘Pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānātī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.360) āgatā pana ārammaṇapathavī, nimittapathavītipi vuccati. Pathavīkasiṇajjhānalābhī devaloke nibbatto āgamanavasena pathavīdevatāti nāmaṃ labhati. Ayaṃ sammutipathavīti veditabbā. Sā sabbāpi idha labbhati. Tāsu yaṃkañci pathaviṃ ayaṃ puthujjano pathavito sañjānāti, pathavīti sañjānāti, pathavībhāgena sañjānāti, lokavohāraṃ gahetvā saññāvipallāsena sañjānāti pathavīti. Evaṃ pathavībhāgaṃ amuñcantoyeva vā etaṃ ‘‘sattoti vā sattassā’’ti vā ādinā nayena sañjānāti. Kasmā evaṃ sañjānātīti na vattabbaṃ. Ummattako viya hi puthujjano. So yaṃkiñci yena kenaci ākārena gaṇhāti. Ariyānaṃ adassāvitādibhedameva vā ettha kāraṇaṃ. Yaṃ vā parato ‘‘apariññātaṃ tassā’’ti vadantena bhagavatāva vuttaṃ.
“认为地”:以三种认为而认为——认为“我是地”,认为“地是我的”,认为“他人是地”,认为“地是别人的”;或者,以渴爱之认为、以慢之认为、以见之认为来认为内地。怎么呢?这人于头发等生起欲贪,于头发味著、欢喜、赞扬、固执而住;于毛、于爪、于齿、于皮,或于任何其他可染著的事物也是如此。这样,他是以渴爱之认为来认为内地。“愿我未来时拥有这样的头发”,“愿我拥有这样的毛”……以这样的方式,他对此生起欢喜。或者,“我依此戒、以此行、以此苦行、以此梵行,当成为拥有如此润泽、柔软、细滑、青黑头发的人”,以这样的方式,为了获得未得的而安置心。这样,他也是以渴爱之认为来认为内地。显示巴利原文
Pathaviṃ pathavito saññatvāti so taṃ pathaviṃ evaṃ viparītasaññāya sañjānitvā, ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’ti (su. ni. 880) vacanato aparabhāge thāmapattehi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcehi idha maññanānāmena vuttehi maññati kappeti vikappeti, nānappakārato aññathā gaṇhāti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti. Evaṃ maññato cassa tā maññanā oḷārikanayena dassetuṃ ‘‘yā ayaṃ kesā lomā’’tiādinā nayena vīsatibhedā ajjhattikā pathavī vuttā. Yā cāyaṃ vibhaṅge ‘‘tattha katamā bāhirā pathavīdhātu? Yaṃ bāhiraṃ kakkhaḷaṃ kharigataṃ kakkhaḷattaṃ kakkhaḷabhāvo bahiddhā anupādinnaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, ayo lohaṃ tipu sīsaṃ sajjhaṃ muttā maṇi veḷuriyaṃ saṅkho silā pavāḷaṃ rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ lohitaṅko masāragallaṃ tiṇaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ sakkharā kaṭhalaṃ bhūmi pāsāṇo pabbato’’ti (vibha. 173) evaṃ bāhirā pathavī vuttā. Yā ca ajjhattārammaṇattike nimittapathavī, taṃ gahetvā ayamatthayojanā vuccati.
“认为地”:以三种认为而认为——认为“我是地”,认为“地是我的”,认为“他人是地”,认为“地是他人的”;或者,以渴爱之认为来认为内地,以慢之认为来认为,以见之认为来认为。如何呢?此人于头发等中起欲贪,对头发味著、欢喜、赞扬、固执而住;于毛、爪、齿、皮,或于任何可染著的事物也是如此。这样,他以渴爱之认为来认为内地。“愿我在未来时拥有这样的头发。愿拥有这样的毛……”以这样的方式,他对此生起欢喜。或者,“我依此戒……乃至……依此梵行,当成为拥有如此润泽、柔软、细滑、青黑头发的人”,以这样的方式,为获得未得的而安置心。这样,他也是以渴爱之认为来认为内地。显示巴利原文
Pathaviṃ maññatīti tīhi maññanāhi ahaṃ pathavīti maññati, mama pathavīti maññati, paro pathavīti maññati, parassa pathavīti maññati, atha vā ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati, mānamaññanāya maññati, diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi kesādīsu chandarāgaṃ janeti kese assādeti abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Lome, nakhe, dante, tacaṃ, aññataraṃ vā pana rajjanīyavatthuṃ. Evaṃ ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Iti me kesā siyuṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ. Iti lomātiādinā vā pana nayena tattha nandiṃ samannāneti. ‘‘Imināhaṃ sīlena vā…pe… brahmacariyena vā evaṃ siniddhamudusukhumanīlakeso bhavissāmī’’tiādinā vā pana nayena appaṭiladdhānaṃ paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahati. Evampi ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati.
同样,依于自己头发等处的圆满或缺失而生起慢:‘我是优胜者’‘我是相同者’‘我是低劣者’。如此,他以慢的妄执来执取内身之地界。或者,依据‘彼命即彼身’(《中部》2.187)的说法,将头发执取为‘命’。对于毛等也是如此。如此,他以见的妄执来执取内身之地界。显示巴利原文
Tathā attano kesādīnaṃ sampattiṃ vā vipattiṃ vā nissāya mānaṃ janeti, ‘‘seyyohamasmīti vā sadisohamasmīti vā hīnohamasmīti vā’’ti. Evaṃ ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīra’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187) āgatanayena pana kesaṃ ‘‘jīvo’’ti abhinivisati. Esa nayo lomādīsu. Evaṃ ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati.
或者,与前述那种运转方式相反,对于‘然而,贤友,内地界与外地界都只是地界,这不是我的’(《中部》1.302)这一说法,他却反而将头发等类别的地界执取为‘这是我的,这是我,这是我的我’。如此,他也是以见的妄执来执取内身之地界。如上所述,首先便以三种妄执来执取内身之地界。显示巴利原文
Atha vā ‘‘yā ceva kho panāvuso, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu, yā ca bāhirā pathavīdhātu, pathavīdhāturevesā , taṃ netaṃ mamā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.302) imissā pavattiyā paccanīkanayena kesādibhedaṃ pathaviṃ etaṃ mama esohamasmi eso me attāti abhinivisati. Evampi ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Evaṃ tāva ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññati.
正如对内身地界那样,对外部地界也是如此。是怎样的呢?此人对于铁、铜等生起欲贪,对于铁、铜等味著、欢喜、赞叹而顽固地耽著。以‘我的铁’‘我的铜’等的方式,他执取、守卫、保护铁等。如此,他以渴爱的妄执来执取外部地界。或者,他认为‘愿我未来时拥有这样的铁、铜等’,并对此生起欢喜;或者,他这样想:‘我以此戒、以此行、以此苦行、以此梵行,将会成为拥有如此完备铁、铜等资具的人’,为了获得尚未获得的而将心安住于上。如此,他也是以渴爱的妄执来执取外部地界。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca ajjhattikaṃ evaṃ bāhirampi. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Ayañhi ayalohādīsu chandarāgaṃ janeti. Ayalohādīni assādeti abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Mama ayo mama lohantiādinā nayena ayādīni mamāyati rakkhati gopayati, evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Iti me ayalohādayo siyuṃ anāgatamaddhānanti vā panettha nandiṃ samannāneti, imināhaṃ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā evaṃ sampannaayalohādiupakaraṇo bhavissāmī’’ti appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahati. Evampi bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati.
同样,或因自己铁、铜等物的富足或匮乏而生起慢:“以此,我是优胜者”、“我是同等者”、“我是低劣者”(《分别论》832)。如此,他以慢的思量而思量于外地。又于铁中生起“有生命”之想,执取为“生命”;于铜等也是如此。如此,他以见的思量而思量于外地。显示巴利原文
Tathā attano ayalohādīnaṃ sampattiṃ vā vipattiṃ vā nissāya mānaṃ janeti ‘‘imināhaṃ seyyosmīti vā, sadisosmīti vā hīnosmīti vā’’ti (vibha. 832) evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. Aye jīvasaññī hutvā pana ayaṃ ‘‘jīvo’’ti abhinivisati. Esa nayo lohādīsu. Evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati.
或者,在此,有人将地遍视作自我:正如《无碍解道》中所说,“地遍即是我,我即是地遍,他将地遍与自我视作不二”(《无碍解道》1.131),如此执取相地为“我”。如此,他以见的思量而思量于外地。同样,也以三种思量而思量于外地。如是,在“思量地”这一句中,当知有三种思量。此后,我将略加解说。显示巴利原文
Atha vā ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkasiṇaṃ attato samanupassati. Yaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ, so ahaṃ. Yo ahaṃ, taṃ pathavīkasiṇanti pathavīkasiṇañca attañca advayaṃ samanupassatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.131) paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttanayeneva nimittapathaviṃ ‘‘attā’’ti abhinivisati. Evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Evampi bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññati. Evaṃ tāva ‘‘pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti ettha tissopi maññanā veditabbā. Ito paraṃ saṅkhepeneva kathayissāma.
“于地思量”:此处“于地”是依格。因此,此句意为:“我思量于地”、“我的某物、系缚思量于地”、“他人思量于地”、“他人的某物、系缚思量于地”。显示巴利原文
Pathaviyāmaññatīti ettha pathaviyāti bhummavacanametaṃ. Tasmā ahaṃ pathaviyāti maññati, mayhaṃ kiñcanaṃ palibodho pathaviyāti maññati, paro pathaviyāti maññati, parassa kiñcanaṃ palibodho pathaviyāti maññatīti ayamettha attho.
又如《无碍解道》(1.131)所说:“如何于色中观我?此中,有人将受……将想……将行……将识观为我。他这样想:‘这是我的我,而我的我在这色中’,这样便是于色中观我。”这一义理已经阐明。依此义理,将受等法执取为我,随后于内外诸地中,将某一地设想为它的所依处,接着想“我的这个我就在此地中”,这即是“于地认为”,这是他的见的认为。并且,当他对于那个我生起爱著,并以此为缘而生起慢时,应知也有爱和慢的认为。然而,若以同样方式认为“我的那个我就是地”,则仅有见的认为才合乎道理。其他情况也是如此。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yvāyaṃ ‘‘kathaṃ rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ samanupassati? Idhekacco vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassati, tassa evaṃ hoti, ayaṃ kho me attā, so kho pana me attā imasmiṃ rūpeti evaṃ rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ samanupassatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.131) etassa atthanayo vutto, eteneva nayena vedanādidhamme attato gahetvā tato ajjhattikabāhirāsu pathavīsu yaṃkiñci pathaviṃ tassokāsabhāvena parikappetvā so kho pana me ayaṃ attā imissā pathaviyāti maññanto pathaviyā maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attani sinehaṃ tabbatthukañca mānaṃ uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Yadā pana teneva nayena so kho panassa attā pathaviyāti maññati, tadā diṭṭhimaññanā eva yujjati. Itarāyopi pana icchanti.
“从地认为”:此处“从地”是分离格。因此,当认为自己或他人连同其资具,依如前所述的各种类别,是从地而生或从地而出,或者认为“我异于地”,这样便是“从地认为”,应知这是他的见的认为。对于以见的认为所构想的那件事,当生起爱著与慢时,也应知有爱和慢的认为。另有一说:修习小地遍之后,取一个与此相异的无量我,认为“在外也有我的我”,这样就是从地认为。显示巴利原文
Pathavito maññatīti ettha pana pathavitoti nissakkavacanaṃ. Tasmā saupakaraṇassa attano vā parassa vā yathāvuttappabhedato pathavito uppattiṃ vā niggamanaṃ vā pathavito vā añño attāti maññamāno pathavito maññatīti veditabbo, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Apare āhu pathavīkasiṇaṃ parittaṃ bhāvetvā tato aññaṃ appamāṇaṃ attānaṃ gahetvā pathavito bahiddhāpi me attāti maññamāno pathavito maññatīti.
在“认为地是我的”中,应知此处唯有一种爱的认为可得:即纯粹出于爱执,将整个大地执为“我的”,依此方式而生起。而这种认为,应当遍及如前所述的一切内外之地,诸如“我的头发、我的毛、我的铁、我的铜”等。显示巴利原文
Pathaviṃ meti maññatīti ettha pana kevalañhi mahāpathaviṃ taṇhāvasena mamāyatīti iminā nayena pavattā ekā taṇhāmaññanā eva labbhatīti veditabbā. Sā cāyaṃ mama kesā, mama lomā, mama ayo, mama lohanti evaṃ yathāvuttappabhedāya sabbāyapi ajjhattikabāhirāya pathaviyā yojetabbāti.
“他欢喜地”(pathaviṃ abhinandati)的意思是,对如前所述的地,以贪爱等为缘而欢喜、乐著、执取。既然“认为地”的意思已经成立,为何还要说这一个?对此,古来注者们并未细加辨析。但依我之见,这是为了展现教法的丰赡,或为显示过患。因为世尊于法界善巧通达,具足种种方便与教法的丰赡,所以世尊先以“认为”的方式显示烦恼的生起,现在再以“欢喜”的方式显示,这便展现了教法的丰赡。又或者,认为地、于地认为、从地认为、认为“地是我的”,由于不能断除对地的爱或见,他必定会欢喜地。而欢喜地即是欢喜苦——苦是过患,为了显示过患而作此说。这也正是世尊所言:“诸比丘,若欢喜地界,即欢喜苦;若欢喜苦,我说此人尚未从苦解脱。”显示巴利原文
Pathaviṃabhinandatīti vuttappakārameva pathaviṃ taṇhādīhi abhinandati, assādeti, parāmasati cāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti eteneva etasmiṃ atthe siddhe kasmā etaṃ vuttanti ce. Avicāritametaṃ porāṇehi. Ayaṃ pana attano mati, desanāvilāsato vā ādīnavadassanato vā. Yassā hi dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā nānānayavicitradesanāvilāsasampanno, ayaṃ sā bhagavatā suppaṭividdhā. Tasmā pubbe maññanāvasena kilesuppattiṃ dassetvā idāni abhinandanāvasena dassento desanāvilāsato vā idamāha . Yo vā pathaviṃ maññati, pathaviyā maññati, pathavito maññati, pathaviṃ meti maññati, so yasmā na sakkoti pathavīnissitaṃ taṇhaṃ vā diṭṭhiṃ vā pahātuṃ, tasmā pathaviṃ abhinandatiyeva. Yo ca pathaviṃ abhinandati, dukkhaṃ so abhinandati, dukkhañca ādīnavoti ādīnavadassanatopi idamāha. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, pathavīdhātuṃ abhinandati, dukkhaṃ so abhinandati, yo dukkhaṃ abhinandati, aparimutto so dukkhasmāti vadāmī’’ti.
如此,说明了以地为所缘的认为与欢喜之后,现在为了揭示他之所以认为和欢喜的原因,便说:“那是因何故?我说他未遍知。”其意为:那凡夫因何故认为地?由于什么原因而认为和欢喜?回答:“我说他未遍知”,也就是尚未遍知那个所缘。遍知地的人,是以三种遍知而遍知的:知遍知、度遍知、断遍知。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pathavīvatthukaṃ maññanaṃ abhinandanañca vatvā idāni yena kāraṇena so maññati, abhinandati ca, taṃ kāraṇaṃ āvikaronto āha taṃ kissa hetu, apariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmīti. Tassattho, so puthujjano taṃ pathaviṃ kissa hetu maññati, kena kāraṇena maññati, abhinandatīti ce. Apariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmīti, yasmā taṃ vatthu tassa apariññātaṃ, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo hi pathaviṃ parijānāti, so tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti ñātapariññāya tīraṇapariññāya pahānapariññāyāti.
其中,何为知遍知?遍知地界,即了知:“这是内地界,这是外地界,这是它的相,这是它的味、现起、足处”,这就是知遍知。何为度遍知?如此了知之后,以无常、苦、病等四十二种行相审察地界,这就是度遍知。何为断遍知?如此审察之后,以最上道断除对地界的欲贪,这就是断遍知。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamā ñātapariññā. Pathavīdhātuṃ parijānāti, ayaṃ pathavīdhātu ajjhattikā, ayaṃ bāhirā, idamassā lakkhaṇaṃ, imāni rasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānīti, ayaṃ ñātapariññā. Katamā tīraṇapariññā? Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā pathavīdhātuṃ tīreti aniccato dukkhato rogatoti dvācattālīsāya ākārehi, ayaṃ tīraṇapariññā. Katamā pahānapariññā? Evaṃ tīrayitvā aggamaggena pathavīdhātuyā chandarāgaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ pahānapariññā.
或者,名色分别智是知遍知;从聚观照等开始,直到随顺智为止,是度遍知;圣道上的智则是断遍知。遍知地的人,即是以这三种遍知而遍知。凡夫没有这些遍知,因为未遍知的缘故,便既执取地,又欢喜地。因此世尊说:‘诸比丘,于此,无闻凡夫……认为地、于地中认为、从地认为、认为地是我的,而欢喜地。这是什么原因呢?我说,是因为他未遍知地。’显示巴利原文
Nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ vā ñātapariññā. Kalāpasammasanādianulomapariyosānā tīraṇapariññā. Ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ pahānapariññāti. Yo pathaviṃ parijānāti, so imāhi tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti, assa ca puthujjanassa tā pariññāyo natthi, tasmā apariññātattā pathaviṃ maññati ca abhinandati cāti. Tenāha bhagavā – idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano…pe… pathaviṃ maññati, pathaviyā maññati, pathavito maññati, pathaviṃ meti maññati, pathaviṃ abhinandati. Taṃ kissa hetu? Apariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmī’’ti.
水界等注释显示巴利原文
Āpovārādivaṇṇanā
关于「水」(āpaṃ āpoti),水亦有四种:相水、和合水、所缘水、假名水。其中,‘什么是内水界?即内在的、自身的、属于水的、湿润的、属于湿润的、色的结缚、内在的、被执取的’等(《分别论》174)所说的是相水。‘修习水遍者,于水中取相’等处所说的是和合水。其余一切,与地中所说的方式相同。只是在结合方式上,应当了知内水界有十二种,即依‘胆汁、痰’等方式所说;外水界则如‘什么是外水界?即外在的、属于水的、湿润的、属于湿润的、色的结缚、外在的、不被执取的。例如:根汁、干汁、皮汁、叶汁、花汁、果汁、乳、酪、酥、生酥、油、蜜、糖,以及地上的水、空中的水’(《分别论》174)所说;还有在‘内所缘三法’中的相水。显示巴利原文
Āpaṃāpatoti etthāpi lakkhaṇasasambhārārammaṇasammutivasena catubbidho āpo. Tesu ‘‘tattha, katamā ajjhattikā āpodhātu. Yaṃ ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ āpo āpogataṃ, sineho sinehagataṃ bandhanattaṃ rūpassa ajjhattaṃ upādinna’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 174) vutto lakkhaṇaāpo. ‘‘Āpokasiṇaṃ uggaṇhanto āpasmiṃ nimittaṃ gaṇhātī’’tiādīsu vutto sasambhārāpo. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ pathaviyaṃ vuttasadisameva. Kevalaṃ yojanānaye pana ‘‘pittaṃ semha’’ntiādinā nayena vuttā dvādasabhedā ajjhattikā āpodhātu, ‘‘tattha, katamā bāhirā āpodhātu? Yaṃ bāhiraṃ āpo āpogataṃ, sineho sinehagataṃ bandhanattaṃ rūpassa bahiddhā anupādinnaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, mūlaraso khandharaso tacaraso pattaraso puppharaso phalaraso khīraṃ dadhi sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ bhummāni vā udakāni antalikkhāni vā’’ti (vibha. 174) evaṃ vuttā ca bāhirā āpodhātu veditabbā, yo ca ajjhattārammaṇattike nimittaāpo.
关于「火」(tejaṃ tejoti),火的解释也应当依同样的方式广说。只是在结合方式上,应当了知内火界有四种,即依‘由此而温暖,由此而衰老,由此而烧灼,由此而使所食、所饮、所嚼、所尝的得以完全消化’(《分别论》175)所说。外火界则依‘什么是外火界?即外在的、属于火的、热的、属于热的、温的、属于温的、外在的、不被执取的。例如:薪火、草火、木火、牛粪火、谷壳火、垃圾火、闪电火、火的热、太阳的热、薪堆的热、草堆的热、谷物堆的热、物品堆的热’(《分别论》175)所说,应当了知。显示巴利原文
Tejaṃ tejatoti imasmiṃ tejovārepi vuttanayeneva vitthāro veditabbo. Yojanānaye panettha ‘‘yena ca santappati, yena ca jīrīyati, yena ca pariḍayhati, yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ sammā pariṇāmaṃ gacchatī’’ti (vibha. 175) evaṃ vuttā catuppabhedā ajjhattikā tejodhātu. ‘‘Tattha katamā bāhirā tejodhātu? Yaṃ bāhiraṃ tejo tejogataṃ usmā usmāgataṃ usumaṃ usumagataṃ bahiddhā anupādinnaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, kaṭṭhaggi palālaggi tiṇaggi gomayaggi thusaggi saṅkāraggi indaggi aggisantāpo sūriyasantāpo kaṭṭhasannicayasantāpo tiṇasannicayasantāpo dhaññasannicayasantāpo bhaṇḍasannicayasantāpo’’ti (vibha. 175) evaṃ vuttā ca bāhirā tejodhātu veditabbā.
说到“风”时,在结合此风界的方式中,也应当了知:内风界有“向上的风、向下的风、腹内的风、肠内的风、遍历肢体的风、刀风、剃刀风、青莲花风、入息与出息”等。外风界则如《分别论》所说:“其中,什么是外风界?即那些外在的、属风的、具僵挺性的、不被执取之色。具体而言:东风、西风、北风、南风、有尘的风、无尘的风、冷风、热风、微风、大风、黑风、毘蓝婆风、翼风、金翅鸟风、扇风、扇拂风。”其余与前相同。至此,此——显示巴利原文
Vāyaṃ vāyatoti imassa vāyavārassāpi yojanānaye pana ‘‘uddhaṅgamā vātā adhogamā vātā kucchisayā vātā koṭṭhāsayā vātā aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātā satthakavātā khurakavātā uppalakavātā assāso passāso’’ti evaṃ vuttā ajjhattikā vāyodhātu. ‘‘Tattha katamā bāhirā vāyodhātu? Yaṃ bāhiraṃ vāyo vāyogataṃ thambhitattaṃ rūpassa bahiddhā anupādinnaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, puratthimā vātā pacchimā vātā uttarā vātā dakkhiṇā vātā sarajā vātā arajā vātā sītā vātā uṇhā vātā parittā vātā adhimattā vātā kāḷavātā verambhavātā pakkhavātā supaṇṇavātā tālavaṇṭavātā vidhūpanavātā’’ti (vibha. 176) evaṃ vuttā ca bāhirā vāyodhātu veditabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti. Ettāvatā ca yvāyaṃ –
当某一法被解说之后,凡是与此法具有相同之相的一切法,
也都同时得到了解说,因此才称为“相论”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vuttamhi ekadhamme, ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā tena; Vuttā bhavanti sabbe, iti vutto lakkhaṇo hāro’’ti. –
如是,《导论》中便说了名为「相」的论。依于此论,当把握了四大种时,由于不离色相,所造色也必定被把握;而大种与所造色即是色蕴。因此,当说‘无闻凡夫认为地、认为水、认为火、认为风’时,从义理上说,也是在说「他观色是我」。当说‘他于地中、于水中、于火中、于风中认为’时,也是在说「他观我存在于色中」。当说‘他从地、从水、从火、从风认为’时,由于「离色之外另有我」已然成立,他也是在说「他观我拥有色」或「他观色在我中」。因此,应知这四种是以色为所依的有身见之「认为」。其中,一种是断见,三种是常见,正好成为两种见——这也是应知的义理差别。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nettiyaṃ lakkhaṇo nāma hāro vutto, tassa vasena yasmā catūsu bhūtesu gahitesu upādārūpampi gahitameva bhavati, rūpalakkhaṇaṃ anatītattā. Yañca bhūtopādārūpaṃ so rūpakkhandho. Tasmā ‘‘assutavā puthujjano pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ maññatī’’ti vadantena atthato rūpaṃ attato samanupassatītipi vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pathaviyā āpasmiṃ tejasmiṃ vāyasmiṃ maññatī’’ti vadantena rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ samanupassatīti vuttampi hoti. ‘‘Pathavito āpato tejato vāyato maññatī’’ti vadantena rūpato añño attāti siddhattā rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ attani vā rūpaṃ samanupassatītipi vuttaṃ hoti. Evametā catasso rūpavatthukā sakkāyadiṭṭhimaññanā veditabbā. Tattha ekā ucchedadiṭṭhi, tisso sassatadiṭṭhiyoti dveva diṭṭhiyo hontīti ayampi atthaviseso veditabbo.
大种等的注释显示巴利原文
Bhūtavārādivaṇṇanā
3 如此,在以色为门径,解说了以「行」为所依的「认为」之后,现在因为凡夫对于依诸行而施设的众生也起「认为」,所以为指出那些众生,而说了「于众生起众生想」等语。在此,此「bhūta(众生)」一词可出现于五蕴、非人、界、存在、漏尽者、众生、树木等语境。例如:‘诸比丘!你们观察“这是已生的”’等经文中,它出现在五蕴的意义上;‘凡已聚集于此处之生类’中,它指非人;‘诸比丘!四大种是原因’中,它指界;‘于存在有波逸提’等戒条中,它指现有的;‘那个是时食的已生者’中,它指漏尽者;‘世间一切生类终将舍弃躯壳’中,它指众生;‘因为破坏草木’中,它指树木等。但此处,此词指众生,然而并非不加区分地泛指一切众生,因为这里所说的「bhūta」,实指四大王天以下的众生。显示巴利原文
3. Evaṃ rūpamukhena saṅkhāravatthukaṃ maññanaṃ vatvā idāni ye saṅkhāre upādāya sattā paññapīyanti, tesu saṅkhāresu sattesupi yasmā puthujjano maññanaṃ karoti, tasmā te satte niddisanto bhūte bhūtato sañjānātītiādimāha. Tatthāyaṃ bhūtasaddo pañcakkhandhaamanussadhātuvijjamānakhīṇāsavasattarukkhādīsu dissati. ‘‘Bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, samanupassathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.401) hi ayaṃ pañcakkhandhesu dissati. ‘‘Yānīdha bhūtāni samāgatānī’’ti (su. ni. 224) ettha amanussesu. ‘‘Cattāro kho, bhikkhu, mahābhūtā hetū’’ti (ma. ni. 3.86) ettha dhātūsu. ‘‘Bhūtasmiṃ pācittiya’’ntiādīsu (pāci. 69) vijjamāne. ‘‘Yo ca kālaghaso bhūto’’ti (jā. 1.10.190) ettha khīṇāsave. ‘‘Sabbeva nikkhipissanti bhūtā loke samussaya’’nti (dī. ni. 2.220) ettha sattesu. ‘‘Bhūtagāmapātabyatāyā’’ti (pāci. 90) ettha rukkhādīsu. Idha panāyaṃ sattesu vattati, no ca kho avisesena. Cātumahārājikānaṃ hi heṭṭhā sattā idha bhūtāti adhippetā.
其中,「于众生起众生想」等,如前所说。而在「认为众生」等处,则应配合三种「认为」来理解。如何配合?此人依‘他见到居士或居士子成就、具足五欲功德’所示的方式,执取‘众生可爱、安乐’而生起贪着,见后贪着,闻后贪着,嗅后贪着,尝后贪着,触后贪着,了知后也贪着。如是,他通过「渴爱之认为」而认为众生。或者,依‘啊,愿我往生与刹帝利大富豪等共处’等方式,为获得未得之境而发愿;如此,也是通过「渴爱之认为」而认为众生。再者,依自己与他人的成就与退失,他或认为自身更胜;在众生中,或认为某个众生低劣,或认为自身低劣;又或认为某个众生殊胜,或认为自己与某个众生相似,再或认为某个众生与自己相似。正如所说:‘在此,有一类人,或因出身……或以种种事,先时认为自己与他人相似,后时又认为自己更胜、他人卑下。凡有如此的慢……这称为慢过慢。’如此,他通过「慢之认为」而认为众生。显示巴利原文
Tattha bhūte bhūtato sañjānātītiādi vuttanayameva. Bhūte maññatītiādīsu pana tissopi maññanā yojetabbā. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi ‘‘so passati gahapatiṃ vā gahapatiputtaṃ vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitaṃ samaṅgibhūta’’nti (a. ni. 7.50) vuttanayena bhūte subhā sukhitāti gahetvā rajjati, disvāpi ne rajjati, sutvāpi, ghāyitvāpi, sāyitvāpi, phusitvāpi, ñatvāpi. Evaṃ bhūte taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Aho vatāhaṃ khattiyamahāsālānaṃ vā sahabyataṃ upapajjeyya’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 3.337) vā pana nayena appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahati, evampi bhūte taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Attano pana bhūtānañca sampattivipattiṃ nissāya attānaṃ vā seyyaṃ dahati. Bhūtesu ca yaṃkiñci bhūtaṃ hīnaṃ attānaṃ vā hīnaṃ, yaṃkiñci bhūtaṃ seyyaṃ . Attānaṃ vā bhūtena, bhūtaṃ vā attanā sadisaṃ dahati. Yathāha ‘‘idhekacco jātiyā vā…pe… aññataraññatarena vatthunā pubbakālaṃ parehi sadisaṃ attānaṃ dahati. Aparakālaṃ attānaṃ seyyaṃ dahati. Pare hīne dahati, yo evarūpo māno …pe… ayaṃ vuccati mānātimāno’’ti (vibha. 876-880). Evaṃ bhūte mānamaññanāya maññati.
然而,若有人对于众生,认为“他们是常的、坚固的、永恒的、不变易之法”,或者如“一切众生、一切生命、一切生类、一切灵魂都没有自在、没有力量、没有精进,随着命运、遭遇、本性而转变,在六种生中感受苦乐”这般思惟,这即是依“见之认为”而认为众生。如此,他以三种“认为”而认为众生。显示巴利原文
Bhūte pana ‘‘niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā’’ti vā ‘‘sabbe sattā sabbe pāṇā sabbe bhūtā sabbe jīvā avasā abalā avīriyā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168) vā maññamāno diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Evaṃ bhūte tīhi maññanāhi maññati.
如何于众生中认为呢?他期望在那些众生中获得自己投生或快乐的投生。如此,他首先是依“渴爱之认为”而于众生中认为。又或者,因期望在众生中获得投生,他行布施、受持戒律、行布萨羯磨。如此,也是依“渴爱之认为”而于众生中认为。然而,若他将众生总括地执取后,于中将某些众生视为优胜,某些视为同等或低劣,这即是依“慢之认为”而于众生中认为。同样地,若认为某些众生是常、坚固的,某些是无常、不坚固的,或者认为“我也是众生中的一员”,如此便是依“见之认为”而于众生中认为。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhūtesu maññati? Tesu tesu bhūtesu attano upapattiṃ vā sukhuppattiṃ vā ākaṅkhati. Evaṃ tāva taṇhāmaññanāya bhūtesu maññati. Bhūtesu vā upapattiṃ ākaṅkhamāno dānaṃ deti, sīlaṃ samādiyati, uposathakammaṃ karoti. Evampi bhūtesu taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Bhūte pana samūhaggāhena gahetvā tattha ekacce bhūte seyyato dahati, ekacce sadisato vā hīnato vāti. Evaṃ bhūtesu mānamaññanāya maññati. Tathā ekacce bhūte niccā dhuvāti maññati. Ekacce aniccā adhuvāti, ahampi bhūtesu aññatarosmīti vā maññati. Evaṃ bhūtesu diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati.
关于“从众生认为”,应如此理解:若有人认为自己或他人连同资具,将从某类众生中再生,这便是“从众生认为”,此是他的“见之认为”。而就在此“见之认为”所执取的对象上,因其亦生起了爱着与我慢,故于此亦应了知有“渴爱之认为”与“慢之认为”。关于“认为‘众生是我的’”,此处唯有一“渴爱之认为”可得。且应了知,这种认为的转起是:以“我的儿子们、我的女儿们、我的羊与山羊、鸡和猪、象、牛、马、牝马”等方式,执取为“我所拥有”。关于“欣喜众生”,与前面所述方式相同。关于“由于未被遍知故”,此处是指:依于诸“行”而假立的“众生”概念未被遍知,因此众生未被遍知,应如是理解。其间的连接方式,亦应依前文已说的方法而行。显示巴利原文
Bhūtato maññatīti ettha pana saupakaraṇassa attano vā parassa vā yato kutoci bhūtato uppattiṃ maññamāno bhūtato maññatīti veditabbo, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Bhūte meti maññatīti ettha pana ekā taṇhāmaññanāva labbhati. Sā cāyaṃ ‘‘mama puttā, mama dhītā, mama ajeḷakā, kukkuṭasūkarā, hatthigavassavaḷavā’’ti evamādinā nayena mamāyato pavattatīti veditabbā. Bhūte abhinandatīti etaṃ vuttanayameva. Apariññātaṃ tassāti ettha pana ye saṅkhāre upādāya bhūtānaṃ paññatti, tesaṃ apariññātattā bhūtā apariññātā hontīti veditabbā. Yojanā pana vuttanayeneva kātabbā.
如此,从“行”与“有情”两方面简要显示“认为”的基础之后,现在为了依地的差别等详细展示,而说“诸天、天”等。其中,「天」:他们由五种妙欲或以自己的神通力而嬉戏、照耀,故称为“天”,即嬉戏与光明的意思。天有三种:假名天、再生天、清净天。所谓「假名天」,指国王、王后、王子。「再生天」,指从四大王天开始以上的诸天。「清净天」,指那些阿拉汉、诸漏尽者。但此处应理解为再生天,并非不加简别地取一切再生天。这里所说的“天”,意指除他化自在天世界的魔及其眷属之外,其余六欲界天。这些释义都应按“众生品”中已说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅkhepato saṅkhāravasena ca sattavasena ca maññanāvatthuṃ dassetvā idāni bhūmivisesādinā bhedena vitthāratopi taṃ dassento deve devatotiādimāha. Tattha dibbanti pañcahi kāmaguṇehi attano vā iddhiyāti devā, kīḷanti jotenti cāti attho. Te tividhā sammutidevā upapattidevā visuddhidevāti. Sammutidevā nāma rājāno deviyo rājakumārā. Upapattidevā nāma cātumahārājike deve upādāya tatuttaridevā. Visuddhidevā nāma arahanto khīṇāsavā. Idha pana upapattidevā daṭṭhabbā, no ca kho avisesena. Paranimmitavasavattidevaloke māraṃ saparisaṃ ṭhapetvā sesā cha kāmāvacarā idha devāti adhippetā. Tattha sabbā atthavaṇṇanā bhūtavāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
关于「生主」,于此应知魔即是生主。然而有些人说:“这是对诸天的统领者,如大天王等的称号。”这在《大注疏》中已被驳斥为不合理,因为那些已由“天”一词所包含。而此处所指的“生主”,正是魔,以作为名为有情的众生之主宰。他住在哪里?在他化自在天世界。据说,在那里,自在天王统理着王国,而魔居于某一区域,在自己的眷属中行使自在,如同王国边境的叛逆王子一般居住。再者,此处抓取魔,也应理解为抓取了魔的眷属。这里的连接方式是:当人看到或听到生主具有容色、长寿、多乐而生起贪染时,他便是以渴爱想来想“生主”。或者,为了获得尚未得到的,而用心祈愿,例如“啊,但愿我能再生到生主的同伴中去!”等,这也是以渴爱想来想“生主”。然而,已证得生主地位者生起“我是众生之主、主宰者”的慢心,这是以慢想来想“生主”。若认为“生主是常、恒存的”,或认为“他会断灭、毁灭”,或认为“他无力、无能、无精进,随命运、结合、本性而变化,只是在六种生类中领受苦乐”,则是以邪见想来想“生主”。应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Pajāpatinti ettha pana māro pajāpatīti veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ devānaṃ adhipatīnaṃ mahārājādīnametaṃ adhivacana’’nti vadanti. Taṃ devaggahaṇeneva tesaṃ gahitattā ayuttanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, māroyeva pana sattasaṅkhātāya pajāya adhipatibhāvena idha pajāpatīti adhippeto. So kuhiṃ vasati? Paranimmitavasavattidevaloke . Tatra hi vasavattirājā rajjaṃ kāreti. Māro ekasmiṃ padese attano parisāya issariyaṃ pavattento rajjapaccante dāmarikarājaputto viya vasatīti vadanti. Māraggahaṇeneva cettha māraparisāyapi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yojanānayo cettha pajāpatiṃ vaṇṇavantaṃ dīghāyukaṃ sukhabahulaṃ disvā vā sutvā vā rajjanto taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Aho vatāhaṃ pajāpatino sahabyataṃ upapajjeyya’’ntiādinā vā pana nayena appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahantopi pajāpatiṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Pajāpatibhāvaṃ pana patto samāno ahamasmi pajānamissaro adhipatīti mānaṃ janento pajāpatiṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Pajāpati nicco dhuvo’’ti vā ‘‘ucchijjissati vinassissatī’’ti vā ‘‘avaso abalo avīriyo niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇato chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti vā maññamāno pana pajāpatiṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti veditabbo.
关于「在生主中」,这里唯以邪见想为适当。应知它的生起方式如此:此处有人这样认为:“在生主中,所存在的一切法,全都是常、恒存、永住、不变易之法。”或者这样认为:“在生主中,没有罪恶,在他那里找不到恶业。”显示巴利原文
Pajāpatisminti ettha pana ekā diṭṭhimaññanāva yujjati. Tassā evaṃ pavatti veditabbā. Idhekacco ‘‘pajāpatismiṃ ye ca dhammā saṃvijjanti, sabbe te niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā’’ti maññati. Atha vā ‘‘pajāpatismiṃ natthi pāpaṃ, na tasmiṃ pāpakāni kammāni upalabbhantī’’ti maññati.
关于“从生主”,这里可得三种想。如何得?有人这样认为:有诸资具的自身或他身,是从生主再生或产生的——这是他的邪见想。而就在那被邪见想认定的对象上,当他对它生起喜爱与慢心时,便应知尚有渴爱想与慢想。关于“认为‘生主是我的’”,这里唯有一种渴爱想。应知,这是以“生主是我的老师、我的主人”等方式,执取为“我所”而生起的。其余按前文所说的道理类推。显示巴利原文
Pajāpatitoti ettha tissopi maññanā labbhanti. Kathaṃ? Idhekacco saupakaraṇassa attano vā parassa vā pajāpatito uppattiṃ vā niggamanaṃ vā maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Pajāpatiṃ meti ettha pana ekā taṇhāmaññanāva labbhati. Sā cāyaṃ ‘‘pajāpati mama satthā mama sāmī’’tiādinā nayena mamāyato pavattatīti veditabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
关于“梵天、梵天”。其中,由种种殊胜功德所增长的,称为梵天。此外,梵天也指大梵天、如来、婆罗门、父母及最胜者。在“一千梵天、二千梵天”等语境中,大梵天被称为梵天;而在“比丘们!梵天一词,即是如来的称号”这一语境中,则指如来。显示巴利原文
Brahmaṃ brahmatoti ettha brūhito tehi tehi guṇavisesehīti brahmā. Apica brahmāti mahābrahmāpi vuccati, tathāgatopi brāhmaṇopi mātāpitaropi seṭṭhampi. ‘‘Sahasso brahmā dvisahasso brahmā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.165-166) hi mahābrahmā brahmāti vuccati. ‘‘Brahmāti kho, bhikkhave , tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti ettha tathāgato.
“驱除黑暗者、觉者、一切眼者,到达世间边际、超越一切‘有’者,漏尽者、断尽一切苦者,名为真实者——那位梵天,应被证知。”此处所说的梵天,即指阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tamonudo buddho samantacakkhu,
漏尽者、已断尽一切苦者,即是名为真实的梵天,应被证知。在此,阿拉汉称为梵天。
梵天:名为真实的梵天,是我所侍奉的。(《小尼迦耶》104)
显示巴利原文 Lokantagū sabbabhavātivatto; Anāsavo sabbadukkhappahīno, Saccavhayo brahme upāsito me’’ti. (cūḷani. 104) –
“婆罗门”:此处指婆罗门。显示巴利原文
Ettha brāhmaṇo.
“梵天”:既是指父母,也是指从前的老师。(《如是语》106;《本生》2.20.181)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Brahmāti mātāpitaro, pubbācariyāti vuccare’’ti. (itivu. 106; jā. 2.20.181) –
“梵天”:此处(即上述引文)是指父母。而在“他转梵轮”(《中部》1.148;《增支部》5.11)这一句里,“梵天”则为最殊胜者之意。而在当前语境下,“梵天”是指最初化生、寿长一劫的梵天。并且,由于提及了他,也就涵括了梵辅天和梵众天,应当这样理解。至于此处的义理注释,则可参照生主那部分所说的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Ettha mātāpitaro. ‘‘Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.148; a. ni. 5.11) ettha seṭṭhaṃ. Idha pana paṭhamābhinibbatto kappāyuko brahmā adhippeto. Taggahaṇeneva ca brahmapurohitabrahmapārisajjāpi gahitāti veditabbā. Atthavaṇṇanā panettha pajāpativāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
「光音天」(ābhassarā):犹如火炬的火焰,光明从他们的身体发出,仿佛被一截截截断、散落流溢而出,故称光音天。举出光音天,便总摄了整个第二禅那地。应知,所有少光天、无量光天、光音天,都同住于一层天。显示巴利原文
Ābhassaravāre daṇḍadīpikāya acci viya etesaṃ sarīrato ābhā chijjitvā chijjitvā patantī viya sarati visaratīti ābhassarā. Tesaṃ gahaṇena sabbāpi dutiyajjhānabhūmi gahitā, ekatalavāsino eva cete sabbepi parittābhā appamāṇābhā ābhassarāti veditabbā.
「遍净天」(subhakiṇhā):由于清净之光遍满、散布,其身体光明颜色的清净,如同安置在金匣中炽燃的金块般辉煌庄严,故称遍净天。举出遍净天,便总摄了整个第三禅那地。应知,所有少净天、无量净天、遍净天,都同住于一层天。显示巴利原文
Subhakiṇhavāre subhena okiṇṇā vikiṇṇā subhena sarīrappabhāvaṇṇena ekagghanā suvaṇṇamañjūsāya ṭhapitasampajjalitakañcanapiṇḍasassirikāti subhakiṇhā. Tesaṃ gahaṇena sabbāpi tatiyajjhānabhūmi gahitā. Ekatalavāsino eva cete sabbepi parittasubhā appamāṇasubhā subhakiṇhāti veditabbā.
「广果天」(vehapphalā):意为果报广大,故称广果天。第四禅那地的梵天,即被称为广果天。至于此三处(光音天、遍净天、广果天)的义理解释,应依“已生”部分所说之理来了知。显示巴利原文
Vehapphalavāre, vipulā phalāti vehapphalā. Catutthajjhānabhūmi brahmāno vuccanti. Atthanayayojanā pana imesu tīsupi vāresu bhūtavāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
“胜者”(abhibhū):因已征服,故称为胜者。征服了什么?征服了四无色蕴。这也是“无想有”的别名。无想有情天与广果天同处一层天、同一境地,他们以出生时的威仪终其一生,如同心所造色一般安住。此处,“胜者”这一名称涵盖了所有这些无想有情。有些人认为“胜者”是指那些统理梵天者,比如所谓的一千梵天之类,并以此义在某些地方作解。然而,既然提到“梵天”时已包含了他们,便应知此解为不正确。在此,当听闻“胜者容貌庄严、寿命长久”时,便对其生起欲贪,以渴爱的虚妄分别去认定:“这就是‘胜者’。”或者,以“啊,愿我能投生于胜者的同伴之中!”这种方式,为了求得未曾得者而立下心愿,这也是以渴爱的虚妄分别去认定:“这就是‘胜者’。”若觉得自己低劣而胜者殊胜,便是以我慢的虚妄分别去认定:“这就是‘胜者’。”若以“胜者是恒常的、坚固的”这般方式去执取,则应当知道,这是以邪见的虚妄分别去认定:“这就是‘胜者’。”其余的解释,与生主一节中所说相同。显示巴利原文
Abhibhūvāre abhibhavīti abhibhū. Kiṃ abhibhavi? Cattāro khandhe arūpino. Asaññabhavassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Asaññasattā devā vehapphalehi saddhiṃ ekatalāyeva ekasmiṃ okāse yena iriyāpathena nibbattā, teneva yāvatāyukaṃ tiṭṭhanti cittakammarūpasadisā hutvā. Te idha sabbepi abhibhūvacanena gahitā. Keci abhibhū nāma sahasso brahmāti evamādinā nayena tattha tattha adhipatibrahmānaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Brahmaggahaṇeneva pana tassa gahitattā ayuttametanti veditabbaṃ. Yojanānayo cettha abhibhū vaṇṇavā dīghāyukoti sutvā tattha chandarāgaṃ uppādento abhibhuṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Aho vatāhaṃ abhibhuno sahabyataṃ upapajjeyya’’ntiādinā pana nayena appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahantopi abhibhuṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Attānaṃ hīnato abhibhuṃ seyyato dahanto pana abhibhuṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Abhibhū nicco dhuvo’’tiādinā nayena parāmasanto abhibhuṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ pajāpativāre vuttanayameva.
关于空无边处等部分的解释。显示巴利原文
Ākāsānañcāyatanavārādivaṇṇanā
4 如此,世尊在依次开示天界时,也以“胜者”之说开示了无想有情界。此后,因为这里讲的是轮回,而净居天处于还灭这一边,那些天众确实只是不来者与漏尽者;或者说,这些天众有若干千劫的寿命,只在佛陀出世时才出现。然而,佛陀于无数劫中亦不出世,那时彼地亦空。犹如国王的军营驻扎之处,净居天住处乃是诸佛的居所。正是由于这个原因,他们也不被计入识住与众生住之中。但这些妄想却是在一切时中都会现起的。因此,为了显示那些恒常存在之处,世尊越过净居天,宣说了“空无边处”等。在这里,“空无边处”是指属于该地的四种蕴——善、异熟、唯作。而且,因为这是关于界分别的讨论,应将它们只视为在那里已生起者。同样的道理也适用于识无边处等处。这四个案例中的义释,应依照“胜者”一节中已说的方法来理解。其中的慢与妄想,也适合按照“生主”一节中已说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
4. Evaṃ bhagavā paṭipāṭiyā devaloke dassentopi abhibhūvacanena asaññabhavaṃ dassetvā idāni yasmā ayaṃ vaṭṭakathā, suddhāvāsā ca vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitā, anāgāmikhīṇāsavā eva hi te devā. Yasmā vā katipayakappasahassāyukā te devā, buddhuppādakāleyeva honti. Buddhā pana asaṅkheyepi kappe na uppajjanti, tadā suññāpi sā bhūmi hoti. Rañño khandhāvāraṭṭhānaṃ viya hi buddhānaṃ suddhāvāsabhavo. Te teneva ca kāraṇena viññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsavasenapi na gahitā, sabbakālikā pana imā maññanā. Tasmā tāsaṃ sadāvijjamānabhūmiṃ dassento suddhāvāse atikkamitvā, ākāsānañcāyatanantiādimāha. Tattha ākāsānañcāyatananti tabbhūmikā cattāro kusalavipākakiriyā khandhā. Te ca tatrūpapannāyeva daṭṭhabbā bhavaparicchedakathā ayanti katvā. Esa nayo viññāṇañcāyatanādīsu. Atthayojanā pana catūsupi etesu vāresu abhibhūvāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Mānamaññanā cettha pajāpativāre vuttanayenāpi yujjati.
关于已见、已闻等节的注释。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhasutavārādivaṇṇanā
5 如此,依境地差别等分类,详细展示了妄想的所依之后,为了将一切妄想的所依——即属于身见的、三界诸法——以“已见”等四种方式总括起来显示,便说:“于已见,以见为已见而妄想”等。显示巴利原文
5. Evaṃ bhūmivisesādinā bhedena vitthāratopi maññanāvatthuṃ dassetvā idāni sabbamaññanāvatthubhūtaṃ sakkāyapariyāpannaṃ tebhūmakadhammabhedaṃ diṭṭhādīhi catūhi saṅgaṇhitvā dassento, diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhatotiādimāha.
在此,“已见”指以肉眼所见,也指以天眼所见。这是色处的同义词。其中,“于已见中妄想”是指以三种妄想方式于已见中妄想。是怎样的呢?当人将色处视为净相、乐相而作观察时,便在那里生起欲贪,对它味著、欢喜。世尊也曾这样说:“比丘们,众生对女色贪染、耽著、坚执、迷恋、执取,他们长夜忧愁,追随女色的支配。”(《增支部》5.55)如此,便是以渴爱妄想的方式于已见中妄想。或者,心里这样想:“愿我未来也有这样的色”,带着欢喜,或者期盼色成就而行布施等(详述也是如此)。如此,也是以渴爱妄想的方式于已见中妄想。又或者,依于自己或他人的色成就与失败而生起慢心,心想“我比这殊胜”、“我与此相等”或“我比这低劣”,如此,便是以慢妄想的方式于已见中妄想。另外,若将色处执为常、恒、永住,执为“这就是我、这是我所”,或执为吉祥、不吉祥,如此,便是以见妄想的方式于已见中妄想。就这样,以三种妄想而在已见上妄想。那么,怎样是“在已见之中妄想”呢?以观察“色中有我”的方式去妄想的人,便是在已见之中妄想。或者,如同对于财富……显示巴利原文
Tattha diṭṭhanti maṃsacakkhunāpi diṭṭhaṃ, dibbacakkhunāpi diṭṭhaṃ. Rūpāyatanassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tattha diṭṭhaṃ maññatīti diṭṭhaṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññati. Kathaṃ? Rūpāyatanaṃ subhasaññāya sukhasaññāya ca passanto tattha chandarāgaṃ janeti, taṃ assādeti abhinandati. Vuttampi hetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘itthirūpe, bhikkhave, sattā rattā giddhā gadhitā mucchitā ajjhosannā, te dīgharattaṃ socanti itthirūpavasānugā’’ti (a. ni. 5.55). Evaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Iti me rūpaṃ siyā anāgatamaddhānanti vā panettha nandiṃ samannāneti, rūpasampadaṃ vā pana ākaṅkhamāno dānaṃ detī’’ti vitthāro. Evampi diṭṭhaṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Attano pana parassa ca rūpasampattiṃ vipattiṃ nissāya mānaṃ janeti. ‘‘Imināhaṃ seyyosmī’’ti vā ‘‘sadisosmī’’ti vā ‘‘hīnosmī’’ti vāti evaṃ diṭṭhaṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. Rūpāyatanaṃ pana niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassatanti maññati, attānaṃ attaniyanti maññati, maṅgalaṃ amaṅgalanti maññati, evaṃ diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Evaṃ diṭṭhaṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññati. Kathaṃ diṭṭhasmiṃ maññati? Rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ samanupassananayena maññanto diṭṭhasmiṃ maññati. Yathā vā dhane dhaññe. Evaṃ rūpasmiṃ rāgādayoti maññantopi diṭṭhasmiṃ maññati. Ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiññeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Evaṃ diṭṭhasmiṃ maññati. Sesaṃ pathavīvāre vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
“已闻”指以肉耳所闻,也指以天耳所闻。这是声处的同义词。显示巴利原文
Sutanti maṃsasotenapi sutaṃ, dibbasotenapi sutaṃ, saddāyatanassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
“已触”:意为由触与思(了知)而执取;含义是“到达后而接触”。这是指当根与所缘彼此结合时,便被识知的意思。它是香处、味处、触处的同义词。显示巴利原文
Mutanti mutvā munitvā ca gahitaṃ, āhacca upagantvāti attho, indriyānaṃ ārammaṇānañca aññamaññasaṃsilese viññātanti vuttaṃ hoti, gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
「已识」:指由意识所识知者。这是对余下七处或法所缘的同义称呼。然而,此处唯取属于有身的部分。其详细说明,应依“已见”节所述之理来了知。显示巴利原文
Viññātanti manasā viññātaṃ, sesānaṃ sattannaṃ āyatanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ dhammārammaṇassa vā. Idha pana sakkāyapariyāpannameva labbhati. Vitthāro panettha diṭṭhavāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
单一身等节的注释显示巴利原文
Ekattavārādivaṇṇanā
6 如此,以见等四种方式宣说了所有有身分别后,现在再以入定者与未入定者两门开示,而说“一性”“差异性”等。显示巴利原文
6. Evaṃ sabbaṃ sakkāyabhedaṃ diṭṭhādīhi catūhi dassetvā idāni tameva samāpannakavārena ca asamāpannakavārena ca dvidhā dassento ekattaṃ nānattantiādimāha.
说“一性”,是为了开示入定者的方式;说“差异性”,是为了开示未入定者的方式。它们的意思是:一体性即是“一性”,异体性即是“差异性”。至于结合的方式,应依教法之理,将入定者依四蕴、未入定者依五蕴分别开示,如“观色为我”等,并依大地品等注疏所述的方式善加审察而了知。又,有人认为“一性”为一性之理趣,“差异性”为差异性之理趣。还有人执着于这样的见:“有一性想之我,无病,死后为最上者”、“有差异性想之我”等。而这些均非此处所许,故全不合理。显示巴利原文
Ekattanti iminā hi samāpannakavāraṃ dasseti. Nānattanti iminā asamāpannakavāraṃ. Tesaṃ ayaṃ vacanattho ekabhāvo ekattaṃ. Nānābhāvo nānattanti. Yojanā panettha samāpannakavāraṃ catūhi khandhehi, asamāpannakavārañca pañcahi khandhehi bhinditvā ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā sāsananayena pathavīvārādīsu vuttena ca aṭṭhakathānayena yathānurūpaṃ vīmaṃsitvā veditabbā. Keci pana ekattanti ekattanayaṃ vadanti nānattanti nānattanayaṃ. Apare ‘‘ekattasaññī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, nānattasaññī attā hotī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhābhinivesaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ idha nādhippetattā ayuttameva hoti.
如此,将一切有身以两种方式显示之后,现在再将它们归纳为一种方式而显示,而说了「一切,一切」等。这里的联结方法应当这样理解:乐于一切者,乃是以渴爱的‘认为’而认为一切;认为‘这些有情是我所化’等,则是以慢的‘认为’而认为一切;认为‘一切由过去所作业为因’、‘一切由主宰者所化作因’、‘一切无因无缘’、‘一切存在’、‘一切不存在’等,则是以邪见的‘认为’而认为一切。那么,如何在一切中认为呢?比如,有人持这样的见解:‘我拥有一个大我。’他构想一切世间众生的共住处即是那个大我的处所,于是认为:‘我的这个我,就在一切之中。’这便是他的邪见认为。而他对这个我生起爱著,并由此生起慢心,也应知是渴爱认为与慢认为。其余内容,当如大地品中所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbaṃ sakkāyaṃ dvidhā dassetvā idāni tameva ekadhā sampiṇḍetvā dassento sabbaṃ sabbatotiādimāha. Yojanānayo panettha sabbaṃ assādento sabbaṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Mayā ete sattā nimmitā’’tiādinā nayena attanā nimmitaṃ maññanto sabbaṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Sabbaṃ pubbekatakammahetu, sabbaṃ issaranimmānahetu, sabbaṃ ahetuapaccayā, sabbaṃ atthi, sabbaṃ natthī’’tiādinā nayena maññanto sabbaṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti veditabbo. Kathaṃ sabbasmiṃ maññati? Idhekacco evaṃdiṭṭhiko hoti ‘‘mahā me attā’’ti. So sabbalokasannivāsaṃ tassokāsabhāvena parikappetvā so kho pana me ayaṃ attā sabbasminti maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attani sinehaṃ tabbatthukañca mānaṃ uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Sesaṃ pathavīvāre vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
如此,将一切有身以一种方式显示之后,现在再用另一种方式来将其作为一种显示,而说了「涅槃,涅槃」等。在这里,「涅槃」应理解为:如“尊者,当这个我具足五种妙欲、充分享用之时,尊者,此时这个我便证得了最上见法涅槃”等,依这种方式以五种方式所说的最上见法涅槃。在那里,若乐于涅槃,便是以渴爱的‘认为’来认为涅槃;若由于这个涅槃而生起慢心,认为‘我证得了涅槃’,便是以慢的‘认为’来认为涅槃;而明明不是涅槃,却将它执为涅槃、执为常等,便是以邪见的‘认为’来认为涅槃。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbaṃ sakkāyaṃ ekadhā dassetvā idāni aparenapi nayena taṃ ekadhā dassento nibbānaṃ nibbānatoti āha. Tattha nibbānanti ‘‘yato kho, bho, ayaṃ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgibhūto paricāreti. Ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṃ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ patto hotī’’tiādinā nayena pañcadhā āgataṃ paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha nibbānaṃ assādento taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Tena nibbānena ‘‘ahamasmi nibbānaṃ patto’’ti mānaṃ janento mānamaññanāya maññati. Anibbānaṃyeva samānaṃ taṃ nibbānato niccādito ca gaṇhanto diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti veditabbo.
然而,当有人执取了一个与涅槃不同的‘我’,并这样认为:‘这个我就在此涅槃中’,这就是他对于涅槃的‘见之妄想’。而且,当他对这同一个‘我’生起爱着,并生起以此为因的慢时,也应当知道这是‘渴爱与慢的妄想’。同样的道理也适用于从涅槃生起的妄想。因为在那里,他也执取了一个与涅槃不同的‘我’,并认为‘这是涅槃,这是我,而我的这个我是与此涅槃不同的’,这样从涅槃生起妄想,这就是他的‘见之妄想’;并且,当他对这同一个‘我’生起爱着和以此为因的慢时,也应当知道这是‘渴爱与慢的妄想’。又,如果有人这样认为:‘啊!我的涅槃是快乐的!’那么应当知道,这是在‘涅槃是我的’上面妄想。其余的部分,和前面说过的一样。这里有一个摄颂:显示巴利原文
Nibbānato pana aññaṃ attānaṃ gahetvā so kho pana me ayaṃ attā imasmiṃ nibbāneti maññanto nibbānasmiṃ maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attani sinehaṃ tabbatthukañca mānaṃ uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Esa nayo nibbānato maññanāyapi. Tatrapi hi nibbānato aññaṃ attānaṃ gahetvā ‘‘idaṃ nibbānaṃ, ayaṃ attā, so kho pana me ayaṃ attā ito nibbānato añño’’ti maññanto nibbānato maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attani sinehaṃ tabbatthukañca mānaṃ uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. ‘‘Aho sukhaṃ mama nibbāna’’nti maññanto pana nibbānaṃ meti maññatīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayaṃ panettha anugīti –
这有身是怎样的呢?当凡夫对它不如实了知时,
在那凡夫的有身上,便生起一切妄想。
这有身可厌、易碎,是苦的,没有引导者;
愚者却视其为相违,执取不舍,由此生起妄想。
随观此身为净、为乐者;
犹如飞蛾扑火,因渴爱而生起妄想。
他执持恒常想,观见其成就;
如同粪便等之于粪便,由慢而生的妄想。
无智者观察时,便见‘我、我所、我的’;
犹如愚者面对镜中的影像,由见而生起妄想。
而这所谓的妄想,乃是微细的魔缚;
它松缓却难以断除,凡夫因此被它系缚。
即使剧烈挣扎,也无法超越‘有身’;
犹如被拴在竖立着的坚固柱子上的狗。
贤善者们,我这样告诉你们:你们应当随观有身;
以不可乐、不净、坏灭、无我而随观。
此即其本性,觉者如是观察此人;
断除一切妄想,解脱一切苦。
显示巴利原文 Yādiso esa sakkāyo, tathā naṃ avijānato; Puthujjanassa sakkāye, jāyanti sabbamaññanā. Jeguccho bhiduro cāyaṃ, dukkho apariṇāyako; Taṃ paccanīkato bālo, gaṇhaṃ gaṇhāti maññanaṃ. Subhato sukhato ceva, sakkāyaṃ anupassato; Salabhasseva aggimhi, hoti taṇhāya maññanā. Niccasaññaṃ adhiṭṭhāya, sampattiṃ tassa passato; Gūthādī viya gūthasmiṃ, hoti mānena maññanā. Attā attaniyo meti, passato naṃ abuddhino; Ādāse viya bondhissa, diṭṭhiyā hoti maññanā. Maññanāti ca nāmetaṃ, sukhumaṃ mārabandhanaṃ; Sithilaṃ duppamuñcañca, yena baddho puthujjano. Bahuṃ vipphandamānopi, sakkāyaṃ nātivattati; Samussitaṃ daḷhatthambhaṃ, sāva gaddulabandhano. Sa’so sakkāyamalīno, jātiyā ca jarāya ca; Rogādīhi ca dukkhehi, niccaṃ haññati bāḷhaso. Taṃ vo vadāmi bhaddante, sakkāyaṃ anupassatha; Asātato asubhato, bhedato ca anattato. Eso sabhāvo hetassa, passaṃ evamimaṃ budho; Pahāya maññanā sabbā, sabbadukkhā pamuccatīti.
有学品第二道理释显示巴利原文
Sekkhavāradutiyanayavaṇṇanā
7 如此,世尊开示了凡夫于地等所依处、作为一切有身法根本的转起之后,现在为了说明有学于那些同样的所依处的转起,而说:“诸比丘,若有比丘是有学……”等等。其中,‘yo’是总说之词;‘so’是详说之词。‘pi’字表示聚合,正如在“这也是法,是不定”等句子中那样。而且,这是依所缘的同类性来统合人,而不是依人本身的同类性,因为前者是见坏失者,此处则是具见者,两者之间并无同类性。然而,所缘对前者是如此,对这些有学也是如此。因此说:“依所缘的同类性统合人,而不是依人本身的同类性”。而‘yopi so’这整个词句,应理解为是为了指出现在所要说的有学。至于‘诸比丘,比丘’这一句,则如前文所述的方式理解。显示巴利原文
7. Evaṃ bhagavā pathavīādīsu vatthūsu sabbasakkāyadhammamūlabhūtaṃ puthujjanassa pavattiṃ dassetvā idāni tesveva vatthūsu sekkhassa pavattiṃ dassento yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekkhotiādimāha. Tattha yoti uddesavacanaṃ. Soti niddesavacanaṃ. Pikāro sampiṇḍanattho ayampi dhammo aniyatotiādīsu viya. Tena ca ārammaṇasabhāgena puggalaṃ sampiṇḍeti, no puggalasabhāgena, heṭṭhato hi puggalā diṭṭhivipannā, idha diṭṭhisampannā, na tesaṃ sabhāgatā atthi. Ārammaṇaṃ pana heṭṭhā puggalānampi tadeva, imesampi tadevāti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ārammaṇasabhāgena puggalaṃ sampiṇḍeti no puggalasabhāgenā’’ti. Yopi soti iminā pana sakalena vacanena idāni vattabbaṃ sekkhaṃ dassetīti veditabbo. Bhikkhave, bhikkhūti idaṃ vuttanayameva.
‘有学’以何义而称为有学?因已获得有学之法,故为有学。正如所说:‘尊者,怎样才成为有学呢?比丘们,于此,比丘具足有学正见……乃至……具足有学正定。比丘们,至此程度便成为有学。’(《相应部》5.13)再者,因为正在学习,故亦是有学。正如所说:‘比丘,正因为学习,故称为“有学”。他学习什么?他学习增上戒,亦学习增上心,亦学习增上慧。比丘,正因为学习,故称为“有学”。’(《增支部》3.86)显示巴利原文
Sekkhoti kenaṭṭhena sekkho? Sekkhadhammappaṭilābhato sekkho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, sekkho hotīti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekkhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato hoti…pe… sekkhena sammāsamādhinā samannāgato hoti. Ettāvatā kho bhikkhu, sekkho hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.13). Apica sikkhatītipi sekkho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘sikkhatīti kho bhikkhu tasmā sekkhoti vuccati. Kiñca sikkhati? Adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati, sikkhatīti kho bhikkhu tasmā sekkhoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.86).
即使那位善凡夫,是随顺道上的圆满修行者,戒行具足,于诸根守护根门,饮食知量,初夜后夜精勤警寤,修习菩提分法而住,怀着‘今天或明天我要证得某个沙门果’的心念,他也被称为‘学习’,故是‘有学’。然而,就此义而言,已得通达者方为‘有学’,而非凡夫。显示巴利原文
Yopi kalyāṇaputhujjano anulomapaṭipadāya paripūrakārī sīlasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto pubbarattāpararattaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto viharati – ‘‘ajja vā sve vā aññataraṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ adhigamissāmī’’ti, sopi vuccati sikkhatīti sekkhoti. Imasmiṃ panatthe paṭivedhappattova sekkho adhippeto, no puthujjano.
‘未得’(appattaṃ)与‘心’(mānasa)合为‘未得心者’(appattamānaso)。所谓‘心’(mānasa),可指贪、心,亦可指阿拉汉果。在‘游于空中的罗网,那个游于心者’(《大品》33;《相应部》1.151)中,‘心’是指贪。在‘心、意、识’(《法集论》65)中,是指心。在‘未得心者,有学,他应作时,众生啊’(《相应部》1.159)中,则是指阿拉汉果。此处亦指阿拉汉果。因此,其意为‘未证得阿拉汉果者’。显示巴利原文
Appattaṃ mānasaṃ etenāti appattamānaso. Mānasanti rāgopi cittampi arahattampi. ‘‘Antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso’’ti (mahāva. 33; saṃ. ni. 1.151) ettha hi rāgo mānasaṃ. ‘‘Cittaṃ mano mānasa’’nti (dha. sa. 65) ettha cittaṃ. ‘‘Appattamānaso sekkho, kālaṃ kayirā janesutā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.159) ettha arahattaṃ. Idhāpi arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Tena appattārahattoti vuttaṃ hoti.
‘无上’(anuttara)即是最殊胜、无与伦比之义。‘轭安稳’(yogakkhema)是指从四种轭中获得安稳、不再系属,也正指阿拉汉果。‘希求’(patthayamāna)有两种:渴爱的希求与善法欲的希求。在‘对于希求者,确有种种愿求;对于构想者,则有动摇’(《经集》908)中,所说的是渴爱的希求。显示巴利原文
Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ, asadisanti attho. Catūhi yogehi khemaṃ ananuyuttanti yogakkhemaṃ, arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Patthayamānoti dve patthanā taṇhāpatthanā ca, chandapatthanā ca. ‘‘Patthayamānassa hi pajappitāni, pavedhitaṃ vāpi pakappitesū’’ti (su. ni. 908) ettha taṇhāpatthanā.
已断魔流,已摧毁、已坏灭;
比丘们,你们应当满怀欢喜,已抵达安稳。’(《中部》1.352)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Chinnaṃ pāpimato sotaṃ, viddhastaṃ vinaḷīkataṃ; Pāmojjabahulā hotha, khemaṃ pattattha bhikkhavo’’ti. (ma. ni. 1.352) –
此处的‘欲作’(kattukamyatā),即是对善法的希求与愿欲。这里所指的正是这种希求。因此,‘希求者’应理解为:渴望那轭安稳、想要获得、想要证得,心倾向于它、面向它、趋向它而住。‘住’(viharati)是指以另一种威仪截断前一种威仪之苦,维持不衰竭的身体。或者,也可依据‘以信胜解一切行无常而住’等教示的方式来理解此义。‘证知地依地’:即依地的自性而证知地,并非像凡夫那样以全然颠倒的想而认知,而是以殊胜的智慧去了知。也就是说,他确定‘地’就是此地性,并证知它为无常、苦、无我。这样证知后,便说‘不妄想地’。‘妄想’即是妄想。对这有学,既不能称为‘妄想者’,也不能称为‘不妄想者’,那是无法说的。要知道,这里是为了表达这一意义而转用的词。那么,此处的意旨是什么呢?凡夫因未断除一切妄想,故被称为‘妄想者’;漏尽者因已断除,故‘不妄想’。然而,有学已断除了见的妄想,其余妄想也变得薄弱,因此,他既不能像凡夫那样被称为‘妄想者’,也不能像漏尽者那样被称为‘不妄想者’。显示巴利原文
Ettha kattukamyatā kusalacchandapatthanā. Ayameva idhādhippetā. Tena patthayamānoti taṃ yogakkhemaṃ pattukāmo adhigantukāmo tanninno tappoṇo tappabbhāroti veditabbo. Viharatīti aññaṃ iriyāpathadukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ kāyaṃ harati. Atha vā ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti adhimuccanto saddhāya viharatī’’tiādināpi niddesanayenettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Pathaviṃ pathavito abhijānātīti pathaviṃ pathavībhāvena abhijānāti, na puthujjano viya sabbākāraviparītāya saññāya sañjānāti. Apica kho abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena jānāti, evaṃ pathavīti etaṃ pathavībhāvaṃ adhimuccanto eva naṃ aniccātipi dukkhātipi anattātipi evaṃ abhijānātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evañca naṃ abhiññatvā pathaviṃ mā maññīti vuttaṃ hoti. Maññatīti maññi. Ayaṃ pana maññī ca na maññī ca na vattabboti. Etasmiñhi atthe idaṃ padaṃ nipātetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ko panettha adhippāyoti. Vuccate, puthujjano tāva sabbamaññanānaṃ appahīnattā maññatīti vutto. Khīṇāsavo pahīnattā na maññatīti. Sekkhassa pana diṭṭhimaññanā pahīnā, itarā pana tanubhāvaṃ gatā, tena so maññatītipi na vattabbo puthujjano viya, na maññatītipi na vattabbo khīṇāsavo viyāti.
‘其所应遍知’:对于那个有学来说,这个所思量的对象,因为他已经进入决定胜的位次,且趋向于菩提道,所以应当用三遍知来遍知它。这不像凡夫那样还有未遍知、未完全了知的情况,也不像漏尽者那样已经遍知了。其余各处,都按照前面说过的道理。显示巴利原文
Pariññeyyaṃ tassāti tassa sekkhassa taṃ maññanāvatthu okkantaniyāmattā sambodhiparāyaṇattā ca tīhi pariññāhi pariññeyyaṃ, apariññeyyañca apariññātañca na hoti puthujjanassa viya, nopi pariññātaṃ khīṇāsavassa viya. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayameva.
漏尽者品第三等理趣的解释显示巴利原文
Khīṇāsavavāratatiyādinayavaṇṇanā
8 8. 这样展示了有学在地等所缘上的转起之后,现在为了说明漏尽者的转起,而说:‘诸比丘,再有那样的比丘是阿拉汉……’等等。其中,‘再有那样的’的‘pi’字是合集的意思,由此显示这里也能得到两种类同。为什么?因为有学是圣者,所以与漏尽者类同,因此能得补特伽罗类同;而所缘类同则如前所说。‘阿拉汉’的意思是:已远离烦恼、已离烦恼、已断除烦恼。这也被世尊说过:‘诸比丘,如何是比丘为阿拉汉?那些恶不善法、杂染法、导致再有、有怖畏、有苦的异熟、未来生老死的法,都已远离于他。诸比丘,这样的比丘就是阿拉汉。’(《中部》1.434)‘诸漏尽者’:有四种漏:欲漏……乃至……无明漏。这四种漏在阿拉汉那里已经灭尽、已经断除、已经永远消灭、已经止息,不可能再生起,被智火烧尽,因此称为诸漏尽者。显示巴利原文
8. Evaṃ pathavīādīsu vatthūsu sekkhassa pavattiṃ dassetvā idāni khīṇāsavassa pavattiṃ dassento yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahantiādimāha. Tattha yopīti pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena idha ubhayasabhāgatāpi labbhatīti dasseti. Sekkho hi khīṇāsavena ariyapuggalattā sabhāgo, tena puggalasabhāgatā labbhati, ārammaṇasabhāgatā pana vuttanayā eva. Arahanti ārakakileso, dūrakileso pahīnakilesoti attho. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘kathañca , bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṃ hoti? Ārakāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā saṃkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṃ hotī’’ti. (Ma. ni. 1.434) khīṇāsavoti cattāro āsavā kāmāsavo…pe… avijjāsavo, ime cattāro āsavā arahato khīṇā pahīnā samucchinnā paṭippassaddhā, abhabbuppattikā ñāṇagginā daḍḍhā, tena vuccati khīṇāsavoti.
‘已住者’:于依止共住、圣道共住及十种圣住中,已安住、已遍住、已度过、已遍度过者,即是已住者,也就是已行践者。‘已作应作’:自凡善士以上,七种有学依四种道而作应作之事;而漏尽者,一切应作皆已作、已圆满,为证苦灭更无应作之事,故称已作应作。对此亦有偈颂云:显示巴利原文
Vusitavāti garusaṃvāsepi ariyamaggasaṃvāsepi dasasu ariyavāsesupi vasi parivasi vuttho parivuttho, so vutthavāso ciṇṇacaraṇoti vusitavā katakaraṇīyoti puthujjanakalyāṇakaṃ upādāya satta sekkhā catūhi maggehi karaṇīyaṃ karonti nāma, khīṇāsavassa sabbakaraṇīyāni katāni pariyositāni, natthi tassa uttari karaṇīyaṃ dukkhakkhayādhigamāyāti katakaraṇīyo. Vuttampi hetaṃ –
“如是正解脱之比丘,内心寂静,所作已无积余,更无可作之事。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tassa sammā vimuttassa, santacittassa bhikkhuno; Katassa paṭicayo natthi, karaṇīyaṃ na vijjatī’’ti. (theragā. 642);
“已放下重担”:有三种重担——蕴重担、烦恼重担与行重担。他的这三种重担已经放下、卸下、搁置、舍弃,故称“已放下重担”。“已证自义”:已经证得了自义(sadattho),即自己的义。此处将“ka”转为“da”;“自义”应理解为阿拉汉果。因为以此摄持自身之义、不舍自身之义、自身的究竟义,故称为“自己的义”(sakattho)。显示巴利原文
Ohitabhāroti tayo bhārā khandhabhāro kilesabhāro abhisaṅkhārabhāroti, tassime tayo bhārā ohitā oropitā nikkhittā pātitā, tena vuccati ohitabhāroti. Anuppattasadatthoti anuppatto sadatthaṃ, sakatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kakārassāyaṃ dakāro kato, sadatthoti ca arahattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tañhi attupanibandhanaṭṭhena attānaṃ avijahanaṭṭhena attano paramatthaṭṭhena ca attano attho sakatthoti vuccati.
“已尽有结”:“有结”是指十种结:欲贪结、嗔结、慢结、见结、疑结、戒禁取结、有贪结、嫉妒结、悭吝结和无明结。这些结将众生系缚、拘束于种种有中,或以一种有与另一种有相连结,故称为“有结”。阿拉汉的这些有结已彻底断尽、消失,被智慧之火完全烧尽,所以说他“已尽有结”。“正知解脱”:此处的“正知”是指正确地、完全地了知。其含义为:正确地如实通达——蕴的蕴义、处的处义、界的界义、苦的逼迫义、集的生起义、灭的寂静义、道的照见义,以及“一切行皆无常”等差别,通过如是观察与衡量,清晰地了知、洞彻并彰显它们。显示巴利原文
Parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanoti bhavasaṃyojanānīti dasa saṃyojanāni kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭighamānadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsabhavarāgaissāmacchariyasaṃyojanaṃ avijjāsaṃyojanaṃ. Imāni hi satte bhavesu saṃyojenti upanibandhanti, bhavaṃ vā bhavena saṃyojenti, tasmā ‘‘bhavasaṃyojanānī’’ti vuccanti. Imāni bhavasaṃyojanāni arahato parikkhīṇāni pahīnāni ñāṇagginā daḍḍhāni, tena vuccati ‘‘parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojano’’ti. Sammadaññā vimuttoti ettha sammadaññāti sammā aññāya. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – khandhānaṃ khandhaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ dhātuṭṭhaṃ, dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhaṃ, samudayassa pabhavaṭṭhaṃ, nirodhassa santaṭṭhaṃ, maggassa dassanaṭṭhaṃ, sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti evamādiṃ vā bhedaṃ sammā yathābhūtaṃ aññāya jānitvā tīrayitvā tulayitvā vibhāvetvā vibhūtaṃ katvāti.
“解脱”:解脱有两种,即心解脱与涅槃。阿拉汉因心已从一切烦恼中解脱,故依心解脱而解脱;因已决意于涅槃,故亦依涅槃而解脱。因此称为“正知解脱”。“他已遍知”:那位阿拉汉的妄想所依处,已由三种遍知所遍知。因此,他不再执取那个所依处而妄想,或者说不再生起那种妄想,余如前说。显示巴利原文
Vimuttoti dve vimuttiyo cittassa ca vimutti nibbānañca. Arahā sabbakilesehi vimuttacittattā cittavimuttiyāpi vimutto. Nibbānaṃ adhimuttattā nibbānepi vimutto. Tena vuccati ‘‘sammadaññā vimutto’’ti. Pariññātaṃ tassāti tassa arahato taṃ maññanāvatthu tīhi pariññāhi pariññātaṃ. Tasmā so taṃ vatthuṃ na maññati, taṃ vā maññanaṃ na maññatīti vuttaṃ hoti, sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在涅槃章中,则说了“由贪的灭尽……”等三个章节。这些也应在地遍等章节中详细展开。而且,此“已遍知”章在涅槃章中也应详细展开。展开时,应将“他的已遍知”与所有句结合,再结合“由贪的灭尽,因离贪”等。其余章节亦同此理。然而,教法于一处所说即等于于一切处所说,故此处略说。显示巴利原文
Nibbānavāre pana khayā rāgassātiādayo tayo vārā vuttā. Te pathavīvārādīsupi vitthāretabbā. Ayañca pariññātavāro nibbānavārepi vitthāretabbo. Vitthārentena ca pariññātaṃ tassāti sabbapadehi yojetvā puna khayā rāgassa vītarāgattāti yojetabbaṃ. Esa nayo itaresu. Desanā pana ekattha vuttaṃ sabbattha vuttameva hotīti saṃkhittā.
在“由贪灭尽,因离贪”一句中:因为外道于诸欲离贪,并非由贪灭尽而离贪;而阿拉汉则正是由灭尽而离贪,故说“由贪灭尽,因离贪”。于嗔、痴亦同此理。又如虽言“我说‘他的已遍知’”,其义为:因已遍知,故他不再妄想那个所依处或那种妄想;此处亦应知:因离贪,故他不再妄想那个所依处或那种妄想。显示巴利原文
Khayā rāgassa vītarāgattāti ettha ca yasmā bāhirako kāmesu vītarāgo, na khayā rāgassa vītarāgo. Arahā pana khayā yeva, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘khayā rāgassa vītarāgattā’’ti. Esa nayo dosamohesupi. Yathā ca ‘‘pariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmī’’ti vuttepi pariññātattā so taṃ vatthuṃ taṃ vā maññanaṃ na maññatīti attho hoti, evamidhāpi vītarāgattā so taṃ vatthuṃ taṃ vā maññanaṃ na maññatīti daṭṭhabbo.
在此,“他的已遍知”这一章是为了显示道修习的圆满而说;其余章则是为了显示果证得的圆满而说。或者,阿拉汉不妄想有两个原因:对所依处的遍知,以及不善根的断除。因此,以“已遍知”章显示对所依处的遍知,以其余章显示不善根的断除。其中,在后三章中应知此差别:于三章中,见贪的过患而住于随观苦者,以无愿解脱而解脱,由贪灭尽而离贪;见嗔的过患而住于随观无常者,以无相解脱而解脱,由嗔灭尽而离嗔;见痴的过患而住于随观无我者,以空解脱而解脱,由痴灭尽而离痴。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca pariññātaṃ tassāti ayaṃ vāro maggabhāvanāpāripūridassanatthaṃ vutto. Itare pana phalasacchikiriyāpāripūridassanatthanti veditabbā. Dvīhi vā kāraṇehi arahā na maññati vatthussa ca pariññātattā akusalamūlānañca samucchinnattā. Tenassa pariññātavārena vatthuno vatthupariññaṃ dīpeti, itarehi akusalamūlasamucchedanti. Tattha pacchimesu tīsu vāresu ayaṃ viseso veditabbo, tīsu hi vāresu rāge ādīnavaṃ disvā dukkhānupassī viharanto appaṇihitavimokkhena vimutto khayā rāgassa vītarāgo hoti. Dose ādīnavaṃ disvā aniccānupassī viharanto animittavimokkhena vimutto khayā dosassa vītadoso hoti. Mohe ādīnavaṃ disvā anattānupassī viharanto suññatavimokkhena vimutto khayā mohassa vītamoho hotīti.
若如此,或有人问:“岂不是一人由三种解脱而解脱?那两个部分难道不应说了?”并非如此。何以故?因为是不决定说。经中只是不决定地说:“诸比丘,凡是那位阿拉汉比丘……”,但并未说“是以无愿解脱而解脱”或“是以另一种解脱而解脱”。因此,凡与阿拉汉相应的,一切皆应说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sante na eko tīhi vimokkhehi vimuccatīti dve vārā na vattabbā siyunti ce, taṃ na. Kasmā? Aniyamitattā. Aniyamena hi vuttaṃ ‘‘yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araha’’nti. Na pana vuttaṃ appaṇihitavimokkhena vā vimutto, itarena vāti, tasmā yaṃ arahato yujjati, taṃ sabbaṃ vattabbamevāti.
或者,不加区别地说,任何一位阿拉汉,由于对变易苦遍知而令贪灭尽,故说为离贪;由于对苦苦遍知而令嗔灭尽,故说为离嗔;由于对行苦遍知而令痴灭尽,故说为离痴。或者,由于对可爱所缘遍知而令贪灭尽,故为离贪;由于对不可爱所缘遍知而令嗔灭尽,故为离嗔;由于对中性所缘遍知而令痴灭尽,故为离痴。或者,由灭尽贪、嗔、痴,并断除乐受中的贪随眠及余受中的嗔、痴随眠,故为离贪、离嗔、离痴。为显示此中差别,而说“由贪灭尽而离贪……乃至……由痴灭尽而离痴”。显示巴利原文
Avisesena vā yo koci arahā samānepi rāgādikkhaye vipariṇāmadukkhassa pariññātattā khayā rāgassa vītarāgoti vuccati, dukkhadukkhassa pariññātattā khayā dosassa vītadosoti. Saṅkhāradukkhassa pariññātattā khayā mohassa vītamohoti. Iṭṭhārammaṇassa vā pariññātattā khayā rāgassa vītarāgo. Aniṭṭhārammaṇassa pariññātattā khayā dosassa vītadoso. Majjhattārammaṇassa pariññātattā khayā mohassa vītamoho. Sukhāya vā vedanāya rāgānusayassa samucchinnattā khayā rāgassa vītarāgo, itarāsu paṭighamohānusayānaṃ samucchinnattā vītadoso vītamoho cāti. Tasmā taṃ visesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘khayā rāgassa vītarāgattā…pe… vītamohattā’’ti.
以诸漏尽者为依据,第三、第四、第五、第六部分的解说至此完毕。显示巴利原文
Khīṇāsavavasena tatiyacatutthapañcamachaṭṭhanayakathā niṭṭhitā.
《如来品·第七部分注释》显示巴利原文
Tathāgatavārasattamanayavaṇṇanā
12 如此,以地等事相显示了漏尽者的转起之后,现在为显示自身的转起,世尊说:“比丘们,如来也是如此……”等语。其中,世尊以八种理由被称为“如来”:如此来者,是为如来;如此去者,是为如来;来证知真实相者,是为如来;如实现证真实法者,是为如来;具如实见者,是为如来;具如实说者,是为如来;具如实行者,是为如来;于一切处最胜者,是为如来。显示巴利原文
12. Evaṃ pathavīādīsu vatthūsu khīṇāsavassa pavattiṃ dassetvā idāni attano pavattiṃ dassento tathāgatopi, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha tathāgatoti aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgatoti vuccati – tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathāvāditāya tathāgato, tathākāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgatoti.
世尊何以是“如此而来”的如来?如同过去诸正自觉者,为利益一切世间而奋起精勤,以如是方式而来;如同毗婆尸世尊而来,如同尸弃世尊而来,如同毗舍婆世尊而来,如同拘留孙世尊而来,如同拘那含世尊而来,如同迦叶世尊而来。这是什么意思呢?即:彼诸世尊以何种愿行而来,我们的世尊也以同样的愿行而来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhagavā tathā āgatoti tathāgato? Yathā sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannā purimakā sammāsambuddhā āgatā, yathā vipassī bhagavā āgato, yathā sikhī bhagavā, yathā vessabhū bhagavā, yathā kakusandho bhagavā, yathā koṇāgamano bhagavā, yathā kassapo bhagavā āgatoti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yena abhinīhārena ete bhagavanto āgatā, teneva amhākampi bhagavā āgato.
再者,又如毗婆尸世尊……乃至……迦叶世尊,圆满布施巴拉密,圆满戒、出离、智慧、精进、忍耐、真实、决意、慈、舍巴拉密,如此圆满十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十究竟波罗蜜,即圆满三十种波罗蜜;又作五大舍弃:捐舍肢体、捐舍眼睛、捐舍财富、捐舍王国、捐舍妻子儿女;圆满了前际瑜伽、前际行、法开示、知义行等,到达智慧行的顶点而来。同样,我们的世尊也是如此而来。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā dānapāramiṃ pūretvā, sīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāpāramiṃ pūretvā, imā dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti, samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā, aṅgapariccāgaṃ nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajitvā pubbayogapubbacariyadhammakkhānañātatthacariyādayo pūretvā, buddhicariyāya koṭiṃ patvā āgato, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato.
如同毗婆尸世尊……乃至……迦叶世尊,修习、增修四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道而来;同样,我们的世尊也是如此而来,故名如来。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne sammappadhāne iddhipāde pañcindriyāni pañca balāni satta bojjhaṅge ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetvā brūhetvā āgato, tathā amhākaṃ bhagavāpi āgatoti tathāgato.
正如毗婆尸等诸大牟尼,已证得一切知性而出现于此世间;这位释迦牟尼佛也同样来到,因此称为如来。
诸牟尼已证得一切知性,来此世间;
同样,这位释迦牟尼也已来此世间,
因此,他被称为如来,也因此而被称作具眼者。
显示巴利原文 Yatheva lokamhi vipassiādayo, Sabbaññubhāvaṃ munayo idhāgatā; Tathā ayaṃ sakyamunīpi āgato, Tathāgato vuccati tena cakkhumāti.
如此,因真实地到达,所以称为如来。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tathā āgatoti tathāgato.
再者,为何说如来是依‘真实到达’而称为如来呢?正如世尊毗婆尸佛那样到达……乃至世尊迦叶佛那样到达。那么,他是如何到达的呢?他一出生,便以平展的双足立在大地上,面朝北方,威仪具足地迈出七步。正如经中所说:‘阿难,菩萨一出生,便以平展的双足立于大地,面朝北方,迈出七步,威仪而行。当白色伞盖被举起时,他环视一切方向,发出狮子吼:“我是世间至尊,我是世间最长,我是世间最胜。此是最后一生,不再有后有。”’(《中部》3.207)显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato. Yathā sampatijāto vipassī bhagavā gato…pe… kassapo bhagavā gato. Kathañca so gatoti, so hi sampatijātova samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gato. Yathāha – sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati setamhi chatte anudhārīyamāne, sabbā ca disā anuviloketi, āsabhiñca vācaṃ bhāsati ‘‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’ti (ma. ni. 3.207).
他这样的行走是真实不虚的,成为了众多殊胜成就的前兆。他刚一出生便以平展的双脚站立,预示着他将证得四神足;面向北方,预示着他将超越一切世间;迈出七步,预示着他将证得七觉支宝。如‘金柄的拂尘飘扬’(《经集》693)所说,拂尘挥动,预示着他将摧伏一切外道;举起白伞盖,预示着他将获得最胜清净解脱的阿拉汉果——白伞盖;观察一切方向,预示着他将证得无碍的一切知智;宣说狮子吼,预示着他将转动不退转的胜法轮。这位世尊也正是如此到达的,因此他的行走也因成为那些殊胜成就的前兆而真实不虚。所以古德们说:显示巴利原文
Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Yañhi so sampatijātova samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahi, idamassa caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Uttarābhimukhabhāvo pana sabbalokuttarabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ. Sattapadavītihāro sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa. ‘‘Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā’’ti (su. ni. 693) ettha vutto cāmarukkhepo sabbatitthiyanimmathanassa. Setacchattadhāraṇaṃ arahattavimuttivaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassa. Sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa. Āsabhīvācābhāsanaṃ appaṭivattiyavaradhammacakkappavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato. Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ tesaññeva visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Tenāhu porāṇā –
犹如牛王方降世,
便以平展之足踏大地;
乔达摩迈出七步,
诸天举起白色伞盖相随。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Muhuttajātova gavampatī yathā, Samehi pādehi phusī vasundharaṃ; So vikkamī satta padāni gotamo, Setañca chattaṃ anudhārayuṃ marū. Gantvāna so satta padāni gotamo, Disā vilokesi samā samantato; Aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ giramabbhudīrayī, Sīho yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti. –
如此,因为已经这样到达,所以称为“如来”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato.
或者,如同毗婆尸世尊……乃至……如同迦叶世尊,这位世尊也以同样的方式到达:他通过出离舍弃欲贪,通过无嗔舍弃嗔恚,通过光明想舍弃昏沉睡眠,通过无散乱舍弃掉举与恶作,通过法决定舍弃疑;他以智慧破除无明,以喜悦消除不乐;以初禅打开诸盖之门,以第二禅平息寻与伺之烟,以第三禅远离喜,以第四禅舍弃乐与苦;通过空无边处定,超越色想、有对想与种种想;通过识无边处定,超越空无边处想;通过无所有处定,超越识无边处想;通过非想非非想处定,超越无所有处想,如此到达。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā, ayampi bhagavā tatheva nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ pahāya gato. Abyāpādena byāpādaṃ, ālokasaññāya thinamiddhaṃ, avikkhepena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ, dhammavavatthānena vicikicchaṃ pahāya, ñāṇena avijjaṃ padāletvā, pāmojjena aratiṃ vinodetvā, paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā, dutiyajjhānena vitakkavicāradhūmaṃ vūpasametvā, tatiyajjhānena pītiṃ virājetvā, catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ pahāya, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā rūpasaññāpaṭighasaññānānattasaññāyo samatikkamitvā, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṃ, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ samatikkamitvā gato.
以无常随观舍弃常想,以苦观舍弃乐想,以无我随观舍弃我想,以厌离观舍弃喜,以离欲观舍弃贪,以灭观舍弃集,以舍离观舍弃执取,以尽观舍弃密集想,以衰观舍弃造作,以变易观舍弃恒常想,以无相观舍弃相,以无愿观舍弃愿求,以空观舍弃执著,以增上慧法观舍弃执取核心的执著,以如实智见舍弃痴迷的执著,以过患观舍弃爱著的执著,以省察观舍弃不省察,以回转观舍弃结缚的执著;以入流道摧毁与见相应的烦恼,以一来道舍弃粗重烦恼,以不来道拔除伴随微细的烦恼,以阿拉汉道根绝一切烦恼后到达。如此,也因为这样到达,所以称为“如来”。显示巴利原文
Aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ pahāya, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññaṃ, anattānupassanāya attasaññaṃ, nibbidānupassanāya nandiṃ, virāgānupassanāya rāgaṃ, nirodhānupassanāya samudayaṃ, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānaṃ, khayānupassanāya ghanasaññaṃ, vayānupassanāya āyūhanaṃ, vipariṇāmānupassanāya dhuvasaññaṃ, animittānupassanāya nimittaṃ, appaṇihitānupassanāya paṇidhiṃ, suññatānupassanāya abhinivesaṃ, adhipaññādhammavipassanāya sārādānābhinivesaṃ, yathābhūtañāṇadassanena sammohābhinivesaṃ, ādīnavānupassanāya ālayābhinivesaṃ, paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya appaṭisaṅkhaṃ, vivaṭṭānupassanāya saṃyogābhinivesaṃ, sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhekaṭṭhe kilese bhañjitvā, sakadāgāmimaggena oḷārike kilese pahāya, anāgāmimaggena aṇusahagate kilese samugghāṭetvā, arahattamaggena sabbakilese samucchinditvā gato. Evampi tathā gatoti tathāgato.
如何因通达真实之相而称为如来?地界的坚硬相是真实、不虚假的;水界的流动相、火界的温热相、风界的支持相、空界的不触相、识界的了别相,也都是真实、不虚假的。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato. Pathavīdhātuyā kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Āpodhātuyā paggharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Tejodhātuyā uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ. Vāyodhātuyā vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Ākāsadhātuyā asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ . Viññāṇadhātuyā vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
「色」的特征是变坏,「受」的特征是感受,「想」的特征是认知,「行」的特征是造作,「识」的特征是了知。显示巴利原文
Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Saññāya sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
「寻」的特征是将心投向目标,「伺」的特征是反复审察目标,「喜」的特征是弥漫充满,「乐」的特征是舒适,「心一境性」的特征是不散乱,「触」的特征是接触。显示巴利原文
Vitakkassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vicārassa anumajjanalakkhaṇaṃ. Pītiyā pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Sukhassa sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Cittekaggatāya avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信根以胜解为相,精进根以策励为相,念根以安住为相,定根以不散乱为相,慧根以了知为相。显示巴利原文
Saddhindriyassa adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyindriyassa paggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Satindriyassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhindriyassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Paññindriyassa pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信力以于无信不可动摇为相,精进力以于懈怠不可动摇为相,念力以于失念不可动摇为相,定力以于掉举不可动摇为相,慧力以于无明不可动摇为相。显示巴利原文
Saddhābalassa assaddhiye akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyabalassa kosajje. Satibalassa muṭṭhasacce. Samādhibalassa uddhacce. Paññābalassa avijjāya akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ.
念觉支以安住为相,择法觉支以简择为相,精进觉支以策励为相,喜觉支以遍满为相,轻安觉支以止息为相,定觉支以不散乱为相,舍觉支以省察为相。显示巴利原文
Satisambojjhaṅgassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pavicayalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa paggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Pītisambojjhaṅgassa pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa upasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇaṃ.
正见的特征是了见。正思惟的特征是投向。正语的特征是摄持。正业的特征是发起。正命的特征是清净。正精进的特征是策励。正念的特征是安住。正定的特征是不散乱。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsaṅkappassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāvācāya pariggāhalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammākammantassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāājīvassa vodānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāvāyāmassa paggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsatiyā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsamādhissa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ.
无明的特征是无知。行的特征是思。识的特征是了别。名的特征是倾向。色的特征是变坏。六处的特征是处。触的特征是接触。受的特征是感受。渴爱的特征是因。取的特征是执取。有的特征是积聚。生的特征是产生。老的特征是衰败。死的特征是死没。显示巴利原文
Avijjāya aññāṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Nāmassa namanalakkhaṇaṃ. Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ. Saḷāyatanassa āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇaṃ. Upādānassa gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Bhavassa āyūhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Jātiyā nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ. Jarāya jīraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Maraṇassa cutilakkhaṇaṃ.
诸界的特征是空。诸处的特征是处。诸念处的特征是安住。诸正勤的特征是精勤。诸神足的特征是成就。诸根的特征是增上。诸力的特征是不动摇。诸觉支的特征是出离。道的特征是因。显示巴利原文
Dhātūnaṃ suññatālakkhaṇaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānānaṃ upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammappadhānānaṃ padahanalakkhaṇaṃ. Iddhipādānaṃ ijjhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Indriyānaṃ adhipatilakkhaṇaṃ. Balānaṃ akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ. Bojjhaṅgānaṃ niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ. Maggassa hetulakkhaṇaṃ.
“诸谛”的相是真实;“止”的相是不散乱;“观”的相是随观;“止观”的相是一味;“双运”的相是不相逾越。显示巴利原文
Saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ. Samathassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Vipassanāya anupassanālakkhaṇaṃ. Samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasalakkhaṇaṃ. Yuganandhānaṃ anativattanalakkhaṇaṃ.
“戒清净”的相是防护;“心清净”的相是不散乱;“见清净”的相是照见。显示巴利原文
Sīlavisuddhiyā saṃvaralakkhaṇaṃ. Cittavisuddhiyā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Diṭṭhivisuddhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ.
“尽智”的相是断;“无生智”的相是轻安;“欲”的相是根本;“作意”的相是发起;“触”的相是和合;“受”的相是集起;“定”的相是上首;“念”的相是增上;“慧”的相是更上;“解脱”的相是心髓;不死之深处——涅槃,其相是究竟,它是真实不虚的。如是,那位具足真实相者,以智为道而来,无有偏离地证得,并非不证得,因此称为如来;正因为以这真实相而来,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Khayeñāṇassa samucchedalakkhaṇaṃ. Anuppāde ñāṇassa passaddhilakkhaṇaṃ. Chandassa mūlalakkhaṇaṃ. Manasikārassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa samodhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya samosaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhissa pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ. Satiyā ādhipateyyalakkhaṇaṃ. Paññāya tatuttarilakkhaṇaṃ. Vimuttiyā sāralakkhaṇaṃ. Amatogadhassa nibbānassa pariyosānalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā āgato avirajjhitvā patto anuppattoti tathāgato, evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato.
如何以‘如实已正觉真实法’而称为如来?‘真实法’(tathadhamma)即四圣谛。正如世尊所说:‘诸比丘,有此四种真实、不虚假、不变异。哪四种?“此是苦”,诸比丘,这是真实的,是不虚假的,是不变异的。’(《相应部》5.1050)广说乃至。世尊已正觉那些法,故因已正觉此真实法而被称为如来。此处,‘来’(gata)字即‘已正觉’之义。再者,老死以生为缘而生起、集起之理,是真实、不虚假、不变异的;……乃至……诸行以无明为缘而生起、集起之理,是真实、不虚假、不变异的。同样,无明作为诸行之缘的义理,是真实、不虚假、不变异的;诸行作为识之缘的义理……乃至……生作为老死之缘的义理,皆是真实、不虚假、不变异的。这一切,世尊皆已正觉,故因已正觉此真实法,亦被称为如来。如此,因如实已正觉真实法,故是如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato? Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni. Yathāha ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni. Katamāni cattāri, idaṃ dukkhanti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1050) vitthāro. Tāni ca bhagavā abhisambuddho, tasmā tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Abhisambuddhattho hi ettha gatasaddo. Apica jarāmaraṇassa jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe… saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Tathā avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho. Saṅkhārānaṃ viññāṇassa paccayaṭṭho…pe… jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho, tasmāpi tathānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Evaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato.
如何以‘如实见’(tathadassitā)而称为如来?世尊于含天神的世间……乃至含天人的世间,在无量世界界中,对无量众生眼门所现前的色所缘,以一切方式了知、彻见。当他如是了知、彻见时,依可爱与不可爱等,或依见、闻、觉、识中所获得的概念,将‘那色、色处是什么?那色是依于四大种的颜色、形貌、可见、有对、青、黄……’(《法集论》616)等,以多种名称、十三轮、五十二种方式进行分析,而其所成立的唯有真实,毫无虚妄。对耳门等现前而来的声等,也是如此。而且这也是世尊所说的:‘诸比丘,于含天神的世间……乃至含天人的世间中,所见、所闻、所觉、所识、所得、所寻求、心意所伺察的,我都了知。……我都证知,那是如来所了知的,但如来不执取它。’(《增支部》4.24)如此,以‘如实见’而称为如来。此处,应知‘如来’一词,是基于‘如实见’的意义而安立的。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato? Bhagavā yaṃ sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchantaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi. Taṃ sabbākārato jānāti, passati. Evaṃ jānatā passatā ca tena taṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasena vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu labbhamānakapadavasena vā ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, yaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’nti (dha. sa. 616) ādinā nayena anekehi nāmehi terasahi vārehi dvepaññāsāya nayehi vibhajjamānaṃ tathameva hoti, vitathaṃ natthi. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi āpāthamāgacchantesu saddādīsu. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sadevamanussāya diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, tamahaṃ jānāmi, …tamahaṃ abhiññāsiṃ, taṃ tathāgatassa viditaṃ, taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24). Evaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato. Tattha tathadassīatthe tathāgatoti padasambhavo veditabbo.
如何以‘如实说’(tathāvāditā)而称为如来?世尊在菩提座上,坐于‘未伏’(aparājita)的跏趺座,摧破三魔之顶,证得无上正等觉的那个夜晚,与他于双娑罗树间入‘无余涅槃界’般涅槃的那个夜晚,在这之间的四十五年间,无论是最初成等正觉时、中间成等正觉时,还是最后成等正觉时,世尊所说的修多罗、祇夜……乃至吠陀罗,这一切从义理和文句上,皆无可指责、无有缺减或增益、一切行相圆满、能摧伏贪欲烦恼、摧伏嗔恚和愚痴烦恼。其中连毫毛尖端那么一点的过失也没有。一切犹如用同一印鑑盖印,用同一量器衡量,用同一秤称量那样,唯有真实,毫无虚妄。因此,佛说:‘尊那,如来证得无上正等觉的那个夜晚,和他入无余涅槃界般涅槃的那个夜晚,在这两者之间,他所说、所谈、所指示的一切,都是真实的,非是别异。因此被称为如来。’(《增支部》4.23)此处,‘来’字即‘说’之义。如此,以‘如实说’而称为如来。再者,‘言说’(āgada)即‘话语’。拥有真实不颠倒的话语,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathāvāditāya tathāgato? Yaṃ rattiṃ bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisinno tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ madditvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, yañca rattiṃ yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇe kāle paṭhamabodhiyāpi majjhimabodhiyāpi pacchimabodhiyāpi yaṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthato ca byañjanato ca anupavajjaṃ anūnamanadhikaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ rāgamadanimmadanaṃ dosamohamadanimmadanaṃ, natthi tattha vālaggamattampi pakkhalitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekamuddikāya lañchitaṃ viya, ekanāḷiyā mitaṃ viya, ekatulāya tulitaṃ viya ca tathameva hoti avitathaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṃ etasmiṃ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati, sabbaṃ taṃ tatheva hoti no aññathā. Tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Gadaattho hi ettha gatasaddo. Evaṃ tathāvāditāya tathāgato. Apica āgadanaṃ āgado, vacananti attho. Tatho aviparīto āgado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti evametasmiṃ atthe padasiddhi veditabbā.
如何因“如实行”而称为如来?世尊的语言与身体行为相符,身体行为也与语言相符。因此,他如何说便如何行,如何行使如何说。对具有如此特质者而言,正如其言语那般,身体行为也如此运作;正如其身体行为那般,言语也如此运作,这便是如来之义。因此,世尊说:“诸比丘,如来是如说即行,如行即说。正因为如说即行、如行即说,所以称为如来。”如是,因“如实行”而称为如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato? Bhagavato hi vācāya kāyo anulometi, kāyassapi vācā. Tasmā yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī ca hoti. Evaṃbhūtassa cassa yathā vācā , kāyopi tathāgato pavattoti attho. Yathā ca kāyo, vācāpi tathā gatā pavattāti tathāgato. Tenāha ‘‘yathāvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī, tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato.
如何以“征服”之义而称为如来?他以有顶天为上界,以无间地狱为下界,于横向无量的世界界域中,以戒、以定、以慧、以解脱、以解脱知见,征服一切众生。他无可比拟,无有衡量尺度;他是不可比拟者、不可测量者、无上者、王中之王、天中之天、诸释迦中最胜之释迦、诸梵天中最胜之梵天。因此,世尊说:“诸比丘,在含天神的世间……乃至含天人的世间中,如来是征服者,不为任何所征服,是遍见者、自在主,故称如来。”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato? Upari bhavaggaṃ heṭṭhā aviciṃ pariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sabbasatte abhibhavati, sīlenapi samādhināpi paññāyapi vimuttiyāpi vimuttiñāṇadassanenapi, na tassa tulā vā pamāṇaṃ vā atthi, atulo appameyyo anuttaro rājarājo devadevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā. Tenāha ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthu daso vasavattī. Tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti.
在此,应当这样理解此词的构成:犹如“无病”(agado)即“无病者”之意。这“无病”是指什么呢?即说法善巧的庄严与福德的崇高。因为这位具大神力的良医,如同以天界神药降伏毒蛇一般,以说法善巧的庄严与福德之崇高,征服了一切外道论者及包含天神的世间。因此,在征服一切世间之义上,他那真实不虚的说法善巧之庄严与福德之崇高,便犹如“无病”之药(agado)。由此,将da音转为ta音,即成为“如来”(tathāgato)。如是,以征服之义而称为如来。显示巴利原文
Tatrevaṃ padasiddhi veditabbā, agado viya agado. Ko panesa? Desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññussayo ca. Tena hesa mahānubhāvo bhisakko dibbāgadena sappe viya sabbaparappavādino sadevakañca lokaṃ abhibhavati, iti sabbalokābhibhavane tatho aviparīto desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññassayo ca agado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti veditabbo. Evaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
再者,也可以这样理解:因为以如实的方式而行,故称如来(tathāgato);因为已如实到达,故称如来。此处的“行”(gato),意谓彻底了知、已超越、已证得、已践行。其中,依遍知(tīraṇapariññā)如实而行,彻底了知整个世间,故称如来;依断遍知(pahānapariññā)如实而行,已超越世间之集,故称如来;依证遍知(sacchikiriyā)如实而行,已证得世间之灭,故称如来;依修习如实而行,已践行导向世间灭之道,故称如来。因此,世尊曾说:“诸比丘,世间已被如来正自觉,如来已离世间的系缚;诸比丘,世间之集已被如来正自觉,世间之集已被如来断除;诸比丘,世间之灭已被如来正自觉,世间之灭已被如来作证;诸比丘,导向世间灭之道已被如来正自觉,导向世间灭之道已被如来修习。诸比丘,含括天神的世界在内……这一切,都已被如来所正自觉,因此称为如来。”(《增支部》4.23)应当如此理解其义。然而,这不过是阐明如来之所以为如来之义的一个简单入口罢了。因为,唯有如来自己,才能以一显示巴利原文
Apica tathāya gatotipi tathāgato, tathaṃ gatotipi tathāgato. Gatoti avagato, atīto, patto, paṭipannoti attho. Tattha sakalaṃ lokaṃ tīraṇapariññāya tathāya gato avagatoti tathāgato. Lokasamudayaṃ pahānapariññāya tathāya gato atītoti tathāgato. Lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāya tathāya gato pattoti tathāgato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ tathaṃ gato paṭipannoti tathāgato. Tena yaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘loko, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasmā tathāgato visaṃyutto. Lokasamudayo, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasamudayo tathāgatassa pahīno. Lokanirodho, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokanirodho tathāgatassa sacchikato. Lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā tathāgatassa bhāvitā. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ, tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Tassa evampi attho veditabbo. Idampi ca tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvadīpane mukhamattameva. Sabbākārena pana tathāgatova tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvaṃ vaṇṇeyya.
在“阿拉汉、正自觉者”(Arahaṃ sammāsambuddho)这两个词中,先当知称“阿拉汉”的原因有这几项:因为已远离(ārakattā)烦恼之敌(arīnaṃ);因为已摧毁(hatattā)如车轮辐条(arānañca)般的烦恼;因为堪受资具等的供养(paccayādīnaṃ arahattā);因为在造作恶行时没有隐秘(rahābhāvā)。正是基于这些理据,故称阿拉汉(arahant)。显示巴利原文
Arahaṃ sammāsambuddhoti padadvaye pana ārakattā arīnaṃ, arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti imehi tāva kāraṇehi arahanti veditabbo.
又因正确且亲自觉悟了一切法,故称“正自觉者”(sammāsambuddho)。此处仅为简要说明。关于这两个词,详尽解释已在《清净之道》的“佛随念”注释中阐明。显示巴利原文
Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā pana sammāsambuddhoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ padadvayaṃ visuddhimagge buddhānussativaṇṇanāyaṃ pakāsitaṃ.
对于“Pariññātantaṃ tathāgatassā”(“被遍知者,乃是如来的”)这句经文,还应理解此义:“妄想所依的对象,已被如来遍知”。“Pariññātantaṃ”意即“遍知到边际、遍知到究竟、无余遍知”。因为,虽然诸佛与声闻弟子在依各自道断除烦恼时,于断除上并无差别,但在遍知上则有不同。声闻弟子仅是遍观四界之一分而证入涅槃;然而,对于诸佛而言,即使“行所摄”之法无量无边,也没有任何一法是他们的智慧未曾见到、未曾衡量、未曾抉择、未曾现证的。显示巴利原文
Pariññātantaṃ tathāgatassāti ettha pana taṃ maññanāvatthu pariññātaṃ tathāgatassātipi attho veditabbo. Pariññātantaṃ nāma pariññātapāraṃ pariññātāvasānaṃ anavasesato pariññātanti vuttaṃ hoti. Buddhānañhi sāvakehi saddhiṃ kiñcāpi tena tena maggena kilesappahāne viseso natthi, pariññāya pana atthi. Sāvakā hi catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ ekadesameva sammasitvā nibbānaṃ pāpuṇanti. Buddhānaṃ pana aṇuppamāṇampi saṅkhāragataṃ ñāṇena adiṭṭhamatulitamatīritamasacchikataṃ natthi.
如来品第八项的注释。显示巴利原文
Tathāgatavāraaṭṭhamanayavaṇṇanā
13 在“爱喜是苦的根源”等经文中:“爱喜”指过去的渴爱。“苦”指五取蕴,“根源”指其起因。“如是了知已”:即如是了知——“过去生的爱喜是此苦的根源”。“有”指从业有而来。“生”指异熟的五蕴,这些蕴因其生起而称为“生”;或者,此处是以“生”为代表而作是說。此节亦应与“如是了知已”相合理解。其义为:“亦如是了知:从业有,再生有生起”。“已存在者”指有情。“老死”即衰老与死亡。这也就是说:“亦如是了知:由彼再生有,已存在有情的老与死,便发生于诸蕴之上。”显示巴利原文
13.Nandīdukkhassa mūlantiādīsu ca nandīti purimataṇhā. Dukkhanti pañcakkhandhā. Mūlantiādi. Itividitvāti taṃ purimabhavanandiṃ ‘‘imassa dukkhassa mūla’’nti evaṃ jānitvā. Bhavāti kammabhavato. Jātīti vipākakkhandhā. Te hi yasmā jāyanti, tasmā ‘‘jātī’’ti vuttā. Jātisīsena vā ayaṃ desanā. Etampi ‘‘iti viditvā’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ. Ayañhi ettha attho ‘‘kammabhavato upapattibhavo hotīti evañca jānitvā’’ti. Bhūtassāti sattassa. Jarāmaraṇanti jarā ca maraṇañca. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – tena upapattibhavena bhūtassa sattassa khandhānaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ hotīti evañca jānitvāti.
至此,为显示如来——那位在菩提树下、坐于不败金刚座上,通过遍察而证得一切知智者——正是由于通达了缘起,种种妄想才不生起的道理,他开示了这同一缘起,即:四概要、三连结、三时、二十行相。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā yaṃ bodhirukkhamūle aparājitapallaṅke nisinno sammasitvā sabbaññutaṃ patto, tassa paṭiccasamuppādassa paṭivedhā maññanānaṃ abhāvakāraṇaṃ dassento catusaṅkhepaṃ tisandhiṃ tiyaddhaṃ vīsatākāraṃ tameva paṭiccasamuppādaṃ dasseti.
那么,如何说至此已开示了这一切呢?在此,‘喜贪’一词为第一概要;由‘苦’一词,苦为第二概要;由‘有’与‘生’二词,有为第三概要;生老死为第四概要。应知如此便成立了四个概要,‘概要’即部分的意思。而渴爱与苦之间为一连结,苦与有之间为第二连结,有与生之间为第三连结。应知这四个概要之间的三个连结,正如四指间的三个缝隙。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ pana ettāvatā esa sabbo dassito hotīti. Ettha hi nandīti ayaṃ eko saṅkhepo. Dukkhassāti vacanato dukkhaṃ dutiyo, bhavā jātīti vacanato bhavo tatiyo, jātijarāmaraṇaṃ catuttho. Evaṃ tāva cattāro saṅkhepā veditabbā, koṭṭhāsāti attho. Taṇhādukkhānaṃ pana antaraṃ eko sandhi, dukkhassa ca bhavassa ca antaraṃ dutiyo, bhavassa ca jātiyā ca antaraṃ tatiyo. Evaṃ catunnaṃ aṅgulīnaṃ antarasadisā catusaṅkhepantarā tayo sandhī veditabbā.
其中,‘喜贪’属过去时,‘生老死’属未来时,‘苦’与‘有’属现在时。应知如此便有三时。在过去的五种行相中,由‘喜贪’一词含摄了渴爱;由此,未来的无明、行、取、有也以缘的特相而被含摄。由‘生老死’一词,那些蕴——它们的生、它们的老死——已被表达;由此,未来的识、名色、六处、触、受也一并被含摄。显示巴利原文
Tattha nandīti atīto addhā, jātijarāmaraṇaṃ anāgato, dukkhañca bhavo ca paccuppannoti evaṃ tayo addhā veditabbā. Atīte pana pañcasu ākāresu nandīvacanena taṇhā ekā āgatā, tāya anāgatāpi avijjāsaṅkhāraupādānabhavā paccayalakkhaṇena gahitāva honti. Jātijarāmaraṇavacanena pana yesaṃ khandhānaṃ tajjātijarāmaraṇaṃ, te vuttā yevāti katvā āyatiṃ viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanā gahitāva honti.
应知,二十行相的特征是如此表述的:在过去的业有中,愚痴即无明,造作即行,爱着即渴爱,执取即取,思愿即有——这五种法在过去的业有中,是此处结生的缘。在此处,结生即识,入胎即名色,感官清净即处,触境即触,感受体验即受——这五种法在此处的再生有中,是过去所作业的缘。在此处,由于诸处成熟,愚痴即无明,造作即行,爱着即渴爱,执取即取,思愿即有——这五种法在此处的业有中,是未来结生的缘。于未来,结生即识,入胎即名色,感官清净即处,触境即触,感受体验即受——这五种法在未来的再生有中,是此处所作业的缘。由以上这一切特征所安立的二十行相,应当如此了知。如是,通过‘已知喜贪是苦之根,有则有生,已生者则有老死’,应知至此已开示了具足四概要、三连结、三时、二十行相的一切缘起。显示巴利原文
Evamete ‘‘purimakammabhavasmiṃ moho avijjā, āyūhanā saṅkhārā, nikanti taṇhā, upagamanaṃ upādānaṃ, cetanā bhavo iti ime pañca dhammā purimakammabhavasmiṃ idha paṭisandhiyā paccayā. Idha paṭisandhi viññāṇaṃ, okkanti nāmarūpaṃ, pasādo āyatanaṃ, phuṭṭho phasso, vedayitaṃ vedanā iti ime pañca dhammā idhūpapattibhavasmiṃ purekatassa kammassa paccayā. Idha paripakkattā āyatanānaṃ moho avijjā, āyūhanā saṅkhārā, nikanti taṇhā, upagamanamupādānaṃ, cetanā bhavo iti ime pañca dhammā idha kammabhavasmiṃ āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyā paccayā. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhi viññāṇaṃ, okkanti nāmarūpaṃ, pasādo āyatanaṃ, phuṭṭho phasso , vedayitaṃ vedanā iti ime pañca dhammā āyatiṃ upapattibhavasmiṃ idha katassa kammassa paccayā’’ti evaṃ niddiṭṭhalakkhaṇā vīsati ākārā idha veditabbā. Evaṃ ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūlanti iti viditvā bhavā jāti, bhūtassa jarāmaraṇa’’nti ettāvatā esa sabbopi catusaṅkhepo tisandhi tiyaddho vīsatākāro paṭiccasamuppādo dassito hotīti veditabbo.
现在,对于“因此,比丘们……我已证悟无上正等正觉,我作如是说”这一句,先释其中未曾解释的词,再以词句连结而导出其义理。“因此”(tasmā tiha)即是“因此”之义,其中 ti 与 ha 为语气虚词。“一切”(sabbaso)指毫无剩余。“诸渴爱”(taṇhānaṃ)即前文所说为喜贪等的一切渴爱。“灭尽”(khayā)是由出世间道而彻底灭尽。离染、息灭、断舍、弃遣等词,皆是灭尽的同义语。当渴爱灭尽时,它们便成已离染、已息灭、已断舍、已弃遣的状态。又或,以“灭尽”为四道共同的作用,再以初道说“离染”,第二道说“息灭”,第三道说“断舍”,第四道说“弃遣”,应如此连结。也可如此连结:因为那些使人于地生起“地”想的渴爱灭尽,因为那些使人执取地想的渴爱离染,因为那些使人从地起想的渴爱息灭,因为那些使人执取“地是我所”之想的渴爱断舍,因为那些使人对地生起欢喜贪着的渴爱弃遣──如此连结,全无矛盾。显示巴利原文
Idāni tasmā tiha, bhikkhave…pe… abhisambuddhoti vadāmīti ettha apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ katvā padayojanāya atthanigamanaṃ karissāma. Tasmā tihāti tasmā icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Tikārahakārā hi nipātā. Sabbasoti anavasesavacanametaṃ. Taṇhānanti nandīti evaṃ vuttānaṃ sabbataṇhānaṃ. Khayāti lokuttaramaggena accantakkhayā. Virāgādīni khayavevacanāneva. Yā hi taṇhā khīṇā, virattāpi tā bhavanti niruddhāpi cattāpi paṭinissaṭṭhāpi. Khayāti vā catumaggakiccasādhāraṇametaṃ. Tato paṭhamamaggena virāgā, dutiyena nirodhā, tatiyena cāgā, catutthena paṭinissaggāti yojetabbaṃ. Yāhi vā taṇhāhi pathaviṃ pathavito sañjāneyya, tāsaṃ khayā. Yāhi pathaviṃ maññeyya, tāsaṃ virāgā. Yāhi pathaviyā maññeyya, tāsaṃ nirodhā. Yāhi pathavito maññeyya, tāsaṃ cāgā. Yāhi pathaviṃ meti maññeyya, tāsaṃ paṭinissaggā. Yāhi vā pathaviṃ maññeyya, tāsaṃ khayā…pe… yāhi pathaviṃ abhinandeyya, tāsaṃ paṭinissaggāti evamettha yojanā kātabbā, na kiñci virujjhati.
“无上”(anuttara)是指没有比它更高的,最为殊胜。“正等正觉”(sammāsambodhi)是指正确且亲自证得的觉悟。或者,也可说是殊胜、美妙、善好的觉悟。“觉”(bodhi)一词,可指树、道、一切知智以及涅槃。如经中说“在菩提树下初成正觉”,以及“在菩提与伽耶之间”等处,此中“觉”指树;于“四道中的智”等处,“觉”指道;于“证得殊胜广慧者之觉”等处,“觉”指一切知智;于“证得不死、无为、无造作之觉”等处,“觉”指涅槃。然而在此处,是指世尊的阿拉汉道智。另有论师说,这是指一切知智。显示巴利原文
Anuttaranti uttaravirahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Sammāsambodhinti sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ. Atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhiṃ. Bodhīti rukkhopi maggopi sabbaññutañāṇampi nibbānampi. ‘‘Bodhirukkhamūle paṭhamābhisambuddho’’ti (mahāva. 1; udā. 1) ca ‘‘antarā ca bodhiṃ antarā ca gaya’’nti (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 1.285) ca āgataṭṭhānehi rukkho bodhīti vuccati. ‘‘Catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. 121) āgataṭṭhāne maggo. ‘‘Pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso’’ti (dī. ni. 3.217) āgataṭṭhāne sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Patvāna bodhiṃ amataṃ asaṅkhata’’nti āgataṭṭhāne nibbānaṃ. Idha pana bhagavato arahattamaggañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Apare sabbaññutañāṇantipi vadanti.
声闻的阿拉汉道是否可称为无上觉?不可。为何?因为它不能生起一切功德。对于某些声闻,其阿拉汉道唯得阿拉汉果;对于另一些,则得三明;有的得六神通;有的得四无碍解;有的得声闻波罗蜜智。独觉佛的那一道,也只给予辟支菩提智。然而对于佛陀,则能圆满成就一切功德,犹如灌顶能赋予国王于一切世间的大自在。因此,其他任何觉悟皆不得称为“无上觉”。显示巴利原文
Sāvakānaṃ arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi hoti na hotīti. Na hoti. Kasmā? Asabbaguṇadāyakattā. Tesañhi kassaci arahattamaggo arahattaphalameva deti, kassaci tisso vijjā, kassaci cha abhiññā, kassaci catasso paṭisambhidā, kassaci sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ. Paccekabuddhānampi paccekabodhiñāṇameva deti. Buddhānaṃ pana sabbaguṇasampattiṃ deti abhiseko viya rañño sabbalokissariyabhāvaṃ. Tasmā aññassa kassacipi anuttarā bodhi na hotīti.
「已正觉」即已经彻底了知、通达、证得、获得的意思。「我这样说」即我说、告知、开示、施设、建立、开显、分别、阐明。此处句子间的连结是这样的:如来,比丘们……不执取于地想……于地不喜贪。那是什么原因呢?因为已经知道:‘喜贪是苦的根,有则有生,已生者则有老死。’这里的‘已知道’中,iti一词表示原因,所以意思是:因为已经了知、已经通达了这缘起。进而,由于如此了知这缘起,如来已经断尽了称为‘喜贪’的一切渴爱;而那位如来,即是由一切渴爱的灭尽……证悟了无上正等正觉。因此,‘我不执取于地想……于地不喜贪,我这样说’,意思是:正因为已正觉,所以不执取、不喜贪,我才这样说。显示巴利原文
Abhisambuddhoti abhiññāsi paṭivijjhi, patto adhigatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Iti vadāmīti iti vadāmi ācikkhāmi desemi paññapemi, paṭṭhapemi vivarāmi vibhajāmi uttānīkaromīti. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – tathāgatopi, bhikkhave…pe… pathaviṃ na maññati…pe… pathaviṃ nābhinandati. Taṃ kissa hetu, nandī dukkhassa mūlaṃ, bhavā jāti, bhūtassa jarāmaraṇanti iti viditvāti. Tattha iti viditvāti itikāro kāraṇattho. Tena imassa paṭiccasamuppādassa viditattā paṭividdhattāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiñca bhiyyo – yasmā ca evamimaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ viditvā tathāgatassa yā nandīti vuttataṇhā sabbappakārā, sā pahīnā, tāsañca tathāgato sabbaso taṇhānaṃ khayā…pe… anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho. Tasmā pathaviṃ na maññati…pe… pathaviṃ nābhinandatīti vadāmīti evaṃ abhisambuddhattā na maññati nābhinandatīti vadāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
还有另一种说法:因为以‘喜贪是苦的根源’等方法了知缘起之后,一切渴爱都归于灭尽,所以如来才说:‘比丘们,因此,如来由一切渴爱的灭尽……已正觉。’他既已这样正觉,因此不执取于地……不喜贪。事实上,在经典中,凡是不直接说‘因为’而说‘因此’之处,都应当将‘因为’这一层意思带入以作连接,这是教法的规则。这一道理适用于一切处。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yasmā ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūla’’ntiādinā nayena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ viditvā sabbaso taṇhā khayaṃ gatā, tasmā tiha, bhikkhave, tathāgato sabbaso taṇhānaṃ khayā…pe… abhisambuddhoti vadāmi. So evaṃ abhisambuddhattā pathaviṃ na maññati…pe… nābhinandatīti. Yattha yattha hi yasmāti avatvā tasmāti vuccati, tattha tattha yasmāti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ, ayaṃ sāsanayutti. Esa nayo sabbattha.
“世尊如此说”:指这部经从序分结束开始,一直到“已正觉,我这样说”为止的整部经。世尊为了开示他人智慧所不能获得、最为甚深的一切知智,便以一个凡夫回合、一个有学回合、四个漏尽者回合、两个如来回合,总共八个大回合来宣说;又在每一个回合里,以‘地’等二十四个中回合为庄严,构成了具有两个诵分的教导。显示巴利原文
Idamavoca bhagavāti idaṃ nidānāvasānato pabhuti yāva abhisambuddhoti vadāmīti sakalasuttantaṃ bhagavā paresaṃ paññāya alabbhaṇeyyapatiṭṭhaṃ paramagambhīraṃ sabbaññutañāṇaṃ dassento ekena puthujjanavārena ekena sekkhavārena catūhi khīṇāsavavārehi dvīhi tathāgatavārehīti aṭṭhahi mahāvārehi ekamekasmiñca vāre pathavīādīhi catuvīsatiyā antaravārehi paṭimaṇḍetvā dvebhāṇavāraparimāṇāya tantiyā avoca.
这部经虽具足种种法门开示的庄严,且由世尊以如迦陵频伽鸟鸣般美妙悦耳、如甘露灌顶般的梵音宣说,然而那些比丘并不随喜世尊所说。那五百位比丘并未随喜世尊的教导。是何缘故?因无知故。据说,他们不了知此经的义理,所以未生随喜。在当时,这部具足种种法门庄严的经,对他们而言,就如同用厚粗布封住嘴巴后摆在面前的美食一般。[问:世尊不是为令他人了知,才圆满百千劫乃至四不可计数劫的波罗蜜,成就一切知智吗?为何还要用他们不懂的方式开示?] 对此经的安立探讨中已经说过:“为了摧破慢心,所以才开始开示‘一切法根本法门’。”因此这里不再重复。他们听闻这部为摧破慢心而说的经之后,心想:“同样的大地,持邪见者亦能了知,有学者亦能了知,阿拉汉亦能了知,如来亦能了知。这算是什么说法呢?”便寻思道:“往昔世尊所说的任何法,我们都能迅速了知,如今面对这部《根本法门经》,竟既看不到边际,也找不着尽头。啊!佛陀真是不可测量、无可比拟!”犹如被拔去毒牙的蛇变得驯服,他们放下了慢心,谦恭地前来承事佛陀、听闻正法。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vicitranayadesanāvilāsayuttaṃ panetaṃ suttaṃ karavikarudamañjunā kaṇṇasukhena paṇḍitajanahadayānaṃ amatābhisekasadisena brahmassarena bhāsamānassāpi. Na te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti te pañcasatā bhikkhū idaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ nānumodiṃsu. Kasmā? Aññāṇakena. Te kira imassa suttassa atthaṃ na jāniṃsu, tasmā nābhinandiṃsu. Tesañhi tasmiṃ samaye evaṃ vicitranayadesanāvilāsayuttampi etaṃ suttaṃ ghanaputhulena dussapaṭṭena mukhe bandhaṃ katvā purato ṭhapitamanuññabhojanaṃ viya ahosi. Nanu ca bhagavā attanā desitaṃ dhammaṃ pare ñāpetuṃ kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaṃ patto. So kasmā yathā te na jānanti, tathā desesīti. Vuttamidaṃ imassa suttassa nikkhepavicāraṇāyaṃ eva ‘‘mānabhañjanatthaṃ sabbadhammamūlapariyāyanti desanaṃ ārabhī’’ti, tasmā na yidha puna vattabbamatthi, evaṃ mānabhañjanatthaṃ desitañca panetaṃ suttaṃ sutvā te bhikkhū taṃyeva kira pathaviṃ diṭṭhigatikopi sañjānāti, sekkhopi arahāpi tathāgatopi sañjānāti. Kinnāmidaṃ kathaṃ nāmidanti cintentā pubbe mayaṃ bhagavatā kathitaṃ yaṃkiñci khippameva jānāma, idāni panimassa mūlapariyāyassa antaṃ vā koṭiṃ vā na jānāma na passāma, aho buddhā nāma appameyyā atulāti uddhaṭadāṭhā viya sappā nimmadā hutvā buddhupaṭṭhānañca dhammassavanañca sakkaccaṃ āgamaṃsu.
那时,比丘们聚集在法堂,生起这样的谈论:“啊!佛陀的威德真是不可思议!那些原本如此骄慢、陶醉的婆罗门出家比丘,被世尊以《根本法门经》的开示摧破了慢心。”当他们这番谈论尚未结束时,世尊从香室走出,以适合因缘的神变,在法堂中已敷设的殊胜佛座上就座,随后问比丘们:“比丘们,你们现在聚在一起谈论什么?”比丘们便将此事禀告世尊。世尊便开示说:“比丘们,不只今日,过去我也曾这样摧破这些高傲昂首而行者的慢心。”于是,为说明其中因由,他引出了以下过往的故事。显示巴利原文
Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ sannisinnā imaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ ‘‘aho buddhānaṃ ānubhāvo, te nāma brāhmaṇapabbajitā tathā mānamadamattā bhagavatā mūlapariyāyadesanāya nihatamānā katā’’ti, ayañcarahi tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ antarākathā vippakatā. Atha bhagavā gandhakuṭiyā nikkhamitvā taṅkhaṇānurūpena pāṭihāriyena dhammasabhāyaṃ paññattavarabuddhāsane nisīditvā te bhikkhū āha – ‘‘kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā’’ti. Te tamatthaṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, idāneva, pubbepi ahaṃ ime evaṃ mānapaggahitasire vicarante nihatamāne akāsi’’nti. Tato imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ atītaṃ ānesi –
“比丘們,过去,在波罗奈城,住着一位闻名四方、为一邦教首的婆罗门。他精通三吠陀,通达词汇表、仪轨、音韵论,并以古史传说为第五,既是语文学家,也是文法家,于顺世论和大人相亦无碍。他教导大约五百名年轻学生念诵咒语。这些青年聪明伶俐,所学既多且速,又能善加忆持,所学从不忘失。那婆罗门老师毫无保留,犹如注水入瓶一般,将自己所有的技艺全部传授给他们,然后对这些年轻人说:‘这些技艺都是为了现法与后世的利益。’年轻人听罢,心想:‘老师所知的,我们都已知晓,如今我们也是老师了!’于是便生起慢心,从此不再尊重老师,抛却了弟子应尽的本分。老师得知后,心想:‘我要好好折伏他们的慢心。’有一天,那些年轻人前来服侍、礼拜并坐下后,老师便说:‘孩子们,我要问一个问题,你们答得上来吗?’他们正陶醉于自己所闻的教说,立刻脱口而出:‘请问吧,老师!请问吧,老师!’显示巴利原文
Bhūtapubbaṃ , bhikkhave, aññataro disāpāmokkho brāhmaṇo bārāṇasiyaṃ paṭivasati tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū sanighaṇṭukeṭubhānaṃ sākkharappabhedānaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo, so pañcamattāni māṇavakasatāni mante vāceti. Paṇḍitā māṇavakā bahuñca gaṇhanti lahuñca, suṭṭhu ca upadhārenti, gahitañca tesaṃ na vinassati. Sopi brāhmaṇo ācariyamuṭṭhiṃ akatvā ghaṭe udakaṃ āsiñcanto viya sabbampi sippaṃ uggaṇhāpetvā te māṇavake etadavoca ‘‘ettakamidaṃ sippaṃ diṭṭhadhammasamparāyahita’’nti. Te māṇavakā – ‘‘yaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyo jānāti, mayampi taṃ jānāma, mayampi dāni ācariyā evā’’ti mānaṃ uppādetvā tato pabhuti ācariye agāravā nikkhittavattā vihariṃsu. Ācariyo ñatvā ‘‘karissāmi nesaṃ mānaniggaha’’nti cintesi. So ekadivasaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā vanditvā nisinne te māṇavake āha ‘‘tātā pañhaṃ pucchissāmi, kaccittha samatthā kathetu’’nti. Te ‘‘pucchatha ācariya, pucchatha ācariyā’’ti sahasāva āhaṃsu, yathā taṃ sutamadamattā. Ācariyo āha –
时间吞噬一切众生,连同他们自身;
而那吞噬时间的存在,又吞噬了那吞噬者。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kālo ghasati bhūtāni, sabbāneva sahattanā; Yo ca kālaghaso bhūto, sa bhūtapacaniṃ pacī’’ti. (jā. 1.10.190) –
孩子们,解答这个问题吧。”显示巴利原文
Vissajjetha tātā imaṃ pañhanti.
他们思索之后,不得其解,便默默不语。老师说:“算了,孩子们,你们今天先回去,明日再作答吧。”便让他们散去了。他们有的十人、有的二十人聚在一起,对这个问题的首尾却怎么也摸不着。回来以后,他们向老师禀报:“我们不明白这个问题的含义。”老师为了折伏他们,说出了这个偈颂——显示巴利原文
Te cintetvā ajānamānā tuṇhī ahesuṃ. Ācariyo āha ‘‘alaṃ tātā gacchathajja, sve katheyyāthā’’ti uyyojesi. Te dasapi vīsatipi sampiṇḍitā hutvā na tassa pañhassa ādiṃ, na antamaddasaṃsu. Āgantvā ācariyassa ārocesuṃ ‘‘na imassa pañhassa atthaṃ ājānāmā’’ti. Ācariyo tesaṃ niggahatthāya imaṃ gāthamabhāsi –
众多的人头,毛发浓密,体形巨大;
皆系在颈项之上,其中谁是有耳者?”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bahūni narasīsāni, lomasāni brahāni ca; Gīvāsu paṭimukkāni, kocidevettha kaṇṇavā’’ti. (jā. 1.10.191) –
偈颂的意思是:可见许多人的头,所有头都长着毛发,也都很大,而且都正好安在脖子上,并非像棕榈果那样用手捧着。在这些特征上,它们并无差别。然而,这里所说的‘其中谁是智者’,指的正是说话者自己。‘智者’即是有智慧的人。至于耳孔,则人人都有。听了这番话,那些年轻人变得沮丧,垂头丧气,脸朝下,用手指在地上划来划去,沉默不语。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyattho – bahūni narānaṃ sīsāni dissanti, sabbāni ca tāni lomasāni sabbāni ca mahantāni gīvāyameva ca ṭhapitāni, na tālaphalaṃ viya hatthena gahitāni, natthi tesaṃ imehi dhammehi nānākaraṇaṃ. Ettha pana kocideva kaṇṇavāti attānaṃ sandhāyāha. Kaṇṇavāti paññavā. Kaṇṇacchiddaṃ pana na kassaci natthi, taṃ sutvā te māṇavakā maṅkubhūtā pattakkhandhā adhomukhā aṅguliyā bhūmiṃ vilikhantā tuṇhī ahesuṃ.
当时,老师见到他们如此无惭,便说:‘孩子们,来学学这个问题吧!’于是解答了问题。‘时’,是指食前、食后等时间段。‘有类’是‘有情’的异称。因为时吞噬有情,并非啃食皮肉,而是耗尽他们的寿命、容貌与力量,摧灭青春,毁坏健康,因此说为‘吞噬、食’。它如此吞噬之时,毫无遗漏,吞尽一切。不仅吞噬有情,也吞噬自身。因为食前时无法到达食后时,对食后时等也是如此。而‘吞噬时者’,是诸漏尽者的异名。因为他已耗尽并吞噬了未来的结生时,故被称为‘吞噬时者’。‘他焚烧了令有情燃烧者’:那于恶趣中燃烧有情的渴爱,他以智火焚烧、烧毁,化为灰烬,所以说‘他焚烧了令有情燃烧者’。也有读作‘pajani’的,意思是‘产生、令生’。显示巴利原文
Atha nesaṃ ahirikabhāvaṃ passitvā ācariyo ‘‘uggaṇhatha tātā pañha’’nti pañhaṃ vissajjesi. Kāloti purebhattakālopi pacchābhattakālopīti evamādi. Bhūtānīti sattādhivacanametaṃ. Kālo hi bhūtānaṃ na cammamaṃsādīni khādati, apica kho nesaṃ āyuvaṇṇabalāni khepento yobbaññaṃ maddanto ārogyaṃ vināsento ghasati khādatīti vuccati. Sabbāneva sahattanāti evaṃ ghasanto ca na kiñci vajjeti, sabbāneva ghasati. Na kevalañca bhūtāniyeva, apica kho sahattanā attānampi ghasati. Purebhattakālo hi pacchābhattakālaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Esa nayo pacchābhattakālādīsu. Yo ca kālaghaso bhūtoti khīṇāsavassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. So hi āyatiṃ paṭisandhikālaṃ khepetvā khāditvā ṭhitattā ‘‘kālaghaso’’ti vuccati. Sa bhūtapacaniṃ pacīti so yāyaṃ taṇhā apāyesu bhūte pacati, taṃ ñāṇagginā paci dayhi bhasmamakāsi, tena ‘‘bhūtapacaniṃ pacī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Pajani’’ntipi pāṭho. Janikaṃ nibbattikanti attho.
那时,这些年轻人仿佛借着千盏灯的光明看清了平坦与崎岖,通过老师的解答清晰理解了问题的含义。于是他们说:‘从今往后,我们要终身侍奉老师!这位老师真是伟大!我们之前生起多闻的傲慢,竟连一首四句偈的含义都不知道。’他们降伏了慢心,像从前一样对老师履行弟子的义务,最终得生天界。显示巴利原文
Atha te māṇavakā dīpasahassālokena viya rattiṃ samavisamaṃ ācariyassa vissajjanena pañhassa atthaṃ pākaṭaṃ disvā ‘‘idāni mayaṃ yāvajīvaṃ guruvāsaṃ vasissāma, mahantā ete ācariyā nāma, mayañhi bahussutamānaṃ uppādetvā catuppadikagāthāyapi atthaṃ na jānāmā’’ti nihatamānā pubbasadisameva ācariyassa vattappaṭipattiṃ katvā saggaparāyaṇā ahesuṃ.
比丘们,那时我是他们的老师,而现在的这些比丘正是当年的那些年轻人。过去,我也曾像这样,使这些昂首慢行的人降伏了慢心。显示巴利原文
Ahaṃ kho, bhikkhave, tena samayena tesaṃ ācariyo ahosiṃ, ime bhikkhū māṇavakā. Evaṃ pubbepāhaṃ ime evaṃ mānapaggahitasire vicarante nihatamāne akāsinti.
听了这个本生故事后,比丘们思惟:‘过去我们也是被慢心所害啊。’于是他们愈发降伏慢心,更加专注于能利益自身的业处。显示巴利原文
Imañca jātakaṃ sutvā te bhikkhū pubbepi mayaṃ māneneva upahatāti bhiyyosomattāya nihatamānā hutvā attano upakārakakammaṭṭhānaparāyaṇā ahesuṃ.
此后,一次,世尊游行于诸国,到达毗舍离城,安住于乔达摩塔庙。他观察这五百位比丘智慧已然成熟,便开示了这部《乔达摩经》——显示巴利原文
Tato bhagavā ekaṃ samayaṃ janapadacārikaṃ caranto vesāliṃ patvā gotamake cetiye viharanto imesaṃ pañcasatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ñāṇaparipākaṃ viditvā imaṃ gotamakasuttaṃ kathesi –
“诸比丘,我以证智说法,非不依证智;我有因缘而说法……乃至……我有教诫神变而说法,非无教诫神变。诸比丘,我如此以证智说法……乃至……非无教诫神变,因此,你们应当接受教诫,应当接受教示。再者,诸比丘,你们对此应感满足、欢喜、欣悦,心想:‘世尊是正自觉者,法是善说,僧是善行。’”世尊说了这番话。当此开示宣说之时,一万个世界界皆生震动。显示巴利原文
‘‘Abhiññāyāhaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desemi no anabhiññāya, sanidānāhaṃ…pe… sappāṭihāriyāhaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desemi no appāṭihāriyaṃ. Tassa mayhaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññāya dhammaṃ desayato…pe… no appāṭihāriyaṃ. Karaṇīyo ovādo, karaṇīyā anusāsanī. Alañca pana vo, bhikkhave, tuṭṭhiyā alaṃ attamanatāya alaṃ somanassāya. Sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅghoti. Idamavoca bhagavā, imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasmiṃ bhaññamāne dasasahassilokadhātu akampitthā’’ti (a. ni. 3.126).
这五百位比丘听完这部经后,即于其座,连同无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果。如此,这场开示便在此结束。显示巴利原文
Idañca suttaṃ sutvā te pañcasatā bhikkhū tasmiṃyevāsane saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, evāyaṃ desanā etasmiṃ ṭhāne niṭṭhamagamāsīti.
2. 一切漏经注显示巴利原文
2. Sabbāsavasuttavaṇṇanā
14 14. 如是我闻……(中略)……舍卫城——这是《一切漏经》。于此,对未加解释的词句作注如下:「舍卫城」(sāvatthī)者:乃名为舍卫的仙人曾居住之地(依止处)所在的都城,如同迦甘提、摩甘提、憍赏弥等,这是文字学者们的解释。但注疏师们说:‘凡人们所需受用的物品,此中一切皆有,故称舍卫城。商队聚集时,若问:“有何货物?”则答:“一切都有。”’依此说,故名为舍卫城。显示巴利原文
14.Evaṃme sutaṃ…pe… sāvatthiyanti sabbāsavasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā – sāvatthīti savatthassa isino nivāsaṭṭhānabhūtā nagarī, yathā kākandī mākandī kosambīti evaṃ tāva akkharacintakā. Aṭṭhakathācariyā pana bhaṇanti ‘‘yaṃkiñci manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ sabbamettha atthīti sāvatthī. Satthasamāyoge ca kiṃ bhaṇḍamatthīti pucchite sabbamatthī’’ti vacanamupādāya sāvatthī.
“一切时中,一切资具”:在舍卫城,无论何时,所有生活所需的资具都一应俱全。
因此,正是取“一切”(sabba)之义,这座城市才被称为“舍卫城”(Sāvatthī)。
舍卫城是憍萨罗国一座迷人、美丽、令人愉悦(manoramaṃ)的都城。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbadā sabbūpakaraṇaṃ, sāvatthiyaṃ samohitaṃ; Tasmā sabbamupādāya, sāvatthīti pavuccati. Kosalānaṃ puraṃ rammaṃ, dassaneyyaṃ manoramaṃ; Dasahi saddehi avivittaṃ, annapānasamāyutaṃ. Vuddhiṃ vepullataṃ pattaṃ, iddhaṃ phītaṃ manoramaṃ; Aḷakamandāva devānaṃ, sāvatthipuramuttama’’nti.
就在那座舍卫城中。关于“祇园”一词:在这里,能降伏自己敌人的人,称为“祇多”;或者,因为那位国王是在降伏了敌人之后才出生的,所以称为“祇多”;又或者,为了祈求吉祥,便给他取了此名,所以称为“祇多”。“祇园”就是祇多所属的树林。因为这片树林正是由祇多王子栽种、培育和守护的,他便是此林的主人,因此称为“祇园”。亦即在祇园之中。关于“给孤独的园地”:在这里,那位居士依父母所取之名,原本叫作“须达多”。然而,由于他具足圆满的“一切欲乐成就”,内心无垢、无悭吝,并具备悲悯等种种功德,长年累月施予无依无靠者以食物,因此便以“给孤独”这一称号而闻名。“园地”的意思是,众生在此处特别欢喜,或出家人于此感到欢喜。具体而言,因为它拥有花果等美丽景致,又具足不过远、不过近等五种坐卧具的功德显示巴利原文
Tassaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ. Jetavaneti ettha attano paccatthikajanaṃ jinātīti jeto, raññā vā attano paccatthikajane jite jātoti jeto, maṅgalakamyatāya vā tassa evaṃnāmameva katanti jeto, jetassa vanaṃ jetavanaṃ. Tañhi jetena rājakumārena ropitaṃ saṃvaddhitaṃ paripālitaṃ, so ca tassa sāmī ahosi. Tasmā jetavananti vuccati, tasmiṃ jetavane. Anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmeti ettha sudatto nāma so gahapati mātāpitūhi katanāmavasena. Sabbakāmasamiddhitāya pana vigatamalamaccheratāya karuṇādiguṇasamaṅgitāya ca niccakālaṃ anāthānaṃ piṇḍamadāsi, tena anāthapiṇḍikoti saṅkhaṃ gato. Āramanti ettha pāṇino visesena vā pabbajitāti ārāmo, tassa pupphaphalādisobhāya nātidūranaccāsannatādipañcavidhasenāsanaṅgasampattiyā ca tato tato āgamma ramanti abhiramanti anukkaṇṭhitā hutvā nivasantīti attho. Vuttappakārāya vā sampattiyā tattha tattha gatepi attano abbhantaraṃyeva ānetvā rametīti ārāmo. So hi anāthapiṇḍikena gahapatinā jetassa rājakumārassa hatthato aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi koṭisantharena kīṇitvā aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi senāsanāni kārāpetvā aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi vihāramahaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā evaṃ catupaññāsahiraññakoṭipariccāgena buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa niyyādito. Tasmā ‘‘anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmo’’ti vuccati. Tasmiṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
在此,“祇园”一语是对前主人的称扬赞叹,“给孤独的园地”则是对后主人的称扬赞叹。这样称扬他们有何作用呢?是为了让那些渴求功德的人能够随学效仿。具体而言,在那次建造门楼殿堂的过程中,祇多王子所舍弃的,是卖地所得的十八俱胝金币,以及那些价值无数亿金的树木;而给孤独长者所舍弃的,则是五十四俱胝金币。如是,具寿阿难尊者通过称扬此二人,一方面表明那些希求功德者正是如此修积功德的,另一方面也激励其余求功德者,随学效仿他们。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘jetavane’’ti vacanaṃ purimasāmiparikittanaṃ. ‘‘Anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’ti pacchimasāmiparikittanaṃ. Kimetesaṃ parikittane payojananti. Puññakāmānaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanaṃ. Tatra hi dvārakoṭṭhakapāsādamāpane bhūmivikkayaladdhā aṭṭhārasa hiraññakoṭiyo anekakoṭiagghanakā rukkhā ca jetassa pariccāgo, catupaññāsa koṭiyo anāthapiṇḍikassa. Iti tesaṃ parikittanena evaṃ puññakāmā puññāni karontīti dassento āyasmā ānando aññepi puññakāme tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjane niyojeti.
“诸比丘,我将为你们宣说防护一切漏的法门”——世尊为何宣说此经?是为了从清除那些比丘的垢秽开始,显示趣向漏尽的修行方法。其中,“防护一切漏的法门”的意思是:防护一切漏的因由,即作为防护的那个因由;凭借此因由,那些漏被防护、被遮止后,达到名为“不再生起的灭”的灭尽,被断除、不再生起。这就是“因由”的含义。其中,所谓“漏”,是指“从眼……乃至……从意流漏、辗转”的意思。或者,在法的层面上,这些漏一直流到种姓地;在处的层面上,则一直流到有顶,故称为漏,意思是:以这些法和这些处为范围而生起。因为此处的“ā”有“内在作为”之意。以久住之义来说,酒等被称为漏;或者说它们如同漏,因此也是漏。因为在世间,久住的酒等就被称为“漏”。若以久住之义来衡量漏,那么烦恼恰恰才是真正配称为漏的。正如世尊所说:“诸比丘,无明的起始边际不可知,‘在此之前无明不存在’是不能说的。”如这些等。或者,它们流出、漏出漫长的轮回之苦,故称为漏。在这些解释中,前两种词源解释适用于将烦恼称为漏的情况;后一种显示巴利原文
Sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhaveti kasmā idaṃ suttamabhāsi? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upakkilesavisodhanaṃ ādiṃ katvā āsavakkhayāya paṭipattidassanatthaṃ. Tattha sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāyanti sabbesaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarakāraṇaṃ saṃvarabhūtaṃ kāraṇaṃ, yena kāraṇena te saṃvaritā pidahitā hutvā anuppādanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ khayaṃ gacchanti pahīyanti nappavattanti, taṃ kāraṇanti attho. Tattha āsavantīti āsavā, cakkhutopi…pe… manatopi sandanti pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammato yāva gotrabhuṃ okāsato yāva bhavaggaṃ savantīti vā āsavā, ete dhamme etañca okāsaṃ anto karitvā pavattantīti attho. Antokaraṇattho hi ayaṃ ākāro. Cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena madirādayo āsavā, āsavā viyātipi āsavā. Lokasmiñhi cirapārivāsikā madirādayo āsavāti vuccanti. Yadi ca cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena āsavā, eteyeva bhavitumarahanti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ito pubbe avijjā nāhosī’’tiādi (a. ni. 10.61). Āyataṃ vā saṃsāradukkhaṃ savanti pasavantītipi āsavā. Purimāni cettha nibbacanāni yattha kilesā āsavāti āgacchanti, tattha yujjanti, pacchimaṃ kammepi. Na kevalañca kammakilesāyeva āsavā, apica kho nānappakārakā uppaddavāpi. Suttesu hi ‘‘nāhaṃ, cunda, diṭṭhadhammikānaṃyeva āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya dhammaṃ desemī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.182) ettha vivādamūlabhūtā kilesā āsavāti āgatā.
凭此功德,我得生天,或为乾闼婆、或为飞鸟;
凭此我能得夜叉身,或舍弃人身;
我这些漏已尽,已摧毁、已粉碎。”(《增支部》4.36)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36); –
在此,三界的业以及其余的不善法,即是漏。在「为防护现世之漏,为遮止后世之漏」(《律藏·波罗夷》39)这一表述中,毁谤他人、追悔、杀害、捆绑等,以及种种堕恶趣之苦等灾祸,亦皆是漏。而这些漏,无论在何处、以何种方式被说及,即应依彼方式来了知。显示巴利原文
Ettha tebhūmakañca kammaṃ avasesā ca akusalā dhammā. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti (pārā. 39) ettha parūpavādavippaṭisāravadhabandhādayo ceva apāyadukkhabhūtā ca nānappakārā upaddavā. Te panete āsavā yattha yathā āgatā, tattha tathā veditabbā.
他们漏,于律藏中先以两种方式出现:「为防护现世之漏,为遮止后世之漏」。于《六处相应》中,以三种方式出现:「贤友,有三种漏:欲漏、有漏、无明漏」(《增支部》6.63)。于其他经及阿毗达摩中,这些漏加上见漏,以四种方式出现。于决择说中,以五种方式出现:「诸比丘,有漏导向地狱,有漏导向畜生界,有漏导向饿鬼界,有漏导向人界,有漏导向天界」(《增支部》6.63)。于《六集》中,以「诸比丘,有漏应由防护来断除」等理趣,以六种方式出现。然而在此经中,这些漏连同那些应由见断除的漏,共以七种方式出现。以上便是「漏」一词的语义训释与分类。显示巴利原文
Ete hi vinaye tāva ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti dvedhā āgatā. Saḷāyatane ‘‘tayome āvuso āsavā, kāmāsavo bhavāsavo avijjāsavo’’ti (a. ni. 6.63) tidhā āgatā. Aññesu ca suttantesu abhidhamme ca teyeva diṭṭhāsavena saha catudhā āgatā. Nibbedhikapariyāye – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā nirayagāminiyā, atthi āsavā tiracchānayonigāminiyā, atthi āsavā pettivisayagāminiyā, atthi āsavā manussalokagāminiyā, atthi āsavā devalokagāminiyā’’ti (a. ni. 6.63) pañcadhā āgatā. Chakkanipāte – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbā’’tiādinā nayena chadhā āgatā. Imasmiṃ pana sutte teyeva dassanāpahātabbehi saddhiṃ sattadhā āgatāti. Ayaṃ tāva āsavapade vacanattho ceva pabhedo ca.
在「防护」这个词上,所谓「防护」,就是它防护,意思是遮止、阻止、不让它转起。正如:「诸比丘,我允许在白天独处时,关好门而独处」(《律藏·波罗夷》77),以及「我说防护诸流,以智慧使它们闭绝」(《经集》1041)等句中,都是以阻塞、闭绝的意义来说「防护」的。这个防护有五种:戒防护、念防护、慧防护、忍防护、精进防护。其中,「具足此巴帝摩卡防护」(《分别》511),这是戒防护,因为在这里,巴帝摩卡戒被称为防护。在「于眼根防护而住」等句子中(《长部》1.213),是念防护,因为在这里,念被称为防护。「我说防护诸流,以智慧使它们闭绝」,这是慧防护,因为在这里,以「使它们闭绝」来说明智慧,是以阻塞的意义作为防护的。而以「他堪忍寒暑……乃至……不让生起的欲寻持续」等理趣(《中部》1.24-26)来说,忍防护和精进防护也就是在这部经中出现的。应该知道,这五种防护都被「防护一切漏法门」这个总说所包含,因此都具有防护的性质。显示巴利原文
Saṃvarapade pana saṃvarayatīti saṃvaro, pidahati nivāreti pavattituṃ na detīti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, divā paṭisallīyantena dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā paṭisallīyitu’’nti (pārā. 77), ‘‘sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃbraūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti (su. ni. 1041) ca ādīsu pidhānaṭṭhena saṃvaramāha. Svāyaṃ saṃvaro pañcavidho hoti sīlasaṃvaro satiñāṇa khanti vīriyasaṃvaroti. Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto’’ti (vibha. 511) ayaṃ sīlasaṃvaro. Pātimokkhasīlañhi ettha saṃvaroti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cakkhundriye saṃvaramāpajjatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.213) satisaṃvaro. Sati hettha saṃvaroti vuttā. ‘‘Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti ayaṃ ñāṇasaṃvaro. Ñāṇañhettha pidhīyareti iminā pidhānaṭṭhena saṃvaroti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa…pe…, uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.24-26) pana nayena idheva khantivīriyasaṃvarā āgatā. Tesañca ‘‘sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāya’’nti iminā uddesena saṅgahitattā saṃvarabhāvo veditabbo.
再者,这五种防护在本经中都已出现。其中,忍防护与精进防护前文已说。而“他避开那不适合的坐处与不适合的去处”(《中部》1.25),这是经中所说的戒防护。“如理思惟,防护眼根,善加守护而住”(《中部》1.22),这是念防护。于一切处如理思惟,则为慧防护。又,以未曾执取的方式而执取,即见的执取、受用的执取、修习的执取,这也属于慧防护。所谓“法门”,即通过它而使人了知法,故称法门,意指能令人生起或令其灭尽。至此,“防护一切漏法门”这一标题中应加解释的内容,已全部解说完毕。显示巴利原文
Apica pañcavidhopi ayaṃ saṃvaro idha āgatoyeva, tattha khantivīriyasaṃvarā tāva vuttāyeva. ‘‘So tañca anāsanaṃ tañca agocara’’nti (ma. ni. 1.25) ayaṃ panettha sīlasaṃvaro. ‘‘Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti (ma. ni. 1.22) ayaṃ satisaṃvaro. Sabbattha paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaro. Aggahitaggahaṇena pana dassanaṃ paṭisevanā bhāvanā ca ñāṇasaṃvaro. Pariyāyanti etena dhammāti pariyāyo, uppattiṃ nirodhaṃ vā gacchantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettāvatā ‘‘sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāya’’nti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttaṃ hoti.
15 其次,关于“于了知者……我”等句中的“了知者”,是指了知之人。“见者”,是指看见之人。此二词意义相同,仅有文句之别。虽如此说,“了知者”是依据智的特征来指称人,因为了知的特征即是智。“见者”则是依据智的作用来指称,因为见的作用即是智。具足智的人,犹如明眼者以眼观色般,能以智照见已显露的法。再者,为令如理作意得以生起,故说“了知者”;为说明不如理作意则不会如是生起,故说“见者”,这便是此处的要义。然而,有些论师却于此作了许多戏论,那些都与这义理并不相应。显示巴利原文
15. Idāni jānato ahantiādīsu jānatoti jānantassa. Passatoti passantassa. Dvepi padāni ekatthāni, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Evaṃ santepi jānatoti ñāṇalakkhaṇaṃ upādāya puggalaṃ niddisati, jānanalakkhaṇañhi ñāṇaṃ. Passatoti ñāṇappabhāvaṃ upādāya, passanappabhāvañhi ñāṇaṃ. Ñāṇasamaṅgī puggalo cakkhumā viya cakkhunā rūpāni ñāṇena vivaṭe dhamme passati. Apica yonisomanasikāraṃ uppādetuṃ jānato, ayonisomanasikāro yathā na uppajjati, evaṃ passatoti ayamettha sāro. Keci panācariyā bahū papañce bhaṇanti, te imasmiṃ atthe na yujjanti.
“漏尽”,是指诸漏的断除、诸漏究竟灭尽的生起、已灭尽的相状、归于无有的状态。在本经之中,以及在“由漏尽而有漏尽心解脱”(《中部》1.438)等处,这正是漏尽的含义。然而在别处,道、果与涅槃也被称作漏尽。正如——显示巴利原文
Āsavānaṃkhayanti āsavappahānaṃ āsavānaṃ accantakkhayasamuppādaṃ khīṇākāraṃ natthibhāvanti ayameva hi imasmiñca sutte, ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimutti’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.438) ca āsavakkhayattho. Aññattha pana maggaphalanibbānānipi āsavakkhayoti vuccanti. Tathā hi –
修学中的有学者,乃是直道的随顺者;
在灭尽之中,第一智生起,随后余智无间而生。”(《如是语》62)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sekhassa sikkhamānassa, ujumaggānusārino; Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tato aññā anantarā’’ti. (itivu. 62) –
在上述这类文句中,“道”即指漏尽。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu maggo āsavakkhayoti vutto,
在“由漏尽故,为沙门”(《中部》1.438)等文句中,此称为“果”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.438) phalaṃ.
若人常观他人过,其心恒怀指摘想,
彼之诸漏便增长,于此漏尽甚遥远。”(《法句经》253)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paravajjānupassissa, niccaṃ ujjhānasaññino; Āsavā tassa vaḍḍhanti, ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti. (dha. pa. 253) –
在诸如此类的经文中,涅槃被说为“漏尽”。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu nibbānaṃ ‘‘āsavakkhayo’’ti vuttaṃ.
“非不知者,非不见者”的意思是:对于不知、不见者,我不宣说(漏尽)。以此破斥了那些主张虽不知不见,仅凭防护等便能清净的人。或者,前两句指出了正确的方法,此句则遮止了错误的方法。简而言之,此处表明了:智慧即是防护诸漏的方法。显示巴利原文
No ajānato no apassatoti yo pana na jānāti na passati, tassa no vadāmīti attho. Etena ye ajānato apassatopi saṃvarādīhiyeva suddhiṃ vadanti, te paṭikkhittā honti. Purimena vā padadvayena upāyo vutto, iminā anupāyapaṭisedho. Saṅkhepena cettha ñāṇaṃ āsavasaṃvarapariyāyoti dassitaṃ hoti.
现在,为了说明知道什么、见到什么时诸漏灭尽,他便发问:“比丘们,知道什么?”此处,“知”有多种。的确,有些比丘天生机巧,能制作伞盖;有些则能制作衣服等。当他依止于戒律而从事这些工作时,那种“知”并非道果的近因。然而,若有人出家后懂得行医等,这样的知见反而令诸漏增长。因此,他只开示了知什么、见到什么时诸漏灭尽,接着说道:“如理作意与非如理作意”。显示巴利原文
Idāni yaṃ jānato āsavānaṃ khayo hoti, taṃ dassetukāmo kiñca, bhikkhave, jānatoti pucchaṃ ārabhi, tattha jānanā bahuvidhā. Dabbajātiko eva hi koci bhikkhu chattaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, koci cīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ, tassa īdisāni kammāni vattasīse ṭhatvā karontassa sā jānanā maggaphalānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti na vattabbā. Yo pana sāsane pabbajitvā vejjakammādīni kātuṃ jānāti, tassevaṃ jānato āsavā vaḍḍhantiyeva, tasmā yaṃ jānato passato ca āsavānaṃ khayo hoti, tadeva dassento āha yoniso ca manasikāraṃ ayoniso ca manasikāranti.
其中,‘如理作意’是指方法作意、根本作意。即对于无常等,以‘无常’等随顺真理的方式,心的转向、再转向、倾向、专注、作意——这便称为如理作意。显示巴利原文
Tattha yoniso manasikāro nāma upāyamanasikāro pathamanasikāro, aniccādīsu aniccanti ādinā eva nayena saccānulomikena vā cittassa āvaṭṭanā anvāvaṭṭanā ābhogo samannāhāro manasikāro, ayaṃ vuccati yoniso manasikāroti.
‘非如理作意’即非方法作意、邪道作意。于无常作常想,于苦作乐想,于无我作我想,于不净作净想——这就是非如理作意、邪道作意。或者,以与真理相违的方式,心的转向、再转向、倾向、专注、作意,这称为非如理作意。如此,了知如何令如理作意生起,并观察非如理作意如何不生的比丘,他的诸漏便灭尽。显示巴利原文
Ayoniso manasikāroti anupāyamanasikāro uppathamanasikāro. Anicce niccanti dukkhe sukhanti anattani attāti asubhe subhanti ayoniso manasikāro uppathamanasikāro. Saccappaṭikulena vā cittassa āvaṭṭanā anvāvaṭṭanā ābhogo samannāhāro manasikāro, ayaṃ vuccati ayoniso manasikāroti. Evaṃ yoniso manasikāraṃ uppādetuṃ jānato, ayoniso manasikāro ca yathā na uppajjati, evaṃ passato āsavānaṃ khayo hoti.
现在,为了显示这个道理的合理性,说道:‘诸比丘,非如理……乃至……断除。’这是什么意思呢?因为对于常作非如理作意者,诸漏便生起;对于常作如理作意者,诸漏便断除。因此应知:了知如何令如理作意生起,并观察非如理作意如何不生的比丘,他的诸漏便灭尽。这是此处的简要解释。显示巴利原文
Idāni imassevatthassa yuttiṃ dassento āha ayoniso, bhikkhave…pe… pahīyantīti. Tena kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti, yasmā ayoniso manasikaroto āsavā uppajjanti, yoniso manasikaroto pahīyanti, tasmā jānitabbaṃ yoniso manasikāraṃ uppādetuṃ jānato, ayoniso manasikāro ca yathā na uppajjati, evaṃ passato āsavānaṃ khayo hotīti, ayaṃ tāvettha saṅkhepavaṇṇanā.
以下是广释:其中,首先以“如理”与“非如理”这两个词,即已含摄了后面的全部经文。因为后面的全部经文正是依流转与还灭而说。以非如理作意为根本的是流转,以如理作意为根本的是还灭。这是为什么呢?非如理作意增长时,会圆满两个法:无明与有爱。由于有无明,‘无明为缘,行……乃至……纯大苦蕴集起’;由于有爱,‘爱为缘,取……乃至……集起’。如此,常做非如理作意的人,犹如被暴风摧毁的船、落入恒河漩涡的牛群、系于轮轴上的壮牛,在有、生趣、识住、有情居处中反复流转。这就是以非如理作意为根本的流转。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana vitthāro – tattha ‘‘yoniso ayoniso’’ti imehi tāva dvīhi padehi ābaddhaṃ hoti upari sakalasuttaṃ. Vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena hi upari sakalasuttaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayoniso manasikāramūlakañca vaṭṭaṃ, yoniso manasikāramūlakañca vivaṭṭaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ayoniso manasikāro hi vaḍḍhamāno dve dhamme paripūreti avijjañca bhavataṇhañca. Avijjāya ca sati ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti. Taṇhāya sati taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṃ…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti. Evaṃ ayaṃ ayoniso manasikārabahulo puggalo vātavegābhighātena vippanaṭṭhanāvā viya gaṅgāvaṭṭe patitagokulaṃ viya cakkayante yuttabalibaddo viya ca punappunaṃ bhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu āvaṭṭaparivaṭṭaṃ karoti, evaṃ tāva ayoniso manasikāramūlakaṃ vaṭṭaṃ.
而如理作意增长时,如《相应部》所说:‘诸比丘,成就如理作意的比丘,当可预期他将修习圣八支道,将多修习圣八支道。’因此能圆满以正见为首的八支道。这正见即是明;由于明生起,无明便灭,‘无明灭则行灭……乃至……如是整个苦蕴灭尽’。如此,当知这是以如理作意为根本的还灭。就这样,以这两个词含摄了全部经文。显示巴利原文
Yoniso manasikāro pana vaḍḍhamāno – ‘‘yoniso manasikārasampannassetaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṃ, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvessati, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bahulīkarissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.55) vacanato sammādiṭṭhipamukhaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ paripūreti. Yā ca sammādiṭṭhi, sā vijjāti tassa vijjuppādā avijjānirodho, ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho…pe… evaṃ etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti (mahāva. 1) evaṃ yoniso manasikāramūlakaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ imehi dvīhi padehi ābaddhaṃ hoti upari sakalasuttaṃ.
在此,经文的编排如是:若先示诸漏的断除,然后再说明它们的生起,这并不合理。因为已断除的漏绝不会再生起,唯有已生起的漏才可能断除。因此,世尊以与前面开示相反的顺序,这样说:‘诸比丘,不如理作意者……’等等。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ābaddhe cettha yasmā pubbe āsavappahānaṃ dassetvā pacchā uppatti vuccamānā na yujjati. Na hi pahīnā puna uppajjanti. Uppannānaṃ pana pahānaṃ yujjati, tasmā uddesapaṭilomatopi ‘‘ayoniso, bhikkhave, manasikaroto’’tiādimāha.
这里,“不如理作意者”是指生起上述那种不如理作意的人。“未生的漏便生起”:此处应如此理解——有人对从未获得的衣服等资具,或对获得侍者、同住比丘、弟子等某种可意的事物,将其视为“净”、“乐”而作不如理作意;或对某些从未经验过的所缘,以种种方式作不如理作意,此时他的漏便生起,这些漏即称为“未生的漏生起”。若非如此,在无始轮回中,根本没有所谓“从未生起”的漏。再者,对于过去曾经验的事物或所缘,若有人因本性清净,或因教示、遍问、学习教典、从事新业、如理作意等任一因缘,先前未曾生起漏,后来却因类似之缘忽然生起,这些漏也应知是“未生的漏生起”。而对于同样这些事物、所缘,反复生起的漏,则称为“已生的漏增长”。若非如此,初次生起的漏是谈不上“增长”的。显示巴利原文
Tattha ayoniso manasikarototi vuttappakāraṃ ayoniso manasikāraṃ uppādayato. Anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjantīti ettha ye pubbe appaṭiladdhapubbaṃ cīvarādiṃ vā paccayaṃ upaṭṭhākasaddhivihārikaantevāsikānaṃ vā aññataraṃ manuññaṃ vatthuṃ paṭilabhitvā, taṃ subhaṃ sukhanti ayoniso manasikaroto, aññataraññataraṃ vā pana ananubhūtapubbaṃ ārammaṇaṃ yathā vā tathā vā ayoniso manasikaroto āsavā uppajjanti, te anuppannā uppajjantīti veditabbā, aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā nāma āsavā na santi. Anubhūtapubbepi ca vatthumhi ārammaṇe vā yassa pakatisuddhiyā vā uddesaparipucchāpariyattinavakammayonisomanasikārānaṃ vā aññataravasena pubbe anuppajjitvā pacchā tādisena paccayena sahasā uppajjanti, imepi anuppannā uppajjantīti veditabbā. Tesuyeva pana vatthārammaṇesu punappunaṃ uppajjamānā uppannā pavaḍḍhantīti vuccanti. Ito aññathā hi paṭhamuppannānaṃ vaḍḍhi nāma natthi.
又,“诸比丘,又如理……”这一段中:若有人因本性清净——如尊者大迦叶与跋陀迦毗罗尼——或因教示、遍问等因缘,漏未生起,他了知:“我的漏尚未被圣道彻底断除,我今应为断除它们而修行。”随后,他通过修道彻底断除一切漏,此人便称为“未生的漏不再生起”。若有人正做某事时,因失念而忽然生起漏,随后心生悚惧,如理精勤断除彼漏,此人即称为“已生的漏得以断除”,就如曼达拉园寺的住者马哈帝沙长老那样。据说,他就在那座精舍学习所授。一日,入村托钵,面对不当所缘,烦恼生起。他以观照力镇伏烦恼后返回精舍。即使在梦中,彼所缘亦未现起。于是他心生悚惧:“此烦恼若增长,将成为堕恶趣之因。”于是辞别师长,离开精舍,前往大僧护长老座前,领受了对治贪欲的不净业处,随后进入丛林深处,铺开粪扫衣而坐,以不来道断除了五种欲贪,然后起身礼敬师长,次日便通达了所授之道。然而,对正生起的漏,虽由修行断除,却不称为“断除”。显示巴利原文
Yonisoca kho, bhikkhaveti ettha pana yassa pakatisuddhiyā vā seyyathāpi āyasmato mahākassapassa bhaddāya ca kāpilāniyā, uddesaparipucchādīhi vā kāraṇehi āsavā nuppajjanti, so ca jānāti ‘‘na kho me āsavā maggena samugghātaṃ gatā, handa nesaṃ samugghātāya paṭipajjāmī’’ti. Tato maggabhāvanāya sabbe samugghāteti. Tassa te āsavā anuppannā na uppajjantīti vuccanti. Yassa pana kārakasseva sato satisammosena sahasā āsavā uppajjanti, tato saṃvegamāpajjitvā yoniso padahanto te āsave samucchindati, tassa uppannā pahīyantīti vuccanti maṇḍalārāmavāsīmahātissabhūtattherassa viya. So kira tasmiṃyeva vihāre uddesaṃ gaṇhāti, athassa gāme piṇḍāya carato visabhāgārammaṇe kileso uppajji, so taṃ vipassanāya vikkhambhetvā vihāraṃ agamāsi. Tassa supinantepi taṃ ārammaṇaṃ na upaṭṭhāsi. So ‘‘ayaṃ kileso vaḍḍhitvā apāyasaṃvattaniko hotī’’ti saṃvegaṃ janetvā ācariyaṃ āpucchitvā vihārā nikkhamma mahāsaṅgharakkhitattherassa santike rāgapaṭipakkhaṃ asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gumbantaraṃ pavisitvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ santharitvā nisajja anāgāmimaggena pañcakāmaguṇikarāgaṃ chinditvā uṭṭhāya ācariyaṃ vanditvā punadivase uddesamaggaṃ pāpuṇi. Ye pana vattamānuppannā, tesaṃ paṭipattiyā pahānaṃ nāma natthi.
16 16. 今为开示他们被断除之漏的种种断除因,特举“已生的漏得以断除”此句,善巧教法分别的法王世尊,遂展开宣说:“诸比丘,有漏以见可断……”等。此处,“以见可断”即由见而断除。此道理适用于一切处。显示巴利原文
16. Idāni ‘‘uppannā ca āsavā pahīyantī’’ti idameva padaṃ gahetvā ye te āsavā pahīyanti, tesaṃ nānappakārato aññampi pahānakāraṇaṃ āvikātuṃ desanaṃ vitthārento atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbātiādimāha yathā taṃ desanāpabhedakusalo dhammarājā. Tattha dassanā pahātabbāti dassanena pahātabbā. Esa nayo sabbattha.
以见可断之漏的注释显示巴利原文
Dassanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
17 现在,为了逐一解释这些语句,世尊先提出“诸比丘,哪些漏是由见所断的?”这一问题,然后依照《根本法门》义释中所说的方法,展开始终以人为立足点的教示:“诸比丘,此处,无闻凡夫……”。其中,“对于应作意的法不如实了知”是指:对于应当转向、应当用心投入的法,他不能了知;“对于不应作意的法”则是指与之相反。这一道理同样适用于之后的语句。然而,哪些法是应作意的,哪些法是不应作意的,就法本身而言并无一成不变的说法,但就方式而言则有确定的准则:若以某种方式作意时,会令不善法依之生起,便不应以那种方式作意;若以某种方式作意时,会令善法依之生起,便应以那种方式作意。因此,世尊说:“诸比丘,当他以那种方式作意某些法时,未生的欲漏……”
},
{显示巴利原文
17. Idāni tāni padāni anupubbato byākātukāmo ‘‘katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbā’’ti pucchaṃ katvā mūlapariyāyavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano’’ti puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha manasikaraṇīye dhamme nappajānātīti āvajjitabbe samannāharitabbe dhamme na pajānāti. Amanasikaraṇīyeti tabbiparīte. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Yasmā pana ime dhammā manasikaraṇīyā, ime amanasikaraṇīyāti dhammato niyamo natthi, ākārato pana atthi. Yenā ākārena manasikariyamānā akusaluppattipadaṭṭhānā honti, tenākārena na manasikātabbā. Yena kusaluppattipadaṭṭhānā honti, tenākārena manasikātabbā. Tasmā ‘‘ya’ssa, bhikkhave, dhamme manasikaroto anuppanno vā kāmāsavo’’tiādimāha.
这里,“ya'ssa”(那个他的)意思是“对于那个他”,也就是对于那个无闻凡夫。“manasikaroti”(作意)意思是转向、注意。在“anuppanno vā kāmāsavo”(未生的欲漏或)中,“vā”字是合集义,不是选择义。因此,正如在“yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā …pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī”(诸比丘,凡是无足的有情或二足的有情……如来被宣说为其中之最上)中,意思是“无足的以及二足的”;在“bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāyā”(为了已生有情的住立或为了未生有情的扶助)中,意思是“已生的以及未生的”;在“aggito vā udakato vā mithubhedato vā”(从火或是从水或是从离间)中,意思是“从火以及从水以及从离间”;同样地,在这里也应该理解为“未生的欲漏生起,以及已生的欲漏增长”。对于其余的漏也应这样理解。显示巴利原文
Tattha ya’ssāti ye assa assutavato puthujjanassa. Manasikarototi āvajjayato samannāharantassa. Anuppanno vā kāmāsavoti ettha samuccayattho vāsaddo, na vikappattho. Tasmā yathā ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (itivu. 90) vutte apadā ca dvipadā cāti attho, yathā ca ‘‘bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.402) vutte bhūtānañca sambhavesīnañcāti attho, yathā ca ‘‘aggito vā udakato vā mithubhedato vā’’ti (udā. 76) vutte aggito ca udakato ca mithubhedato cāti attho, evamidhāpi anuppanno ca kāmāsavo uppajjati, uppanno ca kāmāsavo pavaḍḍhatīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ sesesu.
这里,“欲漏”是指对五欲功德的贪染。“有漏”是指对色界、无色界有的欲贪,对禅那的喜爱,以及与常见、断见俱行的贪。如此一来,见漏也归入有漏之中。“无明漏”是指对四圣谛的无知。其中,当对欲功德以味著而作意时,未生的欲漏便生起,已生的欲漏便增长;当对广大法以味著而作意时,未生的有漏便生起,已生的有漏便增长;当以四颠倒为立足处而对三地诸法作意时,未生的无明漏便生起,已生的无明漏便增长。应当如此了知。与此相反的方面,即是白分,应详细展开。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca kāmāsavoti pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo. Bhavāsavoti rupārūpabhave chandarāgo, jhānanikanti ca sassatucchedadiṭṭhisahagatā. Evaṃ diṭṭhāsavopi bhavāsave eva samodhānaṃ gacchati. Avijjāsavoti catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ. Tattha kāmaguṇe assādato manasikaroto anuppanno ca kāmāsavo uppajjati, uppanno ca pavaḍḍhati. Mahaggatadhamme assādato manasikaroto anuppanno ca bhavāsavo uppajjati, uppanno ca pavaḍḍhati. Tīsu bhūmīsu dhamme catuvipallāsapadaṭṭhānabhāvena manasikaroto anuppanno ca avijjāsavo uppajjati, uppanno ca pavaḍḍhatīti veditabbo. Vuttanayapaccanīkato sukkapakkho vitthāretabbo.
为什么此处只提到三种漏?因为这是从对治解脱的角度来说的:欲漏对治无愿解脱,其余二漏则对治无相解脱与空解脱。因此,若生起这三种漏,便与此三种解脱无缘;若不生起,则能得入。为显示这一意义,所以只说三种漏,应当这样理解。又或,见漏在这里其实也被包含在内,这已有过说明。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana tayo eva āsavā idha vuttāti. Vimokkhapaṭipakkhato. Appaṇihitavimokkhapaṭipakkho hi kāmāsavo,. Animittasuññatavimokkhapaṭipakkhā itare. Tasmā ime tayo āsave uppādentā tiṇṇaṃ vimokkhānaṃ abhāgino honti, anuppādentā bhāginoti etamatthaṃ dassentena tayo eva vuttāti veditabbā. Diṭṭhāsavopi vā ettha vutto yevāti vaṇṇitametaṃ.
“对他不应作意之法的作意”:这是就作意之因而说的——由于他作意那些不应作意之法,故有此说。第二句(即“对应作意之法的不作意”)也依同一理趣而解。“未生的漏便生起,已生的漏便增长”,这是对前文所说诸漏,不作区分而作的归结。显示巴利原文
Tassaamanasikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ manasikārāti manasikārahetu, yasmā te dhamme manasi karoti, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo dutiyapadepi. ‘‘Anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjanti, uppannā ca āsavā pavaḍḍhantī’’ti heṭṭhā vuttaāsavānaṃyeva abhedato nigamanametaṃ.
18 至此,在以补特伽罗为本的教法中,为了指出“见所断的漏”而提到了无闻凡夫。此无闻凡夫正是那句“诸比丘,若不如理作意,未生的漏便会生起……”——如此总括所说的、以不如理作意为缘的欲漏等漏之所依。因此,那些漏也借由此凡夫而显示出来。进而,为了说明见所断的漏,才以“他这样不如理作意:‘我于过去世曾经存在吗?……’”作为开端。在此,以疑为开端,同时也是为了显示见漏,而展开了这段教说。显示巴利原文
18. Ettāvatā yo ayaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya dassanā pahātabbe āsave niddisituṃ assutavā puthujjano vutto, so yasmā ‘‘ayoniso, bhikkhave, manasikaroto anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjantī’’ti evaṃ sāmaññato vuttānaṃ ayoniso manasikārapaccayānaṃ kāmāsavādīnampi adhiṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā tepi āsave teneva puggalena dassetvā idāni dassanā pahātabbe āsave dassento so evaṃ ayoniso manasi karoti, ahosiṃ nu kho ahantiādimāha. Vicikicchāsīsena cettha diṭṭhāsavampi dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.
其义为:凡依前述方式而生起诸漏者,即是凡夫;而此处以“无闻……”等方式所说的,也正是这位凡夫,他如此不如理、非正行、非正道地作意。他如何作意呢?即这样作意:“我于过去世曾存在吗?……他将往何处去呢?”意思是:他如此不如理作意,由此便生起了依“我于过去世曾存在吗?”等所说之十六种疑。显示巴利原文
Tassattho, yassa te iminā vuttanayena āsavā uppajjanti, so puthujjano, yo cāyaṃ ‘‘assutavā’’tiādinā nayena vutto, so puthujjano evaṃ ayoniso anupāyena uppathena manasi karoti. Kathaṃ? Ahosiṃ nu kho…pe…so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti, so evaṃ ayoniso manasi karoti, yathāssa ‘‘ahaṃ ahosiṃ nu kho’’tiādinā nayena vuttā soḷasavidhāpi vicikicchā uppajjatīti.
于此,“我于过去世曾存在吗?难道没有吗?”是依常见相与无因生起相,对过去自体存在或不存在而生疑。对此不必问“是何因缘”。因为愚痴凡夫,就如狂人一般,以种种莫名的方式运作。再者,不如理作意本身就是此处的原因。那么,不如理作意的原因又是什么呢?即是凡夫性本身,或因未见到圣者等。难道凡夫就完全不会如理作意吗?谁说过他全不作意呢?然而,在如理作意的情况中,凡夫性并非原因,听闻正法、亲近善知识等,才是彼处的原因。正如鱼肉等物,本性并非芳香,但在加以调制等缘的作用下,也可以变得芳香。显示巴利原文
Tattha ahosiṃ nu kho nanu khoti sassatākārañca adhiccasamuppattiākārañca nissāya atīte attano vijjamānataṃ avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Kiṃ kāraṇanti na vattabbaṃ. Ummattako viya hi bālaputhujjano yathā vā tathā vā pavattati. Apica ayoniso manasikāroyevettha kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ ayoniso manasikārassa pana kiṃ kāraṇanti. Sveva puthujjanabhāvo ariyānaṃ adassanādīni vā. Nanu ca puthujjanopi yoniso manasi karotīti. Ko vā evamāha na manasi karotīti. Na pana tattha puthujjanabhāvo kāraṇaṃ , saddhammassavanakalyāṇamittādīni tattha kāraṇāni. Na hi macchamaṃsādīni attano attano pakatiyā sugandhāni, abhisaṅkhārapaccayā pana sugandhānipi honti.
“我过去世曾是什么?”这是依种姓、性别、投生处而疑惑:“我过去世是刹帝利,还是婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者,或天、人中的某一类呢?”显示巴利原文
Kiṃnu kho ahosinti jātiliṅgūpapattiyo nissāya khattiyo nu kho ahosiṃ, brāhmaṇavessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ aññataroti kaṅkhati.
“我过去世是怎样的形态呢?”这是依于体貌的差别而生起疑惑:“我过去世是高大的,还是矮小的、白的、黑的、有量的、无量的……或其中某一种呢?”但也有人认为,这是依于“有主宰者创造”等见解,从原因方面产生疑惑:“我过去世是由于什么原因而存在的呢?”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ nu khoti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya dīgho nu kho ahosiṃ, rassaodātakaṇhappamāṇikaappamāṇikādīnaṃ aññataroti kaṅkhati. Keci pana issaranimmānādiṃ nissāya kena nu kho kāraṇena ahosinti hetuto kaṅkhatīti vadanti.
“曾是什么,后来变成了什么?”这是依于种姓等,对自己生命的相续生起疑惑:“我是刹帝利,后来变为婆罗门吗?……曾是天神,后来变为人吗?”而在所有这些语句中,“长时”皆是“时间”的同义语。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosinti jātiādīni nissāya khattiyo hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇo ahosiṃ…pe… devo hutvā manussoti attano paramparaṃ kaṅkhati. Sabbattheva pana addhānanti kālādhivacanametaṃ.
“我将存在吗?难道将不存在吗?”这是依于常见相与断见相,对未来的自己是存在还是不存在而生起疑惑。其余部分,此处如前所说。显示巴利原文
Bhavissāminu kho nanu khoti sassatākārañca ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attano vijjamānataṃ avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
「现在或当前长时」:指从当下开始,以结生为起点、以死亡为终点,总括一切正在经历的时间。「于内疑惑」:指对自己的诸蕴生起疑。「我存在吗?」即对自己是有还是无产生疑惑。那么,这合理吗?于此并没有合理或不合理的问题,只是一种思量。此外,此处还举出这样一个事例:据说,有两位母亲,一位的儿子天生秃头,另一位则不是。人们给那个不是秃头的孩子剃了发,孩子起身后心想:「莫非我真是那个秃头母亲的儿子?」就这样,生起了「我存在吗?」的疑惑。显示巴利原文
Etarahi vā paccuppannamaddhānanti idāni vā paṭisandhiṃ ādiṃ katvā cutipariyantaṃ sabbampi vattamānakālaṃ gahetvā. Ajjhattaṃ kathaṃkathī hotīti attano khandhesu vicikiccho hoti. Ahaṃ nu khosmīti attano atthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Yuttaṃ panetanti? Yuttaṃ ayuttanti kā ettha cintā. Apicettha idaṃ vatthumpi udāharanti. Cūḷamātāya kira putto muṇḍo, mahāmātāya putto amuṇḍo, taṃ puttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ. So uṭṭhāya ahaṃ nu kho cūḷamātāya puttoti cintesi. Evaṃ ahaṃ nu khosmīti kaṅkhā hoti.
「我不存在吗?」:指对自己的不存在性产生疑惑。对此也有一个事例:据说,有人捕鱼时在水中站了很久,大腿变冷,便误把自己的大腿当作鱼而拍打它。另有一人在坟场边看守田地,因恐惧蜷缩而睡,醒来时看见自己的膝盖,误以为是两个夜叉,便拍打它们。就这样,生起了「我不存在吗?」的疑惑。显示巴利原文
No nu khosmīti attano natthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Tatrāpi idaṃ vatthu – eko kira macche gaṇhanto udake ciraṭṭhānena sītibhūtaṃ attano ūruṃ macchoti cintetvā pahari. Aparo susānapasse khettaṃ rakkhanto bhīto saṅkuṭito sayi. So paṭibujjhitvā attano jaṇṇukāni dve yakkhāti cintetvā pahari. Evaṃ no nu khosmīti kaṅkhati.
「我是什么?」:即使是刹帝利,也会对自己的刹帝利身份产生疑惑。其余种姓也是如此。不过,身为天神却不知道自己为天神的,并不存在。然而天神也会以「我是有色的吗?还是无色的呢?」等方式产生疑惑。若问:「刹帝利等为何不知道自己的身份呢?」因为他们并非亲见自己在各个家族中的出生。再者,在家人会把裹着布衣等出家人误认为出家人;出家人也会以「我的戒行毁坏了吗?」等方式,将自己误认为在家人。正如人们也会像国王一样,对自己生起天神的想。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ nu khosmīti khattiyova samāno attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Esa nayo sesesu. Devo pana samāno devabhāvaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi. Sopi pana ‘‘ahaṃ rūpī nu kho arūpī nu kho’’tiādinā nayena kaṅkhati. Khattiyādayo kasmā na jānantīti ce. Apaccakkhā tesaṃ tattha tattha kule uppatti. Gahaṭṭhāpi ca potthalikādayo pabbajitasaññino. Pabbajitāpi ‘‘kuppaṃ nu kho me kamma’’ntiādinā nayena gahaṭṭhasaññino. Manussāpi ca rājāno viya attani devasaññino honti.
“我是怎样的?”这一疑惑,其解释如前所述。不过,此处是指执取体内有一个名为“命”(jīva)的东西,然后基于它的形貌而心生疑惑:“我是长的?还是短的、四角的、六角的、八角的、十六角的等,属于某种形态呢?”应知他就是这样疑惑的。然而,对于当下身体的形状,没有人会不知道。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ nu khosmīti vuttanayameva. Kevalañcettha abbhantare jīvo nāma atthīti gahetvā tassa saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya dīgho nu khosmi, rassacaturaṃsachaḷaṃsaaṭṭhaṃsasoḷasaṃsādīnaṃ aññatarappakāroti kaṅkhanto kathaṃ nu khosmīti kaṅkhatīti veditabbo. Sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ pana paccuppannaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi.
“从何处来?他将去往何处?”:即对有身的来处与去处生起疑惑。显示巴利原文
Kutoāgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhānaṃ kaṅkhati.
19 以上揭示了十六种疑。接着,为显示以这种疑为前导的见漏,佛陀展开这段开示。显示之时,说道:“对于这样不如理作意的人,六种见……”等等。在此,应如此理解:当那个人如此生起疑惑时,对于这样不如理作意的他,由于那有疑者的不如理作意力量强,六种见中的某一种见便生起。在这些语句中,“或”字表选择,意思是“这样或那样的见生起”。“有我”是指常见,即在一切时间中执取自我存在。“是真、是实”:即从真实与坚固的角度,认为“这是真实的”,执其为真实而牢固。“无我”则是断见,因为它执取存在的有情在种种情形下皆为非有。或者,前一种(“有我”)因为执取于三时中存在,所以是常见;若只执取“现在存在”,则属断见。后一种(“无我”)因为执取过去、未来都不存在,像那些持“灰烬祭”见者一样,属于断见。仅执取“过去不存在”,则如那些持“无因而生”见者,属于常见。显示巴利原文
19. Evaṃ soḷasappabhedaṃ vicikicchaṃ dassetvā idāni yaṃ iminā vicikicchāsīsena diṭṭhāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ayaṃ desanā āraddhā. Taṃ dassento tassa evaṃ ayoniso manasikaroto channaṃ diṭṭhīnantiādimāha. Tattha tassa puggalassa yathā ayaṃ vicikicchā uppajjati, evaṃ ayoniso manasikaroto tasseva savicikicchassa ayoniso manasikārassa thāmagatattā channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha sabbapadesu vāsaddo vikappattho, evaṃ vā evaṃ vā diṭṭhi uppajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthi me attāti cettha sassatadiṭṭhi sabbakālesu attano atthitaṃ gaṇhāti. Saccato thetatoti bhūtato ca thirato ca, ‘‘idaṃ sacca’’nti bhūtato suṭṭhu daḷhabhāvenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Natthi me attāti ayaṃ pana ucchedadiṭṭhi, sato sattassa tattha tattha vibhavaggahaṇato. Atha vā purimāpi tīsu kālesu atthīti gahaṇato sassatadiṭṭhi, paccuppannameva atthīti gaṇhanto ucchedadiṭṭhi. Pacchimāpi atītānāgatesu natthīti gahaṇato bhasmantāhutiyoti gahitadiṭṭhikānaṃ viya, ucchedadiṭṭhi. Atīte eva natthīti gaṇhanto adhiccasamuppattikasseva sassatadiṭṭhi.
“我以自己了知自己”:这是以想蕴为首,执取诸蕴为我,再通过想去了知其余诸蕴,便成了“以此自己了知此自己”。“我以自己了知非我”:这是只执取想蕴为我,其余四蕴为非我,通过想去了知它们,便生起这种见。“我以非我了知我”:这是执取想蕴为非我,其余四蕴为我,通过想去了知它们,便生起这种见。所有这些,都只是常见或断见。显示巴利原文
Attanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmīti saññākkhandhasīsena khandhe attāti gahetvā saññāya avasesakkhandhe sañjānato iminā attanā imaṃ attānaṃ sañjānāmīti hoti. Attanāva anattānanti saññākkhandhaṃyeva attāti gahetvā, itare cattāropi anattāti gahetvā saññāya tesaṃ jānato evaṃ hoti . Anattanāva attānanti saññākkhandhaṃ anattāti. Itare cattāro attāti gahetvā saññāya tesaṃ jānato evaṃ hoti, sabbāpi sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyova.
“能说、能受”等,其实是对常见执取的表现形态。其中,“能说”指说话者,即造作语业者;“能受”指感受者,即能知、能体验者。他感受什么呢?于种种处感受善恶业之果报。“种种处”即各各生、趣、住、住处中,或种种所缘中。“常”:无生灭。“恒”:坚固、具有坚实。“常住”:于一切时存在。“不变易之法”:指不失自性之法,犹如迦罗甘塔迦鸟不会变成其他。“如常住”:世间称月、日、海、大地、山等为“常住”。与常住等同齐,即为“如常住”。当执取“只要常住的事物存在,它便恒常如是存在”,便生起这种见。显示巴利原文
Vado vedeyyotiādayo pana sassatadiṭṭhiyā eva abhinivesākārā. Tattha vadatīti vado, vacīkammassa kārakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vedayatīti vedeyyo, jānāti anubhavati cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ vedetīti, tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Tatra tatrāti tesu tesu yonigatiṭṭhitinivāsanikāyesu ārammaṇesu vā. Niccoti uppādavayarahito. Dhuvoti thiro sārabhūto. Sassatoti sabbakāliko. Avipariṇāmadhammoti attano pakatibhāvaṃ avijahanadhammo, kakaṇṭako viya nānappakārataṃ nāpajjati. Sassatisamanti candasūriyasamuddamahāpathavīpabbatā lokavohārena sassatiyoti vuccanti. Sassatīhi samaṃ sassatisamaṃ. Yāva sassatiyo tiṭṭhanti, tāva tatheva ṭhassatīti gaṇhato evaṃdiṭṭhi hoti.
“诸比丘,这称为恶见”等句中:“这”一词是直接指示接下来所说的内容。因与恶见相关而说“这”,并非与一般之见相关。此处,“见”本身就是恶见,犹如粪秽;或者,此见入于种种见之中,属于六十二见,故称“恶见”;或者,由见而往,故称“恶见”。像这样“有我”之类的说法,仅仅是见的运作罢了,这里并没有任何真实的自我或恒常等实体。而这种见,因极难出离,故称“稠林”;因极难超越且令人怖畏,故称“旷野”,犹如饥荒旷野、野兽旷野等;因它悖逆于正见,故称“歪曲”;因它时而执取常、时而执取断,故称“异样的动转”;因它有束缚的作用,故称“结”。因此说:“见稠林……见结”。现在为了显示其束缚的作用,便说“与见结相应”等语句。简要而言:被此见结所缚的凡夫,不能从这些生、老等中解脱。还用多说吗?——即是不能从整个轮回的苦中解脱。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, diṭṭhigatantiādīsu. Idanti idāni vattabbassa paccakkhanidassanaṃ. Diṭṭhigatasambandhena ca idanti vuttaṃ, na diṭṭhisambandhena. Ettha ca diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ, gūthagataṃ viya. Diṭṭhīsu vā gatamidaṃ dassanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiantogadhattātipi diṭṭhigataṃ. Diṭṭhiyā vā gataṃ diṭṭhigataṃ. Idañhi atthi me attātiādi diṭṭhiyā gamanamattameva, natthettha attā vā nicco vā kocīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sā cāyaṃ diṭṭhi dunniggamanaṭṭhena gahanaṃ. Duratikkamaṭṭhena sappaṭibhayaṭṭhena ca kantāro, dubbhikkhakantāravāḷakantārādayo viya. Sammādiṭṭhiyā vinivijjhanaṭṭhena vilomanaṭṭhena vā visūkaṃ. Kadāci sassatassa, kadāci ucchedassa gahaṇato virūpaṃ phanditanti vipphanditaṃ. Bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhigahanaṃ…pe… diṭṭhisaṃyojana’’nti. Idānissa tameva bandhanatthaṃ dassento diṭṭhisaṃyojanasaṃyuttotiādimāha. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho. Iminā diṭṭhisaṃyojanena saṃyutto puthujjano etehi jātiādīhi na parimuccatīti. Kiṃ vā bahunā, sakalavaṭṭadukkhatopi na muccatīti.
20 如此显示了六种见漏之后,由于戒禁取在阐明欲漏等时便已涵盖——那些被无明所制的沙门、婆罗门,为追求欲乐、有乐及有之清净而执取戒禁——故不再另行显示;又因戒禁取已包含在见漏的执取中,所以也不单独开显。现在,为了说明那位以见而断除诸漏者,先要显示他是如何断除的;为此,先说明先前不如理作意的凡夫怎样生起诸漏,再指示与之相反的人如何断除,因此开示:‘诸比丘,多闻……’等。显示巴利原文
20. Evaṃ chappabhedaṃ diṭṭhāsavaṃ dassetvā yasmā sīlabbataparāmāso kāmāsavādivacaneneva dassito hoti. Kāmasukhatthañhi bhavasukhabhavavisuddhiatthañca avijjāya abhibhūtā ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlabbatāni parāmasanti, tasmā taṃ adassetvā diṭṭhiggahaṇena vā tassa gahitattāpi taṃ adassetvāva idāni yo puggalo dassanā pahātabbe āsave pajahati, taṃ dassetvā tesaṃ āsavānaṃ pahānaṃ dassetuṃ pubbe vā ayoniso manasikaroto puthujjanassa tesaṃ uppattiṃ dassetvā idāni tabbiparītassa pahānaṃ dassetuṃ sutavā ca kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha.
其义为:在他能作意‘这是苦’之前,应依前文所述的方法,并从相反方面来了解。所谓相反,即指对圣法不精通、未受善巧调伏者,与此相对。因此,这里的‘多闻圣弟子、精通圣法、于圣法中善加调伏’,应从这一反面来理解。再者,从获得观开始,直至种姓地,随相应的意义,亦应知此人为圣弟子。显示巴利原文
Tassattho, yāva ‘‘so idaṃ dukkha’’nti āgacchati, tāva heṭṭhā vuttanayena ca vuttapaccanīkato ca veditabbo. Paccanīkato ca sabbākārena ariyadhammassa akovidāvinītapaccanīkato ayaṃ ‘‘sutavā ariyasāvako ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto’’ti veditabbo. Apica kho sikhāpattavipassanato pabhuti yāva gotrabhu, tāva tadanurūpena atthena ayaṃ ariyasāvakoti veditabbo.
21 关于“他如理作意‘这是苦’”等句,释义如下:那位以四谛为业处的圣弟子,先前已从师处学取了四谛业处,之后某个时候登上观道。他对三有中的诸蕴如理作意‘这是苦’——即以方法、以途径,加以观察作意。在此,直至入流道为止,观实际上皆以“作意”来指称。而那个正是生起此苦、发动此苦的渴爱,他如理作意‘这是集’。又因苦与集于此灭尽而不再转起,故他对那名为涅槃的,如理作意‘这是苦灭’。对于导向灭的八支道,他如理作意‘这是趣向苦灭之道’——以方法、以途径,加以观察作意。显示巴利原文
21. ‘‘So idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādīsu pana ayaṃ atthavibhāvanā, so catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko ariyasāvako taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakā khandhā dukkhaṃ, taṇhā dukkhasamudayo, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodho, nirodhasampāpako maggoti evaṃ pubbeva ācariyasantike uggahitacatusaccakammaṭṭhāno aparena samayena vipassanāmaggaṃ samāruḷho samāno te tebhūmake khandhe idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karoti, upāyena pathena samannāharati ceva vipassati ca. Ettha hi yāva sotāpattimaggo, tāva manasikārasīseneva vipassanā vuttā. Yā panāyaṃ tasseva dukkhassa samuṭṭhāpikā pabhāvikā taṇhā, ayaṃ samudayoti yoniso manasi karoti. Yasmā pana dukkhañca samudayo ca idaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhanti nappavattanti, tasmā yadidaṃ nibbānaṃ nāma, ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti yoniso manasi karoti. Nirodhasampāpakaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yoniso manasi karoti, upāyena pathena samannāharati ceva vipassati ca.
其中的方法是:执著唯存于轮回,在出离中则无。因此,依“此身中有地界、水界……”等方法,把握自身相续中的四大种及随之而有的所造色,确立“这是色蕴”。当安立者以此为所缘而生起心与心所诸法时,便确立“这些是四无色蕴”。接着确立“此五蕴是苦”。若再简略而言,则唯有名、色两部分。这名色是因缘所生,便确立其因与缘——亦即无明、有、渴爱、业、食等因缘。如此确立了那些缘法与缘生法的自相后,推求“这些法本无而有、生已即灭”,从而赋予无常相;因被生灭所逼迫故是苦,赋予苦相;因不得自在故是无我,赋予无我相。如此赋予三相之后,次第修观,直至证得入流道。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ upāyo, abhiniveso nāma vaṭṭe hoti, vivaṭṭe natthi. Tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ atthi imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu, āpodhātū’’tiādinā nayena sakasantatiyaṃ cattāri bhūtāni tadanusārena upādārūpāni ca pariggahetvā ayaṃ rūpakkhandhoti vavatthapeti. Taṃ vavatthāpayato uppanne tadārammaṇe cittacetasike dhamme ime cattāro arūpakkhandhāti vavatthapeti. Tato ime pañcakkhandhā dukkhanti vavatthapeti. Te pana saṅkhepato nāmañca rūpañcāti dve bhāgāyeva honti. Idañca nāmarūpaṃ sahetu sappaccayaṃ uppajjati. Tassa ayaṃ hetu ayaṃ paccayoti avijjābhavataṇhākammāhārādike hetupaccaye vavatthapeti. Tato tesaṃ paccayānañca paccayuppannadhammānañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ vavatthapetvā ime dhammā ahutvā hontīti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti, udayabbayapīḷitattā dukkhāti dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti. Avasavattanato anattāti anattalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti. Evaṃ tīṇi lakkhaṇāni āropetvā paṭipāṭiyā vipassanaṃ pavattento sotāpattimaggaṃ pāpuṇāti.
在那一刹那,他以一次通达便通达了四谛,以一次现观便现观了四谛。苦是以遍知通达而通达的,集是以断除通达而通达的,灭是以作证通达而通达的,道是以修习通达而通达的。他又以遍知现观而现观苦……乃至以修习现观而现观道,并不是用彼此不同的智;实际上是以同一个智,缘取涅槃为所缘,对其余三谛依各自的作用而通达、现观。其时,他并不会这样想:“我在遍知苦”……乃至“我在修道”。而且,当那智以涅槃为所缘、以通达而作证灭时,它同样也在履行遍知苦、断除集、修习道的作用。他依此行相如理作意时,便断除了三种结:依二十种事基的有身见,依八种事基的疑,以及执取“以戒清净、以禁戒清净”的戒禁取。其中,在四种漏里面,有身见和戒禁取被摄于见漏,因此它们既是漏也是结;疑仅是结而非漏,但由于被纳入“见所断漏”中,故也称为漏。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ khaṇe cattāri saccāni ekapaṭivedheneva paṭivijjhati, ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, samudayaṃ pahānapaṭivedhena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena, maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena. Dukkhañca pariññābhisamayena abhisameti…pe… maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti, no ca kho aññamaññena ñāṇena. Ekañāṇeneva hi esa nirodhaṃ ārammaṇato, sesāni kiccato paṭivijjhati ceva abhisameti ca. Na hissa tasmiṃ samaye evaṃ hoti – ‘‘ahaṃ dukkhaṃ parijānāmī’’ti vā…pe… ‘‘maggaṃ bhāvemī’’ti vā. Apica khvassa ārammaṇaṃ katvā paṭivedhavasena nirodhaṃ sacchikaroto evaṃ taṃ ñāṇaṃ dukkhapariññākiccampi samudayapahānakiccampi maggabhāvanākiccampi karotiyeva. Tassevaṃ upāyena yoniso manasikaroto tīṇi saṃyojanāni pahīyanti, vīsativatthukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi, aṭṭhavatthukā vicikicchā, ‘‘sīlena suddhi vatena suddhī’’ti sīlabbatānaṃ parāmasanato sīlabbataparāmāsoti. Tattha catūsu āsavesu sakkāyadiṭṭhisīlabbataparāmāsā diṭṭhāsavena saṅgahitattā āsavā ceva saṃyojanā ca. Vicikicchā saṃyojanameva, na āsavo . ‘‘Dassanā pahātabbā āsavā’’ti ettha pariyāpannattā pana āsavāti.
所说“这些称为……当断”,是为了显示有身见等名为见所断漏。又或者,当六种见中的任何一种生起时,依自性将“有身见”加以辨别,并依此而说“诸比丘,这些称为”。而且,这些漏在断除时,是与俱生而断的意义相同者一同断除的。因为在断除见漏时,与它俱生于四种见相应心中的欲漏和无明漏也得以断除。然而,就“断一义”而言:在四种见不相应心中,为求取龙、金翅鸟等成就而生起的有漏,以及与之相应的无明漏;在两种忧心中,引发杀生等的无明漏;与疑心相应的无明漏——如此,其余三种漏也全部断除。因此,这里用了复数表达,应如此理解其义。这便是古时师长们的意趣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ime vuccanti…pe… pahātabbā’’ti ime sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo dassanā pahātabbā nāma āsavāti dassento āha. Atha vā yā ayaṃ channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjatīti evaṃ sarūpeneva sakkāyadiṭṭhi vibhattā. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ime vuccanti, bhikkhave’’ti. Sā ca yasmā sahajātapahānekaṭṭhehi saddhiṃ pahīyati. Diṭṭhāsave hi pahīyamāne taṃsahajāto catūsu diṭṭhisampayuttacittesu kāmāsavopi avijjāsavopi pahīyati . Pahānekaṭṭho pana catūsu diṭṭhivippayuttesu nāgasupaṇṇādisamiddhipatthanāvasena uppajjamāno bhavāsavo. Teneva sampayutto avijjāsavopi, dvīsu domanassacittesu pāṇātipātādinibbattako avijjāsavopi, tathā vicikicchācittasampayutto avijjāsavopīti evaṃ sabbathāpi avasesā tayopi āsavā pahīyanti. Tasmā bahuvacananiddeso katoti evamettha attho veditabbo. Esa porāṇānaṃ adhippāyo.
「见所断」:此处“见”指入流道,意即应由此道断除。为何入流道称为“见”?因为那是初次见到涅槃。种姓地难道不是更先见到吗?并非如此,种姓地虽见,却未完成应作之事——它未断诸结,故不可称为见。于此可举譬喻:犹如一人虽得见国王,但因未献礼物、事尚未成,故说“我尚未见王”。显示巴利原文
Dassanā pahātabbāti dassanaṃ nāma sotāpattimaggo, tena pahātabbāti attho. Kasmā sotāpattimaggo dassanaṃ? Paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato. Nanu gotrabhu paṭhamataraṃ passatīti? No na passati. Disvā kattabbakiccaṃ pana na karoti saṃyojanānaṃ appahānato. Tasmā passatīti na vattabbo. Yattha katthaci rājānaṃ disvāpi paṇṇākāraṃ datvā kiccanipphattiyā adiṭṭhattā ‘‘ajjāpi rājānaṃ na passāmī’’ti vadanto gāmavāsī puriso cettha nidassanaṃ.
「护所断漏」的解释。显示巴利原文
Saṃvarāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
22 如此说明见所断漏后,为接着说明依序所列的防护所断漏,世尊说:“诸比丘,哪些漏是防护所断?”应知此后各处皆以这种方式衔接。从此处开始,唯解释其义。显示巴利原文
22. Evaṃ dassanena pahātabbe āsave dassetvā idāni tadanantaruddiṭṭhe saṃvarā pahātabbe dassetuṃ, katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbāti āha. Evaṃ sabbattha sambandho veditabbo. Ito parañhi atthamattameva vaṇṇayissāma.
难道不是以见与修两种方式,便能断尽诸漏,并无所谓不可断之漏吗?既然如此,为何还要别别开示以防护等所断的漏呢?在预备阶段,那些由防护等所镇伏的漏,经由四种道而彻底断除。因此,为了显示在这些道的预备阶段,以这五种方式镇伏而断除的情形,才这样说。所以,此处首先所说即是见道;其余三道则将以“修习”之名指称,而这一切,都应理解是预备阶段的修行。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca dassanena bhāvanāyāti imehi dvīhi appahātabbo āsavo nāma natthi, atha kasmā visuṃ saṃvarādīhi pahātabbe dassetīti. Saṃvarādīhi pubbabhāge vikkhambhitā āsavā catūhi maggehi samugghātaṃ gacchanti, tasmā tesaṃ maggānaṃ pubbabhāge imehi pañcahākārehi vikkhambhanappahānaṃ dassento evamāha. Tasmā yo cāyaṃ vutto paṭhamo dassanamaggoyeva, idāni bhāvanānāmena vuccissanti tayo maggā, tesaṃ sabbesampi ayaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadāti veditabbā.
其中,‘于此’是指在这教法中。‘审察’即通过审察。在这里,‘saṅkhā’一词出现在智、部分、施设、数等含义中。例如,在‘审察而受用一者’(Saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevatī)等语句中,它见于智的含义;在‘戏论想之部分转起’(Papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācarantī)等语句中,它见于部分的含义;在‘那些诸法的数、名称’(Tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhā samaññā)等语句中,它见于施设的含义;在‘不易计算’(Na sukaraṃ saṅkhātu)等语句中,它见于数的含义。但在此处,应当将其理解为智。显示巴利原文
Tattha idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Paṭisaṅkhāti paṭisaṅkhāya. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhāsaddo ñāṇakoṭṭhāsapaññattigaṇanāsu dissati. ‘‘Saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.168) hi ñāṇe dissati. ‘‘Papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācarantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.201) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhā samaññā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1313) paññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Na sukaraṃ saṅkhātu’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.128) gaṇanāyaṃ. Idha pana ñāṇe daṭṭhabbo.
‘如理审察’的意思是:通过方法、途径去审察,也就是了知、观察。在这里,对于不律仪所带来的过患进行审察,就是如理审察。而这可以通过这样的教导来理解:‘诸比丘,宁愿眼根被烧红、燃烧、炽燃、火舌通红的铁棒所毁坏,也不要在眼所识的色上执取随形好之相。’等等,应当依火聚喻的方式来了解。‘以眼根律仪防护而住’:在这里,眼本身就是根,所以叫眼根;由于起到防护的作用,所以称为律仪,也就是遮止、关闭的意思。这其实是念的同义词。在眼根上的律仪,就叫做眼根律仪。就像‘站立的乌鸦’、‘洞穴中的乌龟’、‘山上的水牛’等譬喻所表示的那样。显示巴利原文
Paṭisaṅkhā yonisoti hi upāyena pathena paṭisaṅkhāya ñatvā paccavekkhitvāti attho. Ettha ca asaṃvare ādīnavapaṭisaṅkhā yoniso paṭisaṅkhāti veditabbā. Sā cāyaṃ ‘‘varaṃ, bhikkhave, tattāya ayosalākāya ādittāya sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya cakkhundriyaṃ sampalimaṭṭhaṃ, na tveva cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu anubyañjanaso nimittaggāho’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 4.235) ādittapariyāyanayena veditabbā. Cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatīti ettha cakkhumeva indriyaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ, saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, pidahanato thakanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cakkhundriye saṃvaro cakkhundriyasaṃvaro. Titthakāko āvāṭakacchapo vanamahiṃsotiādayo viya.
其实,在眼根上并没有所谓的律仪或不律仪。因为念或失念并不是依靠眼净色而生起的。实际上,当色所缘出现在眼门的时候,有分心两次生起并灭去之后,执行转向作用的唯作意界生起,完成作用后便灭去;接着,眼识执行看的作用;随后,异熟意界执行领受的作用;然后,异熟无因意识界执行推度的作用;再然后,唯作无因意识界执行确定的作用,生起后灭去。在这之后,速行心便开始速行。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi cakkhundriye saṃvaro vā asaṃvaro vā natthi. Na hi cakkhupasādaṃ nissāya sati vā muṭṭhasaccaṃ vā uppajjati. Apica yadā rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhussa āpāthaṃ āgacchati, tadā bhavaṅge dvikkhattuṃ uppajjitvā niruddhe kiriyamanodhātu āvajjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā uppajjitvā nirujjhati, tato cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ, tato vipākamanodhātu sampaṭicchanakiccaṃ, tato vipākāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātu santīraṇakiccaṃ, tato kiriyāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātu voṭṭhabbanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā uppajjitvā nirujjhati. Tadanantaraṃ javanaṃ javati.
实际上,在有分时,或在转向等任何一个阶段,都不存在律仪或不律仪。然而,在速行的刹那,若生起恶戒、失念、无知、不忍或懈怠,此即不律仪。即使如此,它也被称为‘于眼根的不律仪’。何以故?因为此不律仪存在时,眼门便未得防护,有分、转向等心路过程的心亦未得防护。正如一座城市,若四座城门未关闭,纵然城内的屋舍、库房、内室等紧闭,城中的一切财物仍是不受保护、不受守护的,因为盗贼可从城门进入,为所欲为。同样地,当速行中生起恶戒等不善法时,由于不律仪的存在,眼门即未得防护,有分、转向等心路过程的心亦未得防护。显示巴利原文
Tatthapi neva bhavaṅgasamaye, na āvajjanādīnaṃ aññatarasamaye saṃvaro vā asaṃvaro vā atthi. Javanakkhaṇe pana sace dussīlyaṃ vā muṭṭhasaccaṃ vā aññāṇaṃ vā akkhanti vā kosajjaṃ vā uppajjati, ayaṃ asaṃvaro hoti. Evaṃ hontopi so cakkhundriye asaṃvaroti vuccati. Kasmā? Tasmiñhi sati dvārampi aguttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi āvajjanādīni vīthicittānipi. Yathā kiṃ , yathā nagare catūsu dvāresu asaṃvutesu kiñcāpi anto gharakoṭṭhakagabbhādayo susaṃvutā, tathāpi antonagare sabbaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ arakkhitaṃ agopitameva hoti. Nagaradvārena hi pavisitvā corā yadicchanti, taṃ kareyyuṃ, evameva javane dussīlyādīsu uppannesu, tasmiṃ asaṃvare sati dvārampi aguttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi āvajjanādīni vīthicittānipīti.
然而,当戒等善法生起时,眼门便得防护,有分、转向等心路过程的心亦得防护。此喻如下:犹如城门皆已紧闭,纵然城内屋舍等未加关闭,城内一切财物仍得到妥善守护、周密保护。因城门关闭故,盗贼无法进入。同样地,当速行中生起戒等善法时,眼门即得妥善防护,有分、转向等心路过程的心亦得妥善防护。因此,即便仅仅在速行刹那生起的心,亦被称为‘于眼根的律仪’。当知,此即指‘念之律仪’。所谓‘以眼根律仪防护’,便是具足眼根的律仪防护,即是‘具足’之义。实际上,在解释‘具足巴帝摩卡律仪防护’一语时,即言‘以此巴帝摩卡律仪而具足……乃至……成就’。综合这些义理,应解为‘以眼根律仪防护’即是此义。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ pana sīlādīsu uppannesu dvārampi guttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi āvajjanādīni vīthicittānipi. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā nagaradvāresu susaṃvutesu kiñcāpi anto gharādayo asaṃvutā, tathāpi antonagare sabbaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ surakkhitaṃ sugopitameva hoti. Nagaradvāresu hi pihitesu corānaṃ paveso natthi, evameva javane sīlādīsu uppannesu dvārampi suguttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi āvajjanādīni vīthicittānipi. Tasmā javanakkhaṇe uppajjamānopi cakkhundriye saṃvaroti vutto. Idha cāyaṃ satisaṃvaro adhippetoti veditabbo. Cakkhundriyasaṃvarena saṃvuto cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto, upetoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi, pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti imassa vibhaṅge ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato’’ti (vibha. 511) vuttaṃ. Taṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā cakkhundriyasaṃvarena saṃvutoti evamattho veditabbo.
或者,可以这样解释:‘防护’就是律仪,也就是关闭、遮止的意思。‘以眼根律仪防护’,就是把名为眼根律仪的‘念门扇’安在眼门上,就如同在房门上关闭门扇一样,起到遮止、关闭的作用。在这里,这个义理更加善巧恰当。因为,在‘对于不防护眼根律仪而住的人’与‘对于防护而住的人’这些语句中,看到的正是这个意思。显示巴利原文
Atha vā saṃvarīti saṃvuto, thakesi pidahīti vuttaṃ hoti. Cakkhundriye saṃvarasaṃvuto cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto, cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaññitaṃ satikavāṭaṃ cakkhudvāre, gharadvāre kavāṭaṃ viya saṃvari thakesi pidahīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayameva cettha attho sundarataro. Tathā hi ‘‘cakkhundriyasaṃvaraṃ asaṃvutassa viharato saṃvutassa viharato’’ti etesu padesu ayameva attho dissati.
“住”是指:如此具足眼根律仪防护者,于任何威仪中皆得安住。关于“yañhissā”等词句,含义为:若此比丘未防护、未遮止此眼根律仪而安住时。也可理解为,“ye”在此转作“yaṃ”,“hi”为填充虚词,义即“他有”。显示巴利原文
Viharatīti evaṃ cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto yena kenaci iriyāpathavihārena viharati. Yañhissātiādimhi yaṃ cakkhundriyasaṃvaraṃ assa bhikkhuno asaṃvutassa athaketvā apidahitvā viharantassāti evamattho veditabbo. Atha vā, ye-kārassa yanti ādeso. Hikāro ca padapūraṇo, ye assāti attho.
“uppajjeyyuṃ”意为“会生起”。“漏、苦、热恼”指四种漏,以及其余能引生苦恼的烦恼热恼与异熟热恼。因为,当眼门出现可爱所缘时,若以贪着欲味的方式耽味、欢喜,欲漏便生;若转念“我于未来善趣亦将得此”,以希求有而耽味,有漏便生;若执取为“是有情”“属于有情”,见漏便生;与这一切俱起的无知,即是无明漏。这四种漏即如此生起。与这些漏相应的其他烦恼,便是苦与热恼;或者,这些烦恼未来的异熟,也是苦与热恼。因为那些不防护而安住的人,确实会生起这些,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Uppajjeyyunti nibbatteyyuṃ. Āsavā vighātapariḷāhāti cattāro āsavā ca aññe ca vighātakarā kilesapariḷāhā vipākapariḷāhā ca. Cakkhudvāre hi iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ āpāthagataṃ kāmassādavasena assādayato abhinandato kāmāsavo uppajjati, īdisaṃ aññasmimpi sugatibhave labhissāmīti bhavapatthanāya assādayato bhavāsavo uppajjati, sattoti vā sattassāti vā gaṇhantassa diṭṭhāsavo uppajjati, sabbeheva sahajātaṃ aññāṇaṃ avijjāsavoti cattāro āsavā uppajjanti. Tehi sampayuttā apare kilesā vighātapariḷāhā, āyatiṃ vā tesaṃ vipākā. Tepi hi asaṃvutasseva viharato uppajjeyyunti vuccanti.
“evaṃsa te”即“如此,他的这些”。意为唯有依此方便,这些漏才不生起,而非依其他途径。此理同样适用于“如理省思、以耳根防护而防护”等下文内容。显示巴利原文
Evaṃsa teti evaṃ assa te. Evaṃ etena upāyena na honti, no aññathāti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo paṭisaṅkhā yoniso sotindriyasaṃvarasaṃvutotiādīsu.
比丘们,这些被称为“应依防护而断除的漏”,意思是:在六根门中,每一门各有四种漏,总共二十四漏,这些漏都应通过防护来断除。在此,应当了知,一切处的“防护”即是“念的防护”。显示巴利原文
Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbāti ime chasu dvāresu cattāro cattāro katvā catuvīsati āsavā saṃvarena pahātabbāti vuccanti. Sabbattheva cettha satisaṃvaro eva saṃvaroti veditabbo.
关于「依受用所应断除的漏」的解释显示巴利原文
Paṭisevanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
23 关于“如理省思衣服”等段落的解说,已全部在《清净道论》的“戒论”中说道。其中,“若他有……者”是指,在衣服、团食等当中,有某一样资具。“不作为受用”是指,如此如理地不耽着受用。其余部分如前所说。然而这里,应当特别明了:对于尚未得到衣服等资具便生起希求的人,或对于已得的资具产生贪着、耽溺的人,应知这是“欲漏”的生起。同样,对于其他殊胜的存在或善趣的存在,心里想着“我将在那里得到这些”,因对存在的渴求而耽溺者,应知这是“有漏”的生起;而当一个人强烈执取“我得到”“我没得到”,或“这是我的”等见解时,应知这是“见漏”的生起。然而,所有这些漏,都必定与同时生起的“无明漏”相伴。这四种漏的生起以及它们带来的果报热恼,也可从九种受的产生来了解。显示巴利原文
23.Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvarantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge sīlakathāyaṃ vuttameva. Yañhissāti yaṃ cīvarapiṇḍapātādīsu vā aññataraṃ assa. Appaṭisevatoti evaṃ yoniso appaṭisevantassa. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalaṃ panidha aladdhaṃ cīvarādiṃ patthayato laddhaṃ vā assādayato kāmāsavassa uppatti veditabbā. Īdisaṃ aññasmimpi sampattibhave sugatibhave labhissāmīti bhavapatthanāya assādayato bhavāsavassa, ahaṃ labhāmi na labhāmīti vā mayhaṃ vā idanti attasaññaṃ adhiṭṭhahato diṭṭhāsavassa uppatti veditabbā. Sabbeheva pana sahajāto avijjāsavoti evaṃ catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ uppatti vipākapariḷāhā ca navavedanuppādanatopi veditabbā.
所谓「比丘们,这些被称为依受用所应断除的漏」,意思就是:在每一项资具上都各有四种漏,总共成为十六种漏。应当借由名为「智防护」的省思方式来受用它们,从而断除这些漏,所以这样说。显示巴利原文
Imevuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbāti ime ekamekasmiṃ paccaye cattāro cattāro katvā soḷasa āsavā iminā ñāṇasaṃvarasaṅkhātena paccavekkhaṇapaṭisevanena pahātabbāti vuccanti.
关于「依忍受所应断除的漏」的解释显示巴利原文
Adhivāsanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
24 「如理省思后,能堪忍寒冷」:即是以方便、方法省思之后,能忍受寒冷;他忍耐、承受寒冷,而非如怯弱之人,稍遇寒冷便颤抖、动摇,舍弃所修业处。更应如罗马沙龙长老那样,即使受到极大的寒冷,也不动摇、不颤抖,一心专注在业处上。据说,长老住在塔庙山的粟山洞精勤殿时,正值冬际降雪,他省思着世界中间地狱之苦,未尝舍弃业处,在露天端坐了一整夜。对于炎热等情况,也应以同样的方式理解其义。显示巴利原文
24.Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso khamo hoti sītassāti upāyena pathena paccavekkhitvā khamo hoti sītassa sītaṃ khamati sahati, na avīrapuriso viya appamattakenapi sītena calati kampati kammaṭṭhānaṃ vijahati. Apica kho lomasanāgatthero viya anappakenāpi sītena phuṭṭho na calati na kampati, kammaṭṭhānameva manasi karoti. Thero kira cetiyapabbate piyaṅguguhāyaṃ padhānaghare viharanto antaraṭṭhake himapātasamaye lokantarikaniraye paccavekkhitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ avijahantova abbhokāse vītināmesi. Evaṃ uṇhādīsupi atthayojanā veditabbā.
总之,若比丘能如这位长老一样,承受极为剧烈的热,便称为「能堪忍热」。据说,长老在夏季的午后,坐在户外经行处。当他专注作意业处时,汗水从腋下流下。一位弟子便对他说:「尊者,请坐这里,此处凉爽。」长老回答:「朋友啊!我正是畏惧炎热,才坐在这里啊!」他如此省思无间地狱之苦,依然静坐不动。此处所说的「热」,应理解为如火焰般的炽热恼害。但这段事迹是依太阳光的热恼为据而说的。显示巴利原文
Kevalañhi yo bhikkhu adhimattampi uṇhaṃ sahati sveva thero viya, ayaṃ ‘‘khamo uṇhassā’’ti veditabbo. Thero kira gimhasamaye pacchābhattaṃ bahicaṅkame nisīdi. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto sedāpissa kacchehi muccanti. Atha naṃ antevāsiko āha ‘‘idha, bhante, nisīdatha, sītalo okāso’’ti. Thero ‘‘uṇhabhayenevamhi āvuso idha nisinno’’ti avīcimahānirayaṃ paccavekkhitvā nisīdiyeva. Uṇhanti cettha aggisantāpova veditabbo. Sūriyasantāpavasena panetaṃ vatthu vuttaṃ.
再者,即使有两三次未得饮食,比丘省思自己在无始轮回中,亦曾投生饿鬼界,故心不动摇,绝不放弃业处。即使遭到极强盛的虻、蚊、风、热等触所侵扰,省思自己曾投生畜生界之苦后,心不动摇,绝不放弃业处。即使被爬行类动物接触,省思自己在无始轮回中,曾无数次于狮子、老虎等猛兽口中翻转的往事之后,心不动摇,绝不放弃业处,恰如精勤长老一般。这便应知为「能堪忍饥饿……乃至……爬行类动物的接触」。显示巴利原文
Yo ca dve tayo vāre bhattaṃ vā pānīyaṃ vā alabhamānopi anamatagge saṃsāre attano pettivisayūpapattiṃ paccavekkhitvā avedhento kammaṭṭhānaṃ na vijahatiyeva. Adhimattehi ḍaṃsamakasavātātapasamphassehi phuṭṭho cāpi tiracchānūpapattiṃ paccavekkhitvā avedhento kammaṭṭhānaṃ na vijahatiyeva. Sarīsapasamphassena phuṭṭho cāpi anamatagge saṃsāre sīhabyagghādimukhesu anekavāraṃ parivattitapubbabhāvaṃ paccavekkhitvā avedhento kammaṭṭhānaṃ na vijahatiyeva padhāniyatthero viya. Ayaṃ ‘‘khamo jighacchāya…pe… sarīsapasamphassāna’’nti veditabbo.
据说,长老在破衣精舍的翅子树精勤堂中听受圣种时,被剧毒的蛇咬到。长老虽已觉知,却以净信心安坐,一心听法。毒势变得僵滞。长老从具足戒开始,次第省察己戒,生起“我戒清净”的喜悦。随着喜悦生起,毒便退去,渗入大地。长老便在那里获得心一境性,增长观,证得阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Theraṃ kira khaṇḍacelavihāre kaṇikārapadhāniyaghare ariyavaṃsaṃ suṇantaṃ ghoraviso sappo ḍaṃsi. Thero jānitvāpi pasannacitto nisinno dhammaṃyeva suṇāti. Visavego thaddho ahosi. Thero upasampadamaṇḍalaṃ ādiṃ katvā sīlaṃ paccavekkhitvā parisuddhasīlohamasmīti pītiṃ uppādesi. Saha pītuppādā visaṃ nivattitvā pathaviṃ pāvisi. Thero tattheva cittekaggataṃ labhitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.
然而,若有人因被斥骂而听闻粗恶的言语,乃至由于粗恶辞令所带来的恶行,甚至听到被称为最下等事的话语,他只是省察忍耐的功德而不为所动,如同长诵无畏长老那样,此人应知即是“堪忍粗恶之辞、恶来之语道者”。显示巴利原文
Yo pana akkosavasena durutte duruttattāyeva ca durāgate api antimavatthusaññite vacanapathe sutvā khantiguṇaṃyeva paccavekkhitvā na vedhati dīghabhāṇakaabhayatthero viya. Ayaṃ ‘‘khamo duruttānaṃ durāgatānaṃ vacanapathāna’’nti veditabbo.
据说,长老因乐于少欲知足的性行,宣说大圣种行,整个大村庄的人都来了。长老得到了极大的恭敬。另一位大长老无法忍受,辱骂道:“我是长诵者,我讲圣种行,你却整夜喧闹”等等。两人各自回自己的精舍,同行了大约一伽浮他。整整一伽浮他途中,那人一直辱骂他。然后到了两条精舍路分叉的地方,长诵长老站住,向他礼敬后说:“尊者,这是您的路。”那人如同没有听到一样走了。长老也回到精舍,洗足后坐下。他的弟子问:“尊者,整整一伽浮他他都在骂,您怎么什么也没说?”长老说:“朋友,忍耐才是我所负担的,不是不忍。即使在举一步之间,我也不会看到有业处的分离。”这里应知“语言即是语道”。显示巴利原文
Thero kira paccayasantosabhāvanārāmatāya mahāariyavaṃsappaṭipadaṃ kathesi, sabbo mahāgāmo āgacchati. Therassa mahāsakkāro uppajjati. Taṃ aññataro mahāthero adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto dīghabhāṇako ariyavaṃsaṃ kathemīti sabbarattiṃ kolāhalaṃ karosītiādīhi akkosi. Ubhopi ca attano attano vihāraṃ gacchantā gāvutamattaṃ ekapathena agamaṃsu. Sakalagāvutampi so taṃ akkosiyeva. Tato yattha dvinnaṃ vihārānaṃ maggo bhijjati, tattha ṭhatvā dīghabhāṇakatthero taṃ vanditvā ‘‘esa, bhante, tumhākaṃ maggo’’ti āha. So asuṇanto viya agamāsi. Theropi vihāraṃ gantvā pāde pakkhāletvā nisīdi. Tamenaṃ antevāsiko ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, sakalagāvutaṃ paribhāsantaṃ na kiñci avocutthā’’ti āha. Thero ‘‘khantiyeva, āvuso, mayhaṃ bhāro, na akkhanti. Ekapaduddhārepi kammaṭṭhānaviyogaṃ na passāmī’’ti āha. Ettha ca vacanameva vacanapathoti veditabbo.
而对于已生起的身体感受,以逼迫义为苦,以深重义为猛,以粗恶义为涩,以锐利义为刺痛,因无乐味而为不可意,因不增长悦意而为不可喜,因能害命而为能害命,他全然安忍,不动不摇。具有如此禀性者,犹如质多山上的勤修长老。应知这便是“对于已生的感受……具有忍辱习性者”。显示巴利原文
Yo pana uppannā sārīrikā vedanā dukkhamanaṭṭhena dukkhā, bahalaṭṭhena tibbā, pharusaṭṭhena kharā, tikhiṇaṭṭhena kaṭukā, assādavirahato asātā, manaṃ avaḍḍhanato amanāpā, pāṇaharaṇasamatthatāya pāṇaharā adhivāsetiyeva, na vedhati. Evaṃ sabhāvo hoti cittalapabbate padhāniyatthero viya. Ayaṃ ‘‘uppannānaṃ…pe… adhivāsanajātiko’’ti veditabbo.
据说,那位长老夜间精勤修习后站立时,腹内生起了风病。他无法忍受,便辗转反侧。那时,站在经行道旁的取食长老对他说:“贤友,出家之人应当具备忍辱的习性啊。”他回答:“善哉,尊者。”便安忍下来,安住不动。风气从肚脐裂至心脏。长老镇伏受后,修习观,须臾间证得不还果,即入般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Therassa kira rattiṃ padhānena vītināmetvā ṭhitassa udaravāto uppajji. So taṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto āvattati parivattati. Tamenaṃ caṅkamapasse ṭhito piṇḍapātiyatthero āha ‘‘āvuso, pabbajito nāma adhivāsanasīlo hotī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhu, bhante’’ti adhivāsetvā niccalo sayi. Vāto nābhito yāva hadayaṃ phāleti. Thero vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā vipassanto muhuttena anāgāmī hutvā parinibbāyīti.
“于彼”者,指于冷等中,若彼有任何一种法。“不容忍”者,指对冷等法不能安忍、不能忍受者。其余依前所说。当知此处诸漏生起的情形:为寒冷所触时,若希求温暖,则生起欲漏;于一切处皆然。若思及“成就之有与善趣之有中,无有冷热”,而希求存在,则生起有漏。若执取“我冷、我热”,是为见漏。与他们相应者,则是无明漏。显示巴利原文
Yañhissāti sītādīsu yaṃkiñci ekadhammampi assa. Anadhivāsayatoti anadhivāsentassa akkhamantassa. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Āsavuppatti panettha evaṃ veditabbā. Sītena phuṭṭhassa uṇhaṃ patthayantassa kāmāsavo uppajjati, evaṃ sabbattha. Natthi no sampattibhave sugatibhave sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vāti bhavaṃ patthayantassa bhavāsavo. Mayhaṃ sītaṃ uṇhanti gāho diṭṭhāsavo. Sabbeheva sampayutto avijjāsavoti.
“这被称为……应以忍辱来断除”的意思是:对于冷等接触,每一种都会生起四重烦恼,这些众多的烦恼,应当通过这种名为“忍耐与防护”的忍辱来断除。在这里,应知:因为这种忍耐能够容忍冷等诸法,将它们承担起来并安住于其上,而不是无法忍受而排斥,所以被称为“忍辱”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ime vuccanti…pe… adhivāsanā pahātabbā’’ti ime sītādīsu ekamekassa vasena cattāro cattāro katvā aneke āsavā imāya khantisaṃvarasaṅkhātāya adhivāsanāya pahātabbāti vuccantīti attho. Ettha ca yasmā ayaṃ khanti sītādidhamme adhivāseti, attano upari āropetvā vāsetiyeva. Na asahamānā hutvā nirassati, tasmā ‘‘adhivāsanā’’ti vuccatīti veditabbā.
对需以回避断除的诸烦恼的注释显示巴利原文
Parivajjanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
25 “如理思惟后回避暴戾的大象”——(意思是:)“我是沙门”,因此不应停留在暴戾大象的近旁。以此因缘,或可能导致死亡,或可能只受濒死之苦。如此,通过这一方法、途径、缘由而思惟之后,便回避、远离暴戾的大象。这一道理适用于一切处。“暴戾的”即凶恶的,意为野性难驯。“枯树桩”指金合欢等树桩。“多刺处”是刺丛生长之处,指那样的地方。“悬崖”指四周边缘都断开的深坑。“峭壁”指一侧边缘断开的陡壁。“粪池”指倾倒残食、污水、尘垢等物的地方。“污水坑”指泥泞等物流动之处。那样的地方即使仅及膝深,也充满不净,并且这两类处所多遭非人恼害,故而应当回避。对于“非座”,这里不适当的座席即“非座”,应知是指没有固定地基、隐蔽独处的座席。“非行处”中,不适当的去处即“非行处”,依妓女家等的差别可分为五种。“恶友”指那些卑劣、无戒、貌似朋友的人,或直接的怨敌。“亲近”指交往。“明智的同梵行者”指具有智慧、通情达理的同梵行者,这是对比丘们的称呼。因为他们共行同一羯摩、显示巴利原文
25.Paṭisaṅkhāyoniso caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjetīti ahaṃ samaṇoti caṇḍassa hatthissa āsanne na ṭhātabbaṃ. Tatonidānañhi maraṇampi siyā maraṇamattampi dukkhanti evaṃ upāyena pathena paccayena paccavekkhitvā caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjeti paṭikkamati. Esa nayo sabbattha. Caṇḍanti ca duṭṭhaṃ, vāḷanti vuttaṃ hoti. Khāṇunti khadirakhāṇuādiṃ. Kaṇṭakaṭṭhānanti kaṇṭakānaṃ ṭhānaṃ, yattha kaṇṭakā vijjanti, taṃ okāsanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sobbhanti sabbato paricchinnataṭaṃ. Papātanti ekato chinnataṭaṃ. Candanikanti ucchiṭṭhodakagabbhamalādīnaṃ chaḍḍanaṭṭhānaṃ. Oḷigallanti tesaṃyeva sakaddamādīnaṃ sandanokāsaṃ. Taṃ jaṇṇumattampi asucibharitaṃ hoti, dvepi cetāni ṭhānāni amanussaduṭṭhāni honti. Tasmā tāni vajjetabbāni. Anāsaneti ettha pana ayuttaṃ āsanaṃ anāsanaṃ, taṃ atthato aniyatavatthukaṃ rahopaṭicchannāsananti veditabbaṃ. Agocareti etthapi ca ayutto gocaro agocaro, so vesiyādibhedato pañcavidho. Pāpake mitteti lāmake dussīle mittapatirūpake, amitte vā. Bhajantanti sevamānaṃ. Viññū sabrahmacārīti paṇḍitā buddhisampannā sabrahmacārayo, bhikkhūnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Te hi ekakammaṃ ekuddeso samasikkhatāti imaṃ brahmaṃ samānaṃ caranti, tasmā sabrahmacārīti vuccanti. Pāpakesu ṭhānesūti lāmakesu ṭhānesu. Okappeyyunti saddaheyyuṃ, adhimucceyyuṃ ‘‘addhā ayamāyasmā akāsi vā karissati vā’’ti.
“凡他的”:是指在象等对象中,对于他的任何一种情形。其余如前所述。然而,这里应知漏的生起是这样的:当一个人因象等因缘而遭受痛苦时,若希求快乐,便生起欲漏;若希求存在——认为“在成就的存在与善趣的存在中,没有这样的痛苦”——便生起有漏;若执取“象踩踏我,马踩踏我”这样的想法,即是见漏;而无明漏则与所有这些漏相应。显示巴利原文
Yañhissāti hatthiādīsu yaṃkiñci ekampi assa. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Āsavuppatti panettha evaṃ veditabbā. Hatthiādinidānena dukkhena phuṭṭhassa sukhaṃ patthayato kāmāsavo uppajjati. Natthi no sampattibhave sugatibhave īdisaṃ dukkhanti bhavaṃ patthentassa bhavāsavo. Maṃ hatthī maddati, maṃ assoti gāho diṭṭhāsavo. Sabbeheva sampayutto avijjāsavoti.
应当知道,这里所说的“……由回避应断”之漏,是指依于象等每一个所缘,各别生起的四种、四种的诸多漏。它们藉由这种称为“戒律防护”的回避而得以断除。显示巴利原文
Ime vuccanti…pe… parivajjanā pahātabbāti ime hatthiādīsu ekekassa vasena cattāro cattāro katvā aneke āsavā iminā sīlasaṃvarasaṅkhātena parivajjanena pahātabbāti vuccantīti veditabbā.
「由驱除应断的漏」的注释。显示巴利原文
Vinodanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
26 “如理作意后,不忍受已生起的欲寻”:即通过这样的方式——“此寻不善,此寻有过失,此寻招苦报,且会伤害自身”——如理观察欲寻的过患之后,对于在种种所缘上生起、产生、现起的欲寻,他不予忍受。所谓“不忍受”,即不将心安住其上,或不把它安置于心。这也是它的含义。显示巴利原文
26.Paṭisaṅkhāyoniso uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetīti ‘‘iti pāyaṃ vitakko akusalo, itipi sāvajjo, itipi dukkhavipāko, so ca kho attabyābādhāya saṃvattatī’’tiādinā nayena yoniso kāmavitakke ādīnavaṃ paccavekkhitvā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ārammaṇe uppannaṃ jātamabhinibbattaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāseti, cittaṃ āropetvā na vāseti, abbhantare vā na vāsetītipi attho.
那么,不忍受者做什么呢?他舍断它、丢弃它。显示巴利原文
Anadhivāsento kiṃ karotīti? Pajahati chaḍḍeti.
意思是像用簸箕丢弃垃圾那样吗?并非如此。而是驱除它、刺透它、击破它、逐出它。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ kacavaraṃ viya piṭakenāti? Na hi, apica kho naṃ vinodeti tudati vijjhati nīharati.
意思是像用刺棒赶公牛那样吗?并非如此。而是使其归于无,即彻底断除、完全消灭。他如此做:令其内部无有残留,乃至连微尘般的一点点都不留下。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ balibaddaṃ viya patodenāti? Na hi, atha kho naṃ byantīkaroti vigatantaṃ karoti. Yathāssa antopi nāvasissati antamaso bhaṅgamattampi, tathā naṃ karoti.
那么,如何那样做呢?“使其归于无”:即次第地令其归无,通过镇伏断的方式,使它们得以妥善镇伏,这便是所说的意思。这一道理同样适用于嗔寻与害寻。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ pana naṃ tathā karotīti? Anabhāvaṃ gametīti anu anu abhāvaṃ gameti, vikkhambhanappahānena yathā suvikkhambhito hoti, tathā karotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo byāpādavihiṃsāvitakkesu.
在这里,「欲寻」是指《分别论》(vibha. 910) 中所说的:“凡是与欲相应的思虑、寻、邪思惟。”这一说明也适用于其余两种寻。「已生已生」:意思是每当它们生起时,就在现前的那一刻,亦即一生起就将其驱除;或者,一经生起即予驱除之后,不会在第二次生起时对其放舍不顾;纵使生起百次,也于每一次生起时便将其驱除。「恶不善」:因意义低劣而称为“恶”,因不善巧的状态而称为“不善”。「法」:即指这些欲寻等,或所有的九种大寻。其中,前三种已作说明,其余六种是:亲戚寻、地方寻、不死寻、与同情他人相应的寻、与利养、恭敬、名声相应的寻,以及与不希望被轻视相应的寻(《大义释》207)。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca kāmavitakkoti ‘‘yo kāmapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko micchāsaṅkappo’’ti vibhaṅge (vibha. 910) vutto. Esa nayo itaresu. Uppannuppanneti uppanne uppanne, uppannamatteyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sakiṃ vā uppanne vinodetvā dutiyavāre ajjhupekkhitā na hoti, satakkhattumpi uppanne uppanne vinodetiyeva. Pāpake akusaleti lāmakaṭṭhena pāpake, akosallatāya akusale. Dhammeti teyeva kāmavitakkādayo sabbepi vā nava mahāvitakke. Tattha tayo vuttā eva. Avasesā ‘‘ñātivitakko janapadavitakko amaravitakko parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko lābhasakkārasilokapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko anavaññattipaṭisaṃyutto vitakko’’ti (mahāni. 207) ime cha.
「如果他有某种」:在这些寻当中,无论生起哪一种寻,其余的说明都与前面相同。然而在这里,欲寻其实就是欲漏;欲寻中更为殊胜的层次是有漏;与彼寻相应的寻是见漏;而在一切寻当中,都有无明漏。应如此了知诸漏的生起。显示巴利原文
Yañhissāti etesu vitakkesu yaṃkiñci assa, sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kāmavitakko panettha kāmāsavo eva. Tabbiseso bhavāsavo. Taṃsampayutto diṭṭhāsavo. Sabbavitakkesu avijjāsavoti evaṃ āsavuppattipi veditabbā.
「这些称为……应通过驱除来断除」:应当了知,这里所说的以欲寻等为代表的各种漏,即是通过伴随着在每一种寻中观察其过患、名为“精进防护”的驱除,而应予以断除的。显示巴利原文
Ime vuccanti…pe… vinodanā pahātabbāti ime kāmavitakkādivasena vuttappakārā āsavā iminā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vitakke ādīnavapaccavekkhaṇasahitena vīriyasaṃvarasaṅkhātena vinodanena pahātabbāti vuccantīti veditabbā.
「以修习而应断的诸漏」的解释显示巴利原文
Bhāvanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
27 “通过如理作意而修习念觉支”:意为先以正确的方法与途径,如理观察不修习的过患和修习的利益,然后再修习念觉支。这一道理适用于所有觉支。于此,虽然在证得上三道之刹那才生起的出世间觉支,方是此处真正所指,但为了使初学者于觉支不生迷惑,我将结合世间与出世间的方式来解释其中的意义。不过,在当下这一处,应舍弃世间之说,唯取出世间之理来理解。其中,以“念觉支”等为首的那七个词,首先——显示巴利原文
27.Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetīti abhāvanāya ādīnavaṃ, bhāvanāya ca ānisaṃsaṃ upāyena pathena paccavekkhitvā satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti, esa nayo sabbattha. Ettha ca kiñcāpi ime uparimaggattayasamayasambhūtā lokuttarabojjhaṅgā eva adhippetā, tathāpi ādikammikānaṃ bojjhaṅgesu asammohatthaṃ lokiyalokuttaramissakena nesaṃ nayena atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Idha pana lokiyanayaṃ pahāya lokuttaranayo eva gahetabbo. Tattha satisambojjhaṅgantiādinā nayena vuttānaṃ sattannaṃ ādipadānaṃyeva tāva –
有智慧者,应从“义”与“相”等方面,乃至从“次第”的抉择,
并以不增不减之原则,而正确了知。
显示巴利原文 Atthato lakkhaṇādīhi, kamato ca vinicchayo; Anūnādhikato ceva, viññātabbo vibhāvinā.
其中,先就念觉支而言:‘念’,是以忆念为义。此念,具有现起之相,或不忘记之相。也如经中所说:‘大王,譬如国王的库藏官,不会让国王的财宝散失:“大王,黄金有这么多,金钱有这么多,财宝有这么多。”同样地,大王,念生起时,便不会让善与不善、有罪与无罪、低劣与殊胜、黑与白等对应并举之法被忘失。这也就是四念处。’(此为广说)其作用即不忘记。实际上,那位长老正是依据作用而安立‘不忘记’为其相。或说,其作用为不混乱。它表现为面向所缘而现起。念本身即是觉支,所以称为‘念觉支’。在此,‘觉支’意为觉悟的支分,或是觉悟者的组成部分。显示巴利原文
Tattha satisambojjhaṅge tāva saraṇaṭṭhena sati. Sā panesā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇā, apilāpanalakkhaṇā vā. Vuttampi hetaṃ ‘‘yathā, mahārāja, rañño bhaṇḍāgāriko rañño sāpateyyaṃ apilāpeti, ettakaṃ, mahārāja, hiraññaṃ, ettakaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ, ettakaṃ sāpateyyanti, evameva kho, mahārāja , sati uppajjamānā kusalākusalasāvajjānavajjahīnapaṇītakaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge dhamme apilāpeti. Ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti (mi. pa. 2.1.13) vitthāro. Apilāpanarasā. Kiccavaseneva hissa etaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ therena vuttaṃ. Asammosarasā vā. Gocarābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Sati eva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgo. Tattha bodhiyā bodhissa vā aṅgoti bojjhaṅgo.
这是什么意思呢?此处,‘觉悟’是指一个法集。当这个法集在世出世间道的刹那生起时,它能成为沉滞、掉举、止步不前、过度精勤、耽著欲乐与自我折磨的随行,以及断灭执与常住执等众多灾患的对立面。这个法集由念、择法、精进、喜、轻安、定、舍所构成。圣弟子正是依于此法集而觉悟,因此这个法集被称为‘觉悟’。所谓‘觉悟’,即从烦恼相续的沉睡中醒觉,或指通达四圣谛,或指现证涅槃。正如经中所说:‘修习七觉支后,证得无上正自觉。’‘觉支’就是指这个称为‘法集’的觉悟的组成部分,如同禅支、道支等一样。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yā hi ayaṃ dhammasāmaggī, yāya lokiyalokuttaramaggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhana-kāmasukhattakilamathānuyoga-ucchedasassatābhinivesādīnaṃ anekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayavīriyapītipassaddhisamādhiupekkhāsaṅkhātāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhatīti katvā ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati. Bujjhatīti kilesasantānaniddāya uṭṭhahati, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati, nibbānameva vā sacchikarotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘satta bojjhaṅge bhāvetvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho’’ti. Tassā dhammasāmaggisaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgotipi bojjhaṅgo, jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viya.
再者,那位圣弟子,也因依上述那样的法集而觉悟,故被称为‘觉者’。那位觉者的组成部分,同样也名为‘觉支’,如同军队的支分、战车的支分等。因此,注疏师们说:‘或可说,觉支即正在觉悟者的组成部分。’此外,依《无碍解道》所说,其义应如此理解:‘所谓觉支,是以何义而称觉支呢?导向觉悟故,称觉支;正在觉悟故,称觉支;随顺觉悟故,称觉支;正向觉悟故,称觉支;完全觉悟故,称觉支。’等等。殊胜而美妙的觉支,即是‘正觉支’。如上所述,念本身即是正觉支,故称‘念觉支’。对此最初一词,应先依此方式,从‘义’与‘相’等方面了知其抉择。显示巴利原文
Yopesa yathāvuttappakārāya etāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati, tassa bodhissa aṅgotipi bojjhaṅgo, senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘bujjhanakassa puggalassa aṅgāti vā bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Apica ‘‘bojjhaṅgāti kenaṭṭhena bojjhaṅgā? Bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgā, bujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā, anubujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā, paṭibujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā, sambujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.17) paṭisambhidānayenāpi attho veditabbo. Pasattho sundaro vā bojjhaṅgoti sambojjhaṅgo. Evaṃ sati eva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgo. Taṃ satisambojjhaṅgaṃ. Evaṃ tāva ekassa ādipadassa atthato lakkhaṇādīhi ca vinicchayo viññātabbo.
在第二等觉支中:择法觉支,因审察四谛之法,故名为择法觉支。它的相是审察,作用是照亮,现起是不迷乱。精进,因具英雄本色,且应依正确的方式策励,故得精进之名。它的相是策励,作用是支持,现起是不消沉。喜,指能带来喜悦,故名喜。它的相是遍满,或说相为满意;作用是滋养身心;现起是身心的欣悦。轻安,因平息身心的不安,故称轻安。它的相是寂静,作用是镇伏身心的不安,现起是身心不动摇的清凉。定,指令心等持,故名为定。它的相是不散乱,或说相为不放逸;作用是将心与心所汇集于一处;现起是心住立于所缘。舍,指以中舍而观,故名舍。它的相是觉察,或说相为平等;作用是抑止不足与过度,或说作用是断除偏袒;现起是中立的状态。其余的解释,与前面所述之理完全相同。对于余下的词,也应以同样的方式,从‘义’与‘相’等方面来了知对其的抉择。显示巴利原文
Dutiyādīsu pana catusaccadhamme vicinātīti dhammavicayo. So pana vicayalakkhaṇo, obhāsanaraso, asammohapaccupaṭṭhāno. Vīrabhāvato vidhinā īrayitabbato ca vīriyaṃ. Taṃ paggahalakkhaṇaṃ , upatthambhanarasaṃ, anosīdanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ . Pīṇayatīti pīti. Sā pharaṇalakkhaṇā, tuṭṭhilakkhaṇā vā, kāyacittānaṃ pīṇanarasā, tesaṃyeva odagyapaccupaṭṭhānā. Kāyacittadarathapassambhanato passaddhi. Sā upasamalakkhaṇā, kāyacittadarathanimmaddanarasā, āyacittānaṃ aparipphandanabhūtasītibhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Samādhānato samādhi. So avikkhepalakkhaṇo, avisāralakkhaṇo vā, cittacetasikānaṃ sampiṇḍanaraso, cittaṭṭhitipaccupaṭṭhāno. Ajjhupekkhanato upekkhā. Sā paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇā, samavāhitalakkhaṇā vā, ūnādhikatānivāraṇarasā, pakkhapātupacchedarasā vā, majjhattabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Evaṃ sesapadānampi atthato lakkhaṇādīhi ca vinicchayo viññātabbo.
关于次第:在此,因为世尊说过:‘比丘们,我说念在一切处都有用。’由于念觉支对其余一切觉支皆有益助,故最先宣说念觉支。其后,通过‘他这样具念而住,以慧去审察彼法’等方法,在经典中便已说明了其余觉支先后宣说的用意。于此,应这样来理解关于次第的抉择。显示巴利原文
Kamatoti ettha ca ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234) vacanato sabbesaṃ sesabojjhaṅgānaṃ upakārakattā satisambojjhaṅgova paṭhamaṃ vutto. Tato paraṃ ‘‘so tathā sato viharanto taṃ dhammaṃ paññāya pavicinatī’’tiādinā (vibha. 469) nayena sesabojjhaṅgānaṃ pubbāpariyavacane payojanaṃ sutteyeva vuttaṃ. Evamettha kamatopi vinicchayo viññātabbo.
关于不多不少:为何世尊所说的觉支恰恰是七个,不多也不少?因为须具足两个条件:能对治昏沉与掉举,且须遍一切处而适用。这其中,有三种觉支是昏沉的对治,如经中说:‘比丘们,当心昏沉时,那正是修习择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支的时机。’另有三种觉支是掉举的对治,如经中说:‘比丘们,当心掉举时,那正是修习轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支的时机。’然而,其中有一觉支遍一切处而适用,如经中说:‘比丘们,我说念是遍一切处的。’也有读作‘遍一切处’的,意思是:念在一切情况下都不可或缺。正因为觉支既能对治昏沉与掉举,又必须具备普遍适用性,故只说七支,不多不少。于此,应这样来理解关于不多不少的抉择。显示巴利原文
Anūnādhikatoti kasmā pana bhagavatā satteva bojjhaṅgā vuttā anūnā anadhikāti. Līnuddhaccapaṭipakkhato sabbatthikato ca. Ettha hi tayo bojjhaṅgā līnassa paṭipakkhā. Yathāha – ‘‘yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Tayo uddhaccassa paṭipakkhā. Yathāha – ‘‘yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Eko panettha sabbatthiko. Yathāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti. ‘‘Sabbatthaka’’ntipi pāṭho, dvinnampi sabbattha icchitabbanti attho. Evaṃ līnuddhaccapaṭipakkhato sabbatthikato ca satteva bojjhaṅgā vuttā anūnā anadhikāti, evamettha anūnādhikatopi vinicchayo viññātabbo.
至此,先已了知以“念觉支”等法门所解说的七个起始词之义释,如今对于“修习依远离”等文句,应如此理解。“修习”即增长,即在自己的心相续中一再令其生起、化生。“依远离”谓依止于远离。“远离”即独处、离开的状态。此远离有五种:彼分远离、镇伏远离、正断远离、安息远离与出离远离。这五者的差别,应依“于圣律未调伏者”那部分所说的方法来了解。实际上,那里所说的“调伏”,即是此处的“远离”。这便是五种远离的意义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tāva ‘‘satisambojjhaṅga’’ntiādinā nayena vuttānaṃ sattannaṃ ādipadānaṃyeva atthavaṇṇanaṃ ñatvā idāni bhāveti vivekanissitantiādīsu evaṃ ñātabbā. Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti, attano cittasantāne punappunaṃ janeti abhinibbattetīti attho. Vivekanissitanti viveke nissitaṃ. Vivekoti vivittatā. Svāyaṃ tadaṅgaviveko vikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhi nissaraṇavivekoti pañcavidho. Tassa nānattaṃ ‘‘ariyadhamme avinīto’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayameva hi tattha vinayoti vutto. Evaṃ etasmiṃ pañcavidhe viveke.
所谓“依远离”,应理解为:修习念觉支,是依于彼分远离、依于正断远离,也依于出离远离。确实,这位精勤修习觉支的瑜伽行者,在毗婆舍那的刹那,从作用上即依于彼分远离,从内心倾向即依于出离远离;而在圣道之刹那,则从作用上依于正断远离,从所缘上依于出离远离,如此修习念觉支。亦有说依于五种远离的,因为他们并非仅在强力观、道、果的阶段才安立觉支,在观的前行——如遍处禅那、安那般那念、不净观、梵住禅等——也安立觉支,而这是义注师们所不禁止的。因此,依他们的见解,在这些禅那进行的当下,从作用上即是依于镇伏远离。正如所说“在观照的刹那,从内心倾向依于出离远离”,同样地,也可以说修习是依于安息远离。此道理同样适用于“依离贪”等。因为远离的位次,实际上就是离贪等的位次。显示巴利原文
Vivekanissitanti tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ samucchedavivekanissitaṃ nissaraṇavivekanissitañca satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetīti ayamattho veditabbo. Tathā hi ayaṃ bojjhaṅgabhāvanānuyutto yogī vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakāle pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti. Pañcavidhavivekanissitantipi eke, te hi na kevalaṃ balavavipassanāmaggaphalakkhaṇesu eva bojjhaṅge uddharanti, vipassanāpādakakasiṇajjhānaānāpānāsubhabrahmavihārajjhānesupi uddharanti. Na ca paṭisiddhā aṭṭhakathācariyehi. Tasmā tesaṃ matena etesaṃ jhānānaṃ pavattikkhaṇe kiccato eva vikkhambhanavivekanissitaṃ. Yathā ca ‘‘vipassanākkhaṇe ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissita’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ paṭippassaddhivivekanissitampi bhāvetīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Esa nayo virāganissitādīsu. Vivekaṭṭhā eva hi virāgādayo.
在这里应当指出,舍遣有两种:舍离的舍遣与进入的舍遣。其中,舍离的舍遣,是指在毗婆舍那的刹那以彼分断的方式,以及在圣道的刹那以正断的方式断除烦恼。进入的舍遣,是指在毗婆舍那的刹那以心倾向涅槃的方式,以及在圣道的刹那以涅槃为所缘的方式进入涅槃。这两种舍遣方式,都适用于此兼具世间与出世间义释的方法。例如,此念觉支正是以所说方式,既舍离了烦恼,又进入了涅槃。而“导向舍遣”这一整个词,意谓正在成为舍遣、正在成熟、已成熟、正在圆满、已圆满。也就是说:“这位精勤修习觉支的比丘,如此修习念觉支,使其成熟为舍离烦恼的舍遣状态,也成熟为进入涅槃的舍遣状态,并令之圆满。”此方法同样适用于其余的觉支。显示巴利原文
Kevalañhettha vossaggo duvidho pariccāgavossaggo ca pakkhandanavossaggo cāti. Tattha pariccāgavossaggoti vipassanākkhaṇe ca tadaṅgavasena, maggakkhaṇe ca samucchedavasena kilesappahānaṃ. Pakkhandanavossaggoti vipassanākkhaṇe tanninnabhāvena, maggakkhaṇe pana ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanaṃ. Tadubhayampi imasmiṃ lokiyalokuttaramissake atthavaṇṇanānaye vaṭṭati. Tathā hi ayaṃ satisambojjhaṅgo yathāvuttena pakārena kilese pariccajati, nibbānañca pakkhandati. Vossaggapariṇāminti iminā pana sakalena vacanena vossaggattaṃ pariṇamantaṃ pariṇatañca paripaccantaṃ paripakkañcāti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘ayañhi bojjhaṅgabhāvanānuyutto bhikkhu yathā satisambojjhaṅgo kilesapariccāgavossaggattaṃ nibbānapakkhandanavossaggattañca paripaccati, yathā ca paripakko hoti, tathā naṃ bhāvetī’’ti. Esa nayo sesabojjhaṅgesu.
然而,在此处,涅槃本身因远离一切有为法而称为“远离”,因对一切法离贪而称为“离贪”,因息灭而称为“灭”。唯有圣道才是导向舍遣的。因此,他修习念觉支,以涅槃为所缘而生起,称为“依远离”;同样地,也依离贪、依灭。而且,这正是因为在圣道刹那生起时,由正断烦恼的遍舍状态及进入涅槃的状态,得以成熟、圆满——这一层意义应当正确理解。这一解释原则也适用于其余觉支。显示巴利原文
Idha pana nibbānaṃyeva sabbasaṅkhatehi vivittattā viveko, sabbesaṃ virāgabhāvato virāgo, nirodhabhāvato nirodhoti vuttaṃ. Maggo eva ca vossaggapariṇāmī, tasmā satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattiyā vivekanissitaṃ. Tathā virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ. Tañca kho ariyamaggakkhaṇuppattiyā kilesānaṃ samucchedato pariccāgabhāvena ca nibbānapakkhandanabhāvena ca pariṇataṃ paripakkanti ayameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Esa nayo sesabojjhaṅgesu.
“任何他的”:在此七觉支中,只要其中有任何一个觉支为他所有。其余如前所说。关于漏的生起,此处应知:与上三道相应的这些觉支,若未修习,则可能生起欲漏、有漏、无明漏三者;而对于如此修习者,这些漏便不会生起。当知此理。显示巴利原文
Yañhissāti etesu bojjhaṅgesu yaṃkiñci assa. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Āsavuppattiyaṃ panettha imesaṃ uparimaggattayasampayuttānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ abhāvitattā ye uppajjeyyuṃ kāmāsavo bhavāsavo avijjāsavoti tayo āsavā, bhāvayato evaṃsa te āsavā na hontīti ayaṃ nayo veditabbo.
“这些(漏)被称为……应通过修习断除”:应当知道,三种漏正是通过此与三道相应的觉支修习而被断除,故说为“由修习而断除”。显示巴利原文
Ime vuccanti…pe… bhāvanā pahātabbāti ime tayo āsavā imāya maggattayasampayuttāya bojjhaṅgabhāvanāya pahātabbāti vuccantīti veditabbā.
28 现在,为赞叹这位以七种行相断除了诸漏的比丘,显示其断漏的功德与利益,同时也以这些理据激励众生断除诸漏,世尊方才说道:“比丘们,因为……已达到了苦的边际。”在此,“因为”(yato kho)中的“to”是属格标记,整词即“他的”(yassa kho)之意。然而古代的老师们将其解释为“于彼时”(yasmiṃ kāle)。所谓“那些应藉由见而断的漏”,意指那些应通过见道断除的漏,确实仅由见道便得断除;对于尚未断除的漏,修行者不会生起“已断除”之想。这一解释原则可广说应用于一切处。显示巴利原文
28. Idāni imehi sattahākārehi pahīnāsavaṃ bhikkhuṃ thomento āsavappahāne cassa ānisaṃsaṃ dassento eteheva ca kāraṇehi āsavappahāne sattānaṃ ussukkaṃ janento yato kho, bhikkhave…pe… antamakāsi dukkhassāti āha. Tattha yato khoti sāmivacane tokāro, yassa khoti vuttaṃ hoti. Porāṇā pana yasmiṃ kāleti vaṇṇayanti. Ye āsavā dassanā pahātabbāti ye āsavā dassanena pahātabbā, te dassaneneva pahīnā honti, na appahīnesuyeva pahīnasaññī hoti. Evaṃ sabbattha vitthāro.
“以一切漏的防护而遮蔽”:指以一切漏的防护所遮蔽,或者说以一切漏的遮盖所遮蔽。“彻底切断了渴爱”:指切断、截断、根除了一切渴爱。“令结回转”:指令十种结回转而成为无垢。“正确”:指以正因、以正理。“慢的现观”:指对慢的见现观与断现观。因为阿罗汉道依其作用能照见慢,这是它的见现观;而以此见现观照见慢后,慢便即刻断除,犹如被毒蛇所见的生命当即死亡。这是它的断现观。显示巴利原文
Sabbāsavasaṃvarasaṃvutoti sabbehi āsavapidhānehi pihito, sabbesaṃ vā āsavānaṃ pidhānehi pihito. Acchecchitaṇhanti sabbampi taṇhaṃ chindi, saṃchindi samucchindi. Vivattayi saṃyojananti dasavidhampi saṃyojanaṃ parivattayi nimmalamakāsi. Sammāti hetunā kāraṇena. Mānābhisamayāti mānassa dassanābhisamayā pahānābhisamayā ca. Arahattamaggo hi kiccavasena mānaṃ passati, ayamassa dassanābhisamayo. Tena diṭṭho pana so tāvadeva pahīyati diṭṭhavisena diṭṭhasattānaṃ jīvitaṃ viya. Ayamassa pahānābhisamayo.
“他作苦的边际”:如此,由于以阿罗汉道正确地照见了慢,且慢已被断除,则有哪些边际呢?如“身体系缚的内部衰坏”(《小品》278)、“绿的边际”等(《中部》1.304)所说的最末之界限边;又如“比丘们,这是生计中的最低者”(《如是语》91;《相应部》3.80)所说的低劣边;又如“有身是一边”(《增支部》6.61)所说的部分边;以及“由一切因缘灭尽,这就是苦的尽头”(《相应部》2.51)所说的终尽边——如此共有四种边。于此四种边中,对于整个轮回的苦,他达成了第四种边,即所谓最终尽头的边际,也就是为其作界限、作终结。意思是,他只留下最后身残余的那一点苦,亦即他作成了苦的尽头。显示巴利原文
Antamakāsi dukkhassāti evaṃ arahattamaggena sammā mānassa diṭṭhattā pahīnattā ca ye ime ‘‘kāyabandhanassa anto jīrati (cūḷava. 278). Haritantaṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.304) evaṃ vuttaantimamariyādanto ca, ‘‘antamidaṃ, bhikkhave, jīvikāna’’nti (itivu. 91; saṃ. ni. 3.80) evaṃ vuttalāmakanto ca, ‘‘sakkāyo eko anto’’ti (a. ni. 6.61) evaṃ vuttakoṭṭhāsanto ca, ‘‘esevanto dukkhassa sabbapaccayasaṅkhayā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.51) evaṃ vuttakoṭanto cāti evaṃ cattāro antā, tesu sabbasseva vaṭṭadukkhassa antaṃ catutthakoṭisaṅkhātaṃ antimakoṭisaṅkhātaṃ antamakāsi paricchedaṃ parivaṭumaṃ akāsi. Antimasamussayamattāvasesaṃ dukkhaṃ akāsīti vuttaṃ hoti.
「那些比丘心悦」:指那些比丘自心满意、欢喜踊跃,或与喜、悦相应之心,随喜世尊的教说。「对世尊的教说随喜」:指这以苦的边际为究竟的世尊教说,是善说、善宣的。他们心想:「世尊确实如此!善逝确实如此!」便以头顶敬受,全然随喜。显示巴利原文
Attamanā te bhikkhūti sakamanā tuṭṭhamanā, pītisomanassehi vā sampayuttamanā hutvā. Bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti idaṃ dukkhassa antakiriyāpariyosānaṃ bhagavato bhāsitaṃ sukathitaṃ sulapitaṃ, evametaṃ bhagavā evametaṃ sugatāti matthakena sampaṭicchantā abbhanumodiṃsūti.
此处其余未述的内容,因前文已说且易于理解,故不再赘言。因此,一切应依前文所说,逐句审察。显示巴利原文
Sesamettha yaṃ na vuttaṃ, taṃ pubbe vuttattā ca suviññeyyattā ca na vuttaṃ. Tasmā sabbaṃ vuttānusārena anupadaso paccavekkhitabbaṃ.
第三、《法嗣经》的释义。显示巴利原文
3. Dhammadāyādasuttavaṇṇanā
29 「如是我闻」等,此为《法嗣经》。因此经有其生起的缘起,故先示其缘起,再随释其中前所未见的文句。问:此经是以什么缘起而宣说的呢?答:以利养与恭敬为缘起。据说,那时世尊得到了极大的利养与恭敬,正如他曾在四个不可数劫中圆满累积了布施巴拉密一般。仿佛从四方涌起双重大云,普降洪流,一切波罗蜜似要汇聚一处,于一生中共同示现果报,利养与恭敬的大洪流便这样生起。从各处,刹帝利、婆罗门等人手捧饮食、车乘、衣服、花鬘、香、涂香等,纷纷前来寻访世尊:「佛陀在哪里?世尊在哪里?天中天、人中最上、人狮子在哪里?」他们用数百辆车运来资具,因为找不到停放的地方,便在方圆一由旬之内,车轴紧挨着车轴停驻,并一直跟随,如同盲者林婆罗门等人一般。这一切都应依《犍度》及诸经中所说的方式来理解。不仅世尊如此,比丘僧团也是这样。显示巴利原文
29.Evaṃme sutanti dhammadāyādasuttaṃ. Yasmā panassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo, tasmā taṃ dassetvā vassa apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma. Katarāya ca panidaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyā nikkhittanti. Lābhasakkāre. Bhagavato kira mahālābhasakkāro uppajji. Yathā taṃ cattāro asaṅkhyeyye pūritadānapāramīsañcayassa. Sabbadisāsu yamakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvā mahoghaṃ viya sabbapāramiyo ekasmiṃ attabhāve vipākaṃ dassāmāti sampiṇḍitā viya lābhasakkāramahoghaṃ nibbattayiṃsu. Tato tato annapānayānavatthamālāgandhavilepanādihatthā khattiyabrāhmaṇādayo āgantvā – ‘‘kahaṃ buddho, kahaṃ bhagavā, kahaṃ devadevo, narāsabho, purisasīho’’ti bhagavantaṃ pariyesanti. Sakaṭasatehipi paccaye āharitvā okāsaṃ alabhamānā samantā gāvutappamāṇampi sakaṭadhurena sakaṭadhuramāhaccatiṭṭhanti ceva anubandhanti ca. Andhakavindabrāhmaṇādayo viya. Sabbaṃ khandhake tesu tesu suttesu ca āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca bhagavato, evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassāpi.
经中也这样说:“那时,世尊受到尊重、敬重、尊崇、恭敬、供养,获得衣、食、坐卧具、病缘医药等资具;比丘僧团也受到尊重……乃至……获得资具。”(《优陀那》14)又有:“准陀,于当今世间生起的任何僧团或团体中,我不见有任何其他僧团,能如比丘僧团这般,在利养与荣耀上达到如此顶峰。”显示巴利原文
Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sakkato hoti garukato mānito pūjito apacito lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṃ, bhikkhusaṅghopi kho sakkato hoti…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti (udā. 14). Tathā – ‘‘yāvatā kho, cunda, etarahi saṅgho vā gaṇo vā loke uppanno, nāhaṃ, cunda, aññaṃ ekasaṅghampi samanupassāmi, evaṃ lābhaggayasaggapattaṃ, yathariva, cunda, bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti (dī. ni. 3.176).
那时,世尊与比丘僧团所获得的利养与恭敬汇聚一处,犹如两条大河汇流之水,不可度量。渐渐地,比丘们变得看重资具、多求资具。乃至食后,当有人拿来油、蜜、糖等时,他们便打犍稚,高声喧嚷着:“给我们师父!给我们的亲教师!”此事,世尊也了知了。于是,世尊对如此不相称之事生起了法悚惧,心中思惟:显示巴利原文
Svāyaṃ bhagavato ca bhikkhusaṅghassa ca uppanno lābhasakkāro ekato hutvā dvinnaṃ mahānadīnaṃ udakamiva appameyyo ahosi. Kamena bhikkhū paccayagarukā paccayabāhulikā ahesuṃ. Pacchābhattampi telamadhuphāṇitādīsu āhaṭesu gaṇḍiṃyeva paharitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyassa detha, upajjhāyassa dethā’’ti uccāsaddamahāsaddaṃ karonti. Sā ca nesaṃ pavatti bhagavatopi pākaṭā ahosi. Tato bhagavā ananucchavikanti dhammasaṃvegaṃ uppādetvā cintesi –
“不能因资具不如法就制定学处,因为善男子的沙门法修行本是与资具相关的。来吧,我便教导法嗣行道。对乐于学戒的善男子们来说,这将成为如同学处制定一样,也如安放在城门口的那面全身镜。正如安放在城门口的全身镜,四种姓的人们照见自身影像后,便会舍弃缺陷而变得无过;同样,乐于学戒的善男子们,想以修行的庄严来庄严自身,在作意这面全身镜喻的教说后,舍离财物嗣的行道,圆满法嗣的行道,很快便能到达生老死的尽头。”依此缘起,世尊宣说了这部经。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paccayā akappiyāti na sakkā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetuṃ. Paccayapaṭibaddhā hi kulaputtānaṃ samaṇadhammavutti. Handāhaṃ dhammadāyādapaṭipadaṃ desemi. Sā sikkhākāmānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ sikkhāpadapaññatti viya bhavissati nagaradvāre ṭhapitasabbakāyikaādāso viya ca, yathā hi nagaradvāre ṭhapite sabbakāyike ādāse cattāro vaṇṇā attano chāyaṃ disvā vajjaṃ pahāya niddosā honti, evameva sikkhākāmā kulaputtā payogamaṇḍanena attānaṃ maṇḍetukāmā imaṃ sabbakāyikādāsūpamaṃ desanaṃ āvajjitvā āmisadāyādapaṭipadaṃ vajjetvā dhammadāyādapaṭipadaṃ pūrentā khippameva jātijarāmaraṇassa antaṃ karissantī’’ti. Imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi.
其中,“诸比丘,你们要成为我的法嗣,不要成为财物嗣”,意思是:“诸比丘,你们应当成为我法的继承者,而不是财物的继承者。对于我的法,你们应当领受;对于我的财物,你们不可领受。”这里的“法”有两种:非权说的法与权说的法。“财物”也有两种:非权说的财物与权说的财物。如何区分呢?道、果、涅槃——这九种出世间法,称为非权说的法,它们是所生法,无论如何权宜、以何理由或借口,都不能称为财物。而那种以趣向还灭为所依的善法,例如有人为希求还灭而行布施、受持戒律、举行布萨羯磨、以香花等供养塔庙、听闻或宣说法、修习禅那与等至,如此次第修行,最终证入不死的涅槃——这便是权说的法。同样,衣服等四种资具,即是非权说的财物,无论如何权说,都不能称为财物。而那种以趣向轮转为所依的善法,例如有人希求轮转、希望获得生存福报而行布施……乃至修习等至,如此次第修行,证得天界或人间的成就——这称为权说的财物。显示巴利原文
Tattha dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādāti dhammassa me dāyādā, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisassa. Yo mayhaṃ dhammo, tassa paṭiggāhakā bhavatha, yañca kho mayhaṃ āmisaṃ, tassa mā paṭiggāhakā bhavathāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha dhammopi duvidho – nippariyāyadhammo, pariyāyadhammoti. Āmisampi duvidhaṃ – nippariyāyāmisaṃ, pariyāyāmisanti. Kathaṃ? Maggaphalanibbānabhedo hi navavidhopi lokuttaradhammo nippariyāyadhammo nibbattitadhammo, na yena kenaci pariyāyena kāraṇena vā lesena vā dhammo. Yaṃ panidaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissitaṃ kusalaṃ, seyyathidaṃ, idhekacco vivaṭṭaṃ patthento dānaṃ deti, sīlaṃ samādiyati, uposathakammaṃ karoti, gandhamālādīhi vatthupūjaṃ karoti, dhammaṃ suṇāti deseti jhānasamāpattiyo nibbatteti, evaṃ karonto anupubbena nippariyāyadhammaṃ amataṃ nibbānaṃ paṭilabhati, ayaṃ pariyāyadhammo. Tathā cīvarādayo cattāro paccayā nippariyāyāmisameva, na aññena pariyāyena kāraṇena vā lesena vā āmisaṃ. Yaṃ panidaṃ vaṭṭagāmikusalaṃ, seyyathidaṃ, idhekacco vaṭṭaṃ patthento sampattibhavaṃ icchamāno dānaṃ deti…pe… samāpattiyo nibbatteti, evaṃ karonto anupubbena devamanussasampattiṃ paṭilabhati, idaṃ pariyāyāmisaṃ nāma.
其中,非权说的法唯属世尊所有。因为比丘们是通过世尊的宣说,才证得道、果、涅槃的。经中也有这样的话:“婆罗门,彼世尊,令未生之道得以生起,令未产生之道得以产生,令未宣说之道得以宣说;他是知法者、了法者、善巧于道者。而且,现今的弟子们随后也随道而行,具足而住。”(《中部》3.79)以及:“贤友,彼世尊,以知者而知,以见者而见;他是眼,是智,是法,是梵;是宣说者、详解者、目标的引导者、不死的给予者、法主、如来。”(《中部》1.203)权说的法也同样唯属世尊,因为由世尊的教导,人们才知道:“若为希求还灭而行布施……乃至修习等至,便能次第证得不死的涅槃。”非权说的财物也唯属世尊,因为比丘们正是由世尊开许,以耆婆衣事为开端,才获得那些殊胜衣服的。正如世尊所说:“诸比丘,我允许居士衣。谁愿意,可以继续作粪扫衣者;谁愿意,可以接受居士衣。诸比丘,我所赞叹的,只是随遇而安的知足。”(《大品》337)显示巴利原文
Tattha nippariyāyadhammopi bhagavatoyeva santako. Bhagavatā hi kathitattā bhikkhū maggaphalanibbānāni adhigacchanti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘so hi brāhmaṇa bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā, asañjātassa maggassa sañjanetā, anakkhātassa maggassa akkhātā, maggaññū maggavidū maggakovido. Maggānugā ca pana etarahi sāvakā viharanti pacchā samannāgatā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.79) ca – ‘‘so hāvuso, bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti, passaṃ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato’’ti (ma. ni. 1.203) ca. Pariyāyadhammopi bhagavatoyeva santako. Bhagavatā hi kathitattā evaṃ jānanti ‘‘vivaṭṭaṃ patthetvā dānaṃ dento…pe… samāpattiyo nibbattento anukkamena amataṃ nibbānaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti. Nippariyāyāmisampi ca bhagavatoyeva santakaṃ. Bhagavatā hi anuññātattāyeva bhikkhūhi jīvakavatthuṃ ādiṃ katvā paṇītacīvaraṃ laddhaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gahapaticīvaraṃ. Yo icchati, paṃsukūliko hotu, yo icchati, gahapaticīvaraṃ sādiyatu. Itarītarenapāhaṃ, bhikkhave, santuṭṭhiṃyeva vaṇṇemī’’ti (mahāva. 337).
从前,比丘们不曾得到过殊胜的团食,他们只是依家次第乞食,以钵中之食为生。后来,世尊住在王舍城时,这样开许:“诸比丘,我允许僧团食、指定食、邀请食、筹食、半月食、布萨食、初日食。”(《小品》325)比丘们由此才获得殊胜的食物。同样,坐卧具也是如此。从前,比丘们只以未经建造的山崖、树下等处作为坐卧具。后来世尊这样开许:“诸比丘,我允许五种遮蔽处。”(《小品》294)比丘们这才得到精舍、殿堂、重楼、平顶屋、石窟这些坐卧具。还有药物,从前比丘们只用陈弃药作药。因为世尊这样开许:“诸比丘,我允许五种药,即:熟酥、鲜奶油、油、蜂蜜、糖。”(《大品》260)……如这些等,比丘们才得到种种药物。显示巴利原文
Pubbe ca bhikkhū paṇītapiṇḍapātaṃ nālatthuṃ. Sapadānapiṇḍiyālopabhojanā evāhesuṃ. Tehi rājagahe viharantena bhagavatā – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ nimantanaṃ salākabhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ uposathikaṃ pāṭipadika’’nti (cūḷava. 325) evaṃ anuññātattāyeva paṇītabhojanaṃ laddhaṃ. Tathā senāsanaṃ. Pubbe hi akatapabbhārarukkhamūlādisenāsanāyeva bhikkhū ahesuṃ. Te ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañca leṇānī’’ti (cūḷava. 294) evaṃ bhagavatā anuññātattāyeva vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhāti imāni senāsanāni labhiṃsu. Pubbe ca muttaharītakeneva bhesajjaṃ akaṃsu. Te bhagavatāyeva – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañca bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṃ, sappi, navanītaṃ, telaṃ, madhu, phāṇita’’nti (mahāva. 260) evamādinā nayena anuññātattā nānābhesajjāni labhiṃsu.
权说的财物也同样唯属世尊。正是因为世尊的言教,人们才知道:“若希求存在之福而布施、持戒……乃至修习等至,便能次第获得权说财物的天成就与人成就。”正因如此,非权说之法与权说之法、非权说之财物与权说之财物,这一切都唯属世尊,所以为了显示他正是这一切的所有者,世尊才说:“诸比丘,你们要成为我的法嗣,切勿成为财物嗣。”显示巴利原文
Pariyāyāmisampi bhagavatoyeva santakaṃ. Bhagavatā hi kathitattā yeva jānanti – ‘‘sampattibhavaṃ patthento dānaṃ datvā sīlaṃ…pe… samāpattiyo nibbattetvā anukkamena pariyāyāmisaṃ dibbasampattiṃ manussasampattiṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti. Tadeva, yasmā nippariyāyadhammopi pariyāyadhammopi nippariyāyāmisampi pariyāyāmisampi bhagavatoyeva santakaṃ, tasmā tattha attano sāmibhāvaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha mā āmisadāyādā’’ti.
“属于我的两种法,你们应当成为它的继承人;而那属于我所有的财物,你们不要成为它的继承人。你们只应成为法份额的所有者,不应成为财物份额的所有者。”这段话的意思是:若有人于胜者的教法中出家之后,却以资具为至上而住,流转于四种生起渴爱之处,并且于法随法行的修习中舍弃重担,这样的人便称为“财物嗣”,你们不要成为那样的人。反之,对于世尊所许可的资具,依于少欲等德行,如理省察后而受用,以修行为至上而住,安住于四种圣种之中,这样的人便称为“法嗣”,你们应当成为这样的人。这便是此话的意趣。显示巴利原文
Yo mayhaṃ santako duvidhopi dhammo, tassa dāyādā bhavatha. Yañca kho etaṃ mayhameva santakaṃ āmisaṃ, tassa dāyādā mā bhavatha. Dhammakoṭṭhāsasseva sāmino bhavatha, mā āmisakoṭṭhāsassa. Yo hi jinasāsane pabbajitvā paccayaparamo viharati catūsu taṇhuppādesu sandissamāno nikkhittadhuro dhammānudhammappaṭipattiyaṃ, ayaṃ āmisadāyādo nāma. Tādisā mā bhavatha. Yo pana anuññātapaccayesu appicchatādīni nissāya paṭisaṅkhā sevamāno paṭipattiparamo viharati catūsu ariyavaṃsesu sandissamāno, ayaṃ dhammadāyādo nāma. Tādisā bhavathāti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,或许会有人这样想,或未来会有人这样想:“莫非世尊是不希望弟子们获得利养,才这样说吗?”为了表明“我并非不希望他们获得极为殊胜的利养而这样说”,世尊便说道:“诸比丘,我对你们有慈悯……不希望你们成为财物嗣。”显示巴利原文
Idāni yesaṃ tattha etadahosi, bhavissati vā anāgatamaddhānaṃ ‘‘kiṃ nu kho bhagavā sāvakānaṃ alābhatthiko evamāhā’’ti, tesaṃ atipaṇītalābhatthiko ahaṃ evaṃ vadāmīti dassetumāha atthi me tumhesu…pe… no āmisadāyādāti.
这句话的意思是:“我对你们怀有慈悯与悲悯,愿你们得利——即,通过怎样的理由与方法,能让弟子们成为法嗣,作法财份额的主人,而不是财物嗣呢?”他内心的想法是这样的:据说,世尊看到过去那些重财物的比丘——比如因财物而跌倒的迦毗罗比丘,以及以“僧伽帝也燃烧”等事(《律藏·波罗夷》230;《相应部》2.218)提到的恶比丘、比丘尼、学戒女等数百人——他们由于注重财物,死后堕入恶趣;也看到在自己教法中出家的提婆达多等人同样如此。相反,他看到重法的舍利弗、目犍连、大迦叶等尊者,他们证得了神通、无碍解等功德。因此,为令他们从恶趣解脱并成就一切功德,世尊才这样说:“我对你们有慈悯,怎样能让弟子们成为法嗣,而不是财物嗣呢?”再者,注重资具的人在四众之中,好比假币或烧焦的木炭,没有光焰,没有威势。而心向法、重法的人,则具足威势,犹如狮子,无所畏惧,能降伏一切。因此世尊这样说:“我对你们……不希望你们成为财物嗣。”显示巴利原文
Tassāyamattho – atthi me tumhesu anukampā anuddayā hitesitā, kena nu kho kāraṇena kena upāyena sāvakā dhammadāyādā assu dhammakoṭṭhāsasāmino, no āmisadāyādāti. Ayaṃ pana adhippāyo, passati kira bhagavā āmisagarukānaṃ āmise upakkhalitānaṃ atītakāle tāva kapilassa bhikkhuno, ‘‘saṅghāṭipi ādittā hotī’’tiādinā (pārā. 230; saṃ. ni. 2.218) nayena āgatapāpabhikkhubhikkhunīsikkhamānādīnañca anekasatānaṃ apāyaparipūraṇattaṃ attano sāsane pabbajitānañca devadattādīnaṃ. Dhammagarukānaṃ pana sāriputtamoggallānamahākassapādīnaṃ abhiññāpaṭisambhidādiguṇappaṭilābhaṃ. Tasmā tesaṃ apāyā parimuttiṃ sabbaguṇasampattiñca icchanto āha – ‘‘atthi me tumhesu anukampā kinti me sāvakā dhammadāyādā bhaveyyuṃ, no āmisadāyādā’’ti. Paccayagaruko ca catuparisantare kūṭakahāpaṇo viya nibbutaṅgāro viya ca nittejo nippabho hoti. Tato vivattitacitto dhammagaruko tejavā sīhova abhibhuyyacārī, tasmāpi evamāha – ‘‘atthi me…pe… no āmisadāyādā’’ti.
如此,宣说了“诸比丘,你们要成为我的法嗣,不要成为财物嗣”这番话,这是出于慈悯,希望弟子们获得更殊胜的利益,并非不希望他们得到利益。接下来,为了显示不遵行此教诫的过患,世尊说:“诸比丘,如果你们……不成为法嗣。”其中,“你们也会因此成为应被谴责者(ādiyā)”的意思是:你们由于处于财物嗣而非处于法嗣的状态,会成为应被谴责者——也就是说,会被说成“世尊的弟子以财物嗣的方式而住,不以法嗣的方式而住”,从而被指出、被区分、被判定,成为智者所呵斥的对象。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’ti idaṃ anukampāya paṇītataraṃ lābhaṃ icchantena vuttaṃ, no alābhatthikenāti sāvetvā idāni imassa ovādassa akaraṇe ādīnavaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tumhe ca me, bhikkhave…pe… no dhammadāyādā’’ti. Tattha tumhepi tena ādiyā bhaveyyāthāti tumhepi tena āmisadāyādabhāvena no dhammadāyādabhāvena ādiyā bhaveyyātha. Apadisitabbā visuṃ kātabbā vavatthapetabbā, viññūhi gārayhā bhaveyyāthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kinti? Āmisadāyādā satthusāvakā viharanti, no dhammadāyādāti.
“我也会因此成为被指责者”:也就是我也会因你们成为财物嗣而非成为法嗣,而成为被指责之人。如何成为呢?即成为财物嗣……。世尊是为了让他们更加柔顺,才说了这番话。这里的用意是:“诸比丘,如果你们贪求财物而行,智者就会指责我说:‘为何号称一切知者,却不能让弟子成为法嗣,非要让他们成为财物嗣呢?’这就好比看到威仪不整的比丘时,会指责他的老师与亲教师:‘这是谁的同住比丘,谁的学童?’又如善家男子、善家女子,当见到破戒、行恶法的人时,他们的父母会受到指责:‘这是谁的儿子,谁的女儿?’同样地,智者会指责我:‘为何号称一切知者,却不能让弟子成为法嗣,非要让他们成为财物嗣呢?’”显示巴利原文
Ahampi tena ādiyo bhaveyyanti ahampi tena tumhākaṃ āmisadāyādabhāvena no dhammadāyādabhāvena gārayho bhaveyyaṃ. Kinti? Āmisa…pe… dāyādāti. Idaṃ bhagavā tesaṃ atīva mudukaraṇatthamāha. Ayañhi ettha adhippāyo – sace, bhikkhave, tumhe āmisalolā carissatha, tattha viññū maṃ garahissanti ‘‘kathañhi nāma sabbaññū samāno attano sāvake dhammadāyāde no āmisadāyāde kātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Seyyathāpi nāma anākappasampanne bhikkhū disvā ācariyupajjhāye garahanti ‘‘kassime saddhivihārikā, kassantevāsikā’’ti; seyyathā vā pana kulakumārake vā kulakumārikāyo vā dussīle pāpadhamme disvā mātāpitaro garahanti ‘‘kassime puttā, kassa dhītaro’’ti; evameva maṃ viññū garahissanti ‘‘kathañhi nāma sabbaññū samāno attano sāvake dhammadāyāde no āmisadāyāde kātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti.
如此,在指出不遵行此教诫的过患之后,为显示遵行的功德,世尊宣说了“你们也会从我……”等。其中,“我也会因此而不成为被指责者”的意思是:就好比看见年轻比丘圆满履行义务、通达请问,威仪具足如同百岁上座一样,人们便问:“这是谁的同住比丘,谁的弟子?”被告知是某位长老的弟子后,老师和亲教师便不会受到指责,反而受到称赞:“这位长老真是适合,确实有能力教导、有能力教诫!”同样地,我因为你们是法嗣而非财物嗣,当有人问:“谁的弟子在修行那罗迦行道、都瓦吒迦行道、月喻行道、车乘行道、大牛角娑罗林行道、大空行道,安住于四资具知足、乐于修行圣种姓、现为证悟,心从贪着利养中抽离,犹如从云中解脱的月轮而安住?”回答说是“沙门乔达摩的弟子”时,智者便不会指责我,反而会说:“世尊真是一切知者啊,确实能让弟子舍弃财物嗣的修行,而成就法嗣的修行。”如此,我便不会成为被指责者。应当了知此句的意趣,其余在黑分中所说的,则应以相反的道理来理解。如此,在显示践行此教诫的功德之后,世尊便将此教诫付嘱给比丘们,说道:“所以,比丘们……不要成为财物嗣。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ imassa ovādassa akaraṇe ādīnavaṃ dassetvā karaṇe ānisaṃsaṃ dassento tumhe ca metiādimāha. Tattha ahampi tena na ādiyo bhaveyyanti seyyathāpi nāma vattaparipūrake daharabhikkhū uddesaparipucchāsampanne vassasatikatthere viya ākappasampanne disvā, kassa saddhivihārikā, kassantevāsikāti, asukassāti, ‘‘patirūpaṃ therassa, paṭibalo vata ovadituṃ anusāsitu’’nti ācariyupajjhāyā na ādiyā na gārayhā bhavanti, evameva ahampi tena tumhākaṃ dhammadāyādabhāvena no āmisadāyādabhāvena kassa sāvakā nālakapaṭipadaṃ tuvaṭṭakapaṭipadaṃ candūpamapaṭipadaṃ rathavinītapaṭipadaṃ mahāgosiṅgasālapaṭipadaṃ mahāsuññatapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannā catupaccayasantosabhāvanārāmaariyavaṃsesu sakkhibhūtā paccayagedhato vivattamānasā abbhā muttacandasamā viharantīti; ‘‘samaṇassa gotamassā’’ti vutte ‘‘sabbaññū vata bhagavā, asakkhi vata sāvake āmisadāyādapaṭipadaṃ chaḍḍāpetvā dhammadāyādapaṭipattipūrake kātu’’nti viññūnaṃ na ādiyo na gārayho bhaveyyanti. Evamimasmiṃ pade adhippāyaṃ ñatvā sesaṃ kaṇhapakkhe vuttanayapaccanīkena veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ imassa ovādassa karaṇe ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā idāni taṃ ovādaṃ niyyātento āha – ‘‘tasmā tiha me, bhikkhave…pe… no āmisadāyādā’’ti.
30 如此付嘱了教诫之后,为赞叹那些圆满践行此法嗣之道的人,世尊宣说:“在此,比丘们,我……”等。因为听闻世尊的赞叹,必定会有人为了这个目标而努力修行。显示巴利原文
30. Evamimaṃ ovādaṃ niyyātetvā idāni tassā dhammadāyādapaṭipattiyā paripūrakāriṃ thometuṃ idhāhaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Bhagavato hi thomanaṃ sutvāpi hontiyeva tadatthāya paṭipajjitāro.
其中,“在此”(idha)是一个不变词。“已食”(bhuttāvī):即已经进食,完成用餐之事的意思。“已受请拒食”(pavārito):即通过足量受请拒食而成为已受请拒食,意思是已经足量而食,拒绝再进食物,已得饱足。受请拒食有四种:雨安居自恣、资具邀请、非残食拒食、足量受请拒食。其中,“诸比丘,我允许已住雨安居的比丘以三事自恣”(《律藏·大品》209),这是雨安居自恣。“尊者,我想以药物邀请僧团四个月”(《波逸提》303)以及“除了再邀请者、除了常邀请者”(《波逸提》307),这是资具邀请。“所谓已受请拒食者:可见有食物,可见有膳食,有人在伸手范围之内递送,可见拒绝,这就是已受请拒食”(《波逸提》239),这是非残食拒食。“以胜妙的嚼食与啖食亲手充分供予、充分劝食”(《长部》1.297, 358),这是足量受请拒食。此处所指的正是这一种。因此说:“已受请拒食,即是通过足量受请拒食而成为已受请拒食。”显示巴利原文
Tattha idhāti nipātapadametaṃ. Bhuttāvīti bhuttavā, katabhattakiccoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pavāritoti yāvadatthapavāraṇāya pavārito, yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā paṭikkhittabhojano tittovāti vuttaṃ hoti. Catubbidhā hi pavāraṇā vassaṃvuṭṭhapavāraṇā paccayapavāraṇā anatirittapavāraṇā yāvadatthapavāraṇāti. Tattha, ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave, vassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi pavāretu’’nti (mahāva. 209) ayaṃ vassaṃvuṭṭhapavāraṇā. ‘‘Icchāmahaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ catumāsaṃ bhesajjena pavāretu’’nti (pāci. 303) ca ‘‘aññatra punapavāraṇāya aññatra niccapavāraṇāyā’’ti (pāci. 307) ca ayaṃ paccayapavāraṇā. ‘‘Pavārito nāma asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyati, eso pavārito nāmā’’ti (pāci. 239) ayaṃ anatirittapavāraṇā. ‘‘Paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.297, 358) ayaṃ yāvadatthapavāraṇā. Ayamidha adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pavāritoti yāvadatthapavāraṇāya pavārito’’ti.
「饱满」:因食物而饱满。「完毕」:即已用完食物,此处应视为省略了后面的词。意思是:应当食用的分量都已食用,食事已结束。「满足」:即得到了滋养,或因没有饥饿之苦而称为安乐。「足量」:即我通过食物所满足的全部所需,都已达成。这里,前三个词由后三个词来成立。因为,一个「完毕」者,即是已进食者;一个「满足」者,即是因「足量」而成为已受请拒食者;一个「足量」者,即是「饱满」者。或者,前三个词是后三个词的因:因为已进食,所以「完毕」;因为已受请拒食,所以「满足」;因为「饱满」,所以「足量」。应知这些全都基于某种安立而说。显示巴利原文
Paripuṇṇoti bhojanena paripuṇṇo. Pariyositoti pariyositabhojano, uttarapadalopo daṭṭhabbo . Yāvatakaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ, tāvatakaṃ bhuttaṃ hoti, avasitā me bhojanakiriyāti attho. Suhitoti dhāto, jighacchādukkhābhāvena vā sukhitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Yāvadatthoti yāvatako me bhojanena attho, so sabbo pattoti. Ettha ca purimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pacchimāni sādhakāni. Yo hi pariyosito, so bhuttāvī hoti. Yo ca suhito, so yāvadatthapavāraṇāya pavārito. Yo yāvadattho, so paripuṇṇoti. Purimāni vā pacchimānaṃ. Yasmā hi bhuttāvī, tasmā pariyosito. Yasmā pavārito, tasmā suhito. Yasmā paripuṇṇo, tasmā yāvadatthoti. Sabbañcetaṃ parikappetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
「可能」(siyā)一词,用于确定与不定两种情况。如「地界可能是内,也可能是外」(《中部》3.349),这是确定的用法。「可能有某位比丘的罪或违犯」(《中部》3.39),这是不定的用法。此处二者皆可适用。「多余的」:即多余的法,也就是应丢弃的法。意思是:它是多余的,并且应当丢弃,不应再作任何他用。「那时」:即在那时候。「被饥渴与羸弱所征服」:即被饥渴和羸弱所侵袭、所跟随,长达八日或十日。那些人当中,有些人虽然饥饿却不羸弱,能忍受饥饿,但这些人并非如此。为了表明这一点,所以同时提到了饥渴与羸弱两者。「我对他们」:即我对他们。「如果你们愿意」:即如果你们希望。显示巴利原文
Siyāti ekaṃse ca vikappane ca. ‘‘Pathavīdhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.349) ekaṃse. ‘‘Siyā aññatarassa bhikkhuno āpatti vītikkamo’’ti (ma. ni. 3.39) vikappane. Idha ubhayampi vaṭṭati. Atirekova atirekadhammo. Tathā chaḍḍanīya dhammo. Adhiko ca chaḍḍetabbo ca, na aññaṃ kiñci kātabboti attho. Athāti tamhi kāle. Jighacchādubbalyaparetāti jighacchāya ca dubbalyena ca paretā phuṭṭhā anugatā ca aṭṭhapi dasapi divasāni. Tattha keci jighacchitāpi na dubbalā honti, sakkonti jighacchaṃ sahituṃ. Ime pana na tādisāti dassetuṃ ubhayamāha. Tyāhanti te ahaṃ. Sace ākaṅkhathāti yadi icchatha.
「少绿草处」:指草未茂盛生长之处,在此处散弃团食并不会毁坏任何草木。此即包括了无草之地及大草丛,因为即使在那些地方以车倾倒团食,草也不会被毁坏。如此说,是为了不违犯损害植物种的学处。显示巴利原文
Appahariteti apparuḷhaharite, yasmiṃ ṭhāne piṇḍapātajjhottharaṇena vinassanadhammāni tiṇāni natthi, tasminti attho. Tena nittiṇañca mahātiṇagahanaṃ ca, yattha sakaṭenapi chaḍḍite piṇḍapāte tiṇāni na vinassanti, tañca ṭhānaṃ pariggahitaṃ hoti. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadassa hi avikopanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ.
「无生物处」:指在没有微小生物之处,或指因散弃团食而可能令微小生物死亡的大水聚中。因为在少量水处,投入饭食令水搅浑时,微细的微小生物便会死亡;而在大湖等处则不会如此。这是为了保护微小生物而说。「我将使其沉没」:意即我将使那些团食沉入水中。显示巴利原文
Appāṇaketi nippāṇake piṇḍapātajjhottharaṇena maritabbapāṇakarahite vā mahāudakakkhandhe. Parittodake eva hi bhattapakkhepena āḷulite sukhumapāṇakā maranti, na mahātaḷākādīsūti. Pāṇakānurakkhaṇatthañhi etaṃ vuttaṃ. Opilāpessāmīti nimujjāpessāmi.
「对其中一位」:指两者中的一位。对于善巧听闻此法教并能反复思惟的人,佛说:“然而,这已讲说过了。”“讲说”(vutta)一词,于剃发语境中亦可看见,例如“年轻的诈伪婆罗门,剃了发的”(《中部》2.426);于种植语境中亦可看见,例如“犹如秋季将良种播散于田,它便生长”等(《本生》1.3.31);于言说语境中亦可看见,例如“此是世尊所说,此是阿拉汉所说”等。而在此处,应取“讲说”之义。因此,这句话的意思是:“然而,此确已讲说过了。”「一种食财」:指四种资具食财中的任意一种,亦即一种。「此者」(yadidaṃ)是不变词,于一切性、数、格的表述中,皆应依上下文转换其义。此处意为“那个就是”,即“那被称为团食的东西”。如此即是说“这是食财中的一种”。「那我确实应……」:意为“我确实应当……”。「如此」:如同现今度过此片刻一样。「一日一夜」:「度过」:即度过、使之超越。显示巴利原文
Tatrekassāti tesu dvīsu ekassa. Yo imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ suṭṭhu sutavā punappunaṃ āvajjeti ca , taṃ sandhāyāha vuttaṃ kho panetanti. Ayaṃ vutta-saddo kesohāraṇepi dissati ‘‘kāpaṭiko māṇavo daharo vuttasiro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.426). Ropitepi ‘‘yathā sāradikaṃ bījaṃ, khette vuttaṃ virūhatī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.3.31). Kathitepi ‘‘vuttamidaṃ bhagavatā, vuttamidaṃ arahatā’’tiādīsu. Idha pana kathite daṭṭhabbo. Kathitaṃ kho panetanti ayañhissa attho. Āmisaññataranti catunnaṃ paccayāmisānaṃ aññataraṃ, ekanti attho. Yadidanti nipāto, sabbaliṅgavibhattivacanesu tādisova tattha tattha atthato pariṇāmetabbo. Idha panāssa yo esoti attho. Yo eso piṇḍapāto nāma. Idaṃ āmisaññataranti vuttaṃ hoti. Yaṃnūnāhanti sādhu vatāhaṃ. Evanti yathā idāni imaṃ khaṇaṃ vītināmemi, evameva rattindivaṃ. Vītināmeyyanti khepeyyaṃ ativattāpeyyaṃ.
「他……那个团食」:他,即使面对那个——即使是与天众一起的整个世界都应当以头顶戴而接受、即使是善逝所剩余的——团食,亦不食用;他渴望成为法的继承人,思惟如头顶着火般的急迫,便以那样的饥饿与羸弱,如此度过那一日一夜。显示巴利原文
So taṃ piṇḍapātanti so taṃ sadevakena lokena sirasā sampaṭicchitabbarūpaṃ sugatātirittampi piṇḍapātaṃ abhuñjitvā dhammadāyādabhāvaṃ ākaṅkhamāno ādittasīsūpamaṃ paccavekkhitvā teneva jighacchādubbalyena evaṃ taṃ rattindivaṃ vītināmeyya.
“然后第二”:在此段中,此为略说:如果那位比丘思惟:“我为何不……(中略)……度过呢?”即便他这样思惟,但出家之人,在遍满五欲猛兽的村落里寻找团食,就如同在猛兽栖息的森林中寻找药物一般,也是困难的。然而,这份团食既已脱离寻求食物的过患,又是善逝所遗,恰如一位父母双方皆具高贵出身的刹帝利青年。团食有五种情形不应受用。哪五种?因责备施者而不应受用,心想‘此乃无耻者之物’;因团食来源不清净而不应受用,心想‘此乃因比丘尼的周旋、恐惧与嫌疑而生’;因怜悯施主而不应受用,心想‘施舍这份团食的比丘正在挨饿’;虽自己已饱足,却因悲悯学童等内弟子而不应受用,心想‘学童们或其他依靠我的人正在挨饿’——但他们也都已吃饱满足;还有,因无信而不应受用,心想‘这位施舍团食的比丘是无信之人’。然而,世尊已从这五种情形中完全解脱。因为,在知耻者中,世尊最为第一;此团食来源绝对清净;世尊已饱足满足;亦无其他期待回报之人;而在世间一切有信者中,世尊亦为第一。如此。显示巴利原文
Atha dutiyassāti imasmiṃ pana vāre esa saṅkhepo, sace so bhikkhu, yaṃnūnāhaṃ…pe… vītināmeyyanti cintento evampi cinteyya, pabbajitena kho vāḷamigākule araññe bhesajjaṃ viya pañcakāmaguṇavāḷākule gāme piṇḍapātopi dukkhaṃ pariyesituṃ. Ayaṃ pana piṇḍapāto iti pariyesanādīnavavimutto ca sugatātiritto cāti ubhato sujātakhattiyakumāro viya hoti, yehi ca pañcahi kāraṇehi piṇḍapāto na paribhuñjitabbo hoti. Seyyathidaṃ, puggalaṃ garahitvā na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘alajjipuggalassa santako’’ti. Aparisuddhauppattitāya na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘bhikkhuniparipācanaasantasambhāvanuppanno’’ti. Sāmikānukampāya na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘piṇḍapātasāmiko bhikkhu jighacchito’’ti. So dhāto tasseva antevāsikādīsu anukampāya na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘antevāsikā aññe vā tappaṭibaddhā jighacchitā’’ti, tepi dhātā suhitā, apica kho assaddhatāya na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘piṇḍapātasāmiko bhikkhu assaddho’’ti. Tehi ca kāraṇehi ayaṃ vimutto. Bhagavā hi lajjīnaṃ aggo, parisuddhuppattiko piṇḍapāto, bhagavā ca dhāto suhito, paccāsīsakopi añño puggalo natthi, ye loke saddhā, bhagavā tesaṃ aggoti evaṃ cintetvā ca so taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjitvā…pe… vītināmeyya. Ettāvatā yopi abhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti, sopi bhuñjitabbakameva piṇḍapātaṃ na bhutto hoti. Yopi bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti, sopi bhuñjitabbakameva bhutto hoti. Natthi piṇḍapāte viseso. Puggale pana atthi viseso. Tasmā taṃ dassento kiñcāpi sotiādimāha.
在此,‘kiñcāpi’(虽然)是一个表示允许与赞叹的不变化词。它允许的是什么呢?是那位比丘的无过失受用。它赞叹的是什么呢?是受用之后修习沙门法。意思是:即便那位比丘这样吃了该吃的食物,做了该做的事,但对我而言,前一位比丘——那位拒绝团食而去修习沙门法的比丘——正如两位勇士中更勇猛的那一位,两位智者中更具智慧的那一位,他比第二位比丘更值得恭敬、更值得赞叹,更应大加恭敬与赞叹。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpīti anujānanappasaṃsanatthe nipāto. Kiṃ anujānāti? Tassa bhikkhuno taṃ anavajjaparibhogaṃ. Kiṃ pasaṃsati? Bhutvā samaṇadhammakaraṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti yadipi so bhikkhu evaṃ bhuñjitabbameva bhuñjitvā kātabbameva kareyya. Atha kho asuyeva me purimo bhikkhūti yo purimo bhikkhu tampi piṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti, soyeva mama dvīsu sūresu sūrataro viya dvīsu paṇḍitesu paṇḍitataro viya ca pujjataro ca pāsaṃsataro ca, dutiyabhikkhuto atirekena pūjanīyo ca pasaṃsanīyo cāti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了以道理证成此义,佛陀说:“这是什么原因呢?”(taṃ kissa hetu)等。其意为:在此,你们或许会想:“为何那位比丘在世尊看来更值得恭敬、更值得赞叹呢?”回答:“正因为那件事”(tañhi tassa)——因为那位比丘拒绝团食,能于长夜中导向少欲……乃至……精进策励。如何导向呢?假如他在日后对资具生起贪求、邪欲或多欲,那时,这拒绝团食的行为便会像铁钩一样制伏他。他将这样省察:“喂!你过去连善逝所遗的团食都拒绝了,如今竟生起这样的欲望!”同样,这也能制止不满足与放逸之心生起。这样,它便首先导向少欲、知足与损减。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ kāraṇena sādhento taṃ kissa hetūtiādimāha. Tassattho, tattha siyā tumhākaṃ, kasmā so bhikkhu bhagavato pujjataro ca pāsaṃsataro cāti? Tañhi tassāti yasmā taṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkhipanaṃ tassa bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ appicchatāya…pe… vīriyārambhāya saṃvattissati. Kathaṃ? Tassa hi sace aparena samayena paccayesu atricchatā vā pāpicchatā vā mahicchatā vā uppajjissati. Tato naṃ iminā piṇḍapātapaṭikkhepaṅkusena nivāressati ‘‘are tvaṃ sugatātirittampi piṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā īdisaṃ icchaṃ uppādesī’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhamāno. Esa nayo asantuṭṭhiyā asaṃlekhassa cuppannassa nivāraṇe. Evaṃ tāvassa appicchatāya santuṭṭhiyā saṃlekhāya saṃvattissati.
关于“易养性”(subharatāya),此处解释如下:有一种比丘,对自己与对侍者都难养难顾;另一种比丘,对自己与对侍者则易养易顾。这是怎么说呢?有人得到酸味等食物后,却还须求非酸味等;或在这家得到食物,却在那家丢弃,走遍全村,最后托着空钵回到住处躺下,这种人对自己是难养的。又,有人钵中虽已盛满米饭、肉饭等,却现出不满、不悦的神情;或当着施主的面贬斥那团食,说:“你们给的这是什么?”然后把食物布施给沙弥或居士,这种人于侍者是难养的。人们见了,便远远避开说:“这位比丘难养,没法照顾他。”而另一种人,无论得到粗或精,都欢喜满足地受用,然后回到住处做自己的事,这种人对自己是易养的。又,对他人所施,不论少或多、粗或精,全不轻视,内心欢喜、面容清净,当着施主的面受用后才离去,这种人于侍者是易养的。人们见了,极为信赖地说:“我们这位尊者真是易养,即使丝毫也知足,我们应当奉养他。”并承诺奉养。显示巴利原文
Subharatāyāti ettha ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā – idhekacco attanopi upaṭṭhākānampi dubbharo hoti dupposo. Ekacco attanopi upaṭṭhākānampi subharo hoti suposo. Kathaṃ? Yo hi ambilādīni laddhā anambilādīni pariyesati, aññassa ghare laddhaṃ aññassa ghare chaḍḍento sabbaṃ gāmaṃ vicaritvā rittapattova vihāraṃ pavisitvā nipajjati, ayaṃ attano dubbharo. Yo pana sālimaṃsodanādīnaṃ patte pūretvā dinnepi dummukhabhāvaṃ anattamanabhāvameva ca dasseti, tesaṃ vā sammukhāva taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ‘‘kiṃ tumhehi dinna’’nti apasādento sāmaṇeragahaṭṭhādīnampi deti , ayaṃ upaṭṭhākānaṃ dubbharo. Etaṃ disvā manussā dūrato parivajjanti dubbharo bhikkhu na sakkā positunti. Yo pana yaṃkiñci lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā laddhā tuṭṭhacittova bhuñjitvā vihāraṃ gantvā attano kammaṃ karoti, ayaṃ attano subharo. Yo ca paresampi appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā dānaṃ ahīḷetvā attamano vippasannamukho hutvā tesaṃ sammukhāva paribhuñjitvā yāti, ayaṃ upaṭṭhākānaṃ subharo. Etaṃ disvā manussā ativiya vissatthā honti – ‘‘amhākaṃ bhadanto subharo thokenapi tussati, mayameva naṃ posissāmā’’ti paṭiññaṃ katvā posenti.
将来,若他对自己或侍者生起难养的心,那时,这一拒绝团食的钩索便会制止他。他会这样反省:“你先前连善逝剩下的团食都拒绝,如今竟生起这样的心!”如此便导向易养性。若他又生起懈怠,也同样用这一钩索来制止,反省道:“那时你连善逝剩下的团食都拒绝,即使被饥饿虚弱所困扰,仍修习沙门法,如今却沉溺懈怠!”如此便导向精进策励。这样,他的这一拒绝团食之举,能长久地导向少欲……乃至精进策励。当他如此圆满这五种功德后,便会圆满十种论事。显示巴利原文
Tattha sace aparena samayena assa attano vā upaṭṭhākānaṃ vā dubbharatānayena cittaṃ uppajjissati. Tato naṃ iminā piṇḍapātapaṭikkhepaṅkusena nivāressati – ‘‘are tvaṃ sugatātirittampi piṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā īdisaṃ cittaṃ uppādesī’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhamāno, evamassa subharatāya saṃvattissati. Sace panassa kosajjaṃ uppajjissati, tampi etenevaṅkusena nivāressati – ‘‘are tvaṃ nāma tadā sugatātirittampi piṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā tathā jighacchādubbalyaparetopi samaṇadhammaṃ katvā ajja kosajjamanuyuñjasī’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhamāno, evamassa vīriyārambhāya saṃvattissati. Evamassa idaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkhipanaṃ dīgharattaṃ appicchatāya…pe… vīriyārambhāya saṃvattissati. Evamassime pañca guṇā paripūrā dasa kathāvatthūni paripūressanti.
如何呢?在此,经文中直接出现了少欲、知足和精进策励这三种,其余的则被归入“削减”。因为“削减”正是所有论事的总称。正如经文所说:“阿难,凡是那种能削减烦恼、适合心远离盖障、唯一导向厌离、离贪、灭尽、寂静、证智、正觉、涅槃的论说,那就是:少欲论……”(《中部》3.189, 192)等等。这样,这五种功德圆满后,就会圆满十种论事。十种论事圆满后,就会圆满三学。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Atra hi pāḷiyaṃyeva appicchatāsantuṭṭhitāvīriyārambhavasena tīṇi āgatāni, sesāni sallekhena saṅgahitāni. Idañhi sabbakathāvatthūnaṃ nāmameva, yadidaṃ sallekho. Yathāha – ‘‘yā ca kho ayaṃ, ānanda, kathā abhisallekhikā cetovinīvaraṇasappāyā ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati. Seyyathidaṃ, appicchakathā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.189, 192) vitthāro. Evaṃ ime pañca guṇā paripūrā dasa kathāvatthūni paripūressanti. Dasa kathāvatthūni paripūrāni tisso sikkhā paripūressanti.
如何理解?在此十种论事中,少欲论、知足论、无杂论、戒论——这四种属于增上戒学的范畴;远离论、精进策励论、定论——这三种属于增上心学的范畴;慧论、解脱论、解脱智见论——这三种属于增上慧学的范畴。如此,十种论事圆满,便能令三学圆满;三学圆满,便能令五种无学法蕴圆满。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Etesu hi appicchakathā santosakathā asaṃsaggakathā sīlakathāti imā catasso kathā adhisīlasikkhāsaṅgahitāyeva . Pavivekakathā vīriyārambhakathā samādhikathāti imā tisso adhicittasikkhasaṅgahitā . Paññākathā vimuttikathā vimuttiñāṇadassanakathāti imā tisso adhipaññāsikkhāsaṅgahitāti. Evaṃ dasa kathāvatthūni paripūrāni tisso sikkhā paripūressanti. Tisso sikkhā paripūrā pañca asekkhadhammakkhandhe paripūressanti.
如何理解?圆满的增上戒学即是无学的戒蕴;增上心学即是无学的定蕴;增上慧学即是无学的慧蕴、解脱蕴及解脱智见蕴。如此,三学圆满,便能令五种无学法蕴圆满;五种法蕴圆满,便能令不死的涅槃圆满。正如在山顶,浓云降下大雨,充满了山涧溪流;山涧溪流充满后,便充满了小池;小池充满后,便充满了大池;大池充满后,便充满了小河;小河充满后,便充满了大河;大河充满后,便充满了大海。同样地,这位比丘的五种功德圆满后,便会从十种论事开始,次第圆满,直至不死的涅槃。就这样,这位比丘走上了法之传承的道路,获得了最殊胜的法之传承。世尊完全洞悉此义,故而说道:‘这是什么原因呢?诸比丘,正是因为那件事,那位比丘……’等等。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Paripūrā hi adhisīlasikkhā asekkho sīlakkhandhoyeva hoti, adhicittasikkhā asekkho samādhikkhandho, adhipaññāsikkhā asekkhā paññā-vimutti-vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhā evāti evaṃ tisso sikkhā paripūrā pañca asekkhadhammakkhandhe paripūressanti. Pañca dhammakkhandhā paripūrā amataṃ nibbānaṃ paripūressanti. Seyyathāpi uparipabbate pāvussako mahāmegho abhivuṭṭho pabbatakandarasarasākhā paripūreti. Tā paripūrā kusobbhe, kusobbhā mahāsobbhe, mahāsobbhā kunnadiyo, kunnadiyo mahānadiyo, mahānadiyo mahāsamuddasāgaraṃ paripūrenti; evameva tassa bhikkhuno ime pañca guṇā paripūrā dasa kathāvatthuni ādiṃ katvā yāva amataṃ nibbānaṃ paripūressanti. Evamayaṃ bhikkhu dhammadāyādapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno paramadhammadāyādaṃ labhatīti etamatthaṃ sampassamāno bhagavā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetu tañhi tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno’’tiādimāha.
如此,通过事由证明了那位比丘更值得恭敬、更值得赞叹之后,世尊为了策励诸比丘如实成就,便说道:‘因此,诸比丘,你们应当……’等等。这是要表达什么意思呢?意即:若有人受用了那份团食之后再去修习沙门法,他便与这五种根本功德相去甚远;若他并不受用而去修习,便能具备这些功德。正是因此,世尊才说:‘因此,诸比丘……不要成为财食的继承者。’显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tassa bhikkhuno pujjatarapāsaṃsatarabhāvaṃ kāraṇena sādhetvā idāni te bhikkhū tathattāya sanniyojento tasmā tiha me bhikkhavetiādimāha. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti, yasmā yo taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ kareyya, so imehi pañcahi mūlaguṇehi paribāhiro. Yo pana abhuñjitvā kareyya, so imesaṃ bhāgī hoti – ‘‘tasmā tiha me, bhikkhave…pe… no āmisadāyādā’’ti.
“世尊说此”:从缘起结束之处起,直至“不要成为财食的继承者”这一经文段落,是世尊所作的开示。说完这段开示之后,善逝——即因善行正道而被称为善逝的世尊——从座起身,进入精舍。他从铺设好的殊胜佛座站立起来,步入自己的大香室,而此时大众尚未离去。世尊这样做,正是为了表达对法的赞叹。显示巴利原文
Idamavoca bhagavāti idaṃ nidānapariyosānato pabhuti yāva no āmisadāyādāti suttappadesaṃ bhagavā avoca. Idaṃ vatvāna sugatoti idañca suttappadesaṃ vatvāva sobhanāya paṭipadāya gatattā sugatoti saṅkhaṃ pattoyeva bhagavā. Uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisī paññattavarabuddhāsanato uṭṭhahitvā vihāraṃ attano mahāgandhakuṭiṃ pāvisi asambhinnāya eva parisāya. Kasmā dhammathomanatthaṃ.
据说,诸佛在说法尚未结束时进入精舍,有两种原因:或为称赞补特伽罗,或为称赞法。为称赞补特伽罗而进入时,他这样想:‘这是我简略开示的纲要,并未详细分别。那些领受佛法的比丘们掌握之后,会去亲近阿难或迦旃延请问,他们便会与我的智慧相印证而加以解说。然后,那些领受法的人又会来问我,我便会说:比丘们,阿难讲得对,迦旃延也讲得对。如果你们为这义理来问我,我也会同样为你们解答。这样,我便称赞了那些补特伽罗。于是,比丘们生起恭敬,去亲近他们;以阿难为首的这些比丘也会在义理与法上教导他们。被这样教导的比丘们,便能圆满三学,到达苦的边际。’显示巴利原文
Buddhā kira apariniṭṭhitāya desanāya vihāraṃ pavisantā dvīhi kāraṇehi pavisanti puggalathomanatthaṃ vā dhammathomanatthaṃ vā. Puggalathomanatthaṃ pavisanto evaṃ cintesi – ‘‘imaṃ mayā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, vitthārena avibhattaṃ, dhammapaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū uggahetvā ānandaṃ vā kaccānaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā pucchissanti, te mayhaṃ ñāṇena saṃsandetvā kathessanti, tato dhammapaṭiggāhakā puna maṃ pucchissanti, tesaṃ ahaṃ sukathitaṃ, bhikkhave, ānandena sukathitaṃ kaccānena, maṃ cepi tumhe etamatthaṃ puccheyyātha, ahampi naṃ evameva byākareyyanti evaṃ te puggale thomessāmi, tato tesu gāravaṃ janetvā bhikkhū upasaṅkamissanti, tepi bhikkhū atthe ca dhamme ca niyojessanti, te tehi niyojitā tisso sikkhā paripūrentā dukkhassantaṃ karissantī’’ti.
为称赞法而进入时,他这样想,正如此处他所思惟的:‘当我进入精舍后,就在这个集会中,舍利弗会呵责那些只继承财食的人,称赞那继承法的人,并宣说法要。这样,由我们两人意乐与智慧一致所宣说的教法,就会成为最上、最受尊重,如同石伞般坚固。它好比为了渡过四暴流而安置在渡口的船,也好像供行路的四匹良马所拉的车。又譬如,在集会中,国王宣布刑罚规则后起座登殿,坐在那里的将军便来宣说国王所制定的规则;同样,我所制定的这个教法,坐在这集会中的舍利弗将会予以赞叹并详细解说。如此,由我们两人的智慧所宣说的这个教法,将会更加有力,如同正午的太阳般炽燃照耀。’就这样,为了称赞法的缘故,世尊起座,进入精舍。显示巴利原文
Dhammathomanatthaṃ pavisanto evaṃ cintesi, yathā idheva cintesi – ‘‘mayi vihāraṃ paviṭṭhe tameva āmisadāyādaṃ garahanto dhammadāyādañca thomento imissaṃyeva parisati nisinno sāriputto dhammaṃ desessati, evaṃ dvinnampi amhākaṃ ekajjhāsayāya matiyā desitā ayaṃ desanā aggā ca garukā ca bhavissati pāsāṇacchattasadisā. Caturoghanittharaṇaṭṭhena titthe ṭhapitā nāvā viya maggagamanaṭṭhena catuyuttaājaññaratho viya ca bhavissati. Yathā ca ‘evaṃ karontassa ayaṃ daṇḍo’ti parisati āṇaṃ ṭhapetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pāsādaṃ āruḷhe rājini tattheva nisinno senāpati taṃ raññā ṭhapitaṃ āṇaṃ pavatteti; evampi mayā ṭhapitaṃ desanaṃ imissaṃyeva parisati nisinno sāriputto thometvā desessati, evaṃ dvinnampi amhākaṃ matiyā desitā ayaṃ desanā balavatarā majjhanhikasūriyo viya pajjalissatī’’ti. Evamidha dhammathomanatthaṃ uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisi.
应知于这些场合,世尊即于座上隐没,而以心念进入精舍。若以身体行走,所有聚会大众都会围随世尊而去;大众一朝散乱,便难再聚集。因此,世尊唯以心念而入。显示巴利原文
Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu bhagavā nisinnāsaneyeva antarahito cittagatiyā vihāraṃ pavisatīti veditabbo. Yadi hi kāyagatiyā gaccheyya, sabbā parisā bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā gaccheyya, sā ekavāraṃ bhinnā puna dussannipātā bhaveyyāti bhagavā cittagatiyā eva pāvisi.
31 世尊如此进入后,尊者舍利弗为随顺世尊的心意,欲赞扬彼法,于是……乃至……说出这样的话。此处“尊者”是亲切的称呼。“舍利弗”是那位长老之名,此名依母而得,非依父。因他是婆罗门女鲁波舍利的儿子,故称舍利弗。“离去不久”,即离去之后不久。关于“诸比丘,友啊”:诸佛世尊招呼声闻弟子时,称“比丘们”;而声闻弟子因不愿自视为与佛陀同等,故先说“友”,再说“比丘们”。被佛陀招呼的比丘僧团,应答“尊者”;被声闻招呼时,则应答“友”。显示巴利原文
31. Evaṃ paviṭṭhe pana bhagavati bhagavato adhippāyānurūpaṃ taṃ dhammaṃ thometukāmo tatra khoāyasmā sāriputto…pe…etadavoca. Tattha āyasmāti piyavacanametaṃ. Sāriputtoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ, tañca kho mātito, na pitito. Rūpasāriyā hi brāhmaṇiyā so putto, tasmā sāriputtoti vuccati. Acirapakkantassāti pakkantassa sato nacirena. Āvuso, bhikkhaveti ettha pana buddhā bhagavanto sāvake ālapantā bhikkhaveti ālapanti. Sāvakā pana buddhehi sadisā mā homāti āvusoti paṭhamaṃ vatvā pacchā bhikkhaveti bhaṇanti. Buddhehi ca ālapito bhikkhusaṅgho bhadanteti paṭivacanaṃ deti, sāvakehi āvusoti.
在“如何,友啊”这句话中,“如何”(kittāvatā)是表示限定的词,意思是“多少程度”。“nu”是疑问词。“kho”仅是语助词。“导师远离而住”,意为导师以三种远离——身远离、心远离、依远离——而安住。“不修学远离”,是指这三种远离中任何一种都不去修学,只成为物质利益的继承者。尊者舍利弗正是带着此义来询问比丘们。同样的道理,也适用于清净那一方。显示巴利原文
Kittāvatānu kho, āvusoti ettha kittāvatāti paricchedavacanaṃ, kittakenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nukāro pucchāyaṃ. Khokāro nipātamattaṃ. Satthu pavivittassa viharatoti, tīhi vivekehi kāyacittaupadhivivekehi satthuno viharantassa. Vivekaṃ nānusikkhantīti tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ aññatarampi nānusikkhanti, āmisadāyādāva hontīti imamatthaṃ āyasmā sāriputto bhikkhū pucchi. Esa nayo sukkapakkhepi.
尊者这样问后,想要听闻此义理的比丘们便说“从远或近”等语。这里,“从远”指越国、越聚落,乃至数由旬之远。“近”(santika)即附近。“了知”即知解、觉悟。“敬请尊者舍利弗”的意思是:应请尊者舍利弗予以解说,尊者舍利弗应自行分别解说。因为,此法义的解释是尊者的责任,而听闻是我们的责任——这是此处的内在意趣,且与字面相符。对于“paṭibhātu”一词,有些人说意为“显现”,另一些人则说意为“呈现”。“持守”(dhāressanti)即受持、完全掌握。于是,想要为他们说法的长老说“因此”等。在此,“因此”(tena)是表原因之词,“hi”是语助词。意思是:既然你们想听,且把这项任务交付于我,所以你们应当好好聆听。那些比丘接受了长老的话,因此经中说:“是的,尊者……乃至……他们回应了。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte tamatthaṃ sotukāmā bhikkhū dūratopi khotiādimāhaṃsu. Tattha dūratopīti tiroraṭṭhatopi tirojanapadatopi anekayojanagaṇanatopīti vuttaṃ hoti. Santiketi samīpe. Aññātunti jānituṃ bujjhituṃ. Āyasmantaṃyeva sāriputtaṃ paṭibhātūti āyasmatoyeva sāriputtassa bhāgo hotu, āyasmā pana sāriputto attano bhāgaṃ katvā vibhajatūti vuttaṃ hoti. Āyasmato hi bhāgo yadidaṃ atthakkhānaṃ, amhākaṃ pana savanaṃ bhāgoti ayamettha adhippāyo, evaṃ saddalakkhaṇena sameti. Keci pana bhaṇanti ‘‘paṭibhātūti dissatū’’ti. Apare ‘‘upaṭṭhātū’’ti. Dhāressantīti uggahessanti pariyāpuṇissanti. Tato nesaṃ kathetukāmo thero tena hītiādimāha. Tattha tenāti kāraṇavacanaṃ. Hikāro nipāto. Yasmā sotukāmāttha, yasmā ca mayhaṃ bhāraṃ āropayittha, tasmā suṇāthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tepi bhikkhū therassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchiṃsu, tenāha ‘‘evamāvusoti…pe…paccassosu’’nti.
之后,尊者舍利弗为了以三种方式向比丘们阐明世尊呵斥那些继承物质遗产者时所说的“你们也会成为那样的继承者”之义,这样说道:“在此,贤友,当导师远离而住时……乃至……如此,贤友,当导师远离而住时,声闻弟子们却不修学远离。”显示巴利原文
Atha nesaṃ, āmisadāyādaṃ garahantena bhagavatā ‘‘tumhepi tena ādiyā bhaveyyāthā’’ti ekenevākārena vuttamatthaṃ tīhi ākārehi dassento āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca – ‘‘idhāvuso , satthu pavivittassa viharato…pe… ettāvatā kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti.
到此为止,世尊为呵斥那类行于物质遗产继承的行为而说的“你们也会成为那样的继承者”,以及尊者自己提出的问题“如何……乃至……不修学远离?”,其详细义理已清楚明了。而且,这仅是就声闻弟子而言,并不涉及世尊自己成为物质遗产继承者一事。因为,只有在教导声闻时,世尊自己说“我也会成为那样的继承者”才合适,声闻弟子们则不宜这样说。这一道理同样适用于法施那一方。这就是此处文脉的联结次第。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā yañca bhagavā āmisadāyādapaṭipadaṃ garahanto ‘‘tumhepi tena ādiyā bhaveyyāthā’’ti āha, yañca attanā pucchaṃ pucchi ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho…pe… nānusikkhantī’’ti, tassa vitthārato attho suvibhatto hoti. So ca kho bhagavato ādiyabhāvaṃ anāmasitvāva. Bhagavatoyeva hi yuttaṃ sāvake anuggaṇhantassa ‘‘ahampi tena ādiyo bhavissāmī’’ti vattuṃ, na sāvakānaṃ. Esa nayo sukkapakkhepi, ayaṃ tāvettha anusandhikkamayojanā.
此处是义注的解说。“于此”是指在这教法中。“师以远离”是指导师通过三种远离而彻底远离。“不修学远离”是指不修学、不圆满身远离。若就三种远离而说,则提问便无差别。此属解答的部分。因此,以这一句表示身远离,以“某些法”等表示心远离,以“多作”等表示依远离。这便是此处应略知的义理。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panatthavaṇṇanā idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane, satthu pavivittassāti satthuno tīhi vivekehi accantapavivittassa. Vivekaṃ nānusikkhantīti kāyavivekaṃ nānusikkhanti, na paripūrentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yadi pana tividhaṃ vivekaṃ sandhāya vadeyya, pucchāya aviseso siyā. Byākaraṇapakkho hi ayaṃ. Tasmā iminā padena kāyavivekaṃ, ‘‘yesañca dhammāna’’ntiādinā cittavivekaṃ, ‘‘bāhulikā’’tiādinā upadhivivekañca dassetīti evamettha saṅkhepato attho veditabbo.
“某些法”指贪等,即下文将以“贤友,于此贪是恶”等方式所说之法。“不弃舍”即不舍弃,意思是未圆满心远离。“多作者”即从事衣等之繁多者。“松弛地执持教法”即懈怠者。关于“进入时先行”,“进入”是指五盖,因为五盖有淹没之义,故说以五盖为先。“远离”指依远离、涅槃。“放下负担”即卸下负担,乃至不为证得它而精勤;这即是说未圆满依远离。显示巴利原文
Yesañca dhammānanti lobhādayo sandhāyāha, ye parato ‘‘tatrāvuso lobho ca pāpako’’tiādinā nayena vakkhati. Nappajahantīti na pariccajanti, cittavivekaṃ na paripūrentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Bāhulikāti cīvarādibāhullāya paṭipannā. Sāsanaṃ sithilaṃ gaṇhantīti sāthalikā. Okkamane pubbaṅgamāti ettha okkamanaṃ vuccanti avagamanaṭṭhena pañca nīvaraṇāni, tena pañcanīvaraṇapubbaṅgamāti vuttaṃ hoti. Paviveketi upadhiviveke nibbāne. Nikkhittadhurāti oropitadhurā, tadadhigamāya ārambhampi akurumānāti, ettāvatā upadhivivekaṃ na paripūrentīti vuttaṃ hoti.
至此,无特定对象地说毕,现在限定对象开示说“贤友,在那里”等。为何如此?因为弟子们于不限定对象而被告知“以三种理由”时,有人会漠不关心,心想:“他或许是在说别人,并非说我们。”然而,若限定对象说“长老、中年、新学”,他们便想:“这是在说我们”,因而生起恭敬心。正如国王说“应由大臣们清扫街道”时,他们心想:“究竟该由谁清扫?”而不去清扫;但当击鼓宣告各自清扫自家门前时,众人便立即清扫并装饰起来。当知,此处的道理也是如此。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā aniyameneva vatvā idāni desanaṃ niyamento ‘‘tatrāvuso’’tiādimāha. Kasmā? Sāvakā ‘‘tīhi ṭhānehī’’ti evañhi aniyametvāva vuccamāne ‘‘kampi maññe bhaṇati , na amhe’’ti udāsināpi honti. ‘‘Therā navā majjhimā’’ti evaṃ pana niyametvā vuccamāne amhe bhaṇatīti ādaraṃ karonti . Yathā raññā ‘‘amaccehi nagaravīthiyo sodhetabbā’’ti vuttepi ‘‘kena nu kho sodhetabbā’’ti maññamānā na sodhenti, attano attano gharadvāraṃ sodhetabbanti pana bheriyā nikkhantāya sabbe muhuttena sodhenti ca alaṅkaronti ca, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.
其中,“在那里”指在那些弟子当中。“长老”指十夏龄以上的比丘。“以三种理由”即“以三种原因”。因为“处”这个词见于自在、安住、刹那、原因等含义。例如,在“贤者帝释天是造了什么业而证得此位?”等句中,是用于表示自在;在“他是处善巧者,箭无虚发”等句中,是用于表示安住;在“这是如来应时应机的说法”等句中,是用于表示刹那;在“知处为处,知非处为非处”等句中,是用于表示原因。但在此处,唯指原因。因为原因即是果安住于其中、依之而转起的依处,故称为“处”。显示巴利原文
Tattha tatrāti tesu sāvakesu. Therāti dasavasse upādāya vuccanti. Tīhi ṭhānehīti tīhi kāraṇehi. Ayañhi ṭhānasaddo issariyaṭṭhitikhaṇakāraṇesu dissati. ‘‘Kiṃ panāyasmā devānamindo kammaṃ katvā imaṃ ṭhānaṃ patto’’tiādīsu hi issariye dissati. ‘‘Ṭhānakusalo hoti akkhaṇavedhī’’tiādīsu ṭhitiyaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhānasovetaṃ tathāgataṃ paṭibhātī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.87) khaṇe. ‘‘Ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato’’tiādīsu (vibha. 809; ma. ni. 1.148) kāraṇe. Idha pana kāraṇeyeva. Kāraṇañhi yasmā tattha phalaṃ tiṭṭhati tadāyattavuttibhāvena, tasmā ṭhānanti vuccati.
“以此第一个理由,长老比丘们可受呵责”——此处“可呵责”意为应受指责。身为长老,却不去亲近阿兰若、林野、边远的坐卧处,不舍弃村落边的坐卧处,增长好乐群聚而住,甚至不圆满身远离,那么他们身为新学和中年的情形又会是如何?——他们应受谴责,这位贤友正因此受到指责。这里显示了这一层意思。 “以第二个理由”——同样应如此连接:这些称为贤友的长老们,对于导师所说应断除的那些法,不舍弃那些贪等法,不能于弹指顷安坐一处而心得一境,那么他们身为新学和中年的情形又会是如何?——他们应受谴责,这位贤友正因此受到指责。 “以第三个理由”——也应当如此了知其连接:这些称为贤友的长老们,不以任何资具而活命,反而从事于袈裟、钵、坐卧处、装饰身体等事,不圆满依远离,那么他们身为新学和中年的情形又会是如何?——他们应受谴责,这位贤友正因此受到指责。这里显示了这一层意思。对于中年与新学的部分,也依此理类推。显示巴利原文
Iminā paṭhamena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū gārayhāti ettha gārayhāti garahitabbā. Therā nāma samānā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni na upenti, gāmantasenāsanaṃ na muñcanti, saṅgaṇikārāmataṃ vaḍḍhentā viharanti, kāyavivekampi na paripūrenti, navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti evaṃ ninditabbā honti, imaṃ nindaṃ āvuso labhantīti dasseti. Dutiyena ṭhānenāti etthāpi ime nāma āvuso therāpi samānā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ satthā pahānamāha, te lobhādidhamme na jahanti, accharāsaṅghātamattampi ekamantaṃ nisīditvā cittekaggataṃ na labhanti, navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti evaṃ ninditabbā honti, imaṃ nindaṃ āvuso labhantīti dassetīti evaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Tatiyena ṭhānenāti etthāpi ime nāmāvuso, therāpi samānā itarītarena na yāpenti, cīvarapattasenāsanapūtikāyamaṇḍanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti upadhivivekaṃ apūrayamānā, navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti evaṃ ninditabbā honti, imaṃ nindaṃ, āvuso, labhantīti dassetīti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Esa nayo majjhimanavavāresu.
不过,此处有一个区别:“中年”指五夏龄以上、九夏龄以下者。“新学”指不足五夏龄者。正如那里说“在中年和新学时他们是怎样的?”,此处应说“在新学时他们怎样?在长老时他们将如何?在中年与长老时他们又将如何?”来进行连接。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana viseso. Majjhimāti pañcavasse upādāya yāva nava vassā vuccanti. Navāti ūnapañcavassā vuccanti. Yathā ca tattha navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti vuttaṃ, evamidha navakāle kīdisā ahesuṃ, therakāle kīdisā bhavissanti, majjhimatherakāle kīdisā bhavissantīti vatvā yojetabbaṃ.
32 在此黑分中所说的反面道理,应知白分的意义。这里略说其要:这些长老比丘,虽为长老,仍代代相续地亲近阿兰若、林野、边远住处,即使在适宜前往村落附近住处的时节也不前往,身体虽已如此衰老,仍勤策精进,令施主生信。至于中年和新学时,他们又会如何?——以此第一个理由,长老比丘们是可赞叹的,应受赞叹。他们舍弃贪等,圆满心远离;正如这位大长老,虽被同住比丘与学童围绕,在适宜安坐的时节,即使到了这般高龄,仍于用斋后进入住处,傍晚出来,傍晚进入,早晨出来,修习遍作相,引发等至,证得道果,以一切方式圆满心远离——以此第二个理由,长老比丘们是可赞叹的,应受赞叹。在长老本该使用丝绸、细布等触感柔软、轻便的袈裟之时,这位大长老却穿着粪扫衣,不放逸地执持教法,远离诸盖,入于果等至,圆满依远离而住。而在新学与中年时,他又当如何?——以此第三个理由,长老比丘们是可赞叹的,应受赞叹。对于中年与新学的部分,也依此理类推。显示巴利原文
32. Imasmiñca kaṇhapakkhe vuttapaccanīkanayena sukkapakkhe attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo. Ime vata therāpi samānā yojanaparamparāya araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni sevanti, gāmantasenāsanaṃ upagantuṃ yuttakālepi na upagacchanti, evaṃ jiṇṇasarīrāpi āraddhavīriyā paccayadāyakānaṃ pasādaṃ janenti, navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti iminā paṭhamena ṭhānena therā pāsaṃsā bhavanti, pasaṃsaṃ labhanti. Lobhādayo pahāya cittavivekaṃ pūrenti, ayampi mahāthero saddhivihārikaantevāsikaparivārito hutvā nisīdituṃ yuttakālepi īdisepi vaye vattamāne bhattakiccaṃ katvā paviṭṭho sāyaṃ nikkhamati, sāyaṃ paviṭṭho pāto nikkhamati, kasiṇaparikammaṃ karoti, samāpattiyo nibbatteti, maggaphalāni adhigacchati, sabbathāpi cittavivekaṃ pūretīti iminā dutiyena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū pāsaṃsā bhavanti, pasaṃsaṃ labhanti. Yasmiṃ kāle therassa paṭṭadukūlakoseyyādīni sukhasamphassāni lahucīvarādīni yuttāni, tasmimpi nāma kāle ayaṃ mahāthero paṃsukūlāni dhāreti, asithilaṃ sāsanaṃ gahetvā vigatanīvaraṇo phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā upadhivivekaṃ paripūrayamāno viharati, navamajjhimakāle kīdiso ahosīti iminā tatiyena ṭhānena therā pāsaṃsā bhavanti, pasaṃsaṃ labhantīti. Esa nayo majjhimanavavāresu.
33 “贤友,在那里”的衔接是什么?如此,以九种方式谴责财继承者的行道,以九种方式称赞法继承者的行道,以十八种方式结束开示后,对于那些“有些法,导师说要断除,他们却不断除”中所说的应断之法,为了具体指明“就是这些”,于是说:“贤友,在那里,贪是恶……”等。这就是此处的衔接。显示巴利原文
33.Tatrāvusoti ko anusandhi, evaṃ navahākārehi āmisadāyādapaṭipadaṃ garahanto, navahi dhammadāyādapaṭipadaṃ thomento, aṭṭhārasahākārehi desanaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā, ye te ‘‘yesañca dhammānaṃ satthā pahānamāha, te ca dhamme na pajahantī’’ti evaṃ pahātabbadhammā vuttā. Te sarūpato ‘‘ime te’’ti dassetumidaṃ ‘‘tatrāvuso, lobho cā’’tiādimāha, ayaṃ anusandhi.
再者,前面是以譬喻的方式说明了法,至于财物,则既以譬喻、也以非譬喻的方式说过了。现在,为了宣说非譬喻的法——也就是出世间道,才说出这句话。这就是此处的衔接。显示巴利原文
Apica heṭṭhā pariyāyeneva dhammo kathito. Āmisaṃ pana pariyāyenapi nippariyāyenapi kathitaṃ. Idāni nippariyāyadhammaṃ lokuttaramaggaṃ kathetumidamāha. Ayaṃ pettha anusandhi.
其中,“tattha”是指过去的宣说,即“导师独处远离而住时,弟子们却不学远离……”等以这种方式所说的教示。而“贪是恶的,瞋也是恶的”——这是在指出这两种法是恶的、卑劣的,是应当断除的。其中,贪以贪求为相,瞋以瞋怒为相。在这两者中,贪会在资具继承者得到资具时生起,瞋则在得不到时生起。因贪,人们追求未得之物;因瞋,未得之时便生苦恼。贪是缘于可施之物而起,瞋则缘于不布施者或布施不如意者而起。以贪,成就九种以爱为根本的法;以瞋,成就五种悭吝。显示巴利原文
Tattha tatrāti atītadesanānidassanaṃ, ‘‘satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’tiādinā nayena vuttadesanāyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Lobho ca pāpako, doso ca pāpakoti ime dve dhammā pāpakā lāmakā, ime pahātabbāti dasseti. Tattha lubbhanalakkhaṇo lobho. Dussanalakkhaṇo doso. Tesu lobho āmisadāyādassa paccayānaṃ lābhe hoti, doso alābhe. Lobhena aladdhaṃ pattheti, dosena alabhanto vighātavā hoti. Lobho ca deyyadhamme hoti, doso adāyake vā amanuññadāyake vā. Lobhena navataṇhāmūlake dhamme paripūreti, dosena pañca macchariyāni.
现在,为了指出断除它们的方法,而说“为断除贪……”等。其意为:为了断除那恶的贪与恶的瞋,有一条中道。这是就“道”而言的。因为贪是一个极端,瞋是另一个极端,此道不近、不入此二极端,从这些极端中解脱,所以称为“中道”。由于它存于二者之间,故为“中”;因为应当实践,故为“道”。同样地,沉溺于欲乐是一极端,自我折磨是一极端;常见是一极端,断见是一极端。应依前述之理广说。显示巴利原文
Idāni tesaṃ pahānūpāyaṃ dassento lobhassa ca pahānāyātiādimāha. Tassattho, tassa pana pāpakassa lobhassa ca dosassa ca pahānāya. Atthi majjhimā paṭipadāti maggaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ. Maggo hi lobho eko anto, doso eko antoti ete dve ante na upeti, na upagacchati, vimutto etehi antehi, tasmā ‘‘majjhimā paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Etesaṃ majjhe bhavattā ‘‘majjhimā, paṭipajjitabbato ca paṭipadāti. Tathā kāmasukhallikānuyogo eko anto, attakilamathānuyogo eko anto, sassataṃ eko anto, ucchedo eko antoti purimanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ.
说“能作眼”等,是在赞叹该道本身。因为此道能导向对诸谛的照见,具有作为照见导引者的意义,故称“能作眼”;能导向对诸谛的了知,有令了知的意义,故称“能作智”;又能令贪等寂止,故导向寂静;又能显示四谛应遍知,故导向证知。“正觉”即指道,为它的缘故而能导向,故说“为了正觉”而能导向。因为道本身即是为了道的目标而能导向,以道完成所应作之事。所谓涅槃是无为的,但为了证悟它、亲证它,故说“能导向涅槃”。这是此处要义。其他异解皆属繁赘。显示巴利原文
Cakkhukaraṇītiādīhi pana tameva paṭipadaṃ thometi. Sā hi saccānaṃ dassanāya saṃvattati dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti cakkhukaraṇī. Saccānaṃ ñāṇāya saṃvattati viditakaraṇaṭṭhenāti ñāṇakaraṇī. Rāgādīnañca vūpasamanato upasamāya saṃvattati. Catunnampi saccānaṃ abhiññeyyabhāvadassanato abhiññāya saṃvattati. Sambodhoti maggo, tassatthāya saṃvattanato sambodhāya saṃvattati. Maggoyeva hi maggatthāya saṃvattati maggena kātabbakiccakaraṇato. Nibbānaṃ nāma appaccayaṃ tassa pana sacchikiriyāya paccakkhakammāya saṃvattanato nibbānāya saṃvattatīti vuccati. Ayamettha sāro. Ito aññathā vaṇṇanā papañcā.
现在,为了显示那条中道的本质,他先以“哪一条是那条中道?”发问,再以“正是这一条”等理趣作答。显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ majjhimaṃ paṭipadaṃ sarūpato dassetukāmo ‘‘katamā ca sā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘ayamevā’’tiādinā nayena vissajjeti.
其中,“正是这一条”(ayameva)是表决定的措辞,旨在遮止他道,也为了显示此道为佛陀、独觉佛及佛弟子所共通。正如经中所说:“这就是那条道,没有其他能令见解清净之道。”此道因远离烦恼而称为“圣”;也因能导向烦恼的断除、因由圣者所宣说、因能证得圣位,復称为“圣”。因为具足八项支分,所以称为“八支”,并非像五支乐等那样支分不全。它能杀烦恼而行进,或寻求涅槃,或被希求涅槃者所寻求,或被他们所行践,所以称为“道”。“seyyathidaṃ”是不变词,意思是“哪一些是那个”或“哪一些”,也就是“哪八支呢”。每一项支分本身就是道,如所说:“正见既是道,又是因。”古德也说:“正见是见之道,正思惟是导向之道……正定是不散乱之道。”显示巴利原文
Tattha ayamevāti avadhāraṇavacanaṃ, aññamaggappaṭisedhanatthaṃ, buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvadassanatthañca. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘eseva maggo natthañño dassanassa visuddhiyā’’ti (dha. pa. 274). Svāyaṃ kilesānaṃ ārakattāpi ariyo. Aripahānāya saṃvattatītipi ariyena desitotipi ariyabhāvappaṭilābhāya saṃvattatītipi ariyo. Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetattā aṭṭhaṅgiko, na ca aṅgavinimutto pañcaṅgikatūriyādīni viya. Kilese mārento gacchati, maggati vā nibbānaṃ, maggīyati vā nibbānatthikehi, gammati vā tehi paṭipajjīyatīti maggo. Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa katamo so iti ceti attho, katamāni vā tāni aṭṭhaṅgānīti. Ekamekañhi aṅgaṃ maggoyeva. Yathāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi maggo ceva hetu cā’’ti (dha. sa. 1039). Porāṇāpi bhaṇanti – ‘‘dassanamaggo sammādiṭṭhi, abhiniropanamaggo sammāsaṅkappo…pe… avikkhepamaggo sammāsamādhī’’ti.
在这八支当中,正见以正确地见为相;正思惟以正确地导向为相;正语以正确地摄持为相;正业以正确地发动为相;正命以正确地净除为相;正精进以正确地策励为相;正念以正确地安住为相;正定以正确地等持为相。它们的释词也应依此理趣来理解,例如“正见”即是正确地见的缘故。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhādīsu cetesu sammā dassanalakkhaṇā sammādiṭṭhi. Sammā abhiniropanalakkhaṇo sammāsaṅkappo. Sammā pariggahalakkhaṇā sammāvācā. Sammā samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇo sammākammanto. Sammā vodānalakkhaṇo sammāājīvo. Sammā paggahalakkhaṇo sammāvāyāmo. Sammā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇā sammāsati. Sammā samādhānalakkhaṇo sammāsamādhi. Nibbacanampi nesaṃ sammā passatīti sammādiṭṭhīti eteneva nayena veditabbaṃ.
其中,正见生起时,断除邪见、与之相违的烦恼及无明;它以涅槃为所缘,并能照见相应法。然而,这只是从不迷乱的角度说,并非以那些法为所缘,因此称为“正见”。显示巴利原文
Tattha sammādiṭṭhi uppajjamānā micchādiṭṭhiṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca avijjañca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca passati, te ca kho asammohato, no ārammaṇato, tasmā ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti vuccati.
正思惟生起时,断除邪思惟及与之相违的烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地安立相应法,因此称为“正思惟”。显示巴利原文
Sammāsaṅkappo micchāsaṅkappaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā abhiniropeti, tasmā ‘‘sammāsaṅkappo’’ti vuccati.
正语生起时,断除邪语及与之相违的烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地摄持相应法,因此称为“正语”。显示巴利原文
Sammāvācā micchāvācaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā pariggaṇhāti, tasmā ‘‘sammāvācā’’ti vuccati.
正业能断除邪业及与之相反的烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地发动相应诸法,因此称为“正业”。显示巴利原文
Sammākammanto micchākammantaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā samuṭṭhāpeti, tasmā ‘‘sammākammanto’’ti vuccati.
正命能断除邪命及与之相反的烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地净化相应诸法,因此称为“正命”。显示巴利原文
Sammāājīvo micchāājīvaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā vodāpeti, tasmā ‘‘sammāājīvo’’ti vuccati.
正精进能断除邪精进、与之相反的烦恼以及懈怠,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地策励相应诸法,因此称为“正精进”。显示巴利原文
Sammāvāyāmo micchāvāyāmaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca kosajjañca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā paggaṇhāti, tasmā ‘‘sammāvāyāmo’’ti vuccati.
正念断除邪念及与邪念对立的烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地安立相应诸法,因此称为“正念”。显示巴利原文
Sammāsati micchāsatiṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā upaṭṭhāpeti, tasmā ‘‘sammāsatī’’ti vuccati.
正定断除邪定、与邪定对立的烦恼以及掉举,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地令相应诸法专注入定,因此称为“正定”。显示巴利原文
Sammāsamādhi micchāsamādhiṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca uddhaccañca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā samādhiyati, tasmā ‘‘sammāsamādhī’’ti vuccati.
现在,“贤友,这就是那条……”是总结那同一条行道的语句。它的意思是:把四种出世间道合在一起所说的“八支道”,贤友,正是这条……导向涅槃。显示巴利原文
Idāni ayaṃ kho sā, āvusoti tameva paṭipadaṃ nigamento āha. Tassattho, yvāyaṃ cattāropi lokuttaramagge ekato katvā kathito ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’, ayaṃ kho sā, āvuso…pe… nibbānāya saṃvattatīti.
如此,在说明了应断诸法中的贪与瞋及其断除方法之后,现在为了开示其余应断法及其断除方法,而说:“贤友,于此,忿……”等。其中,忿,以愤怒为特征,或以暴躁为特征;其作用是产生愤恨,现起为恶意。恨,以持续怨恨为特征,作用是不舍弃敌意,现起为忿的后续。这也曾说过:“前时为忿,后时为恨”等(《分别论》891)。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pahātabbadhammesu lobhadose tappahānupāyañca dassetvā idāni aññepi pahātabbadhamme tesaṃ pahānupāyañca dassento tatrāvuso, kodho cātiādimāha. Tattha kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodho, caṇḍikkalakkhaṇo vā, āghātakaraṇaraso, dussanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Upanandhanalakkhaṇo upanāho, vera appaṭinissajjanaraso, kodhānupabandhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘pubbakāle kodho, aparakāle upanāho’’tiādi (vibha. 891).
覆,以抹煞他人功德为特征;其作用是毁坏那些功德;其现起为遮蔽那些功德。恼,以执持比较为特征(将他人功德与自己的功德等视);其作用是以他人功德来等同自己的功德;其现起是依他人功德的量而显现。显示巴利原文
Paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇo makkho, tesaṃ vināsanaraso, tadavacchādanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Yugaggāhalakkhaṇo paḷāso, paraguṇehi attano guṇānaṃ samīkaraṇaraso, paresaṃ guṇappamāṇena upaṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhāno.
嫉妒,以嫉妒他人成就为特征,或以不能忍受为特征;其作用是对他人的成就感到不喜乐;其现起是背向那些成就。悭,以隐藏自己的成就为特征;其作用是不能忍受自己的成就与他人共享;其现起是收缩。显示巴利原文
Parasampattikhīyanalakkhaṇā issā, tassā akkhamanalakkhaṇā vā, tattha anabhiratirasā, tato vimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Attano sampattinigūhanalakkhaṇaṃ maccheraṃ, attano sampattiyā parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaasukhāyanarasaṃ, saṅkocanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
「谄」的特征是掩饰已作之恶,作用是将其隐藏,现起为将其遮盖。「诳」的特征是显示自身所无之功德,作用是宣说他们功德,现起为借身姿仪表等令其彰显。显示巴利原文
Katapāpapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā māyā, tassa nigūhanarasā, tadāvaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānā. Attano avijjamānaguṇapakāsanalakkhaṇaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ, tesaṃ samudāharaṇarasaṃ, sarīrākārehipi tesaṃ vibhūtakaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
「骄」的特征是内心膨胀,作用是行事不恭,现起为不柔和。「瞋恼」的特征是行仪过激,作用是与人对立,现起为不恭敬。显示巴利原文
Cittassa uddhumātabhāvalakkhaṇo thambho, appatissayavuttiraso, amaddavatāpaccupaṭṭhāno. Karaṇuttariyalakkhaṇo sārambho, vipaccanīkatāraso, agāravapaccupaṭṭhāno.
「慢」的特征是高扬,作用是执著于我,现起是内心膨胀。「过慢」的特征是极度高扬,作用是极度执著于我,现起是内心极度膨胀。显示巴利原文
Uṇṇatilakkhaṇo māno, ahaṃkāraraso, uddhumātabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno. Abbhuṇṇatilakkhaṇo atimāno, ativiya ahaṅkāraraso. Accuddhumātabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno.
「憍」的特征是陶醉的状态,作用是执取陶醉,现起为疯狂。「放逸」的特征是于五种欲功德上心的放纵,作用是令放纵持续,现起为失去正念。应当如此了知这些法的特征等。这是此处的略说,至于广说,则应依据《分别论》(《分别论》891)中以“其中,什么是忿”等方法所开示的内容来了知。显示巴利原文
Mattabhāvalakkhaṇo mado, madaggāhaṇaraso, ummādapaccupaṭṭhāno. Pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cittavossaggalakkhaṇo pamādo, vossaggānuppadānaraso, sativippavāsapaccupaṭṭhānoti evaṃ imesaṃ dhammānaṃ lakkhaṇādīni veditabbāni. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana ‘‘tattha katamo kodho’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 891) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
在此特别指出:一个追求财物的人,自己未得,见他人获得便心生愤怒。那一次生起的愤怒,即是「忿」;超过于此的,则是「恨」。他这样忿恨之后,即使对方有功德,也加以贬损,并执持“我也是那样”这种双执,这便是他的「贬损」与「欺瞒」。这样贬损、欺瞒之后,对那人所得的利养恭敬等,便嫉妒、恼怒地想:“这人凭什么得到这些?”这就是他的「嫉妒」。若他自己有任何成就,却不能忍受他人共享其成,这就是他的「悭」。为了利养,即使自己有过失也加以掩饰,这就是他的「谄」。即使并无功德也加以宣说,这就是他的「诳」。他如此行持,若如其所谋得到了利养,便因此而骄,心不柔和,对于他人“这事不应这样做”的劝诫无法接受,这就是他的「骄」。若此时有谁对他说“这事不应这样做”,他便心怀恼怒、皱眉瞪眼,蛮横地说:“你算什么,竟敢对我这样说!”这就是他的「瞋恼」。接着,由骄而自认为“我才是最好的”,便成为慢者;由瞋恼而轻视他人,以为“这些人算什么”,便成为过慢者,这就是他的「慢」与「过慢」。他显示巴利原文
Visesato cettha āmisadāyādo attanā alabhanto aññassa lābhino kujjhati, tassa sakiṃ uppanno kodho kodhoyeva, tatuttari upanāho. So evaṃ kuddho upanayhanto ca santepi aññassa lābhino guṇe makkheti, ahampi tādisoti ca yugaggāhaṃ gaṇhāti, ayamassa makkho ca paḷāso ca, evaṃ makkhī paḷāsī tassa lābhasakkārādīsu kiṃ imassa imināti issati padussati, ayamassa issā. Sace panassa kāci sampatti hoti, tassā tena sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ na sahati, idamassa maccheraṃ. Lābhahetu kho pana attano santepi dose paṭicchādeti, ayamassa māyā. Asantepi guṇe pakāseti. Idamassa sāṭheyyaṃ. So evaṃ paṭipanno sace yathādhippāyaṃ lābhaṃ labhati, tena thaddho hoti amuducitto, nayidaṃ evaṃ kātabbanti ovadituṃ asakkuṇeyyo, ayamassa thambho. Sace pana naṃ koci kiñci vadati ‘‘nayidaṃ evaṃ kātabba’’nti, tena sāraddhacitto hoti bhākuṭikamukho ‘‘ko me tva’’nti pasayha bhāṇī, ayamassa sārambho. Tato thambhena ‘‘ahameva seyyo’’ti attānaṃ maññanto mānī hoti. Sārambhena ‘‘ke ime’’ti pare atimaññanto atimānī, ayamassa māno ca atimāno ca. So tehi mānātimānehi jātimadādianekarūpaṃ madaṃ janeti. Matto samāno kāmaguṇādibhedesu vatthūsu pamajjati, ayamassa mado ca pamādo cāti.
如是,「财物继承人」便无法从这些恶法及其他类似法中解脱。因此,于此首先应当了知哪些是所应断除的法。而断除的方法,无论从字面还是意义上说,于一切处都无差别。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ āmisadāyādo aparimutto hoti imehi pāpakehi dhammehi aññehi ca evarūpehi. Evaṃ tāvettha pahātabbadhammā veditabbā. Pahānupāyo pāṭhato ca atthato ca sabbattha nibbisesoyeva.
在《智慧熟习篇》此处,应了知分类、次第与修习方法。先说分类:此中道有时是圣八支道,有时是七支道。当此道依出世间初禅那而生起时,即为八支道;依其余禅那而生起时,则为七支道。而此处依最上之说,故说为八支。因为除此之外,更无其余道支。如是,当先了知此处之分类。显示巴利原文
Ñāṇaparicayapāṭavatthaṃ panettha ayaṃ bhedo ca kamo ca bhāvanānayo ca veditabbo. Tattha bhedo tāva, ayañhi majjhimā paṭipadā kadāci ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo hoti, kadāci sattaṅgiko. Ayañhi lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānavasena uppajjamāno aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo hoti, avasesajjhānavasena sattaṅgiko. Ukkaṭṭhaniddesato panidha aṭṭhaṅgikoti vutto. Ito parañhi maggaṅgaṃ natthi. Evaṃ tāvettha bhedo veditabbo.
又,于一切善法中,正见最为殊胜,即如所说:“善法中,慧最上。”(《本生》2.17.81)且于善法聚中,正见为前导,如说:“诸比丘,正见如何为前导?彼正知正见为正见,正知邪见为邪见。”(《中部》3.136)广说如是。又如说:“诸比丘,明为诸善法等至之前导。”其余道支皆依此正见而生起,如说:“有正见者,正思惟则生起……有正念者,正定则生起。”(《中部》3.141)是故,诸道支即依此次第而说。当如是了知此处之次第。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana sabbakusalānaṃ sammādiṭṭhi seṭṭhā, yathāha ‘‘paññā hi seṭṭhā kusalā vadantī’’ti (jā. 2.17.81). Kusalavāre ca pubbaṅgamā, yathāha ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti, sammādiṭṭhiṃ sammādiṭṭhīti pajānāti, micchādiṭṭhiṃ micchādiṭṭhīti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.136) vitthāro. Yathā cāha ‘‘vijjā ca kho, bhikkhave, pubbaṅgamā kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā’’ti. Tappabhavābhinibbattāni sesaṅgāni, yathāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissa sammāsaṅkappo pahoti…pe… sammāsatissa sammāsamādhi pahotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.141). Tasmā iminā kamena etāni aṅgāni vuttānīti evamettha kamo veditabbo.
“修习方式”者:有人修习以止为先导的观,有人修习以观为先导的止。如何呢?此处有一人,先令近行定或安止定生起,此是“止”;彼即于彼定及与彼相应诸法,以无常等而作观,此是“观”。如是,先止后观,故称“修习止先行之观”。当此人修习止先行之观时,圣道生起;彼修习、多修习此道;当彼修习、多修习此道时,诸结尽断,随眠亦皆拔尽。是名修习止先行之观。显示巴利原文
Bhāvanānayoti koci samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāveti, koci vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ. Kathaṃ? Idhekacco paṭhamaṃ upacārasamādhiṃ vā appanāsamādhiṃ vā uppādeti, ayaṃ samatho; so tañca taṃsampayutte ca dhamme aniccādīhi vipassati, ayaṃ vipassanā. Iti paṭhamaṃ samatho, pacchā vipassanā. Tena vuccati ‘‘samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvetī’’ti. Tassa samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvayato maggo sañjāyati, so taṃ maggaṃ āsevati bhāveti bahulīkaroti, tassa taṃ maggaṃ āsevato bhāvayato bahulīkaroto saṃyojanāni pahīyanti, anusayā byantīhonti, evaṃ samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāveti.
此处,有一类人并不先生起前述那种止,而直接以无常等观照五取蕴,这就是观。因他的观达到圆满,对于那里所生的诸法,以舍遣为所缘而生起心一境性,这就是止。如是,观在前,止在后。因此称为“修习观先行之止”。当他修习观先行之止时,圣道生起;他练习此道……多次修习;当他练习……随眠便得根除。显示巴利原文
Idha panekacco vuttappakāraṃ samathaṃ anuppādetvāva pañcupādānakkhandhe aniccādīhi vipassati, ayaṃ vipassanā. Tassa vipassanāpāripūriyā tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ vossaggārammaṇato uppajjati cittassa ekaggatā, ayaṃ samatho. Iti paṭhamaṃ vipassanā pacchā samatho. Tena vuccati ‘‘vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāvetī’’ti. Tassa vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāvayato maggo sañjāyati, so taṃ maggaṃ āsevati…pe… bahulīkaroti, tassa taṃ maggaṃ āsevato…pe… anusayā byantīhonti (a. ni. 4.170; paṭi. ma. 2.1), evaṃ vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāveti.
然而,无论是修习止先行之观者,还是修习观先行之止者,在出世间道的刹那,止与观皆是双运。应当如此了知此处的修习方式。显示巴利原文
Samathapubbaṅgamaṃ pana vipassanaṃ bhāvayatopi vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāvayatopi lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe samathavipassanā yuganaddhāva honti. Evamettha bhāvanānayo veditabboti.
4. 《怖畏恐惧经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Bhayabheravasuttavaṇṇanā
34 “如是我闻”——此为《怖畏恐惧经》。于此,有逐词注释:“时(atha)”是表示不中断义的词。“确实(kho)”表示决定义,即说“世尊在舍卫城安住实无间断”。“生闻(Jāṇussoṇi)”:此名并非其父母所取,而是因获得官职而得。据说所谓“生闻位”即是国师位,国王赐予他此位,故称“生闻”。“他念诵梵,故为婆罗门(Brahmaṃ aṇatīti brāhmaṇo)”,即持诵明咒者。这是对出身婆罗门的训释词说法。而圣者们因已舍弃诸恶,故也被称为婆罗门。显示巴利原文
34.Evaṃme sutanti bhayabheravasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā – athāti avicchedanatthe nipāto. Khoti avadhāraṇatthe, bhagavato sāvatthiyaṃ vihāre avicchinneyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Jāṇussoṇīti netaṃ tassa mātāpitūhi katanāmaṃ, apica kho ṭhānantarapaṭilābhaladdhaṃ. Jāṇussoṇiṭṭhānaṃ kira nāmetaṃ purohitaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ tassa raññā dinnaṃ, tasmā ‘‘jānussoṇī’’ti vuccati. Brahmaṃ aṇatīti brāhmaṇo, mante sajjhāyatīti attho. Idameva hi jātibrāhmaṇānaṃ niruttivacanaṃ. Ariyā pana bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇāti vuccanti.
于“彼世尊由此处,他便往其处”句中,“由此处”一词是以具格表处格义,因此这里应理解为:“世尊在哪里,他就去那里。”或者也可这样理解:世尊之所以为天人与世人亲近,正是因为他成就了种种殊胜功德,人们怀着证悟的意向前去亲近——恰如群鸟总是飞向常结果实的大树,怀着品尝妙果的意向一样。显示巴利原文
Yenabhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti yenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, tasmā yattha bhagavā, tattha upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya.
“他便去接近”即“他去了”。“已接近”则是表明接近行为完成。或者也可这样理解:这样去了之后,他来到更近于世尊、亦即所谓世尊近旁之处。他与世尊互相问候:就如世尊问他是否堪忍等,他也同样与世尊一同生起欢喜,恰如凉水与热水交融为一。他以这样的言语互相问候:“乔达摩尊者,您能忍耐吗?能维持吗?乔达摩尊者和乔达摩的弟子们是否无病、无疾、轻快、有力、安乐住?”由于这样的交谈能生起名为欢喜与欢悦的快乐,且适宜用来互相问候,故为“可问候的”;其义理与音节婉转动听,即使经长时间亦能忆持、能无间断地持续,因为值得如此且应当被忆念,故为“可忆念的”。因为听闻时令人愉悦,所以是“可问候的”;因为忆念时令人愉悦,所以是“可忆念的”。同样地,由于音节清净,所以是“可问候的”;由于义理清净,所以是“可忆念的”。以种种方式进行了这样既可问候又可忆念的交谈之后,他结束了它,完成了它,息止了它,为询问自己的来意而退坐一面。显示巴利原文
Upasaṅkamīti ca gatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evaṃ gato tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti. Bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodīti yathā khamanīyādīni pucchanto bhagavā tena, evaṃ sopi bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi, sītodakaṃ viya uṇhodakena sammoditaṃ ekībhāvaṃ agamāsi. Yāya ca ‘‘kacci te, bho gotama, khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci bhoto gotamassa gotamasāvakānañca appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāro’’tiādikāya kathāya sammodi, taṃ pītipāmojjasaṅkhātasammodajananato sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato ca sammodanīyaṃ, atthabyañjanamadhuratāya sucirampi kālaṃ sāretuṃ nirantaraṃ pavattetuṃ araharūpato saritabbabhāvato ca sārāṇīyaṃ. Suyyamānasukhato ca sammodanīyaṃ, anussariyamānasukhato ca sāraṇīyaṃ. Tathā byañjanaparisuddhatāya sammodanīyaṃ, atthaparisuddhatāya sāraṇīyanti evaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā pariyosāpetvā niṭṭhāpetvā yenatthena āgato, taṃ pucchitukāmo ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
“一面”:这是一个中性抽象名词的用法,如同“日月运行不齐”等句中的用法。因此,这里应这样理解:他那样坐着,便是“退坐一面”。或者,此处的“一面”是用于处格意义的业格词。“他坐”是指他走近后坐下。因为有智慧的人接近应受尊敬者后,由于善于就坐,便退坐一面,而这位也是他们中的一员,所以说他“退坐一面”。显示巴利原文
Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Tasmā yathā nisinno ekamantaṃ nisinno hoti, tathā nisīdīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Nisīdīti upāvisi. Paṇḍitā hi purisā garuṭṭhāniyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ nisīdanti, ayañca nesaṃ aññataro, tasmā ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
那么,怎样坐才称为「退坐一面」呢?即避免六种坐姿的过失。哪六种?太远、太近、上风处、高凸处、过于正对面、太落在后面。坐得太远的人,若想说话,便须高声说话。坐得太近的人,会彼此碰撞。坐在上风处的人,身体气味会熏扰他人。坐在高凸处的人,显得不恭敬。过于正对面而坐的人,若想对视,便须四目相看。坐在太后面的人,若想观望,便须伸长脖颈去看。因此,此人避免了这六种坐姿过失而坐,故说「退坐一面」。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ nisinno pana ekamantaṃ nisinno hotīti. Cha nisajjadose vajjetvā. Seyyathidaṃ, atidūraṃ accāsannaṃ uparivātaṃ unnatapadesaṃ atisammukhaṃ atipacchāti. Atidūre nisinno hi sace kathetukāmo hoti, uccāsaddena kathetabbaṃ hoti. Accāsanne nisinno saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karoti. Uparivāte nisinno sarīragandhena bādhati. Unnatappadese nisinno agāravaṃ pakāseti. Atisammukhā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, cakkhunā cakkhuṃ āhacca daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Atipacchā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayampi ete cha nisajjadose vajjetvā nisīdi, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’ti.
「那些」(Yeme):即“这些”(ye ime)。「善男子」有两种:出身善男子与德行善男子。其中,如经中所说:“那时,有位名为赖吒和罗的善男子,是土喇果帝咖地方上等家族之子”(《中部》等),如此出生于高贵家族者,称为出身善男子。又如经中所说:“他们善男子,出于信心,从在家而出家,过着无家生活”,如此不论生于何等家族,只要具足德行,即称为德行善男子。此处,由这两种因缘,他们皆可称为善男子。显示巴利原文
Yemeti ye ime. Kulaputtāti duvidhā kulaputtā jātikulaputtā ācārakulaputtā. Tattha ‘‘tena kho pana samayena raṭṭhapālo nāma kulaputto tasmiṃyeva thullakoṭṭhike aggakulassa putto’’ti (ma. ni. 2.294) evaṃ āgatā uccākulappasutā jātikulaputtā nāma. ‘‘Ye te kulaputtā saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.78) evaṃ āgatā pana yattha katthaci kule pasutāpi ācārasampannā ācārakulaputtā nāma. Idha pana dvīhipi kāraṇehi kulaputtāyeva.
「出于信心」:即依于信心。「从在家」:即从在家生活。「过着非家的生活」:即进入出家与比丘的身份。实际上,出家也称为“非家”,因为在其中没有家,即没有农耕、牧牛等在家谋生的事业。比丘也称为“无家者”,无家者的状态便是非家状态。「已出家」:即已进入。由此,以一切方式,皆说他们已进入名为非家的出家,或者已处于比丘的身份。「前导者」:即引路者,为先导、导师。「大有裨益者」:即在作利益时有大助益者。「尊贵的乔达摩是他们教导者」:这位尊贵的乔达摩,是传授、教导这些善男子增上戒等学处的人。「那众人」即指那一群人。「便随所见而行」意为:追随其见而修行,也就是说,尊贵的乔达摩有怎样的见、怎样的忍、怎样的喜好,他们也变成那样的见、那样的忍、那样的喜好。显示巴利原文
Saddhāti saddhāya. Agārasmāti agārato. Anagāriyanti pabbajjaṃ bhikkhubhāvañca. Pabbajjāpi hi natthettha agāriyanti anagāriyā, agārassa hitaṃ kasigorakkhādikammamettha natthīti attho. Bhikkhupi natthetassa agāranti anagāro, anagārassa bhāvo anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajitāti upagatā, evaṃ sabbathāpi anagāriyasaṅkhātaṃ pabbajjaṃ bhikkhubhāvaṃ vā upagatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pubbaṅgamoti purato gāmī nāyako. Bahukāroti hitakiriyāya bahūpakāro. Bhavaṃ tesaṃ gotamo samādapetāti te kulaputte bhavaṃ gotamo adhisīlādīni gāhetā sikkhāpetā. Sā janatāti so janasamūho. Diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjatīti dassanānugatiṃ paṭipajjati, yandiṭṭhiko bhavaṃ gotamo yaṃkhantiko yaṃruciko, tepi tandiṭṭhikā honti taṃkhantikā taṃrucikāti attho.
这位婆罗门为何会这样说?据说,他先前曾见到许多善男子,当他们还居于在家之时,如同天子一般安然享受五种欲乐,内外皆有妥善的守护。后来,这些善男子听闻了世尊如蜜般甘甜的教法,心生净信,从家中出离,出家之后,仅以满足衣食用具为最高目标,安住于那些林间的坐卧处。即便无人守护,他们也毫无猜疑、毫无恐惧,欢喜欣悦,身心振奋。他目睹此景,心中便如此思量:‘这些善男子得以安享此种轻利之住,是依靠了谁呢?’当他这样思索时,便认定:‘这是依靠沙门乔达摩。’由此对世尊生起了清净的信心。为了表达这份净信,他来到世尊面前,所以说了这番话。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panāyaṃ evamāhāti? Esa kira pubbe aneke kulaputte agāramajjhe vasante devaputte viya pañcahi kāmaguṇehi paricāriyamāne anto ca bahi ca susaṃvihitārakkhe disvā, te aparena samayena bhagavato madhurarasaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sutvā saddhāya gharā nikkhamma pabbajitvā ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhe āraññakesu senāsanesu kenaci arakkhiyamānepi anussaṅkitāparisaṅkite haṭṭhapahaṭṭhe udaggudagge addasa, disvā ca imesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ phāsuvihāro kaṃ nissāya uppanno’’ti cintento ‘‘samaṇaṃ gotama’’nti bhagavati pasādaṃ alattha. So taṃ pasādaṃ nivedetuṃ bhagavato santikaṃ āgato, tasmā evamāha.
于是,世尊接受并随喜他的话,说道:‘正是如此,婆罗门……’等等。此处的‘正是如此’一语,纯粹是表达接受与随喜的作用。‘为了我而……’是指以我为对象。‘出于信心’也就是信心本身。这是针对于‘不因负债,不因恐惧’等情形而说的。因为对于这类人,世尊才是前导者,对于其他人则不是。‘确实是难能可贵的’,是指难以达成、难以忍受,非少福之人所能证入,这是如此说的。‘阿兰若、山林’,即阿兰若与山林。其中,虽然在阿毗达摩中无余地说:‘出离门柱之外,这一切都是阿兰若’,但此处所指的,是能成就阿兰若支的坐卧具,正如所说的‘最后五弓尺’,应当知道就是指这个。显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā taṃ vacanaṃ sampaṭicchanto abbhanumodanto ca evametaṃ brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Vacanasampaṭicchanānumodanatthoyeva hi ettha ayaṃ evanti nipāto. Mamaṃ uddissāti maṃ uddissa. Saddhāti saddhāyeva. Na iṇaṭṭhā na bhayaṭṭātiādīni sandhāyāha. Īdisānaṃyeva hi bhagavā pubbaṅgamo, na itaresaṃ. Durabhisambhavāni hīti sambhavituṃ dukkhāni dussahāni, na sakkā appesakkhehi ajjhogāhitunti vuttaṃ hoti. Araññavanapatthānīti araññāni ca vanapatthāni ca. Tattha kiñcāpi abhidhamme nippariyāyena, ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhilā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti vuttaṃ, tathāpi yantaṃ ‘‘pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti āraññikaṅganipphādakaṃ senāsanaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva adhippetanti veditabbaṃ.
所谓‘山林’,是指越过聚落边界、无人接近之处,那里既不耕作,也不播种。经中也这样说:‘“山林”一词,是遥远坐卧处的增语;“山林”一词,是树林坐卧处的增语;“山林”一词,是令人恐惧坐卧处的增语;“山林”一词,是令人毛骨悚然坐卧处的增语;“山林”一词,是边缘坐卧处的增语;“山林”一词,是无人近处坐卧处的增语。’在这里,除了‘边缘’这一种说法之外,应当以其余的说法来理解‘山林’。‘边远的’,即处于边际、极为遥远。身远离是难以做到的。‘难以喜悦的’,是指难以安住、不快乐的。‘在独一性中’,指在独处的状态中。这表示什么呢?表示即使达成了身远离,在那样的环境中,要让心得乐安住也绝非易事,因为世间人总是喜爱相伴而行、成双成对。‘似乎夺去’,意思是仿佛夺走、仿佛吞噬。‘意’,即心。‘对于不能得定者’,指不能得到近行定或安止定的人。这表示什么呢?对于这类——显示巴利原文
Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasīyati na vapīyati. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacanaṃ, vanapatthanti vanasaṇḍānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ, vanapatthanti bhiṃsanakānametaṃ, vanapatthanti salomahaṃsānametaṃ, vanapatthanti pariyantānametaṃ, vanapatthanti na manussūpacārānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Ettha ca pariyantānanti imamekaṃ pariyāyaṃ ṭhapetvā sesapariyāyehi vanapatthāni veditabbānī. Pantānīti pariyantāni atidūrāni. Dukkaraṃ pavivekanti kāyavivekaṃ dukkaraṃ. Durabhiramanti abhiramituṃ na sukhaṃ. Ekatteti ekībhāve. Kiṃ dasseti? Kāyaviveke katepi tattha cittaṃ abhiramāpetuṃ dukkaraṃ. Dvayaṃdvayārāmo hi ayaṃ lokoti. Haranti maññeti haranti viya ghasanti viya. Manoti manaṃ. Samādhiṃ alabhamānassāti upacārasamādhiṃ vā appanāsamādhiṃ vā alabhantassa. Kiṃ dasseti? Īdisassa bhikkhuno tiṇapaṇṇamigādisaddehi vividhehi ca bhiṃsanakehi vanāni cittaṃ vikkhipanti maññeti, sabbaṃ brāhmaṇo saddhāpabbajitānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ araññavāse (vibha. 529) vimhito āha.
身业品论显示巴利原文
Kāyakammantavārakathā
35 那时,世尊以先前的方式,用“正是如此,婆罗门”等语领受并随喜了他的那些话。接着,因为在十六种情形中,那样的住所对于尚未把握所缘者确实难以安住,而对于已把握所缘者则非如此;而且自己身为菩萨之时,正是那样的已把握所缘者。因此,为了显示像自己这样的人在那种住所中的难行能行,便说道:“我也……”等。显示巴利原文
35. Athassa bhagavā purimanayeneva ‘‘evametaṃ brāhmaṇā’’tiādīhi taṃ taṃ vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā abbhanumoditvā ca yasmā soḷasasu ṭhānesu ārammaṇapariggaharahitānaṃyeva tādisāni senāsanāni durabhisambhavāni, na tesu ārammaṇapariggāhayuttānaṃ, attanā ca bodhisatto samāno tādiso ahosi, tasmā attano tādisānaṃ senāsanānaṃ durabhisambhavataṃ dassetuṃ, mayhampi khotiādimāha.
其中,“于正觉之前”:指在正觉以前,即在证得圣道以前。“未正觉者”:指未通达四谛之人。“作为菩萨而有”:指作为应证得正等正觉的有情,或作为心系菩提、执著于菩提的有情。因为从在燃灯佛世尊足下,以八法成就发愿以来,如来便心系菩提,执著于“这应当由我证得”,为证得它而持续精进、毫不懈怠,故称菩萨。“对我来说,那样的我”:指作为那样一位菩萨的我。“凡有任何沙门或婆罗门”:指出家者或自称婆罗门者。显示巴利原文
Tattha pubbeva sambodhāti sambodhato pubbeva, ariyamaggappattito aparabhāgeyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anabhisambuddhassāti appaṭividdhacatusaccassa. Bodhisattasseva satoti bujjhanakasattasseva sammāsambodhiṃ adhigantuṃ arahasattasseva sato, bodhiyā vā sattasseva laggasseva sato. Dīpaṅkarassa hi bhagavato pādamūle aṭṭhadhammasamodhānena abhinīhārasamiddhito pabhuti tathāgato bodhiyā satto laggo ‘‘pattabbā mayā esā’’ti tadadhigamāya parakkamaṃ amuñcantoyeva āgato, tasmā bodhisattoti vuccati. Tassa mayhanti tassa evaṃ bodhisattasseva sato mayhaṃ. Ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vāti ye keci pabbajjūpagatā vā bhovādino vā.
“身业不清净者”:指具备杀生等不清净身业之人。“以不清净身业的自过为因”:指以名为不清净身业的自身过失为因,即因为不清净身业之故。“确实”:是表确定义的助词。“不善”:指有罪、不安稳。“怖畏恐惧”:是心惊慌及对缘恐畏的异名。其中,怖畏因有罪过之义而称为不善,恐惧因不安稳之义应知。“喊来、招来”:指召唤、引来。如何是这样呢?那些人造作了杀生等业后,心想:“我们做了不正当的事,如果被我们冒犯的人知道了,现在必定会追来,对我们加以伤害毁灭。”于是进入森林,坐在路边或灌木丛中。他们稍闻草声或叶声,便恐惧、惊怖,以为“我们这下完了”,如同被来人包围、捆绑、杀害一般。如此,这种怖畏恐惧便以自加于身的方式“喊来、招来”。显示巴利原文
Aparisuddhakāyakammantāti aparisuddhena pāṇātipātādinā kāyakammantena samannāgatā. Aparisuddhakāyakammantasandosahetūti aparisuddhassa kāyakammantasaṅkhātassa attano dosassa hetu, aparisuddhakāyakammantakāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Haveti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Akusalanti sāvajjaṃ akkhemañca. Bhayabheravanti bhayañca bheravañca. Cittutrāsassa ca bhayānakārammaṇassa cetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tatra bhayaṃ sāvajjaṭṭhena akusalaṃ, bheravaṃ akkhemaṭṭhenāti veditabbaṃ. Avhāyantīti pakkosanti. Kathaṃ? Te hi pāṇātipātādīni katvā ‘‘mayaṃ ayuttamakamhā, sace no te jāneyyuṃ, yesaṃ aparajjhimhā, idāni anubandhitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādeyyu’’nti araññaṃ pavisitvā gacchantare vā gumbantare vā nisīdanti. Te ‘‘appamattakampi tiṇasaddaṃ vā paṇṇasaddaṃ vā sutvā, idānimhā naṭṭhā’’ti tasanti vittasanti, āgantvā parehi parivāritā viya baddhā vadhitā viya ca honti. Evaṃ taṃ bhayabheravaṃ attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti pakkosanti.
“Nakho panāhaṃ…pe… paṭisevāmi”的意思是:我确实不会以不清净的身业,去受用那些阿兰若、山林、边远的坐卧处。“ye hi vo”中的“vo”只是助词。“ariyā”指的是诸佛与佛弟子。“parisuddhakāyakammantā”指成为身业清净的人。“tesamahaṃ aññataro”是说我也是他们中的一员,因为菩萨无论在家还是出家,身业都是清净的。“bhiyyo”是表示增上义的助词。“pallomaṃ”指已除慢的状态,即安稳、吉祥。“āpādiṃ”意为获得,我获得了增上的安稳,或者说以超越的方式获得了安稳。“araññe vihārāya”意思是为了在阿兰若中居住。显示巴利原文
Nakho panāhaṃ…pe… paṭisevāmīti ahaṃ kho pana aparisuddhakāyakammanto hutvā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni na paṭisevāmi. Ye hi voti ettha voti nipātamattaṃ. Ariyā vuccanti buddhā ca buddhasāvakā ca. Parisuddhakāyakammantāti īdisā hutvā. Tesamahaṃ aññataroti tesaṃ ahampi eko aññataro. Bodhisatto hi gahaṭṭhopi pabbajitopi parisuddhakāyakammantova hoti. Bhiyyoti atirekatthe nipāto. Pallomanti pannalomataṃ, khemaṃ sotthibhāvanti attho. Āpādinti āpajjiṃ, atirekaṃ sotthibhāvaṃ atirekena vā sotthibhāvamāpajjinti vuttaṃ hoti. Araññe vihārāyāti araññe vihāratthāya.
语业品等之注释显示巴利原文
Vacīkammantavārādivaṇṇanā
36 这一解释方法适用于所有处所,此处差别在于:在语业的部分,“语业不清净者”是指那些具足妄语等不清净语业的人。他们如何招致怖畏与恐惧呢?他们以妄语破坏他人利益,以离间语离间朋友,以粗恶语在大众中刺伤他人痛处,以无意义的闲话毁坏其他众生的生计后,心想:“我们做了不该做的事,倘若被我们冒犯的那些人知道了,现在一定会追来,令我们遭殃、毁灭。”于是他们进入森林,坐在道路中央或灌木丛中。只要听到一点草动叶响,便恐惧、惊怖,心想:“现在我们完了”,如同被来人包围、被捆绑、被杀害一般。就这样,那种怖畏恐惧便以“加诸自身”的方式被招来、被唤来。显示巴利原文
36. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ayaṃ pana viseso, vacīkammantavāre tāva aparisuddhavacīkammantāti aparisuddhena musāvādādinā vacīkammantena samannāgatā. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te musāvādena parassa atthaṃ bhañjitvā, pisuṇavācāya mittabhedaṃ katvā pharusavācāya paresaṃ parisamajjhe mammāni tuditvā niratthakavācāya parasattānaṃ kammante nāsetvā ‘‘mayaṃ ayuttamakamhā, sace no te jāneyyuṃ, yesaṃ aparajjhimhā, idāni anubandhitvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpeyyu’’nti araññaṃ pavisitvā gacchantare vā gumbantare vā nisīdanti. Te ‘‘appamattakampi tiṇasaddaṃ vā paṇṇasaddaṃ vā sutvā idānimhā naṭṭhā’’ti tasanti vittasanti āgantvā parehi parivāritā viya baddhā vadhitā viya ca honti. Evaṃ taṃ bhayabheravaṃ attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti, pakkosanti.
在意业的部分,“意业不清净者”是指那些具足贪欲等不清净意业的人。他们如何招致怖畏与恐惧呢?他们对他人守护、保护的财物生起贪欲与不正贪着;对他人心生嗔怒;令其他众生执取邪见之后,心想:“我们做了不该做的事……”……便以“加诸自身”的方式招来、唤来了怖畏恐惧。显示巴利原文
Manokammantavāre aparisuddhamanokammantāti aparisuddhena abhijjhādinā manokammantena samannāgatā. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesu bhaṇḍesu abhijjhāvisamalobhaṃ uppādetvā parassa kujjhitvā parasatte micchādassanaṃ gāhāpetvā mayaṃ ayuttamakamhā…pe… attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti pakkosanti.
就活命而言,“命不清净者”是指以行医、充当信使、从事劳务等二十一种邪命方式,过着不清净活命的人。他们如何招来怖畏恐惧呢?他们如此谋取生活资具后,听说:“那些精通三藏、致力于净化教法的比丘们,为了净化教法已经出发,今天或明天就会来到这里。”于是他们进入森林,坐在道路中间……(中略)……心生恐惧、惊怖,如同被来人包围、捉住,并被穿上白衣一般。其余解释与前相同。显示巴利原文
Ājīvavāre aparisuddhājīvāti aparisuddhena vejjakammadūtakammavaḍḍhipayogādinā ekavīsatianesanabhedena ājīvena samannāgatā. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te evaṃ jīvikaṃ kappetvā suṇanti – ‘‘sāsanasodhakā kira tepiṭakā bhikkhū sāsanaṃ sodhetuṃ nikkhantā, ajja vā sve vā idhāgamissantī’’ti araññaṃ pavisitvā gacchantare vā…pe… tasanti vittasanti. Te hi āgantvā parivāretvā gahitā viya odātavatthanivāsitā viya ca hontīti. Sesaṃ tādisameva.
37 37. 自此以下,“有贪欲者”等说法,虽然贪欲和嗔恚已摄于意业之中,但应知此处是为从盖的角度再次宣说。其中,“有贪欲者”指习惯于贪求他人财物等之人。“于诸欲有强盛染着者”指对所缘欲有厚重烦恼染着之人。他们如何招来怖畏恐惧呢?他们的所缘不固定。这些所缘不固定者住在森林中时,日间所见之物,夜间便化作怖畏恐惧显现——他们内心混乱,因细微之事便恐惧惊怖;见绳或藤,以为蛇;见树桩,以为夜叉;见高地或山,以为大象;如同被蛇等所伤害、所毁灭一般。其余释同前。显示巴利原文
37. Ito paraṃ abhijjhālūtiādīsu kiñcāpi abhijjhābyāpādā manokammantena saṅgahitā tathāpi nīvaraṇavasena puna vuttāti veditabbā. Tattha abhijjhālūti parabhaṇḍādiabhijjhāyanasīlā. Kāmesu tibbasārāgāti vatthukāmesu bahalakilesarāgā, te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te avavatthitārammaṇā honti, tesaṃ avavatthitārammaṇānaṃ araññe viharantānaṃ divā diṭṭhaṃ rattiṃ bhayabheravaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti – ‘‘te ākulacittā appamattakenapi tasanti vittasanti, rajjuṃ vā lataṃ vā disvā sappasaññino honti, khāṇuṃ disvā yakkhasaññino, thalaṃ vā pabbataṃ vā disvā hatthisaññino sappādīhi anayabyasanaṃ āpāditā viya hontī’’ti. Sesaṃ tādisameva.
38 38. “心败坏者”:因舍离正常状态而心败坏。随烦恼之心即舍弃正常状态,如同陈旧的饭菜般腐坏。“邪恶心思惟者”:指邪恶的心思惟,即具足不善、能损害他人的心思惟。他们如何招来怖畏恐惧?此后,怖畏恐惧的招来方式,应按“有贪欲者”部分所述方式理解。若有不同之处,将在彼处说明。而“但我确实不是心败坏者”这句,则显示:“我是心怀慈爱者、心怀利益者。”因为菩萨正是如此。如是,于一切处,应从所说诸过的对治一面,赞叹菩萨的功德。显示巴利原文
38.Byāpannacittāti pakatibhāvavijahanena vipannacittā. Kilesānugatañhi cittaṃ pakatibhāvaṃ vijahati, purāṇabhattabyañjanaṃ viya pūtikaṃ hoti. Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappāti paduṭṭhacittasaṅkappā, abhadrakena paresaṃ anatthajanakena cittasaṅkappena samannāgatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Bhayabheravāvhāyanaṃ ito pabhuti abhijjhāluvāre vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Yattha pana viseso bhavissati, tattha vakkhāma. Na kho panāhaṃ byāpannacittoti ettha pana mettacitto ahaṃ hitacittoti dasseti, īdisā hi bodhisattā honti. Evaṃ sabbattha vuttadosapaṭipakkhavasena bodhisattassa guṇā vaṇṇetabbā.
39 “被昏沉睡眠缠缚者”:意为被称为“昏沉”的心之病态,以及名为“睡眠”的身之病态所缠缚、所制伏、所攫取。这类人常耽于睡眠。显示巴利原文
39.Thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitāti cittagelaññabhūtena thinena sesanāmakāyagelaññabhūtena middhena ca pariyuṭṭhitā, abhibhūtā gahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Te niddābahulā honti.
40 “掉举者”:指本性掉举、内心躁动不安的人。由于掉举,心在单一所缘上摇摆不定,犹如旗杆上的旗帜被风吹动。“心未寂止者”:指心未得寂静者,此处可取懊悔之义。显示巴利原文
40.Uddhatāti uddhaccapakatikā vipphandamānacittā, uddhaccena hi ekārammaṇe cittaṃ vipphandati dhajayaṭṭhiyaṃ vātena paṭākā viya. Avūpasantacittāti anibbutacittā, idha kukkuccaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
41 “疑惑者、犹豫者”:此即第五盖。由于对所缘生起“这究竟是什么?”的疑惑,故称为“疑”;由于无法决断“就是这个”,故称为“犹豫”。具足此盖的沙门、婆罗门,即称为“疑惑者、犹豫者”。显示巴利原文
41.Kaṅkhī vicikicchīti ettha ekamevidaṃ pañcamaṃ nīvaraṇaṃ. Kiṃ nu kho idanti ārammaṇaṃ kaṅkhanato kaṅkhā, idamevidanti nicchetuṃ asamatthabhāvato vicikicchāti vuccati, tena samannāgatā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ‘‘kaṅkhī vicikicchī’’ti vuttā.
42 「自赞毁他者」:指那些抬高自己、高举自己,将自己放在高处,同时又贬低他人、责备他人、诽谤他人,将他人置于低处的人。这是对他们的称呼。他们如何招来怖畏恐惧呢?他们遭他人追赶:‘听说某某和某某抬高自己,责备我们,把我们当奴隶一样对待。抓住他们!’于是他们逃跑,进入森林,或坐在道路中间、灌木丛中。此当如身业部分那样详细展开。显示巴利原文
42.Attukkaṃsanakā paravambhīti ye attānaṃ ukkaṃsenti ukkhipanti, ucce ṭhāne ṭhapenti, parañca vambhenti garahanti nindanti, nīce ṭhāne ṭhapenti, tesametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te parehi ‘‘asuko ca kira asuko ca attānaṃ ukkaṃsenti, amhe garahanti, dāse viya karonti, gaṇhatha ne’’ti anubaddhā palāyitvā araññaṃ pavisitvā gacchantare vā gumbantare vāti kāyakammantasadisaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
43 「畏惧者」:指具足令身体僵硬、毛发竖立之畏惧的人。「胆怯种类者」:指本性胆怯者,即如村童般多恐惧、不勇敢、怯懦之人。显示巴利原文
43.Chambhīti kāyathambhanalomahaṃsanakarena thambhena samannāgatā. Bhīrukajātikāti bhīrukapakatikā, gāmadārakā viya bhayabahulā asūrā kātarāti vuttaṃ hoti.
44 「利养、恭敬、名声」:在此,能获得的东西称为‘利养’,这是对四种资具的称呼。‘恭敬’即美好的行为,是指将资具准备得格外精致、美妙而作供养;也包括他人对自己表示的尊重,或以花等进行的供奉。‘名声’是指称扬赞叹的话语。利养、恭敬和名声合称为‘利养恭敬名声’。‘欲求者’:指渴望得到这些东西的人。关于他们如何招来怖畏恐惧,其解释与贪欲部分类似。然而,为了阐明其中的含义,这里要讲一个‘可爱村者’的故事——显示巴利原文
44.Lābhasakkārasilokanti ettha labbhatīti lābho, catunnaṃ paccayānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sakkāroti sundarakāro, paccayā eva hi paṇītapaṇītā sundarasundarā ca abhisaṅkharitvā katā sakkārāti vuccanti. Yā ca parehi attano gāravakiriyā pupphādīhi vā pūjā. Silokoti vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ etaṃ , lābhañca sakkārañca silokañca lābhasakkārasilokaṃ. Nikāmayamānāti patthayamānā. Bhayabheravāvhāyanaṃ abhijjhāluvārasadisameva. Tadatthadīpakaṃ panettha piyagāmikavatthuṃ kathenti –
据说,有一位名叫“可爱村者”的比丘,看到那些受持头陀支的比丘们得到利养,便心想:“我也受持头陀支,这样来获取利养。”于是他受持了冢间住支,住在坟场。一天,一头干完活计的老牛白日里在放牧地觅食,夜晚来到那座坟场,把头枕在一片花丛中,站着反刍。可爱村者夜里出来经行,听到牛反刍时下巴发出的声响,心想:“这必是哪位天王知道我贪图利养才住在坟场,特地来折磨我!”于是走到那头老牛面前,双手合十,礼拜乞求道:“善士,天王啊!今晚这一夜,请您容恕我!从明天起,我再也不这样做了!”他就这样整夜在那里乞求。待到日出,看清那不过是头牛,便用棍杖把它打跑,口中说着:“你竟然吓了我一整夜!”显示巴利原文
Eko kira piyagāmiko nāma bhikkhu samādinnadhutaṅgānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ lābhaṃ disvā ‘‘ahampi dhutaṅgaṃ samādiyitvā lābhaṃ uppādemī’’ti cintetvā sosānikaṅgaṃ samādāya susāne vasati. Athekadivasaṃ eko kammamutto jaraggavo divā gocare caritvā rattiṃ tasmiṃ susāne pupphagumbe sīsaṃ katvā romanthayamāno aṭṭhāsi. Piyagāmiko rattiṃ caṅkamanā nikkhanto tassa hanusaddaṃ sutvā cintesi ‘‘addhā maṃ lābhagiddho esa susāne vasatīti ñatvā devarājā viheṭhetuṃ āgato’’ti, so jaraggavassa purato añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘sappurisa devarāja ajja me ekarattiṃ khama, sve paṭṭhāya na evaṃ karissāmī’’ti namassamāno sabbarattiṃ yācanto aṭṭhāsi. Tato sūriye uṭṭhite taṃ disvā kattarayaṭṭhiyā paharitvā palāpesi ‘‘sabbarattiṃ maṃ bhiṃsāpesī’’ti.
45 “懈怠者”:指被懒惰所支配的人。“精进下劣者”:指精进低劣、缺乏精进、远离精进的人,也就是说他们没有精进。其中,懈怠者缺乏的是身体上的精进努力,精进下劣者缺乏的是心理上的精进努力。他们连对所缘进行最基本的一点确定都做不到。至于他们“所缘未确定”等的后续描述,均与前文相同。显示巴利原文
45.Kusītāti kosajjānugatā. Hīnavīriyāti hīnā vīriyena virahitā viyuttā, nibbīriyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kusītā kāyikavīriyārambhavirahitā honti, hīnavīriyā cetasikavīriyārambhavirahitā. Te ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkonti. Tesaṃ avavatthitārammaṇānanti sabbaṃ pubbasadisameva.
46 “失念者”:指已失去正念的人。“不正知者”:指缺乏智慧的人。与此相反,有“我住于念现前”的说法,因此这本质上属于正念范畴的问题。然而,这里提到智慧,是为了说明他们的念十分羸弱。因为念有两种:与智慧相应的,和与智慧不相应的。其中,与智慧相应的念强而有力,不相应的念则羸弱。所以,即便他们有时有正念,但由于没有正知,依然是失念者,因为那羸弱的念根本无法执行念本身应有的作用。为了揭示这层含义,才说他们是“不正知者”。这些如此失念、不正知的人,连对所缘进行最基本的一点确定都做不到,其余的一切描述均与前文相同。显示巴利原文
46.Muṭṭhassatīti naṭṭhassatī. Asampajānāti paññārahitā, imassa ca paṭipakkhe ‘‘upaṭṭhitassatīhamasmī’’ti vacanato satibhājaniyamevetaṃ. Paññā panettha satidubbalyadīpanatthaṃ vuttā. Duvidhā hi sati paññāsampayuttā paññāvippayuttā ca. Tattha paññāsampayuttā balavatī, vippayuttā dubbalā, tasmā yadāpi tesaṃ sati hoti, tadāpi asampajānantā muṭṭhassatīyeva te, dubbalāya satiyā satikiccābhāvatoti etamatthaṃ dīpetuṃ ‘‘asampajānā’’ti vuttaṃ. Te evaṃ muṭṭhassatī asampajānā ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkontīti sabbaṃ pubbasadisameva.
47 「无定者」:指缺乏近行定与安止定者。
「散乱心者」:指心迷乱、飘忽不定者。
由于缺乏定力,掉举得以乘隙而入,令这些无定者的心在各种所缘之间游荡不定,犹如林中的猿猴在枝桠间跳窜;他们也因掉举而在单一所缘上躁动不安。
如前所述,这些无定、散乱心之人,连对所缘进行最基本的一点确定都做不到;其后一切与前述无异。显示巴利原文
47.Asamāhitāti upacārappanāsamādhivirahitā. Vibbhantacittāti ubbhantacittā. Samādhivirahena laddhokāsena uddhaccena tesaṃ samādhivirahānaṃ cittaṃ nānārammaṇesu paribbhamati, vanamakkaṭo viya vanasākhāsu uddhaccena ekārammaṇe vipphandati. Pubbe vuttanayenena te evaṃ asamāhitā vibbhantacittā ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkontīti sabbaṃ pubbasadisameva.
48 「劣慧者」:这是对无智慧者的一种称谓。然而,所谓的“坏的智慧”其实并不存在。
「eḷamūgā」(偻摩伽)即是「elamukhā」(偻摩诃,意为流涎口),只是将 kha 音转成了 ga。其意思是“流着口水的嘴”。实际上,智慧低劣的人说话时,口水会从口中流出,而口水就叫作「elā」。正如经典中所说:“看见流涎的蛇,有双舌者。”因此,这些人被称为「eḷamūgā」。也有读作「elamukhā」的版本;有些人读作「elamugā」,另一些人读作「elamukā」——无论哪种读法,意思都是“流涎口”。
那么,这些人是如何“引召”怖畏恐惧的呢?这些劣慧、流涎口的人,连对所缘进行最基本的一点确定都做不到。对于这些无法确定所缘的人,当他们居住在林中时,白天看到的各种事物,到了夜晚便会成为怖畏恐惧的源头显现出来。他们的心混乱不安,因些许小事便感到惊慌恐惧。看到绳子或藤蔓,就以为是蛇;看到树桩,就以为是夜叉;看到旱地或山,就以为是大象;……显示巴利原文
48.Duppaññāti nippaññānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paññā pana duṭṭhā nāma natthi. Eḷamūgāti elamukhā, kha-kārassa ga-kāro kato. Lālamukhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Duppaññānañhi kathentānaṃ lālā mukhato galati, lālā ca elāti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘passelamūgaṃ uragaṃ dujjivha’’nti. Tasmā te ‘‘eḷamūgā’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Elamukhā’’tipi pāṭho. ‘‘Elamugā’’ti keci paṭhanti, apare ‘‘elamukā’’tipi, sabbattha ‘‘elamukhā’’ti attho. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te duppaññā eḷamūgā ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkonti. Tesaṃ avavatthitārammaṇānaṃ araññe viharantānaṃ divā diṭṭhaṃ rattiṃ bhayabheravaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti ‘‘te ākulacittā appamattakenapi tasanti vittasanti, rajjuṃ vā lataṃ vā disvā sappasaññino honti, khāṇuṃ disvā yakkhasaññino, thalaṃ vā pabbataṃ vā disvā hatthisaññino sappādīhi anayavyasanaṃ āpāditā viya hontī’’ti. Evaṃ taṃ bhayabheravaṃ attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti pakkosanti. Paññāsampannohamasmīti ettha paññāsampannoti paññāya sampanno samannāgato, no ca kho vipassanāpaññāya, na maggapaññāya, apica kho pana imesu soḷasasu ṭhānesu ārammaṇavavatthānapaññāyāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayamevāti.
关于怖畏恐惧与坐卧具(住所)等的解释。显示巴利原文
Bhayabheravasenāsanādivaṇṇanā
49 「于我」(tassamayhaṁ)与前文是如何连接的呢?
据说,菩萨在摄持这十六种所缘时,并未见到怖畏恐惧,于是他想:“怖畏恐惧,据说会在这样的夜晚和这样的住所中出现,那么,我就在那里寻找它吧。”这样,他便开始了对怖畏恐惧的追寻。
现在,世尊为了向婆罗门说明这个意思,便宣说了“于我”等开示。显示巴利原文
49.Tassamayhanti ko anusandhi? Bodhisatto kira imāni soḷasārammaṇāni pariggaṇhanto ca bhayabheravaṃ adisvā bhayabheravaṃ nāma evarūpāsu rattīsu evarūpe senāsane ca paññāyati, handa naṃ tatthāpi gavesissāmīti bhayabheravagavesanamakāsi, etamatthaṃ bhagavā idāni brāhmaṇassa dassento tassa mayhantiādimāha.
此处,“yā”与“tā”这两个词,都是对诸夜晚的总说与细说。在“Abhiññātā”(善知)中,“abhi”是表示特征的前缀。因此,“善知”应理解为:通过月圆、月缺等特征而被识知的日子。至于“Abhilakkhitā”(特相),仅是多了一个前缀,所以“特相”的意思就是“应被特征化的”,也就是为了布萨、闻法、供养、礼敬等目的,而应被标记、觉察的特定日子。显示巴利原文
Tattha yā tāti ubhayametaṃ rattīnaṃyeva uddesaniddesavacanaṃ. Abhiññātāti ettha abhīti lakkhaṇatthe upasaggo. Tasmā abhiññātāti candapāripūriyā candaparikkhayenāti evamādīhi lakkhaṇehi ñātāti veditabbā. Abhilakkhitāti ettha upasaggamattameva, tasmā abhilakkhitāti lakkhaṇīyā icceva attho, uposathasamādānadhammassavanapūjāsakkārādikaraṇatthaṃ lakkhetabbā sallakkhetabbā upalakkhetabbāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“十四日”(cātuddasī)指从半个月的第一天起算,到第十四日圆满的那一整夜。同样,“十五日”(pañcadasī)与“八日”(aṭṭhamī)也是如此。“半月”(pakkhassa)指的是白半月与黑半月。这三者各出现两次,故共有六个夜晚。因此,一切处都应结合“半月”来理解,即“半月的第十四夜”“半月的第十五夜”与“半月的第八夜”。那么,为何不纳入第五日呢?因为它并非于一切时皆有。据说,在佛陀世尊尚未出现,或虽出现但未般涅槃时,第五日并未被特别标示。世尊般涅槃后,结集法的长老们心想:“如今听闻正法的机会变得稀少了。”于是他们商议认可,将第五日立为闻法之日。从此以后,它才被特相标示出来。正因为它并非于一切时皆有,所以此处未将其纳入。显示巴利原文
Cātuddasīti pakkhassa paṭhamadivasato pabhuti catuddasannaṃ pūraṇī ekā ratti. Evaṃ pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca. Pakkhassāti sukkapakkhassa kaṇhapakkhassa ca. Etā tisso tisso katvā cha rattiyo, tasmā sabbattha pakkhavacanaṃ yojetabbaṃ ‘‘pakkhassa cātuddasī pakkhassa pañcadasī pakkhassa aṭṭhamī’’ti. Atha pañcamī kasmā na gahitāti? Asabbakālikattā. Buddhe kira bhagavati anuppannepi uppajjitvā aparinibbutepi pañcamī anabhilakkhitāyeva, parinibbute pana dhammasaṅgāhakattherā cintesuṃ ‘‘dhammassavanaṃ cirena hotī’’ti. Tato sammannitvā pañcamīti dhammassavanadivasaṃ ṭhapesuṃ, tato pabhuti sā abhilakkhitā jātā, evaṃ asabbakālikattā ettha na gahitāti.
“那样的地方”(Tathārūpāsu)是指那些种类的处所。“园庙”(Ārāmacetiyāni)是指花苑、果苑等园林本身,它们即为园庙。称之为“庙”,是因为它们受恭敬对待,也就是应受供养的意思。“林庙”(Vanacetiyāni)是指像祀献林、丛莽林、秀林、天造娑罗林等树林本身,它们即为林庙。“树庙”(Rukkhacetiyāni)是指在村庄、城镇等入口处应受供养的树木,它们本身即为树庙。因为世人认为这些园林、树林与树木中有天神居住,或将其想象为天神,从而恭敬供养,所以它们全都被称为“庙”。“可怖畏的”(Bhiṃsanakāni)是指能引发恐惧的,无论见到还是听闻,都会产生恐惧。“毛发竖立的”(Salomahaṃsāni)是指令毛发竖立的状态,一旦进入那样的环境,毛发便会竖立。“我或许能见到”(Appe va nāma passeyyanti)意思是:我或许真能见到那样的怖畏恐惧。“在后来的时候”(Aparena samayena)是指从“我这样想”之后的某个时候。显示巴利原文
Tathārūpāsūti tathāvidhāsu. Ārāmacetiyānīti pupphārāmaphalārāmādayo ārāmā eva ārāmacetiyāni. Cittīkataṭṭhena hi cetiyānīti vuccanti, pūjanīyaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vanacetiyānīti baliharaṇavanasaṇḍasubhagavanadevasālavanādīni vanāniyeva vanacetiyāni. Rukkhacetiyānīti gāmanigamādidvāresu pūjanīyarukkhāyeva rukkhacetiyāni. Lokiyā hi dibbādhivatthāti vā maññamānā tesuyeva vā dibbasaññino hutvā ārāmavanarukkhe cittīkaronti , pūjenti, tena te sabbepi cetiyānīti vuccanti. Bhiṃsanakānīti bhayajanakāni, passatopi suṇatopi bhayaṃ janenti. Salomahaṃsānīti saheva lomahaṃsena vattanti, pavisamānasseva lomahaṃsajananato. Appeva nāma passeyyanti api nāma taṃ bhayabheravaṃ passeyyameva. Aparena samayenāti, ‘‘etadahosi yaṃnūnāha’’nti evaṃ cintitakālato paṭṭhāya aññena kālena.
其中,“婆罗门,我住于彼处”是指在那样一类住所之中:那是夜叉、罗刹、毕舍遮等众生的栖身之处,是众人祈愿、献祭、供养的对象;地面上洒落着花、香、肉、血、油脂、脾、肺以及酒等污物,湿漉漉地遍布一地,就像被一股脑倾泻下来一般。即便是大白天看到,也会令人觉得心脏仿佛要崩裂。正是对这样的地方,才说“婆罗门,我住于彼处”。“有兽前来”指的是诸如鹿、羚、犀牛、豹、猪等野兽用角顶或用蹄踢地到来;实际上,这里将所有四足众生都称为“兽”。在有些地方,黑色的豺也被称作兽。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Tattha ca me brāhmaṇa viharatoti tathārūpesu senāsanesu yaṃ yaṃ manussānaṃ āyācanaupahārakaraṇārahaṃ yakkhaṭṭhānaṃ pupphadhūpamaṃsaruhiravasāmedapihakapapphāsasurāmerayādīhi okiṇṇakilinnadharaṇitalaṃ ekanipātaṃ viya yakkharakkhasapisācānaṃ, yaṃ divāpi passantānaṃ hadayaṃ maññe phalati, taṃ ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tattha ca me, brāhmaṇa, viharato’’ti. Mago vā āgacchatīti siṅgāni vā khurāni vā koṭṭento gokaṇṇakhaggadīpivarāhādibhedo mago vā āgacchati, sabbacatuppadānañhi idha magoti nāmaṃ. Katthaci pana kāḷasiṅgālopi vuccati. Yathāha –
“你身躯雄壮如牛王,你舒展姿态似雄狮;
兽王啊,我向你致敬,愿我们能有所获益。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Usabhasseva te khandho, sīhasseva vijambhitaṃ; Magarāja namo tyatthu, api kiñci labhāmase’’ti. (jā. 1.3.133);
「或孔雀击落干木」(moro vā kaṭṭhaṃ pātetī)的意思是:孔雀将干木从树上摇落,使它掉下来。此处以“孔雀”一词总摄一切飞禽,所以这是指任何飞禽。又或者,“孔雀”后的“或”(vā)字,表示或者是其他任何飞禽。这一道理同样适用于前文“或走兽”的情形。「或风吹动落叶堆」(vāto vā paṇṇakasaṭaṃ eretī)意思是:风吹动并扬起落叶碎屑。「那定然是来了怖畏恐惧」(etaṃ nūna taṃ bhayabheravaṃ āgacchatī):意即这正在来临的,必定就是那怖畏恐惧。从此以后,应当知道“怖畏恐惧”指的就是所缘。因为怖畏恐惧既是微细怖畏的所缘,也是强烈怖畏的所缘,就好像以乐为所缘的色相被当作乐本身一样。「我为何偏偏唯盼恐怖而住呢?」(kiṃ nu kho ahaṃ aññadatthu bhayapaṭikaṅkhī viharāmī):我究竟由于什么原因,纯粹地期盼恐怖、渴望恐怖而安住呢?显示巴利原文
Moro vā kaṭṭhaṃ pātetīti moro vā sukkhakaṭṭhaṃ rukkhato cāletvā pāteti. Moraggahaṇena ca idha sabbapakkhiggahaṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, tena yo koci pakkhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā moro vāti vā saddena añño vā koci pakkhīti. Esa nayo purime magaggahaṇepi. Vāto vā paṇṇakasaṭaṃ eretīti vāto vā paṇṇakacavaraṃ ghaṭṭeti. Etaṃ nūna taṃ bhayabheravaṃ āgacchatīti yametaṃ āgacchati, taṃ bhayabheravaṃ nūnāti. Ito pabhuti ca ārammaṇameva bhayabheravanti veditabbaṃ. Parittassa ca adhimattassa ca bhayassa ārammaṇattā sukhārammaṇaṃ rūpaṃ sukhamiva. Kiṃ nu kho ahaṃ aññadatthu bhayapaṭikaṅkhī viharāmīti ahaṃ kho kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ekaṃseneva bhayaṃ ākaṅkhamāno icchamāno hutvā viharāmi.
“如实,对于如实地”(yathābhūtaṃ yathābhūtassā)意思是:对于随某种威仪而存在、已存在、正存在、正在持续,或已具足此威仪者。“于我面前”(me)即在我附近。“如是如实,或如实者”(tathābhūtaṃ tathābhūto vā)意思是:依那样的威仪而存在、已存在、正存在、正在持续,或已具足彼威仪者。所谓“我确实……遮止”(so kho ahaṃ…pe… paṭivinemī):据说,当菩萨正在经行时,遇到鹿角声、蹄声等所缘——也就是怖畏恐惧之相——大士既不站立,也不坐下,也不躺卧,而是在经行当中审察、拣择,不见怖畏恐惧,那只不过是鹿角声、蹄声等而已。他知道了:“这只是这个名称,并非怖畏恐惧”,于是从那里,他或者站立,或者坐下,或者躺卧。为了显示这一意义,故说“我确实……”等语。这一理则适用于所有省略和重复之处。而且应当知道,从此以后,所说的诸威仪并非按威仪的先后顺序,而是依邻近的顺序来谈的:因为当怖畏恐惧出现时,正在经行者不站立、不坐下、不躺卧;对于站立者,出现怖畏恐惧时,他也不经行。显示巴利原文
Yathābhūtaṃ yathābhūtassāti yena yena iriyāpathena bhūtassa bhavitassa sato vattamānassa samaṅgībhūtassa vā. Meti mama santike. Tathābhūtaṃ tathābhūto vāti tena teneva iriyāpathena bhūto bhavito santo vattamāno samaṅgībhūto vāti attho. So kho ahaṃ…pe… paṭivinemīti bodhisattassa kira caṅkamantassa tasmiṃ magasiṅgakhurasaddādibhede bhayabheravārammaṇe āgate neva mahāsatto tiṭṭhati, na nisīdati na sayati, atha kho caṅkamantova parivīmaṃsanto parivicinanto bhayabheravaṃ na passati, magasiṅgakhurasaddādimattameva cetaṃ hoti, so taṃ ñatvā idaṃ nāmetaṃ, na bhayabheravanti tato tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vā sayati vā. Etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘so kho aha’’ntiādimāha. Esa nayo sabbapeyyālesu. Ito parañca iriyāpathapaṭipāṭiyā avatvā āsannapaṭipāṭiyā iriyāpathā vuttāti veditabbā, caṅkamantassa hi bhayabherave āgate na ṭhito na nisinno na nipanno ṭhitassāpi āgate na caṅkamīti evaṃ tassa āsannapaṭipāṭiyā vuttāti.
《无迷乱住注释》显示巴利原文
Asammohavihāravaṇṇanā
50 50. 如此,在那些令人怖畏之处显示了自身无有怖畏恐惧之后,现在,为了显示在禅修者易生迷惑之处,自己安住于无迷惑的状态,于是说道:“然而,婆罗门,有……”(santi kho pana, brāhmaṇā)等语。显示巴利原文
50. Evaṃ bhiṃsanakesupi ṭhānesu attano bhayabheravābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni jhāyīnaṃ sammohaṭṭhānesu attano asammohavihāraṃ dassetuṃ santi kho pana, brāhmaṇātiādimāha.
这里所说的“有”,是指存在、可得、能被找到。“对实为夜间,却想为白天”:意思是实际是夜间,却把它认作“这是白天”。“对实为白天,却想为夜间”:意思是实际是白天,却把它认作“这是夜间”。为什么这些人会有这样的想法?要么是因为缺乏出定的善巧,要么是因为鸟的叫声。怎么理解呢?这里有一个人证得了白遍,他白天做遍的准备、白天入定,并且生起这样的作意——“我要在白天出定”,但他不善巧于把握时间的长短。结果他超过了白天,在夜晚时分出定。由于白遍遍满所呈现的相,是清明、光亮、非常明显的。再加上他在入定时提起了“我要在白天出定”的作意,以及白遍遍满所带来的清明、光亮之相,他就把实际是夜间的状态,想成了白天。另外还有一种情况:有人证得了青遍,晚上做遍的准备、晚上入定,并生起“我要在晚上出定”的作意,但他也不善巧于把握时间。结果他超过了夜间,显示巴利原文
Tattha santīti atthi saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti. Rattiṃyeva samānanti rattiṃyeva santaṃ, divāti sañjānantīti ‘‘divaso aya’’nti sañjānanti. Divāyeva samānanti divasaṃyeva santaṃ. Rattīti sañjānantīti ‘‘ratti aya’’nti sañjānanti. Kasmā panete evaṃsaññino hontīti. Vuṭṭhānakosallābhāvato vā sakuṇarutato vā. Kathaṃ? Idhekacco odātakasiṇalābhī divā parikammaṃ katvā divā samāpanno divāyeva vuṭṭhahāmīti manasikāraṃ uppādeti, no ca kho addhānaparicchede kusalo hoti. So divasaṃ atikkamitvā rattibhāge vuṭṭhāti. Odātakasiṇapharaṇavasena cassa visadaṃ hoti vibhūtaṃ suvibhūtaṃ. So, divā vuṭṭhahāmīti uppāditamanasikāratāya odātakasiṇapharaṇavisadavibhūtatāya ca rattiṃyeva samānaṃ divāti sañjānāti. Idha panekacco nīlakasiṇalābhī rattiṃ parikammaṃ katvā rattiṃ samāpanno rattiṃyeva vuṭṭhahāmīti manasikāraṃ uppādeti, no ca kho addhānaparicchede kusalo hoti. So rattiṃ atikkamitvā divasabhāge vuṭṭhāti. Nīlakasiṇapharaṇavasena cassa avisadaṃ hoti avibhūtaṃ. So rattiṃ vuṭṭhahāmīti uppāditamanasikāratāya nīlakasiṇapharaṇāvisadāvibhūtatāya ca divāyeva samānaṃ rattīti sañjānāti. Evaṃ tāva vuṭṭhānakosallābhāvato evaṃsaññino honti.
另有一类因鸟声而有这类想法的情形:有个人坐在精舍深处。一些白天鸣叫的鸟,如乌鸦等,误把月光当作天亮,便在夜间叫起来,或者因为其他原因而叫。这个人听到鸟叫声,就把实际是夜间认作白天。还有一种情况:有人坐在山岭之间、深邃且为密林所覆盖的山窟中,适逢七日连绵大雨,阳光全被遮住。那些夜间鸣叫的鸟,如猫头鹰等,即使在正午时分,也因为各处一片黑暗而停留在暗处,凭着“现在是夜间”的感知,或由于其他原因而鸣叫。这个人听到这些鸟叫声,就把实际是白天想成了夜间。这便是因鸟的叫声而有此类想法的情形。“此即是”:这就是我如此认知的状况。“我说属于迷乱住”:意思是,我说这属于迷乱住的范围,被包含在迷乱住当中,是迷乱住的一种。显示巴利原文
Sakuṇarutato pana idhekacco antosenāsane nisinno hoti. Atha divā ravanakasakuṇā kākādayo candālokena divāti maññamānā rattiṃ ravanti, aññehi vā kāraṇehi. So tesaṃ saddaṃ sutvā rattiṃyeva samānaṃ divāti sañjānāti. Idha panekacco pabbatantare gambhīrāya ghanavanappaṭicchannāya giriguhāya sattāhavaddalikāya vattamānāya antarahitasūriyāloke kāle nisinno hoti. Atha rattiṃ ravanakasakuṇā ulūkādayo majjhanhikasamayepi tattha tattha samandhakāre nilīnā rattisaññāya vā aññehi vā kāraṇehi ravanti. So tesaṃ saddaṃ sutvā divāyeva samānaṃ rattīti sañjānāti. Evaṃ sakuṇarutato evaṃsaññino hontīti. Idamahanti idaṃ ahaṃ evaṃ sañjānanaṃ . Sammohavihārasmiṃ vadāmīti sammohavihārapariyāpannaṃ antogadhaṃ, sammohavihārānaṃ aññataraṃ vadāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“然而,婆罗门,我……能了知”:菩萨对一昼夜的分际了了分明。就算遇上七日连绵大雨,日月完全看不见,他也清楚地知道:“食前的时间过了这么多,食后过了这么多,初夜分这么多,中夜分这么多,后夜分这么多。”因此他这样说。菩萨因为圆满修习了诸波罗蜜,能够如此了知,这并非寻常之事。不过,即使是安住于部分智的声闻弟子,他们对一昼夜的分际也是非常清楚的。显示巴利原文
Ahaṃ kho pana brāhmaṇa…pe… sañjānāmīti pākaṭo bodhisattassa rattindivaparicchedo sattāhavaddalepi candimasūriyesu adissamānesupi jānātiyeva ‘‘ettakaṃ purebhattakālo gato, ettakaṃ pacchābhattakālo, ettakaṃ paṭhamayāmo, ettakaṃ majjhimayāmo, ettakaṃ pacchimayāmo’’ti, tasmā evamāha. Anacchariyañcetaṃ yaṃ pūritapāramī bodhisatto evaṃ jānāti. Padesañāṇe ṭhitānaṃ sāvakānampi hi rattindivaparicchedo pākaṭo hoti.
据说,在迦梨耶尼大精舍,乔达摩长老在两指宽的光亮相时取食,于一指宽的光亮时进食。即使太阳还未出现,他依然在清晨进入住所,并在那个时分出来。有一天,园丁们心想:“明天长老出来时,我们定要见到他。”于是他们备好食物,坐在计时柱下等候。长老恰好在两指宽的光亮相时便出来了。据说此后,即便太阳尚未出现,他们仅凭对长老出来时分的了解,便能准确敲响鼓。显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇiyamahāvihāre kira godattatthero dvaṅgulakāle bhattaṃ gahetvā aṅgulakāle bhuñjati. Sūriye adissamānepi pātoyeva senāsanaṃ pavisitvā tāya velāya nikkhamati. Ekadivasaṃ ārāmikā ‘‘sve therassa nikkhamanakāle passāmā’’ti bhattaṃ sampādetvā kālatthambhamūle nisīdiṃsu. Thero dvaṅgulakāleyeva nikkhamati. Tato pabhuti kira sūriye adissamānepi therassa nikkhamanasaññāya eva bheriṃ ākoṭenti.
在阿阇迦罗精舍,黑天长老在雨安居期间亲自敲击报时钟,这是长老一贯的行持。他自己并不使用计时的水钟,其他比丘才用。当初夜结束时,长老拿起木槌,刚刚站定,只敲击一两下,夜间计时器便恰好落下;他就是这样在三个夜分中都修习沙门法。长老于清晨入村托钵,得到食物后回到精舍,到进食时持钵,随后前往白天用功处,继续修习沙门法。比丘们见计时柱后,若找不到长老,便派人前去寻找。被派去的比丘,总是在长老刚从白天用功处出来时,或在半路上便遇见他。如此,即使是安住于世间处智的声闻弟子,对一昼夜的分际也如此清楚明了,何况菩萨呢?显示巴利原文
Ajagaravihārepi kāḷadevatthero antovasse yāmagaṇḍikaṃ paharati, āciṇṇametaṃ therassa. Na ca yāmayantanāḷikaṃ payojeti, aññe bhikkhū payojenti. Atha nikkhante paṭhame yāme there muggaraṃ gahetvā ṭhitamatteyeva ekaṃ dve vāre paharanteyeva vā yāmayantaṃ patati, evaṃ tīsu yāmesu samaṇadhammaṃ katvā thero pātoyeva gāmaṃ pavisitvā piṇḍapātaṃ ādāya vihāraṃ āgantvā bhojanavelāya pattaṃ gahetvā divā vihāraṭṭhānaṃ gantvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti. Bhikkhū kālatthambhaṃ disvā therassa adisvā āgamanatthāya pesenti. So bhikkhu theraṃ divā vihāraṭṭhānā nikkhamantameva vā antarāmagge vā passati. Evaṃ padesañāṇe ṭhitānaṃ sāvakānampi rattindivaparicchedo pākaṭo hoti, kimaṅgaṃ pana bodhisattānanti.
而“耶恩,婆罗门……说者”这一句,应当这样理解它的上下文关联:“婆罗门,若有人这样说——那位具足不迷惑法的有情出现于世间……为了诸天与人的利益、安乐——他这样说时,便是正确地说,是如实说者,而非虚妄语者。那位正确地说、如实说而非虚妄语的人,正是指我;如此说时,便是正确地说,是如实说者,而非虚妄语者。”显示巴利原文
Yaṃ kho taṃ brāhmaṇa…pe… vadeyyāti ettha pana ‘‘yaṃ kho taṃ, brāhmaṇa, asammohadhammo satto loke uppanno…pe… sukhāya devamanussāna’’nti vacanaṃ vadamāno koci sammā vadeyya, sammā vadamāno siyā, na vitathavādī assa. Mameva taṃ vacanaṃ vadamāno sammā vadeyya, sammā vadamāno siyā, na vitathavādī assāti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo.
其中,“无迷乱法”是指本性无迷乱。“世间”指人界。“为多人之利益”:为众多众生的利益,即通过智慧成就,教导现世与来世利益之人。“为多人之安乐”:为众多众生的安乐,即通过布施成就,给予资具安乐之人。“出于对世间的哀愍”:为哀愍世间,即通过成就慈与悲,如父母般守护、保护世间之人。“为天与人的义利、利益、安乐”:在此,以提及天与人而仅摄取具善根、可调伏的众生。应知,这是为了令其证得涅槃的道与果,而示现如来自身之出现。也就是说,说“为义利”,是为了那究竟的利益,即为了涅槃。说“为利益”,是为了那导向涅槃之道;因为没有比导向涅槃之道更高的利益了。说“为安乐”,是为了果等至的安乐;因为对圣果而言,没有比这更高的安乐了。正如经中所说:“此定是现法乐住,并于未来有乐异熟。”显示巴利原文
Tattha asammohadhammoti asammohasabhāvo. Loketi manussaloke. Bahujanahitāyāti bahujanassa hitatthāya, paññāsampattiyā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikahitūpadesakoti. Bahujanasukhāyāti bahujanassa sukhatthāya, cāgasampattiyā upakaraṇasukhassa dāyakoti. Lokānukampāyāti lokassa anukampatthāya, mettākaruṇāsampattiyā mātāpitaro viya lokassa rakkhitā gopayitāti. Atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānanti idha devamanussaggahaṇena ca bhabbapuggalaveneyyasatteyeva gahetvā tesaṃ nibbānamaggaphalādhigamāya attano uppattiṃ dassetīti veditabbo. Atthāyāti hi vutte paramatthatthāya nibbānāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Hitāyāti vutte taṃ sampāpakamaggatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti, nibbānasampāpakamaggato hi uttari hitaṃ nāma natthi. Sukhāyāti vutte phalasamāpattisukhatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti, tato uttari sukhābhāvato. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’’ti (dī. ni. 3.355; a. ni. 5.27; vibha. 804).
前行道等的解释显示巴利原文
Pubbabhāgapaṭipadādivaṇṇanā
51 51. 世尊如此向那位婆罗门展示了,自己获得佛陀功德后最终所住的“无迷乱住”。如今,为了说明他是依哪一条行道,从前行阶段开始便证得这究竟的“无迷乱住”,于是说道:“婆罗门,我确已发起……”等语。显示巴利原文
51. Evaṃ bhagavā buddhaguṇapaṭilābhāvasānaṃ attano asammohavihāraṃ brāhmaṇassa dassetvā idāni yāya paṭipadāya taṃ koṭippattaṃ asammohavihāraṃ adhigato, taṃ pubbabhāgato pabhuti dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ kho pana me brāhmaṇātiādimāha.
另有一些人说:“这位婆罗门听闻了有关‘无迷乱住’的解说后,心中便生起这样的想法:‘他是依哪条行道证得此的呢?’佛陀了知他的心念,为了表明‘我正是依此行道而证得此无上无迷乱住’,故如此说。”显示巴利原文
Keci panāhu ‘‘imaṃ asammohavihāraṃ sutvā brāhmaṇassa cittamevaṃ uppannaṃ ‘kāya nu kho paṭipadāya imaṃ patto’ti, tassa cittamaññāya imāyāhaṃ paṭipadāya imaṃ uttamaṃ asammohavihāraṃ pattoti dassento evamāhā’’ti.
此处,「婆罗门,我确实已发起精进」是指:婆罗门,这无上的无迷乱住,并非由懈怠者、失念者、身有躁热者或内心散乱者所证得。相反地,婆罗门,为了证得它,我确实已发起精进。当我坐在菩提道场时,便生起了四支精进,这精进已被策励、持续地运转而无松懈;也因为精进已发起,它便成为不退转的。显示巴利原文
Tattha āraddhaṃ kho pana me, brāhmaṇa, vīriyaṃ ahosīti, brāhmaṇa, na mayā ayaṃ uttamo asammohavihāro kusītena muṭṭhassatinā sāraddhakāyena vikkhittacittena vā adhigato, apica kho tadadhigamāya āraddhaṃ kho pana me vīriyaṃ ahosi, bodhimaṇḍe nisinnena mayā caturaṅgavīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ ahosi, paggahitaṃ asithilappavattitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Āraddhattāyeva ca metaṃ asallīnaṃ ahosi.
「念已现前,不忘失」:并非只有精进,我的念也已面向所缘而现前;正因为它已现前,所以称为不忘失。「身已轻安」:由于身心的轻安生起,我的身也已变得轻安。在这里,因为当名身轻安时,色身也必定轻安,所以不分别名身与色身,而总说为「身已轻安」。「无躁热」:又因此身轻安,所以无有躁热,意思是已远离一切躁动不安。「心得定,一境」:我的心已妥善地安置、善巧地安立,如同准确地投向所缘;正因为心已得定,所以成为一境、不动摇、无悸动。以上所说,即是禅那的前行道。显示巴利原文
Upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhāti na kevalañca vīriyameva, satipi me ārammaṇābhimukhībhāvena upaṭṭhitā ahosi. Upaṭṭhitattāyeva ca asammuṭṭhā. Passaddho kāyoti kāyacittappassaddhisambhavena kāyopi me passaddho ahosi. Tattha yasmā nāmakāye passaddhe rūpakāyopi passaddhoyeva hoti, tasmā nāmakāyo rūpakāyoti avisesetvāva passaddho kāyoti vuttaṃ. Asāraddhoti so ca kho passaddhattāyeva asāraddho, vigatadarathoti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāhitaṃ cittaṃ ekagganti cittampi me sammā āhitaṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapitaṃ appitaṃ viya ahosi. Samāhitattā eva ca ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandananti, ettāvatā jhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā kathitā hoti.
现在,为了显示依此行道所证得的殊胜成就——从初禅开始,以三明为究竟——世尊便说了「那个我……」等语。此处,有关「远离诸欲……具足安住第四禅」等应说的内容,在《清净道论》的地遍解说中都已阐明。唯一的差别仅在于:那里说的是「具足而住」,这里说的则是「而住」。然而,世尊是修习了什么业处之后,才具足安住于这些禅那的呢?他是修习了入出息念这一业处。显示巴利原文
Idāni imāya paṭipadāya adhigataṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ ādiṃ katvā vijjāttayapariyosānaṃ visesaṃ dassento so kho ahantiādimāha. Tattha vivicceva kāmehi…pe… catutthajjhānaṃ upasampajjavihāsinti ettha tāva yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge pathavīkasiṇakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Kevalañhi tattha ‘‘upasampajja viharatī’’ti āgataṃ, idha ‘‘vihāsi’’nti, ayameva viseso. Kiṃ katvā pana bhagavā imāni jhānāni upasampajja vihāsīti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā. Kataraṃ? Ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ.
再者,这四种禅那,对某些人是为了心一境性,对某些人是作为观的基础,对某些人是作为神通的基础,对某些人是作为灭尽定的基础,对某些人则是为了转生于‘有’。其中,对漏尽者而言,是为了心一境性。因为他们进入禅那后,怀着‘我们将以专一之心安乐地度过一天’这样的目的,在修习遍的预备行之后,便证得八等至。对有学及凡夫而言,他们从等至出定后,欲以入定的心进行观照,为此而生起禅那,这些禅那便是作为观的基础。至于那些证得八等至之后,进入作为神通基础的禅那,从等至出定,然后怀着如‘一身变成多身’等教说中所明的心愿而欲证得神通,从而生起那些禅那的人,对他们来说,这些便是作为神通的基础。至于那些证得八等至之后,进入灭尽定,在七天中成为无心,在现法中达到灭尽涅槃而安乐住,为了这个目的而生起禅那的人,对他们来说,这些便是作为灭尽定的基础。至于那些证得八等至之后,怀着‘我们要以不退失的禅那转生于梵天世界’的想法而生起禅那的人,对他们来说,这些便是为了转生于‘有’。显示巴利原文
Imāni ca pana cattāri jhānāni kesañci cittekaggatatthāni honti, kesañci vipassanāpādakāni, kesañci abhiññāpādakāni, kesañci nirodhapādakāni, kesañci bhavokkamanatthāni. Tattha khīṇāsavānaṃ cittekaggatatthāni honti. Te hi samāpajjitvā ekaggacittā sukhaṃ divasaṃ viharissāmāti iccevaṃ kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattenti. Sekkhaputhujjanānaṃ samāpattito vuṭṭhāya samāhitena cittena vipassissāmāti nibbattentānaṃ vipassanāpādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ekopi hutvā bahudhā hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.238; paṭi. ma. 1.102) vuttanayā abhiññāyo patthentā nibbattenti, tesaṃ abhiññāpādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā sattāhaṃ acittā hutvā diṭṭheva dhamme nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ patvā sukhaṃ viharissāmāti nibbattenti, tesaṃ nirodhapādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā aparihīnajjhānā brahmaloke uppajjissāmāti nibbattenti, tesaṃ bhavokkamanatthāni honti.
然而,应当知道,世尊在菩提树下所证得的这第四禅,既是他的观基础,也是神通基础,且能成就一切功用,并赐予所有世间与出世间的功德。显示巴利原文
Bhagavatā panidaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ bodhirukkhamūle nibbattitaṃ, taṃ tassa vipassanāpādakañceva ahosi abhiññāpādakañca sabbakiccasādhakañca, sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti veditabbaṃ.
宿住论注释显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsakathāvaṇṇanā
52 52. 为了显示他也是这些功德的赐予者,便说了‘彼如这些持之心’等语。其中,关于二明的逐句注释及修习方法,已在《清净道论》中详细阐述。只是在那部论中用的是‘so evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… abhininnāmeti’(彼如这些持之心……令转向),而此处则是‘abhininnāmesi’(他令转向了)。此外,‘Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇā’(婆罗门,这确是我的……)这一安止句,在那部论中为未来时,仅有此差别。其中,‘so’指‘那个我’。‘abhininnāmesi’意为‘令转向’。根据‘abhininnāmesi’的语词,此处的‘so’应理解为‘那个我’。显示巴利原文
52. Yesañca guṇānaṃ dāyakaṃ ahosi, tesaṃ ekadesaṃ dassento so evaṃ samāhite cittetiādimāha. Tattha dvinnaṃ vijjānaṃ anupadavaṇṇanā ceva bhāvanānayo ca visuddhimagge vitthārito. Kevalañhi tattha ‘‘so evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… abhininnāmetī’’ti vuttaṃ, idha ‘‘abhininnāmesi’’nti. Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇāti ayañca appanāvāro tattha anāgatoti ayameva viseso. Tattha soti so ahaṃ. Abhininnāmesinti abhinīhariṃ. Abhininnāmesinti ca vacanato soti ettha so ahanti evamattho veditabbo.
因为此处是依世尊而说宿住随念智,故应知有“so tato cuto idhūpapanno”(他从彼处死后,生于此间)这样的连接。其中,“so tato cuto”是对那转生者的回顾观察;而“idhūpapanno”则指在此处受生之后。“amutra udapādi”(在那里出生)应知是指向兜率天。其中,“tatrāpāsiṃ evaṃnāmo”是说在那兜率天处,我成为名为善白幢的天子;“evaṃgotto”指与那些天神同姓;“evaṃvaṇṇo”指身为金色;“evamāhāro”指以天界甘露为食;“evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī”指如是感受天界之乐,其苦唯是行苦;“evamāyupariyanto”指寿量如此,即以五十七俱胝、六十百岁与一千五百岁为限。“so tato cuto”是说我从那兜率天死后,“idhūpapanno”是说在这里,入于摩诃摩耶夫人母胎而生。显示巴利原文
Yasmā cidaṃ bhagavato vasena pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ āgataṃ, tasmā ‘‘so tato cuto idhūpapanno’’ti ettha evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Ettha hi so tato cutoti paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā idhūpapannoti imissā idhūpapattiyā anantaraṃ. Amutra udapādinti tusitabhavanaṃ sandhāyāhāti veditabbo. Tatrāpāsiṃ evaṃnāmoti tatrāpi tusitabhavane setaketu nāma devaputto ahosiṃ. Evaṃgottoti tāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ ekagotto. Evaṃvaṇṇoti suvaṇṇavaṇṇo. Evamāhāroti dibbasudhāhāro. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti evaṃ dibbasukhapaṭisaṃvedī. Dukkhaṃ pana saṅkhāradukkhamattameva . Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ sattapaññāsavassakoṭisaṭṭhivassasatasahassāyupariyanto. Sotato cutoti so ahaṃ tato tusitabhavanato cuto. Idhūpapannoti idha mahāmāyāya deviyā kucchimhi nibbatto.
在“ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇā”等句中,“me”意为“我”。“vijjā”(明)以能令了知为义,故称为明。令了知什么呢?令了知宿住。“avijjā”(无明)正是对此宿住令不了知,即覆盖它的愚痴,故称无明。“tamo”(黑暗)即此愚痴,以有覆盖的意义而称为“暗”。“āloko”(光明)即彼明,以有照明的意义而称为“光”。在此,实际意义是:明已被证得,后文是赞叹。应这样连接:此明已被我证得;对于证得此明的我,无明便被摧毁,即已消灭。何以故?因为明已生起。对其余二词(暗与光),道理也一样。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇātiādīsu meti mayā. Vijjāti viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. Kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsaṃ. Avijjāti tasseva pubbenivāsassa aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena tappaṭicchādako moho vuccati. Tamoti sveva moho paṭicchādakaṭṭhena ‘‘tamo’’ti vuccati. Ālokoti sāyeva vijjā obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘āloko’’ti vuccati. Ettha ca vijjā adhigatāti ayaṃ attho, sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Yojanā panettha ayaṃ kho me vijjā adhigatā, tassa me adhigatavijjassa avijjā vihatā, vinaṭṭhāti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannā. Esa nayo itarasmimpi padadvaye.
在“yathā taṃ”等句中,“yathā”是譬喻,“taṃ”是填充词。由于正念不相离,故称“appamattassa”(不放逸者);由于精勤,故称“ātāpino”(热忱者);由于不顾身体与生命,故称“pahitattassa”(努力者),即专心致志之人。这段话的意思是:“正如不放逸者、热忱者、努力者在如此安住时,无明会被破坏,明会生起;黑暗会被破坏,光明会生起。同样地,我的无明被破坏了,明生起了;黑暗被破坏了,光明生起了。这正与我精勤修习的投入相应。”显示巴利原文
Yathātanti ettha yathāti opamme. Tanti nipāto. Satiyā avippavāsena appamattassa. Vīriyātāpena ātāpino. Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pahitattassa, pesitattassāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avijjā vihaññeyya, vijjā uppajjeyya. Tamo vihaññeyya, āloko uppajjeyya. Evameva mama avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā. Tamo vihato, āloko uppanno. Etassa me padhānānuyogassa anurūpameva phalaṃ laddha’’nti.
天眼智的论释显示巴利原文
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
53 53. 在关于死生的讨论中,由于此处经文是依世尊而说的,所以用了“我看见、我了知”(passāmi pajānāmī),这是其不同之处。其余部分则与《清净道论》所说相似。显示巴利原文
53. Cutūpapātakathāyaṃ yasmā idha bhagavato vasena pāḷi āgatā, tasmā ‘‘passāmi pajānāmī’’ti vuttaṃ, ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ visuddhimagge vuttasadisameva.
此处,“明”指天眼智明。“无明”指覆盖众生死生、结生的无明。其余内容如前所述。再者,因为对于圆满波罗蜜的大士们而言,并没有所谓的预备工作——他们只需将心转向,便能随念种种宿世住处,并以天眼观见众生。因此,那种从预备工作开始所说的修习方法,在此处并不适用。显示巴利原文
Ettha pana vijjāti dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjā. Avijjāti sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhipaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti. Yasmā ca pūritapāramīnaṃ mahāsattānaṃ parikammakiccaṃ nāma natthi. Te hi citte abhininnāmitamatteyeva anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranti, dibbena cakkhunā satte passanti. Tasmā yo tattha parikammaṃ ādiṃ katvā bhāvanānayo vutto, na tena idha atthoti.
漏尽智论释显示巴利原文
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
54 54. 在第三明中,“当心如这些持”一句,应理解为作为观基础的第四禅心。“为了漏尽智”的意思是“为了阿罗汉道智”。由于阿罗汉道能灭尽诸漏,所以称为“漏尽”,而此智即属于它、含摄其中。“令心转向”意思是引生观心。对于“此是苦”等,他以通达自性相而如实地彻知、了知、证知:“苦唯此量,无有更多”,这便是遍知一切苦谛。而“此是苦集”是指能引生苦的渴爱。苦与集两者无余灭尽之处,它们的止息、涅槃,即是“此是苦灭”。导向那涅槃的圣道,则是“此是导向苦灭之道”。他以通达自性相而如实地彻知、了知、证知——应当了知这便是此处所说的含义。显示巴利原文
54. Tatiyavijjāya so evaṃ samāhite citteti vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti arahattamaggañāṇatthāya. Arahattamaggo hi āsavavināsanato āsavānaṃ khayoti vuccati, tatra cetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tappariyāpannattāti. Cittaṃ abhininnāmesinti vipassanācittaṃ abhinīhariṃ. So idaṃ dukkhanti evamādīsu ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ jāniṃ paṭivijjhiṃ. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti. Tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti. Tassa sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ jāniṃ paṭivijjhinti evamattho veditabbo.
如此从诸谛的自性方面说明之后,现在再从烦恼的角度,以间接方式显示,于是说“这些是漏”等。“当我这样知、这样见时”的意思是,对于这样知、这样见的我。他于此说明的是与观一同达到顶点的道。“从欲漏”即是从欲漏中解脱。“心解脱”以此显示果的刹那,因为在道的刹那心解脱,在果的刹那则是已解脱。“于解脱有解脱智”以此显示省察智。而“生已尽”等,是显示这省察智的领域,也就是世尊用此智进行省察而彻知“生已尽”等。那么,世尊的什么“生”已尽,他又是如何彻知的呢?并非过去的生已尽,因为过去早已灭尽;不是未来的生,因为未来已无需精勤;也不是现在的生,因为现在仍在存续。而是由于道尚未修习时,可能在一种、四种或五种有中,生起的一种、四种或五种蕴差别的“生”;因为道已修习,那种“生”便达到不生法性而灭尽。世尊修习道而断除烦恼后,省察道:“因为烦恼灭尽,即使有业,未来也不会再结生了”,他正是了知此而彻知。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā idāni kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ime āsavātiādimāha. Tassa me evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa mayhaṃ evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa. Saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ katheti. Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato. Vimuccitthāti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti, maggakkhaṇe hi cittaṃ vimuccati, phalakkhaṇe vimuttaṃ hoti. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ dasseti. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ, tena hi ñāṇena bhagavā paccavekkhanto ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīni abbhaññāsi. Katamā pana bhagavato jāti khīṇā, kathañca naṃ abbhaññāsīti? Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā, pubbeva khīṇattā, na anāgatā, anāgate vāyāmābhāvato, na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā, taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā ‘‘kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotī’’ti jānanto abbhaññāsi.
“已立”意为已经安立、圆满安立,也就是已作、已行、已完成的意思。“梵行”是指道梵行。因为与凡夫善士一起的七种有学,称为住梵行者;而漏尽者则称为已立梵行者。因此,世尊省察自己的梵行住,彻知“梵行已立”。“所作已办”的意思是:对于四谛,通过四道,以遍知、断除、证悟、修习的方式,完成了十六种应作之事。因为凡夫善士等还在作此事,而漏尽者已是所作已办者。因此,世尊省察自己所应作的,彻知“所作已办”。显示巴利原文
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ, puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ sattasekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso. Tasmā bhagavā attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘vusitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti abbhaññāsi. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā bhagavā attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti abbhaññāsi.
“不受后有”:他彻知:“如今,为了再有这些状态——即那十六种所作的状态,或为了灭尽烦恼——我已无修习道的工作了。”或者说,“为此性”是指从这种状态——即现在这组蕴的相续——中,我不再有另一组蕴的相续。然而,这五蕴已被完全遍知,犹如断根的树一般安立着。在最终识灭之时,它们将彻底灭尽,犹如无燃料的火。显示巴利原文
Nāparaṃitthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāya, kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti abbhaññāsi. Atha vā itthattāyāti itthabhāvato imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi. Ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya. Te carimakaviññāṇanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissantīti abbhaññāsi.
现在,为了向婆罗门显示这种以省察智所摄持的漏尽智证得,世尊说:“婆罗门,这就是我的明……”等。其中,“明”指阿拉汉道智之明。“无明”指覆盖四圣谛的无明。其余如前所说。至此,以宿住智开示关于过去的智慧,以天眼开示关于现在和未来的智慧,以漏尽智开示一切世间与出世间的功德。如此,用三明统摄了一切知者的一切功德而开示,向婆罗门显示了自己的无惑住。显示巴利原文
Idāni evaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇapariggahitaṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇādhigamaṃ brāhmaṇassa dassento, ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tattha vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇavijjā. Avijjāti catusaccapaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ettāvatā ca pubbenivāsañāṇena atītaṃsañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhunā paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayena sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇanti evaṃ tīhi vijjāhi sabbepi sabbaññuguṇe saṅgahetvā pakāsento attano asammohavihāraṃ brāhmaṇassa dassesi.
阿兰若住因释显示巴利原文
Araññavāsakāraṇavaṇṇanā
55 据说,如此说时,婆罗门心想:“沙门乔达摩自称知一切,可至今仍不舍弃住于阿兰若,难道他还有什么别的事要做吗?”那时,世尊知悉他的心思,便随顺其心念,说道:“婆罗门,或许你会这样想……”等等。其中,“婆罗门,或许你会这样想”的意思是:婆罗门,你有时可能会生起这样的想法。“但是,婆罗门,不应这样看”的意思是:婆罗门,你不应这样看——不应认为我受用边地坐卧处是因为未离贪等。世尊如此驳斥了“受用边地坐卧处没有原因”的说法后,为了说明真正的原因,便说:“我有两种目的……”等等。这里的“目的”即意义、利益。所以,“婆罗门,我以两种目的”意思是:婆罗门,我见到了两种意义、两种原因。关于“我自己的现法乐住”:这里,“现法”指当前可见的自身;“乐住”指四种威仪住处的安乐。因为独居在阿兰若的人,乃至大小便利等事,一切威仪都舒适自在,所以应理解为“现法的乐住”。关于“并慈悯后来的众人”:住在阿兰若,如何能慈悯后来的众人呢?那些以净信出家的善男子,见到世尊住在阿兰若,就会想:“对于世尊”显示巴利原文
55. Evaṃ vutte kira brāhmaṇo cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo sabbaññutaṃ paṭijānāti, ajjāpi ca araññavāsaṃ na vijahati, atthi nu khvassa aññampi kiñci karaṇīya’’nti. Athassa bhagavā ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā iminā ajjhāsayānusandhinā, siyā kho pana tetiādimāha. Tattha siyā kho pana te, brāhmaṇa, evamassāti, brāhmaṇa, kadāci tuyhaṃ evaṃ bhaveyya. Na kho panetaṃ brāhmaṇa evaṃ daṭṭhabbanti etaṃ kho pana, brāhmaṇa, tayā mayhaṃ pantasenāsanapaṭisevanaṃ avītarāgāditāyāti evaṃ na daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ pantasenāsanapaṭisevane akāraṇaṃ paṭikkhipitvā kāraṇaṃ dassento dve kho ahantiādimāha. Tattha atthoyeva atthavaso. Tasmā dve kho ahaṃ, brāhmaṇa, atthavaseti ahaṃ kho, brāhmaṇa, dve atthe dve kāraṇāni sampassamānoti vuttaṃ hoti. Attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāranti ettha diṭṭhadhammo nāma ayaṃ paccakkho attabhāvo. Sukhavihāro nāma catunnampi iriyāpathavihārānaṃ phāsutā, ekakassa hi araññe antamaso uccārapassāvakiccaṃ upādāya sabbeva iriyāpathā phāsukā honti, tasmā diṭṭhadhammassa sukhavihāranti ayamattho veditabbo. Pacchimañca janataṃ anukampamānoti kathaṃ araññavāsena pacchimā janatā anukampitā hoti? Saddhāpabbajitā hi kulaputtā bhagavato araññavāsaṃ disvā bhagavāpi nāma araññasenāsanāni na muñcati, yassa nevatthi pariññātabbaṃ na pahātabbaṃ na bhāvetabbaṃ na sacchikātabbaṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana mayanti cintetvā tattha vasitabbameva maññissanti. Evaṃ khippameva dukkhassantakarā bhavissanti. Evaṃ pacchimā janatā anukampitā hoti. Etamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pacchimañca janataṃ anukampamāno’’ti.
说法随喜释显示巴利原文
Desanānumodanāvaṇṇanā
56 听法之后,心生欢喜的婆罗门说道:“具慈悯性……”等等。其中,“具慈悯性”指具足慈悯的品性、慈悯的本性。“众人”指人群。“正如阿拉汉、正自觉者所应慈悯的”意思是:如同阿拉汉、正自觉者所慈悯的那样,这些也同样地具足慈悯性。显示巴利原文
56. Taṃ sutvā attamano brāhmaṇo anukampitarūpātiādimāha. Tattha anukampitarūpāti anukampitajātikā anukampitasabhāvā. Janatāti janasamūho. Yathā taṃ arahatā sammāsambuddhenāti yathā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho anukampeyya, tatheva anukampitarūpāti.
再者,他这样说完之后,又对世尊的这次说法表示随喜,便对世尊说:“太殊妙了,乔达摩!太殊妙了,乔达摩!”在此,“殊妙”一词可表“灭尽、美好、端丽、随喜”等义。例如:“尊者,夜已过去,初夜分已尽,比丘僧团久坐”等语句中,此词见于“灭尽”之义;又如“此人在这四种人中,是更为殊妙、更为优胜的”等语句中,则见于“美好”之义。显示巴利原文
Evañca pana vatvā puna taṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ abbhanumodamāno bhagavantaṃ etadavoca abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamāti. Tatthāyaṃ abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanesu dissati. ‘‘Abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 383; a. ni. 8.20) hi khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.
“谁以神通与荣光闪耀,来礼敬我的双足;”
“以殊妙的容貌,照亮一切方所。”在此类语句中,“殊妙”即是容貌端丽之义。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. –
在“殊胜啊,尊者”等语句中,它表随喜之义。此处亦然,表随喜。正因是随喜的语境,所以应当了知,这实则是在说:“善哉,善哉,乔达摩!”显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (vi. va. 857) abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ, bhante’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.250; pārā. 15) abbhanumodane . Idhāpi abbhanumodaneyeva. Yasmā ca abbhanumodane, tasmā sādhu sādhu bho, gotamāti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
在怖畏时、在愤怒时、在称赞时、在匆忙时、在惊奇时;
在欢笑时、在忧伤时、在净信时,智者发出感叹之声。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare; Hāse soke pasāde ca, kare āmeḍitaṃ budho’’ti. –
根据这一特征,应当了知,此处是由于净信、由于称赞的缘故,才两次说到这个词。或者也可以这样理解:“abhikkantaṃ”即“abhikantaṃ”,意思是极其可意、极其悦意、极其美好。显示巴利原文
Iminā ca lakkhaṇena idha pasādavasena pasaṃsāvasena cāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti veditabbo. Atha vā abhikkantanti abhikantaṃ. Atiiṭṭhaṃ atimanāpaṃ, atisundaranti vuttaṃ hoti.
其中,用一个“殊胜”来赞叹说法,用另一个“殊胜”来赞叹自己的净信。此处的意趣是:“乔达摩尊者,乔达摩尊者的此番说法,实为殊胜;乔达摩尊者的此番说法,实为殊胜——我能依此而生起净信,这也是殊胜的。”或者,这是针对世尊的言教,从两个层面来赞叹:乔达摩尊者的言教,因其能摧破诸过失而殊胜,因其能证得诸功德而殊胜;同样地,因其能生起信而殊胜,因其能生起慧而殊胜;因有真实义利而殊胜,因具足文句音节而殊胜;因字句浅白而殊胜,因义理甚深而殊胜;因声韵悦耳而殊胜,因能深入人心而殊胜;因不自我抬高而殊胜,因不贬损他人而殊胜;因以悲愍而清凉、以智慧而纯净而殊胜;因显现在前时令人欢喜而殊胜,经反复思择而能堪忍而殊胜;因听闻时得安乐而殊胜,因审察时得真舍利益而殊胜。应当将这些意义如此连接而理解。显示巴利原文
Tattha ekena abhikkantasaddena desanaṃ thometi, ekena attano pasādaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanā, abhikkantaṃ yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādoti. Bhagavatoyeva vā vacanaṃ dve dve atthe sandhāya thometi – bhoto gotamassa vacanaṃ abhikkantaṃ dosanāsanato, abhikkantaṃ guṇādhigamanato, tathā saddhājananato, paññājananato, sātthato, sabyañjanato, uttānapadato, gambhīratthato, kaṇṇasukhato, hadayaṅgamato, anattukkaṃsanato, aparavambhanato, karuṇāsītalato, paññāvadātato, āpātharamaṇīyato, vimaddakkhamato, suyyamānasukhato, vīmaṃsīyamānahitatoti evamādīhi yojetabbaṃ.
接着,又以四个譬喻来赞叹说法。其中:“nikkujjitaṃ”,即倒覆,指被头下脚上放置,或原本便面朝下者。“ukkujjeyyāti”,即令其翻转,也就是使其面朝上。“paṭicchannaṃ”,即被遮蔽,指被草、树叶等覆盖之物。“vivareyyāti”,即令其揭开,就是掀开。“mūḷhassa”,对于迷路者,是指迷失方向之人。“maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti”,即指示道路,就是执其手而告知:“这是路。”“andhakāre”,于黑暗中,指由黑半月的十四日、夜半、茂密丛林与浓云这四种条件所成的黑暗。以上是就字面浅显之义所作的解释。显示巴利原文
Tato parampi catūhi upamāhi desanaṃyeva thometi. Tattha nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ, heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā. Ukkujjeyyāti upari mukhaṃ kareyya. Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādicchāditaṃ. Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya. Mūḷhassāti disāmūḷhassa. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya. Andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasīaḍḍharattaghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalehi caturaṅge tame, ayaṃ tāva anuttānapadattho.
这里的意趣是这样的:如同有人将倒覆之物翻转过来,乔达摩尊者把我这个背离正法、堕入非法的人,从非法中扶持起来;如同揭开被覆盖的东西,自从迦叶世尊的教法隐没以来,他把被邪见丛林所遮蔽的教法揭示开来;如同为迷途者指示道路,他为误入邪路、行于错道的我,指出了通向天界与解脱之道;如同在黑暗中高举油灯,他为沉没于愚痴黑暗、看不见佛陀等宝藏之相的我,擎起了能摧破那深厚愚痴暗的教法明灯。乔达摩尊者正是以这些方式开示了我,所以偈颂中说:‘以种种方便开示了法。’显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana adhippāyayojanā – yathā koci nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya, evaṃ saddhammavimukhaṃ asaddhamme patitaṃ maṃ asaddhammā vuṭṭhāpentena, yathā paṭicchannaṃ vivareyya . Evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantena, yathā mūḷhassa maggaṃ ācikkheyya, evaṃ kummaggamicchāmaggappaṭipannassa me saggamokkhamaggaṃ ācikkhantena, yathā andhakāre telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya, evaṃ mohandhakāre nimuggassa me buddhādiratanarūpāni apassato tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotadhāraṇena mayhaṃ bhotā gotamena etehi pariyāyehi pakāsitattā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsitoti.
表达净信行相的注释显示巴利原文
Pasannākāravaṇṇanā
如此赞叹开示之后,他因这次教说而内心对三宝生起净信,为了表露这份净信,便说出了‘esāhaṃ’(我)等语句。其中‘esāhaṃ’即‘eso ahaṃ’(我)。‘bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti’(我皈依乔达摩尊者),意思是:‘尊贵的乔达摩是我的皈依、我的庇护,是灾祸的救护者、利益的安排者。’怀着这样的心意,我去皈依、亲近、侍奉、承事乔达摩尊者;或者说,我以此而了知、觉悟——因为那些表示‘去’的词根也含有‘觉悟’之义。因此这里的‘gacchāmi’(我去)即是‘我了知’‘我觉悟’的意思。关于‘dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti’(以及法和比丘僧团):在此,能令已证圣道、已作证灭谛、依教奉行的人不堕恶趣,由于它能这样‘持护’,故称之为‘法’。从义理上说,即是圣道与涅槃。如经中所说:‘比丘们,但凡有为法中,圣八支道被说为最上。’(《增支部》4.34)详细解释便是如此。而且不……显示巴利原文
Evaṃ desanaṃ thometvā imāya desanāya ratanattayapasannacitto pasannākāraṃ karonto esāhantiādimāha. Tattha esāhanti eso ahaṃ. Bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti bhavaṃ me gotamo saraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ, aghassa tātā , hitassa ca vidhātāti iminā adhippāyena bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ gacchāmi, bhajāmi, sevāmi, payirupāsāmi, evaṃ vā jānāmi, bujjhāmīti. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gatiattho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho. Tasmā gacchāmīti imassa jānāmi, bujjhāmīti ayamattho vutto. Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti ettha pana adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne ca apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo, so atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) vitthāro. Na kevalañca ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca, apica kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammopi. Vuttañhetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –
“离贪、无垢、无忧悲,是无为法、不违逆;
这甘甜、熟练、善为分别的法,你为求皈依,应当亲近。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ; Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 887);
此处,“离贪”是说为道;“无垢、无忧悲”是说为果;“无为法”是说为涅槃。“不违逆、甘甜、熟练、善为分别”是指经由三藏所分别的一切法蕴。“以正见与戒律和合而聚集”名为僧伽,就义理而言,即是八种圣者组成的团体。此义在《天宫经》中亦已宣说。显示巴利原文
Ettha rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalaṃ. Dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ. Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā sabbadhammakkhandhāti. Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātena saṃhatoti saṅgho, so atthato aṭṭha ariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiṃyeva vimāne.
这八种补特伽罗皆是见法者,你应为求皈依而亲近这样的僧伽。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yattha ca dinnamahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purisayugesu; Aṭṭha ca puggala dhammadasā te, saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 888);
比丘众所组成的僧伽,即是比丘僧伽。至此,这位婆罗门已宣说了三种皈依。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho bhikkhusaṅgho. Ettāvatā brāhmaṇo tīṇi saraṇagamanāni paṭivedesi.
关于皈依谈论的注释显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
今为于诸皈依事中得善巧,应知这些:何为‘皈依’,何为‘皈依之行’,谁皈依,皈依之分类,皈依之果,皈依之杂染,以及皈依之失坏。如下:先就词义而言,‘皈依’意为‘杀害’——因皈依者由此皈依之行,能杀害、摧破怖畏、惊恐、痛苦与恶趣杂染,此即其义;此词即为三宝之别称。或复,亦可作是说:佛陀以令众生得利、遮止不利,而杀怖畏;法以度脱轮回旷野、授与安稳,而杀怖畏;僧伽以令微小善业亦能获大果报,而杀怖畏。故依此义,三宝即是皈依。由对三宝之净信与最上恭敬,破却烦恼,唯以三宝为最终依止而生起之心,是为‘皈依之行’。具足此心之有情即是‘皈依者’,其义为:彼以如是心生起:‘此三者是我之皈依、是我之归宿’,如是而趣皈依。是故,应先了知此三者:何为皈依,何为皈依之行,及谁皈依。显示巴利原文
Idāni tesu saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ. Yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, saraṇagamanappabhedo , saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ, saṃkileso, bhedoti ayaṃ vidhi veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ – padatthato tāva hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ, saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiparikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti attho, ratanattayassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
再者,由于佛陀能于众生中行利益、止非利益,故能摧破其怖畏;由于法能渡越有之旷野、施予安稳;由于僧能使微小之业获得广大果报;因此,以此理趣,三宝即是皈依。依对三宝的净信与最极敬重,已摧伏烦恼、生起以彼为归趣之相的心,即为皈依。显示巴利原文
Atha vā hite pavattanena ahitā ca nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati buddho. Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena assāsadānena ca dhammo. Appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena saṅgho. Tasmā imināpi pariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. Tappasādataggarutāhi vihatakileso tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ. Taṃsamaṅgisatto saraṇaṃ gacchati, vuttappakārena cittuppādena etāni me tīṇi saraṇāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇanti evaṃ upetīti attho. Evaṃ tāva saraṇaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchatīti idaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
于皈依的分类,皈依有两种:出世间皈依与世间皈依。其中,出世间皈依是已见真谛的圣者在证得道心的刹那,以彻底断除皈依杂染的方式,从所缘上以涅槃为所缘,从作用上则圆满成就于整个三宝。世间皈依则是凡夫以镇伏皈依杂染的方式,从所缘上以佛陀等的功德为所缘而成就;从意义上说,此即于佛陀等处获得信心,且这种以信为根本的正见,在十种福德业事中,称为“见正直业”。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanappabhede pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ lokuttaraṃ lokiyañca. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati. Lokiyaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati, taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu saddhāpaṭilābho, saddhāmūlikā ca sammādiṭṭhi dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati.
而这皈依以四种方式生起:自我奉献、以彼为归处、成为弟子,以及礼拜。其中,自我奉献是指:‘从今日起,我将自己奉献给佛陀、奉献给法、奉献给僧’,如此,将自己完全舍与佛陀等。以彼为归处是指:‘从今日起,我是以佛陀为归处、以法为归处、以僧为归处的人,请这样记持我’,如此,成就以彼为归处的状态。成为弟子是指:‘从今日起,我是佛陀的弟子、法的弟子、僧的弟子,请这样记持我’,如此,进入弟子的身份。礼拜是指:‘从今日起,我只对佛陀、法、僧这三处作问讯、起迎、合掌、如法恭敬,请这样记持我’,如此,对佛陀等行最上的谦下与敬重。因为在这四种形式中,只要实行其中任何一种,皈依便已成立。显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ catudhā pavattati attasanniyyātanena tapparāyaṇatāya sissabhāvūpagamanena paṇipātenāti. Tattha attasanniyyātanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃ attapariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo, dhammaparāyaṇo, saṅghaparāyaṇo iti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ tapparāyaṇabhāvo. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassāti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvūpagamo. Paṇipāto nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomi, iti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccakāro. Imesañhi catunnaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarampi karontena gahitaṃyeva hoti saraṇagamanaṃ.
再者,‘我将自己奉献予世尊,我将自己奉献予法,我将自己奉献予僧。我奉献此生命,我的自我已全然奉献,我的生命已全然奉献,我尽形寿皈依佛陀,佛陀是我的皈依、庇护与保护’——此亦当理解为‘自我奉献’。此外,‘啊,我确能面见导师!只愿面见世尊!啊,我确能面见善逝!只愿面见世尊!啊,我确能面见正自觉者!只愿面见世尊!’(《相应部·因缘品》2.154),如此,如同大迦叶的皈依,亦当知此为‘成为弟子’。显示巴利原文
Apica bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa, saṅghassa attānaṃ pariccajāmi. Jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccattoyeva me attā, pariccattaṃyeva me jīvitaṃ, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ leṇaṃ tāṇanti evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sugatañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ bhagavantameva passeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) evampi mahākassapassa saraṇagamanaṃ viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
‘我将游方行脚,从此村至彼村,从此城至彼城;’
‘礼敬正自觉者,及正法善妙之法性。’(《经集》194;《相应部·有偈品》1.246)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ; Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammata’’nti. (su. ni. 194; saṃ. ni. 1.246) –
同样地,正如旷野夜叉等的皈依,应知为“以彼为归处”。例如:“那时,梵摩婆罗门从座而起,将上衣披于一肩,以头面伏在世尊足下,以口亲吻世尊双足,以双手抚摩,并报上名字:‘乔达摩尊者,我是梵摩婆罗门;乔达摩尊者,我是梵摩婆罗门。’”(《中部》2.394)这样的行为,也应视为“礼拜”。显示巴利原文
Evampi āḷavakādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. ‘‘Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo, brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evampi paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
而这皈依,由于亲属、怖畏、老师、应供者这四种原因而有四种。其中,出于“应供者”之因而礼拜的,才成为皈依;其余三种则不是。因为皈依是以最殊胜者为标准而受持,也以最殊胜者为标准而毁坏。因此,若有释迦人或拘利人,心想“佛陀是我们的亲属”而礼敬,这种皈依并未真正成立。或者有人心想“沙门乔达摩为国王所尊崇,有大威势,若不行礼敬,恐会作无义之害”,因怖畏而礼敬,这也未真正成立。又或者,有人在菩萨时期曾从世尊处学过些许法义,记持于心,至成佛时——显示巴利原文
So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyavasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gayhati, seṭṭhavasena bhijjati, tasmā yo sākiyo vā koliyo vā ‘‘buddho amhākaṃ ñātako’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā ‘‘samaṇo gotamo rājapūjito mahānubhāvo, avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyā’’ti bhayena vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā bodhisattakāle bhagavato santike kiñci uggahitaṃ saramāno buddhakāle vā –
应以一分财富维持生计,以两分从事事业;
第四分应当储留,以备急难之需。(《长部》3.265)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ekena bhoge bhuñjeyya, dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye; Catutthañca nidhāpeyya, āpadāsu bhavissatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.265) –
领受这样的教诫之后,若心想‘这是我的老师’而作礼敬,如此皈依并未真正受持。然而,若心想‘此人是世间最上的应供者’而作礼敬,以此方式,皈依便得以真实受持。显示巴利原文
Evarūpaṃ anusāsaniṃ uggahetvā ‘‘ācariyo me’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ loke aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva gahitaṃ hoti saraṇaṃ.
如是,受持皈依的近事男或近事女,即使礼敬在其他外道中出家的亲属,心想‘这是我的亲属’,其皈依亦不坏;礼敬未出家的亲属则更不会。同样,因怖畏而礼敬国王——因为国王为一国之尊,若不礼敬恐生祸患——如此礼敬亦不坏皈依。同样,即便礼敬教授某种技艺的外道,心想‘这是我的老师’,皈依亦不坏。应当如此了知皈依坏与不坏的差别。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gahitasaraṇassa ca upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā aññatitthiyesu pabbajitampi ñātiṃ ‘‘ñātako me aya’’nti vandato saraṇagamanaṃ na bhijjati, pageva apabbajitaṃ. Tathā rājānaṃ bhayavasena vandato, so hi raṭṭhapūjitattā avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyāti. Tathā yaṃkiñci sippaṃ sikkhāpakaṃ titthiyaṃ ‘‘ācariyo me aya’’nti vandatopi na bhijjatīti evaṃ saraṇagamanappabhedo veditabbo.
其中,出世间的皈依以四种沙门果为异熟果,以一切苦的灭尽为饶益果。如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ, sabbadukkhakkhayo ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato; Cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passati. Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ; Ariyañcaṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ. Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ; Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 190-192);
还应了知出世间皈依的利益果报,即不会将任何行执为常等。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,这是不可能的,绝无可能——具见者不会将任何行执为常,不会执为乐,不会将任何法执为我,不会杀害母亲,不会杀害身为阿拉汉的父亲,不会以嗔心使如来流血,不会分裂僧伽,不会皈依其他导师而皈依。这是不可能的。”显示巴利原文
Apica niccato anupagamanādivasena petassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ, ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, sukhato upagaccheyya, kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya, mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pitaraṃ arahantaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, duṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya, saṅghaṃ bhindeyya, aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.128; a. ni. 1.268-276).
而世间皈依的果报,便是得善趣中有生命成就与财富受用成就。这也就是经中所说的:显示巴利原文
Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
凡已皈依佛陀者,
他们必不堕于恶趣;
舍弃人身之后,
成就天众,令天界得以圆满。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yekeci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, Na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, Devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.37);
又有如此说:那时,诸天之王帝释与八万天众一同,前往尊者大目犍连之处……立于一旁的诸天之王帝释,尊者大目犍连对他这样说道:‘诸天之王,皈依佛,是善妙的。诸天之王,正是以皈依佛为因,此中一些众生在身坏命终后,得生善趣、天界。’他们以十种事胜过其他天人:天界的寿命、天界的容貌、天界的快乐、天界的名声、天界的权威,以及天界的色、声、香、味、触。对法与僧,也是如此。又依《韦拉摩经》等,能了知皈依果报的种种差别。应当这样去理解皈依的果报。显示巴利原文
Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno, tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca ‘sādhu kho devānaminda buddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho devānaminda evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjantī’ti. Te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti dibbena āyunā dibbena vaṇṇena sukhena yasena ādhipateyyena dibbehi rūpehi saddehi gandhehi rasehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341). Esa nayo dhamme saṅghe ca. Apica velāmasuttādivasenāpi (a. ni. 9.20) saraṇagamanassa phalaviseso veditabbo. Evaṃ saraṇagamanaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ.
于此,世间的皈依会因对三宝无知、疑惑、邪见等而受染污,因此光明不广大,威力也不广大。出世间的皈依则无此染污。世间的皈依,其退失有两种:有过失的和无过失的。其中,有过失的退失,是因将自己付嘱于外道导师等而生起,这会招致不可爱之果报。无过失的退失,仅仅是行为上的中断,因无有异熟,故而没有果报。而出世间的皈依则完全没有退失,因为即使在他世,圣弟子也绝不会归向其他导师。应当这样理解皈依的染污与退失。‘愿尊贵的乔达摩纳受我为近事男’的意思是:愿尊贵的乔达摩将我认作近事男,即令其知晓。显示巴利原文
Tattha lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ tīsu vatthūsu aññāṇasaṃsayamicchāñāṇādīhi saṃkilissati, na mahājutikaṃ hoti, na mahāvipphāraṃ. Lokuttarassa natthi saṃkileso. Lokiyassa ca saraṇagamanassa duvidho bhedo sāvajjo anavajjo ca. Tattha sāvajjo aññasatthārādīsu attasanniyyātanādīhi hoti, so aniṭṭhaphalo. Anavajjo kālaṃ kiriyāya, so avipākattā aphalo. Lokuttarassa pana nevatthi bhedo. Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako aññasatthāraṃ na uddisatīti evaṃ saraṇagamanassa saṃkileso ca bhedo ca veditabboti. Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretūti maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho.
近事男仪轨论释显示巴利原文
Upāsakavidhikathāvaṇṇanā
然而,为通达近事男的仪则,此处应了知这些杂项:什么是近事男?为何称为近事男?他的戒是什么?他的活命是什么?什么是他的衰损?什么是他的成就?显示巴利原文
Upāsakavidhikosallatthaṃ panettha ko upāsako, kasmā upāsakoti vuccati, kimassa sīlaṃ, ko ājīvo, kā vipatti, kā sampattīti idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ.
于此,什么是近事男?就是任何已皈依三宝的在家人。正如经中所说:“摩诃男,当近事男已皈依佛、已皈依法、已皈依僧,摩诃男,仅以此便是近事男。”(《相应部》5.1033)显示巴利原文
Tattha ko upāsakoti yo koci tisaraṇagato gahaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yato kho mahānāma upāsako buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti. Ettāvatā kho mahānāma upāsako hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
为何称为近事男?因为亲近侍奉三宝。他亲近侍奉佛,故称为近事男;亲近侍奉法,故称为近事男;亲近侍奉僧,故称为近事男。显示巴利原文
Kasmā upāsakoti ratanattayassa upāsanato. So hi buddhaṃ upāsatīti upāsako. Dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ upāsatīti upāsako.
什么是他的‘戒’?即是五远离。正如所说:‘摩诃男,当近事男远离杀生、远离不与取、远离欲邪行、远离妄语、远离饮酒及放逸之处,摩诃男,这位近事男便成为具戒者。’(《相应部》5.1033)显示巴利原文
Kimassasīlanti pañca veramaṇiyo. Yathāha ‘‘yato kho mahānāma upāsako pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti adinnādānā , kāmesu micchācārā, musāvādā, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. Ettāvatā kho mahānāma upāsako sīlavā hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
什么是他的‘活命’?即是舍弃五种邪命买卖,依法、平等地谋生。正如所说:‘诸比丘,有五种买卖是近事男不应做的。哪五种?武器买卖、活物买卖、肉类买卖、酒类买卖、毒药买卖。诸比丘,这五种买卖,近事男不应做。’(《增支部》5.177)显示巴利原文
Ko ājīvoti pañca micchāvaṇijjā pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘pañcimā, bhikkhave, vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā. Katamā pañca? Satthavaṇijjā, sattavaṇijjā, maṃsavaṇijjā, majjavaṇijjā, visavaṇijjā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā’’ti (a. ni. 5.177).
什么是‘衰损’?即他戒的衰损与活命的衰损,这便是他的衰损。再者,正是由此衰损,他既成了旃陀罗,又是垢秽,又是可呵责者。也应知晓,此即他的衰损。从义理而言,那便是不信等五种法。正如所说:‘诸比丘,成就五种法的近事男,即是近事男中的旃陀罗、近事男中的垢秽、近事男中的可呵责者。哪五种?他无信、恶戒、迷信吉兆、信吉祥而不信业,更从外寻求应供者,并先行供养于彼处。’(《增支部》5.175)显示巴利原文
Kā vipattīti yā tasseva sīlassa ca ājīvassa ca vipatti, ayamassa vipatti. Apica yāya esa caṇḍālo ceva hoti malañca patikuṭṭho ca. Sāpissa vipattīti veditabbā. Te ca atthato assaddhiyādayo pañca dhammā honti. Yathāha ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakacaṇḍālo ca hoti upāsakamalañca upāsakapatikuṭṭho ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Assaddho hoti, dussīlo hoti, kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, maṅgalaṃ pacceti no kammaṃ, ito ca bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
什么是“成就”?即他的戒成就与活命成就,这就是成就。此外,还有能令他成为宝、莲花、白莲的信等五种法。正如经中所说:“比丘们,具足五种法的近事男,成为近事男中的宝、近事男中的莲花、近事男中的白莲。哪五种呢?他有信心,具足戒行,不迷信吉兆,信业果而不信祥瑞,不于此处之外寻求应供处,而唯在此处先行供养。”(《增支部》5.175)显示巴利原文
Kāsampattīti yā cassa sīlasampadā ca ājīvasampadā ca, sā sampatti. Ye cassa ratanabhāvādikarā saddhādayo pañca dhammā. Yathāha ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakaratanañca hoti upāsakapadumañca upāsakapuṇḍarīkañca. Katamehi pañcahi? Saddho hoti, sīlavā hoti, na kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, kammaṃ pacceti no maṅgalaṃ, na ito bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ gavesati, idha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
“Ajjatagge”(从今日起):此处,agga一词可用于起始、尖端、部分、最上等义。例如,在“守门人,从今日起,我关闭尼干陀与尼干陀女之门”(《中部》2.70)等处,agga表起始;在“以彼指端触此指端”、“蔗端、竹端”等处,agga表尖端;在“酸的部分、甜的部分或苦的部分”、“比丘们,我允许按精舍部分或周房部分分配”等处,agga表部分;在“比丘们,凡无足众生……乃至……如来被记为其中之最上者”(《增支部》4.34)等处,agga表最上。而在此处,应取起始义。因此,“ajjatagge”即“从今日开始”,意思是以今日为起始。应这样理解。“ajjataṃ”指“今日的存在”。也有“ajjadagge”的读法,其中da是连接音,意思同样是以今日为始。显示巴利原文
Ajjataggeti ettha ayaṃ aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. ‘‘Ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.70) hi ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya, (kathā. 441) ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’ntiādīsu koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā (saṃ. ni. 5.374), anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 318) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.34) seṭṭhe. Idha panāyaṃ ādimhi daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvā, evamettha attho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvaṃ. Ajjadaggeti vā pāṭho, da-kāro padasandhikaro, ajja aggaṃ katvāti attho.
“Pāṇupetaṃ”(尽形寿):即与生命相俱,只要我的生命还在延续,便始终如此。愿乔达摩尊师忆持我、知我为这样的近事男——以三皈依而皈依、不依止其他导师、能为适当服务。纵然有人以利剑砍断我的头,我也绝不说“佛陀不是佛陀”“法不是法”“僧伽不是僧伽”。如此,他以尽形寿的方式皈依后,又以四资具发出邀请,从座起身,顶礼世尊,右绕三匝,而后离去。显示巴利原文
Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ, yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ. Anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretu jānātu. Ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyya, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti. Evaṃ attasanniyyātanena saraṇaṃ gantvā catūhi ca paccayehi pavāretvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmīti.
5. 《无秽经》释义显示巴利原文
5. Anaṅgaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
57 “如是我闻……尊者舍利弗”等语,即为《无秽经》。此处是对该经中不明显词句的注释。如同在此经中的做法,在所有经典中也都如此。因此,自此以后,不再赘述其他,只对前所未释的词句进行注释。显示巴利原文
57.Evaṃme sutaṃ…pe… āyasmā sāriputtoti anaṅgaṇasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbasuttesu. Tasmā ito paraṃ ettakampi avatvā apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃyeva karissāma.
“四”是数量的界定,即限定为四。“补特伽罗”指有情、人、人士。然而,不应据此便认为这位大长老是持补特伽罗实有论者;因为这位尊者乃是佛弟子中最卓越的,他只是毫不违逆地开示世尊佛陀的教说。显示巴利原文
Cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo. Puggalāti sattā narā posā. Ettāvatā ca puggalavādī mahātheroti na gahetabbaṃ, ayañhi āyasmā buddhaputtānaṃ seṭṭho, so buddhassa bhagavato desanaṃ avilomentoyeva deseti.
「世俗与究竟开示论」的注释显示巴利原文
Sammutiparamatthadesanākathāvaṇṇanā
世尊佛陀的教说有两种:随顺世俗的教说和胜义的教说。其中,“补特伽罗”、“有情”、“女人”、“男人”、“刹帝利”、“婆罗门”、“天”、“魔”等,像这些属于随顺世俗的教说。“无常”、“苦”、“无我”,以及“蕴”、“界”、“处”、“念处”等,像这些属于胜义的教说。显示巴利原文
Buddhassa bhagavato duvidhā desanā sammutidesanā, paramatthadesanā cāti. Tattha puggalo satto itthī puriso khattiyo brāhmaṇo devo māroti evarūpā sammutidesanā. Aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, khandhā dhātū āyatanāni satipaṭṭhānāti evarūpā paramatthadesanā.
于此,若有众生听闻世俗教说即能通达义理、舍断愚痴、证得殊胜,世尊便为其开示世俗教说;若有众生听闻究竟教说即能通达义理、舍断愚痴、证得殊胜,世尊则为其开示究竟教说。此处有一譬喻:譬如一位精通各地方言、能解三吠陀义理的老师,若有学童能听懂达罗毗荼语所表之义,老师便用达罗毗荼语教导;若能听懂安达卡语等其他某种语言所表之义,老师便用那种语言教导。如此,这些学童倚仗那聪敏善巧的老师,很快便能通达技艺。于这一譬喻中,佛陀世尊即如那位老师;应宣说的三藏法义,如同三吠陀;老师对方言的善巧,如同世尊对世俗与究竟的善巧;操持各种方言的学童,则如那些能随世俗或究竟教说而悟入的、可受教化的众生;老师以达罗毗荼语等施教,当知即是世尊以世俗或究竟方式开示。于此复言:显示巴利原文
Tattha bhagavā ye sammutivasena desanaṃ sutvā atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā mohaṃ pahāya visesaṃ adhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ sammutidesanaṃ deseti. Ye pana paramatthavasena desanaṃ sutvā atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā mohaṃ pahāya visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ paramatthadesanaṃ deseti. Tatthāyaṃ upamā, yathā hi desabhāsākusalo tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ atthasaṃvaṇṇanako ācariyo ye damiḷabhāsāya vutte atthaṃ jānanti, tesaṃ damiḷabhāsāya ācikkhati. Ye andhakabhāsādīsu aññatarāya, tesaṃ tāya tāya bhāsāya. Evaṃ te māṇavakā chekaṃ byattaṃ ācariyamāgamma khippameva sippaṃ uggaṇhanti. Tattha ācariyo viya buddho bhagavā. Tayo vedā viya kathetabbabhāvena ṭhitāni tīṇi piṭakāni. Desabhāsākosallamiva sammutiparamatthakosallaṃ. Nānādesabhāsā māṇavakā viya sammutiparamatthadesanāpaṭivijjhanasamatthā veneyyasattā. Ācariyassa damiḷabhāsādiācikkhanaṃ viya bhagavato sammutiparamatthavasena desanā veditabbā. Āha cettha –
正自觉者——一切说者中最胜者——宣说了二谛;
即世俗谛与究竟谛,无有第三谛可得。
因此,对于善巧世俗言说、为世间依怙的导师——世尊,
当他随顺世间假名而作言说时,并不犯妄语。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo; Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati. Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇā; Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtakāraṇā. Tasmā vohārakusalassa, lokanāthassa satthuno; Sammutiṃ voharantassa, musāvādo na jāyatī’’ti.
再者,世尊依八种因缘开示补特伽罗之教说:为彰显惭与愧,为彰显“业属于自己”,为彰显各人所作之业,为彰显无间业,为彰显梵住,为彰显宿住,为彰显布施供养之清净,以及为不舍弃世间之假名。因为,若世尊说“蕴、界、处会惭愧”,世人便不能了知,陷入迷惑,心生反感,心想:“蕴、界、处会惭愧,这是什么意思?”然而,若世尊说“女人会惭愧,男人会惭愧,刹帝利会惭愧,婆罗门会惭愧,天人会惭愧,魔罗会惭愧”,世人即能了知,不迷惑,不生反感。因此,世尊为彰显惭与愧的道理,而开示补特伽罗之教说。显示巴利原文
Apica aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ katheti – hirottappadīpanatthaṃ, kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ, paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ, ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ, brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ, pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ, dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ, lokasammutiyā appahānatthañcāti. ‘‘Khandhadhātuāyatanāni hirīyanti ottappantī’’ti hi vutte mahājano na jānāti, sammohamāpajjati, paṭisattu hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhadhātuāyatanāni hirīyanti ottappanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Itthī hirīyati ottappati puriso khattiyo brāhmaṇo devo māro’’ti vutte pana jānāti, na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti. Tasmā bhagavā hirottappadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
若说“蕴是业主、界是业主、处是业主”,同样也会出现这种不了知的情形。因此,世尊为彰显“业属于自己”的道理,而开示补特伽罗之教说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khandhā kammassakā dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
若说“竹林精舍等大寺院是由蕴所造、由界所造、由处所造”,同样会令人困惑。因此,世尊为彰显各人所作之业,而宣说关于补特伽罗的教导。显示巴利原文
‘‘Veḷuvanādayo mahāvihārā khandhehi kārāpitā dhātūhi āyatanehī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
当说“蕴弑母、弑父、杀阿拉汉、出佛身血、破和合僧,界、处也做这些事”时,同样会令人困惑。因此,世尊为彰显无间业而宣说关于补特伽罗的教导。同样地,当说“蕴修习慈心,界修习慈心,处修习慈心”时,也是如此。因此,世尊为彰显梵住而宣说关于补特伽罗的教导。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khandhā mātaraṃ jīvitā voropenti pitaraṃ arahantaṃ ruhiruppādakammaṃ karonti, saṅghabhedakammaṃ karonti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā mettāyanti dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
当说“蕴能随念宿世,界能随念宿世,处能随念宿世”时,也是如此。因此,世尊为彰显宿住随念,而宣说关于补特伽罗的教导。而当说“蕴接受布施,界接受布施,处接受布施”时,大众便不能了知,陷于迷惑,心生反感:“这蕴、界、处接受布施,是什么意思?”然而,若说“补特伽罗接受布施,持戒者接受布施,具足善法者接受布施”,大众即能了知,不迷乱,也不生反感。因此,世尊为彰显布施供养的清净,而宣说关于补特伽罗的教导。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khandhā pubbenivāsamanussaranti dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā dānaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi mahājano na jānāti, sammohamāpajjati, paṭisattu hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhadhātuāyatanāni paṭiggaṇhanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Puggalā paṭiggaṇhanti sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā’’ti vutte pana jānāti, na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti. Tasmā bhagavā dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
诸佛世尊并不舍弃世俗的共称,他们立足于世间的名称、言说与表达而宣说法。因此,世尊为了不舍世俗共称,也宣说与人相关的言谈。这位尊者善巧世间称谓,不违背佛陀世尊的教说,立于世俗共称而说:“贤友,有此四种人。”因此,在这里不应以胜义来理解,只应以世俗义来理解人。显示巴利原文
Lokasammutiñca buddhā bhagavanto nappajahanti, lokasamaññāya lokaniruttiyaṃ lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva dhammaṃ desenti. Tasmā bhagavā lokasammutiyā appahānatthampi puggalakathaṃ katheti. Tasmā ayampi āyasmā lokavohārakusalatāya buddhassa bhagavato desanaṃ avilomento lokasammutiyaṃ ṭhatvāva cattārome, āvuso, puggalāti āha. Tasmā ettha paramatthavasena aggahetvā sammutivaseneva puggalo veditabbo.
“Santo saṃvijjamānā”(存在的、可被发现的)是指:依世间约定,它们是存在的、可被认知的。“Lokasmiṃ”是指“世间”,亦即众生世间。而在“有垢者”等语中,“垢”在某些地方指烦恼。如说:“其中,何等为三种垢?贪为垢、嗔为垢、痴为垢。”(《分别论》924)在另一些地方,指任何污秽或泥泞,如说:“为去除那尘或垢而精进。”再另外的地方,指那样的地面,如菩提场、塔庙场等应知。然而在这里,种种猛利的烦恼被理解为“垢”;正如将说:“贤友,此‘垢’一词,是对那些不善、邪恶的欲行境的称呼。”(《中部》1.60)与垢俱行者,即是“有垢”。显示巴利原文
Santo saṃvijjamānāti lokasaṅketavasena atthi upalabbhamānā. Lokasminti sattaloke. Sāṅgaṇova samānotiādīsu pana aṅgaṇanti katthaci kilesā vuccanti. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamāni tīṇi aṅgaṇāni? Rāgo aṅgaṇaṃ, doso aṅgaṇaṃ, moho aṅgaṇa’’nti (vibha. 924). Katthaci yaṃkiñci malaṃ vā paṅko vā, yathāha ‘‘tasseva rajassa vā aṅgaṇassa vā pahānāya vāyamatī’’ti. Katthaci tathārūpo bhūmibhāgo, so bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇantiādīnaṃ vasena veditabbo. Idha pana nānappakārā tibbakilesā ‘‘aṅgaṇa’’nti adhippetā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘pāpakānaṃ kho etaṃ, āvuso, akusalānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ adhivacanaṃ, yadidaṃ aṅgaṇa’’nti (ma. ni. 1.60). Saha aṅgaṇena sāṅgaṇo.
“Sāṅgaṇovasamānoti”(有垢者)是指:本身即有烦恼的存在者。“Atthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānāti”(不如实了知“我内有垢”)的意思是:他既不了知自己的心相续中有烦恼,也不了知这些烦恼的性质——粗涩、凶暴,应当舍断而不应执取,犹如染毒之箭,因此不能如实了知其真实体性。如果有人既知道“有烦恼”,又能如此了知,他便被称为“如实了知‘我内有垢’者”。至于那些烦恼既未由道断除,又因以种种方式防护而未生起的人,在此处则被理解为“无垢”。“Natthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānāti”(不如实了知“我内无垢”)的意思是:他既不知道“我的烦恼只是因以如是如是方式防护才没有,并非由道断除”,也不知道“这些烦恼若生起,将带来极大的无义,它们是粗涩、凶暴,犹如染毒之箭”,因此不能如实了知其真实体性。如果有人既知道“以此因缘而无”,又能如此了知,他便被称为“如实了知‘我内无垢’者”。显示巴利原文
Sāṅgaṇovasamānoti sakilesoyeva santo . Atthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti mayhaṃ attano cittasantāne kileso atthītipi na jānāti. ‘‘Ime kilesā nāma kakkhaḷā vāḷā jahitabbā na gahitabbā visaduṭṭhasallasadisā’’ti evaṃ yāthāvasarasatopi na jānāti. Yo atthīti ca jānāti, evañca jānāti. So ‘‘atthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti vuccati. Yassa pana na ca maggena samūhatā kilesā, na ca uppajjanti yena vā tena vā vāritattā, ayamidha anaṅgaṇoti adhippeto. Natthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti ‘‘mayhaṃ kilesā yena vā tena vā vāritattā natthi, na maggena samūhatattā’’ti na jānāti, ‘‘te uppajjamānā mahāanatthaṃ karissanti kakkhaḷā vāḷā visaduṭṭhasallasadisā’’ti evaṃ yāthāvasarasatopi na jānāti. Yo pana ‘‘iminā kāraṇena natthī’’ti ca jānāti, evañca jānāti, so ‘‘natthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti vuccati . Tatrāti tesu catūsu puggalesu, tesu vā dvīsu sāṅgaṇesu, yvāyanti yo ayaṃ, yāyantipi pāṭho.
58 “贤友舍利弗,什么是因,什么是缘?”这是以两个名相来询问原因。所谓“由于什么因、什么缘,这二人中一人被称为最上士,一人被称为下劣士”,其中的因和缘各是什么?应这样理解此处的关联。虽然前面提到了“不如实了知”和“如实了知”,但这了知与不了知本身正是因和缘。显示巴利原文
58.Ko nu kho, āvuso, sāriputta, hetu ko paccayoti ubhayenāpi kāraṇameva pucchati. Yenimesanti yena hetunā yena paccayena imesaṃ dvinnaṃ eko seṭṭhapuriso eko hīnapurisoti akkhāyati, so ko hetu ko paccayoti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘nappajānāti pajānātī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ, pajānanā nappajānanāti idameva ubhayaṃ hetu ceva paccayo ca.
59 长老又以自己善巧的辩才,为了使意义更加显了,接着说道:“再者,贤友……”等。其中,“此人当如此期盼”的意思是:此人应当如此期盼。“他只将获得此,而非其他”是说应当希求于此,此乃必定。随后以“将不生起欲”等所说,是就不生起欲等而言。显示巴利原文
59. Thero pana attano vicitrapaṭibhānatāya taṃ pākaṭataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ puna tatrāvusotiādimāha. Tattha tassetaṃ pāṭikaṅkhanti tassa puggalassa etaṃ pāṭikaṅkhitabbaṃ. Idameva esa pāpuṇissati, na aññanti icchitabbaṃ, avassaṃ bhāvīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Na chandaṃ janessatī’’tiādinā nayena vuttaṃ achandajananādiṃ sandhāyāha.
其中,“将不生起欲”是指:不了知者为了断除彼垢染,反而不生起想要断除的欲。“将不精勤”是指:他不会发起比那更强劲的精进,不会努力。“将不策发精进”则是说:他甚至不会策发、不会令具足力量的精进运转起来。“有垢”是指:具有贪等这些垢染。“心染污”是指:由于那些垢染而心更加染污、有秽、受逼迫、受热恼而住。“命终”是指:将会死去。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca na chandaṃ janessatīti appajānanto tassa aṅgaṇassa pahānatthaṃ kattukamyatāchandaṃ na janessati. Na vāyamissatīti tato balavataraṃ vāyāmaṃ na karissati, na vīriyaṃ ārabhissatīti thāmagatavīriyaṃ pana neva ārabhissati, na pavattessatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāṅgaṇoti imehi rāgādīhi aṅgaṇehi sāṅgaṇo. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittoti tehiyeva suṭṭhutaraṃ kiliṭṭhacitto malīnacitto vibādhitacitto upatāpitacitto ca hutvā. Kālaṃ karissatīti marissati.
“Seyyathāpī”(譬如),即如同。“Kaṃsapātī”(铜钵),即铜制的钵。“Ābhatā”(被持来),即被带来。“Āpaṇā vā kammārakulā vā”(或从市场,或从铁匠家),指从市场,或从制作铜钵的铁匠家里。“Rajenā”(以尘),即从外面沾染的尘垢,如泥土等。“Malenā”(以垢),即那里所起的铜锈。“Pariyonaddhā”(被覆),即被覆盖。“Na ceva paribhuñjeyyuṃ”(既不享用),指人们既不以投入水、食物等方式去使用它。“Na ca pariyodapeyyuṃ”(亦不清洗),指也不以洗涤、擦拭等方式去清洁它。“Rajāpathe”(在尘处),即灰尘所在之处;或读作“rajāpathe”,指灰尘来的地方,或起卧处、床下、杂物间、器皿间,凡是会被灰尘散落之处。“Saṃkiliṭṭhatarā assa malaggahitā”(会更染污、更取垢):此处指由于弃置于尘处而更染污,由于不受用、不清洗而更易附着污垢。显示巴利原文
Seyyathāpīti yathā nāma. Kaṃsapātīti kaṃsalohabhājanaṃ. Ābhatāti ānītā. Āpaṇā vā kammārakulā vāti āpaṇato vā kaṃsapātikārakānaṃ kammārānaṃ gharato vā. Rajenāti āgantukarajena paṃsuādinā. Malenāti tattheva uṭṭhitena lohamalena. Pariyonaddhāti sañchannā. Na ceva paribhuñjeyyunti udakakhādanīyapakkhipanādīhi paribhogaṃ na kareyyuṃ. Na ca pariyodapeyyunti dhovanaghaṃsanādīhi na parisuddhaṃ kārāpeyyuṃ. Rajāpatheti rajapathe. Ayameva vā pāṭho, rajassa āgamanaṭṭhāne vā vuṭṭhānuṭṭhāne vā heṭṭhāmañce vā thusakoṭṭhake vā bhājanantare vā, yattha rajena okirīyatīti attho. Saṃkiliṭṭhatarā assa malaggahitāti ettha rajāpathe nikkhipanena saṃkiliṭṭhatarā, aparibhogāpariyodapanehi malaggahitatarāti vuttaṃ hoti, paṭipucchāvacanañcetaṃ. Tenassa evamattho veditabbo, āvuso, sā kaṃsapāti evaṃ karīyamānā aparena kālena saṃkiliṭṭhatarā ca malaggahitatarā ca mattikapātīti vā kaṃsapātīti vā itipi dujjānā bhaveyya nu kho noti, thero taṃ paṭijānanto āha ‘‘evamāvuso’’ti. Puna dhammasenāpati opammaṃ sampaṭipādento, evameva khotiādimāha. Tatthevaṃ opammasaṃsandanā veditabbā – kiliṭṭhakaṃsapātisadiso sāṅgaṇo puggalo. Saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā naparibhuñjanamādiṃ katvā rajāpathanikkhepo viya tassa puggalassa pabbajjaṃ labhamānassa vejjakammādīsu pasutapuggalasantike pabbajjāpaṭilābho. Saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā puna saṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvo viya tassa puggalassa anukkamena ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anusikkhato vejjakammādikaraṇaṃ, ettha ṭhitassa sāṅgaṇakālakiriyā. Atha vā anukkamena dukkaṭadubbhāsitavītikkamanaṃ, ettha ṭhitassa sāṅgaṇakālakiriyā. Atha vā anukkamena pācittiyathullaccayavītikkamanaṃ, saṅghādisesavītikkamanaṃ, pārājikavītikkamanaṃ, mātughātādiānantariyakaraṇaṃ, ettha ṭhitassa sāṅgaṇakālakiriyāti.
“Saṃkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṃ karissati”(心染污而命终):此处不应理解为以不善心命终。因为一切有情都是依本性心、有分心而命终的。这句话是就“未将心相续清净而命终”这一含义而说的,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Saṃkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṃ karissatīti ettha ca akusalacittena kālaṃ karissatīti na evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Sabbasattā hi pakaticittena bhavaṅgacitteneva kālaṃ karonti. Ayaṃ pana avisodhetvā cittasantānaṃ kālaṃ karissatīti etamatthaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttoti veditabbo.
第二种情况,“pariyodapeyyuṃ”(使它清净):指通过清洗、摩擦、细灰擦拭等方法,让它如同镜面一般清净。“Na ca naṃ rajāpathe”(又不把它留在有灰尘的地方):指不把它弃置在前述那种地方,而是放入箱、盒等中,或用布包裹后挂在象牙桩上。其余的内容,可按前述的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Dutiyavāre pariyodapeyyunti dhovanaghaṃsanasaṇhachārikāparimajjanādīhi parisuddhaṃ ādāsamaṇḍalasadisaṃ kareyyuṃ. Na ca naṃ rajāpatheti pubbe vuttappakāre ṭhāne anikkhipitvā karaṇḍamañjūsādīsu vā ṭhapeyyuṃ, paliveṭhetvā vā nāgadante lageyyuṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayānusāreneva gahetabbaṃ.
此处喻意的对应,应如此理解:有垢而堪能者,犹如沾有污垢的铜钵。正如对那沾有污垢的铜钵,经过使用等处理后被安置于清净之处,对此人而言,便是获得出家后,得以亲近品行端严的比丘。那些比丘教导、教诫他,即使见到极微细的放逸,也会施以惩罚羯磨,反复令他修习。正如那沾有污垢的铜钵后来变得清净、洁净,此人随师与阿阇梨学,渐次行于正道,当他安住于此阶段时,便是在无垢的状态中寿尽。又或者,他次第安住于清净的戒,修学适合自根器的佛语,受持头陀支,执取与自己相应的业处,舍弃村落坐卧处的住居,而住于边地的坐卧处,当他安住于此阶段时,便是在无垢的状态中寿尽。又或者,他依次完成遍禅的准备,成就八等至而镇伏烦恼;从作为观基础的禅那出定后,依观而暂断烦恼;证入流果……乃至亲证阿拉汉果,当他安住于此阶段时,便是毕竟在毫无垢染的状态中寿尽。显示巴利原文
Upamāsaṃsandanā cettha evaṃ veditabbā – kiliṭṭhakaṃsapātisadiso sāṅgaṇo bhabbapuggalo. Kiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā paribhuñjanamādiṃ katvā suddhaṭṭhāne ṭhapanaṃ viya tassa puggalassa pabbajjaṃ labhamānassa pesalabhikkhūnaṃ santike pabbajjāpaṭilābho. Ye ovadanti anusāsanti appamattakampi pamādaṃ disvā daṇḍakammaṃ katvā punappunaṃ sikkhāpenti, saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā aparakāle parisuddhapariyodātabhāvo viya tassa puggalassa ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anusikkhato anukkamena sammāvattapaṭipatti, ettha ṭhitassa anaṅgaṇakālakiriyā. Atha vā anukkamena parisuddhe sīle patiṭṭhāya attano anurūpaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā dhutaṅgāni samādāya attano anukūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmantasenāsanavāsaṃ muñcitvā pantasenāsanavāso, ettha ṭhitassa anaṅgaṇakālakiriyā. Atha vā anukkamena kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭhasamāpattinibbattanena kilesavikkhambhanaṃ, vipassanāpādakajjhānā vuṭṭhāya vipassanāya kilesānaṃ tadaṅganivāraṇaṃ, sotāpattiphalādhigamo…pe… arahattasacchikiriyāti ettha ṭhitassa accantaṃ anaṅgaṇakālakiriyā eva.
第三方面,“净相”指引生贪欲的可意所缘。“作意”指于彼所缘失念而转向。所谓“由于他作意那净相”,是指以那个人对净相作意为缘。“将毁坏”是说将损害、压倒。应知贪欲生起时,会截断善心路,自身成为不善速行而相续,从而毁坏善心。其余内容可依前文之理类推。显示巴利原文
Tatiyavāre subhanimittanti rāgaṭṭhāniyaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ. Manasi karissatīti tasmiṃ vipannassati taṃ nimittaṃ āvajjissati. Tassa subhanimittassa manasikārāti tassa puggalassa subhanimittamanasikārakāraṇā. Anuddhaṃsessatīti hiṃsissati adhibhavissati. Rāgo hi uppajjanto kusalavāraṃ pacchinditvā sayameva akusalajavanaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhanto kusalacittaṃ anuddhaṃsetīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayānusāreneva gahetabbaṃ.
此处喻意的对应,应如此理解:本性少烦恼、处于无垢状态的个体,犹如清净的铜钵。正如对清净的铜钵不行使用等,反弃于有尘垢之处,此人获得出家后的一切,尽皆类似第一种方面所述。显示巴利原文
Opammasaṃsandanā panettha evaṃ veditabbā – parisuddhakaṃsapātisadiso pakatiyā appakileso anaṅgaṇapuggalo. Parisuddhakaṃsapātiyā naparibhuñjanaṃ ādiṃ katvā rajāpathe nikkhepo viya tassa puggalassa pabbajjaṃ labhamānassāti ito paraṃ sabbaṃ paṭhamavārasadisameva.
第四方面——‘不作意净相’:由于他没有失念,因此不会去注意那个相。其余的内容应按照第二方面的道理来了知。而‘正是这个,贤友!’等句子的解说方式,则与‘是什么呢,贤友!’那一段中所说的方法相同。显示巴利原文
Catutthavāre subhanimittaṃ na manasi karissatīti tasmiṃ sativirahābhāvato taṃ nimittaṃ nāvajjissati, sesaṃ dutiyavārānusārena veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ kho, āvuso’’tiādi ‘‘ko nu kho, āvuso’’tiādimhi vuttanayameva.
60 此时,大目犍连尊者为了从各个角度揭示那垢染,在被以‘垢染、垢染’等方式追问后,便回答说:‘这是属于不善者的,贤友。’等等。其中,‘icchāvacarānaṃ’(在贪欲中活动者)的意思是:那些在贪欲中活动的人,因贪欲而陷入并造作种种忿怒与不满。‘Yaṃ idhekaccassā’(若于此人而有这样的情形),是说假如这里有某人生起这样的贪欲,这样的情形、这样的原因确实存在、具足,应当这样理解。‘Āpanno assaṃ’(我若犯了),意思是‘我若违犯了’。‘Na ca maṃ bhikkhū jāneyyuṃ’(且比丘们不要知道我),是希望比丘们不知道我。那么,这里到底是什么情形呢?就是希求利养。因为求利养的比丘,本来也是修福之人,受到人们的恭敬尊重,却这样想:‘犯了戒的比丘,长老们知道后,会告诉中座比丘;中座比丘告诉下座比丘;下座比丘告诉寺里管理卧具、坐具和饮食等的执事者;他们再告诉前来受教诫的比丘。’显示巴利原文
60. Idāni taṃ aṅgaṇaṃ nānappakārato pākaṭaṃ kārāpetukāmenāyasmatā mahāmoggallānena ‘‘aṅgaṇaṃ aṅgaṇa’’ntiādinā nayena puṭṭho taṃ byākaronto pāpakānaṃ kho etaṃ, āvusotiādimāha. Tattha icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ, icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ pavattānaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kopaappaccayānanti attho. Yaṃ idhekaccassāti yena idhekaccassa evaṃ icchā uppajjeyya, taṃ ṭhānaṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjati atthi, upalabbhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Āpanno assanti āpanno bhaveyyaṃ. Na ca maṃ bhikkhū jāneyyunti bhikkhū ca maṃ na jāneyyuṃ. Kiṃ panettha ṭhānaṃ, lābhatthikatā. Lābhatthiko hi bhikkhu pakatiyāpi ca katapuñño manussehi sakkato garukato evaṃ cinteti ‘‘āpattiṃ āpannaṃ bhikkhuṃ therā ñatvā majjhimānaṃ ārocenti, te navakānaṃ, navakā vihāre vighāsādādīnaṃ, te ovādaṃ āgatānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ, evaṃ kamena catasso parisā jānanti. Evamassa lābhantarāyo hoti. Aho vatāhaṃ āpattiñca vata āpanno assaṃ, na ca maṃ bhikkhū jāneyyu’’nti.
‘Yaṃ taṃ bhikkhuṃ bhikkhū jāneyyuṃ’(那些比丘能知道那位比丘),是指由于某种原因,其他比丘能知道那位比丘,而这个原因确实存在,并非没有。因为长老们知道后,便会告诉中座比丘。如此一来,他便如前所述,在四众弟子中广为人知。这样出名后被恶名所压倒,即使进入百户村庄,在百家的门槛边乞食之后,也只能拿着如同刚洗过一样的钵离去。接着他心想:‘比丘们知道我犯了戒,他们就这样把我给毁了。’于是,他生起忿怒与不悦。正因为如此,他既忿怒,被忿怒所压倒;又不悦,被忧恼所压倒。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ taṃ bhikkhuṃ bhikkhū jāneyyunti yena kāraṇena taṃ bhikkhuṃ aññe bhikkhū jāneyyuṃ, taṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjati kho pana atthiyeva, no natthi. Therā hi ñatvā majjhimānaṃ ārocenti. Evaṃ so pubbe vuttanayena catūsu parisāsu pākaṭo hoti. Evaṃ pākaṭo ca ayasābhibhūto gāmasatampi pavisitvā ummārasatesu ṭhānesu uñchitvā yathādhotena pattena nikkhamati. Tato jānanti maṃ bhikkhū āpattiṃ āpannoti tehi camhi evaṃ nāsitoti cintetvā, iti so kupito hoti appatīto so iminā kāraṇena kupito ceva hoti kodhābhibhūto appatīto ca domanassābhibhūto.
贤友,忿怒与不满,这两者即称为‘垢秽’。贤友,含摄在行蕴中的忿怒,与含摄在受蕴中的不满,这两者就是垢秽——在此处应如此理解其义。而且,这话是针对那一类人而说。不过,贪作为此垢秽的前分,痴也因与之相应,便一并被含摄在内了。显示巴利原文
Yo ceva kho , āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo ubhayametaṃ aṅgaṇanti, āvuso, yo cāyaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahito kopo, yo ca vedanākkhandhasaṅgahito appaccayo, etaṃ ubhayaṃ aṅgaṇanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Idañca tādisānaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Lobho pana imassa aṅgaṇassa pubbabhāgavasena, moho sampayogavasenāpi gahitoyeva hoti.
‘隐秘地’,与前面一样,是指抓住那位比丘,带他到精舍边缘的坐卧处,关上门去呵责他。然而,‘确有此事’,是指有这种情形:那些聪明、调伏的比丘,可能将那位比丘带到四众当中,以“你在某处做了医疗的事”等方式加以呵责。他便在四众中出名。如此出名并被恶名笼罩——这一切都与前面完全相同。显示巴利原文
Anurahomanti purimasadisameva bhikkhuṃ gahetvā vihārapaccante senāsanaṃ pavesetvā dvāraṃ thaketvā codente icchati. Ṭhānaṃ kho panetanti etaṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjati, yaṃ taṃ bhikkhuṃ catuparisamajjhe ānetvā byattā vinītā ‘‘tayā asukamhi nāma ṭhāne vejjakammaṃ kata’’ntiādinā nayena codeyyuṃ. So catūsu parisāsu pākaṭo hoti. Evaṃ pākaṭo ca ayasābhibhūtoti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva.
‘有对应的人’,是指与自己相当的人。‘相当’,指同样犯戒。‘对应的人’,指举罪者。他希望由同样犯戒的人来举罪,心中想道:“你也犯了种种戒,你先去把那些处理了,再来举发我,这样我才好辩驳。”此外,在出身等方面也相当的人,称为‘有对应的人’。因为他希望由那些在出身、家族、多闻、聪慧、头陀支等方面与自己同等的人来举罪,认为“由这样的人举罪,不会太难受”。而‘无敌者’,在此处是指:不适当的对应人即是无敌者。由于在犯戒等方面与他不同、与他敌对、与他相违的人,便不适合做呵责者——这就是所说之义。因此,他生气:他正是由于这种被无敌者举罪的方式而生起气来。显示巴利原文
Sappaṭipuggaloti samāno puggalo. Samānoti sāpattiko. Paṭipuggaloti codako. Ayaṃ sāpattikeneva codanaṃ icchati, tvampi imañcimañca āpattiṃ āpanno, taṃ tāva paṭikarohi pacchā maṃ codessasīti vattuṃ sakkāti maññamāno. Apica jātiādīhipi samāno puggalo sappaṭipuggalo. Ayañhi attano jātiyā kulena bāhusaccena byattatāya dhutaṅgenāti evamādīhipi samāneneva codanaṃ icchati, tādisena vuttaṃ nātidukkhaṃ hotīti maññamāno. Appaṭipuggaloti ettha ayutto paṭipuggalo appaṭipuggalo. Imehi āpattādīhi asadisattā paṭisattu paṭisallo codako bhavituṃ ayuttoti vuttaṃ hoti. Iti so kupitoti iti so imāya appaṭipuggalacodanāya evaṃ kupito hoti.
在第四种情况中,“啊!但愿”可出现在谴责的语境中,例如:“啊,我们的智者!啊,我们的多闻者、三明者!”也可出现在希求的语境中,例如:“啊!但愿在我年轻时就给我灌顶,立我为王。”而此处正是用于希求。“反复询问”即一再地询问。这位比丘是希求利养的人,他希望世尊反复地询问自己,而且是以征询认可的方式,中间不夹杂道、果、观禅之类的话题。因为他看见世尊在大众中反复询问舍利弗等大长老:“舍利弗,你如何认为?”“目犍连、迦叶、罗睺罗,眼是常还是无常?”这样反复询问之后便开示法,人们就称赞说:“这些智者长老真能让导师欢喜。”并供奉利养恭敬。因此,渴求这种利养恭敬的他,如此思惟后,便如同一根竖立的木桩,出现在世尊面前。显示巴利原文
Catutthavāre aho vatāti ‘‘aho vata re amhākaṃ paṇḍitakā, aho vata re amhākaṃ bahussutakā tevijjakā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.291) garahāyaṃ dissati. ‘‘Aho vata maṃ daharaṃyeva samānaṃ rajje abhisiñceyyu’’nti (mahāva. 57) patthanāyaṃ. Idha patthanāyameva. Paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvāti punappunaṃ pucchitvā. Ayaṃ bhikkhu lābhatthiko bhagavato attānaṃ paṭipucchitabbaṃ icchati, tañca kho anumatipucchāya, no maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā antaraṃ katvā. Ayañhi passati bhagavantaṃ sāriputtādayo mahāthere ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasi, sāriputta, moggallāna, kassapa , rāhula cakkhuṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti evaṃ parisamajjhe paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvā dhammaṃ desentaṃ, manusse ca ‘‘tesa paṇḍitā therā satthu cittaṃ ārādhentī’’ti vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇante, lābhasakkārañca upaharante. Tasmā taṃ lābhasakkāraṃ icchanto evaṃ cintetvā nikhaṇitvā ṭhapitakhāṇu viya bhagavato puratova hoti.
“因此,他生气”:那时世尊毫不理会他,而是询问另一位长老后便开示法,他便因此对世尊和那位长老生气。他是怎样对世尊生气的呢?“我自出家以来,从未离开过香室及周边区域,始终像影子一般不曾离开,世尊却问都不问我便开示法,一次法施都不曾给我。他向那位刚刚见到的长老询问后就开示法。”如此对世尊生气。他是怎样对那位长老生气的呢?“这个老迈长老在世尊面前像木桩一样立着,那些执事比丘什么时候才能把他排挤走、驱逐出去呢?如果这座精舍里没有他,世尊一定会与我交谈的。”如此对长老生气。显示巴利原文
Iti so kupitoti atha bhagavā taṃ amanasikaritvāva aññaṃ theraṃ paṭipucchitvā dhammaṃ deseti , tena so kupito hoti bhagavato ca therassa ca. Kathaṃ bhagavato kuppati? ‘‘Ahaṃ pabbajitakālato pabhuti gandhakuṭipariveṇato bahinikkhamanaṃ na jānāmi, sabbakālaṃ chāyāva na vijahāmi, maṃ nāma pucchitvā dhammadesanāmattampi natthi. Taṃmuhuttaṃ diṭṭhamattakameva theraṃ pucchitvā dhammaṃ desetī’’ti evaṃ bhagavato kuppati. Kathaṃ therassa kuppati? ‘‘Ayaṃ mahallakatthero bhagavato purato khāṇu viya nisīdati, kadā nu kho imaṃ dhammakammikā abhabbaṭṭhānaṃ pāpetvā nīharissanti, ayañhi yadi imasmiṃ vihāre na bhaveyya, avassaṃ bhagavā mayā saddhiṃ sallapeyyā’’ti evaṃ therassa kuppati.
“令在前,令在前”:即放在前面、放在前面,意思是令他被人环绕。这一位也是希求利养的人,因为他看见多闻的比丘们被众多随从环绕着进入村落、礼拜塔庙,又看见信众们见到那种成就后,欢喜地做出恭敬的表示。因此他就希望如此。“生气”的意思是,他在两个地方生气:对比丘们生气,也对那位长老生气。怎样对比丘们生气呢?“这些比丘,我辛苦所得的那些衣服、团食等,他们都受用了,却连一个拿着我的钵与衣、跟在身后的人都没有。”如此对比丘们生气。怎样对长老生气呢?“这个老迈长老在各种场合都处处显露自己,那些执事比丘什么时候才能把他排挤走呢?如果没有这个人,他们一定就会来环绕我了。”如此。显示巴利原文
Purakkhatvā purakkhatvāti purato purato katvā, samparivāretvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayampi lābhatthikoyeva, ayañhi passati bahussute bhikkhū mahāparivārena gāmaṃ pavisante, cetiyaṃ vandante, tesañca taṃ sampattiṃ disvā upāsake pasanne pasannākāraṃ karonte. Tasmā evaṃ icchati. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati bhikkhūnaṃ therassa ca. Kathaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ? ‘‘Ime yadeva mayhaṃ uppajjati cīvaraṃ vā piṇḍapāto vā, taṃ gahetvā paribhuñjanti, mayhaṃ pana pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā piṭṭhito āgacchantopi natthī’’ti evaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kuppati. Kathaṃ therassa? ‘‘Eso mahallakatthero tesu tesu ṭhānesu sayameva paññāyati, kudāssu nāma naṃ dhammakammikā nikkaḍḍhissanti, imasmiṃ asati avassaṃ maṃyeva parivāressantī’’ti.
“在食堂”是指用饭的场所。“最上座”是指僧团长老的座位。“最上水”是指供养的净水。“最上食”是指僧团长老的食物。而在一切处,“最上”皆是胜妙的同义词。其中,“唯我得之”这样的欲望并不算极重过失,然而“余比丘不应得”的念头则是极重过失。此人亦为希求利养者,他凭着持衣等的威仪,显得颇为清净,却又时而出家、时而还俗。因此,他先前曾获得座位等,后来不可复得,便如此思惟。“那位比丘不应得到”是说:那位比丘,在长老们的上座等之后,依此次第,中等比丘及其他新学比丘有时会得到那些种种、全皆下劣的座位等。“生气”意指他在两处生起怒气:对在家人以及对待长老。如何对在家人动怒呢?“这些人在吉庆等事上,原本依赖我去邀请比丘们,说:‘尊者,请带这么些比丘来悲悯我们吧。’现在他们却带着那个刚刚见到的老迈长老径直离去。也罢,随他们去吧,等他们有事相求时我自会知晓。”他如此对在家人动怒。又如何对长老动怒呢?“倘若没有这些长老,在家众必定会来邀请我。”他如此对长老动怒。显示巴利原文
Bhattaggeti bhojanaṭṭhāne. Aggāsananti saṅghattherāsanaṃ. Aggodakanti dakkhiṇodakaṃ. Aggapiṇḍanti saṅghattherapiṇḍaṃ. Sabbattha vā agganti paṇītādhivacanametaṃ. Tattha ahameva labheyyanti icchā nātimahāsāvajjā. Na añño bhikkhu labheyyāti pana atimahāsāvajjā . Ayampi lābhatthiko pāsādiko hoti cīvaradhāraṇādīhi, kadāci pabbajati, kadāci vibbhamati. Tena so pubbe laddhapubbaṃ āsanādiṃ pacchā alabhanto evaṃ cintesi. Na so bhikkhu labheyyāti na so bhikkhu therānaṃ aggāsanādīsu tadanusārena majjhimānaṃ aññesañca navānaṃ kadāci yaṃ vā taṃ vā sabbanihīnaṃ āsanādiṃ labhati. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati manussānañca therānañca. Kathaṃ manussānaṃ? ‘‘Ime maṅgalādīsu maṃ nissāya bhikkhū labhanti, ete, ‘bhante, ettake bhikkhū gahetvā amhākaṃ anukampaṃ karothā’ti vadanti, idāni taṃmuhuttaṃ diṭṭhamattakaṃ mahallakattheraṃ gahetvā gatā, hotu idāni, nesaṃ kicce uppanne jānissāmī’’ti evaṃ manussānaṃ kuppati. Kathaṃ therānaṃ? ‘‘Ime nāma yadi na bhaveyyuṃ, maṃyeva manussā nimanteyyu’’nti evaṃ therānaṃ kuppati.
“应随喜”指应作随喜。此人也是希求利养者,他清楚某种一知半解的随喜,便这样期盼着:“随喜之时会有众多妇女来到,她们认出我后,从此便会施我钵食。”他这样想。事实是:随喜对多闻者而言是一种负担,故而说理应让多闻者去随喜。“生气”意指他在三处动怒:对在家人、对长老、对说法者。如何对在家人动怒呢?“这些人先前总来请求我:‘愿我们的龙长老、我们的善意长老前来随喜!’今日却只字不提了。”他这样对在家人动怒。如何对长老动怒呢?“这位僧团长老竟不开口说:‘你们去亲近你们那位护持供养的龙长老、善意长老吧,这位会随喜的。’”他这样对长老动怒。如何对说法者动怒呢?“长老话音刚落,这人便如被捶打的公鸡一般急匆匆宣说起来,怎么没人赶走他呢?要是没有此人,随喜者必当是我。”他这样对说法者动怒。显示巴利原文
Anumodeyyanti anumodanaṃ kareyyaṃ. Ayampi lābhatthiko yaṃ vā taṃ vā khaṇḍānumodanaṃ jānāti, ‘‘so anumodanaṭṭhāne bahū mātugāmā āgacchanti, tā maṃ sañjānitvā tato pabhuti thālakabhikkhaṃ dassantī’’ti patthento evaṃ cintesi. Ṭhānanti bahussutānaṃ anumodanā bhāro, tena bahussuto anumodeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kupitoti ayampi tīsu ṭhānesu kuppati manussānaṃ therassa dhammakathikassa ca. Kathaṃ manussānaṃ? ‘‘Ime pubbe maṃyeva upasaṅkamitvā yācanti ‘amhākaṃ nāgatthero amhākaṃ sumanatthero anumodatū’ti, ajja pana nāvocu’’nti evaṃ manussānaṃ kuppati. Kathaṃ therassa? ‘‘Ayaṃ saṅghatthero ‘tumhākaṃ kulupakaṃ nāgattheraṃ sumanattheraṃ upasaṅkamatha, ayaṃ anumodissatī’ti na bhaṇatī’’ti evaṃ therassa kuppati. Kathaṃ dhammakathikassa? ‘‘Therena vuttamatteyeva pahāraṃ laddhakukkuṭo viya turitaturitaṃ vassati, imaṃ nāma nikkaḍḍhantā natthi, imasmiñhi asati ahameva anumodeyya’’nti evaṃ dhammakathikassa kuppati.
“对来到园中者”是指在精舍中聚集的人们。此人也是希求利养者,他懂得某种一知半解的讲法,看到在那些场合,比丘们从两三由旬外聚集而来,通宵彻夜听闻正法,而满心欢喜的年轻比丘或沙弥们则高声称赞“善哉!善哉!”翌日,入村的比丘们被信众问道:“尊者,是谁开示的法?”他们答:“是某甲与某甲。”信众听后生起净信,便对说法者们作广大崇敬。他渴求这种崇敬,便这样想。事实是:说法对多闻、善决断者而言是一种负担,故说应让多闻者去开示。“生气”:他连诵出一首四句偈的机会都无,便对自己的这种迟钝之境生起怒气,心想:“我实在迟钝,智慧低劣,哪里还会有让我说法的机会呢?”显示巴利原文
Ārāmagatānanti vihāre sannipatitānaṃ. Ayampi lābhatthiko yaṃ vā taṃ vā khaṇḍadhammakathaṃ jānāti, so passati tādisesu ṭhānesu dviyojanatiyojanato sannipatitvā bhikkhū sabbarattikāni dhammassavanāni suṇante, tuṭṭhacitte ca dahare vā sāmaṇere vā sādhu sādhūti mahāsaddena sādhukāraṃ dente, tato dutiyadivase antogāmagate bhikkhū upāsakā pucchanti ‘‘ke, bhante, dhammaṃ kathesu’’nti. Te bhaṇanti ‘‘asuko ca asuko cā’’ti. Taṃ sutvā pasannā manussā dhammakathikānaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ karonti. So taṃ icchamāno evaṃ cintesi. Ṭhānanti bahussutānaṃ vinicchayakusalānaṃ dhammadesanā bhāro, tena bahussuto deseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kupitoti catuppadikaṃ gāthampi vattuṃ okāsaṃ alabhamāno kupito hoti attano mandabhāvassa ‘‘ahañhi mando duppañño kuto labhissāmi desetu’’nti.
「比丘尼众」:指为了教诫、为了诵出巴帝摩卡、为了遍问法义或为作供养等目的,来到寺院聚集的比丘尼。此比丘亦追求利养,他这样想:‘这些出身大族的比丘尼们,当她们进入俗家坐定时,人们便会问:“你们从谁那里接受教诫、诵出或遍问呢?”而后他们便会说:“某位尊者多闻,你们应供养他、为他服务。”’由此他便生起了这种贪求。‘处’:因教诫等事乃多闻者之职责,故此处指多闻者应行教导。‘忿怒者’:他也在两方面生起忿怒:一方面对比丘尼众生气,想:‘她们先前依赖我才得行布萨、自恣等,现在却在见到新遇的长老时,立刻跑去那边了。’另一方面对说法者生气,想:‘这人如此随便就给她们教诫了。’显示巴利原文
Bhikkhunīnanti ovādatthaṃ vā uddesatthaṃ vā paripucchatthaṃ vā pūjākaraṇatthaṃ vā ārāmaṃ āgantvā sannipatitabhikkhunīnaṃ. Ayampi lābhatthiko, tassevaṃ hoti imā mahākulā pabbajitā bhikkhuniyo, tāsu kulesu pavisetvā nisinnāsu manussā pucchissanti ‘‘kassa santike ovādaṃ vā uddesaṃ vā paripucchaṃ vā gaṇhathā’’ti. Tato vakkhanti ‘‘asuko nāma ayyo bahussuto, tassa detha karothā’’ti, tenassa evaṃ icchā uppajjati. Ṭhānanti ovādādayo nāma bahussutānaṃ bhāro, tena bahussuto deseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati, tāsañca bhikkhunīnaṃ ‘‘imā pubbe maṃ nissāya uposathappavāraṇādīni labhanti, tā idāni taṃmuhuttaṃ diṭṭhamattakamahallakattherassa santikaṃ gatā’’ti. Dhammakathikassa ca ‘‘esa imāsaṃ sahasā ovādaṃ adāsiyevā’’ti.
「近事男」:指来到寺院的近事男众。所谓‘放下事务的大近事男’,是指将事业交付子女、兄弟之后,为听闻正法而游行的诸大近事男。这位比丘想为他们说法,原因何在?他想:‘这些近事男生起净信后,也会告知近事女们,然后与近事女们一起,只将利养恭敬唯独奉献给我一人。’‘处’应由多闻者担当。‘忿怒者’:他也在两方面忿怒:对近事男众想:‘这些人到别处去听法,不到我们亲教师这里听法,哼,等他们有事的时候我就知道了。’对说法者想:‘这人正在给他们说法。’显示巴利原文
Upāsakānanti, ārāmagatānaṃ upāsakānaṃ. Nissaṭṭhakammantā nāma mahāupāsakā honti, te puttabhātukānaṃ kammaṃ niyyātetvā dhammaṃ suṇantā vicaranti, ayaṃ tesaṃ desetuṃ icchati, kiṃ kāraṇā? Ime pasīditvā upāsikānampi ārocessanti, tato saddhiṃ upāsikāhi mayhameva lābhasakkāraṃ upaharissantīti. Ṭhānaṃ bahussuteneva yojetabbaṃ. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati, upāsakānañca ‘‘ime aññattha suṇanti, amhākaṃ kulupakassa santike suṇāmāti nāgacchanti, hotu idāni, tesaṃ uppanne kicce jānissāmī’’ti dhammakathikassa ca, ‘‘ayametesaṃ desetī’’ti.
「近事女」:指来到寺院的近事女众。所谓近事女,或是为了作座位供养等事,或是在布萨日为了听闻正法而聚集。其余内容与近事男条目所说的方法相同。显示巴利原文
Upāsikānanti ārāmagatānaṃ. Upāsikā nāma āsanapūjādikaraṇatthaṃ vā uposathadivase vā dhammassavanatthaṃ sannipatitā. Sesaṃ upāsakavāre vuttanayameva.
“应恭敬”:即应当恭敬地做,且做得善巧美好。以此,他希望别人对自己所行的是恭敬且美好的。“应尊重”:即以敬重的方式对待。以此,他希望自己被比丘们置于受尊重的地位。“应敬爱”:即喜爱。“应供养”:如此恭敬、尊重、敬爱之时,又以资具供养,他渴望得到这样的资具供养。“处”:指“可爱、可尊重、应修习”的状态。唯有那些多闻、具戒的人才堪受这些对待,因此比丘们应当如此对待他们。“忿怒者”:他也在两方面生气:对比丘们心想:“他们在恭敬这个人。”对长老则想:“要是这个人不在,他们就会恭敬我了。”这一道理同样适用于后面的三项。显示巴利原文
Sakkareyyunti sakkaccañca kareyyuṃ, sundarañca kareyyuṃ. Iminā attani kāraṃ karīyamānaṃ sakkaccaṃ katañca sundarañca pattheti. Garuṃ kareyyunti bhāriyaṃ kareyyuṃ. Iminā bhikkhūhi attānaṃ garuṭṭhāne ṭhapīyamānaṃ pattheti. Māneyyunti piyāyeyyuṃ. Pūjeyyunti evaṃ sakkarontā garuṃ karontā mānentā paccayehi pūjeyyunti paccayapūjaṃ pattheti. Ṭhānanti ‘‘piyo garu bhāvaniyo’’ti vuttappakāro bahussuto ca sīlavā ca etaṃ vidhiṃ arahati tena bhikkhū evarūpaṃ evaṃ kareyyunti vuttaṃ hoti. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati bhikkhūnañca ‘‘ime etaṃ sakkarontī’’ti therassa ca ‘‘imasmiṃ asati maṃyeva sakkareyyu’’nti. Esa nayo ito paresu tīsu vāresu.
“殊胜之衣”:指精细布、绢丝、丝绸等价值昂贵、细软、触感舒适的衣服。在此,若贪求“只愿我自己得到”,过失尚不太重;若贪求“不愿其他比丘得到”,则是大过失。显示巴利原文
Paṇītānaṃcīvarānanti paṭṭadukūlapaṭṭuṇṇakoseyyādīnaṃ mahagghasukhumasukhasamphassānaṃ cīvarānaṃ. Idhāpi ahameva lābhī assanti icchā nātimahāsāvajjā. Na añño bhikkhu lābhī assāti pana mahāsāvajjā.
“殊胜的团食”:指配有熟酥、油、蜂蜜、糖等的最上团食。“殊胜的坐卧具”:指价值数百、数千乃至十万的床、椅等殊胜坐卧具。“病缘药资具”:指熟酥、油、蜂蜜、糖浆等最上药物。在所有这些情形中,此“处”应当由多闻且有福报者来受用。“忿怒者”:在所有情形中,他都在两方面生气:对在家众心想:“这些人对那些(其他比丘)并无深厚感情。我长期与他们共住,为求粪扫衣、为乞团食,或为酥油等,挨家挨户次第乞食,他们却连一天也不曾给我任何殊胜资具。可一见到外来的长老,要什么就给什么。”对长老则想:“这位长老只是在他们面前游荡,那些管事的比丘何时才能将他赶走?一旦他不在,我便能独享利养。”显示巴利原文
Paṇītānaṃ piṇḍapātānanti sappitelamadhusakkarādipūritānaṃ seṭṭhapiṇḍapātānaṃ. Paṇītānaṃ senāsanānanti anekasatasahassagghanakānaṃ mañcapīṭhādīnaṃ paṇītānaṃ. Gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānanti sappitelamadhuphāṇitādīnaṃ uttamabhesajjānaṃ. Sabbatthāpi ṭhānaṃ bahussutehi puññavantehi ca yojetabbaṃ. Kupitoti sabbatthāpi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati, manussānañca ‘‘imesaṃ nāma paricitabhāvopi natthi, dīgharattaṃ ekato vasantassa paṃsukūlatthāya vā piṇḍapātatthāya vā sappitelādikāraṇā vā gharapaṭipāṭiyā carantassāpi me ekadivasampi kiñci paṇītaṃ paccayaṃ na denti. Āgantukaṃ mahallakaṃ pana disvāva yaṃ icchati, taṃ dentī’’ti, therassa ca ‘‘ayampi mahallako imesaṃ attānaṃ dassentoyeva carati, kudāssu nāma naṃ dhammakammikā nikkaḍḍheyyuṃ, evaṃ imasmiṃ asati ahameva lābhī assa’’nti.
“诸友,这些”:指前面以十九种方式所叙述的那些欲求之境。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ kho, etaṃ āvusoti imesaṃ heṭṭhā ekūnavīsativārehi vuttānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ.
61 “被见且被闻”:意思是,那些欲求之境并非真的被眼所见、被耳所闻,因为它们属于意识所认知的境界。然而,对于尚未断除欲求之境的补特伽罗,人们看到由欲求之境引发的身业,便如同直接看到了欲求之境本身;听到由欲求之境引发的语业,便如同直接听到了欲求之境本身。因此称为“被见且被闻”。当面时被见,“据说某位比丘是那样的人”;背后时被闻。而“即使”一词,兼具随喜与责备的意味,以此赞叹他住于阿兰若,呵责他尚未断除欲求之境。显示巴利原文
61.Dissanti ceva sūyanti cāti na icchāvacarā cakkhunā dissanti, na sotena sūyanti, manoviññāṇavisayattā. Appahīnaicchāvacarassa pana puggalassa icchāvacaravasena pavattakāyakammaṃ disvā diṭṭhā viya vacīkammaṃ sutvā sutā viya ca honti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dissanti ceva sūyanti cā’’ti. Paccakkhakāle dissanti, ‘‘asuko kira bhikkhu īdiso’’ti tirokkhakāle sūyanti. Kiñcāpīti anuggahagarahavacanaṃ. Tena āraññikattaṃ anuggaṇhāti, icchāvacarānaṃ appahānaṃ garahati.
此处的联结如下:虽然那位比丘摒弃了村落附近的坐卧处,成为阿兰若住者,栖身于偏远幽静的坐卧之处,但他这些欲求之事却仍未断除。虽然他拒绝了额外的利养,成为常乞食者。虽然他远离了贪行,成为次第乞食者。虽然他谢绝了居士布施的衣物,成为粪扫衣者……显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ yojanā, kiñcāpi so bhikkhu gāmantasenāsanaṃ paṭikkhipitvā āraññiko hoti, ante pantasenāsane vasati, ime cassa ettakā icchāvacarā appahīnā. Kiñcāpi so atirekalābhaṃ paṭikkhipitvā piṇḍapātiko hoti. Kiñcāpi so loluppacāraṃ vajjetvā sapadānacārī hoti. Kiñcāpi so gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā paṃsukūliko hoti.
“持粗衣者”中,所谓“粗”,当知由刀粗、线粗、染粗三种因缘而称为粗。其中,以刀割成片片者,名为刀粗,此令价值减损;以粗长线缝制者,名为线粗,此令触感减损,触之粗糙;以染料染污者,名为染粗,此令颜色减损,色泽难看。即使这位比丘穿着如此刀粗、线粗、染粗的粗衣,而且他的这些恶欲之事也如此被见、被闻,犹未断除,然而有智的同梵行者们既不会恭敬他……乃至……也不会供养他。原因何在?此处“taṃ”仅为小品词,“什么原因”即何因缘故。因为他的那些恶行被听闻。由于这些欲求之事尚未断除——这是此处的意旨。显示巴利原文
Lūkhacīvaradharoti ettha pana lūkhanti satthalūkhaṃ suttalūkhaṃ rajanalūkhanti tīhi kāraṇehi lūkhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha satthena khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chinnaṃ satthalūkhaṃ nāma, taṃ agghena parihāyati, thūladīghasuttakena sibbitaṃ suttalūkhaṃ nāma, taṃ phassena parihāyati kharasamphassaṃ hoti. Rajanena rattaṃ rajanalūkhaṃ nāma, taṃ vaṇṇena parihāyati dubbaṇṇaṃ hoti. Kiñcāpi so bhikkhu evaṃ satthalūkhasuttalūkharajanalūkhacīvaradharo hoti, ime cassa ettakā icchāvacarā appahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti ca, atha kho naṃ viññū sabrahmacārī neva sakkaronti…pe… na pūjentīti. Taṃ kissa hetūti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ, kissa hetūti kiṃ kāraṇā. Te hi tassa…pe… sūyanti ca yasmā tassa te pāpakā sūyanti cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Imesaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ appahīnattāti ayamettha adhippāyo.
现在,为了以譬喻显明此义,他说“犹如”等。其中,“尸体”指死尸。蛇的尸体为蛇尸,其余狗尸、人尸亦然。应知此处因其极为厌恶、令人作呕,故只说此三种。因为其他如兔、猪等的尸体,人们还会用辛辣调味品等加以调制后食用。然而此三种尸体,即使是新鲜的也已令人厌恶,更何况时日久了腐烂的。“调配”即添加、填满,意思是取了尸体放进铜钵里。“另一只钵”即另一只钵。“盖覆”即遮盖。“市场间”指各市场之间、人群拥挤的街口。“行经”即走过去。“如精美的礼品”指如同洁净、令人喜爱之物。而且,这是指如同送给新娘的礼品。所谓“新娘”指妻子,为她带去的礼品是精美的。两处重复,都是出于尊重或赞叹的语气。也有版本读作“jaññajaññaṃ byā”。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya pākaṭaṃ karonto seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha kuṇapanti matakaḷevaraṃ. Ahissa kuṇapaṃ ahikuṇapaṃ. Evaṃ itarāni. Atipaṭikūlajigucchanīyabhāvato cettha imāneva tīṇi vuttānīti veditabbāni. Aññesañhi sasasūkarādīnaṃ kuṇapaṃ manussā kaṭukabhaṇḍādīhi abhisaṅkharitvā paribhuñjantipi. Imesaṃ pana kuṇapaṃ abhinavampi jigucchantiyeva, ko pana vādo kālātikkamena pūtibhūte. Racayitvāti vaḍḍhetvā, paripūretvāti attho, kuṇapaṃ gahetvā kaṃsapātiyaṃ pakkhipitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññissāti aparāya. Paṭikujjitvāti pidahitvā . Antarāpaṇanti āpaṇānamantare mahājanasaṃkiṇṇaṃ racchāmukhaṃ. Paṭipajjeyyunti gaccheyyuṃ. Jaññajaññaṃ viyāti cokkhacokkhaṃ viya manāpamanāpaṃ viya. Apica vadhukāpaṇṇākāraṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vadhukāti janetti vuccati, tassā nīyamānaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ jaññaṃ, ubhayatthāpi ādaravasena vā pasaṃsāvasena vā punaruttaṃ. ‘‘Jaññajaññaṃ byā’’tipi pāṭho.
“打开”即揭开。“与看见同时,厌恶便会生起”指在看到那尸体的当下,那人的厌恶便会生起。所谓“厌恶”,是对“这是可厌的”如此生起的心与心所的称谓。此理同样适用于“不净”与“可厌”。“即使是饥饿的人”指即便是饥饿的人。“也不会有想吃的欲望”指不会生起想吃的欲望。“更何况已吃饱的人”指已饱足的人更不会有想吃的欲望,这是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Apāpuritvāti vivaritvā. Tassa saha dassanena amanāpatā ca saṇṭhaheyyāti tassa kuṇapassa dassanena saheva tassa janassa amanāpatā tiṭṭheyya. Amanāpatāti ca ‘‘amanāpamida’’nti uppannacittacetasikānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Esa nayo paṭikulyajegucchatāsu. Jighacchitānampīti chātānampi. Na bhottukamyatā assāti bhuñjitukāmatā na bhaveyya. Pageva suhitānanti dhātānaṃ pana paṭhamatarameva bhuñjitukāmatā na bhaveyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
此处应这样结合譬喻来理解:清净的铜钵好比这位比丘的出家形相;将尸体混入饭中,则如欲求之事尚未断除;用另一只铜钵盖住,如同以阿兰若支等头陀行来掩盖欲求之事;揭开铜钵,因见到尸体而令人不悦,正如不持守阿兰若支等头陀行时,因见到欲求之事而令同梵行者们不再恭敬等。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ upamāsaṃsandanā – parisuddhakaṃsapātisadisaṃ imassa pabbajjāliṅgaṃ, kuṇaparacanaṃ viya icchāvacarānaṃ appahānaṃ, aparakaṃsapātiyā paṭikujjhanaṃ viya āraññikaṅgādīhi icchāvacarappaṭicchādanaṃ, kaṃsapātiṃ vivaritvā kuṇapadassanena janassa amanāpatā viya āraññikaṅgādīni anādiyitvā icchāvacaradassanena sabrahmacārīnaṃ asakkārakaraṇāditāti.
62 在清净分方面,“虽”是认可与赞叹之词,以此认可阿兰若住的状态,并赞叹欲求之事的断除。“受邀者”指接受邀请之人。“拣择去黑者”指经过拣择、去除了黑色部分。对于“多种汤、多种菜肴”,此处的“汤”指可用手取食的食物;“菜肴”指佐料,因此像鱼、肉、绿豆汤等称为多种汤,而种种肉等佐料则称为多种菜肴。其余道理应依前述之理了知。显示巴利原文
62. Sukkapakkhe pana, kiñcāpīti anuggahapasaṃsāvacanaṃ, tena āraññikattaṃ anuggaṇhāti, icchāvacarappahānaṃ pasaṃsati. Nemantanikoti nimantanapaṭiggāhako. Vicitakāḷakanti vicinitvā apanītakāḷakaṃ. Anekasūpaṃ anekabyañjananti ettha sūpo nāma hatthahāriyo vuccati. Byañjananti uttaribhaṅgaṃ, tena macchamaṃsamuggasūpādīhi anekasūpaṃ, nānappakāramaṃsādibyañjanehi anekabyañjananti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
在譬喻结合中,应当理解为:调配殊胜的米饭如同欲求之事的断除;用另一只铜钵盖覆,则如以少欲为动机的村落住等头陀行来掩盖欲求之事的断除;揭开铜钵,因见到殊胜米饭而令人欢喜,正如不执取村落住等头陀行时,因见到欲求之事的断除而令同梵行者们生起恭敬等。显示巴利原文
Upamāsaṃsandane ca sālivarabhattaracanaṃ viya icchāvacarappahānaṃ, aparakaṃsapātiyā paṭikujjhanaṃ viya appicchatāsamuṭṭhānehi gāmantavihārādīhi icchāvacarappahānappaṭicchādakaṃ, kaṃsapātiṃ vivaritvā sālivarabhattadassanena janassa manāpatā viya gāmantavihārādīni anādiyitvā icchāvacarappahānadassanena sabrahmacārīnaṃ sakkārakaraṇāditā veditabbā.
63 “贤友舍利弗,我生起一个譬喻”意即:贤友舍利弗,我心中浮现了一个譬喻,代表我想说一个譬喻。“请说”意即:请你说,让它显现,也就是“你说吧”的意思。“一时”中的“一”只是小品词,意为“于某一个时候”,此处以受格表处所义。“我住于王舍城鹫峰山”:王舍城是那座城的名字;因四周环山,状如围栏,故称鹫峰山。我住于那座城,即依止该城而住。“那时我”就是那个“那时我”。其中,“时”是开启另一话题的起始词,“kho”仅作填充音节。“午前时分”指白天的前段时分,即午前时分;或于午前之时为午前时分,即午前的一个时刻,这是用受格表示相续的时间。“穿着”即穿上,应知这是在寺院内更换衣着,或为入村而整理下衣,因为在此之前他并非没有穿着。显示巴利原文
63.Upamā maṃ, āvuso sāriputta, paṭibhātīti mayhaṃ, āvuso sāriputta, upamā upaṭṭhāti. Ekaṃ upamaṃ vattukāmo ahanti adhippāyo. Paṭibhātu tanti tuyhaṃ paṭibhātu upaṭṭhātu, vada tvanti adhippāyo. Ekamidāhanti ettha idāti nipātamattaṃ, ekasmiṃ samaye ahanti vuttaṃ hoti, bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Rājagahe viharāmi giribbajeti, rājagahanti tassa nagarassa nāmaṃ. Samantato pana giriparikkhepena vajo viya saṇṭhitattā giribbajanti vuccati. Tasmiṃ nagare viharāmi, taṃ nissāya ahaṃ viharāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha khvāhanti atha kho ahaṃ. Ettha ca athāti aññādhikāravacanārambhe nipāto. Khoti padapūraṇamatte. Pubbaṇhasamayanti divasassa pubbabhāgasamayaṃ. Pubbaṇhasamayeti attho, pubbaṇhe vā samayaṃ pubbaṇhasamayaṃ, pubbaṇhe ekaṃ khaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti, evaṃ accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ labbhati. Nivāsetvāti paridahitvā, vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasenetaṃ veditabbaṃ. Gāmappavesanatthāya vā saṇṭhapetvā nivāsanavasena, na hi so tato pubbe anivattho ahosi.
「持钵与衣」:以手持钵,以身搭衣。「为团食」:为了乞求团食。Samīti:这是他的名字。「车匠子」:车匠的儿子。「般度子」:般度的儿子。「邪命外道」:裸形沙门。「旧车匠子」:出身于古老车匠家族的儿子。「近侍」:走上前去,站在一旁。「曲」:指单侧弯曲。「弯」:指如蛇行的路径。「过患」:指松软、不平整、有节疤等缺陷。「如……如是」:是表示时间的虚词,意为“每当……时”,即在那个时候;「如是」同样表示时间,意为“就在那个时候”。他依照自己心中的墨线去构思,另一个人则在他构思的那一刹那,便于他所构思之处砍削。「欢喜」:指自心满意、喜悦,被喜与乐所占据的心。「说欢喜之语」:因欢喜而说话,或说与欢喜状态相应的话,即讲出来、宣说出来。意思是“如同以心了知心一般,了知对方的心”。显示巴利原文
Pattacīvaramādāyāti pattaṃ hatthena cīvaraṃ kāyena ādiyitvā. Piṇḍāyāti piṇḍapātatthāya. Samītīti tassa nāmaṃ. Yānakāraputtoti rathakāraputto. Paṇḍuputtoti paṇḍussa putto. Ājīvakoti naggasamaṇako. Purāṇayānakāraputtoti porāṇayānakārakulassa putto. Paccupaṭṭhitoti upagantvā ṭhito. Vaṅkaṃ nāma ekato kuṭilaṃ. Jimhaṃ nāma sappagatamaggasadisaṃ. Dosanti phegguvisamagaṇṭhikādi. Yathā yathāti kālatthe nipāto, yadā yadā yasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā tathāti ayampi kālatthoyeva, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. So attano suttānulomena cintesi, itaro tena cintitakkhaṇe cintitaṭṭhānameva tacchati. Attamanoti sakamano tuṭṭhamano pītisomanassehi gahitamano. Attamanavācaṃ nicchāresīti attamanatāya vācaṃ , attamanabhāvassa vā yuttaṃ vācaṃ nicchāresi udīrayi, pabyāharīti vuttaṃ hoti. Hadayā hadayaṃ maññe aññāyāti cittena cittaṃ jānitvā viya.
「无信」:于佛、法、僧无有信心。「为活命」:被债务、恐惧等逼迫,无法在外存活,为了在此谋生而来的人,他们并非出于信心。「狡诈、诳惑」:具足谄曲和欺骗。「欺伪者」:学习骗术的人,意即已成就坚固谄曲的人。因为谄曲是展示不存在的功德,犹如展示不存在的商品优点,故称“欺伪”。「高慢」:如同高高翘起的芦苇,意思是生起了虚妄的傲慢。「轻躁」:热中于装饰钵、衣等轻浮的行为。「饶舌」:嘴巴粗硬,即言辞粗恶;散乱语,指言语不加节制,乃至终日尽说无意义的废话。「于诸根不护门」:在六根门不防禁自己的行为。「于食不知量」:于饮食方面,本应了知在寻求、接受、食用过程中何为适当的分量,他们却不知此量。「不专修警寤」:不致力于保持觉醒。「于沙门义无期望」:对沙门法毫不关心,意思是缺乏随顺法的实践。「于学处无深重恭敬」:对诸学处没有深厚的恭敬,或常常违犯戒条。「多事」等词的意义已在前面“法嗣者”那段说过,「懈怠」等词的意义已在前面“怖畏恐惧”那段说过。「以法门」:通过说法的方式。显示巴利原文
Assaddhāti buddhadhammasaṅghesu saddhāvirahitā. Jīvikatthāti iṇabhayādīhi pīḷitā bahi jīvituṃ asakkontā idha jīvikatthikā hutvā. Na saddhāti na saddhāya. Saṭhā māyāvinoti māyāsāṭheyyehi yuttā. Ketabinoti sikkhitakerāṭikā, nipphannathāmagatasāṭheyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāṭheyyañhi abhūtaguṇadassanato abhūtabhaṇḍaguṇadassanasamaṃ katvā ‘‘kerāṭiya’’nti vuccati. Unnaḷāti uggatanaḷā, uṭṭhitatucchamānāti vuttaṃ hoti . Capalāti pattacīvaramaṇḍanādinā cāpallena yuttā. Mukharāti mukhakharā, kharavacanāti vuttaṃ hoti, vikiṇṇavācāti asaṃyatavacanā, divasampi niratthakavacanappalāpino. Indriyesu aguttadvārāti chasu indriyesu asaṃvutakammadvārā. Bhojane amattaññunoti bhojane yā mattā jānitabbā pariyesanapaṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu yuttatā, tassā ajānanakā. Jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttāti jāgare ananuyuttā. Sāmaññe anapekkhavantoti samaṇadhamme nirapekkhā, dhammānudhammappaṭipattirahitāti attho. Sikkhāya na tibbagāravāti sikkhāpadesu bahulagāravā na honti, āpattivītikkamabahulā vā. Bāhulikātiādi dhammadāyāde vuttaṃ, kusītātiādi bhayabherave. Dhammapariyāyenāti dhammadesanāya.
「因信从家而出家」:他们本来就具有信心,出家之后,也是凭信心从家庭步入非家生活的。他们好像喝进去,好像吃进去:当他们说出欢喜之语时,就好像用嘴喝了;当他们内心随喜时,就好像用意吃了。「太好了」:即善哉、真好的意思。「同梵行者」:这个词,既可用短音也可用长音;当用短音时,指舍利弗那样的尊者;当用长音时,就指同梵行者们。若指舍利弗,意思是“同梵行的舍利弗将我们从不善的境界中救拔出来”;若指同梵行者们,意思是“同梵行者们将我们从不善中救拔出来”。「年轻」:年纪小。「青年」:正处在青春时期。「有妆饰性」:本性就喜爱打扮。在这里,有些人虽然年纪小,但不算是青年,例如特别幼小的孩子;有些人虽然是青年,但并不爱打扮,例如性情调柔者,或是为懒惰、放逸等习性所压倒的人。但此处特别指的是那种既年轻、又青春、又爱妆饰的人,所以才有这样的描述。青莲等花,是随顺世间共许的称谓而说。「如此,他们」:他们就这样。「两位大龙象」:两位大龙象,因为这两位上首弟子被尊称为“大龙象”。这里词义是这样的:因为显示巴利原文
Saddhā agārasmāti pakatiyāpi saddhā, pabbajitāpi saddhāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitā. Pivanti maññe ghasanti maññeti pivanti viya ghasanti viya. Attamanavācaṃ nicchārentā vacasā pivanti viya, abbhanumodantā manasā ghasanti viya. Sādhu vatāti sundaraṃ vata . Sabrahmacārīti rassampi vaṭṭati dīghampi. Rasse sati sāriputtassa upari hoti, dīghe sati sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Yadā sāriputtassa upari hoti, tadā sabrahmacārī sāriputto amhe akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvāti attho. Yadā sabrahmacārīnaṃ, tadā sabrahmacārayo akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvāti attho. Daharoti taruṇo. Yuvāti yobbanabhāve ṭhito. Maṇḍanakajātikoti alaṅkārakasabhāvo. Tattha koci taruṇopi yuvā na hoti yathā atitaruṇo, koci yuvāpi maṇḍanakajātiko na hoti yathā upasantasabhāvo, ālasiyabyasanādīhi vā abhibhūto, idha pana daharo ceva yuvā ca maṇḍanakajātiko ca adhippeto, tasmā evamāha. Uppalādīni lokasammatattā vuttāni. Itiha teti evaṃ te. Ubho mahānāgāti dvepi mahānāgā, dvepi hi ete aggasāvakā ‘‘mahānāgā’’ti vuccanti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho, chandādīhi na gacchantīti nāgā, tena tena maggena pahīne kilese na āgacchantīti nāgā, nānappakārakaṃ āguṃ na karontīti nāgā, ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana mahāniddese (mahāni. 80) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Apica –
“于世间不作任何罪恶,”
放下一切结缚与诸束缚 (Sabbasaṃyoge visajja bandhanāni);
于一切处不执著,已得解脱 (Sabbattha na sajjatī vimutto),
如此者被称为龙象、如者 (Nāgo tādi pavuccate tathattā) 。(《经集》527; 《大义释》80)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Āguṃ na karoti kiñci loke, Sabbasaṃyoge visajja bandhanāni; Sabbattha na sajjatī vimutto, Nāgo tādi pavuccate tathattā’’ti. (su. ni. 527; mahāni. 80);
此处应如此理解:大龙象即大龙象,意为较其余诸漏尽者之龙象,更值得供养、更值得赞叹。「相互的」即一个对一个。「同等随喜」即平等地互相随喜。当时,在这则譬喻中,大目犍连随喜了对方,而法将舍利弗则说:“贤友,请继续讲下去。”因此,经文记载:“他们相互对彼此的善说,平等地随喜赞叹。”显示巴利原文
Evamettha attho veditabbo. Mahantā nāgā mahānāgā, aññehi khīṇāsavanāgehi pujjatarā ca pāsaṃsatarā cāti attho. Aññamaññassāti añño aññassa. Samanumodiṃsūti samaṃ anumodiṃsu. Tattha imāya upamāya mahāmoggallāno anumodi, paṭibhātu taṃ āvusoti dhammasenāpati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aññamaññassa subhāsitaṃ samanumodiṃsū’’ti.
有关「世俗谛」与「究竟义」之开示的解释,至此结束。显示巴利原文
Sammutiparamatthadesanākathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
第六、《希望经》注释显示巴利原文
6. Ākaṅkheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
64 “如是我闻”等,即是《希望经》。此处,“具戒”指三种具足,即依圆满、拥有、甘甜三者而说。具体如下——显示巴利原文
64.Evaṃme sutanti ākaṅkheyyasuttaṃ. Tattha sampannasīlāti tividhaṃ sampannaṃ paripuṇṇasamaṅgimadhuravasena. Tattha –
稻田成熟丰足,鹦鹉群来啄食,啊,枭鸟!梵天!我告知你,我无法阻止他。
“梵天!我告知你,我无法阻止他。”(jā. 1.14.1)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sampannaṃ sālikedāraṃ, suvā bhuñjanti kosiya; Paṭivedemi te brahme, na naṃ vāretumussahe’’ti. (jā. 1.14.1);
此名为「圆满成就」。而「以此巴帝摩卡律仪,他已达到、已完全具备、已进入、已等至、已获得、已成就、已具足」(《分别论》511),此名为「具足成就」。「尊者!此大地的底层是圆满的,如同那纯净的小蜜一般甘美可口」(《波罗夷》17),此名为「蜜成就」。然而在此处,圆满成就与具足成就两者皆可适用。因此,「戒圆满」应当这样理解:或者成为戒行圆满的人,或者成为具足戒的人。这便是此处所说的意思。那么,所谓的「戒」,是以何种意义而称为戒的?是以「持守的意义」而称为戒。关于此点的详细解释,在《清净道论》中已有说明。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ paripuṇṇasampannaṃ nāma. ‘‘Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto upāgato samupāgato upapanno sampanno samannāgato’’ti (vibha. 511) idaṃ samaṅgisampannaṃ nāma. ‘‘Imissā, bhante, mahāpathaviyā heṭṭhimatalaṃ sampannaṃ, seyyathāpi khuddamadhuṃ aneḷakaṃ, evamassāda’’nti (pārā. 17) idaṃ madhurasampannaṃ nāma. Idha pana paripuṇṇasampannampi samaṅgisampannampi vaṭṭati. Tasmā sampannasīlāti paripuṇṇasīlā hutvātipi sīlasamaṅgino hutvātipi evamettha attho vedibbo. Sīlanti kenaṭṭhena sīlaṃ? Sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Tassa vitthārakathā visuddhimagge vuttā.
此处,「戒圆满」这一意义是说:如同通过消除田地的缺陷而成就田地圆满那样,通过消除戒的缺陷而成就戒的圆满。正如田地若同时具备「种子有缺陷」、「播种有缺陷」、「水有缺陷」、「盐碱地有缺陷」四种缺陷,便是不圆满的。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘paripuṇṇasīlā’’ti iminā atthena khettadosavigamena khettapāripūrī viya sīladosavigamena sīlapāripūrī vuttā hoti. Yathā hi khettaṃ bījakhaṇḍaṃ vappakhaṇḍaṃ udakakhaṇḍaṃ ūsakhaṇḍanti catudosasamannāgataṃ aparipūraṃ hoti.
其中,「种子有缺陷」是指种子中间夹杂着残缺或腐坏的颗粒;若播下这样的种子,庄稼便不能生长,田地就有了缺陷。「播种有缺陷」是指不善巧的人播种时,有的地方播下种子,有的地方却遗漏了;这样一来,所有地方的庄稼都不能充分生长,田地就有了缺陷。「水有缺陷」是指田地中有的地方水过多,有的地方却完全没有水;在那样的地方庄稼也不能生长,田地就有了缺陷。「盐碱地有缺陷」是指农夫在某些地方用犁反复翻耕四五次,致使土层过深而变成盐碱地;在那里庄稼不能生长,田地就有了缺陷。这样的田地,不会有大果报、大利益,即使下种很多,收获也很少。相反地,当这四种缺陷完全消除,田地便得圆满。这样的田地,就有大果报、大利益。同样地,戒若具足四种缺陷——「缺漏」、「缝隙」、「斑点」、「杂色」——便是不圆满的。这样的戒,不会有大果报、大利益。当这四种缺陷完全消除,戒田便得圆满,这样的戒,就会有大果报、大利益。显示巴利原文
Tattha bījakhaṇḍaṃ nāma yattha antarantarā bījāni khaṇḍāni vā pūtīni vā honti, tāni yattha vapanti, tattha sassaṃ na uṭṭheti, khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hoti. Vappakhaṇḍaṃ nāma yattha akusalo bījāni vapanto antarantarā nipāteti. Evañhi sabbattha sassaṃ na uṭṭheti, khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hoti. Udakakhaṇḍaṃ nāma yattha katthaci udakaṃ atibahu vā na vā hoti, tatrāpi hi sassāni na uṭṭhenti, khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hoti. Ūsakhaṇḍaṃ nāma yattha kassako kismiñci padese naṅgalena bhūmiṃ cattāro pañca vāre kasanto atigambhīraṃ karoti, tato ūsaṃ uppajjati, tatrāpi hi sassaṃ na uṭṭheti, khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hoti, tādisañca khettaṃ na mahapphalaṃ hoti na mahānisaṃsaṃ, tatrāpi hi bahumpi vapitvā appaṃ labhati. Imesaṃ pana catunnaṃ dosānaṃ vigamā khettaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti. Tādisañca khettaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsaṃ. Evameva khaṇḍaṃ chiddaṃ sabalaṃ kammāsanti catudosasamannāgataṃ sīlaṃ aparipūraṃ hoti. Tādisañca sīlaṃ na mahapphalaṃ hoti, na mahānisaṃsaṃ. Imesaṃ pana catunnaṃ dosānaṃ vigamā sīlakhettaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti, tādisañca sīlaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsaṃ.
「戒具足者」这个说法,是表达“你们应当与戒结合、与戒融合,具足戒而安住”的意思。戒成就圆满有两种原因:一是见到戒缺失的过患,二是见到戒具足的利益。这两方面在《清净道论》中都有详细说明。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sīlasamaṅgino’’ti iminā panatthena sīlena samaṅgibhūtā samodhānaṃ gatā samannāgatā hutvā viharathāti idameva vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha dvīhi kāraṇehi sampannasīlatā hoti sīlavipattiyā ca ādīnavadassanena sīlasampattiyā ca ānisaṃsadassanena. Tadubhayampi visuddhimagge vitthāritaṃ.
对此,岛寺住者善意长老这样说:“世尊用‘戒圆满’这句话总说了四遍清净戒,再用‘巴帝摩卡律仪所防护’这句,详细开示了其中最殊胜的戒。”然而,他的弟子、精通三藏的小龙长老则说:“世尊在前后两处所说的都是巴帝摩卡律仪,因为巴帝摩卡律仪才是真正的戒,其余三种只是名义上的戒。”他解释道:“所谓‘根律仪’,仅仅是指防护六根门而已;‘活命遍净’,仅仅是指以如法、正当的方式获得资具而已;‘资具依止’,仅仅是指在获得资具后,以‘这是为了什么目的’进行省察再受用而已。严格来说,只有巴帝摩卡律仪才是真正的戒。如果一个比丘的巴帝摩卡律仪已经毁坏,他就像一个被砍断头的人,不能说‘我还能保护剩下的手和脚’。但如果一个人的巴帝摩卡律仪完好无损,他就像一个未被砍断头的人,能保全性命,然后再让其余部分恢复正常并加以保护。因此,世尊用‘戒圆满’开示了巴帝摩卡律仪,再用‘具足巴帝摩卡’作为它的同义词,为了详细说明它,才说了‘巴帝摩卡律仪所防护’等。”显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti ettāvatā kira bhagavā catupārisuddhisīlaṃ uddisitvā ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutā’’ti iminā tattha jeṭṭhakasīlaṃ vitthāretvā dassesīti dīpavihāravāsī sumanatthero āha. Antevāsiko panassa tepiṭakacūḷanāgatthero āha – ubhayatthāpi pātimokkhasaṃvaro bhagavatā vutto, pātimokkhasaṃvaroyeva hi sīlaṃ. Itarāni pana tīṇi sīlanti vuttaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthīti ananujānanto vatvā āha – ‘‘indriyasaṃvaro nāma chadvārarakkhāmattakameva, ājīvapārisuddhi dhammena samena paccayuppattimattakaṃ, paccayanissitaṃ paṭiladdhapaccaye idamatthanti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanamattakaṃ. Nippariyāyena pātimokkhasaṃvarova sīlaṃ. Yassa so bhinno, ayaṃ chinnasīso viya puriso hatthapāde sesāni rakkhissatīti na vattabbo. Yassa pana so arogo, ayaṃ acchinnasīso viya puriso jīvitaṃ sesāni puna pākatikāni katvā rakkhituṃ sakkoti. Tasmā ‘sampannasīlā’ti iminā pātimokkhasaṃvaraṃ uddisitvā ‘sampannapātimokkhā’ti tasseva vevacanaṃ vatvā taṃ vitthāretvā dassento ‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutā’tiādimāhā’’ti.
其中,‘巴帝摩卡律仪所防护’是指具足巴帝摩卡律仪。‘行处与行境圆满’是指在正行与行境上都圆满。‘于微小’是指在微细的过失上。‘诸过失法’是指不善法。‘见怖畏者’是指见到怖畏。‘受持’是指正确地接受。‘修学于诸学处’是指在每一条学处上,接受并修学。又有另一种解释:所谓‘受持已,修学于诸学处’,是指对于应修学的所有身业和语业,在全部接受之后去修学。这是简要的解释;所有这些如‘巴帝摩卡律仪’等词句的详细说明,在《清净道论》中都已阐述。显示巴利原文
Tattha pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutāti pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgatā. Ācāragocarasampannāti ācārena ca gocarena ca sampannā. Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu. Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassino. Samādāyāti sammā ādiyitvā. Sikkhatha sikkhāpadesūti sikkhāpadesu taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhatha. Apica samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesūti yaṃkiñci sikkhākoṭṭhāsesu sikkhitabbaṃ kāyikaṃ vācasikañca, taṃ sabbaṃ samādāya sikkhathāti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana sabbānetāni pātimokkhasaṃvarādīni padāni visuddhimagge vuttāni.
65 “若比丘希望”一句为何而说?是为了显示持戒的功德利益。即使是刚出家不久或智慧不足的人,也可能这样想:“世尊说要圆满戒,但圆满戒究竟有什么利益、什么殊胜、什么增长呢?”为了向他们显示十七种利益,世尊如此宣说。这是为了让比丘们仅仅听闻“为同梵行者所喜爱、悦意”乃至“漏尽”等利益,便能去圆满戒。这就如同那位“毒刺商人”的故事。所谓“毒刺商人”,是指一位卖糖浆的商人。显示巴利原文
65.Ākaṅkheyya ceti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Sīlānisaṃsadassanatthaṃ. Sacepi acirapabbajitānaṃ vā duppaññānaṃ vā evamassa ‘‘bhagavā sīlaṃ pūrethāti vadati, ko nu kho sīlapūraṇe ānisaṃso, ko viseso, kā vaḍḍhī’’ti? Tesaṃ sattarasa ānisaṃse dassetuṃ evamāha. Appeva nāma etaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyamanāpatādiāsavakkhayapariyosānaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ sutvāpi sīlaṃ paripūreyyunti. Visakaṇṭakavāṇijo viya. Visakaṇṭakavāṇijo nāma guḷavāṇijo vuccati.
传说,那商人用车子装载糖块、糖浆、砂糖等,来到边地村庄,高声叫卖:“来买毒刺啊!来买毒刺啊!”村民们听到后心想:“毒是猛烈的,谁吃谁死;刺也能刺入而死。这两样都是猛烈的,能有什么好处?”于是纷纷关上家门,并把孩子们赶走。商人见此情景,心想:“这些村民不善言辞,且让我用个办法引诱他们来买。”于是改口叫卖:“来买极甜的啊!来买极美味的啊!糖块、糖浆、砂糖,价格都一样,用伪币、假钱也能买到!”村民们听了,欢喜踊跃地赶来,付了很多钱,买了很多东西。此处,商人叫卖“来买毒刺啊”,如同世尊说:“诸比丘,应具足戒而住……乃至受持而学于诸学处。”村民们心想“这两样都是猛烈的,能有什么好处呢”,如同比丘们心想:“世尊说‘应具足戒而住’,可戒被称为严厉、粗重、与嬉戏等相违,具足戒到底有什么利益?”后来商人说“来买极甜的啊”等语,如同世尊为了阐明从“为同梵行者所喜爱、悦意”直到“漏尽”的这十七种利益,而宣说了“若比丘希望”等语。应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
So kira guḷaphāṇitakhaṇḍasakkharādīni sakaṭenādāya paccantagāmaṃ gantvā ‘‘visakaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhatha, visakaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti ugghosesi. Taṃ sutvā gāmikā ‘‘visaṃ nāma kakkhaḷaṃ, yo naṃ khādati, so marati, kaṇṭakampi vijjhitvā māreti, ubhopete kakkhaḷā, ko ettha ānisaṃso’’ti gehadvārāni thakesuṃ, dārake ca palāpesuṃ. Taṃ disvā vāṇijo ‘‘avohārakusalā ime gāmikā, handa ne upāyena gaṇhāpemī’’ti ‘‘atimadhuraṃ gaṇhatha, atisāduṃ gaṇhatha, guḷaṃ phāṇitaṃ sakkharaṃ samagghaṃ labbhati, kūṭamāsakakūṭakahāpaṇādīhipi labbhatī’’ti ugghosesi. Taṃ sutvā gāmikā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā āgantvā bahumpi mūlaṃ datvā gahesuṃ. Tattha vāṇijassa ‘‘visakaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti ugghosanaṃ viya bhagavato ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharatha…pe… samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesū’’ti vacanaṃ. ‘‘Ubhopete kakkhaḷā, ko ettha ānisaṃso’’ti gāmikānaṃ cintanaṃ viya bhagavā ‘‘sampannasīlā viharathā’’ti āha, ‘‘sīlañca nāmetaṃ kakkhaḷaṃ pharusaṃ khiḍḍādipaccanīkaṃ, ko nu kho sampannasīlānaṃ ānisaṃso’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ cintanaṃ. Atha tassa vāṇijassa ‘‘atimadhuraṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādivacanaṃ viya bhagavato piyamanāpatādiāsavakkhayapariyosānaṃ sattarasaānisaṃsappakāsanatthaṃ ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce’’tiādivacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
其中,“若希望”意为如果希望、如果想要。“应成为可爱者”意为应以慈爱的眼光被看待,应成为生起情感的基础,此为所说。“悦意”意为令他们心意增长,或依他们的心意可达到,即应以慈心遍满,此为所说。“尊重”意为在他们当中应被置于尊贵地位,犹如石伞盖一般。“应被称誉”意为“确实,这位具寿知其所知、见其所见”,以这样的方式被尊重。“于诸戒上为圆满实行者”意为他唯独在四遍清净戒上是圆满实行者,以无缺、圆满的方式具足,此为所说。“内住心寂止之实践者”意为致力于自己内心的寂止,在此处,“内”与“于自己”同义,只是文句有异;而这里的“寂止”依处格,是业处的意思。“不废忘禅那者”意为禅那不向外移除,或禅那不被破坏,因为“移除、破坏”一词有移出、破坏之义。其用法,例如在“移除柱子后,成为无风之处”等语句中可见。显示巴利原文
Tattha ākaṅkheyya ceti yadi ākaṅkheyya yadi iccheyya. Piyo ca assanti piyacakkhūhi sampassitabbo, sinehuppattiyā padaṭṭhānabhūto bhaveyyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Manāpoti tesaṃ manavaḍḍhanako, tesaṃ vā manena pattabbo, mettacittena pharitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Garūti tesaṃ garuṭṭhāniyo pāsāṇacchattasadiso. Bhāvanīyoti ‘‘addhā ayamāyasmā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passatī’’ti evaṃ sambhāvanīyo. Sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti catupārisuddhisīlesuyeva paripūrakārī assa, anūnena paripūritākārena samannāgato bhaveyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ajjhattaṃ cetosamathamanuyuttoti attano cittasamathe yutto, ettha hi ajjhattanti vā attanoti vā etaṃ ekatthaṃ, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Bhummatthe panetaṃ samathanti upayogavacanaṃ. Anūti iminā upasaggena yoge siddhaṃ. Anirākatajjhānoti bahi anīhaṭajjhāno, avināsitajjhāno vā, nīharaṇavināsatthañhi idaṃ nirākaraṇaṃ nāma. Thambhaṃ niraṃkatvā nivātavuttītiādīsu cassa payogo daṭṭhabbo.
“具足观”指具备七种随观。七种随观是:无常随观、苦随观、无我随观、厌离随观、离欲随观、灭随观、弃舍随观。这些在《清净道论》中有详细阐述。“令空屋增长者”意为令空屋增长的人。在此,比丘依止观而取业处后,日夜进入空屋而坐,应知即为“令空屋增长者”。然而,即使建造了单层楼阁等殿堂,也绝不可视为令空屋增长者。显示巴利原文
Vipassanāya samannāgatoti sattavidhāya anupassanāya yutto, sattavidhā anupassanā nāma aniccānupassanā dukkhānupassanā anattānupassanā nibbidānupassanā virāgānupassanā nirodhānupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanāti. Tā visuddhimagge vitthāritā. Brūhetā suññāgārānanti vaḍḍhetā suññāgārānaṃ, ettha ca samathavipassanāvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā rattindivaṃ suññāgāraṃ pavisitvā nisīdamāno bhikkhu ‘‘brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti veditabbo. Ekabhūmakādipāsāde kurumānopi pana neva suññāgārānaṃ brūhetāti daṭṭhabboti.
至此,应如此理解:正如关于渴爱所行之教法,最初虽依渴爱而开始,然而慢与见以渴爱为所依,故将慢与见含摄其中,次第成为三种戏论的教法;同样地,此教法最初虽依增上戒学而开始,然而止与观以戒为所依,故将止与观含摄其中,次第成为三学的教法。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca yathā taṇhāvicaritadesanā paṭhamaṃ taṇhāvasena āraddhāpi taṇhāpadaṭṭhānattā mānadiṭṭhīnaṃ mānadiṭṭhiyo osaritvā kamena papañcattayadesanā jātā, evamayaṃ desanā paṭhamaṃ adhisīlasikkhāvasena āraddhāpi sīlapadaṭṭhānattā samathavipassanānaṃ samathavipassanāyo osaritvā kamena sikkhattayadesanā jātāti veditabbā.
在此,“于诸戒上为圆满实行者”这一句,宣说的是增上戒学。“内心住于寂止的实践者、不忘失禅那者”这一句,宣说的是增上心学。“具足观”这一句,宣说的是增上慧学。而“令空屋增长者”这句话,则是通过止令空屋增长而宣说增上心学,通过观令空屋增长而宣说增上慧学,如是将两种学一并含摄而说。其中,“内心住于寂止的实践者、不忘失禅那者”等语,说明了以戒防护的心一境性;“观”这一词,说明了以戒防护的对诸行的把握。显示巴利原文
Ettha hi ‘‘sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti ettāvatā adhisīlasikkhā vuttā. ‘‘Ajjhattaṃ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno’’ti ettāvatā adhicittasikkhā, ‘‘vipassanāya samannāgato’’ti ettāvatā adhipaññāsikkhā, ‘‘brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti iminā pana samathavasena suññāgāravaḍḍhane adhicittasikkhā, vipassanāvasena adhipaññāsikkhāti evaṃ dvepi sikkhā saṅgahetvā vuttā. Ettha ca ‘‘ajjhattaṃ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno’’ti imehi padehi sīlānurakkhikā eva cittekaggatā kathitā. ‘‘Vipassanāyā’’ti iminā padena sīlānurakkhiko saṅkhārapariggaho.
心一境性如何守护戒呢?因为,若没有心一境性,疾病生起时,人便生起苦恼;他为疾病所恼,内心散乱,甚至会毁坏戒禁来平息疾病。然而,若具备心一境性,他就能镇伏疾病之苦,进入等至;在入等的刹那,苦被远远除去,更殊胜的乐便生起。心一境性正是这样守护戒的。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ cittekaggatā sīlamanurakkhati? Yassa hi cittekaggatā natthi, so byādhimhi uppanne vihaññati, so byādhivihato vikkhittacitto sīlaṃ vināsetvāpi byādhivūpasamaṃ kattā hoti. Yassa pana cittekaggatā atthi, so taṃ byādhidukkhaṃ vikkhambhetvā samāpattiṃ samāpajjati, samāpannakkhaṇe dukkhaṃ dūrāpakataṃ hoti, balavatarasukhamuppajjati. Evaṃ cittekaggatā sīlaṃ anurakkhati.
对诸行的把握又如何守护戒呢?若人对诸行没有把握,便会对自己身体生起强烈的“这是我的色身、这是我的识”之我所执;遇到饥荒、疾病、怖畏等状况时,甚至会毁坏戒来养护自己的身体。然而,若人具备对诸行的把握,对自己身体便不会有强烈的我所执与爱染;遇到饥荒、疾病、怖畏等状况时,哪怕肠子流出体外,哪怕干枯萎缩,乃至肢体被截成一段段、碎裂为百片千片,也决不会毁坏戒来养护自己的身体。对诸行的把握就是这样守护戒的。而“让空寂之处增长的人”这一句,是指让这两种修习不断增长、扩展,并常恒修习。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ saṅkhārapariggaho sīlamanurakkhati? Yassa hi saṅkhārapariggaho natthi, tassa ‘‘mama rūpaṃ mama viññāṇa’’nti attabhāve balavamamattaṃ hoti, so tathārūpesu dubbhikkhabyādhibhayādīsu sampattesu sīlaṃ vināsetvāpi attabhāvaṃ posetā hoti. Yassa pana saṅkhārapariggaho atthi, tassa attabhāve balavamamattaṃ vā sineho vā na hoti, so tathārūpesu dubbhikkhabyādhibhayādīsu sampattesu sacepissa antāni bahi nikkhamanti, sacepi ussussati visussati, khaṇḍākhaṇḍiko vā hoti satadhāpi sahassadhāpi, neva sīlaṃ vināsetvā attabhāvaṃ posetā hoti. Evaṃ saṅkhārapariggaho sīlamanurakkhati. ‘‘Brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti iminā pana tasseva ubhayassa brūhanā vaḍḍhanā sātaccakiriyā dassitā.
世尊如此说明:凡是期望“愿我成为同梵行者喜爱、悦意、尊重和恭敬者”这四种法的人,不需要做其他任何事,唯一要做的便是自己具备戒等功德。因为具备这些功德者,方为同梵行者所喜爱、悦意、尊重和恭敬。此义也曾有如是说:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā yasmā ‘‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cā’’ti ime cattāro dhamme ākaṅkhantena natthaññaṃ kiñci kātabbaṃ, aññadatthu sīlādiguṇasamannāgatena bhavitabbaṃ, idiso hi sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpo garu bhāvanīyo. Vuttampi hetaṃ –
具足戒与见,安住正法,说真实之语,行应作之事,这样的人,众人便会喜爱。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sīladassanasampannaṃ , dhammaṭṭhaṃ saccavādinaṃ;
所以,世尊在教导了「比丘们,如果比丘这样期望:『我希望被同梵行者喜爱、满意、尊重,并被认为值得培养』,那他就应该在戒上圆满修习……让空寂之处增长」之后,现在因为有些人想获得资具等,也应该只修这些,而不是修别的东西,于是说:「比丘们,如果比丘期望:『我能得到利养』……」等等。要知道,世尊并不是为了利养才说戒等圆满的。世尊已经舍断了觅食之类的言论,绝不会说虚假的话,像这样教诫弟子,怎么会为了利养而说戒等圆满呢?这是随顺那些人的意乐而说的。因为有的人会这样想:『如果我们不必为衣、食、住、药四种资具而辛苦,就能圆满戒等。』世尊便随顺他们的意愿这样说。而且,这也是戒的功德利益——就是所谓的四种资具。就好像有智慧的人,拿出库房里的财物,不给自己的孩子,自己也不享用,偏偏布施给持戒的人一样。这是为了显示戒本身的利益,才这样说的。显示巴利原文
Attano kamma kubbānaṃ, taṃ jano kurute piya’’nti. (dha. pa. 217);
因此,世尊在说了「比丘们,如果比丘期望:『愿我成为同梵行者所喜爱、悦意、尊重和恭敬者』,他就应当在戒上圆满修习……乃至……乐于空寂之处」之后,现在因为想获得资具等利益的人,也应只做这件事,而不是做其他任何事,所以说了「比丘们,如果比丘期望:『愿我获得利养』……」等语。但要知道,此处并非世尊以利养为动机而说戒等圆满。因为世尊已断除觅食言论,不说虚诳之语,他如此教导弟子,怎会以利养为动机而说戒等圆满呢?这是随顺个人内心倾向而说的。因为如果有人这样想:「如果我们能不为四种资具所苦,就能圆满戒等」,世尊便随顺他们的这种心意而说。而且,这也是戒本身的功德利益——即所谓的四种资具。正如有智慧的人,把储存在库房等处的财物取出,不给子女,自己也不享用,反而布施给持戒者。这是为了显示戒本身固有的利益而说的。显示巴利原文
Tasmā ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cāti sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī…pe… suññāgārāna’’nti vatvā idāni yasmā paccayalābhādiṃ patthayantenāpi idameva karaṇīyaṃ, na aññaṃ kiñci, tasmā ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu lābhī assa’’ntiādimāha. Na cettha bhagavā lābhanimittaṃ sīlādiparipūraṇaṃ kathetīti veditabbo. Bhagavā hi ghāsesanaṃ chinnakatho na vācaṃ payuttaṃ bhaṇeti, evaṃ sāvake ovadati, so kathaṃ lābhanimittaṃ sīlādiparipūraṇaṃ kathessati, puggalajjhāsayavasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yesañhi evaṃ ajjhāsayo bhaveyya ‘‘sace mayaṃ catūhi paccayehi na kilameyyāma, sīlādiṃ pūretuṃ sakkuṇeyyāmā’’ti, tesaṃ ajjhāsayavasena bhagavā evamāha. Apica rasānisaṃso esa sīlassa, yadidaṃ cattāro paccayā nāma. Tathā hi paṇḍitamanussā koṭṭhādīsu ṭhapitaṃ nīharitvā puttādīnampi adatvā attanāpi aparibhuñjitvā sīlavantānaṃ dentīti sīlassa sarasānisaṃsadassanatthaṃ petaṃ vuttaṃ.
在第三部分,「我对其」是指我对于他们。「他们的那些所作业」是指那些天或人对我的资助供养之业。因为不只是人类,天人们也会向具足戒等功德者提供资具,就像帝释天对大迦叶尊者那样。「大果」和「大福利」这两者含义相同,只是言辞不同。能够结出广大的世间乐果,所以称为“大果”;能够成为广大的出世间乐果之缘,所以称为“大福利”。因为对于具足戒等功德者,即使只是布施一勺食物,或者用五颗宝珠大小的土地建成叶庵来布施,也能在无数千劫中保护施者免于堕入恶趣;最终更会成为证入不死涅槃界的缘。在这里,「我施予乳粥」等(《天宫事》413)是实例,而整部《饿鬼事》和《天宫事》也都足以作为证明。因此,这是为了开示:想要让施主对自己所作的布施获得大果报的人,自己也应当具备戒等功德。显示巴利原文
Tatiyavāre yesāhanti yesaṃ ahaṃ. Tesaṃ te kārāti tesaṃ devānaṃ vā manussānaṃ vā te mayi katā paccayadānakārā. Devāpi hi sīlādiguṇayuttānaṃ paccaye denti, na kevalaṃ manussāyeva, sakko viya āyasmato mahākassapassa. Mahapphalā mahānisaṃsāti ubhayametaṃ atthato ekaṃ, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Mahantaṃ vā lokiyasukhaṃ phalantīti mahapphalā. Mahato lokuttarasukhassa ca paccayā hontīti mahānisaṃsā. Sīlādiguṇayuttassa hi kaṭacchubhikkhāpi pañcaratanamattāya bhūmiyā paṇṇasālāpi katvā dinnā anekāni kappasahassāni duggativinipātato rakkhati, pariyosāne ca amatāya parinibbānadhātuyāpaccayo hoti. ‘‘Khīrodanaṃ ahamadāsi’’ntiādīni (vi. va. 413) cettha vatthūni, sakalameva vā petavatthu vimānavatthu ca sādhakaṃ. Tasmā paccayadāyakehi attani katānaṃ kārānaṃ mahapphalataṃ icchantenāpi sīlādiguṇayutteneva bhavitabbanti dasseti.
在第四部分,「亲属」指母系和父系的亲族。「同血亲」指由同一血统联结的曾祖父母等。「亡者」指已经往生他界者。「已故的」指已经死亡者。「他们对他的」指他们对我生起的净信心,或者以净信心对我的忆念。比如,若有一位比丘,他已故的父亲或母亲心想「我们这位亲属长老持戒、善法行持」,而生起净信心并忆念那位比丘,那么对那位比丘来说,仅仅是那份心的净信,或者那一念的忆念,就具有大果报、大利益,足以在无量百千劫中遮止恶趣,最终引入不死。世尊确实曾这样说:「诸比丘,那些具足戒、具足定、具足慧、具足解脱、具足解脱知见的比丘,诸比丘,我说仅仅是见到那些比丘就有大利益。诸比丘,听闻、忆念、追随出家、亲近、恭敬侍奉那些比丘,我说也有大利益。」因此,这是为了显示:即使希望亲族同血亲对自己生起净信与忆念能有大果报,也必须具足戒等功德。显示巴利原文
Catutthavāre ñātīti sassusasurapakkhikā. Sālohitāti ekalohitasambaddhā pītipitāmahādayo . Petāti peccabhāvaṃ gatā. Kālaṅkatāti matā. Tesaṃ tanti tesaṃ taṃ mayi pasannacittataṃ vā pasannena cittena anussaraṇaṃ vā. Yassa hi bhikkhuno kālaṅkato pitā vā mātā vā ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātako thero sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo’’ti pasannacitto hutvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ anussarati, tassa so cittappasādopi taṃ anussaraṇamattampi mahapphalaṃ mahānisaṃsameva hoti, anekāni kappasatasahassāni duggatito vāretuṃ ante ca amataṃ pāpetuṃ samatthameva hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ye te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū sīlasampannā samādhisampannā paññā, vimutti, vimuttiñāṇadassanasampannā, dassanaṃpāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahukāraṃ vadāmi. Savanaṃ, anussatiṃ, anupabbajjaṃ, upasaṅkamanaṃ, payirupāsanaṃpāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahukāraṃ vadāmī’’ti (itivu. 104). Tasmā ñātisālohitānaṃ attani cittappasādassa anussatiyā ca mahapphalataṃ icchantenāpi sīlādiguṇayutteneva, bhavitabbanti dasseti.
66 在第五部分,「能堪忍不乐与乐者」是指:我应成为对不乐与乐的克服者、制伏者、碾压者。在这里,「不乐」是指对殊胜的善法和僻静住处感到厌烦。「乐」是指对五种欲乐的贪着。「愿不乐不能制胜我」意思是:愿不乐不能克服我,不能压迫我,不能碾压我。「已生起」指已产生、已出现。因为具足戒等功德者,能克服、碾压不乐与乐,将其粉碎而安住。因此,为了显示:即使是希望自己成为这样的人,也必须具足戒等功德。显示巴利原文
66. Pañcamavāre aratiratisaho assanti aratiyā ratiyā ca saho abhibhavitā ajjhottharitā bhaveyyaṃ. Ettha ca aratīti adhikusalesu dhammesu pantasenāsanesu ca ukkaṇṭhā. Ratīti pañcakāmaguṇarati. Na ca maṃ arati saheyyāti mañca arati na abhibhaveyya na maddeyya na ajjhotthareyya. Uppannanti jātaṃ nibbattaṃ. Sīlādiguṇayutto hi aratiñca ratiñca sahati ajjhottharati madditvā tiṭṭhati. Tasmā īdisaṃ attānaṃ icchantenāpi sīlādiguṇayutteneva bhavitabbanti dasseti.
在第六组释中,「恐惧」既指内心的惊恐,也指所缘本身;而「怖畏」则唯指那所缘。其余的解释与第五组所说相同。因为具足戒等功德的比丘,能克服、压伏恐惧与怖畏,将其碾碎而安住,如同住在圣末山寺的大达塔长老一般。显示巴利原文
Chaṭṭhavāre bhayaṃ cittutrāsopi ārammaṇampi. Bheravaṃ ārammaṇameva. Sesaṃ pañcamavāre vuttanayameva. Sīlādiguṇayutto hi bhayabheravaṃ sahati ajjhottharati madditvā tiṭṭhati ariyakoṭiyavāsīmahādattatthero viya.
据说,长老正在行路,见一处静谧可意的树林,心想:「今日便在这里修习沙门法,然后再走。」于是离开道路,在一棵树下敷好僧伽梨,结跏趺坐。由于长老戒的威德力,树神的孩子们无法安住于自己的形态,发出了哭喊声。树神便摇动树木,长老依然端坐不动。树神接着又放烟、又烧火,却始终不能动摇长老。最后,她化作一位在家男信众的模样来到近前,顶礼长老后站在一旁。长老问:「你是谁?」她回答:「尊者,我是住在这棵树上的树神。」长老问:「刚才那些变化是你所为吗?」她答:「是的,尊者。」长老又问:「为什么这样做?」树神说:「尊者,因您戒的威德力,我的孩子们不能安住自己的形态而哭喊,我为了赶走您才这样做。」长老听后说道:「那你为何不事先对我说:『尊者,请您不要住在这里,我不得安稳』呢?如今事已至此,也不必再多说。我若因非人的怖畏而离开,便当为人所讥:『圣末山寺的大达塔因非人怖畏而走了。』我将以此为耻,因此我就要住在这里。至于你,今日可以随意到别处去住了。」如此,具足戒等功德者,正是恐惧与怖畏的克服者。因此,为了说明这层道理:显示巴利原文
Thero kira maggaṃ paṭipanno aññataraṃ pāsādikaṃ araññaṃ disvā ‘‘idhevajja samaṇadhammaṃ katvā gamissāmī’’ti maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdi. Rukkhadevatāya dārakā therassa sīlatejena sakabhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ asakkontā vissaramakaṃsu. Devatāpi rukkhaṃ cālesi. Thero acalova nisīdi. Sā devatā dhūmāyi, pajjali, neva sakkhi theraṃ cāletuṃ, tato upāsakavaṇṇenāgantvā vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. ‘‘Ko eso’’ti vuttā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, etasmiṃ rukkhe adhivatthā devatā’’ti avoca. Tvaṃ ete vikāre akāsīti. Āma bhanteti. Kasmāti ca vuttā āha – ‘‘tumhākaṃ, bhante , sīlatejena dārakā sakabhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ asakkontā vissaramakaṃsu, sāhaṃ tumhe palāpetuṃ evamakāsi’’nti. Thero āha – ‘‘atha kasmā idha, bhante, mā vasatha, mayhaṃ aphāsūti paṭikacceva nāvacāsi. Idāni pana mā kiñci avaca, ariyakoṭiyamahādatto amanussabhayena gatoti vacanato lajjāmi, tenāhaṃ idheva vasissaṃ, tvaṃ pana ajjekadivasaṃ yattha katthaci vasāhī’’ti. Evaṃ sīlādiguṇayutto bhayabheravasaho hoti. Tasmā īdisamattānaṃ icchantenāpi sīlādiguṇayutteneva bhavitabbanti dasseti.
在第七组释中,「增上心所成」:所谓「增上心」,是指殊胜、清净的心,亦即增上心。属于增上心的,或者依止于增上心的,就称为「增上心所成」。「现法乐住」:就是在现法中安住于乐。「现法」指当下现证的有身,意即在这一期生命的有身中成为安乐的住处。这是对色界禅那的称说。因为那些禅修者修习并安住于这些禅那时,就在此生成就了无杂染的出离之乐,所以称为「现法乐住」。「随意而得」:是指能随自己的意愿获得,也就是按照自己的希求,在希望入定的那一刻便能入定,即他具备这样的能力。「无难而得」:是指能不费力地镇伏敌对法而证入禅定,即他具备这样的能力。「无滞而得」:是指获得无有滞碍的宽广成就,能够随所预定的时间恰好出定,即他具备这样的能力。因为有一种人,虽然能够获得定,却不能在随心所愿的时刻随意入定;另一种人能够这样入定,却需要费力气才能镇伏障碍;还有一种人能够这样入定,且不费力就能镇伏障碍,但却不能像量米计时一样,在预定的时间恰好出定。然而,无论谁希望成就这三种圆满,他都应当在学习诸显示巴利原文
Sattamavāre ābhicetasikānanti abhicetoti abhikkantaṃ visuddhacittaṃ vuccati, adhicittaṃ vā, abhicetasi jātāni ābhicetasikāni, abhiceto sannissitānīti vā ābhicetasikāni. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānanti diṭṭhadhamme sukhavihārānaṃ. Diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkho attabhāvo vuccati, tattha sukhavihārabhūtānanti attho, rūpāvacarajjhānānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tāni hi appetvā nisinnā jhāyino imasmiṃyeva attabhāve asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ nekkhammasukhaṃ vindanti, tasmā ‘‘diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānī’’ti vuccanti. Nikāmalābhīti nikāmena lābhī attano icchāvasena lābhī, icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjituṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Akicchalābhīti sukheneva paccanīkadhamme vikkhambhetvā samāpajjituṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Akasiralābhīti akasirānaṃ vipulānaṃ lābhī, yathāparicchedeyeva vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekacco hi lābhīyeva hoti, na pana sakkoti icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjituṃ. Ekacco sakkoti tathā samāpajjituṃ, pāribandhike pana kicchena vikkhambheti. Ekacco tathā samāpajjati, pāribandhike ca akiccheneva vikkhambheti, na sakkoti nāḷikāyantaṃ viya yathāparicchedeyeva ca vuṭṭhātuṃ. Yo pana imaṃ tividhampi sampadaṃ icchati, sopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti.
在开示了作为神通基础的禅那之后,虽然已提及神通的部分,但世尊并未仅局限于神通基础禅与神通本身,因为戒的利益不止于此,还包含四种无色界禅那,以及三种较低的圣道。因此,为了全面含摄并显示这一切,世尊接着开示:“如果比丘应当期望……乃至……那些寂止的……”等语。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ abhiññāpādake jhāne vutte kiñcāpi abhiññānaṃ vāro āgato, atha kho naṃ bhagavā aggahetvāva yasmā na kevalaṃ abhiññāpādakajjhānāni ca abhiññāyoyeva ca sīlānaṃ ānisaṃso, apica kho cattāri āruppajhānānipi tayo ca heṭṭhimā ariyamaggā, tasmā taṃ sabbaṃ pariyādiyitvā dassetuṃ ākaṅkheyya ce…pe… ye te santāti evamādimāha.
在这里,“寂止”指从两方面达到寂止:诸禅支的寂止与所缘的寂止。“解脱”指从敌对法中解脱,且心倾向于所缘。“超越色”指超越色界禅那。应如此连接文句:“那些超越色的、寂止的解脱。”否则,若问“超越色后做什么?”便无法明了。“无色”指无论从所缘还是从果报来说,都没有色法。“以身触证”指以名身触证、达到,也就是证得的意思。其余如前所述。这段话的意思是:如果有比丘希望触证这些解脱而安住,他也应当在戒上圆满修习。显示巴利原文
Tattha santāti aṅgasantatāya ceva ārammaṇasantatāya ca. Vimokkhāti paccanīkadhammehi vimuttattā ārammaṇe ca adhimuttattā. Atikkamma rūpeti rūpāvacarajjhāne atikkamitvā, ye te vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe santāti padasambandho, itarathā hi atikkamma rūpe kiṃ karotīti na paññāyeyyuṃ. Āruppāti ārammaṇato ca vipākato ca rūpavirahitā. Kāyena phusitvāti nāmakāyena phusitvā pāpuṇitvā, adhigantvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttānameva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘yopi bhikkhu ime vimokkhe phusitvā viharitukāmo, sopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti.
67 第九番,“三结”指称为“有身见”、“疑”、“戒禁取”的三种束缚。它们将蕴、趣、有等与蕴、趣、有等联结,或将业与果联结,所以称为“结”,意思是‘束缚’。“遍尽”指透过彻底灭尽。“入流者”:已进入流。“流”是道的别名。“入流者”指具足此道的补特伽罗。如经中所说:“舍利弗,常说流、流。舍利弗,什么是流呢?”“尊者,这圣八支道就是流,即:正见……乃至……正定。”“舍利弗,常说入流者、入流者。舍利弗,什么是入流者呢?”“尊者,凡具足此八支圣道的人,即这位有如此名字、如此族姓的尊者,就称为入流者。”然而在这里,是以道之名来称呼果,因此应知“入流者”指安住于果位者。“不退堕法”:令其堕落的,称为‘堕落’;没有堕落之法,故为“不退堕法”,意思是自身不具堕入恶趣的性质。为什么呢?因为导致堕入恶趣的那些法已被断除。“以正觉为归宿”:以正觉为最终的去向和归宿,意思是必定到达上三种道。为什么呢?因为已证得初道。“就在戒上”:即使是想要成为这样的人,也应当圆满修习那些戒。显示巴利原文
67. Navamavāre tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānanti sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ bandhanānaṃ. Tāni hi saṃyojenti khandhagatibhavādīhi khandhagatibhavādayo, kammaṃ vā phalena, tasmā saṃyojanānīti vuccanti, bandhanānīti attho. Parikkhayāti parikkhayena. Sotāpannoti sotaṃ āpanno. Sototi ca maggassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sotāpannoti taṃsamaṅgipuggalassa. Yathāha ‘‘soto sototi hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sototi? Ayameva hi, bhante, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhīti. Sotāpanno sotāpannoti hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sotāpannoti? Yo hi, bhante, iminā aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena samannāgato, ayaṃ vuccati sotāpanno, yoyaṃ āyasmā evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto’’ti. Idha pana maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinnaṃ, tasmā phalaṭṭho ‘‘sotāpanno’’ti veditabbo. Avinipātadhammoti vinipātetīti vinipāto, nāssa vinipāto dhammoti avinipātadhammo, na attānaṃ apāye vinipātasabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Ye dhammā apāyagamaniyā, tesaṃ pahīnattā. Sambodhi paraṃ ayanaṃ gati assāti sambodhiparāyaṇo, uparimaggattayaṃ avassaṃ sampāpakoti attho. Kasmā? Paṭiladdhapaṭhamamaggattā. Sīlesvevāti īdiso hotukāmopi sīlesvevassa paripūraṇārīti.
在第十番中,为了称赞一来道,虽初道已彻底灭尽三结,却仍予以提及。「贪嗔痴变得薄弱」是指这些烦恼处于薄弱状态,或者说使其变得薄弱。其中,应从两方面理解薄弱:不频繁生起,以及现行烦恼的力量微弱。因为一来者的烦恼不会像随转凡夫那样常常生起,只是偶尔、极少地生起,呈现稀疏之相,如同在播种稀疏的田地里长出的稻苗。即使生起,也不会像随转凡夫那样以压倒、弥漫、覆盖、制造黑暗的方式生起,而是非常微弱、稀薄地生起,犹如薄云层,又如苍蝇的翅膀。显示巴利原文
Dasamavāre paṭhamamaggena parikkhīṇānipi tīṇi saṃyojanāni sakadāgāmimaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttāni. Rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttāti etesaṃ tanubhāvena, tanuttakaraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha dvīhi kāraṇehi tanuttaṃ veditabbaṃ adhiccuppattiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya ca. Sakadāgāmissa hi vaṭṭānusārimahājanasseva kilesā abhiṇhaṃ na uppajjanti, kadāci karahaci uppajjanti viraḷākārā hutvā, viraḷavāpite khette aṅkurā viya. Uppajjamānāpi ca vaṭṭānusārimahājanasseva maddantā pharantā chādentā andhakāraṃ karontā na uppajjanti, mandamandā uppajjanti tanukākārā hutvā, abbhapaṭalamiva makkhikāpattamiva ca.
对此,有些长老说:‘一来者的烦恼即使很久才生起,但生起时却很浓厚,因为确实可见他有子女。’然而,这不能作为定论,因为有子女也可能仅仅是由于触碰肢节而已。应当知道,一来者烦恼变得薄弱,仅仅是由于两个原因:不频繁生起,以及现行烦恼的力量微弱。显示巴利原文
Tattha keci therā bhaṇanti ‘‘sakadāgāmissa kilesā kiñcāpi cirena uppajjanti, bahalāva uppajjanti, tathā hissa puttā ca dhītaro ca dissantī’’ti, etaṃ pana appamāṇaṃ. Puttadhītaro hi aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanamattenapi hontīti. Dvīhiyeva kāraṇehissa kilesānaṃ tanuttaṃ veditabbaṃ adhiccuppattiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya cāti.
「一来者」:即只来一次之法性。「只一次来此世间之后」:仅仅一次,以结生的方式再来这个人界。因为,若有人在人界修习一来道后就在人界般涅槃,此处不取;若在人界修道后投生天界并在那里般涅槃;若在天界修道并在那里般涅槃;若在天界修道后投生人界并在那里般涅槃,这些也不取。唯有那种在人界修道后投生天界,在天界住满寿量,然后又转生人界才般涅槃的人,应知才是此处所取的「一来者」。「作苦之尽头」:应为流转之苦画上句号。「即于戒上」:即使是想要成为这样的人,也应圆满修习那些戒。显示巴利原文
Sakadāgāmīti sakiṃ āgamanadhammo. Sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvāti ekavāraṃyeva imaṃ manussalokaṃ paṭisandhivasena āgantvā. Yopi hi idha sakadāgāmimaggaṃ bhāvetvā idheva parinibbāti, sopi idha na gahito. Yopi idha maggaṃ bhāvetvā devesu upapajjitvā tattheva parinibbāti. Yopi devaloke maggaṃ bhāvetvā tattheva parinibbāti. Yopi devaloke maggaṃ bhāvetvā idheva manussaloke nibbattitvā parinibbāti. Yo pana idha maggaṃ bhāvetvā devaloke nibbatto, tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā puna idheva upapajjitvā parinibbāti, ayamidha gahitoti veditabbo. Dukkhassantaṃ kareyyanti vaṭṭadukkhassa paricchedaṃ kareyyaṃ. Sīlesvevāti īdiso hotukāmopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti.
第十一论题中,“五种”是数量上的界定。“下分结”:“下”指下方、低处,“下分”意为属于下部的,意即作为投生欲界之缘的结缚。“结”即束缚。应知这些结即前述诸结,再加上欲贪结与瞋恚结。因为若人未断除这些结,纵使投生至有顶天,寿尽时也必定还堕欲界。应知此人犹如吞钩之鱼,又如脚系长绳之鸟。此处重提前说,亦应领会为旨在称叹。“化生者”:此言在否定其余生起方式。“于彼处般涅槃者”:即于彼梵天界中入般涅槃。“不退转法”:其本性不复从彼梵天界退转、再受后有。“即就这些戒分而言”:即使是志求这些成就之人,亦当圆满修习这些诸戒。显示巴利原文
Ekādasamavāre pañcannanti gaṇanaparicchedo. Orambhāgiyānanti oraṃ vuccati heṭṭhā, heṭṭhābhāgiyānanti attho, kāmāvacaraloke uppattipaccayānanti adhippāyo. Saṃyojanānanti bandhanānaṃ, tāni kāmarāgabyāpādasaṃyojanehi saddhiṃ pubbe vuttasaṃyojanāneva veditabbāni. Yassa hi etāni appahīnāni, so kiñcāpi bhavagge uppanno hoti, atha kho āyuparikkhayā kāmāvacare nibbattatiyeva, gilitabalisamacchūpamo svāyaṃ puggalo dīghasuttakena pāde baddhavihaṅgūpamo cāti veditabbo. Pubbe vuttānampi cettha vacanaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthamevāti veditabbaṃ. Opapātikoti sesayonipaṭikkhepavacanametaṃ. Tatthaparinibbāyīti tattheva brahmaloke parinibbāyī. Anāvattidhammo tasmā lokāti tato brahmalokā paṭisandhivasena puna anāvattisabhāvo. Sīlesvevāti īdiso hotukāmopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti.
68 如是,在说完不来道之后,虽然第四道的部分已然现前,但世尊并未接着直说。这其中的原因是:戒的功德利益并非仅仅在漏尽通这一项,世间五通同样是戒的殊胜利益,因此,为了开示那些世间通;再者,若说完漏尽,教法便告圆满结束,若如是,则这些功德尚未宣说,此教法便成了所谓的“光秃秃的通智之说”;此外,亦是为了圆满开显诸通;再者,安住不来道者,因已彻底断除定的障碍——欲贪与瞋恚,故易于成就神变,可以说,不来者在戒与定上都是具足圆满的行持者。因此,为于此处开示世间通智,世尊才说了“若比丘期望……种种的……”等语。这便是此处上下文的衔接关联。显示巴利原文
68. Evaṃ anāgāmimagge vutte kiñcāpi catutthamaggassa vāro āgato, atha kho naṃ bhagavā aggahetvāva yasmā na kevalā āsavakkhayābhiññā eva sīlānaṃ ānisaṃso, apica kho lokiyapañcābhiññāyopi, tasmā tāpi dassetuṃ, yasmā ca āsavakkhaye kathite desanā niṭṭhitā hoti, evañca sati imesaṃ guṇānaṃ akathitattā ayaṃ kathā muṇḍābhiññākathā nāma bhaveyya, tasmā ca abhiññāpāripūriṃ katvā dassetumpi, yasmā ca anāgāmimagge ṭhitassa sukhena iddhivikuppanā ijjhati, samādhiparibandhānaṃ kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ samūhatattā, anāgāmī hi sīlesu ca samādhimhi ca paripūrakārī, tasmā yuttaṭṭhāneyeva lokiyābhiññāyo dassetumpi ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce…pe… anekavihita’’nti evamādimāhāti ayamanusandhi.
此中,对以“种种神变”等方法所摄的五种世间通,其经文的注释及相应的修习方法,已于《清净道论》中阐述。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘anekavihitaṃ iddhividha’’ntiādinā nayena āgatānaṃ pañcannampi lokiyābhiññānaṃ pāḷivaṇṇanā saddhiṃ bhāvanānayena visuddhimagge vuttā.
69 第六通「以诸漏之灭尽」:即依阿罗汉道灭尽一切烦恼。「无漏」:即远离诸漏。「心解脱、慧解脱」:在此,用“心”一词指与阿罗汉果相应的定,用“慧”一词指与彼相应的慧。于其中应知:定因从贪欲解脱,故称心解脱;慧因从无明解脱,故称慧解脱。世尊亦曾如是说:“诸比丘,凡彼所有之定,即是其定根;凡彼所有之慧,即是其慧根。诸比丘,如是,因离贪欲而有心解脱,因离无明而有慧解脱。”再者,于此复应了知:止成就之果为心解脱,观成就之果为慧解脱。显示巴利原文
69. Chaṭṭhābhiññāya āsavānaṃ khayāti arahattamaggena sabbakilesānaṃ khayā. Anāsavanti āsavavirahitaṃ. Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti ettha cetovacanena arahattaphalasampayuttova samādhi, paññāvacanena taṃsampayuttā paññāva vuttā. Tattha ca samādhi rāgato vimuttattā cetovimutti, paññā avijjāya vimuttattā paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yo hissa, bhikkhave, samādhi, tadassa samādhindriyaṃ. Yā hissa, bhikkhave, paññā, tadassa paññindriyaṃ. Iti kho, bhikkhave , rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttī’’ti, apicettha samathaphalaṃ cetovimutti, vipassanāphalaṃ paññāvimuttīti veditabbā.
「于现法」:即于此自身存在之中。「自己以神通现证」:意谓完全依自慧亲证,不由他缘而了知。「具足而住」:即达到、成就之后而住。「唯独于戒上」:即使是这样一位欲抖落一切烦恼、证得心解脱与慧解脱的行者,亦唯独于戒上成为圆满的修行者。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanoyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparapaccayena ñatvāti attho. Upasampajja vihareyyanti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā vihareyyaṃ. Sīlesvevāti evaṃ sabbāsave niddhunitvā cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ adhigantukāmopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti.
如是,世尊从戒的功德利益之说,一路敷演至于阿罗汉果。今欲总摄这一切戒的功德利益以示之,故说结语:“诸比丘,具足戒……此为缘此而说。”此段简要之义为:“诸比丘,汝等当具足戒而安住……于诸学处受持修学”——凡我先前如是所说,悉皆指向:具足戒之比丘,将成为同梵行者所喜爱、可意者,将受尊重恭敬,将成为资具之获得者,将令供养资具者得大果报,将因追念过去亲友之心意而获殊胜果报,能忍受不乐与乐,能忍受怖畏恐惧,能获得色界禅那与无色界禅那,以及较低等的三种沙门果、五种世间神通、漏尽智——他成为这些功德的亲证者,依神通现证。此为缘于此、关于此而说。”世尊作是说已,诸比丘内心满意欣悦,于世尊之教导深生欢喜。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā sīlānisaṃsakathaṃ yāva arahattā kathetvā idāni sabbampi taṃ sīlānisaṃsaṃ sampiṇḍetvā dassento nigamanaṃ āha ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave…pe… idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho, ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharatha…pe… samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesū’’ti iti yaṃ taṃ mayā pubbe evaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ sabbampi sampannasīlo bhikkhu sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpo, garu bhāvanīyo paccayānaṃ lābhī, paccayadāyakānaṃ mahapphalakaro, pubbañātīnaṃ anussaraṇacetanāya phalamahattakaro, aratiratisaho, bhayabheravasaho, rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ arūpāvacarajjhānānañca lābhī, heṭṭhimāni tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni pañca lokiyābhiññā āsavakkhayañāṇanti ca ime ca guṇe sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikattā hoti, etaṃ paṭicca idaṃ sandhāya vuttanti. Idamavoca bhagavā, attamanā te bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
《布经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Vatthasuttavaṇṇanā
70 “如是我闻”指的是《布喻经》。在此,“诸比丘,犹如布”云云,只是一个譬喻的说法。世尊作譬喻时,有时先出示譬喻再说明义理,有时先说明义理再出示譬喻,有时以譬喻包裹义理而显示,有时以义理包裹譬喻而显示。显示巴利原文
70.Evaṃme sutanti vatthasuttaṃ. Tattha seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vatthanti upamāvacanamevetaṃ. Upamaṃ karonto ca bhagavā katthaci paṭhamaṃyeva upamaṃ dassetvā pacchā atthaṃ dasseti, katthaci paṭhamamatthaṃ dassetvā pacchā upamaṃ, katthaci upamāya atthaṃ parivāretvā dasseti, katthaci atthena upamaṃ.
确实如此:世尊开示整部《天行使者经》时,先出示譬喻:“诸比丘,譬如有两间带门的屋子,一个有眼力的人站在中间就能看见”(《中部》3.261),然后再说明义理。而在开示整部《神通种类经》时,却先说明义理:“穿过墙、穿过壁、穿过山,无所阻碍地行进,犹如在空中一般”(《长部》1.238;《无碍解道》1.102),然后再出示譬喻。开示整部《小心材譬喻经》时,他以“譬如有一个婆罗门男子,是求心材者、寻求心材者”(《中部》1.318)这种方式,用譬喻将义理包裹起来而显示。开示诸如《蛇譬喻经》、《大心材譬喻经》等经时,他以“然而诸比丘,在此有些善男子学习法——经……乃至……诸比丘,譬如有人需要蛇”(《中部》1.238)这种方式,用义理将譬喻包裹起来而显示。显示巴利原文
Tathā hesa – ‘‘seyyathāpissu, bhikkhave, dve agārā sadvārā, tattha cakkhumā puriso majjhe ṭhito passeyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.261) sakalampi devadūtasuttaṃ upamaṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetvā pacchā atthaṃ dassento āha. ‘‘Tirokuṭṭaṃ tiropākāraṃ tiropabbataṃ asajjamāno gacchati, seyyathāpi ākāse’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.238; paṭi. ma. 1.102) pana nayena sakalampi iddhividhamatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetvā pacchā upamaṃ dassento āha. ‘‘Seyyathāpi brāhmaṇapuriso sāratthiko sāragavesī’’tiādināva (ma. ni. 1.318) nayena sakalampi cūḷasāropamasuttaṃ upamāya atthaṃ parivāretvā dassento āha. ‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacce kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti suttaṃ…pe… seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso alagaddatthiko’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.238) nayena sakalampi alagaddasuttaṃ mahāsāropamasuttanti evamādīni suttāni atthena upamaṃ parivāretvā dassento āha.
而世尊在这里,是先出示譬喻,再说明其中义理。那么,世尊为何要这样显示呢?这是因为随顺听法者的性情,或是因说法方式的善巧。对于那些先出示譬喻、再听法义便容易通达的人,世尊就先出示譬喻。这个道理在一切场合都适用。又因世尊善巧通达法界,便获得了说法方式的善巧。因此,这位具足说法善巧、于法自在的法王,便随其所欲而宣说正法。应当知道,世尊正是这样随顺听法者的性情,或凭借说法方式的善巧而如此显示的。显示巴利原文
Svāyaṃ idha paṭhamaṃ upamaṃ dassetvā pacchā atthaṃ dasseti. Kasmā panevaṃ bhagavā dassetīti? Puggalajjhāsayena vā desanāvilāsena vā. Ye hi puggalā paṭhamaṃ upamaṃ dassetvā vuccamānamatthaṃ sukhena paṭivijjhanti, tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ upamaṃ dasseti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yassā ca dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā desanāvilāsaṃ patto hoti, tassā suppaṭividdhā. Tasmā esa desanāvilāsampatto dhammissaro dhammarājā, so yathā yathā icchati, tathā tathā dhammaṃ desetīti evaṃ iminā puggalajjhāsayena vā desanāvilāsena vā evaṃ dassetīti veditabbo.
这里,“布”是指本性清净的布。“染污、被垢所著”:指被外来尘土等杂染所染污,又因汗垢等附着,故称为被垢所著。“染料种类”在此即指染料。“移近”指将布凑近。“如果要染成青色”:即为了染成青色的布料而将布移近青铜、青叶等青色染料;同样,若要染黄色,便移近颜色如迦尼迦罗花般的黄色染料;若要染红色,便移近颜色如般度耆婆迦花般的红色染料;若要染茜色,便移近颜色如夹竹桃花般的淡红色染料。因此,经文说:“如果要染成青色……乃至……如果要染成茜色”。显示巴利原文
Tattha vatthanti pakatiparisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ. Saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ malaggahitanti āgantukena paṃsurajādinā saṃkilesena saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ, sedajallikādinā malena gahitattā malaggahitaṃ. Raṅgajāteti ettha raṅgameva raṅgajātaṃ. Upasaṃhareyyāti upanāmeyya. Yadi nīlakāyāti nīlakāya vā, nīlakatthāya vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ sabbattha. Rajako hi nīlakatthāya upasaṃharanto kaṃsanīlapalāsanīlādike nīlaraṅge upasaṃharati. Pītakatthāya upasaṃharanto kaṇikārapupphasadise pītakaraṅge. Lohitakatthāya upasaṃharanto bandhujīvakapupphasadise lohitakaraṅge. Mañjiṭṭhakatthāya upasaṃharanto kaṇavīrapupphasadise mandarattaraṅge. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yadi nīlakāya…pe… yadi mañjiṭṭhakāyā’’ti.
“它会有难看的颜色罢了”:指它会有染得极为难看的颜色。“它会有不清净的颜色罢了”:指它的青色并不纯清,其他颜色也是如此。因为这样的布,即使放入青染缸,也不会变成纯青色;放入其他染缸,也不会成为纯黄色等,只会呈现像枯萎的青色、野生荆豆花、迦尼迦罗花、般度耆婆迦花、夹竹桃花那样的颜色。那么,“那是什么原因呢?”是指这块布是由于什么原因、什么因缘而变成这样的,或者说,在那块布上,染料是什么原因而让它染得这般难看、这般不清净呢?正是因为布本身有杂染的状态才是这里的原因,与其他任何东西都没有关联,所以世尊说:“比丘们,是因为布不清净。”显示巴利原文
Durattavaṇṇamevassāti duṭṭhu rañjitavaṇṇameva assa. Aparisuddhavaṇṇamevassāti nīlavaṇṇopissa parisuddho na bhaveyya, sesavaṇṇopi. Tādisañhi vatthaṃ nīlakumbhiyā pakkhittampi sunīlaṃ na hoti, sesakumbhīsu pakkhittampi pītakādivaṇṇaṃ na hoti, milātanīla kuraṇḍa-kaṇikāra-bandhujīvaka-kaṇavīrapupphavaṇṇameva hoti. Taṃ kissa hetūti taṃ vatthaṃ kissa hetu kiṃ kāraṇā īdisaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ vā vatthe raṅgajātaṃ kissa hetu īdisaṃ durattavaṇṇaṃ aparisuddhavaṇṇaṃ hotīti? Yasmā panassa vatthassa saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvoyevettha kāraṇaṃ, na aññaṃ kiñci, tasmā ‘‘aparisuddhattā, bhikkhave, vatthassā’’ti āha.
“同样地”是表明譬喻的对应。“在心有杂染时”:指心被杂染之时。那么,世尊为什么要用染污的布来作譬喻呢?是为了显示精进努力有大果报。正如被外来尘垢所染的布,因为本性洁白,再次清洗时又能变得洁白;不像生来就黑的羊毛,努力也毫无效果。同样,心被外来的烦恼所染污,但在其本性上,于一切结生心和有分心的刹那中,它都是洁白的。正如经中所说:“比丘们,此心极光净,唯被外来的随烦恼所染污。”(《增支部》1.51)在净化它时,能够令它更为光净,此处所付出的努力决不会白费。因此,应当知道,世尊用染污的布作譬喻,是为了显示精进努力有大果报。显示巴利原文
Evameva khoti upamāsampaṭipādanaṃ. Citte saṃkiliṭṭheti cittamhi saṃkiliṭṭhamhi. Kasmā pana bhagavā saṃkiliṭṭhavatthena opammaṃ akāsīti ce, vāyāmamahapphaladassanatthaṃ. Yathā hi āgantukehi malehi saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ vatthaṃ pakatiyā paṇḍarattā puna dhovīyamānaṃ paṇḍaraṃ hoti, na tattha jātikāḷake viya eḷakalome vāyāmo nipphalo hoti, evaṃ cittampi āgantukehi kilesehi saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ. Pakatiyā pana taṃ sakalepi paṭisandhibhavaṅgavāre paṇḍarameva. Yathāha – ‘‘pabhassaramidaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, tañca kho āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭha’’nti (a. ni. 1.51). Taṃ visodhīyamānaṃ sakkā pabhassarataraṃ kātuṃ, na tattha vāyāmo nipphaloti evaṃ vāyāmamahapphaladassanatthaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhavatthena opammaṃ akāsīti veditabbo.
“必将堕入悲惨境地”是指:当心处于如此状态时,便可预见其必堕悲惨境地;此人必定只堕入悲惨境地,决非别处。因此称之为‘必将’,意即必定发生。而这悲惨境地,分为两类:行为的悲惨境地与投生的悲惨境地。行为的悲惨境地又分为两种:在家者行为的悲惨境地与出家者行为的悲惨境地。显示巴利原文
Duggati pāṭikaṅkhāti īdise citte duggati pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, duggatiṃ eva esa pāpuṇissati , nāññanti evaṃ duggati icchitabbā, avassaṃ bhāvīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sā cāyaṃ duggati nāma paṭipattiduggati, gatiduggatīti duvidhā hoti. Paṭipattiduggatipi agāriyapaṭipattiduggati, anagāriyapaṭipattiduggatīti duvidhā hoti.
在家人若心生杂染,便会杀生、不与取,乃至遍行十不善业道,这便是他作为在家者的行为悲惨境地。他处于此状态,身坏命终后,便会堕入地狱、畜生道或饿鬼界,这便是他投生处的悲惨境地。显示巴利原文
Agāriyo hi saṃkiliṭṭhacitto pāṇampi hanati, adinnampi ādiyati, sakalepi dasa akusalakammapathe pūreti, ayamassa agāriyapaṭipattiduggati. So tattha ṭhito kāyassa bhedā nirayampi gacchati, tiracchānayonimpi, pettivisayampi gacchati, ayamassa gatiduggati.
而在教法中出家的出家人,若心生杂染,便会为人传递消息,行医治病,从事分裂僧团、破坏塔庙之事,以布施竹等物谋生计,乃至遍行一切非威仪、非行处,这便是他出家者行为的悲惨境地。他安住于此,身坏命终后,便堕地狱、畜生道或饿鬼界,成为所谓的沙门夜叉、沙门饿鬼,其身燃烧,所披的僧伽梨衣等亦皆燃烧,发出八种哀嚎之声,四处游荡,这便是他投生处的悲惨境地。显示巴利原文
Anagāriyopi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajito saṃkiliṭṭhacitto dūteyyapahiṇagamanaṃ gacchati, vejjakammaṃ karoti, saṅghabhedāya cetiyabhedāya parakkamati, veḷudānādīhi jīvikaṃ kappeti, sakalampi anācāraṃ agocarañca paripūreti, ayamassa anagāriyapaṭipattiduggati.So tattha ṭhito kāyassa bhedā nirayampi gacchati, tiracchānayonimpi, pettivisayampi gacchati samaṇayakkho nāma hoti samaṇapeto, ādittehi saṅghāṭiādīhi sampajjalitakāyo aṭṭassaraṃ karonto vicarati, ayamassa gatiduggati.
「譬如」一词,是为显示善净一面而开始宣说。其义理,应从前文所述黑暗面的相反意义中来理解。此处,善趣又分为两种:行道善趣与生处善趣。行道善趣又分为在家者的行道善趣与出家者的行道善趣。在家者若心清净,便能远离杀生、远离不与取,乃至圆满十善业道,这便是其在家者的行道善趣。安住于此之后,身坏命终,即能往生人间的大富贵身或天界的大福报身,这便是其生处善趣。显示巴利原文
Seyyathāpīti sukkapakkhaṃ dassetumāraddho, tassattho kaṇhapakkhe vuttapaccanīkeneva veditabbo. Etthāpi ca sugati nāma paṭipattisugati gatisugatīti duvidhā hoti. Paṭipattisugatipi agāriyapaṭipattisugati anagāriyapaṭipattisugatīti duvidhā hoti. Agāriyo hi parisuddhacitto pāṇātipātāpi viramati, adinnādānāpi, sakalepi dasa kusalakammapathe paripūreti, ayamassa agāriyapaṭipattisugati. So tattha ṭhito kāyassa bhedā manussamahantatampi devamahantatampi upapajjati, ayamassa gatisugati.
出家者于正法律中出家之后,清净自心,圆满四种遍净戒,受持十三头陀支,于三十八所缘中选取适合自己的业处,安住于边陲的坐卧处,修习遍作相,生起诸禅那等至,修习入流道……乃至……修习不还道,这便是其出家者的行道善趣。安住于此之后,身坏命终,即能往生人间世界的三大家、或六欲天、或十梵世间、或五净居天、或四无色处,这便是其生处善趣。显示巴利原文
Anagāriyopi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvā parisuddhacitto catupārisuddhisīlaṃ sodheti, terasa dhutaṅgāni samādiyati, aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu attano anukūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā pantasenāsane paṭisevamāno kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā jhānasamāpattiyo nibbatteti, sotāpattimaggaṃ bhāveti…pe… anāgāmimaggaṃ bhāveti, ayamassa anagāriyapaṭipattisugati. So tattha ṭhito kāyassa bhedā manussaloke vā tīsu mahākulesu, chasu vā kāmāvacaradevesu, dasasu vā brahmabhavanesu , pañcasu vā suddhāvāsesu, catūsu vā āruppesu upapajjati, ayamassa gatisugatīti.
71 如此,于说明「染污心者应期待恶趣,不染污心者应期待善趣」之后,为指出心被哪些随烦恼所染污,世尊说:「诸比丘,何等为心的随烦恼?即贪欲与邪贪……」等语。显示巴利原文
71. Evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhe citte duggati pāṭikaṅkhā, asaṃkiliṭṭhe ca sugatīti vatvā idāni yehi upakkilesehi cittaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ hoti, te dassento katame ca, bhikkhave, cittassa upakkilesā? Abhijjhā visamalobhotiādimāha.
在此,于己物所起的欲贪是“贪欲”,于他物所起的不正贪求是“邪贪”。或者可以这样分别:不论是对己物还是他物,在合宜如法的情形下生起的欲贪是“贪欲”,在不合宜不如法的情形下生起的欲贪是“邪贪”。然而,大长老却说:“你们为何要作此区分呢?不论合宜还是不合宜,因为佛说‘贪为不正,嗔为不正,痴为不正’(《分别论》924),所以没有哪种贪不是不正的。因此,贪本身以‘贪求’的意义而称为‘贪欲’,以‘不正’的意义而称为‘邪’,二者同义,只是言辞有别罢了。”而这种贪欲、邪贪一旦生起,便会染污其心,令心不能光洁明耀,故称为“心的随烦恼”。显示巴利原文
Tattha sakabhaṇḍe chandarāgo abhijjhā, parabhaṇḍe visamalobho. Atha vā sakabhaṇḍe vā parabhaṇḍe vā hotu, yuttapattaṭṭhāne chandarāgo abhijjhā, ayuttāpattaṭṭhāne visamalobho. Thero panāha ‘‘kissa vinibbhogaṃ karotha, yutte vā ayutte vā hotu, ‘rāgo visamaṃ doso visamaṃ moho visama’nti (vibha. 924) vacanato na koci lobho avisamo nāma, tasmā lobhoyeva abhijjhāyanaṭṭhena abhijjhā, visamaṭṭhena visamaṃ, ekatthametaṃ byañjanameva nāna’’nti. So panesa abhijjhāvisamalobho uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
与此相同,依九种嗔怒事而生起的是“嗔恚”,依十种嗔怒事而生起的是“忿怒”。一再缠缚内心的是“怨恨”。破坏在家者或出家者善行的是“覆”。譬如,在家者因某人怜悯,从贫贱被提举到高位,后来却想:“你曾为我做过什么?”就这样破坏了对方的善行。出家者也是如此,从沙弥时起,便被亲教师或依止阿阇梨以四事资具及教导、提问来摄受,授以说法、论典及利生善巧等。其后,若获得国王、大臣等的恭敬尊重,便对亲教师、依止阿阇梨不恭不敬,别人指责道:“这人年少时,我们如此摄受抚育他,如今却毫无情义。”他若说:“你们曾为我做过什么?”就这样破坏了他们的善行。这种“覆”一旦生起,便会染污其心,令心不能光洁明耀,故称为“心的随烦恼”。显示巴利原文
Yathā cesa, evaṃ navavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo byāpādo. Dasavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo kodho. Punappunaṃ cittapariyonandhano upanāho. Agāriyassa vā anagāriyassa vā sukatakaraṇavināsano makkho. Agāriyopi hi kenaci anukampakena daliddo samāno ucce ṭhāne ṭhapito, aparena samayena ‘‘kiṃ tayā mayhaṃ kata’’nti tassa sukatakaraṇaṃ vināseti. Anagāriyopi sāmaṇerakālato pabhuti ācariyena vā upajjhāyena vā catūhi paccayehi uddesaparipucchāhi ca anuggahetvā dhammakathānayapakaraṇakosallādīni sikkhāpito, aparena samayena rājarājamahāmattādīhi sakkato garukato ācariyupajjhāyesu acittīkato caramāno ‘‘ayaṃ amhehi daharakāle evaṃ anuggahito saṃvaḍḍhito ca, atha panidāni nissineho jāto’’ti vuccamāno ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ tumhehi kata’’nti tesaṃ sukatakaraṇaṃ vināseti, tassa so sukatakaraṇavināsano makkho uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
与此相同,对于多闻之人,内心被压伏后,以“像这样多闻的人,其来世去向尚不确定,你我又有什么差别”等方式,生起执持高下的较量的,是“恼害”。对于他人所得的恭敬等加以讥嫌的,是“嫉妒”。不能容忍自己的成就为他人所共享的,是“悭吝”。行谄曲之事的,是“谄”。由狡诈习性而生起的,是“诳”。狡诈之人,犹如Āyatana鱼。据说,Āyatana鱼在鱼群中便露出尾巴,在蛇群中便露出头,让对方知道“我与你们是同类”。同样,狡诈之人无论亲近经师还是论师,总是说:“我是您的随从,您是悲悯我的人,我绝不离开您。”他心中盘算:“这样他们就会认为‘此人对我们有恭敬,有信心’。”这种由狡诈习性所产生的“诳”,一旦生起,便会染污其心,令心不能光洁明耀,故称为“心的随烦恼”。显示巴利原文
Yathā cāyaṃ, evaṃ bahussutepi puggale ajjhottharitvā ‘‘īdisassa ceva bahussutassa aniyatā gati, tava vā mama vā ko viseso’’tiādinā nayena uppajjamāno yugaggāhagāhī paḷāso. Paresaṃ sakkārādīni khīyanā issā. Attano sampattiyā parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ asahamānaṃ macchariyaṃ. Vañcanikacariyabhūtā māyā. Kerāṭikabhāvena uppajjamānaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ. Kerāṭiko hi āyatanamaccho viya hoti. Āyatanamaccho nāma kira macchānaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ dasseti sappānaṃ sīsaṃ , ‘‘tumhehi sadiso aha’’nti jānāpetuṃ. Evameva kerāṭiko puggalo yaṃ yaṃ suttantikaṃ vā ābhidhammikaṃ vā upasaṅkamati, taṃ taṃ evaṃ vadati ‘‘ahaṃ tumhākaṃ baddhacaro, tumhe mayhaṃ anukampakā, nāhaṃ tumhe muñcāmī’’ti ‘‘evamete ‘sagāravo ayaṃ amhesu sappatisso’ti maññissantī’’ti. Tassetaṃ kerāṭikabhāvena uppajjamānaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
正如这样,身体僵硬、昂首挺立、举止不温和,犹如充满气的皮囊一般,这称为「顽」。比这更进一步的,便是「暴」。此「暴」可由两方面生起:依不善与依善。其中,在家者见到他人所作的装饰等,生起想要更胜倍胜的心;出家者对于他人学习或讲说的多少,以慢心生起‘我要胜过,我要倍胜过’的心,这就是不善的暴。而在家者见到他人施舍一餐饭,自己便想施舍两餐、三餐,由此生起的心;出家者见到他人掌握了一部尼迦耶,不依慢心,仅因见此便策励自己克服懈怠,想要掌握两部尼迦耶,由此生起的心,这就是善的暴。然而,这里所指的,是不善的那种。当此不善的暴生起时,便会染污心,不让心明亮照耀,因此称为「心的随烦恼」。显示巴利原文
Yathā cetaṃ, evaṃ vātabharitabhastasadisathaddhabhāvapaggahitasiraanivātavuttikārakaraṇo thambho. Taduttarikaraṇo sārambho. So duvidhena labbhati akusalavasena ceva kusalavasena ca. Tattha agāriyassa parena kataṃ alaṅkārādiṃ disvā taddiguṇakaraṇena uppajjamāno, anagāriyassa ca yattakaṃ yattakaṃ paro pariyāpuṇāti vā katheti vā, mānavasena taddiguṇataddiguṇakaraṇena uppajjamāno akusalo. Agāriyassa pana paraṃ ekaṃ salākabhattaṃ dentaṃ disvā attanā dve vā tīṇi vā dātukāmatāya uppajjamāno, anagāriyassa ca parena ekanikāye gahite mānaṃ anissāya kevalaṃ taṃ disvā attanā ālasiyaṃ abhibhuyya dve nikāye gahetukāmatāya uppajjamāno kusalo. Idha pana akusalo adhippeto. Ayañhi uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
正如这样,基于出身等而令心高举、转起的,是「慢」;极度高举的,是「过慢」;沉醉于所取之相的是「憍」;于五欲功德放纵自心而生起的,是「放逸」。这些一旦生起,便会染污心,不让心明亮照耀,因此称为「心的随烦恼」。显示巴利原文
Yathā cāyaṃ, evaṃ jātiādīni nissāya cittassa uṇṇativasena pavattamāno māno, accuṇṇativasena atimāno, madaggahaṇākāro mado, kāmaguṇesu cittavossaggavasena uppajjamāno pamādo uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
然而,世尊在开示随烦恼时,为何以贪等为首而说呢?因为贪是最先生起的。一切有情无论生于何处,乃至净居天,最初都会以对‘有’的渴爱而生起贪,随后,依各自相应的缘,其余烦恼才随之生起。而且,不应当认为只有这十六种是心的随烦恼,应知依此义门,一切烦恼皆已含摄其中。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana bhagavā upakkilesaṃ dassento lobhamādiṃ katvā dassetīti? Tassa paṭhamuppattito. Sabbasattānañhi yattha katthaci upapannānaṃ antamaso suddhāvāsabhūmiyampi sabbapaṭhamaṃ bhavanikantivasena lobho uppajjati, tato attano attano anurūpapaccayaṃ paṭicca yathāsambhavaṃ itare, na ca ete soḷaseva cittassa upakkilesā, etena pana nayena sabbepi kilesā gahitāyeva hontīti veditabbā.
72 以上说明了染污。现在为显示清净,世尊说:“诸比丘,那位……”等等。此中,“如是知已”(iti viditvā)指这样了知之后。“断”(pajahatī)是指通过正断的方式,由圣道予以断除。对于此种断除,应从烦恼的次第和道的次第两方面来理解。从烦恼的次第来说:贪欲邪贪、顽、暴、慢、过慢、憍这六种烦恼,由阿拉汉道断除;嗔、忿、恨、放逸这四种烦恼,由不来道断除;覆、恼害、嫉妒、悭吝、谄、诳这六种烦恼,由入流道断除。从道的次第来说:由入流道断除覆、恼害、嫉妒、悭吝、谄、诳六种;由不来道断除嗔、忿、恨、放逸四种;由阿拉汉道断除贪欲邪贪、顽、暴、慢、过慢、憍六种。显示巴利原文
72. Ettāvatā saṃkilesaṃ dassetvā idāni vodānaṃ dassento sa kho so, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha iti viditvāti evaṃ jānitvā. Pajahatīti samucchedappahānavasena ariyamaggena pajahati. Tattha kilesapaṭipāṭiyā maggapaṭipāṭiyāti dvidhā pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kilesapaṭipāṭiyā tāva abhijjhāvisamalobho thambho sārambho māno atimāno madoti ime cha kilesā arahattamaggena pahīyanti. Byāpādo kodho upanāho pamādoti ime cattāro kilesā anāgāmimaggena pahīyanti. Makkho paḷāso issā macchariyaṃ māyā sāṭheyyanti ime cha sotāpattimaggena pahīyantīti. Maggapaṭipāṭiyā pana, sotāpattimaggena makkho paḷāso issā macchariyaṃ māyā sāṭheyyanti ime cha pahīyanti. Anāgāmimaggena byāpādo kodho upanāho pamādoti ime cattāro. Arahattamaggena abhijjhāvisamalobho thambho sārambho māno atimāno madoti ime cha pahīyantīti.
然而,在此处,这些烦恼无论原本应由入流道所断,还是由其余道所断,当知世尊其实是针对应当由不来道断除的烦恼,而说了“他断除了心的随烦恼——贪欲邪贪……”等语。这也是此处依传承而来的合理意义,而且因为在上面已明确说明第四道(阿拉汉道),所以这样理解是恰当的。由于贪欲邪贪等是第三道(不来道)所残留下来的烦恼,故由那一道来断除;而其余烦恼,则只由这一道(不来道)来断除。实际上,即使是入流道所断的烦恼,由于能令他们生起的心尚未被彻底舍断,所以只有靠不来道才能将它们完全断除。或者,若有人于此处主张由初道(入流道)断除,则会导致前后矛盾。也有人说这只是镇伏断,那不过是他们自己的臆想罢了。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ime kilesā sotāpattimaggavajjhā vā hontu, sesamaggavajjhā vā, atha kho anāgāmimaggeneva pahānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘abhijjhāvisamalobhaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahatī’’tiādimāhāti veditabbā. Ayamettha paveṇimaggāgato sambhavo, so ca upari catutthamaggasseva niddiṭṭhattā yujjati, tatiyamaggena pahīnāvasesānañhi visamalobhādīnaṃ tena pahānaṃ hoti, sesānaṃ imināva. Yepi hi sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti, tepi taṃsamuṭṭhāpakacittānaṃ appahīnattā anāgāmimaggeneva suppahīnā hontīti. Keci pana paṭhamamaggena cettha pahānaṃ vaṇṇayanti, taṃ pubbāparena na sandhiyati. Keci vikkhambhanappahānampi, taṃ tesaṃ icchāmattameva.
73 73. “诸比丘,何时……”句中,“yato”指“某个时候”。而“已断除”(pahīno hoti)是针对不来道生起刹那的断除而说。显示巴利原文
73.Yatokho, bhikkhaveti ettha yatoti yamhi kāle. Pahīno hotīti anāgāmimaggakkhaṇe pahānaṃ sandhāyevāha.
74 “他于佛具足不坏净信”等语,应如下配合各句来理解:“诸比丘,当他已断除贪欲邪贪之时,他便于佛具足不坏净信……”这位比丘已由不来道证得出世间净信,之后在别的时刻随念佛、法、僧的功德时,又生起了世间净信。世尊为了显示他这兼具世间与出世间两分的净信,便说了“于佛具足不坏净信”等语。显示巴利原文
74.So buddhe aveccappasādenāti etaṃ ‘‘yato kho, bhikkhave, abhijjhāvisamalobho pahīno hoti, so buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hotī’’ti evaṃ ekamekena padena yojetabbaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno anāgāmimaggena lokuttarappasādo āgato, athassa aparena samayena buddhaguṇe dhammaguṇe saṅghaguṇe ca anussarato lokiyo uppajjati, tamassa sabbampi lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ pasādaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādenā’’tiādimāha.
此处,“不坏净信”是指,因如实了知佛、法、僧的功德而生起的不动摇、不退失的净信。接着,为了说明那位比丘在随念时如何生起此不坏净信,世尊以“彼世尊亦是……”等方式,详细开示了三种随念。这些内容的释义,在《清净道论》的“随念论”中已作周全阐述。显示巴利原文
Tattha aveccappasādenāti buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇānaṃ yāthāvato ñātattā acalena accutena pasādena. Idāni yathā tassa bhikkhuno anussarato so aveccappasādo uppanno, taṃ vidhiṃ dassento ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā nayena tīṇi anussatiṭṭhānāni vitthāresi. Tesaṃ atthavaṇṇanā sabbākārena visuddhimagge anussatikathāyaṃ vuttā.
75 如此显示了那位比丘兼具世间与出世间两分的净信之后,现在为说明他在省察烦恼的断除及自身具足不坏净信时,会生起喜悦等利益,世尊便开示了“在某种程度上……”等语。正如国王平息了边境发生的盗贼祸乱、安住于都城后,回想此事时便会感到满意一样,那位不来者在省察“这些烦恼和那些烦恼已被我断除”时,也同样会生起殊胜的喜悦。为了显示此义,世尊才说了“在某种程度上……”等语。显示巴利原文
75. Evamassa lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ pasādaṃ dassetvā idāni kilesappahānaṃ aveccappasādasamannāgatañca paccavekkhato uppajjamānaṃ somanassādiānisaṃsaṃ dassento yathodhi kho panassātiādimāha. Anāgāmissa hi paccante vuṭṭhitaṃ corupaddavaṃ vūpasametvā taṃ paccavekkhato mahānagare vasantassa rañño viya ime cime ca mama kilesā pahīnāti attano kilesappahānaṃ paccavekkhato balavasomanassaṃ uppajjati. Taṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘yathodhi kho panassā’’tiādimāha.
这里的意思是:那位不还比丘,如此具备“于佛具足不坏净信……(中略)于法……于僧……为世间无上福田”,对他而言,“于某部分已断舍、已弃舍”——即按各自部分而断舍,那些烦恼品类已被吐出、解脱、断除、弃舍。“依各自部分”有两种:烦恼的部分与道的部分。其中,从烦恼部分来说,属于某一道所应断的烦恼,不与其余道所应断的烦恼相混杂,即依其自身所属的部分而被断除。从道部分来说,应由某一道所断的烦恼,即由该道断除。如此,依各自部分,那些烦恼品类才真正被断舍、弃舍。当他这样省察而获得喜悦,并在此基础上更获得“义的喜悦”,进而能说“我于佛具足不坏净信”——这便是前后的关联。显示巴利原文
Tassattho – yvāyaṃ anāgāmī bhikkhu evaṃ ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti…pe… dhamme…pe… saṅghe…pe… anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassā’’ti, tassa yathodhi kho cattaṃ hoti paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, sakasakaodhivasena cattameva hoti, taṃ taṃ kilesajātaṃ vantaṃ muttaṃ pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ. Sakasakaodhivasenāti dve odhī kilesodhi ca maggodhi ca. Tattha kilesodhivasenāpi ye kilesā yaṃ maggavajjhā, te aññamaggavajjhehi amissā hutvā sakeneva odhinā pahīnā. Maggodhivasenāpi ye kilesā yena maggena pahātabbā, tena teyeva pahīnā honti. Evaṃ sakasakaodhivasena taṃ taṃ kilesajātaṃ cattameva hoti paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ paccavekkhitvā ca laddhasomanasso tatuttaripi so ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhī’’ti labhati atthavedanti sambandho.
此外,也有“Yatodhi kho”这样的读法。依此读法,其含义是:这位比丘的烦恼,在某种程度上已被断舍、已出离。其中,“yato”是表示原因的词,意思是“因为”。“odhi”(有分)是指下面的三个道。为什么?因为这三道划分了范围、作了分类,把应由上道断除的烦恼保留下来而断除,所以称为“有分”。而阿拉汉道则毫无剩余地断除一切烦恼,所以称为“无分”。这位比丘的烦恼是由下三道所断舍的,因此说“因为在某种程度上已被断舍”。句子中的“kho pana”只是语气词。综合的意义是:因为他这样有分地断舍、出离了烦恼,所以他在省察之后获得喜悦,进而更“获得了义的喜悦”,并能说“我于佛具足不坏净信”——应按照经文的句子这样来理解。显示巴利原文
Yatodhi khotipi pāṭho. Tassa vasena ayamattho, assa bhikkhuno yatodhi kho pana cattaṃ hoti paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ. Tattha yatoti kāraṇavacanaṃ, yasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Odhīti heṭṭhā tayo maggā vuccanti. Kasmā? Te hi odhiṃ katvā koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā uparimaggena pahātabbakilese ṭhapetvā pajahanti, tasmā odhīti vuccanti. Arahattamaggo pana kiñci kilesaṃ anavasesetvā pajahati, tasmā anodhīti vuccati. Imassa ca bhikkhuno heṭṭhāmaggattayena cattaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yatodhi kho panassa cattaṃ hotī’’ti. Tattha kho panāti nipātamattaṃ. Ayaṃ pana piṇḍattho. Yasmā assa odhi cattaṃ hoti paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, tasmā taṃ paccavekkhitvā ca laddhasomanasso tatuttaripi so ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhī’’ti labhati atthavedanti yathāpāḷi netabbaṃ.
其中,「已断(cattaṃ)」:这是从舍弃自体的角度而说的。「已吐出(vantaṃ)」:这是为了显示不执取的状态而说的。「已解脱(muttaṃ)」:这是为了显示从相续中脱离而说的。「已断除(pahīnaṃ)」:这是为了显示即使解脱后于某处也不停留而说的。「已出离(paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ)」:则是为了显示先前曾执取者的舍离,或显示面向彼的出离状态,或显示以修习力征服而出的状态。所谓“获得义悦、获得法悦”中:于佛等的不坏净信本身就是「义(attha)」,因为应被亲近——也就是应被归投;而能持、令不堕者为「法(dhamma)」。「悦(veda)」既指典据,也指智,也指喜悦。如在“三吠陀通达者”等处,「悦」指典据;在“若人知彼婆罗门为吠陀通达者、无所有、不染着于欲有”等处,指智;在“生于悦者游于世”等处,指喜悦。而此处则意指喜悦以及与喜悦相应之智,因此,“获得义悦、获得法悦”应理解为“获得缘于不坏净信的喜悦和喜悦之智”。显示巴利原文
Tattha cattanti idaṃ sakabhāvapariccajanavasena vuttaṃ. Vantanti idaṃ pana anādiyanabhāvadassanavasena. Muttanti idaṃ santatito vinimocanavasena. Pahīnanti idaṃ muttassapi kvaci anavaṭṭhānadassanavasena. Paṭinissaṭṭhanti idaṃ pubbe ādinnapubbassa paṭinissaggadassanavasena paṭimukhaṃ vā nissaṭṭhabhāvadassanavasena bhāvanābalena abhibhuyya nissaṭṭhabhāvadassanavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Labhati atthavedaṃ labhati dhammavedanti ettha buddhādīsu aveccappasādoyeva araṇīyato attho, upagantabbatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhāraṇato dhammo, vinipatituṃ appadānatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vedoti ganthopi ñāṇampi somanassampi. ‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.256) hi gantho ‘‘vedo’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Yaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vedagumābhijaññā, akiñcanaṃ kāmabhāve asatta’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 1065) ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ye vedajātā vicaranti loke’’tiādīsu somanassaṃ. Idha pana somanassañca somanassasampayuttañāṇañca adhippetaṃ, tasmā ‘‘labhati atthavedaṃ labhati dhammavedanti aveccappasādārammaṇasomanassañca somanassamayañāṇañca labhatī’’ti evamettha attho veditabbo.
又或,‘义悦’是指省察不坏净信时所生起、如前所述的悦;‘法悦’是指省察不坏净信之因——即分断烦恼——时所生起、如前所述的悦。依此亦可理解其义。诚如所言:‘于因之智为法无碍解,于因之果之智为义无碍解’(《分别论》718-719)。‘与法相应的欢悦’:即省察此义、此法,以及由义、法功德所成的悦而生起的欢悦。因为此欢悦与具有无过失特性、由省察而生起的法相应,故说‘与法相应’。‘欢喜者生喜’:由欢悦而欢喜者,生起无染的喜。‘喜心者’:由彼喜而心得满足。‘身轻安’:身亦得轻安,止息了不安。‘轻安之身有乐’:如此止息身不安后,感受心所之乐。‘心定’:心善安住,如入安止般不动。显示巴利原文
Atha vā atthavedanti aveccappasādaṃ paccavekkhato uppannaṃ vuttappakārameva vedaṃ. Dhammavedanti aveccappasādassa hetuṃ odhiso kilesappahānaṃ paccavekkhato uppannaṃ vuttappakārameva vedanti evampi ettha attho veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā, hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 718-719). Dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjanti tameva atthañca dhammañca atthadhammānisaṃsabhūtaṃ vedañca paccavekkhato uppannaṃ pāmojjaṃ. Tañhi anavajjalakkhaṇena paccavekkhaṇākārappavattena dhammena upasañhitanti vuccati. Pamuditassa pīti jāyatīti iminā pāmojjena pamuditassa nirāmisā pīti jāyati. Pītimanassāti tāya pītiyā pīṇitamanassa. Kāyo passambhatīti kāyopi passaddho hoti vūpasantadaratho. Passaddhakāyo sukhanti evaṃ vūpasantakāyadaratho cetasikaṃ sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti cittaṃ sammā ādhiyati appitaṃ viya acalaṃ tiṭṭhati.
76 76. 如此,在显示了观察烦恼断除与具足不坏净信所带来的喜悦等利益之后,现在,为了阐明他观察的样态,世尊以“于我而言,依所断之程度……”的方式开示,并为了显示不来道之威德果报,而宣说“诸比丘,彼……”等。显示巴利原文
76. Evamassa kilesappahānaṃ aveccappasādasamannāgataṃ paccavekkhato uppajjamānaṃ somanassādiānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘yathodhi kho pana me’’ti vārena tassa paccavekkhaṇāya pavattākāraṃ pakāsetvā tasseva anāgāmimaggānubhāvasūcakaṃ phalaṃ dassento sa kho so, bhikkhavetiādimāha.
其中,‘如是戒’:显示与不来道相应的戒蕴。‘如是定’、‘如是慧’:显示与彼相应的定蕴与慧蕴。‘良米’:指红米、香米等各种米。‘团食’:指饭食。‘拣除黑粒’:即去除了黑粒。对于这样的比丘,前述那种团食,于道或果皆不成为障碍。因为对于已得功德者,它又能有何障碍呢?即使是为了证得而着手修观的、尚未获得第四道与第四果者,那种食物亦不成为障碍,实不能成为障碍。何以故?因其心已由上述戒、定、慧所摄之道而得到净化。显示巴利原文
Tattha evaṃsīloti tassa anāgāmimaggasampayuttaṃ sīlakkhandhaṃ dasseti. Evaṃdhammo evaṃpaññoti taṃsampayuttameva samādhikkhandhaṃ paññākkhandhañca dasseti. Sālīnanti lohitasāligandhasāliādīnaṃ anekarūpānaṃ. Piṇḍapātanti odanaṃ. Vicitakāḷakanti apanītakāḷakaṃ. Nevassa taṃ hoti antarāyāyāti tassa evaṃvidhassa bhikkhuno taṃ vuttappakārapiṇḍapātabhojanaṃ maggassa vā phalassa vā neva antarāyāya hoti, paṭiladdhaguṇassa hi taṃ kimantarāyaṃ karissati? Yopissa appaṭiladdho catutthamaggo ca phalaṃ ca tappaṭilābhāya vipassanaṃ ārabhatopi nevassa taṃ hoti antarāyāya, antarāyaṃ kātuṃ asamatthameva hoti. Kasmā? Vuttappakārasīladhammapaññāsaṅgahena maggena visuddhacittattā.
在此,正因为这是原因,为显示与之相应的比喻,便说“犹如”等开头的语句。显示巴利原文
Yasmā cettha etadeva kāraṇaṃ, tasmā tadanurūpaṃ upamaṃ dassento seyyathāpītiādimāha.
其中,“洁净(accha)”:即清净。“清净(parisuddha)”:指因垢秽消除而纯净。“皎洁(pariyodāta)”:指因光辉而明净。“冶金师之锻造口(ukkāmukha)”:即金匠的坩埚口。在此,金匠的坩埚称为“锻造(ukka)”,但在其他地方,灯具等也被这样称呼。如《长部·1.159》说“在持举的灯火中”,那里的“灯火”即称为“锻造”。《中部·3.360》说“应绑缚火炬,绑缚火炬后点燃锻造口”,此“锻造口”指炭火盆。《本生经·2.22.649》说“犹如铁匠的锻造,内部燃烧而不外耀”,此“锻造”指铁匠的熔炉。《长部·1.24》说“果报如此者,将有流星陨落”,“流星陨落”之风即被称为“锻造”。但是,在此处以及“以钳子夹取纯金后投入锻造口中”等类似文句中,应将金匠的坩埚理解为“锻造”。显示巴利原文
Tattha acchanti vippasannaṃ. Parisuddhaṃ malavigamena. Pariyodātaṃ pabhassaratāya. Ukkāmukhanti suvaṇṇakārānaṃ mūsāmukhaṃ. Suvaṇṇakārānaṃ mūsā hi idha ukkā, aññattha pana dīpikādayopi vuccanti. ‘‘Ukkāsu dhārīyamānāsū’’ti (dī. ni. 1.159) hi āgataṭṭhāne dīpikā ‘‘ukkā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Ukkaṃ bandheyya, ukkaṃ bandhitvā ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpeyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.360) āgataṭṭhāne aṅgārakapallaṃ. ‘‘Kammārānaṃ yathā ukkā, anto jhāyati no bahī’’ti (jā. 2.22.649) āgataṭṭhāne kammāruddhanaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃvipāko ukkāpāto bhavissatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.24) āgataṭṭhāne vātavego ‘‘ukkā’’ti vuccati. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne aññesu ca evarūpesu ‘‘saṇḍāsena jātarūpaṃ gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipatī’’ti āgataṭṭhānesu suvaṇṇakārānaṃ mūsā ‘‘ukkā’’ti veditabbā.
此处,这个比喻的对应关系应这样看待:正如污秽的布料与污秽的纯金,这位比丘在凡夫时,其心随逐于欲贪等垢秽。正如澄净的水与锻造口,不来道也是如此。如同依靠那水与锻造口,布料与金子得以清净;同样地,这位比丘依靠上述包含戒、定、慧的不来道,证得了心清净。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ upamāsaṃsandanā – saṃkiliṭṭhavatthaṃ viya hi saṃkiliṭṭhajātarūpaṃ viya ca imassa bhikkhuno puthujjanakāle kāmarāgādimalānugataṃ cittaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Acchodakaṃ viya ukkāmukhaṃ viya ca anāgāmimaggo. Taṃ udakaṃ ukkāmukhañca āgamma vatthasuvaṇṇānaṃ parisuddhatā viya tassa bhikkhuno vuttappakārasīladhammapaññāsaṅgahaṃ anāgāmimaggaṃ āgamma visuddhacittatāti.
77 “他以慈俱行之心”等语,是依随顺连结的方式展开的开示。连结有三种:提问连结、意乐连结、随顺连结。其中,“如是说时,有一位比丘对世尊这样说:‘尊者,若外处不存时,可有怖畏?’‘比丘,会有。’世尊说”(《中部·1.242》)。如此,随顺提问者而作解答的经文,应知为提问连结。“婆罗门,你或许正是这样吧?又或许直至今日,沙门乔达摩仍是不离贪者吧?”(《中部·1.55》)。如此,在知道他人意乐后所说的经文,应知为意乐连结。然而,在这些经文中,开示由某一法率先发起,随后依该法的随顺法或对立法而展开后续开示,据此应知为随顺连结。例如,在《愿求经》中,先由下部的戒发起,随后宣说上部的六神通。在《锯喻经》中,先由下部的忍辱发起,随后宣说上部的锯喻教诫。在《蛇喻经》中,先由下部的邪见说明发起,随后宣说上部的三转空性阐明。在《小马邑经》中,先由下部的烦恼说明发起,随后宣说上部的梵住。在《憍赏弥经》中,先由下部的诤论发起,随后宣说上部的六和敬法。在此《衣经》中……”
},
{显示巴利原文
77.So mettāsahagatena cetasāti yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā. Tayo hi anusandhī pucchānusandhi ajjhāsayānusandhi yathānusandhīti. Tattha ‘‘evaṃ vutte aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṃ etadavoca ‘siyā nu kho, bhante, bahiddhā asati paritassanā’ti? ‘Siyā bhikkhū’ti bhagavā avocā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.242). Evaṃ pucchantānaṃ vissajjitasuttavasena pucchānusandhi veditabbo. ‘‘Siyā kho pana te brāhmaṇa evamassa, ajjāpi nūna samaṇo gotamo avītarāgo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.55) evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā vuttassa suttassa vasena ajjhāsayānusandhi veditabbo. Yena pana dhammena ādimhi desanā uṭṭhitā, tassa dhammassa anurūpadhammavasena vā paṭipakkhavasena vā yesu suttesu upari desanā āgacchati, tesaṃ vasena yathānusandhi veditabbo . Seyyathidaṃ, ākaṅkheyyasutte heṭṭhā sīlena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari cha abhiññā āgatā. Kakacūpame heṭṭhā akkhantiyā uṭṭhitā, upari kakacūpamovādo āgato. Alagadde heṭṭhā diṭṭhiparidīpanena uṭṭhitā, upari tiparivaṭṭasuññatāpakāsanā āgatā, cūḷaassapure heṭṭhā kilesaparidīpanena uṭṭhitā, upari brahmavihārā āgatā. Kosambiyasutte heṭṭhā bhaṇḍanena uṭṭhitā, upari sāraṇīyadhammā āgatā. Imasmimpi vatthasutte heṭṭhā kilesaparidīpanena uṭṭhitā, upari brahmavihārā āgatā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā’’ti. Brahmavihāresu pana anupadavaṇṇanā ca bhāvanānayo ca sabbo sabbākārena visuddhimagge vutto.
78 世尊这样开示了:梵住修习是对治贪欲等杂染烦恼的,由于完全断除欲贪和嗔恨,摧毁了怨敌,从而获得立足处,这是不来者的梵住修习。现在,为了开示他的观,进而显示证得阿拉汉果,而说“他这样了知‘有此’”等语。显示巴利原文
78. Evaṃ bhagavā abhijjhādīnaṃ upakkilesānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ sabbaso ca kāmarāgabyāpādappahānena vihatapaccatthikattā laddhapadaṭṭhānaṃ tassa anāgāmino brahmavihārabhāvanaṃ dassetvā idānissa arahattāya vipassanaṃ dassetvā arahattappattiṃ dassetuṃ so atthi idantiādimāha.
其意思是:那位不来者如此修习梵住之后,从任一梵住出定,对于这些梵住法,依其名称,及其所依的心所依处与作为所依的所造色等,按照“真实及所依色的存在”这一理趣,对真实法与所生色法加以确定之后,了知“有此”。至此,他即对苦谛作了确定。接着,通达苦之因,了知“有劣”。至此,即对集谛作了确定。接着,探寻它的断除之道,了知“有胜”。至此,即对道谛作了确定。接着,探寻由彼道所应证得的境界,了知“有超越此想所及之出离”。意思是:“在我所证得的这些梵住想所及的境界之上,还有更为超胜的出离,即涅槃。”他这样了知。至此,即对灭谛作了确定。“他这样知、这样见”:即他以观慧,以此四种方式了知四谛;以道慧,如此照见。如同《怖畏经》中所说的方法:“心从欲漏……乃至……了知:‘这是最后生,不再有后有。’”显示巴利原文
Tassattho – so anāgāmī evaṃ bhāvitabrahmavihāro etesaṃ brahmavihārānaṃ yato kutoci vuṭṭhāya te eva brahmavihāradhamme nāmavasena tesaṃ nissayaṃ hadayavatthuṃ vatthunissayāni bhūtānīti iminā nayena bhūtupādāyadhamme rūpavasena ca vavatthapetvā atthi idanti pajānāti, ettāvatānena dukkhasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Tato tassa dukkhassa samudayaṃ paṭivijjhanto atthi hīnanti pajānāti, ettāvatānena samudayasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Tato tassa pahānupāyaṃ vicinanto atthi paṇītanti pajānāti, ettāvatānena maggasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Tato tena maggena adhigantabbaṭṭhānaṃ vicinanto atthi uttari imassa saññāgatassa nissaraṇanti pajānāti, imassa mayā adhigatassa brahmavihārasaññāgatassa uttari nissaraṇaṃ nibbānaṃ atthīti evaṃ pajānātīti adhippāyo, ettāvatānena nirodhasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa vipassanāpaññāya evaṃ catūhi ākārehi cattāri saccāni jānato, maggapaññāya evaṃ passato, bhayabherave vuttanayeneva kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccati…pe… itthattāyāti pajānātīti.
世尊将开示导向阿拉汉果之后,因为在那集会中坐着一位信奉沐浴清净的婆罗门,世尊了知他听闻如此赞叹沐浴清净后,便会出家并证得阿拉汉果。因此,为了警策他,世尊特别说出这段连接语:“比丘们!这位比丘称为‘以内净沐浴而沐浴者’。”其中,“内净沐浴”即是以内在烦恼的出离而行沐浴。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ yāva arahattā desanaṃ pāpetvā idāni yasmā tassaṃ parisati nhānasuddhiko brāhmaṇo nisinno, so evaṃ nhānasuddhiyā vaṇṇaṃ vuccamānaṃ sutvā pabbajitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatīti bhagavatā vidito, tasmā tassa codanatthāya ‘‘ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sināto antarena sinānenā’’ti imaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ anusandhimāha. Tattha antarena sinānenāti abbhantarena kilesavuṭṭhānasinānena.
79 “孙陀利迦婆罗堕阇”:那位婆罗门随自己的族姓名为婆罗堕阇,但他认为在孙陀利迦河中沐浴能断除罪恶,这是他的见解,由此被称为“孙陀利迦婆罗堕阇”。他听了世尊的这番话后,心中思惟:“我们赞叹沐浴清净,沙门乔达摩也同样赞叹,看来如今他与我们志同道合了。”于是,他以为世尊去了跋呼迦河并在那里冲净罪恶而返回,便问道:“尊者乔达摩是否去跋呼迦河沐浴了?”世尊为破除这位婆罗门的邪见,既不回答“去”,也不回答“不去”,而是说:“婆罗门,跋呼迦河能做什么?跋呼迦河能做什么呢?”其意义是:去跋呼迦河有何意义?它能做什么?它对任何人都毫无助益,我去那里做什么呢?显示巴利原文
79.Sundarikabhāradvājoti bhāradvājo nāma so brāhmaṇo attano gottavasena, sundarikāya pana nadiyā sinātassa pāpappahānaṃ hotīti ayamassa diṭṭhi, tasmā ‘‘sundarikabhāradvājo’’ti vuccati. So taṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ sutvā cintesi ‘‘mayaṃ sinānasuddhiṃ vaṇṇema, samaṇopi gotamo tatheva vaṇṇeti, samānacchando dāni esa amhehī’’ti. Atha bhagavantaṃ bāhukaṃ nadiṃ gantvā taṃ tattha pāpaṃ pavāhetvā āgataṃ viya maññamāno āha ‘‘gacchati pana bhavaṃ gotamo bāhukaṃ nadiṃ sināyitu’’nti? Bhagavā tassa gacchāmīti vā na gacchāmīti vā avatvāyeva brāhmaṇassa diṭṭhisamugghātaṃ kattukāmo ‘‘kiṃ brāhmaṇa bāhukāya nadiyā , kiṃ bāhukā nadī karissatī’’ti āha. Tassattho kiṃ payojanaṃ bāhukāya, kiṃ sā karissati? Asamatthā sā kassaci atthāya, kiṃ tattha gamissāmīti?
于是那位婆罗门称赞它,说了“公认能净化粗恶”等语。其中,“公认能净化粗恶”:指被公认具有粗恶的性质;所谓粗恶的性质,即清净的状态,人们认为它能给予清净,因此得到这样的公认。另有异读作“公认能导向优胜”,其意义是:被公认为能令人到达殊胜的世界。“公认有福德”:意为被公认为福德。“冲走”:指带走、净化。“以偈颂说出”:即用偈颂来宣说。所说的偈颂,或者只是为了说明其中义理而对欢喜偈颂者而说,或者是为了说明特别的义理。但在此处,应当知道这两首偈颂是为说明两种义理而说。显示巴利原文
Atha brāhmaṇo taṃ pasaṃsanto lokkhasammatātiādimāha. Tattha lokkhasammatāti lūkhabhāvasammatā, lūkhabhāvanti cokkhabhāvaṃ, visuddhibhāvaṃ detīti evaṃ sammatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Lokyasammatātipi pāṭho. Tassattho, seṭṭhaṃ lokaṃ gamayatīti evaṃ sammatāti. Puññasammatāti puññanti sammatā. Pavāhetīti gamayati visodheti. Gāthāhi ajjhabhāsīti gāthāhi abhāsi. Gāthā ca vuccamānā tadatthadīpanatthameva vā gāthārucikānaṃ vuccati, visesatthadīpanatthaṃ vā. Idha panetā ubhayatthadīpanatthaṃ vuttāti veditabbā.
“跋呼迦”一词在此处正是为了说明这个意思,其余词语则是为了说明特别的意义。因为正如世人前往跋呼迦河,他们同样前往阿提卡卡等河,希望通过沐浴洗除罪过。那些住得离这些地方近的人,每日沐浴三次;住得较远的,则依次每日两次、每日一次、隔日一次,乃至隔年沐浴一次。而那些完全无法前往的人,也会用瓶子从那里取水回来沐浴。然而这一切都毫无意义。因此,为了阐明这一特别的意义,才说了“阿提卡卡等”之语。显示巴利原文
Bāhukanti idameva hi ettha vacanaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ, sesāni visesatthadīpakāni. Yatheva hi bāhukaṃ, evaṃ adhikakkādīnipi loko gacchati nhānena pāpaṃ pavāhetuṃ. Tattha ye tesaṃ ṭhānānaṃ āsannā honti, te divasassa tikkhattuṃ nhāyanti. Ye dūrā, te yathākkamaṃ dvikkhattuṃ sakiṃ ekadivasantaraṃ, evaṃ yāva saṃvaccharantaraṃ nhāyanti. Ye pana sabbathāpi gantuṃ na sakkonti, te ghaṭehipi tato udakaṃ āharāpetvā nhāyanti. Sabbañcetaṃ niratthakaṃ, tasmā imaṃ visesatthaṃ dīpetuṃ adhikakkādīnipīti āha.
其中,“阿提卡卡”是一处渡口,因沐浴设施而得名。“伽耶”也是一处渡口,形如圆池。“巴雅迦”同样是恒河上的一处渡口,是摩诃波那陀王沉入恒河的宫殿阶梯正前方之处。“跋呼迦”、“孙陀利迦”、“萨罗萨伐底”、“波怙摩底”这四条则是河流。“愚者”指无智慧之人。“跳入”指进入其中。“不得清净”是指并未达到烦恼的清净,只不过是冲走了尘垢而已。显示巴利原文
Tattha adhikakkanti nhānasambhāravasena laddhavohāraṃ ekaṃ titthaṃ vuccati. Gayātipi maṇḍalavāpisaṇṭhānaṃ titthameva vuccati. Payāgāti etampi gaṅgāya ekaṃ titthameva mahāpanādassa rañño gaṅgāyaṃ nimuggapāsādassa sopānasammukhaṭṭhānaṃ, bāhukā sundarikā sarassatī bāhumatīti imā pana catasso nadiyo. Bāloti duppañño. Pakkhandoti pavisanto. Na sujjhatīti kilesasuddhiṃ na pāpuṇāti, kevalaṃ rajojallameva pavāheti.
“孙陀利迦能做什么呢?”意为:孙陀利迦河对于净除烦恼能做什么呢?它什么也做不了。这一道理同样适用于巴雅迦和跋呼迦等。而已说出的这三句,其余四句也以举一反三的方式得到了表达。因此应当知道:正如孙陀利迦、巴雅迦、跋呼迦什么也做不了,阿提卡卡等也是如此。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ sundarikā karissatīti sundarikā kilesavisodhane kiṃ karissati? Na kiñci kātuṃ samatthāti adhippāyo. Esa nayo payāgabāhukāsu. Imehi ca tīhi padehi vuttehi itarānipi cattāri lakkhaṇāhāranayena vuttāneva honti, tasmā yatheva sundarikā payāgā bāhukā na kiñci karonti, tathā adhikakkādayopīti veditabbā.
“怀怨者”指具足杀生等五怨之人。“造恶者”指造作残忍恶业之人。“并不能净化他”意思是:孙陀利迦河、波耶伽河或跋呼迦河,都不能净化他,不能使他清净。“恶业者”指与那些怨怼之恶业相应者,或与卑劣之业相应者;即使尚未达到怨怼恶业的程度,但凡与微细恶行相应者,亦为恶业者。显示巴利原文
Verinti pāṇātipātādipañcaverasamannāgataṃ. Katakibbisanti kataluddakammaṃ. Na hi naṃ sodhayeti sundarikā vā payāgā vā bāhukā vā na sodhaye, na sodhetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāpakamminanti pāpakehi verakibbisakammehi yuttaṃ, lāmakakamme yuttaṃ vā verakibbisabhāvaṃ appattehi khuddakehipi pāpehi yuttanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“清净者”指无有烦恼之人。“恒常星宿节”的意思是:清净者确实恒常都是星宿节。据说那位婆罗门抱持着这样的见解:“在颇勒具那月的星宿节那天沐浴,便能洗净一整年所造之恶。”因此,世尊为了破除他的邪见而说:“清净者确实恒常都是星宿节。”这是说:无烦恼者恒常都是颇勒具那星宿节,其他人又怎能得到清净呢?“恒常布萨”的意思是:即使未在十四、十五等日受持布萨戒,清净者也恒常安住于布萨。“清净者、业清净者”指出于无烦恼而清净,且具足清净身业等之人;对于这样的人而言,依止善法的誓愿受持亦恒常圆满成就。“应在此沐浴”指应在此——在我的教法中沐浴。这是在说什么呢?“若你希望涤除内在的烦恼尘垢,就在此——我的教法中,以八支圣道之水来沐浴,因为在别处是没有这种水的。”显示巴利原文
Suddhassāti nikkilesassa. Sadā phaggūti niccampi phaggunīnakkhattameva. Phaggunamāse kira ‘‘uttaraphaggunadivase yo nhāyati, so saṃvaccharaṃ katapāpaṃ sodhetī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhiko so brāhmaṇo, tenassa bhagavā taṃ diṭṭhiṃ paṭihananto āha ‘‘suddhassa ve sadā phaggū’’ti. Nikkilesassa niccaṃ phaggunīnakkhattaṃ, itaro kiṃ sujjhatīti? Uposatho sadāti suddhassa ca cātuddasapannarasādīsu uposathaṅgāni asamādiyatopi niccameva uposatho. Suddhassa sucikammassāti nikkilesatāya suddhassa sucīhi ca kāyakammādīhi samannāgatassa. Sadā sampajjate vatanti īdisassa ca kusalūpasañhitaṃ vatasamādānampi niccaṃ sampannameva hotīti. Idheva sināhīti imasmiṃyeva mama sāsane sināhi. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Sace ajjhattikakilesamalappavāhanaṃ icchasi, idheva mama sāsane aṭṭhaṅgikamaggasalilena sināhi, aññatra hi idaṃ natthī’’ti.
现在,为以适宜教说的方式显示三门清净,世尊说:“应于一切众生行无畏(慈)”等。其中,“无畏”指安稳、利益的状态,也就是慈。此处显示了意门的清净。显示巴利原文
Idānissa sappāyadesanāvasena tīsupi dvāresu suddhiṃ dassento sabbabhūtesu karohi khematantiādimāha. Tattha khematanti abhayaṃ hitabhāvaṃ, mettanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etenassa manodvārasuddhi dassitā hoti.
「若不说妄语」:以此显示语门清净。「若不杀生,若不与取」:以此显示身门清净。「具信、无悭」等,则是以此教导已成就如此清净门者,更令成就信与施舍。至于“你去伽耶又能做什么?纵是水井对你来说也是伽耶”这半颂,应这样连接理解:如果你能于一切众生行安稳(慈),不说妄语,不杀生,不行不与取,具足信心而无悭吝,那么去伽耶又有何用?对你来说,水井即是伽耶。因为即便去伽耶沐浴,无论在水井还是伽耶,依此修行皆能获得烦恼的清净,而除去身上尘垢的清净在两处并无差别。当知:由于世人对伽耶更为认可,所以当婆罗门问“尊者乔达摩去跋诃河吗?”时,世尊并未回答“你去跋诃河又能做什么”,而是说了“你去伽耶又能做什么”。显示巴利原文
Sace musā na bhaṇasīti etenassa vacīdvārasuddhi. Sace pāṇaṃ na hiṃsasi sace adinnaṃ nādiyasīti etehi kāyadvārasuddhi. Saddahāno amaccharīti etehi pana naṃ evaṃ parisuddhadvāraṃ saddhāsampadāya cāgasampadāya ca niyojesi. Kiṃ kāhasi gayaṃ gantvā, udapānopi te gayāti ayaṃ pana upaḍḍhagāthā, sace sabbabhūtesu khemataṃ karissasi, musā na bhaṇissasi, pāṇaṃ na hanissasi, adinnaṃ nādiyissasi, saddhahāno amaccharī bhavissasi, kiṃ kāhasi gayaṃ gantvā udapānopi te gayā , gayāyapi hi te nhāyantassa udapānepi imāya eva paṭipattiyā kilesasuddhi, sarīramalasuddhi pana ubhayattha samāti evaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Yasmā ca loke gayā sammatatarā, tasmā tassa bhagavā ‘‘gacchati pana bhavaṃ gotamo bāhuka’’nti puṭṭhopi ‘‘kiṃ kāhasi bāhukaṃ gantvā’’ti avatvā ‘‘kiṃ kāhasi gayaṃ gantvā’’ti āhāti veditabbo.
80 「如在《怖骇经》中已说」等:由于已在《怖骇经》中说过,意义很明确。至于「独处」等词,「独处」指身远离。「远离」指心远离。「不放逸」指修习业处时不失正念。「热忱」指具足身精进与心精进的热忱。「坚定」指不贪着身体与生命。「住」指以某一种威仪而住。「不久」指出家后不久。「善男子」有两种:出身善男子和行持善男子,此处两者兼具。「从家」即从家中。有益于家的,称为在家业,如耕作、牧牛等维持生计之事;不从事此的,称为非在家业,这是出家的同义词。「出家」指趣向、归入。「那无上的」即指那无上的。「梵行终尽」指道梵行的终结,即阿拉汉果,因为善男子正是为此而出家。「于现法」指于此生此有身中。「自己证知、现证」指依自智亲证,不依他人。「具足而住」指达到、成就而住。如此安住,他便了知:“生已尽……”。此处显示了他的观察地(省察智)。显示巴利原文
80.Evaṃ vutteti evamādi bhayabherave vuttattā pākaṭameva. Eko vūpakaṭṭhotiādīsu pana eko kāyavivekena . Vūpakaṭṭho cittavivekena. Appamatto kammaṭṭhāne sati avijahanena. Ātāpī kāyikacetasikavīriyasaṅkhātena ātāpena. Pahitatto kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya. Viharanto aññatarairiyāpathavihārena. Nacirassevāti pabbajjaṃ upādāya vuccati. Kulaputtāti duvidhā kulaputtā jātikulaputtā ca ācārakulaputtā ca, ayaṃ pana ubhayathāpi kulaputto. Agārasmāti gharā. Agārassa hitaṃ agāriyaṃ, kasigorakkhādikuṭumbaposanakammaṃ vuccati, natthi ettha agāriyanti anagāriyaṃ, pabbajjāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pabbajantīti upagacchanti upasaṅkamanti. Tadanuttaranti taṃ anuttaraṃ. Brahmacariyapariyosānanti maggabrahmacariyassa pariyosānaṃ, arahattaphalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa hi atthāya kulaputtā pabbajanti. Diṭṭheva dhammeti tasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanāyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparappaccayaṃ katvāti attho. Upasampajja vihāsīti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā vihāsīti, evaṃ viharanto ca khīṇā jāti…pe… abbhaññāsi. Etenassa paccavekkhaṇabhūmiṃ dasseti.
那么,他的什么样的「生」已经穷尽?又如何了知呢?下面说明。虽然这在《怖骇经》中也已经说过,但为了显示这里用第一人称来衔接的方法,再简略讲一下:并不是他过去的生已经穷尽,因为过去早就灭掉了;也不是未来的生,因为对未来无法用功;也不是现在的生,因为它还存在着。而是说:在未修道的时候,未来会生起于一蕴有、四蕴有或五蕴有中,分为一种、四种、五种蕴等种种差别的生;由于已经修习了道,这种生就成了「不生法」而穷尽了。他通过反观修道所断除的烦恼,知道烦恼已不存在,并且了知现有的业在未来也不能导致结生,因此了知「生已尽」。显示巴利原文
Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā? Kathañca naṃ abbhaññāsīti? Vuccate, kāmañcetaṃ bhayabheravepi vuttaṃ, tathāpi naṃ idha paṭhamapurisavasena yojanānayassa dassanatthaṃ puna saṅkhepato bhaṇāma. Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā, pubbeva khīṇattā. Na anāgatā, tattha vāyāmābhāvato. Na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Maggassa pana abhāvitattā yā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā, taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotīti jānanto jānāti.
“已住”即已住立、已遍住,也就是已完成、已行持、已达究竟的意思。“梵行”指道之梵行。“应作已作”是说,于四圣谛中,依四道以遍知、断、证、修的方式,所应作的十六种任务皆已究竟。“更无此世”指此后不再为完成这十六种任务,亦非为断尽烦恼而修道。又或说,“此世”即指当下相续的五蕴,此后更无其他五蕴相续——此五蕴已得遍知,恰如断根之树,他如是了知。“其中之一”谓成为他们中的一位。“阿拉汉”指成为世尊阿拉汉弟子中的一员。显示巴利原文
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyabhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni punaitthabhāvāya evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāya, kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanā natthīti. Atha vā, itthattāyāti itthabhāvato imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ natthi. Ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti, chinnamūlako rukkho viyāti abbhaññāsi. Aññataroti eko. Arahatanti arahantānaṃ, bhagavato sāvakānaṃ arahataṃ abbhantaro ahosīti.
8.《削减经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Sallekhasuttavaṇṇanā
81 “如是我闻”指《削减经》。于此,“大纯陀”是那位尊者的名字。“傍晚时分”即傍晚的时刻。“从宴坐起”:其中,“宴坐”是指从种种众生行中退转回来,隐蔽、独处,也就是独一、远离。从那种状态中出来的人,便称为“从宴坐起”。然而,这位尊者是从最殊胜的宴坐——果等至中出来,故称“从宴坐起”。“顶礼世尊后”的意思,是以修整得洁净光亮的头顶,恭敬顶礼世尊;或者是让世尊发出言语,比如“愿你快乐,纯陀!”这样发出言语之相。据说,世尊受顶礼后,会抬起如金鼓般的颈项,发出悦耳、可爱、犹如甘露灌顶的梵音,依序称念每个人的名字说道:“愿你快乐!”这是诸如来的惯例。关于此,有佐证经文:“尊者,帝释天王与大臣眷属一同,以头顶礼世尊足。”世尊说:“愿五髻帝释天王与大臣眷属一同快乐!因为天、人、阿修罗、龙、乾闼婆,及其他种种众生,皆乐于快乐。”诸如来即以此方式,向有大威力的夜叉回礼。显示巴利原文
81.Evaṃme sutanti sallekhasuttaṃ. Tattha mahācundoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Sāyanhasamayanti sāyanhakāle. Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti ettha paṭisallānanti tehi tehi sattasaṅkhārehi paṭinivattitvā sallānaṃ nilīyanaṃ, ekībhāvo pavivekoti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo tato vuṭṭhito, so paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito nāma hoti. Ayaṃ pana yasmā paṭisallānānaṃ uttamato phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhāsi, tasmā ‘‘paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito’’ti vutto. Bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvāti samadasanakhujjalavibhūsitena sirasā bhagavantaṃ sakkaccaṃ vanditvā, abhivādāpetvā vā ‘‘sukhī bhava, cundā’’ti evaṃ vacībhedaṃ kārāpetvā, bhagavā pana kira vandito samāno suvaṇṇadundubhisadisaṃ gīvaṃ paggayha kaṇṇasukhaṃ pemaniyaṃ amatābhisekasadisaṃ brahmaghosaṃ nicchārento ‘‘sukhī hohī’’ti tassa tassa nāmaṃ gahetvā vadati, etaṃ āciṇṇaṃ tathāgatānaṃ. Tatridaṃ sādhakasuttaṃ, ‘‘sakko, bhante, devānamindo sāmacco saparijano bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatīti, sukhī hotu pañcasikha sakko devānamindo sāmacco saparijano, sukhakāmā hi devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā, ye caññe santi puthukāyā’’ti. Evañca pana tathāgatā evarūpe mahesakkhe yakkhe abhivadantīti.
“哪些这些”:这里像是在为即将讲述的内容做引导而说。“种种的”指各种不同的类型。“诸邪见”就是邪见。“在世中生起”意思是在有情众生中出现。“与我论相关的”是指与“观察色是我”等形式的各种我论相关的,这类邪见有二十种。“与世界论相关的”是指与“我及世间是常”等形式的世界论相关的,这类邪见有八种:常、无常、亦常亦无常、非常非无常、有边、无边、亦有边亦无边、非有边非无边——正是这样,依据“我及世间”而成立的。显示巴利原文
Yā imāti idāni vattabbābhimukhaṃ karonto viya āha. Anekavihitāti nānappakārā. Diṭṭhiyoti micchādiṭṭhiyo . Loke uppajjantīti sattesu pātubhavanti. Attavādappaṭisaṃyuttāti ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinayappavattena attavādena paṭisaṃyuttā, tā vīsati bhavanti. Lokavādappaṭisaṃyuttāti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’tiādinayappavattena lokavādena paṭisaṃyuttā, tā aṭṭha honti sassato, asassato, sassato ca asassato ca, neva sassato nāsassato, antavā, anantavā, antavā ca anantavā ca, nevantavā nānantavā attā ca loko cāti evaṃ pavattattā.
“就只是对开始作意”等句,其含义如下:“尊者,若一位比丘只是对那开始作意——即使尚未证得预流道,仅是作意那混合了观的最初作意——那么,这些邪见的断除与舍离,难道仅仅通过这样的方式就能达成吗?”应知这位长老自身虽非增上慢者,但为断除那些增上慢者的增上慢,而示现如同一名增上慢者那样发问。另有一说:“长老的弟子中,有人以为单凭开始作意便能彻底断除诸邪见,也有人以为住在等至之住、住在削减之住即是如此。长老正是为了饶益那些人,而向世尊发问。”显示巴利原文
Ādimevātiādīsu ayamattho kiṃ nu kho bhante ādimeva manasikarontassa appatvāpi sotāpattimaggaṃ vipassanāmissakapaṭhamamanasikārameva manasikarontassa bhikkhuno evametāsaṃ ettakeneva upāyena etāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ pahānañca paṭinissaggo ca hotīti. Idañca thero attanā anadhimānikopi samāno adhimānikānaṃ adhimānappahānatthaṃ adhimāniko viya hutvā pucchatīti veditabbo. Apare panāhu ‘‘therassa antevāsikā ādimanasikāreneva diṭṭhīnaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ hotīti evaṃsaññinopi, samāpattivihārā sallekhavihārāti evaṃsaññinopi atthi. So tesaṃ atthāya bhagavantaṃ pucchatī’’ti.
82 于是,世尊为开示断除那些邪见的方法,便说了“哪些这些”等语。其中,“这些邪见于何处生起”等,是针对五蕴而说的。因为这些邪见正是在这些蕴中生起的。正如(《相应部》)中所详细阐明:“诸比丘,当有色时,依止于色,便生起如是邪见:‘我、世间,死后将成为常、稳固、永恒、不变易之法。’”而以所缘来说,用单数表述“于何处”,意思是“生起在哪个所缘之上”。在这里,对于“生起”、“随眠”与“现行”,应当了知其有如下差别:就其生起而言,未生而正在生起的,称为“生起”;经反复修习而变得强有力且未被对治的,称为“随眠”;已到达身门与语门的,称为“现行”。这便是它们之间的差别。至于“那不是我的”等句,其中“那”,即指那作为五蕴差别的所缘——它并非我的;“我不是那个”,即我也并非那个所缘;“那个也不是我的我”,即那个所缘也不是我的自我。如此,以如实正慧而观察。首先应如此理解词义。显示巴利原文
82. Athassa bhagavā tāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ pahānūpāyaṃ dassento yā imātiādimāha. Tattha yattha cetā diṭṭhiyo uppajjantītiādi pañcakkhandhe sandhāya vuttaṃ. Etesu hi etā diṭṭhiyo uppajjanti. Yathāha ‘‘rūpe kho, bhikkhave, sati rūpaṃ abhinivissa evaṃ diṭṭhi uppajjati, so attā so loko so pecca bhavissāmi nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.152) vitthāro. Ārammaṇavasena pana ekavacanaṃ katvā yattha cāti āha, yasmiṃ ārammaṇe uppajjantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca uppajjanti anusenti samudācarantīti imesaṃ evaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Jātivasena hi ajātā jāyamānā uppajjantīti vuccanti. Punappunaṃ āsevitā thāmagatā appaṭivinītā anusentīti. Kāyavacīdvāraṃ sampattā samudācarantīti, idametesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ. Taṃ netaṃ mamātiādīsu taṃ pañcakkhandhappabhedaṃ ārammaṇametaṃ mayhaṃ na hoti, ahampi eso na asmi, eso me attāpi na hotīti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya passatoti evaṃ tāva padattho veditabbo.
然而,由于在此“这是我的”乃是爱执,当执取它时,便会执取那一百零八种爱行差别的爱戏论;“我是这个”乃是慢执,当执取它时,便会执取那九种差别的慢戏论;“这是我的我”乃是见执,当执取它时,便会执取那六十二种恶见差别的见戏论。因此,世尊说“这不是我的”时,是在遮破前述那种种爱戏论;说“我不是这个”时,是在遮破慢戏论;说“这也不是我的我”时,是在遮破见戏论。在这里,爱与慢只是随从于见而存在,应当如此理解。“如是”是指以“这不是我的”等方式,对这五蕴。“如实”是指依据自性,依据事物实际存在的样子。意思是:五蕴确实是以这种方式存在,而以“我的”等方式所执取的那个,实际上并不以那种方式存在。“以正慧观察”是指以到达预流道慧之终点的观慧,而善巧地观察。“如是这些”,即是以这样的方法,对这些邪见。“断除”与“舍离”,二者皆是彻底断除的异名。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana ettha etaṃ mamāti taṇhāgāho, tañca gaṇhanto aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritappabhedaṃ taṇhāpapañcaṃ gaṇhāti. Esohamasmīti mānagāho, tañca gaṇhanto navappabhedaṃ mānapapañcaṃ gaṇhāti. Eso me attāti diṭṭhigāho, tañca gaṇhanto dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatappabhedaṃ diṭṭhipapañcaṃ gaṇhāti. Tasmā netaṃ mamāti vadanto bhagavā yathāvuttappabhedaṃ taṇhāpapañcaṃ paṭikkhipati. Nesohamasmīti mānapapañcaṃ. Na meso attāti diṭṭhipapañcaṃ. Diṭṭhekaṭṭhāyeva cettha taṇhāmānā veditabbā. Evametanti evaṃ ‘‘netaṃ mamā’’tiādinā ākārena etaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ. Yathābhūtanti yathā sabhāvaṃ, yathā atthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Khandhapañcakañhi eteneva ākārena atthi. Mamantiādinā pana gayhamānampi tenākārena nevatthīti adhippāyo. Sammappaññāya passatoti sotāpattimaggapaññāpariyosānāya vipassanāpaññāya suṭṭhu passantassa. Evametāsanti etena upāyena etāsaṃ. Pahānaṃ paṭinissaggoti ubhayampetaṃ samucchedappahānassevādhivacanaṃ.
正是如此,具寿大纯陀为那些增上慢者而问世尊:“仅凭最初作意,是否能断除诸邪见?”世尊在开示了由预流道断除邪见之后,现在亲自为增上慢者分别禅那,于是说道“然而,有种情形”等。此处,“增上慢者”是指未证得而自以为已证得的人,这即是增上慢。这种增上慢既不会在随顺世间流转的愚痴凡夫中生起,也不在圣弟子中生起。因为入流者不会生起“我是一来者”的增上慢,一来者不会生起“我是不来者”的增上慢,不来者不会生起“我是阿拉汉”的增上慢。这种慢仅生起于修行者——他依止于止或观,已镇伏烦恼,恒常精勤,已发起观。对于这样的人,由于他没有见到被止镇伏或被观镇伏的烦恼现行,便会生起“我是入流者”“我是一来者”“我是不来者”“我是阿拉汉”的增上慢,如同住在塔朗嘎拉帝萨山的法乐长老所教诫的那些长老一样。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā ādimanasikāreneva diṭṭhīnaṃ pahānaṃ hoti nu kho noti āyasmatā mahācundena adhimānikānaṃ vasena pañhaṃ puṭṭho sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhippahānaṃ dassetvā idāni sayameva adhimānikānaṃ jhānaṃ vibhajanto ṭhānaṃ kho panetantiādimāha. Tattha adhimānikā nāma yesaṃ appatte pattasaññāya adhimāno uppajjati, svāyaṃ uppajjamāno neva lokavaṭṭānusārīnaṃ bālaputhujjanānaṃ uppajjati, na ariyasāvakānaṃ. Na hi sotāpannassa ‘‘sakadāgāmī aha’’nti adhimāno uppajjati, na sakadāgāmissa ‘‘anāgāmī aha’’nti, na anāgāmino ‘‘arahā aha’’nti, kārakasseva pana samathavasena vā vipassanāvasena vā vikkhambhitakilesassa niccaṃ yuttapayuttassa āraddhavipassakassa uppajjati. Tassa hi samathavikkhambhitānaṃ vā vipassanāvikkhambhitānaṃ vā kilesānaṃ samudācāraṃ apassato ‘‘sotāpanno ahanti vā, sakadāgāmī, anāgāmī , arahā aha’’nti vā adhimāno uppajjati, talaṅgaratissapabbatavāsidhammadinnattherena ovādiyamānattherānaṃ viya.
据说,这位长老刚受具足戒不久,凡是安住于他的教诫者,众多比丘便获得了殊胜成就。住在帝沙大寺的比丘僧团听闻此事,心想:“这位长老不会将人导入无义利处,去把他请来吧。”于是派出众多比丘。他们到达后说:“贤友法乐!比丘僧团召请您。”他问:“诸位尊者,你们是在寻找自己,还是在寻找他人呢?”他们回答:“我们在寻找自己,善士。”他便为他们授予业处,结果全都证得了阿拉汉果。比丘僧团又派遣了其他比丘,如此直到第三次所派的比丘,也全都在那里证得阿拉汉果而住。显示巴利原文
Therassa kira acirūpasampannasseva ovāde ṭhatvā bahū bhikkhū visesaṃ adhigacchiṃsu. Taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā tissamahāvihāravāsī bhikkhusaṅgho ‘‘na aṭṭhānaniyojako theroti theraṃ ānethā’’ti sambahule bhikkhū pāhesi. Te gantvā, ‘‘āvuso, dhammadinna bhikkhusaṅgho taṃ pakkosāpetī’’ti āhaṃsu. So āha ‘‘kiṃ pana tumhe, bhante, attānaṃ gavesatha para’’nti? Attānaṃ sappurisāti, so tesaṃ kammaṭṭhānamadāsi, sabbeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Bhikkhusaṅgho puna aññe bhikkhū pāhesi, evaṃ yāvatatiyaṃ pahitā sabbepi tattheva arahattaṃ patvā vihariṃsu.
之后,僧团见每次去的人都不回来,就派了一位年长的出家人去。他到了以后说:“尊者法乐!住在帝沙大寺的比丘僧团已经三次派人到你这里。你竟然不尊重僧团的命令,不来!”长老问:“什么事?”他没有进入自己的叶屋,让人拿了钵与衣,立刻出发。在途中,他进入了汉卡那寺。那里有一位戒腊已过六十年的上座长老,因为增上慢而声称自己证得了阿拉汉果。长老走到他跟前,顶礼,做了款待,并问他证得的情况。那位上座长老说:“是的,法乐,出家人应做的事,我早已做了,到现在已经六十多年了。”“尊者,您能运用神通吗?”“能,法乐。”“太好了,尊者,请变出一头大象正面向您冲过来。”“好的,贤友。”上座长老便化作一头纯白色、七处着地、三处流着液、甩着尾巴、将鼻子塞入嘴中、好像要用两根象牙刺穿似的直冲过来的大龙象。他看见这头由自己变出的大象,吓得开始逃跑。就在那时,他认识到“我不是阿拉汉”,便蹲在法乐的脚前说:“贤友,请做我的依靠吧!”法乐说:“尊者,不要忧愁,不要不悦,增上慢只会发生在修行者身上。”安慰了那位长老后,他给了业处。那位长老依他的教诫而行,证得了阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Tato saṅgho gatagatā nāgacchantīti aññataraṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ pāhesi. So gantvā ca, ‘‘bhante, dhammadinna tikkhattuṃ tissamahāvihāravāsī bhikkhusaṅgho tuyhaṃ santike pesesi, tvaṃ nāma saṅghassa āṇaṃ garuṃ na karosi, nāgacchasī’’ti āha. Thero kimetanti paṇṇasālaṃ appavisitvāva pattacīvaraṃ gāhāpetvā tāvadeva nikkhami, so antarāmagge haṅkanavihāraṃ pāvisi. Tattha ceko mahāthero saṭṭhivassātīto adhimānena arahattaṃ paṭijānāti. Thero taṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā adhigamaṃ pucchi. Thero āha ‘‘āma dhammadinna, yaṃ pabbajitena kātabbaṃ, cirakataṃ taṃ mayā, atītasaṭṭhivassomhi etarahī’’ti. Kiṃ, bhante, iddhimpi vaḷañjethāti. Āma dhammadinnāti. Sādhu vata, bhante, hatthiṃ tumhākaṃ paṭimukhaṃ āgacchantaṃ māpethāti. Sādhāvusoti thero sabbasetaṃ sattappatiṭṭhaṃ tidhāpabhinnaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ bījayamānaṃ soṇḍaṃ mukhe pakkhipitvā dvīhi dantehi vijjhitukāmaṃ viya paṭimukhaṃ āgacchantaṃ mahāhatthiṃ māpesi. So taṃ attanāyeva māpitaṃ hatthiṃ disvā bhīto palāyituṃ ārabhi. Tadāva attānaṃ ‘‘nāhaṃ arahā’’ti ñatvā dhammadinnassa pādamūle ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā ‘‘patiṭṭhā me hohi, āvuso’’ti āha. Dhammadinno ‘‘mā, bhante, soci, mā anattamano ahosi, kārakānaṃyeva adhimāno uppajjatī’’ti theraṃ samassāsetvā kammaṭṭhānamadāsi. Thero tassovāde ṭhatvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.
在质多罗山上也住着那样一位长老。达摩提那去见他,同样向他请问,他也同样回答。接着达摩提那对他说:“尊者,您也能运用神通吗?”长老回答:“能,贤友。”“太好了,尊者,请变出一座池塘。”长老便变了出来。“尊者,请在这里变出一丛莲花。”他也变了出来。“请在这莲花丛中变出一朵大莲花。”他也变了出来。“请在莲花丛中化现一位能歌善舞、音声美妙的女子形象。”他也变了出来。然后他说:“尊者,请您反复注视这个。”说完,自己便进了楼阁。那位长老注视着她,六十年间被镇伏的烦恼随之动摇,他当下便自了知,如同先前那位长老一样,在达摩提那长老跟前取得业处,证得阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Cittalapabbatepi tādisova thero vasati. Dhammadinno tampi upasaṅkamitvā tatheva pucchi. Sopi tatheva byākāsi. Tato naṃ dhammadinno kiṃ, bhante, iddhimpi vaḷañjethāti āha. Āmāvusoti. Sādhu vata, bhante, ekaṃ pokkharaṇiṃ māpethāti. Thero māpesi. Ettha, bhante, padumagumbaṃ māpethāti. Tampi māpesi. Padumagumbe mahāpadumaṃ māpethāti. Tampi māpesi. Etasmiṃ padumagumbe ṭhatvā madhurassarena gāyantaṃ naccantañca ekaṃ itthiviggahaṃ māpethāti. Tampi māpesi. So etaṃ, bhante, punappunaṃ upanijjhāyathāti vatvā sayaṃ pāsādaṃ pāvisi. Therassa taṃ upanijjhāyato saṭṭhivassāni vikkhambhitakilesā caliṃsu, so tadā attānaṃ ñatvā purimatthero viya dhammadinnattherassa santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.
达摩提那次第来到了帝沙大寺。那时,长老们扫完塔院,以佛陀为所缘生起喜悦而坐,据说这是他们日常的行持。因此,他们中没有一个人对达摩提那说“把衣钵放在这里”,也无人向他问讯。他们认出“这应该就是达摩提那”,于是便向他提问。他以如同利剑斩断一束睡莲茎般的犀利回答了所问,然后用脚趾叩击大地,说:“尊者,这无心的大地尚且知道达摩提那的功德,而你们却不知道。”并诵出了这个偈子——显示巴利原文
Dhammadinnopi anupubbena tissamahāvihāraṃ agamāsi. Tasmiñca samaye therā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ uppādetvā nisinnā honti, etaṃ kira tesaṃ vattaṃ. Tena nesaṃ ekopi ‘‘idha pattacīvaraṃ ṭhapehī’’ti dhammadinnaṃ vattā pucchitāpi nāhosi. Dhammadinno eso bhaveyyāti ñatvā pana pañhaṃ pucchiṃsu. So pucchitapañhe tiṇhena asinā kumudanāḷakalāpaṃ viya chinditvā pādaṅguliyā mahāpathaviṃ pahari. Bhante ayaṃ acetanā mahāpathavīpi dhammadinnassa guṇaṃ jānāti. Tumhe pana na jānitthāti ca vatvā imaṃ gāthamāha –
“这大地无心(acetanāyaṃ pathavī),却知道功德与非功德(vijānāti guṇāguṇaṃ);”
然而,尊者,你们有心,却不知功德与非功德。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Acetanāyaṃ pathavī, vijānāti guṇāguṇaṃ; Sacetanātha kho bhante, na jānātha guṇāguṇa’’nti.
说完后,他当即腾空而起,便去了多楞伽罗帝须山。增上慢正是这样对修行者生起的。因此,世尊针对那样的比丘们,在分析禅那时,开始说:“然而,这是处……”等等。显示巴利原文
Tāvadeva ca ākāse abbhuggantvā talaṅgaratissapabbatameva agamāsi. Evaṃ kārakasseva adhimāno uppajjati. Tasmā bhagavā tādisānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vasena jhānaṃ vibhajanto ṭhānaṃ kho panetantiādimāha.
它的意思是:确实存在这种情形,并非没有。借此情形,此处某位比丘与诸外道游行者共通的——确实远离诸欲……具足初禅而住。如果他这样想:“我以削减而住”,即认为“我以那种能削减烦恼的修行方式而住”,这是不合理的。因为对于有增上慢的比丘,禅那并非削减,也不是削减的修行之道。为什么呢?因为没有观作为基础。因为他进入禅那后,不从禅定出来观察诸行,禅那只使他心达到一境性,成为现法乐住。因此,为了显示这个意义,世尊说:“但是,纯陀,在圣者律中,这些不称为削减,在圣者律中这些称为现法乐住。”显示巴利原文
Tassattho, atthetaṃ kāraṇaṃ, no natthi. Yena idhekacco bhikkhu bāhiraparibbājakehi sādhāraṇaṃ vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyya, yaṃ pana tassa evamassa sallekhena viharāmīti, yaṃ paṭipattividhānaṃ kilese saṃlikhati, tenāhaṃ viharāmīti, taṃ na yujjati, na hi adhimānikassa bhikkhuno jhānaṃ sallekho vā sallekhapaṭipadā vā hoti. Kasmā? Avipassanāpādakattā. Na hi so jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati, jhānaṃ panassa cittekaggamattaṃ karoti, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāro hoti. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārā ete ariyassa vinaye vuccantī’’ti āha.
在此,「这些」(ete)为复数,应如是理解:从禅那法的角度,即指「这些初禅法」;从等至的角度,即便仅有一次初禅,由于能反复进入等至而转起,故成为复数;从所缘的角度,一次初禅可依地遍等不同所缘而转起,因此也成为复数。这一理路同样适用于第二、第三、第四禅。而在无色禅中,由于所缘没有差别,故仅应根据前两种原因来理解复数。显示巴利原文
Tattha eteti jhānadhammavasena bahuvacanaṃ veditabbaṃ, ete paṭhamajjhānadhammāti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāpattivasena vā, ekampi hi paṭhamajjhānaṃ punappunaṃ samāpattivasena pavattattā bahuttaṃ gacchati. Ārammaṇavasena vā, ekampi hi paṭhamajjhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇādīsu pavattivasena bahuttaṃ gacchatīti. Esa nayo dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānesu. Āruppajhānesu pana ārammaṇabhedābhāvato purimakāraṇadvayavaseneva bahuvacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
因为这些禅那的支与所缘全都寂静——亦即它们既寂灭又微细,所以那四禅被称为「寂静住」,应当如此理解。以上是这四个禅那的共通注释。至于分别注释,则应依「完全超越了色想」等经句来加以说明,这在《清净道论》中已全面解说过。显示巴利原文
Yasmā cetesaṃ aṅgānipi santāni ārammaṇānipi, nibbutāni ceva sukhumāni cāti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā tāni santā ete vihārāti evaṃ vuttānīti veditabbāni. Ayaṃ tāva tesaṃ catunnampi sādhāraṇā vaṇṇanā. Visesavaṇṇanā pana ‘‘sabbaso rūpasaññāna’’ntiādipadānusārato vattabbā siyā. Sā visuddhimagge sabbākārena vuttāyeva.
83 如是,由于增上慢比丘的禅那住不以观为基础,故非削减住。因为他进入禅那后,不会从中出定以观照诸行,仅是令心得一境性,对他来说,这便成了现法乐住。因此,为了显示此义,先将色界禅与无色界禅加以分别,进而为了指出应在何处所以及用哪四十四种方式行削减,以及削减之事与削减本身,经典才接着说:「然而,纯陀,在此……」等等。显示巴利原文
83. Evaṃ yasmā adhimānikassa bhikkhuno jhānavihāro avipassanāpādakattā sallekhavihāro na hoti, na hi so jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati, cittekaggakaro diṭṭhadhamme sukhavihāro panassa hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento rūpajjhānāni ca arūpajjhānāni ca vibhajitvā idāni ca yattha sallekho kātabbo catucattālīsāya ākārehi, tañca vatthuṃ tañca sallekhaṃ dassento idha kho pana votiādimāha.
为什么说“通过八等至,无害等即是削减”呢?因为它们是出世间的基础。外道的八等至仅仅是轮回的基础;而在佛陀的教法中,即使只是皈依,也是出世间的基础,更何况是“无害”等这些品质。而且,应当通过这部经来了解:“如同对已证八等至和五神通的外道布施,其果报尚不及对佛教中皈依者布施的果报更大。”实际上,正是就这一点,《施清净经》中才说:“对于已离外欲贪者布施,可预期获得百千俱胝倍的果报。对于为证入流果而修行者布施,则可预期无量的、不可测量的布施果报,更不用说对入流者了。”这是因为,从皈依开始,这里所指的,就是正在为证入流果而修行的人。以上是这一段的经文衔接。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana ‘‘aṭṭhahi samāpattīhi avihiṃsādayo sallekhā’’ti vuttā? Lokuttarapādakattā. Bāhirakānañhi aṭṭha samāpattiyo vaṭṭapādakāyeva. Sāsane saraṇagamanampi lokuttarapādakaṃ, pageva avihiṃsādayo. Imināyeva ca suttena veditabbaṃ ‘‘yathā bāhirakassa aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino pañcābhiññassāpi dinnadānato sāsane tisaraṇagatassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ hotī’’ti. Idañhi sandhāya dakkhiṇāvisuddhisutte ‘‘bāhirake kāmesu vītarāge dānaṃ datvā koṭisatasahassaguṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṃ datvā asaṅkheyyā appameyyā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, ko pana vādo sotāpanne’’ti vuttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.379). Saraṇagamanato paṭṭhāya hi tattha sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno adhippetoti, ayaṃ tāvettha pāḷiyojanā.
在逐词注释中,“在此”(idha)是指明害等事。“但是”(kho pana)只是一个小品词。“你们”(vo)是具工具格意义的属格词。简略的含义即是:我们以“他人将为害者……”等方式说明害等事。“在此,纯陀,你们应当实行削减。”显示巴利原文
Anupadavaṇṇanāyaṃ pana idhāti vihiṃsādivatthudīpanametaṃ. Kho panāti nipātamattaṃ. Voti karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, ayaṃ pana saṅkhepattho, yadetaṃ ‘‘pare vihiṃsakā bhavissantī’’tiādinā nayena vihiṃsādivatthuṃ vadāma. Idha, cunda, tumhehi sallekho kātabboti.
这样简略地说完之后,现在再详细展开,说道:“他人将为害者,而我们在此处要成为不害者——应当这样来实行削减”等等。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅkhepato vatvā idāni vitthārento ‘‘pare vihiṃsakā bhavissanti, mayamettha avihiṃsakā bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’tiādimāha.
其中,「其他人」指那些不精勤于此种削减的人。「将成为伤害者」:即他们通过手、土块等方式伤害众生。「我们在此要成为不伤害者」:即在他人都将成为伤害者的这类事上,我们成为不伤害者,生起无害之心并安住其中。「应当这样来实行削减」:你们应当这样修习削减。此处,「削减」即指「无害」。因为无害能削减伤害、断除伤害,故称为「削减」。此理适用于一切处。但有特别之处:「其他人是邪见者」——应知此处是将业道中位于末端的邪见,与邪性中位于开头的邪见,合说为「见」。同样,「我们在此是正见者」所说的「正见」,其业道部分将在《正见经》中详细阐明;而邪性中的邪见等,则在《二种寻思》中有说明。显示巴利原文
Tattha pareti ye keci imaṃ sallekhamananuyuttā. Vihiṃsakā bhavissantīti pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vātiādīhi sattānaṃ vihesakā bhavissanti. Mayamettha avihiṃsakā bhavissāmāti mayaṃ pana yattheva vatthusmiṃ pare evaṃ vihiṃsakā bhavissanti, ettheva avihiṃsakā bhavissāma, avihiṃsaṃ uppādetvā viharissāma. Iti sallekho karaṇīyoti evaṃ tumhehi sallekho kātabbo . Sallekhoti ca idha avihiṃsāva veditabbā. Avihiṃsā hi vihiṃsaṃ sallekhati, taṃ chindati, tasmā sallekhoti vuccati. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ayaṃ pana viseso. Pare micchādiṭṭhīti ettha kammapathānaṃ antamicchādiṭṭhiñca micchattānaṃ ādimicchādiṭṭhiñca missetvā diṭṭhi vuttāti veditabbā. Tathā mayamettha sammādiṭṭhīti vuttaṭṭhāne sammādiṭṭhi. Ettha ca kammapathakathā vitthārato sammādiṭṭhisutte āvi bhavissati. Micchattesu micchādiṭṭhiādayo dvedhāvitakke.
简言之:「杀生者」指杀害生命者;「不与取者」指取他人未给予之物,即偷盗者;「行非梵行者」指行下劣低贱之法者,即行淫欲法者;「行梵行者」指行最胜道者,即远离淫欲者。于此,当知梵行即是「削减」,因梵行能削减非梵行。‘妄语者’:说破坏他人利益、虚假不实之语者。‘有离间语者’:说离间人我之语者。‘有粗恶语者’:说刺伤他人痛处之语者。‘杂秽语者’:说无意义之语者。‘有贪欲者’:常贪求他人财物者。‘有瞋心者’:内心败坏、不净者。‘邪见者’:持邪恶、为智者诃责之见者,具体即业道所摄、以「无布施」等为基之邪见。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo, pāṇaṃ atipātentīti pāṇātipātī pāṇaghātakāti attho. Adinnaṃ ādiyantīti adinnādāyī, parassa hārinoti attho. Abrahmaṃ hīnaṃ lāmakadhammaṃ carantīti abrahmacārī, methunadhammappaṭisevakāti attho. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ paṭipadaṃ carantīti brahmacārī, methunā paṭiviratāti attho. Ettha ca brahmacariyaṃ sallekhoti veditabbaṃ. Brahmacariyañhi abrahmacariyaṃ sallekhati. Musā vadantīti musāvādī, paresaṃ atthabhañjanakaṃ tucchaṃ alikaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāroti attho. Pisuṇā vācā etesanti pisuṇavācā. Paresaṃ mammacchedikā pharusā vācā etesanti pharusavācā. Samphaṃ niratthakavacanaṃ palapantīti samphappalāpī. Abhijjhāyantīti abhijjhālū, parabhaṇḍalubbhanasīlāti attho. Byāpannaṃ pūtibhūtaṃ cittametesanti byāpannacittā. Micchā pāpikā viññugarahitā etesaṃ diṭṭhīti micchādiṭṭhī, kammapathapariyāpannāya natthi dinnantiādivatthukāya, micchattapariyāpannāya aniyyānikadiṭṭhiyā ca samannāgatāti attho. Sammā sobhanā viññuppasatthā etesaṃ diṭṭhīti sammādiṭṭhī, kammapathapariyāpannāya atthi dinnantiādikāya kammassakatādiṭṭhiyā, sammattapariyāpannāya maggadiṭṭhiyā ca samannāgatāti attho.
「邪思惟」指不真实、不导向出离、不善的思惟。此理亦适用于「邪语」等。但有一特别之处:与邪思惟等不同,并没有一个单独名为「邪念」的法存在;它只是对回忆过去时所生起的四种不善蕴的称说。世尊曾言:“比丘们,有此随念,我非不说;比丘们,若随念得子、随念得财、随念得荣誉”,这应理解为是对种种思惟时,以似念的形态生起而说的。此处,「邪智者」:邪智是指在造恶时因思考方式而生起的愚痴,以及作恶后以‘我做得很好’等方式省察而生起的愚痴。具足此愚痴者,称为邪智者。「正智者」:此处,具十九种分类的省察智名为‘正智’,具足此省察智者,称为正智者。「邪解脱者」:指那些原本并未解脱,却自认‘我们解脱了’的人,或于未解脱状态生起解脱想的人。就词义而言,因其邪谬、颠倒的解脱,故称邪解脱者。而‘邪解脱’也是对如是转起的不善蕴的称说。除与果相应的正见等八支外,其余法应知为「正解脱」。正解脱因削除邪解脱而住,故应理解为「削减」。显示巴利原文
Micchāsaṅkappāti ayāthāvaaniyyānikaakusalasaṅkappā. Esa nayo micchāvācātiādīsu. Ayaṃ pana viseso, micchāsaṅkappādayo viya hi micchāsati nāma pāṭiekko koci dhammo natthi, atītaṃ pana cintayato pavattānaṃ catunnampi akusalakkhandhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yampi vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘atthesā, bhikkhave, anussati, nesā natthīti vadāmi, puttalābhaṃ vā, bhikkhave, anussarato, dhanalābhaṃ vā, bhikkhave, anussarato, yasalābhaṃ vā, bhikkhave, anussarato’’ti, tampi taṃ taṃ cintentassa satipatirūpakena uppattiṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ . Micchāñāṇīti ettha ca micchāñāṇanti pāpakiriyāsu upāyacintāvasena pāpaṃ katvā ‘‘sukataṃ mayā’’ti paccavekkhaṇākārena ca uppanno moho veditabbo, tena samannāgatā puggalā micchāñāṇī. Sammāñāṇīti ettha pana ekūnavīsatibhedaṃ paccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ ‘‘sammāñāṇa’’nti vuccati, tena samannāgatā puggalā sammāñāṇī. Micchāvimuttīti avimuttāyeva samānā ‘‘vimuttā maya’’nti evaṃsaññino, avimuttiyaṃ vā vimuttisaññino. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho, micchā pāpikā viparītā vimutti etesaṃ atthīti micchāvimuttī. Micchāvimuttīti ca yathāvuttenākārena pavattānaṃ akusalakkhandhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Phalasampayuttāni pana sammādiṭṭhiādīni aṭṭhaṅgāni ṭhapetvā sesadhammā sammāvimuttīti veditabbā. Sā ca micchāvimuttiṃ sallikhitvā ṭhitattā sallekhoti veditabbā. Tattha niyojento āha ‘‘mayamettha sammāvimuttī bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’ti.
此后三种是依盖而说。然而,贪欲与嗔恚已在业道中说,故应知此处未提最初二盖。其中,被昏沉睡眠所缠缚、所征服者,称为「昏沉睡眠缠缚者」。为掉举所具足者,称为「掉举者」。在审视事物时感到困难、无法决断者,称为「疑者」。「忿怒者」等十种,是依心的染污而说。关于忿怒等的意义,在《法嗣根本经》等中已全部宣说。而此处词义为:「忿怒者」指具有忿怒习性之人。「怀恨者」指具有怀恨习性之人,或谓其有怀恨,故称怀恨者。同理,「欺瞒者」与「高傲者」亦是如此。「嫉妒者」指妒忌之人。「悭吝者」指吝啬之人,或谓其有悭吝,故称悭吝者。「欺诈者」指奸诈之人,即不说正直之语、惯用机巧诡计者之称谓。「谄媚者」指具有谄媚之人。「顽固者」指因僵硬而固执之人。「极慢者」指因极度慢心而高傲之人。与之相反的善的一面,应依反义而了知。显示巴利原文
Ito parāni tīṇi nīvaraṇavasena vuttāni. Abhijjhālū byāpannacittāti evaṃ kammapathesu vuttattā panettha paṭhamāni dve nīvaraṇāni na vuttānīti veditabbāni. Tattha thinamiddhena pariyuṭṭhitā abhibhūtāti thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitā. Uddhaccena samannāgatāti uddhatā. Vicinantā kicchanti na sakkonti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kātunti vicikicchī. Kodhanātiādīni dasa cittassa upakkilesavasena vuttāni. Tattha kodhādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ dhammadāyādavatthasuttesu vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – kodhanāti kujjhanasīlā. Upanāhīti upanāhanasīlā, upanāho vā etesaṃ atthīti upanāhī. Tathā makkhī palāsī ca. Issantīti issukī. Maccharāyantīti maccharī, maccheraṃ vā etesaṃ atthīti maccharī. Saṭhayantīti saṭhā, na sammā bhāsantīti vuttaṃ hoti, kerāṭikayuttānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Māyā etesaṃ atthīti māyāvī. Thambhasamaṅgitāya thaddhā. Atimānayogena atimānī. Vuttapaccanīkanayena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
「恶口者」指难以劝告之人,无论如何对他说,他都不能接受。与此相反的是「善口者」。如同提婆达多那样的人,乃是此类人的「恶友」。如同佛陀或舍利弗那样的人,则是「善友」。在身恶行等方面,因心的放纵而称为「放逸者」。相反则是「不放逸者」。以上三种是杂说而列出的。以下「不信者」等七种是依非法而说。其中,于三处(三宝等)无有信心者,称为「不信者」。善的一面,有信者称为「信者」,或谓其有信,故亦名信者。无惭耻者,称为「无惭者」,这是指对不善法等至不感厌嫌之人。心中有惭耻,或与惭耻相应而活动者,称为「有惭者」。不恐惧恶行者,称为「无愧者」,这是指对不善法等至不感畏惧之人。与此相反的是「有愧者」。听闻少者,称为「寡闻者」,此处的‘少’不应理解为一丁点,而应理解为无,因为‘寡闻者’通常指未经听闻、缺乏圣典之人。听闻多者,称为「多闻者」,这是指如实了知哪怕一首如来所说的偈颂,并依之而行之人。因低劣而沉滞者,称为「懈怠者」,这是对精进低劣者之称谓。已发动精进者,称为「勤精进者」。显示巴利原文
Dubbacāti vattuṃ dukkhā kiñci vuccamānā na sahanti. Tabbiparītā suvacā. Devadattādisadisā pāpakā mittā etesanti pāpamittā. Buddhā vā sāriputtādisadisā vā kalyāṇā mittā etesanti kalyāṇamittā. Kāyaduccaritādīsu cittavossaggavasena pamattā. Viparītā appamattāti veditabbā. Imāni tīṇi pakiṇṇakavasena vuttāni. Assaddhātiādīni satta asaddhammavasena. Tattha tīsu vatthūsu saddhā etesaṃ natthīti assaddhā. Sukkapakkhe saddahantīti saddhā, saddhā vā etesaṃ atthītipi saddhā. Natthi etesaṃ hirīti ahirikā, akusalasamāpattiyā ajigucchamānānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Hirī etesaṃ mane, hiriyā vā yuttamanāti hirimanā. Na ottappantīti anottappī, akusalasamāpattiyā na bhāyantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tabbiparītā ottappī. Appaṃ sutametesanti appassutā, appanti ca thokanti na gahetabbaṃ, natthīti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Appassutā’’ti hi nissutā sutavirahitā vuccanti. Bahu sutametesanti bahussutā, tathāgatabhāsitaṃ ekampi gāthaṃ yāthāvato ñatvā anurūpapaṭipannānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Kucchitā sīdantīti kusītā, hīnavīriyānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āraddhaṃ vīriyametesanti āraddhavīriyā, sammappadhānayuttānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ, muṭṭhā sati etesanti muṭṭhassatī, naṭṭhassatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Upaṭṭhitā sati etesanti upaṭṭhitassatī, niccaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhappavattasatīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Duṭṭhā paññā etesanti duppaññā, naṭṭhapaññāti vuttaṃ hoti. Paññāya sampannāti paññāsampannā, paññāti ca idha vipassanāpaññā veditabbā. Vipassanāsambhāro hi paripūro imasmiṃ ṭhāne āgato, tasmā vipassanāpaññāva ayanti porāṇānaṃ āṇā.
如今,为了显示那个能障碍出世间功德、不导向出离的单一邪见,以三种方式叙说「执自见者」等。其中,执取自己见解者,称为「执自见者」。执取坚固者,称为「执极端者」,此处‘极端’意为牢固,故‘执极端者’即坚执者。即使见到了正当理由,也不舍弃己见者,称为「不舍离者」;然而,若虽出示众多理由,仍难令其舍弃者,则称为「难舍离者」。这是对那些对自己生起的见解坚执为‘唯有这是真实的’,即使在佛陀等人出示理由劝说时,也不肯舍弃者之所用称呼。因为这样的人,对于所执取的无论法或非法,都会像乌龟将各肢体收进自己壳内一样,将其全部收纳于内,他们会说:‘这是我老师这么说的’、‘我们是这么听闻的’,然后生起鳄鱼般的执取,紧抓不放。与之相反的善的一面,应依反义而了知。显示巴利原文
Idāni ekameva lokuttaraguṇānaṃ antarāyakaraṃ aniyyānikadiṭṭhiṃ tīhākārehi dassento sandiṭṭhiparāmāsītiādimāha. Tattha sandiṭṭhiṃ parāmasantīti sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī. Ādhānaṃ gaṇhantīti ādhānaggāhī, ādhānanti daḷhaṃ vuccati, daḷhaggāhīti attho. Yuttakāraṇaṃ disvāva laddhiṃ paṭinissajjantīti paṭinissaggī, dukkhena kicchena kasirena bahumpi kāraṇaṃ dassetvā na sakkā paṭinissaggaṃ kātunti duppaṭinissaggī, ye attano uppannaṃ diṭṭhiṃ idameva saccanti daḷhaṃ gaṇhitvā api buddhādīhi kāraṇaṃ dassetvā vuccamānā na paṭinissajjanti, tesametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tādisā hi puggalā yaṃ yadeva dhammaṃ vā adhammaṃ vā gaṇhanti, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘evaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyehi kathitaṃ, evaṃ amhehi suta’’nti kummova aṅgāni sake kapāle antoyeva samodahanti, kumbhīlaggāhaṃ gaṇhanti na vissajjanti. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
84 如此以四十四种方式显示了“削除”之后,现在为显示于此削除中“心的生起”亦有大利益,而说“心的生起”(cittuppādampi kho ahaṃ)等。显示巴利原文
84. Evaṃ catucattālīsāya ākārehi sallekhaṃ dassetvā idāni tasmiṃ sallekhe cittuppādassāpi bahūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ cittuppādampi kho ahantiādimāha.
它的意思是:准陀,我宣说:于诸善法中,即使只是心的生起,也有大利益,更何况那些以身、语随转的行为——即如最初心生起时那样,以身体去行彼法,或以语命令“行!”,或学习、遍问等——于此更何须多言?这是为了显示:那些随转的行为确实是一向大有利益的。那么,为何此处心的生起也有大利益呢?因为它是一向带来利益与安乐的,并且是那些随转行为的因。显示巴利原文
Tassattho , ahaṃ, cunda, kusalesu dhammesu cittuppādampi bahūpakāraṃ vadāmi, yā panetā kāyena ca vācāya ca anuvidhiyanā, yathā paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ, tatheva tesaṃ dhammānaṃ kāyena karaṇaṃ, vācāya ca ‘‘karothā’’ti āṇāpanaṃ vā, uggahaparipucchādīni vā, tattha vādoyeva ko, ekantabahūpakārāyeva hi tā anuvidhiyanāti dasseti. Kasmā panettha cittuppādopi bahūpakāroti? Ekantahitasukhāvahattā anuvidhiyanānaṃ hetuttā ca.
的确,“我将作布施”这样的心生起时,此心自身能纯粹带来利益与安乐,而且是后续行为的因。正是由于如此心生起,他才会在第二天拦起大路,搭建大凉亭,向一百位比丘或一千位比丘作布施,并吩咐身边的人:“邀请比丘僧团,供奉他们,款待他们!”同样,“我将供养僧团衣、坐卧具、药”这样的心生起时,此心自身也纯粹带来利益与安乐,并且成为随行行为的因。正是由于如此心生起,他才会准备好衣等物品,亲自布施,也令他人布施。此理同样适用于皈依等情形。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti hi cittuppādo sayampi ekantahitasukhāvaho anuvidhiyanānampi hetu, evañhi uppannacittattāyeva dutiyadivase mahāvīthiṃ pidahitvā mahāmaṇḍapaṃ katvā bhikkhusatassa vā bhikkhusahassassa vā dānaṃ deti, ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nimantetha pūjetha parivisathā’’ti parijane āṇāpeti. Evaṃ ‘‘saṅghassa cīvaraṃ senāsanaṃ bhesajjaṃ dassāmī’’ti cittuppādo sayampi ekantahitasukhāvaho anuvidhiyanānampi hetu, evaṃ uppannacittattāyeva hi cīvarādīni abhisaṅkharoti deti dāpeti ca. Esa nayo saraṇagamanādīsu.
确实,唯有先生起“我皈依”之心,而后才以身或语领受皈依。同样,先生起“我将受持五支、八支或十支戒”之心,而后才以身或语受持;先生起“出家后,我将在四种戒中安住”之心,而后以身与语圆满应圆满之戒。唯有先生起“我将学习佛语”之心,而后才以语学习一部、二部、三部、四部或五部尼柯耶。同理,头陀支的受持、业处的执取、遍的准备、禅那的等至、观、道果、辟支菩提、正等正觉,亦应如此了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti hi cittaṃ uppādetvāva pacchā kāyena vā vācāya vā saraṇaṃ gaṇhāti. Tathā ‘‘pañcaṅgaṃ aṭṭhaṅgaṃ dasaṅgaṃ vā sīlaṃ samādiyissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā kāyena vā vācāya vā samādiyati, ‘‘pabbajitvā catūsu sīlesu patiṭṭhahissāmī’’ti ca cittaṃ uppādetvā kāyena vācāya ca pūretabbaṃ sīlaṃ pūreti. ‘‘Buddhavacanaṃ uggahessāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvāva ekaṃ vā nikāyaṃ dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā pañca vā nikāye vācāya uggaṇhāti. Evaṃ dhutaṅgasamādāna-kammaṭṭhānuggaha-kasiṇaparikamma-jhānasamāpattivipassanāmaggaphala- paccekabodhi-sammāsambodhivasena netabbaṃ.
“我将成为佛陀”这一发心,其本身即能带来纯粹的利益与安乐,亦是令他人随学之因。正是由于生起了此心,他于其后,历经百劫又四阿僧祇劫,以身行和言语圆满诸波罗蜜,游化世间,度化含天人在内的一切众生。如此,于一切处,心生起亦有大利益。然而,应知以身行与言语去践行,其利益更为广大。显示巴利原文
‘‘Buddho bhavissāmī’’ti hi cittuppādo sayampi ekantahitasukhāvaho anuvidhiyanānampi hetu, evañhi uppannacittattāyeva aparena samayena kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni kāyena vācāya ca pāramiyo pūretvā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ tārento vicarati. Evaṃ sabbattha cittuppādopi bahūpakāro. Kāyavācāhi pana anuvidhiyanā atibahūpakārāyevāti veditabbā.
如此开示在善法中,即便仅心生起亦有大利益之后,为激励纯陀投身于此,世尊便说:“因此,纯陀啊,于此……”等语。其义显然。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kusalesu dhammesu cittuppādassāpi bahūpakārataṃ dassetvā idāni tattha niyojento ‘‘tasmā tiha cundā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ atthato pākaṭameva.
85 如此,在以四十四种行相说明了减损之中,即使仅生起心念也有大利益之后,现在为了指出这减损本身就是获得利益的道路,世尊说:“纯陀,譬如……”等。显示巴利原文
85. Evaṃ catucattālīsāya ākārehi dassite sallekhe cittuppādassāpi bahūpakārataṃ dassetvā idāni tasseva sallekhassa hitādhigamāya maggabhāvaṃ dassento seyyathāpītiādimāha.
其含义是:纯陀,譬如有条道路因树桩、荆棘、石块等而崎岖不平,为了绕开它、回避它,另有一条如同整治过的平地般平坦的道路;又譬如有处渡口树根、岩石、悬崖、深水及鳄鱼等密布而险恶,为了绕开它、回避它,另有一处不险恶、逐渐加深、状如阶梯踏板的渡口,由此便能从容地进入那个河或湖中沐浴,或渡到对岸。纯陀,同样地,对于具足害心、犹如险恶道路和险恶渡口的害人补特伽罗,为了避开它,便有了犹如平坦道路和平坦渡口的无害。正如为了避开险恶道路和险恶渡口而准备了平坦的道路与渡口,这为了避开害而准备的无害也是如此;依此而行,便能从容地进入人间或天界,享受成就,或出离世间。应当用同样的方法来理解所有文句的连结合义。显示巴利原文
Tassattho , yathā nāma, cunda, khāṇukaṇṭakapāsāṇādīhi visamo maggo bhaveyya, tassa parikkamanāya parivajjanatthāya añño suparikammakato viya bhūmibhāgo samo maggo bhaveyya, yathā ca rukkhamūlapāsāṇapapātakumbhīlamakarādi paribyākulaṃ visamaṃ titthamassa, tassa parikkamanāya parivajjanatthāya aññaṃ avisamaṃ anupubbagambhīraṃ sopānaphalakasadisaṃ titthaṃ bhaveyya, yaṃ paṭipanno sukheneva taṃ nadiṃ vā taḷākaṃ vā ajjhogāhetvā nhāyeyya vā uttareyya vā, evameva kho, cunda, visamamaggavisamatitthasadisāya vihiṃsāya samannāgatassa vihiṃsakapuggalassa samamaggasamatitthasadisā avihiṃsā hoti parikkamanāya. Yatheva hi visamamaggatitthaparivajjanatthāya samo maggo ca titthañca paṭiyattaṃ, evaṃ vihiṃsāparivajjanatthāya avihiṃsā paṭiyattā, yaṃ paṭipanno sukheneva manussagatiṃ vā devagatiṃ vā ajjhogāhetvā sampattiṃ vā anubhaveyya uttareyya vā lokā. Eteneva upāyena sabbapadāni yojetabbāni.
86 如此,在表明了这本身就是达到利益的道路之后,现在为了显示它能向上提升,世尊说:“纯陀,譬如……”等。显示巴利原文
86. Evaṃ tasseva hitādhigamāya maggabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni uparibhāgaṅgamanīyataṃ dassento, seyyathāpītiādimāha.
它的意思是:纯陀,正如一切不善法——无论是否为结生的生起因,也不论在结生之后是否成为异熟的因——由于在异熟时会产生不可意、不可爱的结果,所以都因其生来的性质而被称为“导向下堕”;同样,一切善法——无论是否为结生的生起因,也不论在结生之后是否成为异熟的因——由于在异熟时会产生可意、可爱的结果,所以都因其生来的性质而被称为“导向上升”。纯陀,对于害人者来说,也是如此……导向上升。在这里,有一个譬喻的对应:正如一切不善都导向下堕,害人者那一分害也是如此;正如一切善都导向上升,无害者那一分无害也是如此。应当以同样的方式,用不善来类比不善,用善来类比善,这就是此处的意趣所在。显示巴利原文
Tassattho, yathā nāma, cunda, ye keci akusalā dhammā paṭisandhiyā janakā vā ajanakā vā, dinnāyapi paṭisandhiyā vipākajanakā vā ajanakā vā, sabbe te jātivasena adhobhāgaṅgamanīyāti evaṃnāmāva honti, vipākakāle aniṭṭhākantavipākattā. Yathā ca ye keci kusalā dhammā paṭisandhiyā janakā vā ajanakā vā dinnāyapi paṭisandhiyā vipākajanakā vā ajanakā vā, sabbe te jātivasena uparibhāgaṅgamanīyāti evaṃnāmāva honti, vipākakāle iṭṭhakantavipākattā, evameva kho, cunda, vihiṃsakassa…pe… uparibhāgāyāti. Tatrāyaṃ opammasaṃsandanā – yathā sabbe akusalā adhobhāgaṅgamanīyā, evaṃ vihiṃsakassa ekā vihiṃsāpi. Yathā ca sabbe kusalā uparibhāgaṅgamanīyā, evaṃ avihiṃsakassa ekā avihiṃsāpi. Eteneva upāyena akusalaṃ akusalena kusalañca kusalena upametabbaṃ, ayaṃ kirettha adhippāyoti.
87 如此显示了这减损能导向上升之后,现在为了显示它能够导向般涅槃,世尊说:“纯陀,他岂能……”等语。在此,“他”是指前面所说的那种补特伽罗。引出“对此”这一提示语后,应知所有文句有如下关联:纯陀,如果一个人自己陷入泥沼,他岂能拉起另一个陷入泥沼的人?所谓“陷入泥沼”,在世间是指沉没在深泥中的人;而在圣者律中,泥沼是指五种欲,陷入泥沼是指沉溺其中的愚痴凡夫。因此,在这里应当这样来理解意义的连贯:纯陀,就像有人自己沉没在深及鼻子的泥沼里,却想抓住另一个同样沉没者的手或头将他拉起,这是不可能的,因为并没有能使他拉起那人并让其站到干地的条件;同样,纯陀,如果一个人自己陷入了五种欲的泥沼,他岂能拉起另一个同样陷入泥沼的人?这也是不可能的。显示巴利原文
87. Evaṃ tasseva sallekhassa uparibhāgaṅgamanīyataṃ dassetvā idāni parinibbāpane samatthabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ so vata cundātiādimāha. Tattha soti vuttappakārapuggalaniddeso. Tassa yoti imaṃ uddesavacanaṃ āharitvā yo attanā palipapalipanno, so vata, cunda, paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ uddharissatīti evaṃ sabbapadesu sambandho veditabbo. Palipapalipannoti gambhīrakaddame nimuggo vuccati, no ca kho ariyassa vinaye. Ariyassa pana vinaye palipanti pañca kāmaguṇā vuccanti. Palipannoti tattha nimuggo bālaputhujjano, tasmā evamettha atthayojanā veditabbā. Yathā, cunda, koci puriso yāva nāsikaggā gambhīre kaddame nimuggo aparaṃ tattheva nimuggaṃ hatthe vā sīse vā gahetvā uddharissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, na hi taṃ kāraṇamatthi, yena so taṃ uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhapeyya, evameva yo attanā pañcakāmaguṇapalipe palipanno, so vata paraṃ tatheva palipapalipannaṃ uddharissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati.
对此,或许有人会想:“这不合理,因为那些凡夫比丘、比丘尼、优婆塞、优婆夷在听闻说法后,确实也会有通达法的人,所以陷入泥沼的人能救拔他人。”不应这样认为。实际上,在那情形中,是世尊在救拔,说法者只获得称赞,就像替国王读信的人一样。例如,国王寄到边境的信件,那里的人读不了信,便请能读的人读出来,他们听了内容后,恭敬地奉行说:“这是国王的命令。”他们不会认为是“读信人的命令”。读信人只因为“以流利、不结巴的语言读诵”而得到称赞。同样,虽然舍利弗等说法者宣说法,但他们就像朗读写在贝叶上文字的人,那佛法的开示实属世尊,如同国王的命令。那些听后通达法的人,应知是被世尊所救拔。说法者只因为“以流利、不结巴的语言说法”而得到称赞。因此,这是合理的。至于白分,则当以相反的方式理解。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā ayuttametaṃ, puthujjanānampi bhikkhubhikkhunīupāsakaupāsikānaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sutvā hontiyeva dhammaṃ abhisametāro, tasmā palipapalipanno uddharatīti, taṃ na tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bhagavāyeva hi tattha uddharati, pasaṃsāmattameva pana dhammakathikā labhanti raññā pahitalekhavācako viya. Yathā hi rañño paccantajanapade pahitaṃ lekhaṃ tattha manussā lekhaṃ vācetuṃ ajānantā yo vācetuṃ jānāti, tena vācāpetvā tamatthaṃ sutvā ‘‘rañño āṇā’’ti ādarena sampādenti, na ca nesaṃ hoti ‘‘lekhavācakassa ayaṃ āṇā’’ti. Lekhavācako pana ‘‘vissaṭṭhāya vācāya vācesi anelagaḷāyā’’ti pasaṃsāmattameva labhati, evameva kiñcāpi sāriputtapabhutayo dhammakathikā dhammaṃ desenti, atha kho likhitapaṇṇavācako viya te honti. Bhagavatoyeva pana sā dhammadesanā rañño āṇā viya. Ye ca taṃ sutvā dhammaṃ abhisamenti, te bhagavāyeva uddharatīti veditabbā. Dhammakathikā pana ‘‘vissaṭṭhāya vācāya dhammaṃ desenti anelagaḷāyā’’ti pasaṃsāmattameva labhantīti. Tasmā yuttamevetanti. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
对于“未调伏、未制御、未般涅槃”这几个词,应作如是解:“未调伏”即未去除烦恼之毒;“未制御”即未修学律仪;“未般涅槃”即烦恼未得止息。如此之人,若要去调伏他人、令他人去除烦恼之毒、教导他人三学,或令他人般涅槃、止息他人的烦恼——此事绝无可能。反之,若就清净的一面,即善的方面而言,便可知其成立。显示巴利原文
Adantoavinīto aparinibbutoti ettha pana anibbisatāya adanto. Asikkhitavinayatāya avinīto. Anibbutakilesatāya aparinibbutoti veditabbo. So tādiso paraṃ damessati, nibbisaṃ karissati , vinessati vā tisso sikkhā sikkhāpessati, parinibbāpessati vā tassa kilese nibbāpessatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
同样地,纯陀,对于有害之人……能导致般涅槃的部分,其义应如是解:犹如自身未陷泥沼者,能将陷入泥沼者拉出;已调伏者,能调伏他人;已制御者,能教导他人;已般涅槃者,能令他人般涅槃——这是有道理、有可能的。何以故?因为此人自身具备了未陷泥沼、已调伏、已制御、已般涅槃的素质。同样地,纯陀,对于有害之人,无害能导致有害的般涅槃。这是指:自身无害者,其无害本身便能令彼有害者的害意般涅槃。因为自身无害之人能止息他人加害的思惟,这是有道理、有可能的。何以故?唯因他那无害的本质。因为一个人若于自身亲证某法,他便有能力劝发他人也朝向此目标而修行。显示巴利原文
Evameva kho, cunda, vihiṃsakassa…pe… parinibbānāyāti ettha pana evamattho veditabbo – yathā hi attanā apalipapalipanno paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ uddharissati, danto damessati, vinīto vinessati, parinibbuto parinibbāpessatīti ṭhānametaṃ vijjatīti. Kiṃ pana tanti? Apalipapalipannattaṃ, dantattaṃ vinītattaṃ parinibbutattañca, evameva kho, cunda, vihiṃsakassa purisapuggalassa avihiṃsā hoti parinibbānāya. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yo attanā avihiṃsako, tassa yā avihiṃsā, ayaṃ yā esā vihiṃsakassa parassa vihiṃsā, tassā parinibbānāya hoti, attanā hi avihiṃsako parassa vihiṃsācetanaṃ nibbāpessatīti ṭhānametaṃ vijjati. Kiṃ pana tanti? Avihiṃsakattameva. Yañhi yena attanā adhigataṃ hoti, so paraṃ tadatthāya samādapetuṃ sakkotīti.
或者可以这样理解:正如自身未陷泥沼、已调伏、已制御、已般涅槃者,能拉起陷于泥沼者、未调伏者、未制御者、未般涅槃者,并能调伏、教导、令他们般涅槃——这是有道理、有可能的;同样地,对于一个有害之人,当他在修习断除有害之道时,所生起的无害,便能导致般涅槃。正如已般涅槃者能止息未般涅槃者有害的思惟,唯有无害的思惟才具足止息有害思惟的能力。为了阐明此义,世尊方说“同样地,纯陀……”这一段,其含义应从这一角度去理解。并且,不仅于此处所释,在一切相关的经文中,道理皆相同。不过,为避免过于繁琐,此处未作逐词解释。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yathā attanā apalipanno danto vinīto parinibbuto paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ adantaṃ avinītaṃ aparinibbutañca uddharissati damessati vinessati parinibbāpessatīti ṭhānametaṃ vijjati, evameva vihiṃsakassa purisapuggalassa vihiṃsāpahānāya maggaṃ bhāvayato uppannā avihiṃsā hoti parinibbānāya. Parinibbuto viya hi aparinibbutaṃ avihiṃsācetanāva vihiṃsācetanaṃ parinibbāpetuṃ samatthā. Etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘evameva kho, cundā’’tiādimāhāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbapadesu. Ativitthārabhayena pana anupadayojanā na katāti.
88 如此显示了它能令烦恼般涅槃的功能之后,现在为了结束开示,并劝勉大众实践法,世尊说了“iti kho, cunda”等语。此处,“削减之因”是指削减的原因。这一道理遍于一切处,这里所说的不害等法,正因它能削减害等法,故称为削减之因。由于要透过这些法来生起心,故为心生起之因;对于害等法而言,此法应当修习,故为修习之因;它能成就更高的阶段,故为上分因;它能令害等法般涅槃,故为般涅槃之因。“寻求利益者”,意为为你们寻求真舍利益者。“具足慈悯者”,即怀有慈悯的人。“出于慈悯”,是指以慈悯心摄持之后,完全地施与付出。“我已为你们作了应作之事”,意思是我通过为你们开示这五种方式,已经完成了对你们应尽的责任。因为,一位具足慈悯的导师所应做的,正是这样无误地宣说正法。自此之后,具体的实践便是弟子们自己的责任。因此,世尊才说:“纯陀,这些树下……乃至……这是我对你们的教诫。”显示巴利原文
88. Evaṃ tassa parinibbāpane samatthabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni taṃ desanaṃ nigametvā dhammapaṭipattiyaṃ niyojetuṃ iti kho, cundātiādimāha. Tattha sallekhapariyāyoti sallekhakāraṇaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha ettha avihiṃsādayo eva vihiṃsādīnaṃ sallekhanato sallekhakāraṇaṃ . Tesaṃ vasena cittassa uppādetabbato cittupādakāraṇaṃ, vihiṃsādi, parikkamanassa hetuto parikkamanakāraṇaṃ, uparibhāganipphādanato uparibhāgakāraṇaṃ , vihiṃsādīnaṃ parinibbāpanato parinibbānakāraṇanti veditabbā. Hitesināti hitaṃ esantena. Anukampakenāti anukampamānena. Anukampaṃ upādāyāti anukampaṃ cittena pariggahetvā, pariccātipi vuttaṃ hoti. Kataṃ vo taṃ mayāti taṃ mayā ime pañca pariyāye dassentena tumhākaṃ kataṃ. Ettakameva hi anukampakassa satthu kiccaṃ, yadidaṃ aviparītadhammadesanā. Ito paraṃ pana paṭipatti nāma sāvakānaṃ kiccaṃ. Tenāha etāni, cunda, rukkhamūlāni…pe… amhākaṃ anusāsanīti.
其中,“树下”指示树下坐卧处。“空闲处”指示远离人群之处。两者合在一起,说明了适合瑜伽行者的坐卧处,并将遗产交付给他们。“你们应修禅那”的意思是:以专注所缘的禅那审察三十八种所缘,并以观照特相的禅那,从无常等角度审察蕴、处等。这就是说,要修习止与观。“不要放逸”,即不要懈怠。“不要事后追悔”:那些在年轻、健康、具备七种适当等顺缘,以及当面值遇导师时,若缺乏如理作意,日夜只顾喜庆宴饮,沉溺于躺卧之乐、睡眠之乐而放逸的人,到了后来衰老时、生病时、临终时、遭遇不幸时、导师般涅槃之后,回忆起自己过去的放逸生活,并看到伴随结生的死业如此沉重时,便会追悔莫及。为了说明这个意思,世尊说“不要事后追悔”。“这就是我对你们的教诫”,意思是:这就是我传给你们的——“你们应修禅那,不要放逸”,这样的教诫,也就是忠告。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca rukkhamūlānīti iminā rukkhamūlasenāsanaṃ dasseti. Suññāgārānīti iminā janavivittaṭṭhānaṃ. Ubhayenāpi ca yogānurūpasenāsanamācikkhati, dāyajjaṃ niyyāteti. Jhāyathāti ārammaṇūpanijjhānena aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇāni, lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena ca aniccādito khandhāyatanādīni upanijjhāyatha, samathañca vipassanañca vaḍḍhethāti vuttaṃ hoti. Mā pamādatthāti mā pamajjittha. Mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvatthāti ye hi pubbe daharakāle, ārogyakāle, sattasappāyādisampattikāle, satthu sammukhībhāvakāle ca yonisomanasikāravirahitā rattindivaṃ maṅgulabhattā hutvā seyyasukhaṃ middhasukhamanubhontā pamajjanti, te pacchā jarākāle, rogakāle, maraṇakāle, vipattikāle, satthu parinibbutakāle ca taṃ pubbe pamādavihāraṃ anussarantā, sappaṭisandhikālakiriyañca bhāriyaṃ sampassamānā vippaṭisārino honti, tumhe pana tādisā mā ahuvatthāti etamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvatthā’’ti. Ayaṃ vo amhākaṃ anusāsanīti ayaṃ amhākaṃ santikā ‘‘jhāyatha mā pamādatthā’’ti tumhākaṃ anusāsanī, ovādoti vuttaṃ hoti.
9. 《正见经》的解释显示巴利原文
9. Sammādiṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
89 以“如是我闻”开始的这部经是《正见经》。其中,诸如“贤友!人们说‘正见、正见’,究竟怎样才算是……”或者“贤友!什么是不善?”——长老所提出的所有问题,都是出于想要开示的意愿而提出的问题。显示巴利原文
89.Evaṃme sutanti sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti, āvuso, vuccati, kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso’’ti vā ‘‘katamaṃ panāvuso , akusala’’nti vā evaṃ yattakā therena pucchā vuttā, sabbā kathetukamyatā pucchā eva.
其中,因为既有人了知而称为正见者,也有人不了知——无论是外道还是教内之人,或依传闻,或依自证——也如此称呼。因此,他依据这许多不同的说法,两次提起而说:‘贤友,人们所说的正见者、正见者……’这里的用意是:有些人被称为正见者,另一些人也称为正见者;当这样被称呼时,依其意义与特相,一位圣弟子究竟在何种程度上才成为正见者呢?在此,‘正见者’是指具备优胜、殊胜见解之人。然而,当‘正见’一词仅就法本身而言时,应理解为:那种优胜、殊胜的见解即是正见。显示巴利原文
Tattha yasmā jānantāpi sammādiṭṭhīti vadanti ajānantāpi bāhirakāpi sāsanikāpi anussavādivasenāpi attapaccakkhenāpi, tasmā taṃ bahūnaṃ vacanaṃ upādāya dvikkhattuṃ āmasanto ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti, āvuso, vuccatī’’ti āha. Ayañhi ettha adhippāyo, aparehipi sammādiṭṭhīti vuccati, athāparehipi sammādiṭṭhīti vuccati, svāyaṃ evaṃ vuccamāno atthañca lakkhaṇañca upādāya kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hotīti. Tattha sammādiṭṭhīti sobhanāya pasatthāya ca diṭṭhiyā samannāgato. Yadā pana dhammeyeva ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhisaddo vattati, tadāssa sobhanā pasatthā ca diṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti evamattho veditabbo.
这种正见有两种:世间正见和出世间正见。其中,了知业为自作的智和随顺谛智是世间正见;简而言之,一切有漏的慧也都是世间正见。与圣道、圣果相应的慧,是出世间正见。人则分为三种:凡夫、有学和无学。凡夫又分两种:外道与教内之人。外道中的业论者,依业自作见而成为正见者,却不具备随顺谛智,因为他们执取我见。教内之人则两者兼具。有学以决定的见而成为正见者;无学则以无学正见而成为正见者。然而,此处所说的‘正见者’,是指具备了决定的、导向出离的出世间善正见之人。因此,经文说:‘他的见已正直,于法成就了不坏净信,已来至此正法。’这正是因为,出世间善正见不落两端,以正直为性而行,且断除了身曲等一切邪曲,故称为‘见正直’。而成就此见之人,于九种出世间法亦成就决然、不可动摇的不坏净信;他解开一切见之稠林,断除一切烦恼,出离生死轮回,圆满行道,以圣道而来到这由正自觉者所宣说、彻入不死、名为涅槃的正法,故有是言。显示巴利原文
Sā cāyaṃ sammādiṭṭhi duvidhā hoti lokiyā lokuttarāti. Tattha kammassakatāñāṇaṃ saccānulomikañāṇañca lokiyā sammādiṭṭhi, saṅkhepato vā sabbāpi sāsavā paññā. Ariyamaggaphalasampayuttā paññā lokuttarā sammādiṭṭhi. Puggalo pana tividho hoti puthujjano sekkho asekkho ca. Tattha puthujjano duvidho hoti bāhirako sāsaniko ca. Tattha bāhirako kammavādī kammassakatādiṭṭhiyā sammādiṭṭhi hoti, no saccānulomikāya attadiṭṭhiparāmāsakattā. Sāsaniko dvīhipi. Sekkho niyatāya sammādiṭṭhiyā sammādiṭṭhi. Asekkho asekkhāya. Idha pana niyatāya niyyānikāya lokuttarakusalasammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti adhippeto. Tenevāha ‘‘ujugatāssa diṭṭhi dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato āgato imaṃ saddhamma’’nti, lokuttarakusalasammādiṭṭhiyeva hi antadvayamanupagamma ujubhāvena gatattā , kāyavaṅkādīni ca sabbavaṅkāni samucchinditvā gatattā ujugatā hoti, tāyeva ca diṭṭhiyā samannāgato navappakārepi lokuttaradhamme aveccappasādena acalappasādena samannāgato hoti, sabbadiṭṭhigahanāni ca vinibbeṭhento sabbakilese pajahanto jātisaṃsārā nikkhamanto paṭipattiṃ pariniṭṭhapento ariyena maggena āgato imaṃ sambuddhappaveditaṃ amatogadhaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ saddhammanti vuccati.
‘从何时起’是表示时间分际的词语,意为‘在什么时候’。‘他彻知不善’:他彻知称为十不善业道的不善;他以取灭尽为所缘的慧,依其作用而通达‘此是苦’,以此彻知不善。‘他彻知不善根’:也彻知成为其根本与因缘的不善根;以同样方式通达‘此是苦之集’。这样的解说同样适用于‘善及善根’等处。如同这里,此后一切条目,都应理解为依作用了知事相。‘即便仅此’:仅凭这些,即到了知不善等为止。‘便成为正见者’:是说成就如前所述的出世间正见。‘他的见已正直……已来至此正法’:至此为止,简略开示已结束。也就是说,开示是简略的,而那些比丘的如理作意之通达,则应理解为详细。显示巴利原文
Yato khoti kālaparicchedavacanametaṃ, yasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Akusalañca pajānātīti dasākusalakammapathasaṅkhātaṃ akusalañca pajānāti, nirodhārammaṇāya pajānanāya kiccavasena ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti paṭivijjhanto akusalaṃ pajānāti. Akusalamūlañca pajānātīti tassa mūlapaccayabhūtaṃ akusalamūlañca pajānāti, teneva pakārena ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti paṭivijjhanto. Esa nayo kusalañca kusalamūlañcāti etthāpi. Yathā cettha, evaṃ ito paresu sabbavāresu kiccavaseneva vatthupajānanā veditabbā. Ettāvatāpīti ettakena iminā akusalādippajānanenāpi. Sammādiṭṭhi hotīti vuttappakārāya lokuttarasammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato hoti. Ujugatāssa…pe… imaṃ saddhammanti ettāvatā saṃkhittadesanā niṭṭhitā hoti. Desanāyeva cesā saṃkhittā, tesaṃ pana bhikkhūnaṃ vitthāravaseneva sammāmanasikārappaṭivedho veditabbo.
然而在第二番中,应知开示是详细的,作意的通达也是详细的。在那里,有些比丘看到详细开示的末尾有“完全断除贪随眠……”等语句,便说:“以略说开示了两种较低的道,以详说开示了两种较高的道。”但长老则说:“在略说中也是总括四道而讲说的,在详说中也是如此。”而这里对略说与详说的这种分析,在所有番处都应按此处所讲的道理来理解。从此以下,我将只解释那些未曾解释、意义未明的词句。显示巴利原文
Dutiyavāre pana desanāpi vitthārena manasikārappaṭivedhopi vitthāreneva vuttoti veditabbo. Tattha ‘‘saṃkhittadesanāya dve heṭṭhimamaggā, vitthāradesanāya dve uparimamaggā kathitā’’ti bhikkhū āhaṃsu vitthāradesanāvasāne ‘‘sabbaso rāgānusayaṃ pahāyā’’tiādivacanaṃ sampassamānā. Thero panāha ‘‘saṃkhittadesanāyapi cattāro maggā rāsito kathitā, vitthāradesanāyapī’’ti. Yā cāyaṃ idha saṃkhittavitthāradesanāsu vicāraṇā āvikatā, sā sabbavāresu idha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Apubbānuttānapadavaṇṇanāmattameva hi ito paraṃ karissāma.
不善业道释义显示巴利原文
Akusalakammapathavaṇṇanā
其中,首先在第一番的详细开示中,对于“贤友,杀生是不善”等语句,应知“不善”是因不善巧而生起,或是作为其后将说之善法的对立面。从特相来说,它是有过失的、有苦报的,或者是染污的。这就是此处共通的词句解释。显示巴利原文
Tattha paṭhamavārassa tāva vitthāradesanāya ‘‘pāṇātipāto kho, āvuso, akusala’’ntiādīsu akosallappavattiyā akusalaṃ veditabbaṃ, parato vattabbakusalappaṭipakkhato vā. Taṃ lakkhaṇato sāvajjadukkhavipākaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ vā. Ayaṃ tāvettha sādhāraṇapadavaṇṇanā.
至于各别词句的解释中,“杀生”是对有情的杀害,即杀害有情、杀戮有情。在此,“有情”从世俗上说为众生,从究竟意义上说为命根。对于那有情,若起有情想,生起旨在断绝命根的加行,并通过身门或语门中任何一种门生起的杀思,即是杀生。在没有功德的畜生等有情中,对小的有情罪过小,对体形大的有情罪过大。为什么呢?因为加行粗重的缘故。即便加行相同,亦因对象巨大而成为重罪。在有功德的人等有情中,对功德少的有情罪过小,对功德大的罪过大。然而,在身体大小和功德相等的情况下,应知:由于烦恼和加行的温和,罪过小;由于猛烈,罪过大。其成犯条件有五项:有情、有情想、杀心、加行、由此而死。加行有六种:亲手做、教令做、投掷或设置陷阱机关、安放毒等固定物、以咒术所做、以神通所做。然而,如果在此详细展开就会太过繁琐,所以不作详述,其他类似的情形也是如此。若有需要,可以查阅《一切善见律注》来了解。显示巴利原文
Asādhāraṇesu pana pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. So guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo. Tassa pañca sambhārā honti pāṇo, pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena maraṇanti. Cha payogā sāhatthiko, āṇattiko, nissaggiyo, thāvaro, vijjāmayo, iddhimayoti. Imasmiṃ panettha vitthārīyamāne atipapañco hoti, tasmā naṃ na vitthārayāma, aññañca evarūpaṃ. Atthikehi pana samantapāsādikaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172) oloketvā gahetabbo.
“不与取”即取走未给与的东西,也就是拿取他人的物品、偷盗、窃取。其中,“未给与”是指他人持有守护之物,对于该物,物主即使随意取用,也不受惩罚、无有过失。对于那他人持有守护之物,若怀有“他人持有守护”之想,生起令其取走的加行,这种偷盗的思即是不与取。若物属卑下之人,罪小;若物为殊胜之物,罪大。何以故?因为所对之境殊胜的缘故。在对象相同的情况下,若物属更具功德之人,罪大;若物属功德较浅之人,相对而言罪小。不与取的具足条件有五:他人持有守护之物、他人持有守护之想、偷盗心、加行、由此而取走。加行有六种,如亲手作等。而且,这些加行会随对应的情况,依偷取、强夺、藏匿、设计、欺骗等取走方式而生起。以上是此处的简略说明。详细的解释见《一切善见律注》。显示巴利原文
Adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ, corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti. Tasmiṃ pana parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ , paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ. Taṃ taṃ guṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ. Tassa pañca sambhārā honti parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā, theyyacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena haraṇanti. Cha payogā sāhatthikādayova. Te ca kho yathānurūpaṃ theyyāvahāro, pasayhāvahāro, paṭicchannāvahāro, parikappāvahāro, kusāvahāroti imesaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena pavattāti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92) vutto.
“邪淫”一词中,“于欲”是指关于淫欲的行为。“邪行”是指一向受呵责的恶劣行径。从特相来说,以行非法欲乐的意图,通过身门生起而违越不可行处的思,即是邪淫。显示巴利原文
Kāmesumicchācāroti ettha pana kāmesūti methunasamācāresu. Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesumicchācāro.
其中,所谓“不可行处”是指:对于男子,有母亲守护、父亲守护、父母守护、兄长守护、姐姐守护、亲族守护、宗族守护、法守护、有守护、有罚,这十种称为母护等;又有以财买来的妻子、自愿同居的妻子、因财物而同住的妻子、因衣服而同住的妻子、以水钵礼仪迎娶的妻子、取薪的妻子、既是女奴又是妻子的、既是女佣又是妻子的、战场上掳掠而来的妻子、临时的妻子,这十种称为财买妇等。如此总共有二十种女子。对于女子而言,两种有守护、有罚的女子,以及于十种财买妇等中其他的男子,这些即是“不可行处”。而且,若这种邪淫发生在没有戒德等功德的不可行处,罪小;若发生在具足戒德等功德的不可行处,罪大。其具足条件有四:不可行处的对象、对彼对象起行淫之心、行淫的加行、以性器官入性器官而违犯并领受。加行唯有一种:必须亲自作。显示巴利原文
Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitā, piturakkhitā, mātāpiturakkhitā, bhāturakkhitā, bhaginirakkhitā, ñātirakkhitā, gottarakkhitā, dhammarakkhitā, sārakkhā, saparidaṇḍāti māturakkhitādayo dasa ; dhanakkītā, chandavāsinī, bhogavāsinī, paṭavāsinī, odapattakinī, obhaṭacumbaṭā, dāsī ca bhariyā ca, kammakārī ca bhariyā ca, dhajāhatā, muhuttikāti etā ca dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dvinnaṃ sārakkhāsaparidaṇḍānaṃ, dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ itthīnaṃ aññe purisā, idaṃ agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. So panesa micchācāro sīlādiguṇarahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanapayogo, maggenamaggappaṭipattiadhivāsananti. Eko payogo sāhatthiko eva.
在“妄语”中,“妄”是指以欺骗为先、破坏利益的语行或身行。而以欺骗的意图,策动欺诳他人之身行或语行的思,即是妄语。另一解释:“妄”是不实、不正确的事情;“语”是将其当作真实、正确而告知对方。从特相来说,对于不实之事,欲令他人以为真实,由此生起那般告知的思,即是妄语。该妄语所破坏的利益小,罪过便小;破坏的利益大,罪过便大。再者,在家者因不愿将自己的东西给人而以“没有”等方式说出的妄语,罪过小;作为证人而为了破坏他人利益说的妄语,罪过大。出家人得到少许油或酥,带着玩笑的意图,以讲述往昔故事的方式说“今天村里油如河流一般流淌”,如此转起的妄语,罪过小;若明明未见却称已见,以此方式说的妄语,罪过大。它有四个条件:不实之事、欺骗之心、相应的努力、对方解了彼义。一种加行:唯由自身所作。这应理解为,通过身体、或身体所附之物、或语言,而作出欺骗的行为。若由彼行而令对方解了彼义,则在发动彼行之思生起的那一刹那,便结下了妄语业。显示巴利原文
Musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjako vacīpayogo kāyapayogo vā. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādanakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Aparo nayo musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. Vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Apica gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthītiādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadīmaññe sandatī’’ti purāṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā honti atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova. So kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā vācāya vā visaṃvādakakiriyākaraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Tāya ce kiriyāya paro tamatthaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ kiriyāsamuṭṭhāpikacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati.
离间语等之中,所谓“离间语”,是指以那样的语言,使闻者心中对自己生起亲密感,对他人产生疏远、空虚感。所谓“粗恶语”,是指以那样的语言,令自己与对方俱成粗暴,其语自身亦是粗砺,闻不悦耳,心不安乐。所谓“杂秽语”,是指说无有意义、杂冗虚浮之语。作为这些言语根本的思,亦得离间语等之名,此处所指正是此思。其中,心有染污者,为了离间他人,或为了让自己成为他人眼中可亲之人,而策动身行或语行的思,即是“离间语”。若其所离间的对象功德浅,罪过便小;功德深,罪过便大。它有四个条件:有可被离间的他人;以“如此他们将变易、将分离”之离间意图,或以“我将成为可爱、可信任之人”之贪爱意图为主导;相应的努力;对方解了彼义。显示巴利原文
Pisuṇā vācātiādīsu yāya vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ parassa ca suññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇā vācā. Yāya pana attānampi parampi pharusampi karoti, sā vācā sayampi pharusā neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayasukhā vā, ayaṃ pharusā vācā. Yena samphaṃ palapati niratthakaṃ, so samphappalāpo. Tesaṃ mūlabhūtā cetanāpi pisuṇāvācādināmameva labhati, sā eva ca idha adhippetāti. Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇā vācā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā cattāro sambhārā bhinditabbo paro, ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissanti vinā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā, ‘‘ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti piyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti.
能令他人内心受伤之粗暴身行或语行所发起的纯一粗暴之思,即是“粗恶语”。为令此义明了,有一事例:据说有一男孩不听从母亲的话,跑向森林,母亲无法令他折返,便骂道:“愿凶暴的母水牛追着你!”结果就在那森林里,一头母水牛出现了。男孩遂作真实语:“我母亲口中之语,愿其不发生;她心中所想,愿其成就!”那母水牛便如被捆绑般,定在原地不动。因此,即使言语的作用能伤及他人要害,若内心温和,亦不构成粗恶语。因为父母有时也会对孩子说:“愿盗贼把你们剁成碎块!”然而哪怕一片莲叶落在孩子身上,他们也不愿意。轨范师与亲教师有时也会对依止者说:“这些无惭无愧的家伙到处晃荡,把他们赶出去!”但内心实是希望这些人获得教法成就与证悟成就。正如内心温和,言语便不成为粗恶语;同样,仅是言语柔和,也不等于就不是粗恶语。因为对于想要杀害某人的人,说出“让他舒服地躺着吧”这样的话,并非非粗恶语。唯有内心粗暴,如此的言语才是粗恶语。若其所辱骂的对象功德浅,罪过便小;功德深,罪过便大。它有三……显示巴利原文
Parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusā cetanā pharusā vācā. Tassa āvibhāvatthamidaṃ vatthu – eko kira dārako mātuvacanaṃ anādiyitvā araññaṃ gacchati, taṃ mātā nivattetuṃ asakkontī ‘‘caṇḍā taṃ mahiṃsī anubandhatū’’ti akkosi. Athassa tattheva araññe mahiṃsī uṭṭhāsi. Dārako ‘‘yaṃ mama mātā mukhena kathesi taṃ mā hotu, yaṃ cittena cintesi taṃ hotū’’ti saccakiriyamakāsi. Mahiṃsī tattheva baddhā viya aṭṭhāsi. Evaṃ mammacchedakopi payogo cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evampi vadanti ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ karontū’’ti, uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirikā anottappino caranti niddhamatha ne’’ti. Atha kho nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti. Yathā ca cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusā vācāpi na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusā vācā hoti. Cittapharusatāya panesā pharusā vācāva. Sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā akkositabbo paro, kupitacittaṃ, akkosanāti.
能令他人了知无义之身行、语行所起的不善思,名为“杂秽语”。若惯习轻微,罪过便小;惯习深重,罪过则大。其有二条件:以谈论婆罗多大战、悉多被劫等无义之谈为先导,以及说如是之语。显示巴利原文
Anatthaviññāpakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā samphappalāpo. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa dve sambhārā bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā, tathārūpīkathākathananti.
“贪欲”者,谓其贪求,故为贪欲。其义是:面对他人财物,心趋向彼、倾注彼而生起。它以“啊,愿此物属于我!”这样对他人物品生起贪求为特相。如同不与取,罪过亦有轻有重。它有两个条件:他人财物,以及将其归于自己(心想使其成为自己所有)。因为即使以他人财物为所缘生起了贪,只要尚未以“啊,愿此物属于我”的方式将其归于自己,业道便未构成。显示巴利原文
Abhijjhāyatīti abhijjhā, parabhaṇḍābhimukhī hutvā tanninnatāya pavattatīti attho. Sā ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti evaṃ parabhaṇḍābhijjhāyanalakkhaṇā. Adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā ca mahāsāvajjā ca. Tassā dve sambhārā parabhaṇḍaṃ, attano pariṇāmanañca. Parabhaṇḍavatthuke hi lobhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatīdaṃ mamassā’’ti attano na pariṇāmeti.
“嗔恨”者,因其损害利益与安乐,故称嗔恨。它以欲毁灭他人而心怀恼害为特相,如同粗恶语,罪过有轻有重。它有两个条件:其他有情,以及欲其毁灭之思。因为即使因其他有情而生起忿怒,只要尚未生起“啊,愿他断灭、消亡!”这样欲其毁灭之想,业道便未构成。显示巴利原文
Hitasukhaṃ byāpādayatīti byāpādo. So paravināsāya manopadosalakkhaṇo , pharusā vācā viya appasāvajjo mahāsāvajjo ca. Tassa dve sambhārā parasatto ca, tassa ca vināsacintā. Parasattavatthuke hi kodhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ ucchijjeyya vinasseyyā’’ti tassa vināsaṃ na cinteti.
由于未能如实执取,故所见有误,称为“邪见”。其特相为“布施无果”等一类颠倒见。与杂秽语相似,它既有轻罪,也有重罪。其中,不决定邪见罪过较轻,决定邪见罪过较重。邪见具足两个条件:对事相的认知方式颠倒,且其所执取的对象依其所执而显现。显示巴利原文
Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvena micchā passatīti micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena viparītadassanalakkhaṇā. Samphappalāpo viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Apica aniyatā appasāvajjā, niyatā mahāsāvajjā. Tassā dve sambhārā vatthuno ca gahitākāraviparītatā, yathā ca taṃ gaṇhāti, tathābhāvena tassupaṭṭhānanti.
对于这十种不善业道,应从五个方面来辨析其差别,即:法、分、所缘、受、根。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ pana dasannaṃ akusalakammapathānaṃ dhammato koṭṭhāsato ārammaṇato vedanāto mūlatoti pañcahākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo.
就“法”而言:在此十不善业道中,依序前七种以思为体性,贪欲等三种是与思相应之法。显示巴利原文
Tattha dhammatoti etesu hi paṭipāṭiyā satta, cetanādhammāva honti, abhijjhādayo tayo cetanāsampayuttā.
就‘部分’这一角度而言:依次排列的前七种以及邪见,这八种只是业道,并非不善根。贪欲与嗔恚则既是业道,又是不善根。因为贪欲在作为根时,即是贪不善根;嗔恚即是嗔不善根。显示巴利原文
Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta, micchādiṭṭhi cāti ime aṭṭha kammapathā eva honti, no mūlāni. Abhijjhābyāpādā kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Abhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā lobho akusalamūlaṃ hoti. Byāpādo doso akusalamūlaṃ.
从‘所缘’这一角度而言:杀生以命根为所缘,故属于行所缘。不与取可以以有情为所缘,也可以以行为所缘。邪淫由于以触为所缘,属于行所缘;亦有说以有情为所缘者。妄语可以以有情或行为所缘,离间语也是如此。粗恶语唯以有情为所缘。杂秽语基于所见、所闻、所觉、所知,可以以有情或行为所缘;贪欲也是如此。嗔恚唯以有情为所缘。邪见则依三地诸法,属于行所缘。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipāto jīvitindriyārammaṇato saṅkhārārammaṇo hoti. Adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇaṃ vā saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ vā. Micchācāro phoṭṭhabbavasena saṅkhārārammaṇo. Sattārammaṇotipi eke. Musāvādo sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā. Tathā pisuṇā vācā. Pharusā vācā sattārammaṇāva. Samphappalāpo diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasena sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā, tathā abhijjhā. Byāpādo sattārammaṇova. Micchādiṭṭhi tebhūmakadhammavasena saṅkhārārammaṇā.
从‘受’这一角度而言:杀生为苦受。虽然有些国王看到盗贼时,会笑着说‘去把他杀了!’,但他们决意的思心所,却唯与苦受相应。不与取可与三受中的任何一种相应。邪淫依乐受与舍受而有二受,但在决意邪淫的心中,并无舍受。妄语可有三受,离间语亦有三受。粗恶语唯是苦受。杂秽语有三受。贪欲依乐受与舍受而有二受,邪见也是如此。嗔恚为苦受。显示巴利原文
Vedanātoti pāṇātipāto dukkhavedano hoti. Kiñcāpi hi rājāno coraṃ disvā hasamānāpi ‘‘gacchatha naṃ ghātethā’’ti vadanti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana nesaṃ dukkhasampayuttāva hoti. Adinnādānaṃ tivedanaṃ. Micchācāro sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedano, sanniṭṭhāpakacitte pana majjhattavedano na hoti. Musāvādo tivedano, tathā pisuṇā vācā. Pharusā vācā dukkhavedanāva. Samphappalāpo tivedano . Abhijjhā sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedanā, tathā micchādiṭṭhi. Byāpādo dukkhavedano.
就“根”而言:杀生依嗔根与痴根,故有二根。不与取依嗔与痴,或依贪与痴而有二根。邪淫依贪与痴而有二根。妄语依嗔与痴,或依贪与痴而有二根,离间语与杂秽语也是如此。粗恶语依嗔与痴而有二根。贪欲唯依痴根,故为单根,嗔恚也是如此。邪见依贪与痴而有二根。显示巴利原文
Mūlatoti pāṇātipāto dosamohavasena dvimūlako hoti. Adinnādānaṃ dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā. Micchācāro lobhamohavasena. Musāvādo dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā, tathā pisuṇā vācā samphappalāpo ca. Pharusā vācā dosamohavasena. Abhijjhā mohavasena ekamūlā, tathā byāpādo. Micchādiṭṭhi lobhamohavasena dvimūlāti.
所谓“贪是不善根”等,其中:因为贪着,故称为“贪”;因为嗔怒,故称为“嗔”;因为迷惑,故称为“痴”。这三者中,贪本身就是不善,因为它有过患、会带来苦报;对于杀生等不善法,有些因与贪相应而生起,有些则以贪为亲依止缘,因此贪被称为“不善根”。正如经中所说:“贤友,若人被贪欲所征服,心被贪欲完全支配,他便会杀害生命……”等等。嗔与痴作为不善根的道理,也与此相同。显示巴利原文
Lobho akusalamūlantiādīsu lubbhatīti lobho. Dussatīti doso. Muyhatīti moho. Tesu lobho sayañca akusalo sāvajjadukkhavipākaṭṭhena, imesañca pāṇātipātādīnaṃ akusalānaṃ kesañci sampayuttappabhāvakaṭṭhena kesañci upanissayapaccayaṭṭhena mūlanti akusalamūlaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘ratto kho āvuso rāgena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto pāṇampi hanatī’’tiādi. Dosamohānaṃ akusalamūlabhāvepi eseva nayo.
善业道的解释显示巴利原文
Kusalakammapathavaṇṇanā
在“离杀生是善”等句中,杀生等的含义已如前说。什么是“离”(veramaṇī)呢?因为它“断除怨害”(veraṃ maṇatī),所以称为“离”,意思是断除怨害。或者,因为它是远离行为所凭借的,通过改变词形而成为“veramaṇī”。这是从词句上作的解释。从含义上说,所谓“离”,是指与善心相应的远离,也就是经中所说“当一个人远离杀生时,在那时对杀生的厌离、远离”等所描述的那种与善心相应的远离。这种远离依类别可分为三种:时离、受戒离、断除离。其中,未曾受持学处者,在遇到违犯的因缘时,会反省自己的出身、年龄、学识等,心想:“我们做这种事并不合适。”因此不去违犯,这样生起的远离应当理解为“时离”,就如锡兰岛的恰卡那近事男一样。显示巴利原文
Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī kusalantiādīsu pāṇātipātādayo vuttatthā eva. Veraṃ maṇatīti veramaṇī, veraṃ pajahatīti attho. Viramati vā etāya karaṇabhūtāya, vikārassa vekāraṃ katvāpi veramaṇī. Ayaṃ tāvettha byañjanato vaṇṇanā. Atthato pana veramaṇīti kusalacittasampayuttā virati. Yā ‘‘pāṇātipātā viramantassa, yā tasmiṃ samaye pāṇātipātā ārati viratī’’ti evaṃ vuttā kusalacittasampayuttā virati, sā bhedato tividho hoti sampattavirati samādānavirati samucchedaviratīti. Tattha asamādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ attano jātivayabāhusaccādīni paccavekkhitvā ‘‘ayuttaṃ amhākaṃ evarūpaṃ kātu’’nti sampattavatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati sampattaviratīti veditabbā sīhaḷadīpe cakkanaupāsakassa viya.
据说,恰卡那小时候,母亲生了病。医生说,需要取新鲜带血的野兔肉才行。于是,恰卡那的哥哥便派他出去,说:“孩子,到田里去转转。”恰卡那到了田里。那时刚好有一只野兔来吃嫩稻,看见恰卡那便慌忙逃跑,却被藤蔓缠住,发出“叽叽”的叫声。恰卡那循着声音过去,抓住了野兔,心想:“我给母亲拿来做药。”但转而又想:“这实在不妥。我怎能为了母亲活命,而夺去另一个生命呢?”于是便放了野兔,说:“去吧,到林中去,和别的野兔一同享用草和水吧。”哥哥问他:“孩子,抓到野兔了吗?”他便把事情的经过说了一遍。哥哥听后责怪了他。他便走到母亲面前,以真实语立下誓言:“从我出生到现在,我不记得自己曾经故意断送过任何众生的生命。”话音刚落,母亲的病便痊愈了。显示巴利原文
Tassa kira daharakāleyeva mātuyā rogo uppajji. Vejjena ca ‘‘allasasamaṃsaṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tato cakkanassa bhātā ‘‘gaccha tāta khettaṃ āhiṇḍāhī’’ti cakkanaṃ pesesi. So tattha gato. Tasmiñca samaye eko saso taruṇasassaṃ khādituṃ āgato hoti, so taṃ disvā vegena dhāvento valliyā baddho ‘‘kiri kirī’’ti saddamakāsi. Cakkano tena saddena gantvā taṃ gahetvā cintesi ‘‘mātu bhesajjaṃ karomī’’ti. Puna cintesi ‘‘na metaṃ patirūpaṃ, yvāhaṃ mātu jīvitakāraṇā paraṃ jīvitā voropeyya’’nti. Atha naṃ ‘‘gaccha araññe sasehi saddhiṃ tiṇodakaṃ paribhuñjā’’ti muñci. Bhātarā ca ‘‘kiṃ tāta saso laddho’’ti pucchito taṃ pavattiṃ ācikkhi. Tato naṃ bhātā paribhāsi. So mātusantikaṃ gantvā ‘‘yatohaṃ jāto, nābhijānāmi sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropetā’’ti saccaṃ vatvā adhiṭṭhāsi. Tāvadevassa mātā arogā ahosi.
至于已受持学处者,在受持学处后,乃至更进一步,即使舍弃生命也不违犯学处,由此生起的远离,应知为“受戒离”,如住在北增山的近事男之例。显示巴利原文
Samādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ pana sikkhāpadasamādāne ca tatuttari ca attano jīvitampi pariccajitvā vatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati samādānaviratīti veditabbā uttaravaḍḍhamānapabbatavāsīupāsakassa viya.
据说,这位在安跋利耶寺的宾伽拉佛护长老座下受了学处后,去耕田。当时,他的牛走失了。他在寻找那头牛时,登上了北增山,在那里被一条大蟒蛇缠住。他想:“我用这把锋利的刀把它的头砍下来。”转而又想:“这不妥当。我既在应受供养的尊师座下受了学处,怎能破戒呢?”如此思惟了三次后,他下定决心:“我宁可舍弃生命,也不破此学处。”于是将扛在肩上那根装有锋利铁头的棍子抛入了树林。就在那时,大蟒蛇松开他离去了。显示巴利原文
So kira ambariyavihāravāsīpiṅgalabuddharakkhitattherassa santike sikkhāpadāni gahetvā khettaṃ kassati. Athassa goṇo naṭṭho, so taṃ gavesanto uttaravaḍḍhamānapabbataṃ āruhi, tatra naṃ mahāsappo aggahesi. So cintesi ‘‘imāyassa tikhiṇavāsiyā sīsaṃ chindāmī’’ti. Puna cintesi ‘‘na metaṃ patirūpaṃ, yvāhaṃ bhāvanīyassa garuno santike sikkhāpadaṃ gahetvā bhindeyya’’nti. Evaṃ yāvatatiyaṃ cintetvā ‘‘jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, na sikkhāpada’’nti aṃse ṭhapitaṃ tikhiṇadaṇḍavāsiṃ araññe chaḍḍesi. Tāvadeva naṃ mahāvāḷo muñcitvā agamāsīti.
与圣道相应的远离,应知为“断除离”。自从它生起时起,圣者们连“我要杀生”这样的心念都不会生起。不过,这种远离由于善巧地运作,故说为“善”;或者说,它割断了那被称为“秽烂”的恶戒,因此也是“善”。然而,对于“贤友,何为善?”这样的提问,由于与问题不相应,故不以此义而称为“善”。显示巴利原文
Ariyamaggasampayuttā pana virati samucchedaviratīti veditabbā. Yassā uppattito pabhuti ‘‘pāṇaṃ ghātessāmī’’ti ariyapuggalānaṃ cittampi na uppajjatīti. Sā panāyaṃ virati kosallappavattiyā kusalanti vuttā. Kucchitasayanato vā kusanti laddhavohāraṃ dussīlyaṃ lunātītipi kusalaṃ. Katamañcāvuso kusalanti imassa pana pañhassa ananurūpattā kusalāti na vuttā.
正如对不善业道那样,对这些善业道,也应当从法、部分、所缘、受、根这五个方面来进行判别了知。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca akusalānaṃ, evaṃ imesampi kusalakammapathānaṃ dhammato koṭṭhāsato ārammaṇato vedanāto mūlatoti pañcahākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo.
从“法”的角度来说:在这些善业道中,依次前七个既有思,也有离;最后三个则唯与思相应。显示巴利原文
Tattha dhammatoti etesu hi paṭipāṭiyā satta cetanāpi vaṭṭanti, viratiyopi. Ante tayo cetanāsampayuttāva.
就“分”而言:按顺序,前七个仅是业道,而非善根;末尾三个既是业道,亦是善根。因为无贪求达到根本时,即是无贪善根;无瞋即是无瞋善根;正见即是无痴善根。显示巴利原文
Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta kammapathā eva, no mūlāni. Ante tayo kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Anabhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā alobho kusalamūlaṃ hoti. Abyāpādo adoso kusalamūlaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhi amoho kusalamūlaṃ.
就“所缘”而言:这些善业道的所缘,正是杀生等不善业道的所缘。因为所谓的“离”,正是远离应当避免之事。然而,应知如同以涅槃为所缘的圣道断除烦恼,这些以命根等为所缘的业道,亦断除杀生等恶戒。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ ārammaṇāneva etesaṃ ārammaṇāni, vītikkamitabbatoyeva hi veramaṇī nāma hoti. Yathā pana nibbānārammaṇo ariyamaggo kilese pajahati, evaṃ jīvitindriyādiārammaṇāpete kammapathā pāṇātipātādīni dussīlyāni pajahantīti veditabbā.
就“受”而言:一切善业道,或为乐受,或为舍受。因为达到善时,并无苦受可言。显示巴利原文
Vedanātoti sabbe sukhavedanā vā honti, majjhattavedanā vā. Kusalaṃ patvā hi dukkhavedanā nāma natthi.
就“根”而言:依次前七个业道,若以智相应心远离者,依无贪、无瞋、无痴而成三根;若以智不相应心远离者,则为二根。无贪,若以智相应心远离者,为二根;若以智不相应心远离者,则为一根。然而,无贪自身并不作为自己的根,无瞋也是如此。正见则依无贪与无瞋而为二根。显示巴利原文
Mūlatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta kammapathā ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa alobhaadosaamohavasena timūlā honti. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena viramantassa dvimūlā. Anabhijjhā ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa dvimūlā. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena ekamūlā. Alobho pana attanāva attano mūlaṃ na hoti, abyāpādepi eseva nayo. Sammādiṭṭhi alobhādosavasena dvimūlāvāti.
关于“无贪是善根”等说法,“无贪”即非贪,这是与贪相对治之法的名称。无瞋、无痴的道理也是如此。其中,无贪自身即是善法,而对于离杀生等诸善法,或依相应俱生之义,或依亲依止缘之义,而作为根,故称为善根。无瞋、无痴作为善根的道理,亦与上述相同。显示巴利原文
Alobho kusalamūlantiādīsu na lobhoti alobho, lobhapaṭipakkhassa dhammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Adosāmohesupi eseva nayo. Tesu alobho sayañca kusalaṃ, imesañca pāṇātipātā veramaṇīādīnaṃ kusalānaṃ kesañci sampayuttappabhāvakaṭṭhena kesañci upanissayapaccayaṭṭhena mūlanti kusalamūlaṃ. Adosāmohānampi kusalamūlabhāve eseva nayo.
如今,为了归结所有略说与广说所阐述的义理,论师引述了“尊者,从……以来”等经文的开示。其中,“如此了知不善”,即如所详述,依十不善业道而了知不善。“如此了知不善根”等,也是如此。至此,以这一方式,完整地阐明了修习四圣谛业处者直至阿拉汉位的解脱之道。如何阐明?于此,除去贪欲,十不善业道与十善业道为苦谛。贪欲与贪,以及不善根,这两类法在严格意义上为集谛。但在宽泛意义上,一切业道亦为苦谛,一切善与不善根亦为集谛。这两者的不转起为灭谛。遍知苦、断除集、证知灭的圣道为道谛。如是,苦谛与道谛二谛依其自性被直接说明,集谛与灭谛二谛则应以回转的方式来了知。显示巴利原文
Idāni sabbampi taṃ saṅkhepena ca vitthārena ca desitamatthaṃ nigamento yato kho āvusotiādiappanāvāramāha. Tattha evaṃ akusalaṃ pajānātīti evaṃ yathāniddiṭṭhadasākusalakammapathavasena akusalaṃ pajānāti. Evaṃ akusalamūlantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettāvatā ekena nayena catusaccakammaṭṭhānikassa yāva arahattā niyyānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti. Kathaṃ? Ettha hi ṭhapetvā abhijjhaṃ dasa akusalakammapathā ca kusalakammapathā ca dukkhasaccaṃ. Abhijjhā ca lobho akusalamūlañcāti ime dve dhammā nippariyāyena samudayasaccaṃ. Pariyāyena pana sabbepi kammapathā dukkhasaccaṃ. Sabbāni kusalākusalamūlāni samudayasaccaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ . Dukkhaṃ parijānanto samudayaṃ pajahamāno nirodhaṃ pajānanto ariyamaggo maggasaccanti iti dve saccāni sarūpena vuttāni, dve āvattahāravasena veditabbāni.
“他完全断除贪随眠”:即他如是了知不善等,以一切方式断除了贪随眠。“驱除瞋随眠”:即也以一切方式完全去除了瞋随眠。至此,说明了不来道。“根除‘我是’之见慢随眠”:即不执五蕴中任何一法为作者,拔除以“我是”这种总执方式生起的见慢随眠。显示巴利原文
So sabbaso rāgānusayaṃ pahāyāti so evaṃ akusalādīni pajānanto sabbākārena rāgānusayaṃ pajahitvā. Paṭighānusayaṃ paṭivinodetvāti paṭighānusayañca sabbākāreneva nīharitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettāvatā anāgāmimaggo kathito. Asmīti diṭṭhimānānusayaṃ samūhanitvāti pañcasu khandhesu kañci dhammaṃ anavakārīkaritvā ‘‘asmī’’ti iminā samūhaggahaṇākārena pavattaṃ diṭṭhimānānusayaṃ samugghāṭetvā.
其中,“见慢随眠”是指与见相似的慢随眠。因为此慢随眠以“我是”的方式生起,故与见相似,因此如此称说。想要详细了知此“我慢”的人,应参阅《蕴品》中的《堪玛咖经》。显示巴利原文
Tattha diṭṭhimānānusayanti diṭṭhisadisaṃ mānānusayanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi mānānusayo asmīti pavattattā diṭṭhisadiso hoti, tasmā evaṃ vutto . Imañca asmimānaṃ vitthārato viññātukāmena khandhiyavagge khemakasuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 3.89) oloketabbanti.
“断除无明”:即断除作为轮回之根的无明。“生起明”:即生起能断除彼无明的阿拉汉道明。至此,说明了阿拉汉道。“于现法成为苦的终结者”:即于此身中成为轮回苦的终结者。而说“仅此而已吗,贤友”,是交付教导,也是以此业处教导中所说的作意通达力而说。其余如前所述。如此,以不来道与阿拉汉道结束了开示。显示巴利原文
Avijjaṃ pahāyāti vaṭṭamūlaṃ avijjaṃ pajahitvā. Vijjaṃ uppādetvāti tassā avijjāya samugghāṭikaṃ arahattamaggavijjaṃ uppādetvā. Ettāvatā arahattamaggo kathito. Diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hotīti asmiṃyeva attabhāve vaṭṭadukkhassa paricchedakaro hoti. Ettāvatāpi kho, āvusoti desanaṃ niyyāteti, imāya kammapathadesanāya vuttamanasikārappaṭivedhavasenapīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Evaṃ anāgāmimaggaarahattamaggehi desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
食章释义显示巴利原文
Āhāravāravaṇṇanā
90 如此,比丘们听了尊者舍利弗以善与不善为切入点开示的四圣谛教导后,便以“善哉,贤友”这句话随喜尊者舍利弗的所说,即以此语心生随喜,以言语接纳、内心欢喜。接着,因为长老有能力以种种方式开演四圣谛教导(如说:“比丘们,舍利弗能详明解说、教授四圣谛”),又因他还想进一步开示而说“仅此而已吗,贤友”,所以那些比丘还希望以另一种方式听受圣谛教导,因而进一步向尊者舍利弗提问。因此,他们自己问过之后,又对所答的内容继续追问:“贤友,或许另有更进一步的解说,或许另有别的门径、别的理由。”以此方式提出了补充的问题,或者说提的是前一个问题更深入的部分。此时,长老便为他们解答说:“或许有,贤友。”等等。此处,对不明显词语的解释为:“食”即是缘。因为缘能带来其自身的果,故称为“食”。显示巴利原文
90.Sādhāvusoti kho…pe… āgato imaṃ saddhammanti evaṃ āyasmato sāriputtassa kusalākusalamukhena catusaccadesanaṃ sutvā taṃ āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṃ ‘‘sādhāvuso’’ti iminā vacanena te bhikkhū abhinanditvā imasseva vacanassa samuṭṭhāpakena cittena anumoditvā vacasā sampaṭicchitvā cetasā sampiyāyitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni yasmā thero nānappakārena catusaccadesanaṃ desetuṃ paṭibalo, yathāha ‘‘sāriputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattāri ariyasaccāni vitthārena ācikkhituṃ desetu’’nti yasmā vā uttarimpi desetukāmova hutvā ‘‘ettāvatāpi kho’’ti avaca, tasmā aparenapi nayena saccadesanaṃ sotukāmā te bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ uttariṃ pañhaṃ apucchiṃsu. Tena sayameva pucchitvā vissajjitapañhato uttariṃ siyā kho panāvuso, aññopi pariyāyo bhaveyya aññampi kāraṇanti iminā nayena aññaṃ atirekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchiṃsu, purimapañhassa vā uparibhāge pucchiṃsūti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha nesaṃ byākaramāno thero siyā, āvusotiādimāha. Tatthāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā, āhāranti paccayaṃ. Paccayo hi āharati attano phalaṃ, tasmā ‘‘āhāro’’ti vuccati.
关于“已生”或“有情”等语:“已生”指已出生、已生成。“求有”指那些寻求、探求再生、出生、诞生者。其中,在四种生中,卵生、胎生有情,只要尚未破开卵壳或胎膜,便称为求有;破开卵壳或胎膜而出后,即称为已生。湿生和化生有情,在第一个心识刹那称为求有,从第二个心识刹那开始则称为已生。或者,无论以何种方式出生后,在尚未转入其他状态时,那时称为求有,此后则称为已生。显示巴利原文
Bhūtānaṃvā sattānantiādīsu bhūtāti sañjātā, nibbattā. Sambhavesīnanti ye sambhavaṃ jātiṃ nibbattiṃ esanti gavesanti. Tattha catūsu yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujā sattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesino nāma. Aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca bhinditvā bahi nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajā opapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesino nāma. Dutiyacittakkhaṇato pabhuti bhūtā nāma. Yena yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva te tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesino nāma. Tato paraṃ bhūtā nāma.
再者,“已生”另指已生、已再生,且唯是已生而不再归入“再有”之数的——这是诸漏尽者的别名。“求有”指寻求再生者。因为有学与凡夫未断除有结,于未来亦寻求再生。如此,以这两个词便总摄一切众生。此处“ca”字是连接词,因此应理解为“对已生者与求有者”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā bhūtāti jātā abhinibbattā, ye bhūtāyeva na puna bhavissantīti saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ khīṇāsavānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sambhavamesantīti sambhavesino. Appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā āyatimpi sambhavaṃ esantānaṃ sekkhaputhujjanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi imehi dvīhi padehi sabbasatte pariyādiyati. Vāsaddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho, tasmā bhūtānañca sambhavesīnañcāti ayamattho veditabbo.
「为住立」:即住立之义。「为资助」:即资助之义、饶益之义。此为语词的差别,然二词之义实同。或可作此解:「为住立」是对于某一有情已生起之法,令其相续不断;「为资助」则是令未生起之法得以生起。此二者皆当观待于二种情况:既为已生者之住立与资助,亦为求有者之住立与资助。「段食」:因需做成团状方能吞咽,故称为段食,此乃以米饭、乳糜等为载体的食素之别名。或粗或细:载体粗大,故说为粗;载体微细,故说为细。然就体性而言,段食摄属于细色,故其自体实为细。然而,其粗细乃是随载体之粗细而被感知。显示巴利原文
Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthaṃ. Anuggahāyāti anuggahatthaṃ upakāratthaṃ. Vacanabhedo cesa, attho pana dvinnampi padānaṃ ekoyeva. Atha vā ṭhitiyāti tassa tassa sattassa uppannadhammānaṃ anuppabandhavasena avicchedāya. Anuggahāyāti anuppannānaṃ uppādāya. Ubhopi cetāni bhūtānaṃ ṭhitiyā ceva anuggahāya ca. Sambhavesīnaṃ vā ṭhitiyā ceva anuggahāya cāti evaṃ ubhayattha daṭṭhabbāni. Kabaḷīkāro āhāroti kabaḷaṃ katvā ajjhoharitabbato kabaḷīkāro āhāro, odanakummāsādivatthukāya ojāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Oḷāriko vā sukhumo vāti vatthuoḷārikatāya oḷāriko, vatthusukhumatāya sukhumo. Sabhāvena pana sukhumarūpapariyāpannattā kabaḷīkāro āhāro sukhumova hoti. Sāpi cassa vatthuto oḷārikatā sukhumatā ca upādāyupādāya veditabbā.
较之鳄鱼的食物,孔雀的食物更细。据说,鳄鱼吞下石块,石块入腹即化。孔雀则食蛇、蝎之类。较之孔雀的食物,鬣狗的食物更细。据说,鬣狗食用弃置三年的角与骨,他们仅被唾液沾润,便如根茎般变软。较之鬣狗的食物,象的食物更细。象食种种树枝。较之象的食物,野牛、羚羊等动物的食物更细。据说,他们食种种干燥的树叶等。较之他们动物的食物,牛的食物更细。牛食鲜草与干草。较之牛的食物,兔的食物更细。较之兔的食物,鸟的食物更细。较之鸟的食物,边地人的食物更细。较之边地人的食物,村主者的食物更细。较之村主者的食物,国王、大臣的食物更细。较之他们的食物,转轮圣王的食物更细。较之转轮圣王的食物,地居天的食物更细。较之地居天的食物,四大王天的食物更细。如此,当广说乃至他化自在天的食物,而他们之食已达最极微细。显示巴利原文
Kumbhīlānañhi āhāraṃ upādāya morānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Kumbhīlā kira pāsāṇe gilanti. Te ca nesaṃ kucchippattāva vilīyanti. Morā sappavicchikādipāṇe khādanti. Morānaṃ pana āhāraṃ upādāya taracchānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te kira tivassachaḍḍitāni visāṇāni ceva aṭṭhīni ca khādanti. Tāni ca nesaṃ kheḷena temitamatteneva kandamūlaṃ viya mudukāni honti. Taracchānampi āhāraṃ upādāya hatthīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Tepi nānārukkhasākhāyo khādanti. Hatthīnaṃ āhārato gavayagokaṇṇamigādīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te kira nissārāni nānārukkhapaṇṇādīni khādanti. Tesampi āhārato gunnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te allasukkhatiṇāni khādanti. Tesaṃ āhārato sasānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Sasānaṃ āhārato sakuṇānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Sakuṇānaṃ āhārato paccantavāsīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Paccantavāsīnaṃ āhārato gāmabhojakānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Gāmabhojakānaṃ āhārato rājarājamahāmattānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Tesampi āhārato cakkavattino āhāro sukhumo. Cakkavattino āhārato bhummadevānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Bhummadevānaṃ āhārato cātumahārājikānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Evaṃ yāva paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ āhāro vitthāretabbo, tesaṃ āhāro sukhumotveva niṭṭhaṃ patto.
在此,粗所依之中,食素微少而无力;细所依之中,食素则强而有力。恰如:饮满满一钵粥者,须臾便觉饥饿,欲啖诸食;而仅饮少许酥油者,终日不感饮食之需。其中,所依能遣除疲乏,然不能维持;食素能维持,然不能遣除疲乏。二者相合,则既能遣除疲乏,亦能维系滋养。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca oḷārike vatthusmiṃ ojā parittā hoti dubbalā, sukhume balavatī. Tathā hi ekapattapūrampi yāguṃ pīvato muhutteneva jighacchito hoti, yaṃkañcideva khāditukāmo. Sappiṃ pana pasaṭamattaṃ pivitvā divasaṃ abhottukāmo hoti. Tattha vatthu parissamaṃ vinodeti, na pana sakkoti pāletuṃ. Ojā pāleti, na sakkoti parissamaṃ vinodetuṃ. Dve pana ekato hutvā parissamañceva vinodenti pālenti cāti.
“触第二”(phassodutiyo)即眼触等六种触。在四种食之中,应当知道这是第二食。这仅仅是说法开示的顺序,因此不应在此追问以何种理由排为第二或第三。“思食”(manosañcetanā)指的就是思本身。“识食”(viññāṇa)指任何的心。显示巴利原文
Phassodutiyoti cakkhusamphassādi chabbidhopi phasso. Etesu catūsu āhāresu dutiyo āhāroti veditabbo. Desanānayo eva cesa. Tasmā iminā nāma kāraṇena dutiyo vā tatiyo vāti idamettha na gavesitabbaṃ. Manosañcetanāti cetanā eva vuccati. Viññāṇanti yaṃkiñci cittaṃ.
在此,有人问:“如果食的涵义就是缘的涵义,那么,在对于有情有众多其他缘法的情况下,为何唯独宣说这四种食呢?”答复是:因为它们对于内在相续而言是特殊的缘。的确,对于以段食为食的众生,段食是色身的特殊缘;对于名身,触是受的特殊缘;思是识的特殊缘;识是名色的特殊缘。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Etthāha, yadi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭho, atha kasmā aññesupi sattānaṃ paccayesu vijjamānesu imeyeva cattāro vuttāti? Vuccate, ajjhattikasantatiyā visesapaccayattā. Visesapaccayo hi kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhānaṃ sattānaṃ rūpakāyassa kabaḷīkāro āhāro. Nāmakāye vedanāya phasso, viññāṇassa manosañcetanā, nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ. Yathāha –
“诸比丘,犹如此身依食而存续,缘于食而得安立,无食则不得安立;同样地,缘于触而有受,缘于行而有识,缘于识而有名色。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ayaṃ kāyo āhāraṭṭhitiko, āhāraṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati, anāhāro no tiṭṭhati. Tathā phassapaccayā vedanā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti.
那么,此中何者为“食”?它带来什么?段食带来以食素为第八的诸色法,触食带来三种受,意思食带来三有,识食带来结生名色。显示巴利原文
Ko panettha āhāro, kiṃ āharatīti? Kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharati. Phassāhāro tisso vedanā, manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave, viññāṇāhāro paṭisandhināmarūpanti.
如何带来?先说段食:食物刚放入口中,即生起八种色法;经牙齿粉碎吞咽时,每一粒食物亦各各生起八种色法。如是,它带来以食素为第八的诸色法。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Kabaḷīkārāhāro tāva mukhe ṭhapitamattoyeva aṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpeti. Dantavicuṇṇitaṃ pana ajjhohariyamānaṃ ekekaṃ sitthaṃ aṭṭhaṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpetiyeva. Evaṃ ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharati.
至于触食:能生乐受之触生起时,带来乐受;能生苦受之触,带来苦受;能生不苦不乐受之触,带来不苦不乐受。如此,触食于一切时皆带来此三种受。显示巴利原文
Phassāhāro pana sukhavedaniyo phasso uppajjamāno sukhavedanaṃ āharati, tathā dukkhavedaniyo dukkhaṃ, adukkhamasukhavedaniyo adukkhamasukhanti evaṃ sabbathāpi phassāhāro tisso vedanā āharati.
意思食:导向欲有的业带来欲有;导向色有、无色有的业,则带来各自相应的有。如此,意思食在一切情形下,都带来三有。显示巴利原文
Manosañcetanāhāro kāmabhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ kāmabhavaṃ āharati, rūpārūpabhavūpagāni taṃ taṃ bhavaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave āharati.
识食:在结生刹那,识以俱生缘等诸缘之力,带来与之相应的三个蕴,以及依三种十法聚而生的三十种色,因此称为‘食’。如是,识食带来结生名色。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇāhāro pana ye ca paṭisandhikkhaṇe taṃsampayuttakā tayo khandhā, yāni ca tisantativasena tiṃsarūpāni uppajjanti, sahajātādipaccayanayena tāni āharatīti vuccati. Evaṃ viññāṇāhāro paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti.
这里,‘意思食带来三有’是指有漏的善与不善思;‘识带来结生名色’唯指结生识。然而应知,它们之所以称为‘食’,是因为它们普遍地带来那些相应法与俱生法。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave āharatīti sāsavā kusalākusalacetanāva vuttā. Viññāṇaṃ paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vuttaṃ . Avisesena pana taṃsampayuttataṃsamuṭṭhānadhammānaṃ āharaṇato pete āhārāti veditabbā.
在这四种食中,段食是以支持的方式完成食的作用;触食仅是触而已;意思食仅是策励;识食仅为了别。显示巴利原文
Etesu catūsu āhāresu kabaḷīkārāhāro upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādheti. Phasso phusantoyeva, manosañcetanā āyūhamānāva. Viññāṇaṃ vijānantameva.
怎么说呢?段食正是通过支持、维持身体,而成为有情存活之因。这个由业所生的身体,若得到段食的支持,便能维持十年、百年,乃至活到寿量极限。就好比母亲所生的孩子,由乳母哺以乳汁等养育,才能长久存活;又好比以柱子支撑的房屋。正如——显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Kabaḷīkārāhāro hi upatthambhentoyeva kāyaṭṭhapanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Kammajanitopi hi ayaṃ kāyo kabaḷīkārāhārena upatthambhito dasapi vassāni vassasatampi yāva āyuparimāṇaṃ tiṭṭhati. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā mātuyā janitopi dārako dhātiyā thaññādīni pāyetvā posiyamānova ciraṃ tiṭṭhati, yathā cupatthambhena upatthambhitagehaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“大王,如同房屋即将倒塌时,人们用另一根木头加以支撑,依靠那根木头的支撑,房屋便不会倒塌;同样的道理,大王,这个身体依食而住,缘于食而得以维持。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā mahārāja gehe patante aññena dārunā upatthambhenti, aññena dārunā upatthambhitaṃ santaṃ evaṃ taṃ gehaṃ na patati, evameva kho mahārāja ayaṃ kāyo āhāraṭṭhitiko, āhāraṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
段食便是这样以支持的方式完成食的作用。在如此完成作用的同时,段食亦成为两种色相续的缘:食等起色与执受色。对于业生色,它作为护持者而成为缘;对于食等起色,它作为生起者而成为缘。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kabaḷīkāro āhāro upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādheti. Evaṃ sādhentopi ca kabaḷīkāro āhāro dvinnaṃ rūpasantatīnaṃ paccayo hoti āhārasamuṭṭhānassa ca upādinnassa ca. Kammajānaṃ anupālako hutvā paccayo hoti. Āhārasamuṭṭhānānaṃ janako hutvā paccayo hoti.
触:当接触到作为乐等基础的所缘时,正是由触令乐等感受生起,故成为有情相续存在的因。意思:依善与不善业造作时,因能产生有的根本,故成为有情相续存在的因。识:在了知的同时,由令名色转起,故成为有情相续存在的因。显示巴利原文
Phasso pana sukhādivatthubhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusantoyeva sukhādivedanāpavattanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Manosañcetanā kusalākusalakammavasena āyūhamānāyeva bhavamūlanipphādanato sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Viññāṇaṃ vijānantameva nāmarūpappavattanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti.
然而,当这些食以支持等方式完成食的作用时,应视为有四种怖畏。即:于段食,喜爱即是怖畏;于触食,会遇即是怖畏;于意思食,造作即是怖畏;于识食,投生即是怖畏。是何缘故?因为对段食生起喜爱,为求饮食而顾虑冷热等的众生,从事印章、计算等工作,遭受了不可称量的苦。有些人即使于此教法中出家,也以行医等邪命方式寻求饮食,于现法便成为应受呵责者;于来世,则如《相续相连经》所说:‘他的僧伽梨衣炽燃、全面燃烧’等,而成为沙门饿鬼。以此缘故,应当了知:于段食,喜爱即是怖畏。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ upatthambhanādivasena āhārakiccaṃ sādhayamānesu panetesu cattāri bhayāni daṭṭhabbāni. Seyyathidaṃ, kabaḷīkārāhāre nikantiyeva bhayaṃ, phasse upagamanameva, manosañcetanāya āyūhanameva, viññāṇe abhinipātoyeva bhayanti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Kabaḷīkārāhāre hi nikantiṃ katvā sītādīnaṃ purekkhatā sattā āhāratthāya muddāgaṇanādikammāni karontā anappakaṃ dukkhaṃ nigacchanti. Ekacce ca imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvāpi vejjakammādikāya anesanāya āhāraṃ pariyesantā diṭṭhepi dhamme gārayhā honti. Samparāyepi tassa saṅghāṭipi ādittā sampajjalitātiādinā lakkhaṇasaṃyutte vuttanayena samaṇapetā honti. Imināva tāva kāraṇena kabaḷīkārāhāre nikantiyeva bhayanti veditabbā.
那些追逐触的人,因贪著触的滋味,侵犯他人守护、保护的妻女与财物等。物主将他们连同财物一并抓住,或切成碎块弃于垃圾堆中,或送交国王。国王便下令对他们施以种种刑罚。身坏命终之后,恶趣便是他们的可期之处。如此,以触味为根本的现法怖畏与来世怖畏,全部降临。以此因由,当知:于触食,会遇即是怖畏。显示巴利原文
Phassaṃ upagacchantāpi phassassādino paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesu dārādīsu bhaṇḍesu aparajjhanti. Te saha bhaṇḍena bhaṇḍasāmikā gahetvā khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ vā chinditvā saṅkārakūṭesu chaḍḍenti. Rañño vā niyyātenti. Tato ne rājā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārāpeti. Kāyassa ca bhedā duggati nesaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā hoti. Iti phassassādamūlakaṃ diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi bhayaṃ sabbamāgatameva hoti. Iminā kāraṇena phassāhāre upagamanameva bhayanti veditabbaṃ.
又,正是由于造作善与不善业,以这些业为根本,三有中的一切怖畏便会到来。以此因由,当知:于意思食,造作即是怖畏。显示巴利原文
Kusalākusalakammāyūhaneneva pana tammūlakaṃ tīsu bhavesu bhayaṃ sabbamāgataṃyeva hoti. Iminā kāraṇena manosañcetanāhāre āyūhanameva bhayanti veditabbaṃ.
结生识无论投生何处,即于该处执取结生名色而生;当其生起之时,以此为根本,一切怖畏随之生起。以此因由,当知:于识食,投生即是怖畏。显示巴利原文
Paṭisandhiviññāṇañca yasmiṃ yasmiṃ ṭhāne abhinipatati, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ gahetvāva nibbattati, tasmiñca nibbatte sabbabhayāni nibbattāniyeva honti, tammūlakattāti, iminā kāraṇena viññāṇāhāre abhinipātoyeva bhayanti veditabbo.
对于这如此可怖的诸食,正自觉者为了彻底断除对粗抟食的贪染,以“诸比丘,譬如一对夫妇”等教法,开示了子肉譬喻;为了彻底断除对触食的贪染,以“诸比丘,譬如一头无皮牛”等教法,开示了无皮牛譬喻;为了彻底断除对意思食的贪染,以“诸比丘,譬如火坑”等教法,开示了火坑譬喻;为了彻底断除对识食的贪染,以“诸比丘,譬如罪犯”等教法,开示了百矛刺背的譬喻。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabhayesu pana imesu āhāresu sammāsambuddho kabaḷīkārāhāre nikantipariyādānatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dve jāyampatikā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.63) nayena puttamaṃsūpamaṃ desesi. Phassāhāre nikantipariyādānatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gāvī niccammā’’tiādinā nayena niccammagāvūpamaṃ desesi. Manosañcetanāhāre nikantipariyādānatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, aṅgārakāsū’’tiādinā nayena aṅgārakāsūpamaṃ desesi. Viññāṇāhāre nikantipariyādānatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, coraṃ āgucāri’’ntiādinā nayena sattisatāhatūpamaṃ desesi.
现在取其真实义,简略解说:据说,有一对夫妇,带着儿子,只携少量干粮,踏上绵延百由旬的旷野险路。他们走了五十由旬,干粮便已耗尽。受饥渴逼迫,二人坐于稀疏的树荫下。于是丈夫对妻子说:“贤妻,此处方圆五十由旬内,既无村庄,亦无市镇。因此,男子应做的许多工作——如耕作、牧牛等,我如今已无力去做。来吧,你把我杀了,吃我一半的肉,将另一半作为干粮,带儿子走出旷野。”妻子也说:“夫主,女子应做的许多工作——如纺线、织布等,我如今也已无力去做。来吧,你把我杀了,吃我一半的肉,将另一半作为干粮,带儿子走出旷野。”这时丈夫又对她说:“贤妻,若女人死了,显然两人都活不成,因为幼弱的孩子离开母亲便无法存活。但若我们活着,以后还能再得孩子。所以,现在就杀了儿子,取他的肉走出旷野吧。”显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ bhūtamatthaṃ katvā saṅkhepato atthayojanā, dve kira jāyampatikā puttaṃ gahetvā parittena pātheyyena yojanasatikaṃ kantāramaggaṃ paṭipajjiṃsu. Tesaṃ paññāsa yojanāni gantvā pātheyyaṃ niṭṭhāsi. Te khuppipāsāturā viraḷacchāyāyaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Tato puriso bhariyaṃ āha ‘‘bhadde ito samantā paññāsa yojanāni gāmo vā nigamo vā natthi, tasmā yaṃ taṃ purisena kātabbaṃ bahumpi kasigorakkhādikammaṃ, na dāni sakkā taṃ mayā kātuṃ, ehi maṃ māretvā upaḍḍhamaṃsaṃ khāditvā upaḍḍhaṃ pātheyyaṃ katvā puttena saddhiṃ kantāraṃ nittharāhī’’ti. Sāpi āha ‘‘sāmi mayā dāni yaṃ taṃ itthiyā kātabbaṃ bahumpi suttakantanādikammaṃ, taṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, ehi maṃ māretvā upaḍḍhamaṃsaṃ khāditvā upaḍḍhaṃ pātheyyaṃ katvā puttena saddhiṃ kantāraṃ nittharāhī’’ti. Tato so taṃ āha ‘‘bhadde mātugāmamaraṇena dvinnaṃ maraṇaṃ paññāyati. Na hi mando kumāro mātaraṃ vinā jīvituṃ sakkoti. Yadi pana mayaṃ jīvāma, puna dārakaṃ labheyyāma, handa dāni puttakaṃ māretvā maṃsaṃ gahetvā kantāraṃ nittharāmā’’ti.
于是母亲对儿子说:“孩子,到你父亲那里去。”儿子便去了。此时父亲心想:“我为了把这孩子养育成人,承受了耕作、牧牛等无量辛苦,我实在不能杀儿子。就由你来杀你的儿子吧。”便说:“孩子,回到你母亲那里去。”儿子又去了。此时母亲也想:“我为了求得这个儿子,曾行牛行、狗行,祈祷天神,受了无量辛苦,更不待言怀胎守护之苦。我绝不能杀儿子。”便说:“孩子,回到你父亲那里去。”就这样,儿子在父母之间来回奔走时死去了。二人见儿子死了,悲伤哭泣之后,便依前面所述的方法取了肉,一边吃着一边继续前行。他们吃这子肉时,以九种方式作厌恶想——既不是为了嬉笑,也不是为了陶醉,不是为了装饰,也不是为了庄严,纯粹只是为了走出旷野。显示巴利原文
Tato mātā puttamāha ‘‘tāta pitu santikaṃ gacchāhī’’ti. So agamāsi. Athassa pitā ‘‘mayā puttakaṃ posessāmīti kasigorakkhādīhi anappakaṃ dukkhamanubhūtaṃ, na sakkomi puttaṃ māretuṃ, tvaṃyeva tava puttakaṃ mārehī’’ti vatvā ‘‘tāta mātusantikameva gacchāhī’’ti āha. So agamāsi. Athassa mātāpi ‘‘mayā puttaṃ patthentiyā govatakukkuravatadevatāyācanādīhipi tāva anappakaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhūtaṃ, ko pana vādo kucchinā pariharantiyā? Na sakkāhaṃ puttaṃ māretu’’nti vatvā ‘‘tāta pitusantikaṃyeva gacchāhī’’ti āha. Evaṃ so dvinnaṃ antarā gacchantoyeva mato. Te taṃ disvā paridevitvā pubbe vuttanayeneva maṃsāni gahetvā khādantā pakkamiṃsu. Tesaṃ so puttamaṃsāhāro navahi kāraṇehi paṭikulattā neva davāya hoti, na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya, kevalaṃ kantāranittharaṇatthāyeva hoti.
是哪九种原因令人觉得可厌?即:同族肉、亲属肉、子肉、爱子肉、嫩肉、生肉、非可畏肉、无盐、未熏制。因此,若比丘如此将段食视为如子肉一般,便能断尽对它的贪染。这便是子肉譬喻的义理连结。显示巴利原文
Katamehi navahi kāraṇehi paṭikūloti ce? Sajātimaṃsatāya ñātimaṃsatāya puttamaṃsatāya piyaputtamaṃsatāya taruṇamaṃsatāya āmakamaṃsatāya agorasamaṃsatāya aloṇatāya adhūpitatāyāti. Tasmā yo bhikkhu kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ evaṃ puttamaṃsasadisaṃ passati , so tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyati. Ayaṃ tāva puttamaṃsūpamāyaṃ atthayojanā.
在无皮牛的譬喻中,正如那头牛从颈至蹄被剥去皮、放归之后,无论倚靠何处,都会被虫所啮食,唯成苦因;同样,触无论依于何事、何所缘而住,都会成为由彼事与所缘所生的感受之苦的因。因此,若比丘如此将触食视为无皮牛,便能断尽对它的贪染。这便是无皮牛譬喻的义理连结。显示巴利原文
Niccammagāvūpamāyaṃ pana yathā sā gāvī gīvato yāva khurā, tāva cammaṃ uddāletvā muttā yaṃ yadeva nissāya tiṭṭhati, tattha pāṇakehi khajjamānā dukkhassevādhikaraṇaṃ hoti, evaṃ phassopi yaṃ yadeva vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ vā nissāya tiṭṭhati, taṃtaṃvatthārammaṇasambhavassa vedayitadukkhassa adhikaraṇameva hoti. Tasmā yo bhikkhu phassāhāraṃ evaṃ niccammagāvisadisaṃ passati , so tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyati, ayaṃ niccammagāvūpamāyaṃ atthayojanā.
在火坑的譬喻中,正如火坑具有大热恼的义涵,三有也同样具有大热恼的义涵;正如那两个分别抓住手臂、将人拖向火坑的人,思即具有拖入诸有的义涵。因此,若比丘如此将思食视为拖向火坑之人,便能断尽对它的贪染。这便是火坑譬喻的义理连结。显示巴利原文
Aṅgārakāsūpamāyaṃ pana yathā sā aṅgārakāsu, evaṃ mahāpariḷāhaṭṭhena tayo bhavā. Yathā nānābāhāsu gahetvā tattha upakaḍḍhakā dve purisā, evaṃ bhavesu upakaḍḍhanaṭṭhena manosañcetanā. Tasmā yo bhikkhu manosañcetanāhāraṃ evaṃ aṅgārakāsūpakaḍḍhakapurisasadisaṃ passati, so tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyati, ayaṃ aṅgārakāsūpamāyaṃ atthayojanā.
在百矛穿刺的譬喻中,那人在午前被一百支矛刺中。那些矛在他身上造成一百处伤口后,并不停留,径直贯穿而过,从背后落下;其余两百支矛也是如此。这样一来,未被矛刺中的地方已无处可寻,整个身体布满疮孔。仅一个伤口所生的痛苦已不可计量,何况三百处伤口!这其中,矛刺入的时刻如同结生识生起的时刻;伤口的生起如同诸蕴的生起;伤口中生起苦受,便如同在已生起的诸蕴中,生起以轮回为根本的种种苦。另一种解释:那罪人如同结生识;因矛击而生的众多伤口,如同以识为缘所生的名色;以伤口为缘,那人生起剧烈痛苦,则如同以名色为缘,识生起三十二种业因、九十八种疾病等种种之苦。因此,比丘若能如此将识食观想为百矛穿刺,便能彻底断除对它的喜爱。这便是百矛穿刺譬喻中的义理连结。显示巴利原文
Sattisatāhatūpamāyaṃ pana yena so puriso pubbaṇhasamaye sattisatena haññati, tamassa sarīre vaṇamukhasataṃ katvā antarā aṭṭhatvā vinivijjhitvā aparabhāgeyeva patati, evaṃ itarāni dve sattisatāni, evamassa patitokāse apatitvā apatitvā gatāhi sattīhi sabbasarīraṃ chiddāvachiddameva hoti, tassa ekavaṇamukhepi uppannassa dukkhassa pamāṇaṃ natthi, ko pana vādo tīsu vaṇamukhasatesu? Tattha sattinipātakālo viya paṭisandhiviññāṇanibbattakālo. Vaṇamukhajananaṃ viya khandhajananaṃ. Vaṇamukhesu dukkhavedanuppādo viya jātesu khandhesu vaṭṭamūlakanānāvidhadukkhuppādo. Aparo nayo, āgucārī puriso viya paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tassa sattighātehi uppannavaṇamukhāni viya viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ. Vaṇamukhapaccayā tassa purisassa kakkhaḷadukkhuppādo viya nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇassa dvattiṃsakammakāraṇaaṭṭhanavutirogādivasena nānappakārakadukkhuppādo daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā yo bhikkhu viññāṇāhāraṃ evaṃ sattisatāhatasadisaṃ passati. So tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyati, ayaṃ sattisatāhatūpamāyaṃ atthayojanā.
当他如此断除对诸食的喜爱时,便彻底了知了四食;当这些食被彻底了知时,一切应被了知的事物便都已被彻底了知。这也是世尊所说:显示巴利原文
So evaṃ imesu āhāresu nikantiṃ pariyādiyanto cattāropi āhāre parijānāti, yesu pariññātesu sabbampi pariññātaṃ vatthu pariññātameva hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“比丘们!当段食被彻底了知时,对五欲的贪染便被彻底了知。当对五欲的贪染被彻底了知时,圣弟子便不再有那系缚他再来此世间的结。比丘们!当触食被彻底了知时,三种受便被彻底了知。当三种受被彻底了知时,我说圣弟子已无更上应做之事。比丘们!当意思食被彻底了知时,三种爱便被彻底了知。当三种爱被彻底了知时,我说圣弟子已无更上应做之事。比丘们!当识食被彻底了知时,名色便被彻底了知。当名色被彻底了知时,我说圣弟子已无更上应做之事。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kabaḷīkāre, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāte pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññāto hoti. Pañcakāmaguṇike rāge pariññāte natthi taṃ saṃyojanaṃ, yena saṃyojanena saṃyutto ariyasāvako puna imaṃ lokaṃ āgaccheyya. Phasse, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāte tisso vedanā pariññātā honti. Tīsu vedanāsu pariññātāsu ariyasāvakassa natthi kiñci uttarikaraṇīyanti vadāmi. Manosañcetanāya, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāte tisso taṇhā pariññātā honti. Tīsu taṇhāsu pariññātāsu ariyasāvakassa natthi kiñci uttarikaraṇīyanti vadāmi. Viññāṇe, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāte nāmarūpaṃ pariññātaṃ hoti. Nāmarūpe pariññāte ariyasāvakassa natthi kiñci uttarikaraṇīyanti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.63).
“爱集而有食集”的意思是:由于先前的爱集,结生时的诸食便集起而生。具体如何呢?在结生的刹那,依三事和合而生起的俱生色聚之中,就有食素存在——这就是依爱为缘所生的已执受段食。与结生心相应的触、思,以及该心本身作为识,这些则是依爱为缘所生的已执受的触食、意思食、识食。如此,应知由于先前的爱集,而有结生诸食的集起。然而,因为这里将已执受与未执受的食合在一起解说,所以未执受的食也应当依“爱集而有食集”来理解:也就是说,在与贪同时生起的心所等起的色法中,就有食素存在,这是依俱生爱为缘所生的未执受段食;而与贪相应之心相应的触、思,以及该心本身作为识,这些则是依爱为缘所生的未执受的触食、意思食、识食。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāsamudayā āhārasamudayoti purimataṇhāsamudayā paṭisandhikānaṃ āhārānaṃ samudayo nibbatto hotīti attho. Kathaṃ? Paṭisandhikkhaṇe hi tisantativasena uppannasamatiṃsarūpabbhantare jātā ojā atthi. Ayaṃ taṇhāpaccayā nibbatto upādinnakakabaḷīkārāhāro. Paṭisandhicittasampayuttā pana phassacetanā sayañca cittaṃ viññāṇanti ime taṇhāpaccayā nibbattā upādinnakaphassamanosañcetanā viññāṇāhārāti. Evaṃ tāva purimataṇhāsamudayā paṭisandhikānaṃ āhārānaṃ samudayo veditabbo. Yasmā panidha upādinnakāpi anupādinnakāpi āhārā missetvā kathitā, tasmā anupādinnakānampi evaṃ taṇhāsamudayā āhārasamudayo veditabbo . Aṭṭhalobhasahagatacittasamuṭṭhitesu hi rūpesu ojā atthi, ayaṃ sahajātataṇhāpaccayā nibbatto anupādinnakakabaḷīkārāhāro. Lobhasahagatacittasampayuttā pana phassacetanā sayañca cittaṃ viññāṇanti ime taṇhāpaccayā nibbattā anupādinnakaphassamanosañcetanā viññāṇāhārāti.
“爱灭而有食灭”:由于作为已执受与未执受诸食之缘的爱灭尽,便由此爱灭而了知食灭。其余部分如前所述。此处有一点不同:在此,四谛都是以自性而说明的。如同此处,此后一切场合也是如此。因此,在一切处都不应混淆,而应将四谛提取出来。此外,在所有场合,“贤友!仅以此份……”这一付法之语,都应配合各处分说的法而加以连结。在此处的连结是:“仅以此份”——即以此食开示中所说的作意通达之义而说。此理适用于一切地方。显示巴利原文
Taṇhānirodhāāhāranirodhoti imissā upādinnakānañca anupādinnakānañca āhārānaṃ paccayabhūtāya taṇhāya nirodhena āhāranirodho paññāyati. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayaṃ pana viseso, idha cattāripi saccāni sarūpeneva vuttāni. Yathā ca idha, evaṃ ito uttarimpi sabbavāresūti. Tasmā sabbattha asammuyhantena saccāni uddharitabbāni. Sabbavāresu ca ‘‘ettāvatāpi kho āvuso’’ti idaṃ desanāniyyātanaṃ tattha tattha desitadhammavasena yojetabbaṃ. Tassa idha tāva ayaṃ yojanā ettāvatāpīti imāya āhāradesanāya vuttamanasikārappaṭivedhavasenāpīti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sabbatthāpi.
谛品的注释显示巴利原文
Saccavāravaṇṇanā
91 “贤友,太好了”等,是按前面说过的方式,比丘们随喜、赞叹长老所说之后,又进一步提问,长老则用另一种方式为他们解答。此模式适用于此后所有段落。因此,从此以后,我们不再理会这类叙述性语句,只就他每一种解答的内容注释其义。于这一段落的略说开示中,“他了知苦”中的“苦”,即是指苦谛。而在广说开示中,所有应说的内容,在《清净道论》的“谛的解释”中已详述。显示巴利原文
91. Idāni ‘‘sādhāvuso’’ti purimanayeneva therassa bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā te bhikkhū uttarimpi pañhaṃ pucchiṃsu. Thero ca nesaṃ aññenapi pariyāyena byākāsi. Esa nayo ito paresupi sabbavāresu. Tasmā ito paraṃ evarūpāni vacanāni anāmasitvā yena yena pariyāyena byākaroti, tassa tasseva atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāma. Imassa pana vārassa saṅkhepadesanāyaṃ dukkhañca pajānātīti ettha dukkhanti dukkhasaccaṃ. Vitthāradesanāyaṃ pana yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge saccaniddese vuttamevāti.
老死品注释显示巴利原文
Jarāmaraṇavāravaṇṇanā
92 此下,是以缘起来开示。其中,于老死一节,首先当知“那些各个的”一句,是略指众多有情的共通说明。因为,若说“这是提婆达多的老,这是善月的老”,纵使解说一整日,有情亦不能被穷尽。然而,以此二词,则无任何有情不被含摄,故说“这是略指众多有情的共通说明”。显示巴利原文
92. Ito paraṃ paṭiccasamuppādavasena desanā hoti. Tattha jarāmaraṇavāre tāva tesaṃ tesanti ayaṃ saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddesoti ñātabbo. Yā devadattassa jarā, yā somadattassa jarāti evañhi divasampi kathentassa neva sattā pariyādānaṃ gacchanti. Imehi pana dvīhi padehi na koci satto apariyādinno hoti. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso’’ti.
“于其各自的”一句,是以趣与生类,对众多部类作共通说明。“众生部类”,是对由共通说明所指的实体形态,进行具体例举。在“老、老化状态”等中,“老”是实体说明;“老化状态”是行相说明;“牙齿脱落”等,则是作用说明,显示老在时间流逝中所起的作用;最后两者是本质说明。具体而言,以“此是‘老’”一句,从实体上指明了老,故此为其体性说明。以“老化状态”一句,从行相上指明了老,故此为其行相说明。以“牙齿脱落”,指明老在时间流逝中,起到了令牙齿、指甲呈脱落状的作用。以“头发灰白”,指明老在时间流逝中,起到了令头发、体毛呈灰白状的作用。以“皮肤有皱纹”,指明老在时间流逝中,起到了令肌肉萎缩、皮肤呈皱纹状的作用。因此,此“牙齿脱落”等三种说明,是就老在时间流逝中所起的作用而言。通过这些变异现象的显现,来显示已经显露出来的“显露的老”。正如水、火或风,通过草木等的被冲毁、被摧毁或被烧焦,其行经的路径得以显明,但那路径并非水、火等本身;同样,老通过牙齿脱落等相状而得以显现。显示巴利原文
Tamhi tamhīti ayaṃ gatijātivasena anekesaṃ nikāyānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Sattanikāyeti sādhāraṇaniddesena niddiṭṭhassa sarūpanidassanaṃ. Jarā jīraṇatātiādīsu pana jarāti sabhāvaniddeso. Jīraṇatāti ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccantiādayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā. Ayañhi jarāti iminā padena sabhāvato dīpitā, tenassāyaṃ sabhāvaniddeso. Jīraṇatāti iminā ākārato. Tenassāyaṃ ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccanti iminā kālātikkame dantanakhānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Pāliccanti iminā kesalomānaṃ palitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Valittacatāti iminā maṃsaṃ milāpetvā tace valittabhāvakaraṇakiccato dīpitā. Tenassā ime khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Tehi imesaṃ vikārānaṃ dassanavasena pākaṭībhūtā pākaṭajarā dassitā. Yatheva hi udakassa vā aggino vā vātassa vā tiṇarukkhādīnaṃ sambhaggapalibhaggatāya vā jhāmatāya vā gatamaggo pākaṭo hoti, na ca so gatamaggo tāneva udakādīni, evameva jarāya dantādīsu khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo, cakkhuṃ ummīletvāpi gayhati. Na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarā, na hi jarā cakkhuviññeyyā hoti.
而“寿命的减损、诸根的成熟”这两个词,是说明由于在时间流逝中变得明显,因而被称为“寿尽”和“眼等诸根成熟”的本质。因此,应知这最后两个是本质说明。显示巴利原文
Āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripākoti imehi pana padehi kālātikkameyeva abhibyattatāya āyukkhayacakkhādiindriyaparipākasaññitāya pakatiyā dīpitā. Tenassime pacchimā dve pakatiniddesāti veditabbā.
其中,由于已至衰老者的寿命减损,故以果代因,将“老”称为“寿命的减损”。再者,年少之时,眼等诸根极其明净,能轻巧地捕捉极微细之境;衰老之后,诸根衰损、混浊、不明,乃至粗大境亦无力取着。因此,同样以果代因,称老为“诸根的成熟”。如此解说的老共有两种:显露的老与隐藏的老。显示巴利原文
Tattha yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, tasmā jarā ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti phalūpacārena vuttā . Yasmā ca daharakāle suppasannāni sukhumampi attano visayaṃ sukheneva gaṇhanasamatthāni cakkhādīni indriyāni jaraṃ pattassa paripakkāni āluḷitāni avisadāni oḷārikampi attano visayaṃ gahetuṃ asamatthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘indriyānaṃ paripāko’’tipi phalūpacāreneva vuttā. Sā panāyaṃ evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbāpi jarā pākaṭā paṭicchannāti duvidhā hoti.
其中,于色法中,因可观见牙齿等呈现的缺损等变化,此种老即名“显露的老”。于无色法中,则不见此类明显的变易,故名“隐藏的老”。此处,那种牙齿缺损等状态,因牙齿等色相本身极易辨识,眼见了别后,由意门思惟:“这些牙齿已为老所损”,从而了知老的存在。犹如见到安置于水池处的牛头等(出水口),便知下方有水。此外,老还有另一种分类,即“无间隔之老”与“有间隔之老”。其中,对于珠宝、黄金、银、珊瑚、日轮等,对于仅存活数日至数十日的短暂有情,以及花、果、嫩芽等非有情之物,其颜色等性于中间过程不易察觉,故称此种老为“无间隔之老”,意为相续而无间隔。反之,如前所述的其他情形中,颜色等变易于各中间阶段皆易了别,当知此即“有间隔之老”。显示巴利原文
Tattha dantādīsu khaṇḍabhāvādidassanato rūpadhammesu jarā pākaṭajarā nāma. Arūpadhammesu pana tādisassa vikārassa adassanato paṭicchannajarā nāma. Tattha yvāyaṃ khaṇḍādibhāvo dissati, so tādisānaṃ dantādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā vaṇṇoyeva, taṃ cakkhunā disvā manodvārena cintetvā ‘‘ime dantā jarāya pahaṭā’’ti jaraṃ jānāti udakaṭṭhāne baddhāni gosīsādīni oloketvā heṭṭhā udakassa atthibhāvaṃ jānanaṃ viya. Puna avīci savīcīti evampi duvidhā hoti. Tattha maṇikanakarajatapavāḷasūriyādīnaṃ mandadasakādīsu pāṇīnaṃ viya pupphaphalapallavādīsu ca apāṇīnaṃ viya antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ duviññeyyattā jarā avīcijarā nāma, nirantarajarāti attho. Tato aññesu pana yathāvuttesu antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā jarā savīcijarā nāmāti veditabbā.
从此以下,“那些各个的”等句,应依前文所述之理了知。于“死、消逝状态”等中:“死”是就消逝的作用而言,为一蕴、四蕴、五蕴等有情种类的通称。“消逝状态”系以状态语指示死之相。“破坏”是说已死的诸蕴达至坏灭。“消失”谓如破碎的陶瓶,已坏已死的诸蕴无论以何种方式皆不复存在,此为显明其义。“死亡、死”即名死神之死,以此遮断断灭死等(不正常的死)。所谓“时”名为终结者,其作用即是“寿尽”,由此显示世间共许之死。显示巴利原文
Ito paraṃ, tesaṃ tesantiādi vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Cuti cavanatātiādīsu pana cutīti cavanakavasena vuccati, ekacatupañcakkhandhānaṃ sāmaññavacanametaṃ. Cavanatāti bhāvavacanena lakkhaṇanidassanaṃ. Bhedoti cutikkhandhānaṃ bhaṅguppattiparidīpanaṃ. Antaradhānanti ghaṭasseva bhinnassa bhinnānaṃ cutikkhandhānaṃ yena kenaci pariyāyena ṭhānābhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Maccu maraṇanti maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇaṃ. Tena samucchedamaraṇādīni nisedheti. Kālo nāma antako, tassa kiriyāti kālakiriyā. Etena lokasammutiyā maraṇaṃ dīpeti.
现在为了从究竟义(胜义)上阐明,故说“诸蕴的坏灭”等。依究竟义,唯有诸蕴在坏灭,并没有任何一个所谓“有情”在死去。然而,当诸蕴正在坏灭时,世间便假立名称说“有情在死”;当诸蕴已经坏灭后,便假立名称说“有情死了”。显示巴利原文
Idāni paramatthena dīpetuṃ, khandhānaṃ bhedotiādimāha. Paramatthena hi khandhāyeva bhijjanti, na satto nāma koci marati. Khandhesu pana bhijjamānesu satto marati, bhinnesu matoti vohāro hoti.
在此,“诸蕴的坏灭”是就四蕴有(无色界有)而言;“躯体的舍弃”是就一蕴有(无想有情有)而言。或者应当这样理解:就四蕴有等(四蕴有与一蕴有)而言,是“诸蕴的坏灭”;就其余二者(五蕴有)而言,是“躯体的舍弃”。何以故?因为在这两种有(五蕴有与一蕴有)中,都存在着名为色身的躯体。又或者,因为在四大王天等处,诸蕴仅仅是坏灭,并无所弃舍,故就那些情况说为“诸蕴的坏灭”;而在人、人等之中,则有躯体的舍弃。而在此处,由于以“舍弃躯体”作为死的原因,所以说“死是躯体的舍弃”,当如此了知这层意义。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca catuvokāravasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, ekavokāravasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Catuvokāravasena vā khandhānaṃ bhedo, sesadvayavasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo veditabbo. Kasmā? Bhavadvayepi rūpakāyasaṅkhātassa kaḷevarassa sambhavato. Atha vā yasmā ca cātumahārājikādīsu khandhā bhijjanteva, na kiñci nikkhipanti, tasmā tesaṃ vasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, manussādīsu kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Ettha ca kaḷevarassa nikkhepakāraṇato maraṇaṃ kaḷevarassa nikkhepoti vuttanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
如此,这个老与这个死,所谓“贤友,这称为”,便是将这两者合在一起,称为“老死”。其余的内容,与前面所说的方法相同。显示巴利原文
Iti ayañca jarā idañca maraṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuccatāvusoti idaṃ ubhayampi ekato katvā jarāmaraṇanti kathīyati. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
生品的注释。显示巴利原文
Jātivāravaṇṇanā
93 在生品中,“生”与“已生”等:以正在产生的意义称为“生”,适用于处尚未圆满时;以已经产生的意义称为“已生”,适用于处圆满时。以进入的意义称为“降入”,适用于卵生和胎生——他们进入卵壳与子宫,如同钻入其中执取结生。以现起出生的意义称为“现起”,适用于湿生和化生——他们直接显现在那里出生。以上是随俗说法的开示。显示巴利原文
93. Jātivāre jāti sañjātītiādīsu jāyanaṭṭhena jāti, sā aparipuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Sañjāyanaṭṭhena sañjāti, sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Okkamanaṭṭhena okkanti, sā aṇḍajajalābujavasena yuttā. Te hi aṇḍakosañca vatthikosañca okkamantā pavisantā viya paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti. Abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbatti, sā saṃsedajaopapātikavasena yuttā, te hi pākaṭāyeva hutvā nibbattanti. Ayaṃ tāva vohāradesanā.
现在讲的是究竟义的开示。因为从究竟义而言,唯是诸蕴显现,并无众生。其中,关于“诸蕴”,应知:在唯有一蕴的生存中,它包含一个蕴;在四蕴的生存中,包含四个蕴;在五蕴的生存中,包含五个蕴。“显现”即是产生。关于“诸处”,在此应知,依各处正在生起的那些处而统摄。“获得”即是在相续中显现,因为这些法只要显现,便被视为已获得。“贤友,这称为生”这句话,是对依随俗说与究竟义两种方式所说的“生”所作的总结。而在“有的集起”这句中,应知作为生之缘的即是业有。其余内容,与前已说义理相同。显示巴利原文
Idāni paramatthadesanā hoti. Khandhāyeva hi paramatthato pātubhavanti, na satto. Tattha ca khandhānanti ekavokārabhave ekassa catuvokārabhave catunnaṃ pañcavokārabhave pañcannampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pātubhāvoti uppatti. Āyatanānanti ettha tatra tatra uppajjamānāyatanavaseneva saṅgaho veditabbo. Paṭilābhoti santatiyaṃ pātubhāvoyeva. Pātubhavantāneva hi tāni paṭiladdhāni nāma honti. Ayaṃ vuccatāvuso jātīti iminā padena vohārato paramatthato ca desitāya jātiyā nigamanaṃ karotīti. Bhavasamudayāti ettha pana jātiyā paccayabhūto kammabhavo veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
有品的解释显示巴利原文
Bhavavāravaṇṇanā
94 在有品中,“欲有”指业有与再生有。其中,所谓业有,即是导向欲有的业。由于它是再生有的因,如“佛陀出世是乐”(《法句》194)、“恶业积聚是苦”(《法句》117)等,用果的名称称之为“有”。所谓再生有,是由该业所生起、被执取的五蕴。因为它在彼处存在,故称为“有”。如此,在一切情况下,此处的业与再生两者,都被称为“欲有”。对于色有与无色有,道理亦然。而在“取的集起”这句中,对于善的业有,“取”唯作为亲依止缘而成为缘;对于不善的业有,它既是亲依止缘,也是俱生缘等;对于所有再生有,也作为亲依止缘而成为缘。其余义理,与前相同。显示巴利原文
94. Bhavavāre kāmabhavoti kammabhavo ca upapattibhavo ca. Tattha kammabhavo nāma kāmabhavūpagaṃ kammameva. Tañhi upapattibhavassa kāraṇattā ‘‘sukho buddhānamuppādo (dha. pa. 194) dukkho pāpassa uccayo’’tiādīni (dha. pa. 117) viya phalavohārena bhavoti vuttaṃ. Upapattibhavo nāma tena kammena nibbattaṃ upādinnakhandhapañcakaṃ. Tañhi tattha bhavatīti katvā bhavoti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi idaṃ kammañca upapatti ca ubhayampetamidha ‘‘kāmabhavo’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo rūpārūpabhavesu. Upādānasamudayāti ettha pana upādānaṃ kusalakammabhavassa upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti. Akusalakammabhavassa upanissayavasenapi sahajātādivasenapi. Upapattibhavassa pana sabbassāpi upanissayavaseneva. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
取支的解释显示巴利原文
Upādānavāravaṇṇanā
95 在取支中,关于「欲取」等:以这种贪去执取所依的欲,或这种贪本身执取于欲,故称为「欲取」。又或,欲即是取,亦名「欲取」。「取」意指牢牢地执取,此处前缀“upa”有坚固之义,如“upāyāsa(逼恼)”“upakaṭṭhā(近行)”等词中的用法。这是对五欲功德中贪染的总称。此乃此处略释。广释当依《法集论》1220及《分别论》938所说而了知:“其中,何等为欲取?即对诸欲的欲贪……”等。显示巴利原文
95. Upādānavāre kāmupādānantiādīsu vatthukāmaṃ upādiyati etena, sayaṃ vā taṃ upādiyatīti kāmupādānaṃ. Kāmo ca so upādānañcāti vā kāmupādānaṃ. Upādānanti daḷhaggahaṇaṃ vuccati. Daḷhattho hi ettha upasaddo, ‘‘upāyāsa upakaṭṭhā’’tiādīsu viya pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ kāmupādānaṃ, yo kāmesu kāmacchando’’ti (dha. sa. 1220; vibha. 938) vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
同理,「见取」:见本身即是取,故称「见取」。或谓执取于见,又或以彼见去执取余见,故名「见取」。盖后起之见执取前起之见,或人们凭借那一见去执取种种见。如经中所说:“我及世间是常,唯此为真,余皆虚妄”等。这是对除戒禁取及我语取之外一切恶见的总称。此乃此处略释。广释当依《法集论》1220及《分别论》938所说而了知:“其中,何等为见取?即谓‘施无、供养无有’……”等。显示巴利原文
Tathā diṭṭhi ca sā upādānañcāti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Atha vā diṭṭhiṃ upādiyati, upādiyanti vā etena diṭṭhinti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Upādiyati hi purimadiṭṭhiṃ uttaradiṭṭhi. Upādiyanti ca tāya diṭṭhiṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 3.27), sīlabbatupādānaattavādupādānavajjassa sabbadiṭṭhigatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ natthi dinna’’nti (dha. sa. 1220; vibha. 938) vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
同理,「戒禁取」:他们以此执取戒禁,或其本身执取于戒禁,又或戒禁即是取,故称「戒禁取」。如执著牛戒、牛禁等,且深执“由此得清净”者,其本身即已成为取。此乃此处略释。广释则应如下了知:“其中,何等为戒禁取?……即外道沙门、婆罗门所谓‘依戒得清净’……”等。显示巴利原文
Tathā sīlabbataṃ upādiyanti etena, sayaṃ vā taṃ upādiyati, sīlabbatañca taṃ upādānañcāti vā sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Gosīlagovatādīni hi evaṃ suddhīti abhinivesato sayameva upādānāni ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ, ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sīlena suddhī’’ti vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
如今,依此而说,故名为“论”;依此而执取,故名为“取”。他们说什么、执取什么呢?是执取“我”。因此,执取关于“我”的言论,或执取属于“我”的言论,便称为「我语取」。又或者,仅因执取“有我”之言说而据此执取“我”,故称为「我语取」。此即对以二十种事为基础的有身见的称谓。这是略说。广说则应依《法集论》1223段来了知:“其中,何等为我语取?于此世间,未闻法的凡夫,不见诸圣者……”等等。显示巴利原文
Idāni vadanti etenāti vādo. Upādiyanti etenāti upādānaṃ. Kiṃ vadanti, upādiyanti vā? Attānaṃ. Attano vādupādānaṃ attavādupādānaṃ. Attavādamattameva vā attāti upādiyati etenāti attavādupādānaṃ, vīsativatthukāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ attavādupādānaṃ, idha assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti (dha. sa. 1223) vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
于「渴爱集起」一句中:此处的渴爱,对于欲取,是作为亲依止缘,或以无间缘、等无间缘、无有缘、离去缘、习行缘等方式成为缘;对于其余三种取,也以俱生缘等方式成为缘。其余则依前所述的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāsamudayāti ettha taṇhā kāmupādānassa upanissayavasena anantarasamanantaranatthivigatāsevanavasena vā paccayo. Avasesānaṃ pana sahajātādivasenāpi. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
渴爱支的解释显示巴利原文
Taṇhāvāravaṇṇanā
96 渴爱一节中,“色渴爱”……乃至“法渴爱”:如此,在眼门等速行道上生起的渴爱,犹如“长者子”“婆罗门子”等依父得名一般,依其与父亲相似的所缘而得名。此中,以色为所缘的渴爱,或于色中的渴爱,称为「色渴爱」。当它以欲贪的体性,乐著于色而生起时,即为「欲爱」。当它以常见相应贪的体性,认为色是恒常、坚固、永恒,如是乐著于色而生起时,即为「有爱」。当它以断见相应贪的体性,认为色将断灭、坏灭、死后无有,如是乐著于色而生起时,即为「非有爱」。如是,色渴爱有三种。如同色渴爱,声渴爱等亦是如此,合为十八种渴爱行。其于内色等有十八种,于外色等有十八种,总计三十六种。如是,过去三十六种,未来三十六种,现在三十六种,共为一百零八种。或又,依“执取内而有‘我是’、‘我是如此’”(《分别论》973-974)等说法,以内色等所依而有十八种;依“执取外而有‘依此而我是’、‘依此而我是如此’”(《分别论》975)等说法,以外色等所依而有十八种,总计三十六种。如是,过去三十六种,未来三十六种,现在三十六种,亦总为一百零八。显示巴利原文
96. Taṇhāvāre rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhāti evaṃ cakkhudvārādīsu javanavīthiyaṃ pavattāya taṇhāya ‘‘seṭṭhiputto brāhmaṇaputto’’ti evamādīsu pitito nāmaṃ viya pitisadisārammaṇato nāmaṃ. Ettha ca rūpārammaṇā taṇhā, rūpe taṇhāti rūpataṇhā. Sā kāmarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ assādentī pavattamānā kāmataṇhā. Sassatadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassatanti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā bhavataṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ ucchijjati vinassati pecca na bhavissatīti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā vibhavataṇhāti evaṃ tividhā hoti. Yathā ca rūpataṇhā, tathā saddataṇhādayopīti etāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Tāni ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti aṭṭhasataṃ. ‘‘Ajjhattikassupādāya ‘asmī’ti hoti , ‘itthasmī’ti hotī’’ti (vibha. 973-974) vā evamādīnā ajjhattikarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasa, ‘‘bāhirassupādāya ‘iminā asmī’ti hoti, ‘iminā itthasmī’ti hotī’’ti vā (vibha. 975) evamādinā bāhirarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti evampi aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni honti. Puna saṅgahe karīyamāne rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu chaḷeva taṇhākāyā tissoyeva kāmataṇhādayo hontīti evaṃ –
“解释”即因其有解释之义而得名;“广说”即因其有广说之义而得名。
显示巴利原文 Niddesatthena niddesa-vitthārā vitthārassa ca; Puna saṅgahato taṇhā, viññātabbā vibhāvināti.
于“受之集”句中,“受”是指果报之受。若问:此受如何于六门中成为渴爱的缘?以可乐著故。确实,由于乐著乐受,有情们将受执为“我的”,从而对受生起渴爱,成为染著于受者。此后,于眼门唯希求可爱之色,得已便乐著之,并对提供所缘的画师等恭敬供养。同样,于耳门等,他们希求可爱之声等,得已便乐著之,并对提供所缘的弹琴者、调香师、厨师、织工、种种技艺展示者等恭敬供养。这好比什么呢?正如那些因疼爱儿子而将儿子执为“我的”的人们,他们恭敬供养乳母,只以合适而柔和的乳汁等来喂养儿子。其余的内容,应如前说之理来了知。显示巴利原文
Vedanāsamudayāti ettha pana vedanāti vipākavedanā adhippetā. Sā kathaṃ chasu dvāresu taṇhāya paccayo hotīti ce? Assādanīyato. Sukhāya hi vedanāya assādanena sattā vedanaṃ mamāyantā vedanāya taṇhaṃ uppādetvā vedanārāgarattā hutvā cakkhudvāre iṭṭhameva rūpaṃ patthenti, laddhā ca naṃ assādenti, ārammaṇadāyakānañca cittakārādīnaṃ sakkāraṃ karonti. Tathā sotadvārādīsu iṭṭhe ca saddādayo patthenti, laddhā ca ne assādenti, ārammaṇadāyakānañca vīṇāvādaka-gandhikasūda-tantavāya-nānāvidhasippasandassakādīnaṃ sakkāraṃ karonti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā puttasinehena puttaṃ mamāyantā dhātiyā sakkāraṃ karonti, sappāyasappikhīrādīniyeva naṃ pāyenti ceva bhojenti ca. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
受节注释显示巴利原文
Vedanāvāravaṇṇanā
97 在受节中,“受身”是指受的聚集。“眼触所生受……乃至……意触所生受”,依《分别论》中所说——“眼触所生受有善、有不善、有无记”——对于在眼门等处生起的善、不善、无记受,犹如“舍利弗”、“满慈子”等随母得名一般,是依于类似母亲的依处而得名。此处词义为:以眼触为因所生起的受,即名眼触所生受。此理可适用于一切类似之处。以上是此处的总说。然而,从异熟的角度而言,应知眼门中的受是与两种眼识、两种意界、三种意识界相应的受。此法亦适用于耳门等。于意门中,则唯与意识界相应。显示巴利原文
97. Vedanāvāre vedanākāyāti vedanāsamūhā. Cakkhusamphassajā vedanā…pe… manosamphassajā vedanāti etaṃ ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā vedanā atthi kusalā, atthi akusalā, atthi abyākatā’’ti (vibha. 34) evaṃ vibhaṅge āgatattā cakkhudvārādīsu pavattānaṃ kusalākusalābyākatavedanānaṃ ‘‘sāriputto, mantāṇiputto’’ti evamādīsu mātito nāmaṃ viya mātisadisavatthuto nāmaṃ. Vacanattho panettha cakkhusamphassahetu jātā vedanā cakkhusamphassajā vedanāti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ayaṃ tāvettha sabbasaṅgāhikakathā . Vipākavasena pana cakkhudvāre dve cakkhuviññāṇāni, dve manodhātuyo, tisso manoviññāṇadhātuyoti etāhi sampayuttavasena vedanā veditabbā. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsu. Manodvāre manoviññāṇadhātusampayuttāva.
在“触之集”一句中,应知:于五门中,以五处为依的诸受,其集起即是与他们同时生起的眼触等的集起。对其余诸受,眼触等则以亲依止等方式为缘。于意门中,对那些以彼为所缘的受,以及无门的结生、有分、死时之受,应知其集起即是与它们同时生起的意触的集起。其余内容,当依前说之法来理解。显示巴利原文
Phassasamudayāti ettha pana pañcadvāre pañcavatthukavedanānaṃ sahajātacakkhusamphassādisamudayā samudayo hoti. Avasesānaṃ cakkhusamphassādayo upanissayādivasena paccayā. Manodvāre tadārammaṇavedanānaṃ advārikānañca paṭisandhibhavaṅgacutivedanānaṃ sahajātamanosamphassasamudayā samudayo hotīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
触节注释显示巴利原文
Phassavāravaṇṇanā
98 在触一节中,“眼触”是指于眼处的触。此法适用于一切处。“眼触……乃至……身触”,至此所说的是善、不善异熟、以五处为依的十种触。“意触”一词,是指其余二十二种世间异熟、与意相应的触。关于“六处集”:应知,由眼等六处的集起,而有此六触的集起。其余部分,当依前说之法来理解。显示巴利原文
98. Phassavāre cakkhusamphassoti cakkhumhi samphasso. Esa nayo sabbattha. Cakkhusamphasso…pe… kāyasamphassoti ettāvatā ca kusalākusalavipākā pañcavatthukā dasa samphassā vuttā honti. Manosamphassoti iminā sesā bāvīsati lokiyavipākamanasampayuttaphassā. Saḷāyatanasamudayāti channaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ āyatanānaṃ samudayena imassa chabbidhassāpi samphassassa samudayo hotīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
六处节注释显示巴利原文
Saḷāyatanavāravaṇṇanā
99 在六处节中,对于「眼处」等所应解说的内容,完全与《清净道论》中「蕴的解释」和「处的解释」所说的方法相同。而在「名色集」这里,依于什么样的名、什么样的色,以及什么样的名色是某处的缘,便可了知:由名色集而有六处集——此处应按照《清净道论》「缘起解释」中所说明的方法来理解。其余未阐述的部分,也与前说相同。显示巴利原文
99. Saḷāyatanavāre cakkhāyatanantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge khandhaniddese ceva āyatananiddese ca vuttanayameva. Nāmarūpasamudayāti ettha pana yaṃ nāmaṃ yañca rūpaṃ, yañca nāmarūpaṃ yassa āyatanassa paccayo hoti, tassa vasena visuddhimagge paṭiccasamuppādaniddese vuttanayena nāmarūpasamudayā saḷāyatanasamudayo veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttappakāramevāti.
名色节注释显示巴利原文
Nāmarūpavāravaṇṇanā
100 在名色品中,「名」以‘朝向’为特相;「色」以‘变坏’为特相。在广释品中,其中的受,即是受蕴;想,即是想蕴;思、触、作意,应知为行蕴。虽然还有许多其他法包含在行蕴中,但这三种法在一切最微弱的心中也都会生起,因此这里仅以此三者来标示行蕴。关于‘四大’,‘四’是数量的限定,‘大种’是地、水、火、风的别名。至于它们被称为‘大种’的理由,以及这里其他的分别方式,一切在《清净道论》「色蕴的解释」中都已说过。显示巴利原文
100. Nāmarūpavāre namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ. Vitthāravāre panassa vedanāti vedanākkhandho. Saññāti saññākkhandho. Cetanā phasso manasikāroti saṅkhārakkhandho veditabbo. Kāmañca aññepi saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā dhammā santi, ime pana tayo sabbadubbalesupi cittesu santi. Tasmā etesaṃyeva vasenettha saṅkhārakkhandhopi dassito. Cattāri ca mahābhūtānīti ettha cattārīti gaṇanaparicchedo. Mahābhūtānīti pathavīāpatejavāyānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yena pana kāraṇena tāni mahābhūtānīti vuccanti, yo cettha añño vinicchayanayo, so sabbo visuddhimagge rūpakkhandhaniddese vutto.
关于「四大所造」:此处的「四」是表示受格的属格,意为‘四而且是大种’。‘所造’意为执取、抓取,也有人解释为‘依止’。‘转起’一词在这里被省略。或者,这种属格是在表示集合的含义。因此应知此义为:执取四大集合而正在转起的色。在一切处,那些地等四大,以及依四大所造而转起、在阿毗达摩教典中根据眼处等差别而说的二十三种色,这一切都应知为‘色’。在「识集」中,依于什么样的识是某名、某色、某名色的缘,应知:由识集而有名色集,也就是按照《清净道论》「缘起解释」中所说明的方法。其余如前所述。显示巴利原文
Catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyāti ettha pana catunnanti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, cattāri ca mahābhūtānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Upādāyāti upādiyitvā, gahetvāti attho. Nissāyātipi eke. Vattamānanti ayañcettha pāṭhaseso. Samūhatthe vā etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Tena catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ samūhaṃ upādāya pavattamānaṃ rūpanti ayamattho veditabbo. Evaṃ sabbatthāpi yāni cattāri pathavīādīni mahābhūtāni, yañca catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vattamānaṃ cakkhāyatanādibhedena abhidhammapāḷiyameva vuttaṃ tevīsatividhaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ sabbampi ‘‘rūpa’’nti veditabbaṃ. Viññāṇasamudayāti ettha pana yaṃ viññāṇaṃ yassa nāmassa yassa ca rūpassa yassa ca nāmarūpassa paccayo hoti, tassa vasena visuddhimagge paṭiccasamuppādaniddese vuttanayeneva viññāṇasamudayā nāmarūpasamudayo veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
识品的注释。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇavāravaṇṇanā
101 在识品中,“眼识”是指依于眼而生起的识,或从眼而生的识,故称眼识。耳识、鼻识、舌识、身识亦同此理。此外,唯以意为识的,称为“意识”。这是除前五种识之外的三地果心的名称。在“行集”一句中,应知由行集而有识集,即什么样的行是某一识的缘,其余如前所述。显示巴利原文
101. Viññāṇavāre cakkhuviññāṇanti cakkhumhi viññāṇaṃ, cakkhuto vā jātaṃ viññāṇanti cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Evaṃ sotaghānajivhākāyaviññāṇāni. Itaraṃ pana manoyeva viññāṇanti manoviññāṇaṃ. Dvipañcaviññāṇavajjassa tebhūmakavipākacittassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saṅkhārasamudayāti ettha pana yo saṅkhāro yassa viññāṇassa paccayo hoti, tassa vasena saṅkhārasamudayā viññāṇasamudayo veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
行品的注释。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhāravāravaṇṇanā
102 在行品中,“行”以造作为特相。在广释品中,它的“身行”是指由身所转起的行,即在身门以策发的方式转起的二十种身思的名称——由欲界善的八种与不善的十二种构成。“语行”是指由语所转起的行,即在语门以言语表达的方式转起的这同类二十种语思的名称。“心行”是指由心所转起的行,即不发动身门、语门,独坐静处思维的人所转起的、依世间善与不善而有的二十九种意思的名称。在“无明集”中,应知:于善法,无明以亲依止缘的方式为缘;于不善法,无明亦以俱生等方式为缘。其余如前所述。显示巴利原文
102. Saṅkhāravāre abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇo saṅkhāro. Vitthāravāre panassa kāyasaṅkhāroti kāyato pavattasaṅkhāro, kāyadvāre copanavasena pavattānaṃ kāmāvacarakusalato aṭṭhannaṃ, akusalato dvādasannanti vīsatiyā kāyasañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vacīsaṅkhāroti vacito pavattasaṅkhāro, vacīdvāre vacanabhedavasena pavattānaṃ vīsatiyā eva vacīsañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cittasaṅkhāroti cittato pavattasaṅkhāro, kāyavacīdvāre copanaṃ akatvā raho nisīditvā cintayantassa pavattānaṃ lokiyakusalākusalavasena ekūnatiṃsamanosañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Avijjāsamudayāti ettha pana kusalānaṃ upanissayavasena akusalānaṃ sahajātādivasenāpi avijjāpaccayo hotīti veditabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
无明品的注释。显示巴利原文
Avijjāvāravaṇṇanā
103 在无明品中,“于苦中的无知”是指对苦圣谛的无知,这是“痴”的别称。于“于集中的无知”等,亦同此理。其中,“于苦中的无知”应从四种理由来理解:因为被包含其中、作为依处、作为所缘,以及因覆蔽故。确实,它被包含在苦圣谛之内,故于苦中是“被包含的”;苦圣谛是它的依处缘,故苦谛为其“依处”;苦谛是它的所缘缘,故苦谛为其“所缘”;并且它还“覆蔽”苦圣谛,这是在阻碍对苦圣谛真实相的透彻洞察,以及不给予关于苦的智慧生起之机会的意义上说的。显示巴利原文
103. Avijjāvāre dukkhe aññāṇanti dukkhasacce aññāṇaṃ, mohassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Esa nayo samudaye aññāṇantiādīsu. Tattha catūhi kāraṇehi dukkhe aññāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ antogadhato vatthuto ārammaṇato paṭicchādanato ca. Tathā hi taṃ dukkhasaccapariyāpannattā dukkhe antogadhaṃ, dukkhasaccañcassa nissayapaccayabhāvena vatthu, ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena ārammaṇaṃ, dukkhasaccañca etaṃ paṭicchādeti, tassa yāthāvalakkhaṇappaṭivedhanivāraṇena, ñāṇappavattiyā cettha appadānena.
对“集”的无知,应从三种理由去理解:作为依处、作为所缘,以及由于覆蔽。对“灭”与“道”的无知,则唯从一种理由理解,即由于覆蔽。因为对灭与道的无知,只是覆蔽灭与道的障碍——它阻碍对灭与道真实相的彻证,不给关于灭与道的智慧提供生起的机会。然而,它并不被含摄在灭与道之中,因为不被后二圣谛的范畴所涵盖;那后二圣谛也不是它的依处,因为彼此并非同时生起;它们也不是它的所缘,因为它不缘取灭与道而生。后二圣谛由于极其甚深而难见,在此,并无“盲然”状态的无知生起。而前二圣谛因具有欺诳性,自性相难见,故亦甚深;在那里,无知是借着“颠倒执取”的方式生起的。显示巴利原文
Samudaye aññāṇaṃ tīhi kāraṇehi veditabbaṃ vatthuto ārammaṇato paṭicchādanato ca. Nirodhe paṭipadāyañca aññāṇaṃ ekeneva kāraṇena veditabbaṃ paṭicchādanato. Nirodhapaṭipadāya hi paṭicchādakameva aññāṇaṃ tesaṃ yāthāvalakkhaṇappaṭivedhanivāraṇena, tesu ca ñāṇappavattiyā appadānena. Na pana tattha antogadhaṃ, tasmiṃ saccadvaye apariyāpannattā. Na tassa taṃ saccadvayaṃ vatthu, asahajātattā. Nārammaṇaṃ, tadārabbha appavattanato. Pacchimañhi saccadvayaṃ gambhīrattā duddasaṃ, na cettha andhabhūtaṃ aññāṇaṃ pavattati. Purimaṃ pana vañcaniyaṭṭhena sabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattā gambhīraṃ, tattha vipallāsaggāhavasena pavattati.
复次,于“苦”中,无明由摄、依处、所缘及作用这些角度而被显明。于“苦集”中,无明由依处、所缘及作用被显明。于“苦灭”、于“趣向苦灭之道”中,无明唯由作用被显明。而通称的“无知”,应知是就其自性而标示的。又,在“漏的集起”这句话中,应知:欲漏与有漏,是以俱生等种种方式作为无明的缘;而无明漏,则唯以亲依止缘的方式作为缘。于此,先前生起的无明本身即称为无明漏,它成为后来展转生起的无明漏的亲依止缘。余如前说。显示巴利原文
Apica dukkheti ettāvatā saṅgahato vatthuto ārammaṇato kiccato ca avijjā dīpitā. Dukkhasamudayeti ettāvatā vatthuto ārammaṇato kiccato ca. Dukkhanirodhe dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāyāti ettāvatā kiccato. Avisesato pana aññāṇanti etena sabhāvato niddiṭṭhāti ñātabbā. Āsavasamudayāti ettha pana kāmāsavabhavāsavā sahajātādivasena avijjāya paccayā honti. Avijjāsavo upanissayavaseneva. Pubbuppannā cettha avijjā avijjāsavoti veditabbā. Sā aparāparuppannāya avijjāya upanissayapaccayo hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
漏部分的解释显示巴利原文
Āsavavāravaṇṇanā
104 在“漏”的部分,“无明集”一句中:无明作为欲漏、有漏的缘,是以俱生等缘的方式;作为无明漏的缘,则唯以亲依止缘的方式。复次,当知此处后后生起之无明,即称为无明漏;而前前生起之无明本身,正是后后生起之无明漏的亲依止缘。其余内容如前所述。此一部分,是为显示即使在缘起诸支中被列为首要的“无明”,它也是有缘的,而这样宣说的。由此宣说的部分,轮回的无始性便得以成立。如何成立?因为以漏的集起为缘,有无明的集起;又以无明的集起为缘,有漏的集起。如此,漏是无明的缘,无明也是漏的缘。如是成立后,无明的前际便不可知;由无明的前际不可知故,轮回的无始性便得以成立。显示巴利原文
104. Āsavavāre avijjāsamudayāti ettha avijjā kāmāsavabhavāsavānaṃ sahajātādivasena paccayo hoti. Avijjāsavassa upanissayavaseneva. Aparāparuppannā cettha avijjā avijjāsavoti veditabbā. Pubbuppannā avijjāyevassa aparāparuppannassa avijjāsavassa upanissayapaccayo hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti. Ayaṃ vāro yā esā paṭiccasamuppādapadesu jeṭṭhikā avijjā, tassāpi paccayadassanavasena vutto. Evaṃ vuttena vārena saṃsārassa anamataggatā sādhitā hoti. Kathaṃ? Āsavasamudayena hi avijjāsamudayo. Avijjāsamudayenāpi āsavasamudayo. Evaṃ āsavā avijjāya avijjāpi āsavānaṃ paccayoti katvā pubbakoṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, tassā apaññāyanato saṃsārassa anamataggatā siddhā hotīti.
如此,这部经中一共宣说了十六个部分,即:业道部分、食部分、苦部分、老死部分、生部分、有部分、取部分、爱部分、受部分、触部分、六处部分、名色部分、识部分、行部分、无明部分、漏部分。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbepime imasmiṃ sutte kammapathavāro āhāravāro dukkhavāro jarā-maraṇa-jāti-bhava-upādāna-taṇhā-vedanā-phassa-saḷāyatana-nāmarūpa- viññāṇa-saṅkhāra-avijjā-āsavavāroti soḷasavārā vuttā.
其中每一部分,又依略说与广说分为两种,共成三十二处。如此,这部经于三十二处中,宣说了四圣谛;而在以广说方式展开的十六处中,则宣说了阿罗汉果。然而,依这位长老的见解,三十二处中的每一处,都宣说了四圣谛与四道。因此,在完整收录于五部的一切佛语中,除了这部《正见经》,再无任何经典能像它这样,三十二次阐明四圣谛,又三十二次开示阿罗汉果。显示巴利原文
Tesu ekekassa vārassa saṅkhepavitthāravasena dvidhā vibhattā dvattiṃsaṭṭhānāni honti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte imesu dvattiṃsaṭṭhānesu cattāri saccāni kathitāni. Etesaṃyeva vitthāravasena vuttesu soḷasasu ṭhānesu arahattaṃ kathitaṃ. Therassa pana matena dvattiṃsāyapi ṭhānesu cattāri saccāni cattāro ca maggā kathitāti. Iti sakalepi pañcamahānikāyasaṅgahite buddhavacane natthi taṃ suttaṃ, yattha dvattiṃsakkhattuṃ cattāri saccāni dvattiṃsakkhattuñca arahattaṃ pakāsitaṃ aññatra imamhā sammādiṭṭhisuttāti.
“尊者舍利弗宣说此法”这句经文,是指舍利弗尊者以三十二种四圣谛教说、三十二种阿罗汉果教说——合共六十四种方式,庄严地开示了《正见经》;比丘们满心欢喜,对舍利弗尊者的开示深感满意。显示巴利原文
Idamavocāyasmāsāriputtoti idaṃ dvattiṃsāya catusaccapariyāyehi dvattiṃsāya arahattapariyāyehīti catusaṭṭhiyā kāraṇehi alaṅkaritvā sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ āyasmā sāriputto avoca, attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
10. 《念处经》的注释显示巴利原文
10. Satipaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
105 「如是我闻」等句,即《念处经》。其中,「住于俱卢国」一句应这样理解:「俱卢」是指名为俱卢的地方诸王子;他们居住的那个地区,也依通常的称呼叫作「俱卢」,所以正是在那个叫俱卢的地区里。然而,注疏师们另有说法:在曼陀多王时代,其他三洲的人们听说:「赡部洲洲,是佛陀、独觉佛、大声闻、转轮王等上人的诞生之地,最为殊胜,最为悦意。」于是他们便跟随以轮宝为先导巡游四洲的转轮王曼陀多,一同前来。随后,国王问统帅宝:显示巴利原文
105. Evaṃ me sutanti satipaṭṭhānasuttaṃ. Tattha kurūsu viharatīti kurunāmakā jānapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena kurūti vuccati, tasmiṃ kurūsu janapade. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāhu – mandhātukāle tīsu dīpesu manussā jambudīpo nāma buddhapaccekabuddhamahāsāvakacakkavattipabhutīnaṃ uttamapurisānaṃ uppattibhūmi uttamadīpo atiramaṇīyoti sutvā raññā mandhātucakkavattinā cakkaratanaṃ purakkhatvā cattāro dīpe anusaṃyāyantena saddhiṃ āgamaṃsu. Tato rājā pariṇāyakaratanaṃ pucchi –
「还有人界更悦意的地方吗?」显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi nu kho manussalokato ramaṇīyataraṃ ṭhāna’’nti?
「陛下,您为何这么说呢?」显示巴利原文
‘‘Kasmā deva evaṃ bhaṇasi?
你难道没看见日月天子的威力吗?显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ na passasi candimasūriyānaṃ ānubhāvaṃ?
难道他们的住处不比这里更令人愉悦吗?显示巴利原文
‘‘Nanu etesaṃ ṭhānaṃ ito ramaṇīyatara’’nti?
国王以轮宝为前导,前往彼处。四大天王听说“曼陀多大王来了”,心想:“这位大王有大神通、大威德,不可以武力抗拒。”便各自交出王权。他取得王权后,又问:“还有比这里更令人愉悦的地方吗?”他们便告诉他三十三天界:“陛下,三十三天界更令人愉悦。那里有帝释天王,这四大天王是他的侍者,站在守门之处。帝释天王具有大神力、大威德。他所受用的处所有:高达上千由旬的胜利殿、高五百由旬的善法堂天众集会处、一百五十由旬的胜利车、伊罗婆那象王,以及以千株天树庄严的欢喜园、杂色园、果实园、混合园。此外,有一棵高达百由旬的波利质多树,树下有一块长六十由旬、宽五十由旬、厚十五由旬、色如善意花的黄色毡石;它柔软至极,帝释天王坐上去时,半身便会陷入其中。”显示巴利原文
Rājā cakkaratanaṃ purakkhatvā tattha agamāsi. Cattāro mahārājāno ‘‘mandhātumahārājā āgato’’ti sutvāva ‘‘mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo rājā na sakkā yuddhena paṭibāhitu’’nti sakarajjaṃ niyyātesuṃ. So taṃ gahetvā puna pucchi – ‘‘atthi nu kho ito ramaṇīyataraṃ ṭhāna’’nti. Athassa tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ kathayiṃsu – ‘‘tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ, deva, ramaṇīyataraṃ, tattha sakkassa devarañño ime cattāro mahārājāno paricārakā dovārikabhūmiyaṃ tiṭṭhanti. Sakko devarājā mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo. Tassimāni pana upabhogaṭṭhānāni, yojanasahassubbedho vejayantapāsādo, pañcayojanasatubbedhā sudhammā devasabhā, diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko vejayantaratho, tathā erāvaṇo hatthī, dibbarukkhasahassapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nandanavanaṃ cittalatāvanaṃ phārusakavanaṃ missakavanaṃ . Yojanasatubbedho pāricchattako koviḷāro, tassa heṭṭhā saṭṭhiyojanāyāmā paṇṇāsayojanavitthatā pañcadasayojanubbedhā jayasumanapupphavaṇṇā paṇḍukambalasilā, yassā mudutāya sakkassa nisīdato upaḍḍhakāyo anupavisatī’’ti.
国王听后欲往彼处,便抛出轮宝。轮宝与四支军队一同停驻于空中。随后,轮宝从两层天界之间降下,与以将领宝为首的四支军队一同立于大地。国王独自前往三十三天。帝释听说‘曼陀多来了’,便出来迎接,说道:‘欢迎你,大王,这是你的地方,大王,请统治这里吧,大王。’说完,便与诸天将王权分作两份,交予他一份。国王刚在三十三天安住,人身便即隐没,天身显现。显示巴利原文
Taṃ sutvā rājā tattha gantukāmo cakkaratanaṃ abbhukkiri . Taṃ ākāse patiṭṭhāsi saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Atha dvinnaṃ devalokānaṃ vemajjhato cakkaratanaṃ otaritvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāsi saddhiṃ pariṇāyakaratanappamukhāya caturaṅginiyā senāya. Rājā ekakova tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ agamāsi. Sakko ‘‘mandhātā āgato’’ti sutvāva tassa paccuggamanaṃ katvā – ‘‘svāgataṃ te, mahārāja, sakaṃ te, mahārāja. Anusāsa, mahārājā’’ti vatvā saddhiṃ nāṭakehi rajjaṃ dvebhāge katvā ekaṃ bhāgamadāsi. Rañño tāvatiṃsabhavane patiṭṭhitamattasseva manussabhāvo vigacchi, devabhāvo pāturahosi.
据说,他与帝释一同坐于黄毯石座,但只要一眨眼,便能看出差别。诸天若不细察,便会混淆帝释与他。他在彼处享受天界的胜妙福乐,直至三十六位帝释相继出生又灭去,在此期间他一直行使王权,却仍不满足于欲乐。从那里逝去后,他坠落在自己的园林中,遭风吹日晒而死。显示巴利原文
Tassa kira sakkena saddhiṃ paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ nisinnassa akkhinimisamattena nānattaṃ paññāyati. Taṃ asallakkhentā devā sakkassa ca tassa ca nānatte muyhanti. So tattha dibbasampattiṃ anubhavamāno yāva chattiṃsa sakkā uppajjitvā cutā, tāva rajjaṃ kāretvā atittoyeva kāmehi tato cavitvā attano uyyāne patiṭṭhito vātātapena phuṭṭhagatto kālamakāsi.
当轮宝停驻于大地时,将领宝让人在金板上刻下曼陀多王的足印,宣告:‘这是曼陀多的王国’,并以此治理王国。那些从三洲来的人无法返回,便来到将领宝处请求:‘天王,我们凭藉国王的威德来到此处,如今无法回去,请赐予我们住处。’他便各赐一处地域。其中,从东毗提诃来的人们所住之处,沿用旧名称作毗提诃国;从西牛贺洲来的人们所住之处,称为阿巴兰特地方;从北俱卢洲来的人们所住之处,称为俱卢国。由于这些地域中有众多村落、城镇等,故以复数称呼。因此说‘在俱卢国中居住’。显示巴利原文
Cakkaratane pana pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhite pariṇāyakaratanaṃ suvaṇṇapaṭṭe mandhātuupāhanaṃ likhāpetvā idaṃ mandhāturajjanti rajjamanusāsi. Tepi tīhi dīpehi āgatamanussā puna gantuṃ asakkontā pariṇāyakaratanaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘deva mayaṃ rañño ānubhāvena āgatā, idāni gantuṃ na sakkoma, vasanaṭṭhānaṃ no dehī’’ti yāciṃsu. So tesaṃ ekekaṃ janapadamadāsi. Tattha pubbavidehato āgatamanussehi āvasitapadeso tāyeva purimasaññāya videharaṭṭhanti nāmaṃ labhi. Aparagoyānato āgatamanussehi āvasitapadeso aparantajanapadoti nāmaṃ labhi. Uttarakuruto āgatamanussehi āvasitapadeso kururaṭṭhanti nāmaṃ labhīti . Bahuke pana gāmanigamādayo upādāya bahuvacanena voharīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kurūsu viharatī’’ti.
“剑磨瑟昙”是俱卢国的一个镇。关于“剑磨瑟昙”之名,有人将“dha”音解释为“da”音,意为“杂色者在此被调伏”,故称“剑磨瑟昙”。所谓“杂色者”,是指食人者甘马萨巴陀(杂色脚)。据说他的脚被木桩刺伤,伤口愈合时变得如同斑纹木,因此被称为甘马萨巴陀。他正是在此地被调伏,从食人的行径中被制止。被何人所调伏?乃是大士(菩萨)。发生于哪一本生故事?有些人说是《大须陀须摩本生》,而这些长老则说是《阇耶帝须本生》。因为那时大士调伏了甘马萨巴陀。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Kammāsadhammaṃnāma kurūnaṃ nigamoti. Kammāsadhammanti ettha keci dha-kārassa da-kārena atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Kammāso ettha damitoti kammāsadammo. Kammāsoti kammāsapādo porisādo vuccati. Tassa kira pāde khāṇukena viddhaṭṭhāne vaṇo ruhanto cittadārusadiso hutvā ruhi, tasmā kammāsapādoti paññāyittha . So ca tasmiṃ okāse damito porisādabhāvato paṭisedhito. Kena? Mahāsattena. Katarasmiṃ jātaketi? Mahāsutasomajātaketi eke. Ime pana therā jayaddisajātaketi vadanti. Tadā hi mahāsattena kammāsapādo damito. Yathāha –
“当我为阇耶帝须之子时,”
“般遮罗国主之子,”
我舍弃了生命,救出了父亲。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Putto yadā homi jayaddisassa, Pañcālaraṭṭhādhipatissa atrajo; Cajitvāna pāṇaṃ pitaraṃ pamocayiṃ, Kammāsapādampi cahaṃ pasādayi’’nti.
然而,有些论师仅从“dha”音来解释。据说,俱卢国居民的俱卢法在那个地方产生了杂染,因此那地方被称为“剑磨瑟昙”,意思是“在这里,法以杂染的方式生起”。那里建立的市镇也以此命名。为何不用处格表达呢?因为那里并非住处。据说,世尊在该市镇中并没有寺院作为住处。在离开市镇、水源充足、景色宜人的地方,有一片大树林,世尊便住在那里,而以那个市镇作为行境村落。因此,此处应这样理解:“他住在俱卢国,以名为剑磨瑟昙的俱卢人聚落作为乞食的村落。”显示巴利原文
Keci pana dha-kāreneva atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Kururaṭṭhavāsīnaṃ kira kuruvattadhammo tasmiṃ kammāso jāto, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ kammāso ettha dhammo jātoti kammāsadhammanti vuccati. Tattha niviṭṭhanigamassāpi etadeva nāmaṃ. Bhummavacanena kasmā na vuttanti? Avasanokāsato. Bhagavato kira tasmiṃ nigame vasanokāso koci vihāro nāhosi. Nigamato pana apakkamma aññatarasmiṃ udakasampanne ramaṇīye bhūmibhāge mahāvanasaṇḍo ahosi. Tattha bhagavā vihāsi. Taṃ nigamaṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā, tasmā evamettha attho veditabbo ‘‘kurūsu viharati kammāsadhammaṃ nāma kurūnaṃ nigamo, taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā’’ti.
摄颂解说显示巴利原文
Uddesavārakathāvaṇṇanā
106 “诸比丘,此是一乘道。”世尊为何开示此经?因为俱卢国的人们具有领受甚深法义的能力。据说,俱卢国的比丘、比丘尼、优婆塞、优婆夷,由于当地水土、气候与资具等条件优良,受用适宜的气候与资具,身心恒常轻安舒适。他们凭借由身心轻安所支持的慧力,堪能领会甚深的法义。世尊观察到他们具有接受甚深教导的根器,便在二十一处场所,将禅修业处导向阿拉汉果,宣说了这部义理甚深的《念处经》。犹如有人得到了金花篮,装入种种鲜花;或如得到了金箱,装入七宝;同样地,世尊得到了俱卢国的大众,便为他们开示甚深的法。基于同样的原因,世尊也在此处宣说了其他义理深奥的经典,诸如长部中的《大因缘经》、《大念处经》,以及这部中部里的《心材譬喻经》、《树譬喻经》、《赖吒和罗经》、《摩犍提经》、《不动适应经》等。显示巴利原文
106.Ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggoti. Kasmā bhagavā idaṃ suttamabhāsi? Kururaṭṭhavāsīnaṃ gambhīradesanāpaṭiggahaṇasamatthatāya. Kururaṭṭhavāsino kira bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo utupaccayādisampannattā tassa raṭṭhassa sappāyautupaccayasevanena niccaṃ kallasarīrā kallacittā ca honti. Te cittasarīrakallatāya anuggahitapaññābalā gambhīrakathaṃ pariggahetuṃ samatthā honti. Tena tesaṃ bhagavā imaṃ gambhīradesanāpaṭiggahaṇasamatthataṃ sampassanto ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu kammaṭṭhānaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvā idaṃ gambhīratthaṃ satipaṭṭhānasuttaṃ abhāsi. Yathā hi puriso suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakaṃ labhitvā tattha nānāpupphāni pakkhipeyya, suvaṇṇamañjūsaṃ vā pana labhitvā sattaratanāni pakkhipeyya, evaṃ bhagavā kururaṭṭhavāsiparisaṃ labhitvā gambhīradesanaṃ desesi. Tenevettha aññānipi gambhīratthāni dīghanikāye mahānidānaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ imasmiṃ majjhimanikāye sāropamaṃ rukkhūpamaṃ raṭṭhapālaṃ māgaṇḍiyaṃ āneñjasappāyanti aññānipi suttāni desesi.
再者,在那个地方,四众弟子本来就精勤致力于念处的修习,甚至连奴仆、奴婢等人,也都谈论与念处相关的法义。在水边、纺线处等场所,绝无无意义的闲谈。倘若有人问某位妇女:“大娘,您修习哪一种念处?”若她回答“我没有修习”,众人便会责备说:“呸,你的人生实在可鄙,虽然活着,却如同死人一样。”然后教诲她:“以后切不可再如此。”并引导她学习某一类念处。若她回答“我在修习某某念处”,众人便会赞叹说:“善哉,善哉!你的人生有了意义,你真正获得了人身,正自觉者正是为了你这样的人,才出现于世间。”如这些等。不仅人类如此,连依止他们而居住的畜生,也会如理作意念处。以下便是一个事例:据说,曾有一位演员,训练了一只小鹦鹉到处表演。他住在比丘尼寺院附近,一次外出时,将小鹦鹉遗忘在那里。沙弥尼们将它捡回来照料,给它起名为“佛护”。一天,大长老尼见它蹲在前面,便招呼道:“佛护?”显示巴利原文
Apica tasmiṃ janapade catasso parisā pakatiyāva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti, antamaso dāsakammakaraparijanāpi satipaṭṭhānappaṭisaṃyuttameva kathaṃ kathenti. Udakatitthasuttakantanaṭṭhānādīsupi niratthakakathā nāma na pavattati. Sace kāci itthī ‘‘amma tvaṃ kataraṃ satipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ manasikarosī’’ti pucchitā ‘‘na kiñcī’’ti vadati. Taṃ garahanti ‘‘dhiratthu tava jīvitaṃ, jīvamānāpi tvaṃ matasadisā’’ti. Atha naṃ ‘‘mā dāni puna evamakāsī’’ti ovaditvā aññataraṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhāpenti. Yā pana ‘‘ahaṃ asukaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaromī’’ti vadati. Tassā ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti sādhukāraṃ datvā ‘‘tava jīvitaṃ sujīvitaṃ, tvaṃ nāma manussattaṃ pattā, tavatthāya sammāsambuddho uppanno’’tiādīhi pasaṃsanti. Na kevalañcettha manussajātiyāyeva satipaṭṭhānamanasikārayuttā, te nissāya viharantā tiracchānagatāpi. Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko kira naṭako suvapotakaṃ gahetvā sikkhāpento vicarati. So bhikkhunupassayaṃ upanissāya vasitvā gamanakāle suvapotakaṃ pamussitvā gato. Taṃ sāmaṇeriyo gahetvā paṭijaggiṃsu. Buddharakkhitotissa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Taṃ ekadivasaṃ purato nisinnaṃ disvā mahātherī āha – ‘‘buddharakkhitā’’ti?
它应声答道:“什么事,圣尼?”显示巴利原文
Kiṃ ayyeti.
你是否有某种作意?显示巴利原文
Atthi koci tava manasikāroti?
没有,圣尼。显示巴利原文
Natthi ayyeti.
贤友,住在出家人附近,确实不应以放逸之身而住,应当保持某种作意。你做不了别的,就反复诵习“骨,骨”吧。它依从长老尼的教导,便一边念着“骨,骨”,一边行走。显示巴利原文
Āvuso , pabbajitānaṃ santike vasantena nāma vissaṭṭhaattabhāvena bhavituṃ na vaṭṭati, kocideva manasikāro icchitabbo, tvaṃ pana aññaṃ na sakkhissasi ‘‘aṭṭhi aṭṭhī’’ti sajjhāyaṃ karohīti. So theriyā ovāde ṭhatvā ‘‘aṭṭhi aṭṭhī’’ti sajjhāyanto carati.
一天清晨,它正坐在门拱顶上晒着柔和的晨光,一只鸟用爪子抓住了它。它发出“叽叽”的叫声。沙弥尼们听到后,说:“圣尼,佛护被鸟抓住了,我们去救它!”于是她们拿起土块等追上去,把它救了下来。带回来后,放在长老尼面前,长老尼问道:显示巴利原文
Taṃ ekadivasaṃ pātova toraṇagge nisīditvā bālātapaṃ tapamānaṃ eko sakuṇo nakhapañjarena aggahesi. So ‘‘kiri kirī’’ti saddamakāsi. Sāmaṇeriyo sutvā ‘‘ayye buddharakkhito sakuṇena gahito, mocema na’’nti leḍḍuādīni gahetvā anubandhitvā mocesuṃ. Taṃ ānetvā purato ṭhapitaṃ therī āha –
“佛护,当你被鸟抓住的时候,你在想什么?”显示巴利原文
‘‘Buddharakkhita, sakuṇena gahitakāle kiṃ cintesī’’ti?
“不,圣尼,我没想别的。我只想到:‘一堆骨头抓着另一堆骨头去,会在哪儿散落呢?’圣尼,我就只想到一堆骨头。”显示巴利原文
Na ayye aññaṃ cintesiṃ, ‘‘aṭṭhipuñjova aṭṭhipuñjaṃ gahetvā gacchati, katarasmimpi ṭhāne vippakirissatī’’ti evaṃ ayye aṭṭhipuñjameva cintesinti.
善哉,善哉,佛护!这将成为你未来灭尽诸有的助缘。就这样,在那个地方,即便是畜生道的众生,也与念处作意相应。因此,世尊为了让这些众生生起念处之智,宣说了此经。显示巴利原文
Sādhu sādhu, buddharakkhita, anāgate bhavakkhayassa te paccayo bhavissatīti. Evaṃ tattha tiracchānagatāpi satipaṭṭhānamanasikārayuttā, tasmā nesaṃ bhagavā satipaṭṭhānabuddhimeva janento idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi.
在此,「一乘道」即是一条道。因为道有——显示巴利原文
Tattha ekāyanoti ekamaggo. Maggassa hi –
道有许多名称,诸如‘道’、‘路’、‘径’、‘途’、‘大道’、‘道途’、‘直道’、‘车道’、‘船’、‘渡口’、‘桥’、‘筏’和‘穿越’——这些都是它的别称。
如《小义释》所说:‘道、路、径、途、大道、道途、直道、车道、船、渡口、桥、筏、穿越。’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Maggo pantho patho pajjo, añjasaṃ vaṭumāyanaṃ; Nāvā uttarasetū ca, kullo ca bhisisaṅkamo’’ti. (cūḷani. 101) –
尽管它有这么多名称,但在这里,它是用‘道路’这个名称来指代的。所以,当世尊说‘比丘们,这是一乘道’时,在‘这是一乘道,比丘们’这句话里,应该这样理解:它的意思是‘比丘们,这是一条单行道,不是分叉的二路’。或者,也可以解释为:‘一乘道’是指‘应由一人去行走的道路’。‘由一人’意思是舍弃了群体和聚会,是离群索居、内心远离尘嚣的人。‘应行走’意思就是应该去修习。或者,其中一种解释是:因为人们由此‘行走’,所以称为‘道路’,意思就是从轮回走向涅槃。‘一乘道’就是‘一位的道路’,‘一位’指的是最殊胜的那一位。在所有众生中,最殊胜的那位就是世尊,所以这其实就是指‘世尊的道路’。虽然也有其他人走在这条路上,但即使如此,这条路还是属于世尊的,因为是他开创了这条路。正如经文所说:‘婆罗门,正是彼世尊,让还未生起的道路生起了’等等。或者,也可以说:因为它自己会‘行进’,也就是运转、进行,所以叫‘道路’。而‘一乘道’就是它只在‘一个’地方‘运转’,意思就是它只运行于这个‘法和律’之中,不运行于其他地方。正如经文所说:‘须跋陀罗,只有在这个法、律之中,才能找到八支圣道’。其实这些都只是说法的不同,所要表达的意义是同一个。此外,还可以理解为:它‘走向一个地方’,所以叫‘一乘道’。意思是说,虽然在预备阶段,它会依着各种法门、多种修习方式而运作,但到了最后阶段,它就只走向一个目标——涅槃。正如娑婆主梵天所说的:显示巴利原文
Bahūni nāmāni. Svāyaṃ idha ayananāmena vutto. Tasmā ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggoti ettha ekamaggo ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo, na dvedhāpathabhūtoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā ekena ayitabboti ekāyano. Ekenāti gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya vūpakaṭṭhena pavivittacittena. Ayitabboti paṭipajjitabbo. Ayanti vā etenāti ayano, saṃsārato nibbānaṃ gacchantīti attho . Ekassa ayano ekāyano, ekassāti seṭṭhassa. Sabbasattānaṃ seṭṭho ca bhagavā, tasmā bhagavatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiñcāpi hi tena aññepi ayanti, evaṃ santepi bhagavatova so ayano tena uppāditattā. Yathāha ‘‘so hi, brāhmaṇa, bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.79). Ayatīti vā ayano, gacchati pavattatīti attho. Ekasmiṃ ayanoti ekāyano, imasmiṃyeva dhammavinaye pavattati, na aññatrāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘imasmiṃ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214). Desanābhedoyeva heso, attho paneko. Apica ekaṃ ayatīti ekāyano. Pubbabhāge nānāmukhabhāvanānayappavattopi aparabhāge ekaṃ nibbānameva gacchatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha brahmā sahampati –
「他能彻见诸有的灭尽,他知那条一乘道,
悲悯利益众生者,对此道清晰了知;
往昔的修行者们,即循此道渡越了暴流,
未来的修行者,以及现在正渡越的人们,同样循此道渡越暴流。」(《相应部》5.409)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ekāyanaṃ jātikhayantadassī, Maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī; Etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, Tarissanti ye ca taranti ogha’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 5.409);
然而,有些人依据“他们不会一再地去往彼岸”这类偈颂的理路,认为它一次就能到达涅槃,所以称为“一乘道”。这种说法并不合理。若要表达这个意思,应当使用“一次而行”这个词。假如你解释说“它只有一次行走、一种归趣、一种运作”,由此来安立意义,那么用词虽然说得通,但意义不论从哪方面看都不合理。为什么呢?因为这里讨论的是“前分道”,也就是预备阶段的道路。这里所指的,是能以身为所缘、以受为所缘、以心为所缘、以法为所缘这四种所缘而运作的“前分念处道”,并非指称出世间的圣道。而这个前分道,它会运作许多次,并且它所经过的道路也有许多条。显示巴利原文
Keci pana ‘‘na pāraṃ diguṇaṃ yantī’’ti gāthānayena yasmā ekavāraṃ nibbānaṃ gacchati. Tasmā ‘‘ekāyano’’ti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati. Imassa hi atthassa sakiṃ ayanoti iminā byañjanena bhavitabbaṃ. Yadi pana ekaṃ ayanamassa ekā gati pavattīti evamatthaṃ yojetvā vucceyya, byañjanaṃ yujjeyya, attho pana ubhayathāpi na yujjati. Kasmā? Idha pubbabhāgamaggassa adhippetattā. Kāyādicatuārammaṇappavatto hi pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggo idha adhippeto, na lokuttaro. So ca anekavārampi ayati, anekañcassa ayanaṃ hoti.
其实,过去大长老们对这个问题也曾有过讨论。三藏小护长老说那是“前分念处道”,而他的老师三藏小善长老则说是“混合道”。小护长老回应:“尊者,那是前分。”小善长老说:“贤友,那是混合。”老师一再重复,小护长老没有反驳,只是默然。他们没有判明问题便起身离开了。后来,老师长老在去浴室的路上这样思惟:“我所说的混合道,小护却说是前分,这里到底哪个才是定论?”他遍阅经藏,注意到“诸比丘,若有任何人能这样修习四念处七年”这一处:出世间道生起后,能持续七年——这样的事根本不存在。他由此明白:我所说的混合道不能成立,小护所见的前分道路才是正确的。知道这一点后,在第八天宣布闻法集会时,他便去了。显示巴利原文
Pubbepi ca imasmiṃ pade mahātherānaṃ sākacchā ahosiyeva. Tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero ‘‘pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggo’’ti āha. Ācariyo panassa tipiṭakacūḷasumatthero ‘‘missakamaggo’’ti āha. Pubbabhāgo bhanteti. Missako āvusoti. Ācariye punappunaṃ bhaṇante appaṭibāhitvā tuṇhī ahosi. Pañhaṃ avinicchinitvāva uṭṭhahiṃsu. Athācariyatthero nhānakoṭṭhakaṃ gacchanto ‘‘mayā missakamaggo kathito, cūḷanāgo pubbabhāgoti ādāya voharati , ko nu kho ettha nicchayo’’ti suttantaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya parivattento ‘‘yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṃ bhāveyya satta vassānī’’ti imasmiṃ ṭhāne sallakkhesi, lokuttaramaggo uppajjitvā satta vassāni tiṭṭhamāno nāma natthi, mayā vutto missakamaggo na labbhati, cūḷanāgena diṭṭho pubbabhāgamaggova labbhatīti ñatvā aṭṭhamiyaṃ dhammassavane saṅghuṭṭhe agamāsi.
据说,古时的长老们极爱听闻正法。一听到声音,他们便争先恐后地迅速赶来。那一天轮到小护长老说法。他登上法座,拿起扇子,诵完前面的偈颂后,那位站在长老座位后面的长老心想:“我不应当独自坐着而不表明。”因为古时的长老们没有嫉妒心,不会像扛着甘蔗捆那样,只把自己的见解高举着走,他们只采纳合理的,舍弃不合理的。于是,长老开口说:“贤友小护!”小护长老听到那声音像是老师,便停下说法,问道:“尊者,有什么事吗?”长老说:“贤友小护,我所说的混合道并不存在,你所说的前分念处道才是对的。”显示巴利原文
Porāṇakattherā kira piyadhammassavanā honti. Saddaṃ sutvāva ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ, ahaṃ paṭhama’’nti ekappahāreneva osaranti. Tasmiñca divase cūḷanāgattherassa vāro. Tena dhammāsane nisīditvā vījaniṃ gahetvā pubbagāthāsu vuttāsu therassa āsanapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhitassa etadahosi ‘‘raho nisīditvā na vakkhāmī’’ti. Porāṇakattherā hi anusūyakā honti, na attano rucimeva ucchubhāraṃ viya evaṃ ukkhipitvā vicaranti, kāraṇameva gaṇhanti, akāraṇaṃ vissajjenti. Tasmā thero ‘‘āvuso cūḷanāgā’’ti āha. So ācariyassa viya saddoti dhammaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘kiṃ bhante’’ti āha. Āvuso cūḷanāga mayā vutto missakamaggo na labbhati, tayā vutto pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggova labbhatīti.
小护长老心想:‘我们的老师通达一切教法,是三藏师,具足闻慧,像这样的比丘尚且对这个议题感到困惑,未来我的同修们也必定会困惑。我应当依经确立此义,令其明确无惑。’于是他从《无碍解道》中引述:‘一乘道’所指,即是前行部分的念处之道——显示巴利原文
Thero cintesi ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo sabbapariyattiko tepiṭako sutabuddho, evarūpassapi nāma bhikkhuno ayaṃ pañho āluḷeti, anāgate mama bhātikā imaṃ pañhaṃ āluḷessantīti suttaṃ gahetvā imaṃ pañhaṃ niccalaṃ karissāmī’’ti paṭisambhidāmaggato ‘‘ekāyanamaggo vuccati pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggo –
八支道,于诸道中最胜;四谛,于诸谛中最胜;
离贪,于诸法中最胜;具眼者,于两足者中最胜。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho, saccānaṃ caturo padā; Virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṃ, dvipadānañca cakkhumā. Eseva maggo natthañño, dassanassa visuddhiyā; Etañhi tumhe paṭipajjatha, mārasenappamaddanaṃ; Etañhi tumhe paṭipannā, dukkhassantaṃ karissathā’’ti. (dha. pa. 273-275) –
他引用经文,并予以确立。显示巴利原文
Suttaṃ āharitvā ṭhapesi.
「道」(maggo)为什么称为道呢?因为它导向涅槃,也是寻求涅槃者所应修行的道路。所谓“为了有情的清净”,是指为了让那些被贪等垢秽、被贪欲与邪贪等随烦恼所染污的众生获得清净。正是依此道,从此方上溯,经过十万大劫又四个无数劫,于同一劫中出世的佛陀——从爱见佛、慧见佛、皈依见佛、燃灯佛开始,直至释迦牟尼佛为止——有无数位正自觉者、数百位独觉佛,以及不可计数的圣弟子们:所有这一切众生,皆涤除内心垢秽,达到最极清净。然而,就色法的垢秽而言,则没有“染污与清净”的安立。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Maggoti kenaṭṭhena maggo? Nibbānagamanaṭṭhena nibbānatthikehi magganiyaṭṭhena ca. Sattānaṃ visuddhiyāti rāgādīhi malehi abhijjhāvisamalobhādīhi ca upakkilesehi kiliṭṭhacittānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhatthāya. Tathā hi imināva maggena ito satasahassakappādhikānaṃ catunnaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānaṃ upari ekasmiññeva kappe nibbatte taṇhaṅkaramedhaṅkarasaraṇaṅkaradīpaṅkaranāmake buddhe ādiṃ katvā sakyamunipariyosānā aneke sammāsambuddhā anekasatā paccekabuddhā gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā ariyasāvakā cāti ime sattā sabbe cittamalaṃ pavāhetvā paramavisuddhiṃ pattā. Rūpamalavasena pana saṃkilesavodānapaññattiyeva natthi. Tathā hi –
以染污的色,凡夫便染污;
若色清净,众生便得清净——此非大仙所说。
心若染污,众生则染污;
心若清净,众生便得清净——此乃大仙所说。
显示巴利原文 Rūpena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Rūpe suddhe visujjhanti, anakkhātaṃ mahesinā. Cittena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Citte suddhe visujjhanti, iti vuttaṃ mahesinā.
正如世尊所说:“比丘们,由心的染污,众生便染污;由心的清净,众生便清净。”(《相应部》3.100)而这样的心清净,正是依托此念处之道的修习而成就的。因此说:“为了有情的清净”。显示巴利原文
Yathāha ‘‘cittasaṃkilesā, bhikkhave, sattā saṃkilissanti, cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.100). Tañca cittavodānaṃ iminā satipaṭṭhānamaggena hoti. Tenāha ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti.
“为了超越愁与悲”(sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā),意思是:为了彻底超越愁与悲,也就是为了断除它们。因为这条道修习之后,能像寂静大臣等人那样,带来对愁的超越;也能像波吒左罗等人那样,带来对悲的超越。因此说:“为了超越愁与悲”。正如寂静大臣虽然——显示巴利原文
Sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyāti sokassa ca paridevassa ca samatikkamāya, pahānāyāti attho. Ayañhi maggo bhāvito santatimahāmattādīnaṃ viya sokasamatikkamāya, paṭācārādīnaṃ viya ca paridevasamatikkamāya ca saṃvattati. Tenāha ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’ti. Kiñcāpi hi santatimahāmatto –
「你当先净化过去的(业)」:你首先应把过去所造(的业)清理干净,「未来莫令有任何东西(牵挂)」:未来不要让任何事物(在心中)生起挂碍;
「若你现在不再执取」:如果对现在的一切不再执取,「你将寂然而行」:你就能寂静安详地度过。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃ pubbe taṃ visodhehi, pacchā te māhu kiñcanaṃ; Majjhe ce no gahessasi, upasanto carissasī’’ti. (su. ni. 955);
他听闻此偈颂后,当即证得无碍解,成就阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patto.
「子女不能作救护」:子女无法成为真正的依怙,「父母与亲族亦然」:父母和亲族同样不能;
「被死神掌控时」:当被死神所执捉时,「亲族之中无救护」:于诸亲属中,实无任何庇护可寻。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na santi puttā tāṇāya, na pitā nāpi bandhavā; Antakenādhipannassa, natthi ñātīsu tāṇatā’’ti. (dha. pa. 288);
听闻此偈后,她安住于入流果。然而,若不在身、受、心、法这四者中,择取一法为念处之所缘,便谈不上有所谓的修习,因此应知,他们同样依循此道,超越了愁与悲。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitā. Yasmā pana kāyavedanācittadhammesu kañci dhammaṃ anāmasitvā bhāvanā nāma natthi, tasmā tepi imināva maggena sokaparideve samatikkantāti veditabbā.
「苦与忧的止息」:指身体的痛苦与心所的忧——此二者的止息、灭尽。因为这条道若修习圆满,能令身体痛苦如底沙长老等人那样止息,亦令心忧如帝释等人那样止息。显示巴利原文
Dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāyāti kāyikadukkhassa ca cetasikadomanassassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ atthaṅgamāya, nirodhāyāti attho. Ayañhi maggo bhāvito tissattherādīnaṃ viya dukkhassa, sakkādīnaṃ viya ca domanassassa atthaṅgamāya saṃvattati.
此处解释其义:据说在舍卫城有位名叫底沙的居士子,舍弃四十亿金银财宝后出家,住在无村落的山林中。他弟弟的妻子派了五百名强盗,吩咐道:“去把他杀了。”强盗们前往,将长老围住坐下。长老问:“居士们,你们为何而来?”“我们来杀你。”“居士们,请接受我的保证,赐我今夜的生命。”“沙门,在此荒林,谁能为你担保?”长老便拿起一块大石头,砸断自己的两条大腿骨,说道:“居士们,如此可作为担保吗?”强盗们退到经行道尽头,生起火,躺下睡了。长老忍着痛苦,省察己戒;戒清净故,生起欣喜与欢悦。由此,他次第增长观智,整夜修习沙门法,直至曙光初现时,证得阿拉汉果,并说出如下优陀那:显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ atthadīpanā – sāvatthiyaṃ kira tisso nāma kuṭumbikaputto cattālīsa hiraññakoṭiyo pahāya pabbajitvā agāmake araññe viharati. Tassa kaniṭṭhabhātubhariyā ‘‘gacchatha naṃ jīvitā voropethā’’ti pañcasate core pesesi. Te gantvā theraṃ parivāretvā nisīdiṃsu. Thero āha ‘‘kasmā āgatattha upāsakā’’ti? Taṃ jīvitā voropessāmāti. Pāṭibhogaṃ me upāsakā gahetvā ajjekarattiṃ jīvitaṃ dethāti. Ko te, samaṇa, imasmiṃ ṭhāne pāṭibhogo bhavissatīti? Thero mahantaṃ pāsāṇaṃ gahetvā dve ūruṭṭhīni bhinditvā ‘‘vaṭṭati upāsakā pāṭibhogo’’ti āha. Te apakkamitvā caṅkamanasīse aggiṃ katvā nipajjiṃsu. Therassa vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā sīlaṃ paccavekkhato parisuddhaṃ sīlaṃ nissāya pītipāmojjaṃ uppajji . Tato anukkamena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento tiyāmarattiṃ samaṇadhammaṃ katvā aruṇuggamane arahattaṃ patto imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
“我砸断双腿之后,便将告知你们;
我对那尚有贪著的死亡感到厌离与羞惭。
我如此思惟后,如实观照;
曙光出现时,我便证得了阿拉汉果。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ubho pādāni bhinditvā, saññapessāmi vo ahaṃ; Aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi, sarāgamaraṇaṃ ahaṃ. Evāhaṃ cintayitvāna, yathābhūtaṃ vipassisaṃ; Sampatte aruṇuggamhi, arahattamapāpuṇi’’nti.
另有三十位比丘,在世尊跟前受持业处之后,来到森林寺院度过雨安居。他们彼此约定:‘贤友,我们整夜应当只修沙门法,不可相互来往。’之后便住下。他们修习沙门法后,于破晓时分昏沉瞌睡之际,来了一只老虎,将比丘一一抓走,没有谁发出‘老虎抓我’的呼喊。就这样,先后有五位、十位比丘被吃掉。到了布萨日,他们问道:‘贤友,其他比丘到哪儿去了?’了解情况后,便说:‘从今以后,若被老虎抓住,就要喊“我被抓了”。’之后继续住下。显示巴利原文
Aparepi tiṃsa bhikkhū bhagavato santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā araññavihāre vassaṃ upagantvā ‘‘āvuso, tiyāmarattiṃ samaṇadhammova kātabbo, na aññamaññassa santikaṃ āgantabba’’nti vatvā vihariṃsu. Tesaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ katvā paccūsasamaye pacalāyantānaṃ eko byaggho āgantvā ekekaṃ bhikkhuṃ gahetvā gacchati. Na koci ‘‘maṃ byaggho gaṇhī’’ti vācampi nicchāresi. Evaṃ pañcasu dasasu bhikkhūsu khāditesu uposathadivase ‘‘itare, āvuso, kuhi’’nti pucchitvā ñatvā ca ‘‘idāni gahitena, gahitomhīti vattabba’’nti vatvā vihariṃsu.
后来,又有一只老虎以同样的方式抓走了一位年轻比丘。他喊道:‘老虎!尊者!’比丘们拿起竹竿与火炬,想救下他,便紧追上去。老虎爬上了比丘们无法到达的悬崖断壁,从那位比丘的脚拇趾尖开始啃食。其余比丘说道:‘此刻,善士,我们已无能为力。比丘的殊胜威力,正是在这种时候才应当显现的。’那位比丘躺在老虎口中,强忍剧痛,增长观智:当被吃到脚踝时,他证得了入流果;吃到膝盖时,证得一来果;吃到肚脐时,证得不来果;在心脏之肉尚未被吃掉时,他便证得阿拉汉果,并具足四无碍解,随后说出这样的优陀那:显示巴利原文
Atha aññataraṃ daharabhikkhuṃ purimanayeneva byaggho gaṇhi. So ‘‘byaggho, bhante’’ti āha. Bhikkhū kattaradaṇḍe ca ukkāyo ca gahetvā mocessāmāti anubandhiṃsu. Byaggho bhikkhūnaṃ agatiṃ chinnataṭaṭṭhānaṃ āruyha taṃ bhikkhuṃ pādaṅguṭṭhakato paṭṭhāya khādituṃ ārabhi. Itarepi ‘‘idāni , sappurisa, amhehi kattabbaṃ natthi, bhikkhūnaṃ viseso nāma evarūpe ṭhāne paññāyatī’’ti āhaṃsu. So byagghamukhe nipannova taṃ vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento yāva gopphakā khāditasamaye sotāpanno hutvā, yāva jaṇṇukā khāditasamaye sakadāgāmī, yāva nābhiyā khāditasamaye anāgāmī hutvā, hadayarūpe akhāditeyeva saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
具戒圆满,誓戒具足,有慧且善入定;
因须臾放逸,其心即被老虎攫住。
被抓住投入兽栏,置于岩石之上;
任凭老虎吞食我,此身本是怨敌之食。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sīlavā vatasampanno, paññavā susamāhito; Muhuttaṃ pamādamanvāya, byagghenoruddhamānaso. Pañjarasmiṃ gahetvāna, silāya uparīkato; Kāmaṃ khādatu maṃ byaggho, bhakkho kāyo amittānaṃ; Paṭiladdhe kammaṭṭhāne, maraṇaṃ hehiti bhaddaka’’nti.
又有一位名为毕多马喇的大长老,他在俗家时,曾手持三国之旗来到铜掌岛,觐见国王并蒙受国王护持。一日,当他途经乞郎迦婆那会堂门口时,听闻《非汝所应经》中的开示:“诸比丘,色非属汝等,应舍之;舍此,将长夜为汝等带来利益与安乐。”他听闻后思惟:“如是,‘色’非我所有,‘受’亦非我所有。”便以此为策励,出家为僧。他前往大精舍祈求出家,出家并受具足戒后,精通了两种根本分类,便率领三十位比丘前往迦婆罗瓦利场院修习沙门法。当他的脚无法行走时,便以膝盖代步经行。某天深夜,一位猎鹿者将他误作鹿,用矛刺向他。矛贯穿了他的身体。他让人拔出矛,以草絮填塞伤口,自己坐于石板床上,修习界分别,继而增长观智,最终连同无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果。当比丘们闻其咳嗽声赶来时,他为他们作了证悟的宣告,随后说出这首感兴偈:显示巴利原文
Aparopi pītamallatthero nāma gihikāle tīsu rajjesu paṭākaṃ gahetvā tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ āgamma rājānaṃ disvā raññā katānuggaho ekadivasaṃ kilañjakāpaṇasāladvārena gacchanto ‘‘rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṃ, taṃ pajahatha, taṃ vo pahīnaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya bhavissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.33-34) natumhākavaggaṃ sutvā cintesi ‘‘neva kira rūpaṃ attano, na vedanā’’ti. So taṃyeva aṅkusaṃ katvā nikkhamitvā mahāvihāraṃ gantvā pabbajjaṃ yācitvā pabbajito upasampanno dvemātikā paguṇaṃ katvā tiṃsa bhikkhū gahetvā gabalavāliyaaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā samaṇadhammamakāsi. Pādesu avahantesu jaṇṇukehi caṅkamati. Tamenaṃ rattiṃ eko migaluddako migoti maññamāno sattiyā pahari. Satti vinivijjhitvā gatā. So taṃ sattiṃ harāpetvā pahāramukhāni tiṇavaṭṭiyā pūrāpetvā pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ attānaṃ nisīdāpetvā okāsaṃ kāretvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā ukkāsitasaddena āgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ byākaritvā imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
最胜佛陀、一切世间无上的论师,曾如此说:
“诸比丘,此色非属汝等,应当舍断此色。”
“诸行确实无常,是生灭法;”
“生起之后便即息灭——它们的寂灭,才是安乐。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāsitaṃ buddhaseṭṭhassa, sabbalokaggavādino; Na tumhākamidaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ jaheyyātha bhikkhavo. Aniccā vata saṅkhārā, uppādavayadhammino; Uppajjitvā nirujjhanti, tesaṃ vūpasamo sukho’’ti.
于是比丘们对他说:“尊者,倘若正自觉者当时身体无恙,他必定会伸手抚摩您的头顶。”这条道,至此便如底沙长老等人所行之道一样,能导向一切苦的彻底灭尽。显示巴利原文
Atha naṃ bhikkhū āhaṃsu ‘‘sace, bhante, sammāsambuddho arogo abhavissā, addhā te muddhamatthake hatthaṃ pasāretvā sīsaṃ parāmaseyyā’’ti. Ettāvatā ayaṃ maggo tissattherādīnaṃ viya dukkhassa atthaṅgamāya saṃvattati.
而帝释天王,见到自己身上出现五种衰相,被死亡的恐惧所震慑,心生忧恼,便来到世尊面前请问。当世尊解答完关于“舍”的问题后,他便与八万天神一同安稳地证得了入流果,他原本即将穷尽的寿命,也就此恢复如常。显示巴利原文
Sakko pana devānamindo attano pañcavidhaṃ pubbanimittaṃ disvā maraṇabhayasantajjito domanassajāto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchi. So upekkhāpañhavissajjanāvasāne asītisahassāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Sā cassa upapatti puna pākatikāva ahosi.
须梵天天子在一千名天女的围绕下,正享受着天界的福乐。那时,有五百名天女在树上采摘花朵,死后全都转生于地狱。他心想:“她们怎么这么久还不回来?”仔细察看之下,见到她们转生地狱的情形,于是又想:“我的寿命还有多少?”再进一步观照后,他得知自己的寿命也已耗尽,并且看见自己也将转生到同一地狱。他心生恐惧,大忧恼生起,心想:“这忧恼唯有导师才能去除,别人都办不到。”于是,他就带着剩下的那五百名天女,来到世尊面前请问。显示巴利原文
Subrahmāpi devaputto accharāsahassaparivāro saggasampattiṃ anubhoti, tattha pañcasatā accharāyo rukkhato pupphāni ocinantiyo cavitvā niraye upapannā. So ‘‘kiṃ imā cirāyantī’’ti upadhārento tāsaṃ niraye nibbattabhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘kittakaṃ nu kho mama āyū’’ti upaparikkhanto attanopi āyuparikkhayaṃ viditvā tattheva niraye nibbattanabhāvaṃ disvā bhīto ativiya domanassajāto hutvā ‘‘imaṃ me domanassaṃ satthā vinayissati na añño’’ti avasesā pañcasatā accharāyo gahetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchi –
此心常怀恐惧,此意恒时躁动,
于未生起的苦难,以及已生起的苦难;
若有无所恐惧的境界,请您为我开示,我今请问。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Niccaṃ utrastamidaṃ cittaṃ, niccaṃ ubbiggidaṃ mano; Anuppannesu kicchesu, atho uppatitesu ca; Sace atthi anutrastaṃ, taṃ me akkhāhi pucchito’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.98);
于是,世尊这样回答他:显示巴利原文
Tato naṃ bhagavā āha –
“非由觉支与苦行”:不是通过觉支和苦行;“非由诸根律仪”:不是通过守护诸根;“非由遍舍一切”:不是通过舍弃一切——我见众生安稳。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nāññatra bojjhā tapasā, nāññatrindriyasaṃvarā;
他在开示结束时,与五百位天女一同安住于入流果。令此成就坚固后,他便前往天界。应知,如此修习此道,如同对天帝释等人那样,能导致忧的灭尽。显示巴利原文
Nāññatra sabbanissaggā, sotthiṃ passāmi pāṇina’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.98);
「为证得理趣」:「理趣」指圣八支道,为证得它、为达到它,这是所说之义。因为这条属于前行阶段的世间念处道,修习之后,便能导向出世间道的证得。因此说「为证得理趣」。「为作证涅槃」:是为了作证那因远离渴爱之林而名为涅槃的不死,即亲自现证。因为修习此道,能次第成就涅槃的作证。因此说「为作证涅槃」。显示巴利原文
So desanāpariyosāne pañcahi accharāsatehi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya taṃ sampattiṃ thāvaraṃ katvā devalokameva agamāsīti . Evamayaṃ maggo bhāvito sakkādīnaṃ viya domanassassa atthaṅgamāya saṃvattatīti veditabbo.
「为证得理趣」:「理趣」指圣八支道,为证得它、为获得它,这是所说之义。因为这条属于前行阶段的世间念处道,修习之后,能导向出世间道的证得。因此说「为证得理趣」。「为作证涅槃」:即为了作证那因远离渴爱之林而名为涅槃的不死,为了亲自现证,这是所说之义。因为此道修习之后,能次第成就涅槃的作证。因此说「为作证涅槃」。显示巴利原文
Ñāyassa adhigamāyāti ñāyo vuccati ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, tassa adhigamāya, pattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi pubbabhāge lokiyo satipaṭṭhānamaggo bhāvito lokuttarassa maggassa adhigamāya saṃvattati. Tenāha ‘‘ñāyassa adhigamāyā’’ti. Nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyāti taṇhāvānavirahitattā nibbānanti laddhanāmassa amatassa sacchikiriyāya, attapaccakkhatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi maggo bhāvito anupubbena nibbānasacchikiriyaṃ sādheti. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti.
在此,虽说当提到“为众生的清净”时,超越愁等义理实际上已包含在内,然而除了精通教法义理者之外,对其他人而言,这些义理并不明显。而且,世尊并非先造就一位精通教法义理的人,然后再对他宣说法;而是以各个经句,来令人明晓各个义理。因此,在这里,为了显明这一乘道所成就的各个义理,他宣说了“为超越愁悲”等。或者,因为通过一乘道所达成的众生清净,是由于超越了愁悲;超越愁悲是由于苦与忧的灭尽;苦与忧的灭尽是由于证得了理趣;而证得理趣正是为了作证涅槃。因此,为了显示这个次第,世尊在宣说“为众生的清净”之后,接着宣说了“为超越愁悲”等。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti vutte sokasamatikkamādīni atthato siddhāneva honti, ṭhapetvā pana sāsanayuttikovide aññesaṃ na pākaṭāni, na ca bhagavā paṭhamaṃ sāsanayuttikovidaṃ janaṃ katvā pacchā dhammaṃ deseti. Tena teneva pana suttena taṃ taṃ atthaṃ ñāpeti. Tasmā idha yaṃ yaṃ atthaṃ ekāyanamaggo sādheti, taṃ taṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’tiādimāha. Yasmā vā yā sattānaṃ visuddhi ekāyanamaggena saṃvattati, sā sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamena hoti, sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamo dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamena, dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamo ñāyassādhigamena, ñāyassādhigamo nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya. Tasmā imampi kamaṃ dassento ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti vatvā ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’tiādimāha.
再者,这也是对一乘道的赞颂。正如世尊在开示“六六”时,以八句赞颂说:“诸比丘,我将为你们宣说初善、中善、后善,具足义理与文句,完全圆满、清净的梵行,即六六法。”又如开示圣种时,以九句赞颂说:“诸比丘,有此四种圣种,无上、久存、为世代所认可,自古而然,不曾混杂,现在不杂,未来也不杂,不为沙门、婆罗门与智者所呵责。”同样地,对于这一乘道,世尊也以“为众生的清净”等七句作了赞颂。显示巴利原文
Apica vaṇṇabhaṇanametaṃ ekāyanamaggassa. Yatheva hi bhagavā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsessāmi, yadidaṃ chachakkānī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.420) chachakkadesanāya aṭṭhahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, yathā ca ariyavaṃsadesanāya ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, ariyavaṃsā aggaññā rattaññā vaṃsaññā porāṇā asaṃkiṇṇā asaṃkiṇṇapubbā na saṃkīyanti, na saṃkīyissanti, appaṭikuṭṭhā samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī’’ti (a. ni. 4.28) navahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, evaṃ imassapi ekāyanamaggassa sattānaṃ visuddhiyātiādīhi sattahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi.
为何如此?是为了策发那些比丘的精进。因为听闻赞颂后,那些比丘便会思惟:“此道能断除四种灾患——令心热恼的愁、令口出虚语的悲、令身不适的苦、令意不适的忧,并带来三种殊胜——清净、理趣与涅槃。”由此生起精进,认为应当领受、通达、受持此教法,并修习此道。如是,为策发那些比丘的精进而宣说赞颂,正如毛毯商等人赞颂毛毯等货品一般。显示巴利原文
Kasmā iti ce? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ. Vaṇṇabhāsanañhi sutvā te bhikkhū ‘‘ayaṃ kira maggo hadayasantāpabhūtaṃ sokaṃ, vācāvippalāpabhūtaṃ paridevaṃ, kāyikaasātabhūtaṃ dukkhaṃ, cetasikaasātabhūtaṃ domanassanti cattāro upaddave hanati, visuddhiṃ ñāyaṃ nibbānanti tayo visese āvahatī’’ti ussāhajātā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbaṃ dhāretabbaṃ vācetabbaṃ, imañca maggaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ maññissanti. Iti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, kambalavāṇijādayo kambalādīnaṃ vaṇṇaṃ viya.
正如一位贩卖价值十万的黄色毛毯的商人,当他吆喝“来买毛毯吧”时,人们还不知道那是哪一种毛毯。因为像发毛毯、马尾毛毯等,虽然恶臭粗硬,也都叫作毛毯。然而,当那位商人吆喝“犍陀罗红毯,精细、光亮、触感舒适”时,有购买力的人便会购买,无力购买的人也愿意见识一番。同样地,当宣说“诸比丘,此是一乘道”时,是怎样的道也仍不明显。因为许多不能导向出离的道,也被称为“道”。但当宣说了“为众生的清净”等之后,他们便想:“听闻此道能断除四种灾患,带来三种殊胜。”由此生起精进,认为应当领受、通达、受持此教法,并修习此道。因此,为了作赞颂,世尊宣说了“为众生的清净”等。而且,不仅仅是这个价值十万的黄色毛毯商人的譬喻,此处还应举出红赡部金商、净水宝商、宝石商、极净珍珠宝商、洗净的珊瑚商等譬喻。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi satasahassagghanikapaṇḍukambalavāṇijena kambalaṃ gaṇhathāti ugghositepi asukakambaloti na tāva manussā jānanti. Kesakambalavālakambalādayopi hi duggandhā kharasamphassā kambalātveva vuccanti. Yadā pana tena gandhārako rattakambalo sukhumo ujjalo sukhasamphassoti ugghositaṃ hoti, tadā ye pahonti, te gaṇhanti. Ye na pahonti, tepi dassanakāmā honti, evamevaṃ ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo’’ti vuttepi asukamaggoti na tāva pākaṭo hoti. Nānappakārakā hi aniyyānamaggāpi maggātveva vuccanti. ‘‘Sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādimhi pana vutte ‘‘ayaṃ kira maggo cattāro upaddave hanati, tayo visese āvahatī’’ti ussāhajātā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbaṃ dhāretabbaṃ vācetabbaṃ, imañca maggaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ maññissantīti vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanto ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādimāha. Yathā ca satasahassagghanikapaṇḍukambalavāṇijopamā, evaṃ rattajambunadasuvaṇṇaudakappasādakamaṇiratanasuvisuddhamuttāratanadhotapavāḷādivāṇijūpamādayopettha āharitabbā.
「yadidaṃ」是虚词,意即「哪些呢?即这些」。「四」是数量限定,以此显示念处的范围:不少于它,也不多于它。「念处」有三种含义:念的所行境(所缘)也称为念处;在三种所化弟子中,导师超越了排斥与偏爱,这也称为念处;还有「念」本身也称为念处。正如在「比丘们,我将教导四念处的集起与灭没,你们谛听……比丘们,什么是身的集起?由食的集起而有身的集起」(相应部)等经文中,念的所行境即称为念处。同样,在「身为建立处,非念;念既是建立处,又是念」(无碍解道)等经文中也是如此。其义为:「依此而安立」故称为「处」。安立什么?念。念的安立处,即是念处。或者,「处」意指努力修行的场所。念的修行场所即是念处,犹如象场、马场等。在「有三个念处,圣者所修习,圣者修习时,导师堪称调御大众」(中部)此经中,于三种所化弟子中,导师超越了排斥与偏爱,这也称为「念处」。其义为:应被安立故为「处」,即应被发起、运行之义。由什么安立?由念。念的安立处,即是念处。而在「四念处修习多修习,能圆满七」显示巴利原文
Yadidanti nipāto, ye imeti ayamassa attho. Cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo, tena na tato heṭṭhā na uddhanti satipaṭṭhānaparicchedaṃ dīpeti. Satipaṭṭhānāti tayo satipaṭṭhānā satigocaropi, tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatāpi, satipi. ‘‘Catunnaṃ , bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca desessāmi, taṃ suṇātha…pe…. Ko ca, bhikkhave, kāyassa samudayo? Āhārasamudayā kāyasamudayo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.408) hi satigocaro satipaṭṭhānanti vuccati. Tathā ‘‘kāyo paṭṭhānaṃ, no sati. Sati paṭṭhānañceva sati cā’’tiādīsupi (paṭi. ma. 3.35). Tassattho – patiṭṭhāti asminti paṭṭhānaṃ. Kā patiṭṭhāti? Sati. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Padhānaṭṭhānanti vā paṭṭhānaṃ. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, hatthiṭṭhānaassaṭṭhānādīni viya. ‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā, yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.311) etthāpi tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttā. Tassattho – paṭṭhapetabbato paṭṭhānaṃ, pavattayitabbatoti attho. Kena paṭṭhapetabbatoti? Satiyā. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānanti. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrentī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.989) pana satiyeva ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Tassattho – patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhāti okkantitvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho. Satiyeva paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Atha vā saraṇaṭṭhena sati, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ. Iti sati ca sā paṭṭhānañcātipi satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Idamidha adhippetaṃ.
如果是这样,为何「念处」用复数?因为念有多种。由于所缘的差别,这些念确实是多种多样。那么,为何「道」用单数?因为道义为一。这四种念处,就道义而言,归为一体。正如所说:「道,以何义为道?以导向涅槃之义,以及被希求涅槃者所寻求之义。」这四者在后时,于身等所缘上成就其作用而走向涅槃;而且,从最初就被希求涅槃者所寻求,因此四者被称为一个「道」。如此,以「念」的语词关联,令说法具有连贯性,就如同「比丘们,我将为你们开示摧破魔军之道,你们要仔细听……比丘们,什么是摧破魔军之道?那就是七觉支」等(相应部)所说的那样。此处,「摧破魔军」与「七觉支」意义同一,只是文句有别。同样地,「一乘道」与「四念处」意义同一,只是文句有别。因此,由于道义为一而用单数,由于所缘差别、念有多种而用复数,应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ, kasmā ‘‘satipaṭṭhānā’’ti bahuvacanaṃ? Satibahuttā. Ārammaṇabhedena hi bahukā etā satiyo. Atha maggoti kasmā ekavacanaṃ? Maggaṭṭhena ekattā. Catassopi hi etā satiyo maggaṭṭhena ekattaṃ gacchanti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘maggoti kenaṭṭhena maggo? Nibbānagamanaṭṭhena, nibbānatthikehi magganīyaṭṭhena cā’’ti. Catassopi cetā aparabhāge kāyādīsu ārammaṇesu kiccaṃ sādhayamānā nibbānaṃ gacchanti. Ādito paṭṭhāya ca nibbānatthikehi maggīyanti, tasmā catassopi eko maggoti vuccanti . Evañca sati vacanānusandhinā sānusandhikāva desanā hoti, ‘‘mārasenappamaddanaṃ vo, bhikkhave, maggaṃ desessāmi, taṃ suṇātha…pe… katamo ca, bhikkhave, mārasenappamaddano maggo? Yadidaṃ sattabojjhaṅgā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.224) viya hi yathā mārasenappamaddanoti ca sattabojjhaṅgāti ca atthato ekaṃ, byañjanamevettha nānaṃ. Evaṃ ekāyanamaggoti ca cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti ca atthato ekaṃ, byañjanamevettha nānaṃ. Tasmā maggaṭṭhena ekattā ekavacanaṃ, ārammaṇabhedena satibahuttā bahuvacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
那么,为何世尊只说四念处,不多不少?为饶益所化有情的缘故。在爱行、见行、止行者、观行者中,依钝根与利根各分为两种所化有情:对于钝根爱行者,以粗显的身随观念处为清净道;对于利根爱行者,以微细的受随观念处为清净道。对于见行者,钝根者以不太分别的心随观念处为清净道;利根者以十分分别的法随观念处为清净道。对于止行者,钝根者以不难获得所缘的第一个念处为清净道;利根者因不执著于粗所缘,而以第二个念处为清净道。对于观行者,钝根者以不太分别的所缘——第三个念处为清净道;利根者以十分分别的所缘——第四个念处为清净道。因此,只说四个,不多不少。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana bhagavatā cattārova satipaṭṭhānā vuttā anūnā anadhikāti? Veneyyahitattā . Taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritasamathayānikavipassanāyānikesu hi mandatikkhavasena dvedhā dvedhā pavattesu veneyyesu mandassa taṇhācaritassa oḷārikaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa sukhumaṃ vedanānupassanaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Diṭṭhicaritassāpi mandassa nātippabhedagataṃ cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa atippabhedagataṃ dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Samathayānikassa ca mandassa akicchena adhigantabbanimittaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa oḷārikārammaṇe asaṇṭhahanato dutiyaṃ. Vipassanāyānikassapi mandassa nātippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ tatiyaṃ, tikkhassa atippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ catutthaṃ. Iti cattārova vuttā anūnā anadhikāti.
或者,是为了断除净、乐、常、我的颠倒。身本不净,而众生于此被净颠倒所迷惑,为了向他们显示此处的真实不净相以断除这种颠倒,所以首先宣说身念处。同样地,在那些被执为乐、常、我的受等诸法中,受实为苦,心为无常,诸法无我,而众生于此却被乐颠倒、常颠倒、我颠倒所迷惑。为了向他们显示这些法各自苦、无常、无我的真实相,以断除他们的种种颠倒,所以宣说其余三个念处。如此,为断除净、乐、常、我四种颠倒,须知佛只说四个念处,不多不少。显示巴利原文
Subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsapahānatthaṃ vā. Kāyo hi asubho, tattha ca subhavipallāsavipallatthā sattā, tesaṃ tattha asubhabhāvadassanena tassa vipallāsassa pahānatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Sukhaṃ niccaṃ attāti gahitesupi ca vedanādīsu vedanā dukkhā, cittaṃ aniccaṃ, dhammā anattā, tesu ca sukhaniccaattavipallāsavipallatthā sattā, tesaṃ tattha dukkhādibhāvadassanena tesaṃ vipallāsānaṃ pahānatthaṃ sesāni tīṇi vuttānīti evaṃ subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsapahānatthaṃ vā cattārova vuttā anūnā anadhikāti veditabbā.
而且,不仅是为了断除颠倒,实际上也是为了断除四瀑流、四轭、四漏、四缚、四取、四邪行,以及为了遍知四种食,所以佛只说四个念处,应如此理解。以上是论典中的义理方法。显示巴利原文
Na kevalañca vipallāsapahānatthameva, atha kho caturoghayogāsavaganthaupādānaagatipahānatthampi catubbidhāhārapariññatthañca cattārova vuttāti veditabbā. Ayaṃ tāva pakaraṇanayo.
然而,在注释书中,则依据所依(皈依之处)与归入一处的义理,说念处唯有一个,而根据所缘的不同才说有四个。正如一座拥有四座城门的城市:从东方来的人,拿着东方出产的货物,经由东门进入同一座城;从南方、西方、北方来的人,也拿着各自方向出产的货物,经由各自方向的城门进入同一座城。应当这样理解这个比喻:涅槃大城如同城市,八支圣道如同城门,身等方向则如同东等方向。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattāroti etadeva vuttaṃ. Yathā hi catudvāre nagare pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, dakkhiṇato pacchimato uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nagaraṃ viya hi nibbānamahānagaraṃ . Dvāraṃ viya aṭṭhaṅgiko lokuttaramaggo. Pācīnadisādayo viya kāyādayo.
正如从东方来的人,带着东方出产的货物,由东门进入同一座城;同样,以身为门径而修习者,以十四种方式修习身随观念处,依身随观修习之力所引生的圣道,共入同一个涅槃。显示巴利原文
Yathā pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ kāyānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā kāyānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti.
正如从南方来的人,带着南方出产的货物,由南门进入同一座城;同样,以受为门径而修习者,以九种方式修习受随观念处,依受随观修习之力所引生的圣道,共入同一个涅槃。显示巴利原文
Yathā dakkhiṇato āgacchantā dakkhiṇadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ vedanānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā vedanānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti.
正如从西方来的人,带着西方出产的货物,由西门进入同一座城;同样,以心为门径而修习者,以十六种方式修习心随观念处,依心随观修习之力所引生的圣道,共入同一个涅槃。显示巴利原文
Yathā pacchimato āgacchantā pacchimadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pacchimadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ cittānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā cittānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti.
犹如从北方来的人,带着北方所产的货物,便从北城门入城;同样,以法随观为入门者,以五种方式修习法随观,由法随观修习的力量所成就的圣道,同归于唯一的涅槃。显示巴利原文
Yathā uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ dhammānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā dhammānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti.
由此,就皈依处及同归一处这两重意义而言,当知念处只是一;从所缘的角度说,则立为四。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattārova vuttāti veditabbā.
何等为四?这是为了引发解说而作的提问。于此,即于此教法中。比丘们,这是对纳受法者的称呼。比丘,这是对实践圆满者的指称。虽然其他天、人众也同样实践,但由于实践的殊胜,也为了彰显比丘的身份,世尊才说‘比丘们’。因为在受持世尊教法者中,比丘最为殊胜,堪为领受一切种类教法的法器,以此殊胜故,称‘比丘们’。且提到比丘时,其余人等即被包含在内,正如在国王出行等场合,以国王总摄随行大众一般。再者,凡实践此道者即名为比丘,为了显示实践即是比丘身份,故说‘比丘们’。因为无论是天还是人,只要是实践者,确实都可得‘比丘’之名。如所说:‘如是名为比丘。’显示巴利原文
Katamecattāroti kathetukamyatā pucchā. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Bhikkhaveti dhammapaṭiggāhakapuggalālapanametaṃ. Bhikkhūti paṭipattisampādakapuggalanidassanametaṃ. Aññepi ca devamanussā paṭipattiṃ sampādentiyeva, seṭṭhattā pana paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanato ca, ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti āha. Bhagavato hi anusāsaniṃ sampaṭicchantesu bhikkhu seṭṭho, sabbappakārāya anusāsaniyā bhājanabhāvato, tasmā seṭṭhattā ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti āha. Tasmiṃ gahite pana sesā gahitāva honti rājagamanādīsu rājaggahaṇena sesaparisā viya. Yo ca imaṃ paṭipattiṃ paṭipajjati, so bhikkhu nāma hotīti paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanatopi ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti āha . Paṭipannako hi devo vā hotu manusso vā, ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchatiyeva. Yathāha –
纵使身饰庄严,若能平等而行,
寂静、调伏、自制、修习梵行,
于一切众生,放下刀杖,
他就是婆罗门,他就是沙门,他就是比丘。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Alaṅkato cepi samaṃ careyya, Santo danto niyato brahmacārī; Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, So brāhmaṇo so samaṇo sa bhikkhū’’ti. (dha. pa. 142);
“身”指色身。在此处,色身是以肢体与诸器官,以及头发等法的集合义,而被理解为“身”的,犹如“象身”、“车乘”等。而且,如同以集合为义,它也是以“可厌之物的生处”为义。对于极端可厌、极其鄙秽之物,此身即是其“生处”。所谓“生处”,是指产生之处。此处可这样解释词义:它们从此生起,故名为“生处”。什么从此生起呢?即是那些可厌的毛发等。因此,可厌之物的生处,便称为“身”。“身随观者”的意思是:具有随观身的习惯者,或正在随观身的人。显示巴利原文
Kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca dhammānaṃ samūhaṭṭhena hatthikāyarathakāyādayo viya kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho, āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo. Kāyānupassīti kāyamanupassanasīlo, kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno.
虽已说了“于身”,却又再次取“身”而说“身随观者”,应当了知,这是为了显示不混杂的确定、破除密集等意义。由此,他便不是在身体中作受随观者,也不是心随观者或法随观者,而恰恰只是身随观者。通过显示在名为“身”的这个事物上,唯有身随观的行相,便显现了不混杂的确定。同样地,他不是在身体中观察某个离开了肢体部分的单一事物,也不是观察离开了头发、体毛等的所谓“女人”、“男人”。再者,对于这个由头发、体毛等构成,由大种及所造色集合而成的身体,他不是观察某个离开了大种及所造色的单一事物,而是如同观察车辆部件的人一般,观察肢体的集合;如同观察城市组成部分的人一般,观察头发、体毛等的集合;又如剥离芭蕉树干的叶鞘,或拆解空拳套一样,他只是大种及所造色集合的观察者。通过以种种方式,显示这个唯以集合形态而被称为“身”的事物,也就显现了破除密集。因为在此,除了上面所说的集合之外,完全看不到任何所谓“身”、或“女人”、或“男人”或其他任何事物的存在。众生只是在这些法的集合上,以种种方式生起了错误的执取。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāye’’ti ca vatvāpi puna ‘‘kāyānupassī’’ti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī vā, cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho kāyānupassīyevāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī. Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo , tatthapi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibbhujanako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassīyevāti nānappakārato samūhavaseneva kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati , yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
他所见的并非真实所见,真实所见他却不曾看见;
不见真实的愚人被束缚,被束缚者不得解脱。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti. –
文中说“为了显示破除密集等”,通过这个“等”字,还应当知道这层意思:此人仅于一身之中作身随观,而非随观其他诸法。这是什么意思呢?如同在没有水的阳焰中,有人将其随观为水,成了水随观者;但于此身则不然——此身唯是无常、苦、无我、不净,而他并不随观其为常、乐、我、净,只是将此身随观为无常、苦、无我、不净等特征之聚合。或者,也可以这样理解:在别处(如经中所说)“诸比丘,于此教法中,比丘前往林野……具念地吸气……”等,以入出息为始、以粉末状骨为终的身体,以及在《无碍解》中所说:“于此教法中,有人随观地界为无常,随观水界、火界、风界、发聚、毛聚、皮聚、肉聚、血聚、筋聚、骨聚、髓聚为无常”的身体。对于这一切身体,都只是在此身上作观察。因此,“于身作身随观”的意义也应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena cettha ayampi attho veditabbo – ayañhi ekasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattaasubhabhūteyeva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhaattasubhabhāvānupassī, atha kho kāyānupassī aniccadukkhānattaasubhākārasamūhānupassīyevāti. Atha vā yvāyaṃ parato ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā…pe… so satova assasatī’’tiādinā nayena assāsapassāsādicuṇṇikajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca ‘‘idhekacco pathavikāyaṃ aniccato anupassati āpokāyaṃ tejokāyaṃ vāyokāyaṃ kesakāyaṃ lomakāyaṃ chavikāyaṃ cammakāyaṃ maṃsakāyaṃ ruhirakāyaṃ nahārukāyaṃ aṭṭhikāyaṃ aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.35) kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者,由于不随观任何可被执取为“我”或“我所”的身体,而只是随观头发、体毛等种种法的集合,因此应这样理解其义:所谓“身随观者”,即是对那个由头发等法集合所构成的身体的随观。再者,依据《无碍解》所说:“于此身中,随观为无常,而非随观为常”等方式,因为是对那个由无常等特征集合的身体进行随观,所以也应以此看待“于身作身随观”的意义。显示巴利原文
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā evaṃ gahetabbassa yassa kassaci ananupassanato tassa tasseva pana kesālomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhātakāyānupassīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Apica ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā nayena paṭisambhidāyaṃ āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādino ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassānupassanatopi ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
确实如此,这位修习于身作身随观之道的比丘,依凭无常随观等七种随观之力,对此身随观为无常,而非随观为常;随观为苦,而非随观为乐;随观为无我,而非随观为我;生起厌离,而非欢喜;离染,而非染着;令其灭尽,而非令其集起;彻底舍离,而非执取。应知,当他如此随观无常时,便舍弃了常想;随观苦时,便舍弃了乐想;随观无我时,便舍弃了我想;厌离时,便舍弃了欢喜;离染时,便舍弃了贪染;令灭尽时,便舍弃了集起;彻底舍离时,便舍弃了执取。显示巴利原文
Tathā hi ayaṃ kāye kāyānupassanāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno bhikkhu imaṃ kāyaṃ aniccānupassanādīnaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena aniccato anupassati, no niccato. Dukkhato anupassati, no sukhato. Anattato anupassati, no attato. Nibbindati, no nandati. Virajjati, no rajjati. Nirodheti, no samudeti. Paṭinissajjati, no ādiyati. So taṃ aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati, dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati, anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati, nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati, virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati, nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati, paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatīti veditabbo.
“住”即活动、安住。“具足活力者”:因能烧尽三界烦恼,故称“活力”,此为精进之名;拥有此活力者,即称“具足活力者”。“正知者”:即具备名为正知的智慧者。“具念者”:即具备能把握身体的念者。然而,因为必须以念执取所缘后,再以慧作观察,若离开念,则无观察可言。所以世尊说:“比丘们,我说,念在任何时候都是必要的。”(《相应部》5.234)因此,仅凭“于身作身随观而住”一句,便已说明了身随观念处这一修行业处。或者,应这样理解:没有活力的人内心畏缩,造成障碍;没有正知的人,在执取正确方法、避开不正确方法时,陷入迷惑;失去正念的人,在舍离正确方法、执取不正确方法时,毫无能力。由此,他的业处便无法成就。正是为了显示能令此业处成就的那些法,才宣说了“具足活力者、正知者、具念者”等语。显示巴利原文
Viharatīti iriyati. Ātāpīti tīsu bhavesu kilese ātāpetīti ātāpo, vīriyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ātāpo assa atthīti ātāpī. Sampajānoti sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati, na hi sativirahitassa anupassanā nāma atthi. Tenevāha ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Tasmā ettha ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti ettāvatā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānakammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yasmā anātāpino antosaṅkhepo antarāyakaro hoti, asampajāno upāyapariggahe anupāyaparivajjane ca sammuyhati, muṭṭhassati upāyāpariccāge anupāyāpariggahe ca asamattho hoti, tenassa taṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati, tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati. Tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī sampajāno satimāti idaṃ vutta’’nti veditabbaṃ.
如此,展示了身随观念处的相应要素之后,现在为了显示断除要素,而说「调伏世间的贪忧」。此处,「调伏」的意思是:通过彼分断除或镇伏断除而调伏。「世间」:即指那个身体。由于身体具有毁坏、变灭的含义,所以在此将「世间」理解为身体。然而,贪忧并非仅在身体方面被断除,在感受等方面也同样被断除,因此在《分别论》(《分别》362)中说:「五取蕴即是世间。」或者说,这是依据被称为「世间」的诸法的义理归属而说的。而我所说的「其中,什么是世间?即是此身,此即世间」,正是于此确立了这一含义:应当这样来理解其中的关联——「对于那个世间,调伏贪忧」。再者,应当知道:此处以「贪欲」一词含摄了欲贪,以「忧」一词含摄了嗔恚,由此彰显了这两种属于盖的强有力之法,从而说明了诸盖的断除。显示巴利原文
Iti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ sampayogaṅgañcassa dassetvā idāni pahānaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti vuttaṃ. Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi tasmiṃyeva kāye. Kāyo hi idha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti adhippeto. Yasmā panassa na kāyamatteyeva abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīyati, vedanādīsupi pahīyatiyeva, tasmā ‘‘pañcapi upādānakkhandhā loko’’ti vibhaṅge (vibha. 362) vuttaṃ. Lokasaṅkhātattā vā tesaṃ dhammānaṃ atthuddhāranayenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panāha ‘‘tattha katamo loko? Sveva kāyo loko’’ti. Ayamevettha attho, tasmiṃ loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ vineyyāti evaṃ sambandho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā panettha abhijjhāgahaṇena kāmacchando , domanassaggahaṇena byāpādo saṅgahaṃ gacchati, tasmā nīvaraṇapariyāpannabalavadhammadvayadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
在此尤其,通过调伏贪欲,说明了断除以身体圆满为根源的随顺;通过调伏忧,说明了断除以身体衰败为根源的对立。通过调伏贪欲,说明了断除对身体的喜爱;通过调伏忧,说明了断除对身体修习的不喜爱。通过调伏贪欲,说明了断除将不真实的净、乐等相强加于身体;通过调伏忧,说明了断除对身体上真实存在的不净、苦等相的排斥。由此,彰显了瑜伽行者的瑜伽威力和瑜伽堪能性。因为,这即是瑜伽威力:脱离随顺与对立、忍受不喜爱与喜爱、远离强加不实相和排斥真实相。他因脱离随顺与对立、能忍不喜爱与喜爱、不强加不实相、不排斥真实相,而成为瑜伽堪能者。显示巴利原文
Visesena cettha abhijjhāvinayena kāyasampattimūlakassa anurodhassa, domanassavinayena pana kāyavipattimūlakassa virodhassa, abhijjhāvinayena ca kāye abhiratiyā, domanassavinayena kāyabhāvanāya anabhiratiyā, abhijjhāvinayena kāye abhūtānaṃ subhasukhabhāvādīnaṃ pakkhepassa, domanassavinayena ca kāye bhūtānaṃ asubhāsukhabhāvādīnaṃ apanayanassa ca pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena yogāvacarassa yogānubhāvo yogasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti. Yogānubhāvo hi esa, yadidaṃ anurodhavirodhavippamutto aratiratisaho abhūtapakkhepabhūtāpanayanavirahito ca hoti. Anurodhavirodhavippamutto cesa aratiratisaho abhūtaṃ apakkhipanto bhūtañca anapanento yogasamattho hotīti.
另一种方法是:在「于身,随观身」一句中,以「随观」说明了业处。在「安住」一句中,以所说的「安住」说明了业处行者对身体的护持。在「具足热忱者」等句中,应知:以「热忱」说明了正勤;以「念与正知」说明了一切处必要的业处,或业处的护持方法;或者,以「念」说明了依身随观而证得的止,以「正知」说明了观;以「调伏贪忧」说明了修习的成果。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti ettha anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viharatī’’ti ettha vuttavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Ātāpī’’tiādīsu ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena sabbatthikakammaṭṭhānaṃ, kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo vā, satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdhasamatho, sampajaññena vipassanā, abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanāphalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
又,《分别论》中说:「随观者」——于此,什么是随观?即智慧、了知……乃至……正见。这称为随观。以此随观,他得以具备、完全具备,到达、完全到达,生起并圆满成就,具足圆满。因此,称为「随观者」。显示巴利原文
Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘anupassī’’ti tattha katamā anupassanā? Yā paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi. Ayaṃ vuccati anupassanā. Imāya anupassanāya upeto hoti samupeto upāgato samupāgato upapanno sampanno samannāgato. Tena vuccati anupassīti.
「安住」:即行走、运转、守护、存续、活命、游行、居住。因此,称为「安住」。显示巴利原文
Viharatīti iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti carati viharati. Tena vuccati viharatīti.
「具足热忱者」——于此,什么是热忱?即一切属于心的精进策励、精进发动……乃至……正精进。这称为热忱。以此热忱,他得以具备……乃至……具足圆满。因此,称为「具足热忱者」。显示巴利原文
Ātāpīti tattha katamo ātāpo? Yo cetasiko vīriyārambho…pe… sammāvāyāmo. Ayaṃ vuccati ātāpo. Iminā ātāpena upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato. Tena vuccati ātāpīti.
“具足正知者”:此处,什么是正知?即智慧、了知……乃至……正见,这称为正知。他以此正知而具备……乃至……具足。因此,称为“具足正知者”。显示巴利原文
Sampajānoti tattha katamaṃ sampajaññaṃ? Yā paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi. Idaṃ vuccati sampajaññaṃ. Iminā sampajaññena upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato. Tena vuccati sampajānoti.
“具念者”:此处,什么是念?即念、随念……乃至……正念,这称为念。他以此念而具备……乃至……具足。因此,称为“具念者”。显示巴利原文
Satimāti tattha katamā sati? Yā sati anussati…pe… sammāsati. Ayaṃ vuccati sati. Imāya satiyā upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato. Tena vuccati satimāti.
“于世间调伏贪忧”:此处,什么是世间?这个身体就是世间,五取蕴也是世间,这称为世间。此处,什么是贪?凡是染着、贪染、随顺、随悦、欢喜、喜染、心的贪染,这称为贪。此处,什么是忧?凡是心的不适意、心的苦、由心触所生的不适意……乃至……苦受,这称为忧。如此,此贪与此忧在此世间中已被调伏、已彻底调伏,已寂静、已彻底寂静,已平息、已彻底平息,已灭尽、已彻底灭尽,已舍弃、已遣除,已干涸、已彻底干涸,已消灭殆尽。因此,称为“于世间调伏贪忧”。(《分别论》356)以上是这些词句的含义,应当如此理解它与这部义注的体系相符合之处。以上是身随观念处总说部分的释义。显示巴利原文
Vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti tattha katamo loko? Sveva kāyo loko, pañcapi upādānakkhandhā loko. Ayaṃ vuccati loko. Tattha katamā abhijjhā? Yo rāgo sārāgo anunayo anurodho nandī nandīrāgo cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati abhijjhā. Tattha katamaṃ domanassaṃ? Yaṃ cetasikaṃ asātaṃ, cetasikaṃ dukkhaṃ, cetosamphassajaṃ asātaṃ…pe… dukkhā vedanā. Idaṃ vuccati domanassaṃ. Iti ayañca abhijjhā idañca domanassaṃ imamhi loke vinītā honti paṭivinītā santā vūpasantā samitā vūpasamitā atthaṅgatā abbhatthaṅgatā appitā byappitā sositā visositā byantīkatā, tena vuccati vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti (vibha. 356) evametesaṃ padānamattho vutto. Tena saha ayaṃ aṭṭhakathānayo yathā saṃsandati, evaṃ veditabbo. Ayaṃ tāva kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānuddesassa atthavaṇṇanā.
在“于受……于心……于法,随观法而住……乃至……于世间调伏贪忧”中,关于“随观受者”等再次提到受等,其用意应依照身随观中所述的方法来理解。在“于受随观受”、“于心随观心”、“于法随观法”之中,此处所说的“受”,即指三种受,且唯是世间性的;“心”亦是世间性的;“法”亦同此理。它们的具体区分,将在广解部分得到明确。然在此处仅应了知:正因依循观受之法而随观,故说此随观者为“于受随观受”。此义理亦适用于心与法。那么,应如何随观受呢?首先,当观乐受为苦,观苦受为箭,观不苦不乐受为无常。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Vedanāsu… citte… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati…pe… vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti ettha pana vedanānupassīti evamādīsu vedanādīnaṃ puna vacane payojanaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī, citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassīti ettha pana vedanāti tisso vedanā, tā ca lokiyā eva. Cittampi lokiyaṃ, tathā dhammā. Tesaṃ vibhāgo niddesavāre pākaṭo bhavissati. Kevalaṃ panidha yathā vedanā anupassitabbā, tathā anupassanto vedanāsu vedanānupassīti veditabbo. Esa nayo cittadhammesupi. Kathañca vedanā anupassitabbāti? Sukhā tāva vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā sallato, adukkhamasukhā aniccato. Yathāha –
他见乐为苦,见苦如利箭,
那寂静的不苦不乐受,他见其为无常。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, adakkhi naṃ aniccato; Sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu, upasanto carissatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253);
凡所有感受,皆应视为苦。诚然,世尊曾如是说:“凡有所受,我说悉皆为苦。”(《相应部》4.259)又应从乐与苦的角度随观。正如世尊所说:“乐受是安住时的乐、变易时的苦”(《中部》1.464)等,皆应广说。再者,亦可依无常等七种随观而作观。其余的内容,在广解中自会明了。于法与心:首先,“心”应依所缘、增上、俱生、依处、业、果、作用等种种差别,依无常等七种随观,并依广解中所说有贪等种种分类而随观。“法”则应依自相与共相、空法、无常等七种随观,并依广解中所说已寂静、未寂静等种种分类而随观。其余的同前所说。在此,对于一个已经断除以身为范围的世间贪忧之人来说,他于受等世间中的贪忧,实际上亦已断除。然而,这是通过不同补特伽罗的差别,以及依不同心识刹那的念处修习方法,于一切处皆如此说。或者,由于在某处断除者,于余处亦得断除,因此,为了显示他于彼处的断除,也可了知。显示巴利原文
Sabbā eva cetā dukkhātipi anupassitabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃkiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259). Sukhadukkhatopi ca anupassitabbā. Yathāha ‘‘sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.464) sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Apica aniccādisattānupassanāvasenapi anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ niddesavāreyeva pākaṭaṃ bhavissati. Cittadhammesupi cittaṃ tāva ārammaṇādhipatisahajātabhūmikammavipākakiriyādinānattabhedānaṃ aniccādisattānupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasarāgādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbaṃ. Dhammā salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānaṃ suññatadhammassa aniccādisattānupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasantāsantādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kāmañcettha yassa kāyasaṅkhāte loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīnaṃ, tassa vedanādilokesupi taṃ pahīnameva. Nānāpuggalavasena pana nānācittakkhaṇikasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena ca sabbattha vuttaṃ. Yato vā ekattha pahīnaṃ sesesupi pahīnaṃ hoti. Tenevassa tattha pahānadassanatthampi evaṃ vuttanti veditabbanti.
身随观·入出息节释义显示巴利原文
Kāyānupassanāānāpānapabbavaṇṇanā
107 譬如一位善巧的竹编匠人,要制作粗席、细席、竹篮、竹箱、竹盒等用具,便取来一根大竹,劈作四片,再拿起每一截竹片,剖开后制成种种器具。同样地,世尊为了令众生通过“念处”的教导,证得种种殊胜的差别成就,便将单一的正念,依“诸比丘,有四念处。何等为四?诸比丘,于此,比丘于身随观身而住……”的义理,从所缘的角度分为四种。然后,再取一一念处,为作分别,以“诸比丘,云何……”的方式,开始宣说广解的部分。显示巴利原文
107. Idāni seyyathāpi nāma cheko vilīvakārako thūlakilañjasaṇhakilañjacaṅkoṭakapeḷāpuṭādīni upakaraṇāni kattukāmo ekaṃ mahāveṇuṃ labhitvā catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ veṇukhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā phāletvā taṃ taṃ upakaraṇaṃ kareyya, evameva bhagavā satipaṭṭhānadesanāya sattānaṃ anekappakāravisesādhigamaṃ kattukāmo ekameva sammāsatiṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’tiādinā nayena ārammaṇavasena catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vibhajanto ‘‘kathañca bhikkhave’’tiādinā nayena niddesavāraṃ vattumāraddho.
此处,“云何”等提问,是为了详细展开说明而提出的。其略义为:“诸比丘,比丘以何种方式,于身随观身而安住?”此理适用于所有提问。而“于此,诸比丘,比丘”意思是:诸位比丘,即是在此教法中的比丘。这里的“于此”一词,意在指明:能成就一切种类身随观的人,其依止处唯为此教法,同时也遮止了其他教法有此种成就的可能。世尊确曾说过:“诸位比丘!唯在此处,才有沙门……乃至……其他沙门所宣说的种种,皆为虚妄。”(《中部》1.139)因此说:“在这教法中的比丘。”显示巴利原文
Tattha kathañcātiādi vitthāretukamyatā pucchā. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – bhikkhave, kena ca pakārena bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharatīti? Esa nayo sabbapucchāvāresu. Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhūti, bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhettha idha-saddo sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139). Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
“到阿兰若……乃至……到空寂之处”这句话,是为了说明应选择适合修习念处的坐卧之处。因为这位比丘的心,长久以来在色等所缘上散乱流荡,不肯进入业处的轨道,犹如被桀骜不驯的牛所拉的车,只往邪路上奔驰。譬如,有人想要驯服一头饮尽母乳而桀骜不驯的牛犊,便将它从母牛身边带走,在空旷处竖一根大柱,用绳索把它拴在柱上。那头牛犊尽管四处冲撞挣扎,也无法逃脱,只能趋近或趴伏在柱旁。同样地,比丘想要调伏那颗长久以来在色等所缘上滋养而成的桀骜不驯之心,就应将心从色等所缘移开,带入阿兰若、或树下、或空寂之处,在那里以念绳将其牢牢系缚于念处所缘之柱上。这样,那心即使四处冲撞,因不再获得它先前所习惯的外境,就无法挣断念绳而逃逸,只能通过近行与安止的方式,趋近并安住于同一所缘。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Araññagato vā…pe… suññāgāragato vā’’ti idamassa satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpanaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu anuvisaṭaṃ cittaṃ kammaṭṭhānavīthiṃ otarituṃ na icchati, kūṭagoṇayuttaratho viya uppathameva dhāvati, tasmā seyyathāpi nāma gopo kūṭadhenuyā sabbaṃ khīraṃ pivitvā vaḍḍhitaṃ kūṭavacchaṃ dametukāmo dhenuto apanetvā ekamante mahantaṃ thambhaṃ nikhaṇitvā tattha yottena bandheyya. Athassa so vaccho ito cito ca vipphanditvā palāyituṃ asakkonto tameva thambhaṃ upanisīdeyya vā upanipajjeyya vā, evameva imināpi bhikkhunā dīgharattaṃ rūpārammaṇādirasapānavaḍḍhitaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ dametukāmena rūpādiārammaṇato apanetvā araññaṃ vā rukkhamūlaṃ vā suññāgāraṃ vā pavesetvā tattha satipaṭṭhānārammaṇatthambhe satiyottena bandhitabbaṃ. Evamassa taṃ cittaṃ ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇaṃ alabhamānaṃ satiyottaṃ chinditvā palāyituṃ asakkontaṃ tamevārammaṇaṃ upacārappanāvasena upanisīdati ceva upanipajjati ca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
正如有人为驯服牛犊,把它拴在柱子上;
同样应当将自己的心,牢固地系缚于念的所缘。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ damaṃ naro idha; Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti.
这样,那样的坐卧处便与修习相应。因此,前面这句话是在阐明:应受持适合修习念处的坐卧处。显示巴利原文
Evamassa taṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanānurūpaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idamassa satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpana’’nti.
再者,因为入出息念这个业处,是身随观的顶峰,是一切诸佛、独觉佛及诸声闻弟子证得殊胜成就与现法乐住的基础,倘若不舍离夹杂女人、男人、象、马等音声的村落边际,便很难成就,因为音声是禅那的刺。而在没有村落的阿兰若中,适当的瑜伽行者便容易把握此业处,先成就入出息第四禅,再以此禅那为基,观照诸行,最后证得最上果——阿拉汉果。所以,世尊为了给这样的修行者指出合适的坐卧处,才说了“前往阿兰若……”等语。显示巴利原文
Apica yasmā idaṃ kāyānupassanāya muddhabhūtaṃ sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ itthipurisahatthiassādisaddasamākulaṃ gāmantaṃ apariccajitvā na sukaraṃ sampādetuṃ, saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassa. Agāmake pana araññe sukaraṃ yogāvacarena idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Tasmāssa anurūpasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
世尊正如一位地相师。譬如地相师观察建城之地,仔细审视后便指示:‘在此建城。’等到城市顺利建成,他便从王室获得大恭敬。同样,世尊审视适合瑜伽行者的坐卧处后,便指示:‘应在此精勤业处。’后来,当那位瑜伽师在指示之处精进修习,次第证得阿拉汉果时,世尊便获得大恭敬,被人赞叹:‘彼世尊,确实是正自觉者!’显示巴利原文
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya hi bhagavā. So yathā vatthuvijjācariyo nagarabhūmiṃ passitvā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti upadisati, sotthinā ca nagare niṭṭhite rājakulato mahāsakkāraṃ labhati, evameva yogāvacarassa anurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabba’’nti upadisati. Tato tattha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjantena yoginā anukkamena arahatte patte ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ labhati.
这位比丘则被称为‘如豹者’。正如大豹王在森林中,依凭草丛、林薮或山岩潜伏,捕捉野牛、羚羊、野猪等野兽;同样,这位在阿兰若等处精勤修习业处的比丘,便能依于次第,证得四道与四圣果。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu dīpisadisoti vuccati. Yathā hi mahādīpirājā araññe tiṇagahanaṃ vā vanagahanaṃ vā pabbatagahanaṃ vā nissāya nilīyitvā vanamahiṃsagokaṇṇasūkarādayo mige gaṇhāti, evameva ayaṃ araññādīsu kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjanto bhikkhu yathākkamena cattāro magge ceva cattāri ariyaphalāni ca gaṇhāti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
犹如名为豹的野兽,潜伏捕猎群兽;
同样地,这位佛陀之子,精勤修习,具足观照,
进入阿兰若后,证得最上之果。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhatī mige; Tathevāyaṃ buddhaputto, yuttayogo vipassako; Araññaṃ pavisitvāna, gaṇhāti phalamuttama’’nti.
为了指示适合他精勤修习的阿兰若坐卧处,世尊说了“前往阿兰若”等语。此后,关于此安那般那念部分所应解说的内容,在《清净道论》中已有阐述。显示巴利原文
Tenassa parakkamajavayoggabhūmiṃ araññasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha. Ito paraṃ imasmiṃ tāva ānāpānapabbe yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ visuddhimagge vuttameva.
然而,对于依所说‘出息长时,了知“我出息长”……学习“我令身行宁静而将出息”’等语而修习入出息的人来说,在入出息相上会生起四种禅那。他从禅那出定后,或把握入出息,或把握禅支。其中,以入出息为业处者这样把握色:‘这些入出息依止什么?依止依处。依处名为所生身,所生身即是四大及所造色。’然后把握那依止它的、以触为第五法的名法。如此把握名色之后,寻求其缘,见到以无明等为起始的缘起,便断除疑惑:‘这仅仅是缘与缘生法而已,并没有其他有情或补特伽罗。’他将有因有缘的名色赋予三相,增长观,渐次证得阿拉汉果。这是一位比丘导向阿拉汉果的门径。显示巴利原文
Tassa pana imesaṃ ‘‘dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti…pe… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ vasena sikkhato assāsapassāsanimitte cattāri jhānāni uppajjanti. So jhānā vuṭṭhahitvā assāsapassāse vā pariggaṇhāti jhānaṅgāni vā. Tattha assāsapassāsakammiko ‘‘ime assāsapassāsā kiṃ nissitā, vatthuṃ nissitā, vatthu nāma karajakāyo, karajakāyo nāma cattāri mahābhūtāni upādārūpañcā’’ti evaṃ rūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, tato tadārammaṇe phassapañcamake nāmanti evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ pariggahetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesanto avijjādipaṭiccasamuppādaṃ disvā ‘‘paccayapaccayuppannadhammamattamevetaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthī’’ti vitiṇṇakaṅkho sappaccayanāmarūpe tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento anukkamena arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhaṃ.
以禅那为业处者也这样思择:‘这些禅支依止什么?依止依处。依处名为所生身,因此禅支是名,所生身是色。’如此确定名色之后,寻求其缘,见到以无明等为缘的行相,便断除疑惑:‘这仅仅是缘与缘生法而已,并没有其他有情或补特伽罗。’他将有因有缘的名色赋予三相,增长观,渐次证得阿拉汉果。这是一位比丘导向阿拉汉果的门径。显示巴利原文
Jhānakammikopi ‘‘imāni jhānaṅgāni kiṃ nissitāni, vatthuṃ nissitāni. Vatthu nāma karajakāyoti jhānaṅgāni nāmaṃ, karajakāyo rūpa’’nti nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesanto avijjādipaccayākāraṃ disvā ‘‘paccayapaccayuppannadhammamattamevetaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthī’’ti vitiṇṇakaṅkho sappaccayanāmarūpe tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento anukkamena arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, idaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhaṃ.
如是,‘内’是指在自身的入出息身上,随观身而住。‘外’是指在他人的入出息身上。‘内外’是指有时在自身、有时在他人的入出息身上。这是说明业处纯熟之后,交替专注的阶段。然而在一个时刻,并不能同时获得这两者。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā assāsapassāsakāye kāyānupassī viharati. Bahiddhā vāti parassa vā assāsapassāsakāye. Ajjhattabahiddhā vāti kālena attano, kālena parassa assāsapassāsakāye. Etenassa paguṇakammaṭṭhānaṃ aṭṭhapetvā aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakālo kathito. Ekasmiṃ kāle panidaṃ ubhayaṃ na labbhati.
“随观集法”指:犹如依于铁匠的风箱、风管与相应的努力,风才来回流动;同样,依于比丘的业生身、鼻孔与心,入出息身来回流动。身等诸法是集起之法,如此观察,便称为“于身随观集法而住”。“随观灭法”指:犹如风箱被移走、风管破裂、相应的努力消失时,风便不再流动;同样,当身体坏灭、鼻孔破损、心识灭尽时,所谓的入出息身便不再转起。因此,身等息灭故入出息息灭。如此观察,便称为“于身随观灭法而住”。“随观集灭法”指:或时观察其集起,或时观察其息灭。他了知“有身”:唯此身存在,其中无有情、无补特伽罗、无女人、无男人、无我、无我所,无“我”、无“我的”,不存在任何谁,也不属于任何人。如此,念已现前。显示巴利原文
Samudayadhammānupassī vāti yathā nāma kammārabhastañca gaggaranāḷiñca tajjañca vāyāmaṃ paṭicca vāto aparāparaṃ sañcarati, evaṃ bhikkhuno karajakāyañca nāsāpuṭañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsakāyo aparāparaṃ sañcarati. Kāyādayo dhammā samudayadhammā, te passanto ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati. Vayadhammānupassī vāti yathā bhastāya apanītāya gaggaranāḷiyā bhinnāya tajje ca vāyāme asati so vāto nappavattati , evameva kāye bhinne nāsāpuṭe viddhaste citte ca niruddhe assāsapassāsakāyo nāma nappavattatīti kāyādinirodhā assāsapassāsanirodhoti evaṃ passanto ‘‘vayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati. Samudayavayadhammānupassī vāti kālena samudayaṃ, kālena vayaṃ anupassanto. Atthi kāyoti vā panassāti kāyova atthi, na satto, na puggalo, na itthī, na puriso, na attā, na attaniyaṃ, nāhaṃ, na mama, na koci, na kassacīti evamassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti.
“仅限”(yāvadeva)是对其用途的界定与确定。意思是:那现前的念并非为了别的,而仅仅是为了持续增进智慧与正念,使智臻于极致、念臻于极致,即为了增长念与正知。“他住于无所依”指他既不依止渴爱的依著,也不依止邪见的依著而安住。“于世间不执取任何事物”指对于世间中的任何色乃至识,都不执取为“这是我的我”、“我的”或“我所”。“如此亦”中的“亦”字,起连接并总括前述意义的作用。世尊即以此句结束了对安那般那念部分的教导,并予以开示。显示巴利原文
Yāvadevāti payojanaparicchedavavatthāpanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti, sā na aññatthāya. Atha kho yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya aparāparaṃ uttaruttari ñāṇapamāṇatthāya ceva satipamāṇatthāya ca, satisampajaññānaṃ vuḍḍhatthāyāti attho. Anissito ca viharatīti taṇhānissayadiṭṭhinissayānaṃ vasena anissito viharati. Na ca kiñci loke upādiyatīti lokasmiṃ kiñci rūpaṃ vā…pe… viññāṇaṃ vā ‘‘ayaṃ me attā vā attaniyaṃ vā’’ti na gaṇhāti. Evampīti upariatthaṃ upādāya sampiṇḍanattho pikāro. Iminā pana padena bhagavā ānāpānapabbadesanaṃ niyyātetvā dasseti.
其中,能把握入出息的念是苦谛;引生它的先前渴爱是集谛;二者不再转起的状态是灭谛;遍知苦、断除集、以灭为所缘的圣道是道谛。如此依四谛精勤而证得寂灭,这是一位专注入出息念的比丘直达阿拉汉果的门径。显示巴利原文
Tattha assāsapassāsapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhārammaṇo ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idamekassa assāsapassāsavasena abhiniviṭṭhassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
威仪部分的解释显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathapabbavaṇṇanā
108 如此,以入出息解说了身随观之后,现在为以威仪来解说,而说“再者”等。其中,虽然狗、豺狼等动物在行走时也知道“我们在行走”,但此处所指并非这种了知。因为这类了知不能舍弃对“有情”的执取,不能去除“我”想,既非业处,亦非念处的修习。而这位比丘的了知,则能舍弃对“有情”的执取,去除“我”想,其本身既是业处,也是念处的修习。这正是针对“谁在行走?行走属于谁?以什么原因而行走?”这样的正知而说的。在站立等其他威仪中,道理也是如此。显示巴利原文
108. Evaṃ assāsapassāsavasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni iriyāpathavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha kāmaṃ soṇasiṅgālādayopi gacchantā ‘‘gacchāmā’’ti jānanti. Na panetaṃ evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evarūpañhi jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ na pajahati , attasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti , kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hoti. Imassa pana bhikkhuno jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ pajahati, attasaññaṃ ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānañceva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā ca hoti. Idañhi ‘‘ko gacchati, kassa gamanaṃ, kiṃ kāraṇā gacchatī’’ti evaṃ sampajānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ṭhānādīsupi eseva nayo.
其中,“谁在行走?”——并没有任何有情或补特伽罗在行走。“行走属于谁?”——并非任何有情或补特伽罗的行走。“以什么原因而行走?”——由于心所造作风界的扩散而行走。因此,他这样了知:当“我行走”的心生起时,此心产生风,风引生身表,由心所造作风界的推动,整个身体向前移动,这就称为“行走”。在站立等其他动作中,道理也相同。显示巴利原文
Tattha ko gacchatīti na koci satto vā puggalo vā gacchati. Kassa gamananti na kassaci sattassa vā puggalassa vā gamanaṃ. Kiṃ kāraṇā gacchatīti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena gacchati. Tasmā esa evaṃ pajānāti ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena sakalakāyassa purato abhinīhāro gamananti vuccati. Ṭhānādīsupi eseva nayo.
同样地,当“我站立”的心生起时,此心产生风,风引生身表,由心所造作风界的推动,整个身体从脚底向上直立的状态,称为“站立”。当“我坐着”的心生起时,此心产生风,风引生身表,由心所造作风界的推动,下身屈曲、上身直立的状态,称为“坐”。当“我躺下”的心生起时,此心产生风,风引生身表,由心所造作风界的推动,整个身体横向舒展的状态,称为“卧”。显示巴利原文
Tatrāpi hi ‘‘tiṭṭhāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena sakalakāyassa koṭito paṭṭhāya ussitabhāvo ṭhānanti vuccati. ‘‘Nisīdāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena heṭṭhimakāyassa samiñjanaṃ uparimakāyassa ussitabhāvo nisajjāti vuccati. ‘‘Sayāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena sakalasarīrassa tiriyato pasāraṇaṃ sayananti vuccatīti.
对此了知者而言,会产生这样的说法:“有情行走,有情站立。”然而,实际上并没有任何有情在行走或站立。就如人们说“车辆行走,车辆站立”,但并没有任何可以被称作“车辆”的东西在行走或站立。那只是将四头牛套上,由善巧的御者驱赶时,世俗上才称为“车辆行走,车辆站立”,这纯粹是一种习惯的说法。同样地,就不知本质而言,身体如车辆,心生的风界如牛,心如御者。当“我行走”“我站立”的心生起时,风界便生起并造作表色;由于心所造的风界扩散,便现起行走等种种动作。因此,仅仅是依于世俗的习惯说法,才说“有情行走,有情站立,我行走,我站立”。所以(世尊)这样说:显示巴利原文
Tassa evaṃ pajānato evaṃ hoti ‘‘satto gacchati satto tiṭṭhatī’’ti vuccati. Atthi pana koci satto gacchanto vā ṭhito vā natthi. Yathā pana ‘‘sakaṭaṃ gacchati sakaṭaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vuccati, na ca kiñci sakaṭaṃ nāma gacchantaṃ vā tiṭṭhantaṃ vā atthi. Cattāro pana goṇe yojetvā chekamhi sārathimhi pājente ‘‘sakaṭaṃ gacchati sakaṭaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vohāramattameva hoti, evameva ajānanaṭṭhena sakaṭaṃ viya kāyo. Goṇā viya cittajavātā. Sārathi viya cittaṃ. Gacchāmi tiṭṭhāmīti citte uppanne vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena gamanādīni pavattanti. Tato ‘‘satto gacchati, satto tiṭṭhati, ahaṃ gacchāmi, ahaṃ tiṭṭhāmī’’ti vohāramattaṃ hotīti. Tenāha –
船依风力而行,箭依弦力而行;
同样,此身行走,正是由风推动而行。
正如木偶纯依丝线牵引而运作,此身躯机关也依心之线
而被牵引发动,能行走、站立、坐下。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nāvā mālutavegena, jiyāvegena tejanaṃ; Yathā yāti tathā kāyo, yāti vātāhato ayaṃ. Yantaṃ suttavaseneva, cittasuttavasenidaṃ; Payuttaṃ kāyayantampi, yāti ṭhāti nisīdati. Ko nāma ettha so satto, yo vinā hetupaccaye; Attano ānubhāvena, tiṭṭhe vā yadi vā vaje’’ti.
因此,当他如此观照到行走等动作唯是因缘和合而转起时,行走时他便了知‘我在行走’,站立时了知‘我在站立’,坐着时了知‘我在坐着’,躺着时了知‘我在躺着’。应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Tasmā evaṃ hetupaccayavaseneva pavattāni gamanādīni sallakkhento esa gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti, ṭhito vā, nisinno vā, sayāno vā sayānomhīti pajānātīti veditabbo.
‘他的身体无论处于何种威仪,他都如实了知’——这是总括之说。意即:他的身体无论以哪一种方式安立,他便以那种方式了知。以行走的方式安立,则了知为‘行走’;以站立、坐着、躺着的方式安立,则了知为‘站立’、‘坐着’、‘躺着’。显示巴利原文
Yathā yathā vā panassa kāyo paṇihito hoti, tathā tathā naṃ pajānātīti sabbasaṅgāhikavacanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yena yena vā ākārena tassa kāyo ṭhito hoti, tena tena naṃ pajānāti. Gamanākārena ṭhitaṃ gacchatīti pajānāti. Ṭhānanisajjāsayanākārena ṭhitaṃ sayānoti pajānātīti.
“或于内”等:即通过观察自身的四种威仪,于身随观身而住。“或于外”:即通过观察他人的四种威仪。“或于内外”:即有时观察自身,有时观察他人的四种威仪,于身随观身而住。至于“或随观集法”等,则应按照“由无明集而有色集”等(《无碍解道》1.49)的方法,以五种方式推求色蕴的集起与灭没。正是对此,才说“或随观集法”等。而“或者,他现起‘有身’之念”等,解说与前述类似。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā catuiriyāpathapariggaṇhanena kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Bahiddhā vāti parassa vā catuiriyāpathapariggaṇhanena. Ajjhattabahiddhā vāti kālena attano, kālena parassa catuiriyāpathapariggaṇhanena kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vātiādīsu pana ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.49) nayena pañcahākārehi rūpakkhandhassa samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo. Tañhi sandhāya idha ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atthi kāyoti vā panassātiādi vuttasadisameva.
其中,把握四威仪的念为苦谛;令此念生起的先前渴爱为集谛;二者不转起为灭谛;遍知苦、断除集、以灭为所缘的圣道为道谛。如此依四谛精勤,证得寂灭——这是一位把握四威仪的比丘,所经由直至阿拉汉果的出离门。显示巴利原文
Idha pana catuiriyāpathapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ , ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhārammaṇo ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idamekassa catūiriyāpathapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
四正知品的注释显示巴利原文
Catusampajaññapabbavaṇṇanā
109 如是,依威仪分释身随观已,今为依四正知而作分释,故复说“再者,比丘们……”等句。其中,“于前进时、于返回时”:此处“前进”指向前行,“返回”指转回。此二者在四种威仪中皆可得见。于行时,身体向前移动,称为前进;向后转回,称为返回。于住时,立在原处身体前倾,称为前进;后仰,称为返回。于坐时,向座前移动,称为前进;向座后移动,称为返回。于卧时,其理亦同。显示巴利原文
109. Evaṃ iriyāpathavasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni catusampajaññavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha abhikkante paṭikkanteti ettha tāva abhikkantaṃ vuccati gamanaṃ. Paṭikkantaṃ nivattanaṃ. Tadubhayampi catūsu iriyāpathesu labbhati. Gamane tāva purato kāyaṃ abhiharanto abhikkamati nāma. Paṭinivattento paṭikkamati nāma. Ṭhānepi ṭhitakova kāyaṃ purato onāmento abhikkamati nāma. Pacchato apanāmento paṭikkamati nāma. Nisajjāyapi nisinnakova āsanassa purimaaṅgābhimukho saṃsaranto abhikkamati nāma. Pacchimaaṅgappadesaṃ pacchā saṃsaranto paṭikkamati nāma. Nipajjāyapi eseva nayo.
“具正知而作”,是指以正知做一切事,或即安住于正知而行。他于前进等一切活动中,确实运用正知,无时无刻不具足正知。正知有四种:有益正知、适宜正知、行境正知、不痴正知。当想要前进的心生起时,不单凭心生便贸然行动,而是先审查“我去那里是否有利益,是否无利益”,把握利益后而行,这就是有益正知。这里的“利益”,是指通过见塔庙、见菩提树、见僧伽、见长老、见不净等而获得的法上增长。因见塔庙或菩提树后,以佛为所缘;或见僧伽时,以僧伽为所缘,心生喜悦,继而观察其坏灭,如此作意,能证得阿拉汉果。见长老后,安住于他们的教导;或见不净后生起初禅,再观察其坏灭,如此作意,也能证得阿拉汉果。因此,这些见是有利益的。但有些人说:“即使由资具中获得的增长,也是利益,因为那是为了支持梵行而受用的。”显示巴利原文
Sampajānakārī hotīti sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī, sampajaññameva vā kārī. So hi abhikkantādīsu sampajaññaṃ karoteva, na katthaci sampajaññavirahito hoti. Tattha sātthakasampajaññaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññanti catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ. Tattha abhikkamanacitte uppanne cittavaseneva agantvā ‘‘kiṃ nu me ettha gatena attho atthi natthī’’ti atthānatthaṃ pariggaṇhitvā atthapariggahaṇaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha ca atthoti cetiyadassanabodhidassanasaṅghadassanatheradassanaasubhadassanādivasena dhammato vaḍḍhi. Cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā disvāpi hi buddhārammaṇaṃ saṅghadassanena saṅghārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. There disvā tesaṃ ovāde patiṭṭhāya asubhaṃ disvā tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā etesaṃ dassanaṃ sātthakaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘āmisatopi vaḍḍhi atthoyeva, taṃ nissāya brahmacariyānuggahāya paṭipannattā’’ti vadanti.
于行走时,先审查适宜与不适宜,再把握适宜的,这就是适宜正知。譬如,见塔庙固然是有利益的。然而,若塔庙举行大供养时,十由旬、十二由旬范围内大众聚集,男女们各随财力盛装打扮,如画中人偶般来往穿梭,此时若对可意境生贪,对不可意境起嗔,对中性境生痴,或违犯身触戒,或梵行与生命出现障碍,则该处便为不适宜。若无此类障碍,方为适宜。见菩提树亦是如此。见僧伽虽有利益,但若在村中搭建大帐篷,众人通宵听法,同样出现如前所说的人员聚集与障碍,那么该处便不适宜;没有障碍时,才是适宜的。见有众多眷属相随的长老,也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ pana gamane sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā sappāyapariggahaṇaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, cetiyadassanaṃ tāva sātthakaṃ. Sace pana cetiyassa mahāpūjāya dasadvādasayojanantare parisā sannipatanti. Attano vibhavānurūpaṃ itthiyopi purisāpi alaṅkatappaṭiyattā cittakammarūpakāni viya sañcaranti. Tatra cassa iṭṭhe ārammaṇe lobho, aniṭṭhe paṭigho, asamapekkhane moho uppajjati, kāyasaṃsaggāpattiṃ vā āpajjati, jīvitabrahmacariyānaṃ vā antarāyo hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ hoti. Vuttappakāraantarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Bodhidassanepi eseva nayo. Saṅghadassanampi sātthaṃ. Sace pana antogāme mahāmaṇḍapaṃ kāretvā sabbarattiṃ dhammassavanaṃ kārentesu manussesu vuttappakāreneva janasannipāto ceva antarāyo ca hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ. Antarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Mahāparisaparivārānaṃ therānaṃ dassanepi eseva nayo.
“见不净”亦是有益的。为显明其义,有这样一个故事:相传,一位年轻比丘带着一名沙弥去寻找齿木。沙弥偏离道路走在前方,看见不净,由此生起初禅。他以该初禅为根基,如理作意观察诸行,证得了三果;之后为证得更高的道果而执持业处,停在那里。年轻比丘寻他不着,便唤道:“沙弥!”沙弥心想:“我自出家以来,从未与比丘说过一句闲话。他日再证更高殊胜吧。”于是回答:“什么事,尊者?”比丘说:“来!”沙弥应声即到,说:“尊者,请您沿此路而去,到我刚才站立之处,面东驻立片刻,并观想那里的不净相。”比丘依言而行,也同样证得了沙弥所证的殊胜。如是,同一不净为两人俱带来利益。因此,见不净虽为有益,然而对男人而言,观女人之不净则不适宜;对女人而言,观男人之不净则因是同类所缘,故为适宜。能如此把握适宜,即称为适宜正知。显示巴利原文
Asubhadassanampi sātthaṃ. Tadatthadīpanatthañca idaṃ vatthu – eko kira daharabhikkhu sāmaṇeraṃ gahetvā dantakaṭṭhatthāya gato. Sāmaṇero maggā okkamitvā purato gacchanto asubhaṃ disvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasanto tīṇi phalāni sacchikatvā uparimaggatthāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Daharo taṃ apassanto ‘‘sāmaṇerā’’ti pakkosi. So ‘‘mayā pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya bhikkhunā saddhiṃ dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā. Aññasmimpi divase uparivisesaṃ nibbattessāmī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante’’ti paṭivacanaṃ adāsi. Ehīti ca vutte ekavacaneneva āgantvā ‘‘bhante, iminā tāva maggena gantvā mayā ṭhitokāse muhuttaṃ puratthābhimukho ṭhatvā olokethā’’ti āha. So tathā katvā tena pattavisesameva pāpuṇi. Evaṃ ekaṃ asubhaṃ dvinnaṃ janānaṃ atthāya jāyati. Evaṃ sātthampi panetaṃ purisassa mātugāmāsubhaṃ asappāyaṃ. Mātugāmassa ca purisāsubhaṃ sabhāgameva sappāyanti evaṃ sappāyapariggahaṇaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ nāma.
如此把握了「有益」与「适宜」之后,于三十八业处中,选取契合己心的业处作为「行境」,继而于托钵行途,持守此业处而行——是名「行境正知」。为明此义,当知有四种情形:有一类比丘,带出去而不带回;有一类比丘,不带去而带回;有一类比丘,不带去也不带回;有一类比丘,既带去又带回。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pariggahitasātthasappāyassa pana aṭṭhatiṃsāya kammaṭṭhānesu attano cittarucitakammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocaraṃ uggahetvā bhikkhācāragocare taṃ gahetvā gamanaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ nāma. Tassāvibhāvatthaṃ idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idhekacco bhikkhu harati na paccāharati , ekacco na harati paccāharati , ekacco neva harati na paccāharati, ekacco harati ca paccāharati ca.
其中,那位比丘白昼以经行、宴坐,令心远离诸盖障而得清净;夜间初夜分,亦以经行、宴坐度过;中夜分卧息;后夜分,复以宴坐、经行度过。清晨,他履行塔院及菩提树院的义务,为菩提树浇水,备好饮用水与洗漱水,并依次遵行对师与亲教师等诸犍度所规定的一切义务。处理好身体诸事后,他进入住处,铺设两三个坐垫以护持体温,专注修习业处。至托钵时分,便起座,以业处为主导,持钵与衣,从住处出,恒不忘失作意业处,行至塔院。若他所修为佛随念业处,便不舍彼业处,径直入塔院。若修其他业处,他则立于阶陛最下一级,犹如暂且放下手中所持之物,将彼业处安放好,然后缘取以佛为所缘的欣喜,上塔院。若是大塔,右绕三匝,于四处作礼;若是小塔,亦右绕,于八处作礼。礼塔已,往菩提树院,应如对世尊佛陀亲临,致以最上恭敬,礼拜菩提树。如是礼塔与菩提树已,他走到先前放下之处,如取回所寄存之物,重新提起原先放下的业处。在靠近村落时显示巴利原文
Tattha yo bhikkhu divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṃ parisodhetvā tathā rattiyā paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ majjhime yāme seyyaṃ kappetvā pacchimayāmepi nisajjācaṅkamehi vītināmetvā pageva cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ katvā bodhirukkhe udakaṃ abhisiñcitvā pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā ācariyupajjhāyavattādīni sabbāni khandhakavattāni samādāya vattati. So sarīraparikammaṃ katvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā dve tayo pallaṅke usumaṃ gāhāpento kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitvā bhikkhācāravelāya uṭṭhahitvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva pattacīvaramādāya senāsanato nikkhamitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā sace buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, taṃ avissajjetvāva cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ pavisati. Aññaṃ ce kammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sopānapādamūle ṭhatvā hatthena gahitabhaṇḍaṃ viya taṃ ṭhapetvā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ gahetvā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruyha mahantaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā catūsu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Khuddakaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tatheva padakkhiṇaṃ katvā aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Cetiyaṃ vanditvā bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ pattenāpi buddhassa bhagavato sammukhā viya nipaccakāraṃ dassetvā bodhi vanditabbo. So evaṃ cetiyañca bodhiñca vanditvā paṭisāmitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā paṭisāmitabhaṇḍakaṃ hatthena gaṇhanto viya nikkhittakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmasamīpe kammaṭṭhānasīseneva cīvaraṃ pārupitvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati.
这时,众人望见他,说道:‘我们的尊者来了!’便上前迎接,接过钵,延请至食堂或家中就座,供以粥食。在饭食尚未备妥之际,为他洗足、涂油,坐于其前,或问法义,或欲听法。纵使众人未启请说法,义注诸师亦言:为摄受大众,应作说法。因为佛法开示实未曾离于业处而别有。是故,他仍以业处为主导而说法,以业处为主导而受用食物。饭食已讫,作随喜祝福后,诸村人伴送之,他亦随同众人出村,至村外乃请他们留步,自行上路。其时,那些已先出村、在村外用斋的沙弥与下座比丘等,望见他来,便上前迎接,接取钵与衣。显示巴利原文
Atha naṃ manussā disvā ‘‘ayyo no āgato’’ti paccuggantvā pattaṃ gahetvā āsanasālāyaṃ vā gehe vā nisīdāpetvā yāguṃ datvā yāva bhattaṃ na niṭṭhāti, tāva pāde dhovitvā telena makkhetvā purato nisīditvā pañhaṃ vā pucchanti, dhammaṃ vā sotukāmā honti. Sacepi na kathāpenti, janasaṅgahatthaṃ dhammakathā nāma kātabbāyevāti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti. Dhammakathā hi kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi . Tasmā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva dhammaṃ kathetvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva āhāraṃ paribhuñjitvā anumodanaṃ katvā nivattiyamānehipi manussehi anugatova gāmato nikkhamitvā tattheva nivattetvā maggaṃ paṭipajjati. Atha naṃ puretaraṃ nikkhamitvā bahigāme katabhattakiccā sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhū disvā paccuggantvā pattacīvaramassa gaṇhanti.
据说,古代比丘们并非因为‘这不是我的亲教师、老师’而看人脸色行事,他们只是依循当下的实际状况来履行义务。那些比丘问他:‘尊者,这些人是您的什么亲属?是母方亲戚,还是父方亲戚?’他反问:‘你们看到了什么,才这么问?’他们回答:‘我们看到他们对您特别亲切、特别敬重。’他便说:‘贤友,即使是父母也难以做到的事,他们都为我们做了。我这钵和衣,就是他们供养的。仰赖他们的护持,我们既不知有恐惧,也不知有饥饿。能有这样护持的施主,我们再找不到第二处了。’他就这样一边称扬他们的恩德,一边走去。这就叫作‘带出去而不带回来’。显示巴利原文
Porāṇā bhikkhū kira ‘‘na amhākaṃ upajjhāyo ācariyo’’ti mukhaṃ ulloketvā vattaṃ karonti. Sampattaparicchedeneva karonti. Te taṃ pucchanti ‘‘bhante, ete manussā tumhākaṃ kiṃ honti mātupakkhato sambandhā pitipakkhato’’ti. Kiṃ disvā pucchathāti. Tumhesu etesaṃ pemaṃ bahumānanti. Āvuso, yaṃ mātāpitūhipi dukkaraṃ, taṃ ete amhākaṃ karonti, pattacīvarampi no etesaṃ santakameva, etesaṃ ānubhāvena neva bhaye bhayaṃ, na chātake chātakaṃ jānāma, edisā nāma amhākaṃ upakārino natthīti tesaṃ guṇe kathento gacchati, ayaṃ vuccati harati na paccāharatīti.
然而,若有比丘于清晨履行前述义务时,体内的业生火界炽盛燃烧,舍离无执受界而执取有执受界,汗水直流,心无法趋入业处之道,那么他就在清晨早早拿起钵与衣,迅速礼敬佛塔,趁着牛群出村之时,进入村庄乞粥。得到粥后,他到斋堂饮用。其时,只饮下两三口,体内的业生火界便舍离有执受界,执取无执受界。犹如被上百壶水浇灌而得以清凉,火界暂时止息之后,他便以业处为主导喝完粥,洗净钵和口,于两餐之间的闲暇中着意业处,再到其他处所继续乞食,时时以业处为主导而进食。从此,业处一环扣一环地稳定现起,他便持守着业处归来。这就叫作‘不带出去而带回来’。像这样的比丘,饮粥之后着手修观,在佛陀教法中证得阿拉汉果者,数量不可胜数。仅在楞伽岛上,各个村落的斋堂里,几乎没有哪个座位,是没有比丘饮粥之后证得阿拉汉果而坐过的。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana pageva vuttappakāraṃ vattapaṭipattiṃ karontassa kammajatejo pajjalati, anupādinnakaṃ muñcitvā upādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti, sarīrato sedā muccanti, kammaṭṭhānavīthiṃ nārohati, so pageva pattacīvaramādāya vegasāva cetiyaṃ vanditvā gorūpānaṃ nikkhamanavelāyameva gāmaṃ yāgubhikkhāya pavisitvā yāguṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā pivati. Athassa dvattikkhattuṃ ajjhoharaṇamatteneva kammajatejo upādinnakaṃ muñcitvā anupādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti. Ghaṭasatena nhāto viya tejodhātupariḷāhanibbāpanaṃ patvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena yāguṃ paribhuñjitvā pattañca mukhañca dhovitvā antarābhatte kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikatvā avasesaṭṭhāne piṇḍāya caritvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena āhāraṃ paribhuñjitvā tato paṭṭhāya poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ upaṭṭhahamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva āgacchati, ayaṃ vuccati na harati paccāharatīti. Edisā ca bhikkhū yāguṃ pivitvā vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā buddhasāsane arahattaṃ pattā nāma gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā, sīhaḷadīpeyeva tesu tesu gāmesu āsanasālāyaṃ na taṃ āsanaṃ atthi, yattha yāguṃ pivitvā arahattappattabhikkhū natthīti.
然而,那种住于放逸、舍弃精进之担的比丘,破坏一切义务,心被五种心荒芜与心系缚所缠,甚至连‘还有业处’这样的念头都没有。他进入村落乞食,与在家众作不恰当的交往、混杂游走、饮食之后,便空空如也地走出村落。这就叫作‘既不带出去也不带回来’。显示巴利原文
Yo pana pamādavihārī hoti nikkhittadhuro, sabbavattāni bhinditvā pañcavidhacetokhilavinibandhacitto viharanto ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthī’’tipi saññaṃ akatvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā ananulomikena gihisaṃsaggena saṃsaṭṭho caritvā ca bhuñjitvā ca tuccho nikkhamati, ayaṃ vuccati neva harati na paccāharatīti.
而所谓‘既带出去又带回来’,应当根据‘去回行义务’来理解。因为那些爱乐解脱的善男子,在教法中出家后,或十人、二十人、三十人、四十人、五十人乃至百人共住一处,共立规约而住:‘贤友们,你们并非因为欠债、迫于恐惧或为谋生而出家,而是为从苦中解脱才在此出家。因此,行走时生起的烦恼,就在行走时降伏它;站立时生起的烦恼,就在站立时降伏它;坐时生起的烦恼,就在坐时降伏它;卧时生起的烦恼,就在卧时降伏它。’他们如此立约后,在前往托钵的路上,于半牛呼、一牛呼、半牛吼、一牛吼的距离之间安置石块作为标记,并以彼标记为所缘,系念业处而行。若在行走中,某人心生烦恼,他便当即降伏它。若不能降伏,便停下站立。随后跟上来的人也随之停下。他便想:‘这位比丘知道我心中生起不善之念,我这样做实在不相称。’于是深切自责,增长观照,便于此处证入圣者境界。如果仍未能降伏,他便坐下。随后跟上来的人也随之坐下,情形一如前述。即使未能证入圣者境界,显示巴利原文
Yo panāyaṃ harati ca paccāharati cāti vutto, so gatapaccāgatikavattavasena veditabbo. Attakāmā hi kulaputtā sāsane pabbajitvā dasapi vīsampi tiṃsampi cattālīsampi paññāsampi satampi ekato vasantā katikavattaṃ katvā viharanti, āvuso, tumhe na iṇaṭṭhā na bhayaṭṭā na jīvikāpakatā pabbajitā, dukkhā muccitukāmā panettha pabbajitā, tasmā gamane uppannakilesaṃ gamaneyeva niggaṇhatha, ṭhāne, nisajjāyaṃ, sayane uppannakilesaṃ sayaneyeva niggaṇhathāti. Te evaṃ katikavattaṃ katvā bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantā aḍḍhausabhausabhaaḍḍhagāvutagāvutantaresu pāsāṇā honti. Tāya saññāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontāva gacchanti. Sace kassaci gamane kileso uppajjati, tattheva naṃ niggaṇhāti. Tathā asakkonto tiṭṭhati. Athassa pacchato āgacchantopi tiṭṭhati. So ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu tuyhaṃ uppannavitakkaṃ jānāti, ananucchavikaṃ te eta’’nti attānaṃ paṭicodetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tattheva ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asakkonto nisīdati. Athassa pacchato āgacchantopi nisīdatīti soyeva nayo. Ariyabhūmiṃ okkamituṃ asakkontopi taṃ kilesaṃ vikkhambhetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova gacchati. Na kammaṭṭhānavippayuttena cittena pādaṃ uddharati. Uddharati ce, paṭinivattetvā purimapadesaṃ yeva eti āḷindakavāsī mahāphussadevatthero viya.
据说,他圆满去回行义务,这样安住了十九年。途中,人们有时耕地、播种、打谷,做种种活计,看见长老那样来回往返,便议论道:‘这位长老一次次折返而走,是迷了路,还是忘了什么东西?’他对此不以为意,唯以契合业处之心勤修沙门法,在第二十年证得阿拉汉果。就在证果当日,一位住在经行道末端的天神,以手指放出光明,伫立一旁。四大王天、天中之主帝释,乃至娑婆主梵天,皆前来随侍。林住的长老摩诃帝须见到那片光明,次日便问:‘昨夜尊者的处所出现光明,那是何等光明?’长老遮掩道:‘所谓光明,或是灯火之光,或是珠宝之光……’如此种种。于是对方说:‘请您不必隐瞒!’他这才承认:‘是的。’随后将事情的经过告诉了他们,就如住在卡拉瓦利曼达巴的大那伽长老一样。显示巴利原文
So kira ekūnavīsativassāni gatapaccāgatikavattaṃ pūrento eva vihāsi. Manussāpi sudaṃ antarāmagge kasantā ca vapantā ca maddantā ca kammāni ca karontā theraṃ tathāgacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ thero punappunaṃ nivattitvā gacchati. Kiṃ nu kho maggamūḷho udāhu kiñci pamuṭṭho’’ti samullapanti. So taṃ anādiyitvā kammaṭṭhānayuttacitteneva samaṇadhammaṃ karonto vīsativassabbhantare arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Arahattappattadivaseyevassa caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ adhivatthā devatā aṅgulīhi dīpaṃ ujjāletvā aṭṭhāsi. Cattāropi mahārājāno sakko ca devānamindo brahmā ca sahampati upaṭṭhānaṃ agamaṃsu. Tañca obhāsaṃ disvā vanavāsīmahātissatthero taṃ dutiyadivase pucchi ‘‘rattibhāge āyasmato santike obhāso ahosi, kiṃ so obhāso’’ti . Thero vikkhepaṃ karonto ‘‘obhāso nāma dīpobhāsopi hoti maṇiobhāsopī’’ti evamādimāha. Tato paṭicchādetha tumheti nibaddho āmāti paṭijānitvā ārocesi kālavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya ca.
据说,他圆满去回行义务。最初,他想:‘我要礼敬世尊的大精进。’便立下誓愿,七年之中唯行站立与经行。之后,又用十六年圆满去回行义务,证得阿拉汉果。他抬脚时,心与业处相应;若抬脚时心与业处不相应,便退回。行至邻近村落,让人疑惑‘那是牛,还是出家人’的地方,他便停下,搭好袈裟,从腋下以水洗净钵,然后含一口水在口中。为何如此呢?‘为避免仅仅为向前来布施或礼敬的人说一句“愿你们长寿”,就令业处散乱。’若有人问:‘尊者,今天是几日?’或问日期、比丘人数或其他问题,他便先将水咽下,然后作答。若无问日期等者,离开村落时,他就在村门口将水吐出,而后离去,一如在卡拉巴提塔寺安居的五十位比丘。显示巴利原文
Sopi kira gatapaccāgatikavattaṃ pūrento paṭhamaṃ tāva bhagavato mahāpadhānaṃ pūjessāmīti satta vassāni ṭhānacaṅkamanameva adhiṭṭhāsi. Puna soḷasa vassāni gatapaccāgatikavattaṃ pūretvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto viyuttena uddhate paṭinivattanto gāmassa samīpaṃ gantvā ‘‘gāvī nu pabbajito nū’’ti āsaṅkanīyapadese ṭhatvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā kacchakantarato udakena pattaṃ dhovitvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ karoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Mā me bhikkhaṃ dātuṃ vandituṃ vā āgate manusse dīghāyukā hothāti vacanamattenāpi kammaṭṭhānavikkhepo ahosīti. Ajja, bhante, katimīti divasaṃ vā bhikkhugaṇanaṃ vā pañhe vā pucchito pana udakaṃ gilitvā ārocesi. Sace divasādipucchakā na honti, nikkhamanavelāya gāmadvāre niṭṭhubhitvāva yāti kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatapaññāsabhikkhū viya.
据说,他们在阿沙荼月满月日立下约定:“未证得阿拉汉果,彼此互不交谈。”入村乞食时,便含一口水进去。若被问及日期等,他们便如前所说,以含口水的方式应对。那里的人看到他们吐掉的口水,便知道:“今天来了一位”“今天来了两位”。接着他们又想:“这些尊者是不与我们说话呢,还是彼此也不说话?若是彼此都不说话,那想必是闹矛盾了。走,我们去让他们互相发露忏悔,重归于好!”于是大众一同来到寺院,却见五十位比丘竟无两人共处一处。这时,其中一位有眼力的人说:“诸位,若真是喜好争吵的人,怎会有这般景象!看,塔院和菩提树院都打扫得干干净净,扫帚摆放得整整齐齐,饮用水和洗用水也准备得妥妥当当。”那些人便回去了。而这些比丘在雨安居的最后一个月内,全都证得了阿拉汉果,并在大自恣日举行了清净自恣。显示巴利原文
Te kira āsāḷhīpuṇṇamāyaṃ katikavattaṃ akaṃsu ‘‘arahattaṃ appatvā aññamaññaṃ na ālapissāmā’’ti. Gāmañca piṇḍāya pavisantā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā pavisiṃsu. Divasādīsu pucchitesu vuttanayeneva paṭipajjiṃsu. Tattha manussā niṭṭhubhanaṃ disvā jāniṃsu, ‘‘ajjeko āgato, ajja dve’’ti. Evañca cintesuṃ ‘‘kiṃ nu kho ete amhehiyeva saddhiṃ na sallapanti, udāhu aññamaññampi, yadi aññamaññaṃ na sallapanti, addhā vivādajātā bhavissanti, etha ne aññamaññaṃ khamāpessāmā’’ti sabbe vihāraṃ gantvā paññāsāya bhikkhusu dvepi bhikkhū ekokāse nāddasaṃsu. Tato yo tesu cakkhumā puriso, so āha ‘‘na bho kalahakārakānaṃ okāso īdiso hoti, susammaṭṭhaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ, sunikkhittā sammajjaniyo, sūpaṭṭhapitaṃ pānīyaṃ paribhojanīya’’nti. Te tatova nivattā, tepi bhikkhū antotemāseyeva arahattaṃ patvā mahāpavāraṇāya visuddhipavāraṇaṃ pavāresuṃ.
如同住在卡拉瓦利曼达巴的大那伽长老,以及在卡拉巴提塔寺安居的比丘们那样,他以与业处相应之心举足,行至村落附近,含一口水,观察各条街道,选择没有酒鬼、赌徒、争吵者,亦无暴躁大象、烈马等出没的街道而行。在那里次第乞食时,他并不像匆忙之人那样快步疾走,因为并没有依靠快走而成就的乞食头陀支。行至路面不平之处,他则如水车一般,安住不动地行进。每入一家,为观察对方是否愿意布施,他会等待适当时机。接受食物后,或在村内、或在村外,或直接返回寺院,找一个适当舒适之处坐下,令心安住于业处,对食物生起“厌逆想”,并以“如车轴润滑油”“如疮药”“如自己孩子的肉”等譬喻加以观察,具足八种方式进食——不为嬉戏,不为骄慢,不为装饰,不为庄饰。用完餐后,处理好洗手等用水,稍事休息以消除饭后的疲劳。随后,如午前一般,午后亦如是修行;如初夜分一般,后夜分亦一心专注于业处。此即名为“持去持回”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kālavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatabhikkhū viya ca kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto gāmasamīpaṃ patvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā vīthiyo sallakkhetvā yattha surāsoṇḍadhuttādayo kalahakārakā caṇḍahatthiassādayo vā natthi, taṃ vīthiṃ paṭipajjati. Tattha ca piṇḍāya caramāno na turitaturito viya javena gacchati. Na hi javena piṇḍapātiyadhutaṅgaṃ nāma kiñci atthi. Visamabhūmibhāgappattaṃ pana udakasakaṭaṃ viya niccalo hutvā gacchati. Anugharaṃ paviṭṭho ca taṃ dātukāmaṃ vā adātukāmaṃ vā sallakkhetuṃ tadanurūpaṃ kālaṃ āgamento bhikkhaṃ gahetvā antogāme vā bahigāme vā vihārameva vā āgantvā yathāphāsuke patirūpe okāse nisīditvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto āhāre paṭikūlasaññaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā akkhabbhañjanavaṇalepanaputtamaṃsūpamāvasena naṃ paccavekkhanto aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ āhāraṃ āhāreti, neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya. Bhuttāvī ca udakakiccaṃ katvā muhuttaṃ bhattakilamathaṃ paṭippassambhetvā yathā purebhattaṃ, evaṃ pacchābhattaṃ. Yathā purimayāmaṃ, evaṃ pacchimayāmañca kammaṭṭhānameva manasi karoti, ayaṃ vuccati harati ca paccāharati cāti.
在履行这称为“持去持回”的往返规范时,若这位比丘具足依止条件,则他或在青年期证得阿拉汉果;若青年期未证得,则在中年期证得;若中年期未证得,则在晚年期证得;若晚年期未证得,则在临命终时证得;若临命终时未证得,则往生为天子后证得;若为天子后仍未能证得,则于无佛出世的时期证得辟支菩提;若未证辟支菩提,则于值遇佛陀时成为速通达者,如长老跋希耶·达鲁吉里亚;或成为大智慧者,如舍利弗长老;或成为大神通者,如大目犍连长老;或成为持头陀支者,如大迦叶长老;或成为具天眼者,如阿那律长老;或成为持律者,如优波离长老;或成为说法者,如满慈子长老;或成为林居者,如离婆多长老;或成为多闻者,如阿难长老;或成为乐于修学者,如佛子罗睺罗长老。如此,在四种威仪中,能“持去”又能“持回”者,其“行境正知”便臻于顶点。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana haraṇapaccāharaṇasaṅkhātaṃ gatapaccāgatikavattaṃ pūrento yadi upanissayasampanno hoti. Paṭhamavaye eva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. No ce paṭhamavaye pāpuṇāti, atha majjhimavaye. No ce majjhimavaye pāpuṇāti, atha pacchimavaye. No ce pacchimavaye pāpuṇāti, atha maraṇasamaye. No ce maraṇasamaye pāpuṇāti, atha devaputto hutvā. No ce devaputto hutvā pāpuṇāti, anuppanne buddhe nibbatto paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti. No ce paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti, atha buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve khippābhiñño vā hoti seyyathāpi thero bāhiyo dārucīriyo, mahāpañño vā seyyathāpi thero sāriputto, mahiddhiko vā seyyathāpi thero mahāmoggallāno, dhutaṅgadharo vā seyyathāpi thero mahākassapo, dibbacakkhuko vā seyyathāpi thero anuruddho, vinayadharo vā seyyathāpi thero upāli, dhammakathiko vā seyyathāpi thero puṇṇo mantāṇiputto, āraññiko vā seyyathāpi thero revato, bahussuto vā seyyathāpi thero ānando, sikkhākāmo vā seyyathāpi thero rāhulo buddhaputtoti. Iti imasmiṃ catukke yvāyaṃ harati ca paccāharati ca, tassa gocarasampajaññaṃ sikhāpattaṃ hoti.
于前进、后退等中不迷乱,即是‘不痴正知’。应如是了知:于此,比丘于前进、后退时,不如同无闻凡夫,于前进等中生起迷执:‘自我在前进,前进乃由自我所生’或‘我在前进,前进乃由我所生’。他远离迷乱:当‘我前进’之心生起时,同时以心为缘的风界,便引发身表而生起。由彼心等起风界之力,推动此所谓‘骨骼聚’之身向前移动。当行者如是举足时,于每一抬脚中,地界与水界转为轻弱,火界与风界则转为强力;于带脚前移、过脚时亦然。于放脚时,火界与风界转为轻弱,地界与水界则转为重强;于踏足、按足时亦然。其中,于抬脚时所生之色法、非色法,不至带脚前移之分位;于带脚前移时所生之法,不至过脚之分位;于过脚时所生之法,不至放脚之分位;于放脚时所生之法,不至踏足之分位;于踏足时所生之法,不至按足之分位。于处处,一节一节、一段一段、一部分一部分地,恰如撒于热瓦上之芝麻粒,他们‘啪啪’而裂坏。试问,有哪一个单一的‘什么’在前进呢?显示巴利原文
Abhikkamādīsu pana asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Taṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ – idha bhikkhu abhikkamanto vā paṭikkamanto vā yathā andhaputhujjanā abhikkamādīsu ‘‘attā abhikkamati, attanā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā ‘‘ahaṃ abhikkamāmi, mayā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā sammuyhanti. Tathā asammuyhanto ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’ti citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati, iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasena ayaṃ kāyasammato aṭṭhisaṅghāto abhikkamati, tassevaṃ abhikkamato ekekapāduddharaṇe pathavīdhātu āpodhātūti dve dhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā honti balavatiyo, tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu. Vossajjane tejovāyodhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā honti balavatiyo. Tathā sannikkhepanasannirumbhanesu. Tattha uddharaṇe pavattā rūpārūpadhammā atiharaṇaṃ na pāpuṇanti. Tathā atiharaṇe pavattā vītiharaṇaṃ, vītiharaṇe pavattā vossajjanaṃ, vossajjane pavattā sannikkhepanaṃ, sannikkhepane pavattā sannirumbhanaṃ na pāpuṇanti. Tattha tattheva pabbaṃ pabbaṃ sandhi sandhi odhi odhi hutvā tattakapāle pakkhittatilāni viya paṭapaṭāyantā bhijjanti. Tattha ko eko abhikkamati? Kassa vā ekassa abhikkamanaṃ? Paramatthato hi dhātūnaṃyeva gamanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ ṭhānaṃ, dhātūnaṃ nisajjanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ sayanaṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiñhi koṭṭhāse saddhiṃ rūpena –
一心生起,另一心灭去;
犹如河流,心与心之间无间相接,相续转起。
如此,在前进等活动中不迷乱,便称为“不迷乱正知”。
至此,“于前进、后退时,成为正知而行者”这句话的含义已解释完毕。
显示巴利原文 Aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ, aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhati; Avīcimanusambandho, nadīsotova vattatīti. Evaṃ abhikkamādīsu asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ nāmāti; Niṭṭhito abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotīti padassa attho;
关于“观看与观察”:“观看”是指向前方看;“观察”是指向周围各个方向看。此外,还有向下看、向上看、向后看等,分别称为下视、上视、后视,但此处并未采用这些名称。只是随顺适宜的场合而选取了这两种;或者说,通过这两种便已涵盖了一切看的方式。显示巴利原文
Ālokite vilokiteti ettha pana ālokitaṃ nāma purato pekkhanaṃ. Vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhanaṃ. Aññānipi heṭṭhā upari pacchato pekkhanavasena olokitaullokitāpalokitāni nāma honti, tāni idha na gahitāni. Sāruppavasena pana imāneva dve gahitāni, iminā vā mukhena sabbānipi tāni gahitānevāti.
在此,当“我将观看”的心念生起时,纯粹依于心念之力而不先行顾视,便能把握义理,这便是“有益正知”。应以具足身证通的尊者难陀为例来理解。世尊曾这样说:“比丘们,若难陀当观东方,他便以全副心意作意之后,才观看东方。当他如此观看东方时,贪欲、忧恼等不善法便不会随流涌入──如是,他于此中成为正知者。比丘们,若难陀当观西方……北方……南方……上方……下方……隅方,他便以全副心意作意之后,才观看隅方。当他如此观看隅方时……他亦成为正知者。”显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘ālokessāmī’’ti citte uppanne cittavaseneva anoloketvā atthapariggahaṇaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Taṃ āyasmantaṃ nandaṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘sace, bhikkhave, nandassa puratthimā disā āloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā nando puratthimaṃ disaṃ āloketi, evaṃ me puratthimaṃ disaṃ ālokayato na abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyunti iti so tattha sampajāno hoti, sace, bhikkhave, nandassa pacchimā disā, uttarā disā, dakkhiṇā disā, uddhaṃ, adho, anudisā āloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetaso samannāharitvā nando anudisaṃ āloketi. Evaṃ me anudisaṃ ālokayato…pe… sampajāno hotī’’ti (a. ni. 8.9).
此外,关于有益与适宜,也可依前文所述拜见塔庙等事例来理解。至于“行境正知”,即是于业处毫不舍离。因此,修习蕴、界、处业处者,应依自所修业处而观照;修习遍等业处者,则应郑重地将业处置于首位而作观照。内在并无一个所谓“能观看者”或“能观察者”的自我。然而,当“我将观看”的心念生起之时,与彼心俱起、由心所生的风界,便引发表色而生起。是故,惟借心所作的风界推动之力,下眼睑沉下,上眼睑抬起,并无任何人以机关使之开合。随之,眼识完成见的作用便生起。如是了知,即名为“不迷乱正知”。显示巴利原文
Apica idhāpi pubbe vuttacetiyadassanādivaseneva sātthakatā ca sappāyatā ca veditabbā. Kammaṭṭhānassa pana avijahanameva gocarasampajaññaṃ. Tasmā khandhadhātuāyatanakammaṭṭhānikehi attano kammaṭṭhānavaseneva, kasiṇādikammaṭṭhānikehi vā pana kammaṭṭhānasīseneva ālokanavilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Abbhantare attā nāma āloketā vā viloketā vā natthi, ālokessāmīti pana citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati. Iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravaseneva heṭṭhimaṃ akkhidalaṃ adho sīdati, uparimaṃ uddhaṃ laṅgheti, koci yantakena vivaranto nāma natthi, tato cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhentaṃ uppajjatīti. Evaṃ sampajānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññaṃ nāma.
更进一步,于此不迷乱正知,亦应从“根本遍知”、“外来”、“暂时”这几个角度来领悟。首先,依根本遍知而言──显示巴利原文
Apica mūlapariññāāgantukatāvakālikabhāvavasenapettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Mūlapariññāvasena tāva –
有分、转向,以及见、领受,
推度、确定,速行为第七。
显示巴利原文 Bhavaṅgāvajjanañceva, dassanaṃ sampaṭicchanaṃ; Santīraṇaṃ voṭṭhabbanaṃ, javanaṃ bhavati sattamaṃ.
其中,有分心在执行再生有之支分的作用中转起;它被转向后,唯作意界执行转向作用;它灭去后,眼识执行见的作用;它灭去后,果报意界执行领受作用;它灭去后,果报意识界执行推度作用;它灭去后,唯作意识界执行确定作用;它灭去后,速行生起七次。在这些速行心中,即使第一速行心,也不存在以贪、嗔、痴而起的“这是女人”“这是男人”这样的欲求与执取。第二速行心亦然……乃至……第七速行心亦然。然而,当这些速行心犹如战场上的勇士,依胜负之势溃散败坏时,才生起以贪等而起的“这是女人”“这是男人”这样的欲求与执取。如是,于此应首先依根本遍知而了知“不迷乱正知”。显示巴利原文
Tattha bhavaṅgaṃ upapattibhavassa aṅgakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ pavattati, taṃ āvaṭṭetvā kiriyamanodhātu āvajjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, tannirodhā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ , tannirodhā vipākamanodhātu sampaṭicchanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, tannirodhā vipākamanoviññāṇadhātu santīraṇakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, tannirodhā kiriyamanoviññāṇadhātu voṭṭhabbapanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, tannirodhā sattakkhattuṃ javanaṃ javati. Tattha paṭhamajavanepi ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena ālokitavilokitaṃ na hoti. Dutiyajavanepi…pe… sattamajavanepi. Etesu pana yuddhamaṇḍale yodhesu viya heṭṭhupariyavasena bhijjitvā patitesu ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanādivasena ālokitavilokitaṃ hoti. Evaṃ tāvettha mūlapariññāvasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
然而,在眼门,当色境现前时,自有分波动而起,转向等心各各完成自作用而生起、灭去,最终速行生起。此速行犹如一位客人,来到以转向等心为家人的眼门家中作客。正如一位为乞食而入他人舍宅的客人,若在家主人皆默然静坐时,他却发号施令,此则不当;同样,在以转向等心为家人的眼门中,当转向等心并无染着、无嗔恚、无迷乱时,速行却生起染着、嗔恚、迷乱,亦为不当。如是,当以“客人性”的角度来了解不迷乱正知。显示巴利原文
Cakkhudvāre pana rūpe āpāthagate bhavaṅgacalanato uddhaṃ sakakiccaṃ nipphādanavasena āvajjanādīsu uppajjitvā niruddhesu avasāne javanaṃ uppajjati. Taṃ pubbe uppannānaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āgantukapuriso viya hoti. Tassa yathā paragehe kiñci yācituṃ paviṭṭhassa āgantukapurisassa gehasāmikesu tuṇhīmāsinesu āṇākaraṇaṃ na yuttaṃ. Evaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āvajjanādīsupi arajjantesu adussantesu amuyhantesu ca rajjanadussanamuyhanaṃ ayuttanti evaṃ āgantukabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
然而,在眼门,那些以确定心为边际的诸心生起后,即与相应法一起于彼处坏灭,彼此互不相见,故为短暂、须臾。于此,譬如一舍宅中,所有人皆已死去,唯余一人亦注定于彼刹那即死,而此人若对舞蹈、音乐等生起兴趣,是绝不合适的;同样,在一眼门中,转向等心与相应法一起,才生即于彼处灭去,唯余同样注定即刻灭去的速行心,若此速行心以染着、嗔恚、迷乱而耽著,亦绝不合适。如是,当以“暂时性”的角度来了解不迷乱正知。显示巴利原文
Yāni pana tāni cakkhudvāre voṭṭhabbapanapariyosānāni cittāni uppajjanti, tāni saddhiṃ sampayuttadhammehi tattha tattheva bhijjanti, aññamaññaṃ na passantīti ittarāni tāvakālikāni honti. Tattha yathā ekasmiṃ ghare sabbesu mānusakesu matesu avasesassa ekassa taṅkhaṇeññeva maraṇadhammassa na yuttā naccagītādīsu abhirati nāma, evameva ekadvāre sasampayuttesu āvajjanādīsu tattha tattheva matesu avasesassa taṅkhaṇeññeva maraṇadhammassa javanassāpi rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena abhirati nāma na yuttāti evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
此外,亦当通过审察蕴、处、界、缘来了知此不迷乱正知。于此,眼根与色,是色蕴;看,是识蕴;与看相应之受,是受蕴;想,是想蕴;触等,是行蕴。如是,此五蕴和合时,乃显现看与打量。于此中,是谁单独在看?是谁单独在打量?同样,眼根是眼处;色是色处;看是意处;受等相应法是法处。如是,此四处和合时,乃显现看与打量。于此中,是谁单独在看?是谁单独在打量?同样,眼根是眼界;色是色界;看是眼识界;与看相应之受等是法界。如是,此四界和合时,乃显现看与打量。于此中,是谁单独在看?是谁单独在打量?同样,眼根是依止缘;色是所缘缘;转向是无间缘、等无间缘、依止缘、无有缘、离去缘;光是亲依止缘;受等是俱生缘。如是,此诸缘和合时,乃显现看与打量。于此中,是谁单独在看?是谁单独在打量?以此,通过审察蕴、处、界、缘,于此亦了知不迷乱正知。显示巴利原文
Apica khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasenapetaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha hi cakkhu ceva rūpañca rūpakkhandho, dassanaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, phassādikā saṅkhārakkhandho. Evametesaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi? Tathā cakkhu cakkhāyatanaṃ, rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, dassanaṃ manāyatanaṃ, vedanādayo sampayuttadhammā dhammāyatanaṃ. Evametesaṃ catunnaṃ āyatanānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi? Tathā cakkhu cakkhudhātu, rūpaṃ rūpadhātu, dassanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātu, taṃsampayuttā vedanādayo dhammadhātu. Evametāsaṃ catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi? Tathā cakkhu nissayapaccayo, rūpaṃ ārammaṇapaccayo, āvajjanaṃ anantarasamanantarūpanissayanatthivigatapaccayo, āloko upanissayapaccayo vedanādayo sahajātapaccayo. Evametesaṃ paccayānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketīti? Evamettha khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasenapi asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“在弯曲与伸展之时”,是指在肢体弯曲与伸展之际。此时,并非纯粹依心念而弯曲或伸展,而是先审察弯曲伸展手脚是否具有意义,把握有意义者,这便是“有益正知”。在此,若有人过久地保持弯曲或伸展手脚的姿势,则刹那刹那皆会生起苦受,心无法得定,禅修业处便会退失,不能证得殊胜成就。反之,若适时弯曲、适时伸展,则这些苦受不生,心得一境,禅修业处得以增长,能证殊胜成就。应当如此理解“执取义与非义”的意思。显示巴利原文
Samiñjite pasāriteti pabbānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇe. Tattha cittavaseneva samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ akatvā hatthapādānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇapaccayā atthānatthaṃ pariggahetvā atthapariggahaṇaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha hatthapāde aticiraṃ samiñjetvā pasāretvā eva vā ṭhitassa khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjanti, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ na labhati, kammaṭṭhānaṃ paripatati, visesaṃ nādhigacchati. Kāle samiñjentassa kāle pasārentassa pana tā vedanā na uppajjanti, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gacchati, visesamadhigacchatīti evaṃ atthānatthapariggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在确定有意义时,进一步观察其“适合”与“不适合”,执取适合者,这便是“适合正知”。这里有一个方法可以说明:据说,在大塔的广场上,有年轻比丘们正在温习。在他们身后,有年轻的比丘尼们在听法。其间,一位年轻比丘伸手时触碰到女性身体,以此因缘而还俗成为在家人。又有一位比丘伸脚时,将脚伸进了火堆,被火烧及骨头。另一位则把脚伸入蚁冢,被毒蛇所咬。还有一位把脚伸向放袈裟的小屋边的竹竿,被小蛇咬伤。因此,应当避开这些不适合的场所与情境,只在合适的地方伸展肢体。这便是此处所说的“适合正知”。显示巴利原文
Atthe pana satipi sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā sappāyapariggahaṇaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ nayo – mahācetiyaṅgaṇe kira daharabhikkhū sajjhāyaṃ gaṇhanti. Tesaṃ piṭṭhipasse daharabhikkhuniyo dhammaṃ suṇanti. Tatreko daharo hatthaṃ pasārento kāyasaṃsaggaṃ patvā teneva kāraṇena gihī jāto. Aparopi bhikkhu pādaṃ pasārento aggimhi pasāresi, aṭṭhiṃ āhacca pādo jhāyi. Aparo vammike pasāresi, so āsīvisena daṭṭho. Aparo cīvarakuṭidaṇḍake pasāresi, taṃ maṇisappo ḍaṃsi. Tasmā evarūpe asappāye apasāretvā sappāye pasāretabbaṃ. Idamettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ.
至于“行境正知”,可用大长老的故事来说明:据说,大长老坐在日间住处,与弟子们交谈之际,忽然快速弯起手臂,随即又放回原处,然后再慢慢地弯曲。弟子们问道:“尊者,为何您先快速弯起手臂,又放回原处,再慢慢地弯曲呢?”长老回答:“贤友们,我自专注思惟禅修业处以来,从未曾离于业处而弯过手。方才与你们交谈时,心暂舍离业处才弯了手,所以我又把手放回原处,提起正念后慢慢弯曲。”弟子们赞叹道:“善哉,尊者!身为比丘,正应如此。”由此可见,这里所说的“行境正知”,即是不离开、不舍弃自己的禅修业处。显示巴利原文
Gocarasampajaññaṃ pana mahātheravatthunā dīpetabbaṃ – mahāthero kira divāṭṭhāne nisinno antevāsikehi saddhiṃ kathayamāno sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjetvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjesi. Taṃ antevāsikā pucchiṃsu ‘‘kasmā bhante sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjetvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjayitthā’’ti. Yato paṭṭhāyāhaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātuṃ āraddho, na me kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā hattho samiñjitapubbo, idāni pana tumhehi saddhiṃ kathayamānena kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā samiñjito, tasmā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā samiñjesinti. Sādhu, bhante, bhikkhunā nāma evarūpena bhavitabbanti. Evametthāpi kammaṭṭhānāvijahanameva gocarasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
在内部,完全没有任何一个所谓的“自我”在弯曲或伸展。只是由于前述心所造的风界扩散,犹如牵动丝线操纵木偶手脚活动一般,才有身体的弯曲与伸展。于此,能这样透彻了知——了知这纯为名色法的因缘运作,其中并无众生或自我的实体——即是“无迷乱正知”。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma koci samiñjento vā pasārento vā natthi. Vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena pana suttakaḍḍhanavasena dāruyantassa hatthapādalaḷanaṃ viya samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ hotīti evaṃ parijānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
在“执持僧伽梨、钵与衣”中:对于僧伽梨与衣,是以穿着下裳和披覆上衣的方式来使用;对于钵,是以接受团食等方式来使用,这称为执持。其中,对于僧伽梨与衣的执持,当穿着下裳、披覆上衣之后去乞食,所得食物之利益,正是世尊依“为了抵御寒冷”等方法所开示的意义,那才是真实的义。依此,应知为“有义正知”。显示巴利原文
Saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇeti ettha saṅghāṭicīvarānaṃ nivāsanapārupanavasena pattassa bhikkhāpaṭiggahaṇādivasena paribhogo dhāraṇaṃ nāma. Tattha saṅghāṭicīvaradhāraṇe tāva nivāsetvā pārupitvā ca piṇḍāya carato āmisalābho ‘‘sītassa paṭighātāyā’’tiādinā nayena bhagavatā vuttappakāroyeva ca attho attho nāma. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
对于天生性热及虚弱的人,细薄的衣是适宜的;对于怕冷的人,厚实的双层衣是适宜的;相反则不适宜。任何人的破旧衣都是不适宜的,因为若为它缝制系带等,便会成为障碍。同样,绢丝、细麻布之类令人贪着的衣也不适宜,因为那样的衣在林中,对于独居者会成为住所的障碍或生命的障碍。然而,就胜义而言,凡是以相、作业等邪命方式生起的衣,以及在使用它时,不善法增长、善法减损的衣,那是不适宜的;相反的则是适宜的。由此,应知此处的“适宜正知”;并以不舍弃业处的方式,应知“行境正知”。显示巴利原文
Uṇhapakatikassa pana dubbalassa ca cīvaraṃ sukhumaṃ sappāyaṃ. Sītālukassa ghanaṃ dupaṭṭaṃ. Viparītaṃ asappāyaṃ. Yassa kassaci jiṇṇaṃ asappāyameva. Aggaḷādidāne hissa taṃ palibodhakaraṃ hoti. Tathā paṭṭuṇṇadukūlādibhedaṃ lobhanīyacīvaraṃ. Tādisañhi araññe ekakassa nivāsantarāyakaraṃ jīvitantarāyakaraṃ vāpi hoti. Nippariyāyena pana yaṃ nimittakammādimicchājīvavasena uppannaṃ, yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ asappāyaṃ. Viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ . Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
内在并没有一个所谓的“我”在披着衣,只是如前所述的心生风界的扩散,而有披衣的动作。其中,衣是无心的,身体也是无心的。衣不知“我覆盖了身体”,身体也不知“我被衣所覆”。这只是界在覆盖界的聚合,如同用布片遮盖稻草人一般。因此,得到好的衣不应生起喜悦,得到不好的衣不应生起忧恼。犹如对蚁塚、塔庙、树木等,有人以花鬘、香、烟、布等作恭敬供养,有人以粪、尿、泥、杖、刀打击等作不恭敬,而蚁塚、树木等并不会因此生起喜悦或忧恼;同样地,得到好的衣不应生起喜悦,得到不好的衣也不应生起忧恼。依此类推的思择方式,当知此处的“无迷正知”。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma koci cīvaraṃ pārupanto natthi. Vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana cīvarapārupanaṃ hoti. Tattha cīvarampi acetanaṃ, kāyopi acetano. Cīvaraṃ na jānāti ‘‘mayā kāyo pāruto’’ti. Kāyopi na jānāti ‘‘ahaṃ cīvarena pāruto’’ti, dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ paṭicchādenti paṭapilotikāya potthakarūpapaṭicchādane viya. Tasmā neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ, na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassaṃ. Nāgavammikacetiyarukkhādīsu hi keci mālāgandhadhūmavatthādīhi sakkāraṃ karonti, keci gūthamuttakaddamadaṇḍasatthappahārādīhi asakkāraṃ, na te nāgavammikarukkhādayo somanassaṃ vā domanassaṃ vā karonti; evameva neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ, na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassanti evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasena panettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在持钵时,不应匆遽取钵,而应作意:“我持此钵行乞,将由此获得团食。”依取钵因缘所应得的义利,应知为“有义正知”。显示巴利原文
Pattadhāraṇepi pattaṃ sahasāva aggahetvā imaṃ gahetvā piṇḍāya caramāno bhikkhaṃ labhissāmīti evaṃ pattagahaṇapaccayā paṭilabhitabbaatthavasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
对于羸瘦虚弱的身体,沉重的钵是不适宜的。若有钵被四、五处结节损坏而难以清洗,亦不适宜;因为难以洗净的钵不成其为适当,清洗之时又成障碍。至于色泽如宝石的钵,则如于衣的部分所说,能令人贪著,故不适宜。由占相、作业等方式所得,且在使用时,不善法增长、善法减退的钵,决然不适宜;反之则是适宜的。依此应知此处的“适宜正知”;并以不舍离业处的方式,应知“行境正知”。显示巴利原文
Kisadubbalasarīrassa pana garu patto asappāyo. Yassa kassaci catupañcagaṇḍikāhato dubbisodhanīyo asappāyova. Duddhotapatto hi na vaṭṭati, taṃ dhovantasseva cassa palibodho hoti. Maṇivaṇṇapatto pana lobhanīyo cīvare vuttanayeneva asappāyo. Nimittakammādivasena laddho pana yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, ayaṃ ekantaasappāyova. Viparīto sappāyo. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
内在并没有一个所谓的“我”在执持钵。仅是由于前述心生风界的推动,而有执持钵的行为。在此,钵是无心的,手也是无心的。钵不知“我被手所执”,手也不知“我们执取了钵”。这仅仅是界在执取界的聚合,如同用钳子夹取烧红之钵。以如此类推思择的方式,应当了知此处的「无迷正知」。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma koci pattaṃ gaṇhanto natthi. Vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana pattaggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha pattopi acetano, hatthāpi acetanā. Patto na jānāti ‘‘ahaṃ hatthehi gahito’’ti. Hatthāpi na jānanti ‘‘patto amhehi gahito’’ti. Dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ gaṇhanti saṇḍāsena aggivaṇṇapattaggahaṇe viyāti evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
再者,如同看到那些手脚被斩断、伤口流着脓血、布满蛆虫、被青蝇围绕、躺在无依堂中的无助之人,有怜悯心的人便为他们提供包扎伤口的布片,以及用颅骨等盛装的药物。其中,布片有的细滑,有的粗糙;盛药的容器有的形好,有的形丑。而这些病人对此既不欢喜也不忧恼,因为他们只需布片包扎伤口,只需颅骨接受药物,便已足够。同样地,若有比丘将衣视为如包扎伤口的布,将钵视为如盛药的颅骨,将钵中所得之团食视为如颅骨中的药,当知这位执持僧伽帝衣与钵的人,是以「无迷正知」而行最上正知。显示巴利原文
Apica yathā chinnahatthapāde vaṇamukhehi paggharitapubbalohitakimikule nīlamakkhikasamparikiṇṇe anāthasālāyaṃ nipanne anāthamanusse disvā dayālukā purisā tesaṃ vaṇapaṭṭacoḷakāni ceva kapālādīhi ca bhesajjāni upanāmenti. Tattha coḷakānipi kesañci saṇhāni, kesañci thūlāni pāpuṇanti. Bhesajjakapālakānipi kesañci susaṇṭhānāni, kesañci dussaṇṭhānāni pāpuṇanti, na te tattha sumanā vā dummanā vā honti. Vaṇappaṭicchādanamatteneva hi coḷakena bhesajjapaṭiggahaṇamatteneva ca kapālakena tesamattho, evameva yo bhikkhu vaṇacoḷakaṃ viya cīvaraṃ, bhesajjakapālakaṃ viya pattaṃ, kapāle bhesajjamiva ca patte laddhaṃ bhikkhaṃ sallakkheti. Ayaṃ saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe asammohasampajaññena uttamasampajānakārīti veditabbo.
在“吃”等之中:“吃”指食用团食;“喝”指饮粥等;“嚼”指嚼炒粉等嚼食;“尝”指尝蜜、糖浆等。其中,依“不为嬉戏”等方式所说的八种义,即是「义」。依此应知「有义正知」。在粗糙、殊胜、苦涩、甘甜等食物中,若有某种食物令某人不适,那对他即是不适宜。若是由相、作业等方式所得,且在食用时,不善法增长、善法减退,那便是决定不适宜的;相反的,则是适宜的。依此,应当了知此处的「适宜正知」;并以不舍弃业处的方式,应当了知「行境正知」。显示巴利原文
Asitādīsu asiteti piṇḍapātabhojane. Pīteti yāguādipāne. Khāyiteti piṭṭhakhajjakādikhādane. Sāyiteti madhuphāṇitādisāyane. Tattha ‘‘neva davāyā’’tiādinā nayena vutto aṭṭhavidhopi attho attho nāma. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Lūkhapaṇītatittamadhurādīsu pana yena bhojanena yassa aphāsu hoti, taṃ tassa asappāyaṃ. Yaṃ pana nimittakammādivasena paṭiladdhaṃ, yañcassa bhuñjato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ ekantaasappāyameva. Viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体内部并没有一个“我”在进食。只是由前述的心生风界的作用,才有纳钵的动作;由心生风界的作用,才有手伸入钵中的动作;由心生风界的作用,才有捏制团食、举起团食和张口的动作。并没有谁用钥匙和机关来打开腭骨,只是由心生风界的作用,将团食放入口中,上牙发挥杵的作用,下牙发挥臼的作用,舌头发挥手的作用。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma koci bhuñjako natthi, vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravaseneva pana pattapaṭiggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva hatthassa patte otāraṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopakaraṇaṃ ālopauddharaṇaṃ mukhavivaraṇañca hoti. Na koci kuñcikāya yantakena ca hanukaṭṭhīni vivarati, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopassa mukhe ṭhapanaṃ, uparidantānaṃ musalakiccasādhanaṃ, heṭṭhādantānaṃ udukkhalakiccasādhanaṃ, jivhāya hatthakiccasādhanañca hoti.
这样,舌面的稀薄唾液与舌根的稠厚唾液将其浸润。那团食在下牙如臼中,被如手的舌头转动,被唾液浸透,被上牙如杵般粉碎。并无谁用匙或瓢将其送入,唯由风界而进入。进入后,并无谁铺上稻草将其承托,唯由风界而停留。停留后,并无谁建灶燃火来烹煮,唯由火界而成熟。成熟后,并无谁用棍棒将其移出,唯由风界而运出。显示巴利原文
Iti taṃ tattha aggajivhāya tanukakheḷo mūlajivhāya bahalakheḷo makkheti. Taṃ heṭṭhādantaudukkhale jivhāhatthaparivattitaṃ kheḷaudakatemitaṃ uparidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ koci kaṭacchunā vā dabbiyā vā antopavesento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyāva pavisati. Paviṭṭhaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ koci palālasantharaṃ katvā dhārento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhati. Ṭhitaṃ ṭhitaṃ koci uddhanaṃ katvā aggiṃ jāletvā pacanto nāma natthi, tejodhātuyāva paccati. Pakkaṃ pakkaṃ koci daṇḍena vā yaṭṭhiyā vā bahi nīhārako nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyeva nīharati.
因此,风界过度地推动、过度地带动,又保持、翻转、粉碎、干燥和排出。地界保持、翻转、粉碎和干燥。水界润滑并维持湿润。火界使进入内部的(食物)成熟。空界成为通道。识界则随顺各处适当的作意而转向。如此,通过这样的思择,于此应了知为无迷乱的正知。显示巴利原文
Iti vāyodhātu atiharati ca vītiharati ca dhāreti ca parivatteti ca sañcuṇṇeti visoseti ca nīharati ca. Pathavīdhātu dhāreti ca parivatteti ca sañcuṇṇeti ca visoseti ca. Āpodhātu sineheti ca allattañca anupāleti. Tejodhātu antopaviṭṭhaṃ paripāceti. Ākāsadhātu añjaso hoti. Viññāṇadhātu tattha tattha sammāpayogamanvāya ābhujatīti evaṃpavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
再者,从行走、寻求、受用、住处、贮藏、未消化、已消化、果报、排出、涂染这十方面观察其厌恶相,于此当知为无迷乱正知。而此处的详细解说,应取自《清净道论》中“食厌逆想”的说明。显示巴利原文
Apica gamanato pariyesanato paribhogato āsayato nidhānato aparipakkato paripakkato phalato nissandato sammakkhaṇatoti evaṃ dasavidhapaṭikūlabhāvapaccavekkhaṇatopettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vitthārakathā panettha visuddhimagge āhārapaṭikūlasaññāniddesato gahetabbā.
“大小便事”是指大便和小便的行为。在这里,若在适当之时不大小便,则全身出汗,两目眩晕,心不专一,并生起其他疾病。反之,若进行大小便,这一切便不会发生——这是此处的义趣。依此,当知为有益正知。然而,若在不适当之处进行大小便,便会犯戒,恶名增长,甚至危及生命。若在适宜之处行之,这一切便不会发生——这是此处的适宜性。依此,当知为适宜正知;再者,依于不忘失业处,当知为行境正知。显示巴利原文
Uccārapassāvakammeti uccārassa ca passāvassa ca karaṇe. Tattha pattakāle uccārapassāvaṃ akarontassa sakalasarīrato sedā muccanti, akkhīni bhamanti, cittaṃ na ekaggaṃ hoti, aññe ca rogā uppajjanti. Karontassa pana sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti ayamettha attho. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭhāne uccārapassāvaṃ karontassa pana āpatti hoti, ayaso vaḍḍhati, jīvitantarāyo hoti. Patirūpe ṭhāne karontassa sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti idamettha sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasena sappāyasampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身内并没有一个所谓“我”在进行大小便,仅仅是心所发动之风界的推动力,才产生了大小便事。正如熟痈破裂时,脓血不由自主地流出;又如同注满水的容器,水不由自主地溢出;同样,积聚在直肠与膀胱中的粪便、尿液,受到风力的推动,即便不情愿也会排出。这些被排出的粪便、尿液,既不属于那位比丘自身,也不属于他人,只是身体当舍弃的排除物罢了。好比有人从水缸倒掉陈水,那水既不是自己的,也不是他人的,只是需要清理罢了。如此,通过这样的审择,于此当知为无迷乱正知。显示巴利原文
Abbhantare attā nāma koci uccārapassāvaṃ karonto natthi. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana uccārapassāvakammaṃ hoti. Yathā pana pakke gaṇḍe gaṇḍabhedena pubbalohitaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati, yathā ca atibharitā udakabhājanā udakaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati, evaṃ pakkāsayamuttavatthīsu sannicitā uccārapassāvā vāyuvegasamuppīḷitā akāmatāyapi nikkhamanti. So panāyaṃ evaṃ nikkhamanto uccārapassāvo neva tassa bhikkhuno attano hoti, na parassa. Kevalaṃ sarīranissandova hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā udakakumbhato purāṇaudakaṃ chaḍḍentassa neva taṃ attano hoti, na paresaṃ. Kevalaṃ paṭijagganamattameva hoti. Evaṃpavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在“行”等语中,“行”指行走时,“住”指站立时,“坐”指坐着时,“卧”指躺卧时,“觉”指醒寤时,“语”指说话时,“默然”指不说话时。因为经文“行走时,了知‘我行走’;站立时,了知‘我站立’;坐着时,了知‘我坐着’;躺卧时,了知‘我躺卧’”这一段,所说的是长时威仪。而“前进、后退、前瞻、旁顾、屈伸”这一段,所说的是中等威仪。在此处“行、住、坐、卧、觉”之中,所说的则是微细威仪。因此,对于这些威仪,也应当依其所说,理解为“正知而为”。显示巴利原文
Gatādīsu gateti gamane. Ṭhiteti ṭhāne. Nisinneti nisajjāya. Sutteti sayane. Jāgariteti jāgaraṇe. Bhāsiteti kathane. Tuṇhībhāveti akathane. ‘‘Gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti, ṭhito vā ṭhitomhīti pajānāti, nisinno vā nisinnomhīti pajānāti, sayāno vā sayānomhīti pajānātī’’ti imasmiñhi ṭhāne addhānairiyāpathā kathitā. ‘‘Abhikkante paṭikkante ālokite vilokite samiñjite pasārite’’ti imasmiṃ majjhimā. ‘‘Gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite’’ti idha pana khuddakacuṇṇikairiyāpathā kathitā. Tasmā etesupi vuttanayeneva sampajānakāritā veditabbā.
然而,三藏大西长老说:若有人长时间行走或经行后,过了一会儿站立时,如此思择:“经行时生起的名色诸法,就在此处灭尽”,此人即是“于行走中正知而为者”。若有人诵经、答疑、作意业处而长时间站立后,过了一会儿坐下时,如此思择:“站立时生起的名色诸法,就在此处灭尽”,此人即是“于站立中正知而为者”。若有人因诵经等事而长时间安坐后,过了一会儿躺卧时,如此思择:“安坐时生起的名色诸法,就在此处灭尽”,此人即是“于安坐中正知而为者”。若有人躺卧时诵经,或作意业处后入睡,过了一会儿醒来时,如此思择:“睡眠时生起的名色诸法,就在此处灭尽”,此人即是“于躺卧与醒寤中正知而为者”。因为对于唯作心而言,不生起时称为睡眠,生起时称为醒寤。若有人在说话时,依正念正知而说:“所谓声音,依唇、依齿、依舌、依腭而起,亦依相应之心加行而生”;或在长时间诵经、说法、修习业处或解答问题后,过了一会儿进入默然时,如此思择:“说话时生起的名色诸法,就在此处灭尽”,此人即是“于说话中正知而为者”。若有人默然时……显示巴利原文
Tipiṭakamahāsīvatthero panāha – yo ciraṃ gantvā vā caṅkamitvā vā aparabhāge ṭhito iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘caṅkamanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ gate sampajānakārī nāma. Yo sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto pañhaṃ vā vissajjento kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto ciraṃ ṭhatvā aparabhāge nisinno iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘ṭhitakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ ṭhite sampajānakārī nāma. Yo sajjhāyādikaraṇavaseneva ciraṃ nisīditvā aparabhāge nipanno iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘nisinnakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ nisinne sampajānakārī nāma. Yo pana nipannako sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto niddaṃ okkamitvā aparabhāge vuṭṭhāya iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘sayanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ sutte jāgarite ca sampajānakārī nāma. Kiriyamayacittānañhi appavattaṃ suttaṃ nāma, pavattaṃ jāgaritaṃ nāmāti. Yo pana bhāsamāno ‘‘ayaṃ saddo nāma oṭṭhe ca paṭicca dante ca jivhañca tāluñca paṭicca cittassa tadanurūpaṃ payogaṃ paṭicca jāyatī’’ti sato sampajāno bhāsati, ciraṃ vā pana kālaṃ sajjhāyaṃ vā katvā dhammaṃ vā kathetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā parivattetvā pañhaṃ vā vissajjetvā aparabhāge tuṇhībhūto iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘bhāsitakāle uppannā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma. Yo tuṇhībhūto ciraṃ dhammaṃ vā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikatvā aparabhāge iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘tuṇhībhūtakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā, upādārūpapavattiyā sati bhāsati nāma, asati tuṇhī bhavati nāmā’’ti, ayaṃ tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāmāti.
大西长老所说的此义,即“无迷乱之轭”,正是这部《念处经》的意趣所在。然而在《沙门果经》中,则总括了全部四种正知。因此,就此处而言,应当特别依据无迷乱正知来理解“正知而为”之义。而所有文句中的“正知而为”一语,其含义均应依据与念相应的正知来理解。在《分别论》中,诸如“具念正知而前进,具念正知而后退”等句,已经予以分别解说。显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ mahāsīvattherena vuttaṃ asammohadhuraṃ imasmiṃ satipaṭṭhānasutte adhippetaṃ. Sāmaññaphale pana sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati. Tasmā visesato ettha asammohasampajaññasseva vasena sampajānakāritā veditabbā. Sampajānakārī sampajānakārīti ca sabbapadesu satisampayuttasseva sampajaññassa vasenattho veditabbo. Vibhaṅgappakaraṇe pana, ‘‘sato sampajāno abhikkamati, sato sampajāno paṭikkamatī’’ti (vibha. 523) evametāni padāni vibhattāneva.
如此,“或于内”等,是指以这四种正知的摄持,比丘或在自身、或在他身、或有时在自身、有时在他身,修习身随观而住。此处,“观集灭法者”等句中,应仅提取色蕴的集与灭。其余内容与前文所说类似。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ catusampajaññapariggahaṇena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Idha samudayavayadhammānupassītiādīsu rūpakkhandhasseva samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo. Sesaṃ vuttasadisameva.
于此,摄持四种正知的“念”是苦谛,令其生起的前爱是集谛,二者的不转起是灭谛,所说的圣道是道谛。如此依四谛升进,到达寂灭。这是就一位摄持四种正知的比丘而言,直至阿拉汉果的导出之门。显示巴利原文
Idha catusampajaññapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, vuttappakāro ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idamekassa catusampajaññapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno vasena yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
不净作意品的注释显示巴利原文
Paṭikūlamanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
110 110. 如是以四种正知分析了身随观后,现在为了以不净作意来分析,接着宣说“再者……”等。其中,关于“此身”等应说的一切,在《清净道论》中已就身至念业处,从各方面详细阐明。“两端开口者”指下面与上面,即有两个口。“种种者”指各种各样。显示巴利原文
110. Evaṃ catusampajaññavasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni paṭikūlamanasikāravasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha imameva kāyantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ sabbākārena vitthārato visuddhimagge kāyagatāsatikammaṭṭhāne vuttaṃ. Ubhatomukhāti heṭṭhā ca upari cāti dvīhi mukhehi yuttā. Nānāvihitassāti nānāvidhassa.
在此,这是譬喻的对应:如同两端开口的袋子,比喻这四大所造之身;袋中混合装入的各种谷物,比喻头发等三十二身分;有眼之人,比喻修行者。当他解开袋子进行观察,各种谷物清楚显现的那一时刻,应知即是修行者三十二身分清晰明了的阶段。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – ubhatomukhā putoḷi viya hi cātumahābhūtiko kāyo, tattha missetvā pakkhittanānāvidhadhaññaṃ viya kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā, cakkhumā puriso viya yogāvacaro, tassa taṃ putoḷiṃ muñcitvā paccavekkhato nānāvidhadhaññassa pākaṭakālo viya yogino dvattiṃsākārassa vibhūtākāro veditabbo.
如是,“或于内”等,是指以执取头发等方式,于自身中、于他身中,或有时于自身、有时于他身,安住于身随观。自此之后,所说方式相同。唯一不同的是,此处应将执取三十二身分的念,连结为“苦圣谛”,由此应知这是导向涅槃之门。其余与前文相似。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ kesādipariggahaṇena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha dvattiṃsākārapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.
界作意品的注释显示巴利原文
Dhātumanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
111 111. 如此,以不净作意的方式分析了身随观之后,如今为了以界作意的方式来分析,佛陀接着开示“再者……”等内容。在这里,连同比喻的对应来说明其含义:犹如一位屠牛者,或是他雇佣、以饭食作为酬劳的内弟子,杀了牛之后,将其肢解切割,在通往四个方向的大路交汇的中央——那名为“四衢街口”的地方,把牛分成一块块后坐在那里。同样地,比丘于四种威仪的任何一种中,皆保持自制,对于这样随其安住方式而安放的身体,如此进行观察:“于此身中,有地界……乃至……风界。”显示巴利原文
111. Evaṃ paṭikūlamanasikāravasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni dhātumanasikāravasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ opammasaṃsandanena saddhiṃ atthavaṇṇanā – yathā koci goghātako vā tasseva vā bhattavetanabhato antevāsiko gāviṃ vadhitvā vinivijjhitvā catasso disā gatānaṃ mahāpathānaṃ vemajjhaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte catumahāpathe koṭṭhāsaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā nisinno assa, evameva bhikkhu catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ yena kenaci ākārena ṭhitattā yathāṭhitaṃ, yathāṭhitattā ca yathāpaṇihitaṃ kāyaṃ – ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu…pe… vāyodhātū’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhati.
这是什么意思呢?正如屠牛者,在饲养牛时、把牛拉到宰杀场时、拉到后把牛绑在那里放着时、正在宰杀时,乃至看见被杀死而倒毙的那头牛时,只要他还没有将牛劈开、切成碎块,他的“牛”想便不会消失。然而,当他切分完毕坐下之后,“牛”想便消失,而生起“肉”想。他不会这样想:“我在卖牛,这些人把牛带走。”而只会这样想:“我在卖肉,这些人把肉带走。”同样地,对于这位比丘,只要他还没有对这个如其安住、如其放置的身体破除密集,从界的角度加以观察,他的“众生”想或“人”想便不会消失。而当他从界的角度观察时,众生想便消失,心只依于界而安住。因此世尊才说:“再者,他对于这个如其安住、如其放置的身体,从界的角度来观察:‘于此身中,有地界、水界、火界、风界。’正如同,比丘们,一位熟练的屠牛者……乃至……风界。”显示巴利原文
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā goghātakassa gāviṃ posentassāpi āghātanaṃ āharantassāpi āharitvā tattha bandhitvā ṭhapentassāpi vadhentassāpi vadhitaṃ mataṃ passantassāpi tāvadeva gāvīti saññā na antaradhāyati, yāva naṃ padāletvā bīlaso na vibhajati. Vibhajitvā nisinnassa pana gāvīti saññā antaradhāyati, maṃsasaññā pavattati, nāssa evaṃ hoti ‘‘ahaṃ gāviṃ vikkiṇāmi, ime gāviṃ harantī’’ti. Atha khvassa ‘‘ahaṃ maṃsaṃ vikkiṇāmi, ime maṃsaṃ haranti’’cceva hoti, evameva imassāpi bhikkhuno pubbe bālaputhujjanakāle gihibhūtassāpi pabbajitassāpi tāvadeva sattoti vā puggaloti vā saññā na antaradhāyati, yāva imameva kāyaṃ yathāṭhitaṃ yathāpaṇihitaṃ ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā dhātuso na paccavekkhati. Dhātuso paccavekkhato panassa sattasaññā antaradhāyati, dhātuvaseneva cittaṃ santiṭṭhati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘imameva kāyaṃ yathāṭhitaṃ yathāpaṇihitaṃ dhātuso paccavekkhati, atthi imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātūti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho goghātako vā…pe… vāyodhātū’’ti.
于此处,屠牛者比喻修行者,“牛”想比喻“众生”想,四衢大道比喻四种威仪,分割后安坐的状态比喻从界的角度作观察。这就是此段经文的注释,而关于禅修方法的具体内容,在《清净道论》中已有详述。显示巴利原文
Goghātako viya hi yogī, gāvīti saññā viya sattasaññā, catumahāpatho viya catuiriyāpatho, bīlaso vibhajitvā nisinnabhāvo viya dhātuso paccavekkhaṇanti ayamettha pāḷivaṇṇanā, kammaṭṭhānakathā pana visuddhimagge vitthāritā.
因此,“或于内”等,便是以如此把握四界的方式,在自己身中,或在他身中,或有时在自身,有时在他身,住于身随观。此后所说的方式皆同。唯独在此处,应将把握四界的念,连结为“苦圣谛”,应知这便是导向涅槃之门。余下部分与前面所述相似。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ catudhātupariggahaṇena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha catudhātupariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.
九种墓地品的注释显示巴利原文
Navasivathikapabbavaṇṇanā
112 如前以界作意分别身随观之后,现在为以九种墓地品作分别,而说「再者,比丘们(puna caparaṃ)」等起始文句。其中,「正如会看到(seyyathāpi passeyya)」意思是“如同会看到”。「身(sarīraṃ)」指死尸。「被弃于墓地(sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṃ)」指被丢弃在坟场。「死了一日者(ekāhaṃ matassa assa)」即是“一日死(ekāhamataṃ)”。「死二日者」即是“二日死”。「死三日者」即是“三日死”。命终之后,身体如风箱般次第生起膨胀之相而肿胀,故称「膨胀(uddhumātakaṃ)」。「青瘀(vinīlaṃ)」指变异的颜色。呈现青瘀的本身即称为「青瘀的(vinīlakaṃ)」。又因是不净且可厌恶的青瘀,故称「青瘀(vinīlakaṃ)」。肉丰满之处呈红色,脓积聚之处呈白色,而大部分呈青色,犹如披着青布的死尸,此名即指此义。从破裂处或九个疮口流出的脓,称为「流脓(vipubbaṃ)」。流脓的状态即是「流脓的(vipubbakaṃ)」。显示巴利原文
112. Evaṃ dhātumanasikāravasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni navahi sivathikapabbehi vibhajituṃ, puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha seyyathāpi passeyyāti yathā passeyya. Sarīranti matasarīraṃ. Sivathikāya chaḍḍītanti susāne apaviddhaṃ. Ekāhaṃ matassa assāti ekāhamataṃ. Dvīhaṃ matassa assāti dvīhamataṃ. Tīhaṃ matassa assāti tīhamataṃ. Bhastā viya vāyunā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā yathānukkamaṃ samuggatena sūnabhāvena uddhumātattā uddhumātakaṃ. Vinīlaṃ vuccati viparibhinnavaṇṇaṃ. Vilīnameva vinīlakaṃ. Paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vinīlanti vinīlakaṃ. Maṃsussadaṭṭhānesu rattavaṇṇassa pubbasannicayaṭṭhānesu setavaṇṇassa yebhuyyena ca nīlavaṇṇassa nīlaṭṭhānesu nīlasāṭakapārutasseva chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paribhinnaṭṭhānehi navahi vā vaṇamukhehi visandamānaṃ pubbaṃ vipubbaṃ. Vipubbameva vipubbakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vipubbanti vipubbakaṃ. Vipubbakaṃ jātaṃ tathābhāvaṃ gatanti vipubbakajātaṃ.
「他将此自身之身(so imameva kāyaṃ)」:那位比丘以智慧,将他自己这个身体与那个所观之身相合、相联系。如何联系呢?即「这个身体也是如此的法性、如此的变化性、如此的不能免彼(ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatīto)」。意思是:由于寿命、体温、识这三种法的存在,这个身体才能站立、行走等;而当它们离去时,这个身体也必定如此——具有这般腐臭的本质,将来会变成膨胀等离散之状,无法避免那样的状态。显示巴利原文
So imameva kāyanti so bhikkhu imaṃ attano kāyaṃ tena kāyena saddhiṃ ñāṇena upasaṃharati upaneti. Kathaṃ? Ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatītoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – āyu, usmā, viññāṇanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ atthitāya ayaṃ kāyo ṭhānagamanādikhamo hoti imesaṃ pana vigamā ayampi evaṃdhammo evaṃpūtikasabhāvoyeva, evaṃbhāvī evaṃuddhumātādibhedo bhavissati, evaṃanatīto evaṃuddhumātādibhāvaṃ anatikkantoti.
「如是以内(it ajjhattaṃ vā)」:如此,通过执取膨胀等相,或于自身,或于他身,或时于自身,或时于他身,修习身随观而安住。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ uddhumātādipariggahaṇena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
“被食”(khajjamānaṃ):指乌鸦等落在尸体的腹部等处,啄食腹部肉、嘴唇肉、眼眶等。“有肉有血”(samaṃsalohitaṃ):尚连着残余的肉与血。“无肉有血涂”(nimaṃsalohitamakkhitaṃ):肉已耗尽,血还未干涸,就此而言说为“无肉有血涂”。“以他处(aññena)”:以其他方位。“手骨(hatthaṭṭhikaṃ)”:即使依分类手骨有六十四块,也都已各自散落。足骨等亦复如是。“超过一年(terovassikāni)”:经过了一年以上的时间。“腐烂(pūtīni)”:由于暴露在露天,受风、阳光、雨水侵袭而腐烂,超过一年的骨头便会腐烂;埋入地下的则能保存更久。“成为粉末(cuṇṇakajātāni)”:碎成粉末而散落。在所有这些情形中,都应依照前面所说的方法,依“被食”等组合来修习。显示巴利原文
Khajjamānanti udarādīsu nisīditvā udaramaṃsaoṭṭhamaṃsaakkhikūṭādīni luñcitvā luñcitvā khādiyamānaṃ. Samaṃsalohitanti sesāvasesamaṃsalohitayuttaṃ. Nimaṃsalohitamakkhitanti maṃse khīṇepi lohitaṃ na sussati, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘nimaṃsalohitamakkhita’’nti. Aññenāti aññena disābhāgena. Hatthaṭṭhikanti catusaṭṭhibhedampi hatthaṭṭhikaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ vippakiṇṇaṃ. Pādaṭṭhikādīsupi eseva nayo. Terovassikānīti atikkantasaṃvaccharāni. Pūtīnīti abbhokāse ṭhitāni vātātapavuṭṭhisamphassena terovassikāneva pūtīni honti. Antobhūmigatāni pana cirataraṃ tiṭṭhanti. Cuṇṇakajātānīti cuṇṇaṃ cuṇṇaṃ hutvā vippakiṇṇāni. Sabbattha so imamevāti vuttanayena khajjamānādīnaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbā.
“如是以内(iti ajjhattaṃ vā)”:如此,通过执取“被食”等乃至直至粉末状态,在自身的身上、或在他人的身上、或有时在自身、有时在他身,修习身随观而安住。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ khajjamānādipariggahaṇena yāva cuṇṇakabhāvā attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
然而,在此停住之后,应当将九种墓地观合并:以“死了一日”等所说的一切情况合为一种;“被乌鸦等所食”等为一种;“骨锁有肉有血、由筋腱连结”为一种;“无肉有血涂、由筋腱连结”为一种;“肉血已离、由筋腱连结”为一种;“骨已离散”等为一种;“骨白如螺色”为一种;“堆积超过一年”为一种;“腐烂成粉末”为一种。显示巴利原文
Idha pana ṭhatvā navasivathikā samodhānetabbā. ‘‘Ekāhamataṃ vā’’tiādinā nayena vuttā sabbāpi ekā, ‘‘kākehi vā khajjamāna’’ntiādikā ekā, ‘‘aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṃ samaṃsalohitaṃ nhārusambandha’’nti ekā, ‘‘nimaṃsalohitamakkhitaṃ nhārusambandha’’nti ekā, ‘‘apagatamaṃsalohitaṃ nhārusambandha’’nti ekā, ‘‘aṭṭhikāni apagatasambandhānī’’tiādikā ekā, ‘‘aṭṭhikāni setāni saṅkhavaṇṇapaṭibhāgānī’’ti ekā, ‘‘puñjakitāni terovassikānī’’ti ekā, ‘‘pūtīni cuṇṇakajātānī’’ti ekā.
“比丘们,正是如此。”这是在开示了九种墓地后,总结身随观时所说。其中,执取九种墓地的念是苦谛,引发它的先前渴爱是集谛,两者不再生起是灭谛,遍知苦、断除集、以灭为所缘的圣道是道谛。如此,依循四谛之力增进,证得寂灭。这便是那些执取九种墓地的比丘们,直至证得阿拉汉果的出离之门。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kho, bhikkhaveti idaṃ navasivathikā dassetvā kāyānupassanaṃ niṭṭhapento āha. Tattha navasivathikapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhārammaṇo ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavaseneva ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idaṃ navasivathikapariggāhakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
到此,入出息节、威仪节、四正知节、不净作意节、界作意节及九种墓地节——这十四节便构成了完整的“身随观”。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca ānāpānapabbaṃ iriyāpathapabbaṃ catusampajaññapabbaṃ paṭikūlamanasikārapabbaṃ dhātumanasikārapabbaṃ navasivathikapabbānīti cuddasapabbā kāyānupassanā niṭṭhitā hoti.
在这当中,入出息节与不净作意节是两种安止业处。而墓地诸节是依过患随观而开示的,因此其余十二种仅是近行业处。显示巴利原文
Tattha ānāpānapabbaṃ paṭikūlamanasikārapabbanti imāneva dve appanākammaṭṭhānāni. Sivathikānaṃ pana ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttattā sesāni dvādasāpi upacārakammaṭṭhānānevāti.
受随观注释显示巴利原文
Vedanānupassanāvaṇṇanā
113 “感受乐受”,即当比丘体验身体的乐受或心理的乐受时,他清楚地了知“我感受乐受”。仰卧的婴儿在吸奶等时虽然也感受乐受,并知道“我们在感受乐受”,但这里所说的并非此种了知。因为这种了知不舍离对众生的执取,不破除“众生想”,既非业处,也非念处的修习。而此比丘的了知则舍离了对众生的执取,破除了“众生想”,它既是业处,也是念处的修习。这里正是针对这样的“正知感受”而说:“谁在感受?谁的受?因何原因感受?”显示巴利原文
113. Evaṃ bhagavā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā idāni navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ kathetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha sukhaṃ vedananti kāyikaṃ vā cetasikaṃ vā sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘‘ahaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānātīti attho. Tattha kāmaṃ uttānaseyyakāpi dārakā thaññapivanādikāle sukhaṃ vedayamānā ‘‘sukhaṃ vedayāmā’’ti pajānanti, na panetaṃ evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ hi sattūpaladdhiṃ na jahati, sattasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hoti. Imassa pana bhikkhuno jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ jahati , sattasaññaṃ ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ ceva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā ca hoti. Idañhi ‘‘ko vedayati, kassa vedanā, kiṃ kāraṇā vedanā’’ti evaṃ sampajānavediyanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
其中,“谁在感受?”并非有任何有情或补特伽罗在感受。“谁的受?”也并非任何有情或补特伽罗的受。“以什么原因感受?”只是以所依(身)和所缘(境)为缘而有受。因此,他这样了知:“以种种乐等所依为所缘,唯是受本身在感受;依于那种受的转起,才施设了‘我感受’这样的言说。”如此,当比丘作意“唯是受以所依为所缘,受本身在感受”时,应知这即是了知“我感受乐受”。如同住在质多罗山的一位长老。显示巴利原文
Tattha ko vedayatīti na koci satto vā puggalo vā vedayati. Kassa vedanāti na kassaci sattassa vā puggalassa vā vedanā. Kiṃ kāraṇā vedanāti vatthuārammaṇāva panassa vedanā. Tasmā esa evaṃ pajānāti – ‘‘taṃ taṃ sukhādīnaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayati. Taṃ pana vedanāpavattiṃ upādāya ‘ahaṃ vedayāmī’ti vohāramattaṃ hotī’’ti. Evaṃ vedanāva vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatīti sallakkhento esa ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānātīti veditabbo. Cittalapabbate aññataro thero viya. Thero kira aphāsukakāle balavavedanāya nitthunanto aparāparaṃ parivattati. Tameko daharo āha ‘‘kataraṃ vo, bhante, ṭhānaṃ rujjatī’’ti. Āvuso, pāṭiyekkaṃ rujjanaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi, vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatīti. Evaṃ jānanakālato paṭṭhāya adhivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati no, bhanteti. Adhivāsemi āvusoti. Adhivāsanā, bhante, seyyāti. Thero adhivāsesi. Tato vāto yāva hadayā phālesi, mañcake antāni rāsikatāni ahesuṃ. Thero daharassa dassesi ‘‘vaṭṭatāvuso, ettakā adhivāsanā’’ti. Daharo tuṇhī ahosi. Thero vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitvā samasīsī hutvā parinibbāyi.
如同乐受,对于苦受……乃至当感受“非世俗的不苦不乐受”时,他也了知“我感受非世俗的不苦不乐受”。如是,世尊在说完色业处之后,为说无色业处,便依受而作开示。业处有二种:色业处与无色业处,亦可称为“色把握”与“无色把握”。其中,世尊在说色业处时,无论以简略作意的方式,还是广作意的方式,都教导了四界差别。这二种方式在《清净道论》中已有详尽阐明。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca sukhaṃ, evaṃ dukkhaṃ…pe… nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘‘nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānāti. Iti bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Duvidhañhi kammaṭṭhānaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānañca arūpakammaṭṭhānañca. Rūpapariggaho arūpapariggahotipi etadeva vuccati. Tattha bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento saṅkhepamanasikāravasena vā vitthāramanasikāravasena vā catudhātuvavatthānaṃ kathesi. Tadubhayampi sabbākārato visuddhimagge dassitameva.
世尊宣说无色业处时,大多以“受”的方式教导。因为在无色业处中,有三种契入的方式:依触、依受和依心。具体而言:有人以略说或广说把握色业处之后,于彼所缘,心与心所最初触及所缘而生起的“触”便显得明显;另有他者,在领受彼所缘时所生起的“受”便显得明显;还有他者,在了知并把握彼所缘时所生起的“识”便显得明显。显示巴利原文
Arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ pana kathento yebhuyyena vedanāvasena katheti. Tividho hi arūpakammaṭṭhāne abhiniveso phassavasena vedanāvasena cittavasenāti. Kathaṃ? Ekaccassa hi saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā pariggahite rūpakammaṭṭhāne tasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittacetasikānaṃ paṭhamābhinipāto taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusanto uppajjamāno phasso pākaṭo hoti. Ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantī uppajjamānā vedanā pākaṭā hoti. Ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā vijānantaṃ uppajjamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Tattha yassa phasso pākaṭo hoti, sopi ‘‘na kevalaṃ phassova uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ tadeva ārammaṇaṃ anubhavamānā vedanāpi uppajjati, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānanamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa vedanā pākaṭā hoti. So ‘‘na kevalaṃ vedanāva uppajjati, tāya saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānanamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, so ‘‘na kevalaṃ viññāṇameva uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, anubhavamānā vedanāpi, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti.
他审察“这些以触为第五的诸法依于什么?”而知:“依于所依。”所谓“所依”,即是业生身,对此,经中说:“我的这个识依于此,系属于此”(《长部》等)。从本质上说,它就是诸界与所造色。因此,他在这里只见名色,即:“所依是色,以触为第五者是名。”在此,色即是色蕴,名即是四非色蕴,如此便只是五蕴。因为除了名色之外无有五蕴,除了五蕴之外无有其他的名色。显示巴利原文
So ‘‘ime phassapañcamakā dhammā kiṃ nissitā’’ti upadhārento ‘‘vatthuṃ nissitā’’ti pajānāti. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idañca me viññāṇaṃ ettha sitaṃ ettha paṭibaddha’’nti (dī. ni. 1.234,235; ma. ni. 2.252). So atthato bhūtāni ceva upādārūpāni ca. Evamettha ‘‘vatthu rūpaṃ, phassapañcamakā nāma’’nti nāmarūpamattameva passati. Rūpaṃ cettha rūpakkhandho, nāmaṃ cattāro arūpino khandhāti pañcakkhandhamattaṃ hoti. Nāmarūpavinimuttā hi pañcakkhandhā, pañcakkhandhavinimuttañca nāmarūpaṃ natthi.
他进一步审察“这五蕴以何为因?”而见到:“以无明等为因。”从而了知:这仅是缘与缘所生法,并没有另外的有情或补特伽罗,纯粹只是诸行的堆积。如此,依据有缘的名色而建立三相,顺着观的次第,思惟“无常、苦、无我”而修观。显示巴利原文
So ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā kiṃ hetukā’’ti upaparikkhanto ‘‘avijjādihetukā’’ti passati. Tato paccayo ceva paccayuppannañca idaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthi, suddhasaṅkhārapuñjamattamevāti sappaccayanāmarūpavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti sammasanto vicarati.
他渴望“就在今天、就在今天”证悟,在那样的时日里,得以具备时节适宜、人众适宜、饮食适宜、闻法适宜的条件,便结跏趺坐,将观修推向顶点,安住于阿拉汉果。如是,对于这三类人,业处已被开示,直至阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
So ‘‘ajja ajjā’’ti paṭivedhaṃ ākaṅkhamāno tathārūpe divase utusappāya puggalasappāya bhojanasappāya dhammassavanasappāyaṃ labhitvā ekapallaṅkena nisinno vipassanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāti. Evaṃ imesampi tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti.
在此,世尊开示无色的业处时,是依于受而宣说的。因为,若依于触而说,或依于识而说,则并不明显,如同置身黑暗一般。然而,依于受而说,便是明显的。为什么呢?因为受的生起是明显的。确实,苦受与乐受的生起是明显的。当乐生起时,它便会搅动、逼迫、遍满、灌注整个身体,如同令人吞咽百次精炼的酥油,如同以百倍精炼之油涂身,如同以千罐之水熄灭燃烧,它在生起时,便令人发出‘啊!乐呀!啊!乐呀!’的赞叹。当苦生起时,它便会搅动、逼迫、遍满、灌注整个身体,如同将烧热的铁片刺入,如同灌注熔化的铜汁,如同在干草丛生的林中投掷燃烧的柴捆,它在生起时,便令人发出‘啊!苦呀!啊!苦呀!’的呻吟。如是,苦乐受的生起是明显的。显示巴利原文
Idha pana bhagavā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Phassavasena vā hi viññāṇavasena vā kathīyamānaṃ na pākaṭaṃ hoti, andhakāraṃ viya khāyati. Vedanāvasena pana pākaṭaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Vedanānaṃ uppattipākaṭatāya. Sukhadukkhavedanānañhi uppatti pākaṭā. Yadā sukhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ abhisandayamānaṃ satadhotaṃ sappiṃ khādāpayantaṃ viya satapākatelaṃ makkhayamānaṃ viya ghaṭasahassena pariḷāhaṃ nibbāpayamānaṃ viya ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’nti vācaṃ nicchārayamānameva uppajjati. Yadā dukkhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ abhisandayamānaṃ tattaphālaṃ pavesentaṃ viya vilīnatambalohena āsiñcantaṃ viya sukkhatiṇavanappatimhi araññe dāruukkākalāpaṃ khipamānaṃ viya ‘‘aho dukkhaṃ aho dukkha’’nti vippalāpayamānameva uppajjati. Iti sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppatti pākaṭā hoti.
然而,不苦不乐受是难以演示的,如同黑暗一般不明显。它是在苦与乐消失时,通过排斥乐与不乐,而以中舍的状态存在。对于以理路把握‘这是不苦不乐受’的人来说,它便是明显的。如同什么呢?如同猎鹿人追踪一只爬上并越过平坦岩石逃走的鹿的踪迹。他在平坦岩石的这一侧和那一侧,都看到了足迹,虽然中间看不到,但他以理路推断:‘它在这里爬上去,在这里爬下来,在中间的平坦岩石上,必定是这样沿着这个区域过去的。’正如这个譬喻,如同爬上去处的足迹,乐受的生起是明显的;如同爬下来处的足迹,苦受的生起是明显的;而如同‘在这里爬上去,在这里爬下来,在中间如此经过’的理路把握,对于在苦乐消失时,通过排斥乐与不乐,而以中舍状态存在的不苦不乐受,在依理路把握‘这是不苦不乐受’时,它便是明显的。就这样,世尊首先开示了色的业处,随后开启了无色的业处,正是依于受来显示它。显示巴利原文
Adukkhamasukhā pana duddīpanā andhakārāva avibhūtā. Sā sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātappaṭikkhepavasena majjhattākārabhūtā adukkhamasukhā vedanāti nayato gaṇhantassa pākaṭā hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā antarā piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ ārohitvā palātassa migassa anupathaṃ gacchanto migaluddako piṭṭhipāsāṇassa orabhāgepi parabhāgepi padaṃ disvā majjhe apassantopi ‘‘ito āruḷho, ito oruḷho, majjhe piṭṭhipāsāṇe iminā padesena gato bhavissatī’’ti nayato jānāti, evaṃ āruḷhaṭṭhāne padaṃ viya hi sukhavedanāya uppatti pākaṭā hoti. Oruḷhaṭṭhāne padaṃ viya dukkhavedanāya uppatti pākaṭā hoti. ‘‘Ito āruyha ito oruyha majjhe evaṃ gato’’ti nayato gahaṇaṃ viya sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātappaṭikkhepavasena majjhattākārabhūtā adukkhamasukhā vedanāti nayato gaṇhantassa pākaṭā hoti. Evaṃ bhagavā paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena nibbattetvāva dassesi.
这并不仅在此处如此显示。在《小渴爱灭尽经》《大渴爱灭尽经》《小吠陀罗经》《大吠陀罗经》《赖吒和罗经》《摩犍提经》《界分别经》《不动适业经》,以及《长部》的《大因缘经》《帝释问经》《大念处经》、《相应部》的《小因缘经》《树譬喻经》《遍寻求经》乃至整部《受相应》等诸多经典中,世尊都是首先开示色业处,随后令无色业处生起——依于受而显示它。如同在那些经中一样,在此《念处经》中,也是先开示色业处,之后令无色业处生起,即依于受而显示它。显示巴利原文
Na kevalañca idheva evaṃ dassesi, cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhaye, mahātaṇhāsaṅkhaye, cūḷavedalle, mahāvedalle, raṭṭhapālasutte, māgaṇḍiyasutte, dhātuvibhaṅge, āneñjasappāye, dīghanikāyamhi mahānidāne, sakkapañhe, mahāsatipaṭṭhāne, saṃyuttamhi cūḷanidānasutte, rukkhopame, parivīmaṃsanasutte, sakale vedanāsaṃyutteti evaṃ anekesu suttesu paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena nibbattetvā dassesi. Yathā ca tesu, evaṃ imasmimpi satipaṭṭhānasutte paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena nibbattetvā dassesi.
其中,在“乐受”等句中,还有另一种了知的方式:“他感受乐受时,了知‘我感受乐受’”——这是说在乐受的刹那,由于苦受不存在,正在感受乐受的人便了知“我感受乐受”。由此,过去曾经历的苦受,现今已不存在;而这乐受,在此之前也未曾生起;这就叫做“受”是无常的、不坚固的、变易之法。因此,他在该处成为具正知者。显示巴利原文
Tattha sukhaṃ vedanantiādīsu ayaṃ aparopi pajānanapariyāyo – sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmīti pajānātīti sukhavedanākkhaṇe dukkhāya vedanāya abhāvato sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānāti. Tena yā pubbe anubhūtapubbā dukkhā vedanā, tassā idāni abhāvato imissā ca sukhāya vedanāya ito paṭhamaṃ abhāvato vedanā nāma aniccā adhuvā vipariṇāmadhammā, itiha tattha sampajāno hoti.
关于这一点,世尊也曾这样说过:显示巴利原文
Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
阿耆毗舍那,当感受乐受时,他既不感受苦受,也不感受不苦不乐受,那时他所感受的唯是乐受。阿耆毗舍那,当感受苦受……(中略)……当感受不苦不乐受时,他既不感受乐受,也不感受苦受,那时他所感受的唯是不苦不乐受。阿耆毗舍那,乐受是无常的、有为的、缘生的、灭尽法、坏灭法、离贪法、灭法。苦受亦复如是。不苦不乐受亦复如是。阿耆毗舍那,如此见的多闻圣弟子,于乐受、于苦受、于不苦不乐受亦感厌离;因厌离而离贪,由离贪而解脱;于解脱中,有‘已解脱’之智。他了知:‘生已尽,梵行已立,应作已作,不受后有。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ aggivessana samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, sukhaṃyeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti, yasmiṃ aggivessana samaye dukkhaṃ…pe… adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, adukkhamasukhaññeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti. Sukhāpi kho aggivessana vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā. Dukkhāpi kho…pe… adukkhamasukhāpi kho aggivessana vedanā aniccā…pe… nirodhadhammā. Evaṃ passaṃ aggivessana sutavā ariyasāvako sukhāyapi vedanāya dukkhāyapi vedanāya adukkhamasukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati, vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hoti. ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ, nāparaṃ itthattāyā’ti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.205).
在“有染着的乐”等句中,「有染着的乐」是指依止于五种妙欲之染的六种与在家相应的悦受。「无染着的乐」是指六种与出离相应的悦受。「有染着的苦」是指六种与在家相应的忧受。「无染着的苦」是指六种与出离相应的忧受。「有染着的不苦不乐」是指六种与在家相应的舍受。「无染着的不苦不乐」是指六种与出离相应的舍受。其分别详见于《后五十经篇》的经文。显示巴利原文
Sāmisaṃ vā sukhantiādīsu sāmisā sukhā nāma pañcakāmaguṇāmisanissitā cha gehasitasomanassavedanā. Nirāmisā sukhā nāma cha nekkhammasitasomanassavedanā. Sāmisā dukkhā nāma cha gehasitadomanassavedanā. Nirāmisā dukkhā nāma cha nekkhammasitadomanassavedanā. Sāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha gehasitaupekkhā vedanā. Nirāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha nekkhammasitaupekkhā vedanā. Tāsaṃ vibhāgo uparipaṇṇāsake pāḷiyaṃ āgatoyeva.
如是,“于内”——即通过如此把握乐受等,他或于自己的诸受,或于他人的诸受,或于一时自己的诸受、一时他人的诸受,安住于随观受。“或随观集法、灭法”——在此处,应知:由“以无明集而有受之集”等(《无碍解道》1.50)所说的五种、五种行相来观察诸受的集与灭,他或于受随观集法而住,或于受随观灭法而住,或于受随观集法与灭法而住。自此以下的方式,与身随观中所说相同。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ sukhavedanādipariggahaṇena attano vā vedanāsu, parassa vā vedanāsu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati. Samudayavayadhammānupassī vāti ettha pana ‘‘avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayo’’tiādīhi (paṭi. ma. 1.50) pañcahi pañcahi ākārehi vedanānaṃ samudayañca vayañca passanto samudayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, kālena samudayadhammānupassī vā, kālena vayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharatīti veditabbo. Ito paraṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayameva.
此处应如此了知:仅此把握受的念,即是“苦谛”──如此连结之后,对于把握受的比丘,其出离之门便应了知。余者皆与前同。显示巴利原文
Kevalañhi idha vedanāpariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā vedanāpariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
心随观注释显示巴利原文
Cittānupassanāvaṇṇanā
114 “有贪”指八种与贪俱行之心。“离贪”指世间善心及无记心。然而,此处仅为思惟观察,并非作法的归类,故无一出世间心。其余四种不善心,既不归于前句,亦不归于后句。“有瞋”指两种与瞋俱行之心。“离瞋”指世间善心及无记心。其余十种不善心,既不归于前句,亦不归于后句。“有痴”指与疑俱行及与掉举俱行的两种心。但由于“痴”在一切不善心中皆会生起,因此其余不善心于此亦适用;是故,仅此二词,即已含摄十二种不善心。“离痴”指世间善心及无记心。“收缩的心”指被昏沉、睡眠所覆盖之心,因该心是蜷缩的。“散乱的心”指与掉举俱行之心,因该心是散乱的。显示巴利原文
114. Evaṃ navavidhena vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā idāni soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ kathetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha sarāganti aṭṭhavidhaṃ lobhasahagataṃ. Vītarāganti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Idaṃ pana yasmā sammasanaṃ na dhammasamodhānaṃ, tasmā idha ekapadepi lokuttaraṃ na labbhati. Sesāni cattāri akusalacittāni neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajanti. Sadosanti duvidhaṃ dosasahagataṃ . Vītadosanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Sesāni dasākusalacittāni neva purimaṃ padaṃ, na pacchimaṃ padaṃ bhajanti. Samohanti vicikicchāsahagatañceva uddhaccasahagatañcāti duvidhaṃ. Yasmā pana moho sabbākusalesu uppajjati, tasmā tānipi idha vaṭṭantiyeva. Imasmiṃyeva hi duke dvādasākusalacittāni pariyādiṇṇānīti. Vītamohanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Saṃkhittanti thinamiddhānupatitaṃ, etañhi saṃkuṭitacittaṃ nāma. Vikkhittanti uddhaccasahagataṃ, etañhi pasaṭacittaṃ nāma.
“大心”指色界及无色界之心。“非大心”指欲界之心。“有上”指欲界之心。“无上”指色界及无色界之心;其中,色界心为“有上”,无色界心方为“无上”。“有定心”指具有安止定或近行定之心。“无定心”指未具此二定之心。“解脱心”指依彼分解脱及镇伏解脱而解脱之心。“未解脱心”指未具此二解脱之心;此处,断解脱、止息解脱与出离解脱并不出现。显示巴利原文
Mahaggatanti rūpārūpāvacaraṃ. Amahaggatanti kāmāvacaraṃ. Sauttaranti kāmāvacaraṃ. Anuttaranti rūpāvacarañca arūpāvacarañca. Tatrāpi sauttaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ, anuttaraṃ arūpāvacarameva. Samāhitanti yassa appanāsamādhi upacārasamādhi vā atthi. Asamāhitanti ubhayasamādhivirahitaṃ. Vimuttanti tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttīhi vimuttaṃ. Avimuttanti ubhayavimuttivirahitaṃ, samucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīnaṃ pana idha okāsova natthi.
“于内”等(iti ajjhattaṃ vā):如此,通过把握有贪等状态,对每一刹那生起的心都一一了知。他时而观察自己的心,时而观察他人的心,有时观察自心,有时观察他心,如此作为随观心而安住。而“随观集法与灭法”这一部分,应当以五种方式引出识的集起与灭去,例如“以无明集而有识集”等(《无碍解道》1.50)。其余内容,即依前文所说的道理去理解。显示巴利原文
Itiajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ sarāgādipariggahaṇena yasmiṃ yasmiṃ khaṇe yaṃ yaṃ cittaṃ pavattati, taṃ taṃ sallakkhento attano vā citte, parassa vā citte, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa citte cittānupassī viharati. Samudayavayadhammānupassīti ettha pana ‘‘avijjāsamudayā viññāṇasamudayo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50) evaṃ pañcahi pañcahi ākārehi viññāṇassa samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
在此,因为仅仅把握心的那个念本身就是苦谛。如此联系之后,对于正在把握心的比丘,应当了知这是出离之门。其余内容与前面所述相同。显示巴利原文
Kevalañhi idha cittapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā cittapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
法随观——盖分注释显示巴利原文
Dhammānupassanā nīvaraṇapabbavaṇṇanā
115 115. 如上,以十六个方面讲完心随观念处之后,现在为了以五个方面讲述法随观,便接着说:“诸比丘,如何……”等等。此外,世尊通过身随观开示的是把握纯粹色法,通过受随观和心随观开示的是把握纯粹非色法。现在,为了开示色法与非色法混合在一起的把握,故又说:“诸比丘,如何……”等等。或者也可以这样理解:身随观只说明了色蕴的把握,受随观只说明了受蕴的把握,心随观只说明了识蕴的把握;因此,现在为了也说明想蕴与行蕴的把握,才接着说:“诸比丘,如何……”等等。显示巴利原文
115. Evaṃ soḷasavidhena cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā idāni pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ kathetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Apica bhagavatā kāyānupassanāya suddharūpapariggaho kathito, vedanācittānupassanāhi suddhaarūpapariggaho. Idāni rūpārūpamissakapariggahaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha . Kāyānupassanāya vā rūpakkhandhapariggahova kathito, vedanānupassanāya vedanākkhandhapariggahova, cittānupassanāya viññāṇakkhandhapariggahovāti idāni saññāsaṅkhārakkhandhapariggahampi kathetuṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha.
在这里,'存在'是指由于数数现行、习以为常而存在。'不存在'是指因不现行,或因已被断除,故为不存在。'以及怎样'是指欲贪生起的原因。'而且他了知此'是指他了知该原因。依此方法,应知一切词句的义理。显示巴利原文
Tattha santanti abhiṇhasamudācāravasena saṃvijjamānaṃ. Asantanti asamudācāravasena vā pahīnattā vā avijjamānaṃ. Yathā cāti yena kāraṇena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Tañca pajānātīti tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
于此,缘于'净相'而生起非理作意,则欲贪生起。什么是净相?净本身就是净相,以净为所缘的对象也是净相。什么是非理作意?即不如理作意,非正途作意,例如:于无常执为常想,于苦执为乐想,于无我执为我想,于不净执为净想。若于该处数数修习,则欲贪生起。因此世尊说:'诸比丘,有净相;若于此多修习非理作意,即是未生欲贪令生之食,亦是已生欲贪令增长广大之食。'显示巴利原文
Tattha subhanimitte ayonisomanasikārena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Subhanimittaṃ nāma subhampi subhanimittaṃ, subhārammaṇampi subhanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro nāma anupāyamanasikāro uppathamanasikāro anicce niccanti vā dukkhe sukhanti vā anattani attāti vā asubhe subhanti vā manasikāro, taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, subhanimittaṃ, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro , ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāya uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
反之,于'不净相'生起如理作意,则能断除欲贪。什么是不净相?不净本身就是不净相,以不净为所缘的对象也是不净相。什么是如理作意?即正确作意,正途作意,例如:于无常作无常想,于苦作苦想,于无我作无我想,于不净作不净想。若于该处数数修习,则欲贪断除。因此世尊说:'诸比丘,有不净相;若于此多修习如理作意,即是未生欲贪令不生之非食,亦是已生欲贪令断除之非食。'显示巴利原文
Asubhanimitte pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Asubhanimittaṃ nāma asubhampi asubhārammaṇampi. Yonisomanasikāro nāma upāyamanasikāro pathamanasikāro anicce aniccanti vā dukkhe dukkhanti vā anattani anattāti vā asubhe asubhanti vā manasikāro, taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, asubhanimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
再者,有六种法能导向爱欲的断除:取不净相、修习不净、守护根门、于食知量、亲近善知识、说适当之语。因为,无论是取十种不净相,还是修习其法,或是善护诸根门,又或是在仅余四五口饭时便饮水而住于知量,以此诸方式,爱欲皆得断除。因此,有偈颂这样说:显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattanti asubhanimittassa uggaho asubhabhāvanānuyogo indriyesu guttadvāratā bhojane mattaññutā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Dasavidhañhi asubhanimittaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi kāmacchando pahīyati, bhāventassāpi, indriyesu pihitadvārassāpi, catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ ālopānaṃ okāse sati udakaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlatāya bhojane mattaññunopi. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ –
“于四五口饭食,不食而饮水;
此已足够精勤比丘安住于安乐。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
亲近像阿沙古答长老那样乐于修习不净的善知识,爱欲得以断除;在行住坐卧等活动中,依止十种不净所缘而作适宜的法谈,爱欲亦能断除。因此说:‘有六法能导致爱欲的断除’。通过这六种法断除了爱欲之后,他如是了知:‘此爱欲,于未来将由阿罗汉道而永不复起。’显示巴利原文
Asubhakammikatissattherasadise asubhabhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi kāmacchando pahīyati, ṭhānanisajjādīsu dasaasubhanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa kāmacchandassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
然而,由于对可厌相作非理作意,嗔恨便生起。此处,可厌的事物本身即为可厌相,能引发可厌情绪的所缘亦为可厌相。非理作意的特征,于一切处皆是同一。若对此相反复发动此种作意,嗔恨便会生起。因此世尊说:‘诸比丘,有可厌相存在;于彼处多修习非理作意,此即是令未生之嗔恨生起,或令已生之嗔恨增长、广大之食。’显示巴利原文
Paṭighanimitte ayonisomanasikārena pana byāpādassa uppādo hoti. Tattha paṭighampi paṭighanimittaṃ, paṭighārammaṇampi paṭighanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro sabbattha ekalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tasmiṃ nimitte bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, paṭighanimittaṃ, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa uppādāya uppannassa vā byāpādassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
然而,通过对慈心解脱的如理作意,便能断除它。在此处,凡提到‘慈’时,无论是安止定抑或近行定皆适用;而‘心解脱’则专指安止定。如理作意如前所述,其特征一致。若反复发动此种作意,嗔恨便被断除。因此世尊说:‘诸比丘,有慈心解脱存在;于彼处多修习如理作意,此即是令未生之嗔恨不生起,或令已生之嗔恨得以断除之非食。’显示巴利原文
Mettāya pana cetovimuttiyā yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tattha tattha ‘‘mettā’’ti vutte appanāpi upacāropi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Cetovimuttī’’ti appanāva. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, mettā cetovimutti, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā byāpādassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
再者,有六种法能导向嗔恨的断除:学习慈相、致力于慈心的修习、省察业自作之理、多作如理思惟、亲近善知识,以及进行适宜的谈论。因为,无论是通过限定遍满、不限定遍满,还是方向遍满中的任何一种方式学习慈心,嗔恨都能被断除;通过限定、不限定、方向遍满来修习慈心,嗔恨也能被断除。像这样省察自己与他人的业自作:‘你对他生气,又能对他怎样呢?你能毁掉他的戒行等功德吗?难道你不是依着自己所作的业而来,也将依着自己所作的业而去吗?对别人发怒,就如一个人想拿烧透的火炭、灼热的铁棍或粪便等物去打别人一样。同样地,这个对你生气的人,又能对你怎样呢?他能毁掉你的戒行等功德吗?他也是依着自己所作的业而来,又将依着自己所作的业而去。就像一份未被接受的赠礼,又如逆风扬起的尘土,他的愤怒最终只会落回自己头上。’如此省察自己与他人的业自作;或者,在省察了双方的业自作之后,能安住于如理思惟;又或者,亲近像阿沙古答长老那样乐于修习慈心的善知识者——通过这些方式,嗔恨能被断除。在站立、安坐等威仪中,借着与慈心相应的适宜谈论……显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattanti mettānimittassa uggaho mettābhāvanānuyogo kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇā paṭisaṅkhānabahutā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Odhisakaanodhisakadisāpharaṇānañhi aññataravasena mettaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati, odhiso anodhiso disāpharaṇavasena mettaṃ bhāventassāpi. ‘‘Tvaṃ etassa kuddho kiṃ karissasi, kimassa sīlādīni nāsetuṃ sakkhissasi, nanu tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attano kammeneva gamissasi, parassa kujjhanaṃ nāma vītaccitaṅgāra-tattaayasalāka-gūthādīni gahetvā paraṃ paharitukāmatāsadisaṃ hoti. Esopi tava kuddho kiṃ karissati, kiṃ te sīlādīni vināsetuṃ sakkhissati, esa attano kammeneva āgantvā attano kammena gamissati, appaṭicchitapaheṇakaṃ viya paṭivātaṃ khittarajomuṭṭhi viya ca etassevesa kodho matthake patissatī’’ti evaṃ attano ca parassa ca kammassakataṃ paccavekkhatopi, ubhayakammassakataṃ paccavekkhitvā paṭisaṅkhāne ṭhitassāpi, assaguttattherasadise mettābhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu mettānissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa byāpādassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
对于不乐等状态,由非理作意而生起昏沉睡眠。不乐,即感到厌倦;懈怠,即身体慵懒无力;伸懒腰,即身体扭曲伸展;饭食后的倦怠,即饭后昏昏欲睡、身体燥热的状态;心的沉滞,即心陷入消沉的样子。若在这些不乐等状态中屡屡修习非理作意,昏沉睡眠便会生起。因此(世尊)说:‘诸比丘,有不乐、懈怠、伸懒腰、饭食后的倦怠、心的沉滞;对此若多修习非理作意,便是令未生起的昏沉睡眠得以生起,或令已生起的昏沉睡眠增长、广大的食粮。’显示巴利原文
Aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikārena thinamiddhassa uppādo hoti. Arati nāma ukkaṇṭhitā. Tandī nāma kāyālasiyatā. Vijambhitā nāma kāyavināmanā. Bhattasammado nāma bhattamucchā bhattapariḷāho. Cetaso līnattaṃ nāma cittassa līnākāro. Imesu aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, arati tandī vijambhitā bhattasammado cetaso līnattaṃ, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa uppādāya uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
至于精进界等,则是通过如理作意来断除的。精进界,即最初发起的精进;出离界,因已从懈怠中出离,故比前者更强;勇猛界,则步步趋入更高的境地,因此又比前者更强。若于此三种精进中多修习如理作意,便能断除昏沉睡眠。故经中说:‘诸比丘,有精进界、出离界、勇猛界;于此多修习如理作意,即是令未生起的昏沉睡眠不生起,或令已生起的昏沉睡眠得以断除的食粮。’显示巴利原文
Ārambhadhātuādīsu pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Ārambhadhātu nāma paṭhamārambhavīriyaṃ. Nikkamadhātu nāma kosajjato nikkhantatāya tato balavataraṃ. Parakkamadhātu nāma paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavataraṃ. Imasmiṃ tippabhede vīriye yonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
更有六种法,可令昏沉睡眠断除:于过量饮食时取于相、转换威仪、作意光明想、露天而住、亲近善知识,以及适宜之谈话。譬如有人食用了手长者所供之食、阿拉毗人所供之食、以衣裹之食、乌鸦啄剩之食,或是吞而吐出之食,之后坐于夜间或日间的坐处修习沙门法,昏沉睡眠便会如巨象般笼罩而至。反之,若比丘惯于只留四五团饭的空间,饮水后节食而住,便不至此。如是,了知过量饮食之相而不取过量,昏沉睡眠亦得断除。于何种威仪中生起昏沉睡眠,便从此威仪转换至另一威仪,如此亦能断除;夜间作意月、灯、炬之光,白昼作意日光,能断除之;住于露天,能断除之;亲近如大迦叶长老般已断除昏沉睡眠的善知识,亦能断除之;于行、立、坐、卧等中,依于头陀支的适宜谈话,亦能令其断除。因此说:‘六种法能令昏沉睡眠断除。’以这六种法断除昏沉睡眠后,再以阿拉汉道令其未来永不复生,他如是了知。显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattanti, atibhojane nimittaggāho iriyāpathasamparivattanatā ālokasaññāmanasikāro abbhokāsavāso kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Āharahatthakatatravaṭṭakaalaṃsāṭakakākamāsakabhuttavamitakabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā rattiṭṭhāne divāṭṭhāne nisinnassa hi samaṇadhammaṃ karoto thinamiddhaṃ mahāhatthī viya ottharantaṃ āgacchati. Catupañcaālopaokāsaṃ pana ṭhapetvā pānīyaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlassa bhikkhuno taṃ na hotīti evaṃ atibhojane nimittaṃ gaṇhantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Yasmiṃ iriyāpathe thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, tato aññaṃ parivattentassāpi, rattiṃ candālokadīpālokaukkāloke divā sūriyālokaṃ manasikarontassāpi, abbhokāse vasantassāpi, mahākassapattherasadise pahīnathinamiddhe kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhutaṅganissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti . Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa thinamiddhassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
于心不安息的状态下,若不如理作意,便生起掉举悔恨。所谓不安息,即是心不寂静之相,实质上就是指掉举悔恨本身。若有人于此多行不如理作意,掉举悔恨便会生起。因此说:‘诸比丘,有心的不安息;于此处,多修习不如理作意,即是令未生的掉举悔恨生起、已生的掉举悔恨增长广大的食粮。’显示巴利原文
Cetaso avūpasame ayonisomanasikārena uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādo hoti. Avūpasamo nāma avūpasantākāro. Uddhaccakukkuccamevetaṃ atthato. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato uddhaccakukkuccaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, cetaso avūpasamo, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādāya uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
然而,于名为定的心之安息中,以如理作意便能断除它。因此说:‘诸比丘,有心的安息;于此处,多修习如理作意,即是令未生的掉举悔恨不生起、已生的掉举悔恨得以断除的食粮。’(《相应部》5.232)显示巴利原文
Samādhisaṅkhāte pana cetaso vūpasame yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, cetaso vūpasamo, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
复次,有六法能令掉举与悔恨断除:多闻、好遍问、精通于律、亲近长老、亲近善知识,以及适宜之谈话。由于多闻,即使是学习一、二、三、四或五部尼柯耶,或以文句或以义理而学习者,其掉举与悔恨亦能断除。对于常常好问“此是否适宜”者,亦复如是。对于因于律之施设得纯熟自在而精通律者,对于亲近年长耆旧之长老者,以及亲近如持律者优波离长老那样的善知识者,掉举与悔恨亦能断除。又于行、住、坐、卧等中,以适宜或不适宜为所依的适宜之谈话,亦能令其断除。是故说:“六法能令掉举与悔恨断除。”以此六法所断除的掉举与悔恨中,掉举由阿拉汉道、悔恨由不来道,于未来永不复生,彼如是了知。显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattanti bahussutatā paripucchakatā vinaye pakataññutā vuddhasevitā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Bāhusaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena ca atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati. Kappiyākappiyaparipucchābahulassāpi, vinayapaññattiyaṃ ciṇṇavasibhāvatāya pakataññunopi, vuddhe mahallakatthere upasaṅkamantassāpi, upālittherasadise vinayadhare kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu kappiyākappiyanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīne uddhaccakukkucce uddhaccassa arahattamaggena kukkuccassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
于疑惑处法中,因不如理作意,便生疑惑。所谓疑惑处法,即一再成为疑惑之因的法,其本身即是疑惑。于彼处若数数修习不如理作意,疑惑便生。故说:“诸比丘,有疑惑处法;于此处,若多修习不如理作意,即为未生之疑惑令其生起、已生之疑惑令其增广增长之食。”显示巴利原文
Vicikicchāṭṭhānīyesu dhammesu ayonisomanasikārena vicikicchāya uppādo hoti. Vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma punappunaṃ vicikicchāya kāraṇattā vicikicchāva. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato vicikicchā uppajjati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā dhammā , tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya uppādāya uppannāya vā vicikicchāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
然而,于善等诸法,以如理作意便能断除。故说:“诸比丘,有善与不善法、有失与无失法、应亲近与不应亲近法、劣与胜法、黑白相对法;于其中,多修习如理作意,即是未生疑惑令其不生、已生疑惑令其断除之食。”显示巴利原文
Kusalādīsu dhammesu yonisomanasikārena panassā pahānaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā sāvajjānavajjā dhammā sevitabbāsevitabbā dhammā hīnappaṇītā dhammā kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro , ayamāhāro anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya anuppādāya uppannāya vā vicikicchāya pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
此外,有六种法能令疑惑断除:多闻、好遍问、于律精通、好乐决断、善知识,以及适宜谈话。因为通过多闻,即使学习一部……乃至五部尼柯耶,或依文句,或依义理而学习者,疑惑也能断除。对于恒常好问三宝者,对于于律纯熟自在者,对于多修习以三宝净信为本质的决断者,对于亲近如婆迦梨长老那样是信胜解者的善知识者,疑惑也能断除。在行、住、坐、卧等威仪中,以三宝功德为所依的适宜谈话,也能令其断除。因此说:‘六种法能令疑惑断除。’藉由这六种法所断除的疑惑,以入流道,于未来永不复起,他如是了知。显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattanti bahussutatā paripucchakatā vinaye pakataññutā adhimokkhabahulatā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Bāhusaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā…pe… pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati. Tīṇi ratanāni ārabbha paripucchābahulassāpi, vinaye ciṇṇavasibhāvassāpi, tīsu ratanesu okappaniyasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhabahulassāpi, saddhādhimutte vakkalittherasadise kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnāya vicikicchāya sotāpattimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
如此,‘或于内’等语的意思是:藉由把握这五种盖,比丘于自法、于他法,或一时于自法,一时于他法,随观法而安住。在此,集与灭应依不如理作意与如理作意,就净相、不净相等,按前面于五盖中所述的方式导出。自此以下,一切皆如前说。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ pañcanīvaraṇapariggahaṇena attano vā dhammesu, parassa vā dhammesu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha subhanimitta asubhanimittādīsu ayonisomanasikārayonisomanasikāravasena pañcasu nīvaraṇesu vuttanayena nīharitabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
于此,唯就‘把握诸盖之念即是苦圣谛’作如是连结后,便可了知该把握诸盖之比丘的趣向解脱门径。余者皆同前述。显示巴利原文
Kevalañhi idha nīvaraṇapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā nīvaraṇapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
蕴品注释显示巴利原文
Khandhapabbavaṇṇanā
116 如此以五盖分别法随观之后,现在为了以五蕴来分别,而开示“复次……”等语。其中,“于五取蕴”的意思是:取的蕴即是取蕴,指作为取的缘而生成的法聚、法蕴。这是此处的略说。详细的蕴论则见于《清净道论》。依自相了知“色”,即是:“这是色,唯有如此之色,此外更无其余之色。”受等也是如此。这是此处的略说。关于色等的详细说明,同样在《清净道论》的蕴论中已有阐述。“色的集”,是指依无明集等五种方式而有色的集。“色的灭”,是指依无明灭等五种方式而有色的灭,受等也是如此。这是此处的略说。详细内容则见于《清净道论》的生灭智论部分。显示巴利原文
116. Evaṃ pañcanīvaraṇavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni pañcakkhandhavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha pañcasu upādānakkhandhesūti upādānassa khandhā upādānakkhandhā, upādānassa paccayabhūtā dhammapuñjā dhammarāsayoti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo . Vitthārato pana khandhakathā visuddhimagge vuttā. Iti rūpanti ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito paraṃ rūpaṃ atthī’’ti sabhāvato rūpaṃ pajānāti. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārena pana rūpādīni visuddhimagge khandhakathāyameva vuttāni. Iti rūpassa samudayoti evaṃ avijjāsamudayādivasena pañcahākārehi rūpassa samudayo. Iti rūpassa atthaṅgamoti evaṃ avijjānirodhādivasena pañcahākārehi rūpassa atthaṅgamo, vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana visuddhimagge udayabbayañāṇakathāyaṃ vutto.
如此,“或于内”等:通过如此把握五蕴,比丘即于内法、于外法随观诸法,或时而于内法,或时而于外法随观而安住。此处的集与灭,则应依“以无明集故有色集”等,在五蕴中所说的五十种相而导出。此后所余,方式即如前所述。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ pañcakkhandhapariggahaṇena attano vā dhammesu, parassa vā dhammesu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādīnaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.50) pañcasu khandhesu vuttānaṃ paññāsāya lakkhaṇānaṃ vasena nīharitabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
此处,应作这样的连结:能把握诸蕴的念即是苦圣谛。作了此连结后,当知那把握诸蕴的比丘的出离之门。其余内容完全相同。显示巴利原文
Kevalañhi idha khandhapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā khandhapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
处品注释显示巴利原文
Āyatanapabbavaṇṇanā
117 如此以五蕴分析法随观之后,现在为以处进行分析,而说“再者……”等开头语。其中,“于六内、外处”即指眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意六内处,及色、声、香、味、触、法六外处。“且了知眼”:依真实特相了知眼净色。“且了知色”:依真实特相了知外部的四种所造色。“以及凡缘彼二者而生起结”:即缘于眼与色二者,便会生起结——欲贪结、瞋结、慢结、见结、疑结、戒禁取结、有贪结、嫉结、悭吝结、无明结,这十种结,同样依真实特相而了知。显示巴利原文
117. Evaṃ pañcakkhandhavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni āyatanavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesūti cakkhu sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhā kāyo manoti imesu chasu ajjhattikesu rūpaṃ saddo gandho raso phoṭṭhabbo dhammāti imesu chasu bāhiresu. Cakkhuṃ ca pajānātīti cakkhupasādaṃ yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānāti. Rūpe ca pajānātīti bahiddhā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānāti. Yañca tadubhayaṃ paṭicca uppajjati saṃyojananti yañca taṃ cakkhuṃ ceva rūpe cāti ubhayaṃ paṭicca kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭigha-māna-diṭṭhi-vicikicchā-sīlabbataparāmāsa-bhavarāga-issā-macchariyāvijjāsaṃyojananti dasavidhaṃ saṃyojanaṃ uppajjati, tañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānāti.
那么,这些结如何生起呢?先说眼门:当可意所缘出现在面前时,若人耽著享受欲乐,对其感到欢喜、执取,便生起欲贪结。面对不可意所缘而生起瞋怒时,便生起瞋结。生起“除我之外,无人能阐明此所缘”的想法时,便生起慢结。执取“此色所缘恒常、坚固”时,便生起见结。对此色所缘产生“这是有情吗?属于有情吗?”的疑惑时,便生起疑结。渴望“啊,愿我确实易于获得如此殊胜的生命状态”,并希求“有”时,便生起有贪结。受持某种戒禁,心想“未来若受持此戒禁,便能获得它”时,便生起戒禁取结。生起嫉妒,心想“啊,但愿别人都得不到这个色所缘”时,便生起嫉结。对已获得的色所缘产生悭吝时,便生起悭吝结。在这一切当中,由于俱生的无知,便生起无明结。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ panetaṃ uppajjatīti? Cakkhudvāre tāva āpāthagataṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ kāmassādavasena assādayato abhinandato kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Aniṭṭhārammaṇe kujjhato paṭighasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā maṃ na koci añño etaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ samattho atthī’’ti maññato mānasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Etaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ niccaṃ dhuva’’nti gaṇhato diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Etaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ satto nu kho, sattassa nu kho’’ti vicikicchato vicikicchāsaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Sampattibhave vata no idaṃ sulabhaṃ jāta’’nti bhavaṃ patthentassa bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Āyatimpi evarūpaṃ sīlabbataṃ samādiyitvā sakkā laddhu’’nti sīlabbataṃ samādiyantassa sīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Aho vata etaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ aññe na labheyyu’’nti usūyato issāsaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Attanā laddhaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ aññassa maccharāyato macchariyasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Sabbeheva sahajātaaññāṇavasena avijjāsaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati.
“又,如何了知未生起的结”:他了知尚未以现行方式生起的十种结,依何因缘而生起。“又,如何了知已生起的结”:他了知已生起的十种结——无论以未断尽状态存在,还是以现行方式已生起——依何因缘而得断除。“又,如何了知已断的结”:他了知已通过部分断除或镇伏断除而断除的十种结,依何因缘而未来不再生起。那么,依何因缘未来不再生起呢?见结、疑结、戒禁取结、嫉结、悭吝结,这五种结依入流道未来不再生起。欲贪结与瞋结中,粗重者依一来道未来不再生起,细微俱行者依不来道未来不再生起。慢结、有贪结、无明结,这三种结依阿拉汉道未来不再生起。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca anuppannassāti yena kāraṇena asamudācāravasena anuppannassa tassa dasavidhassāpi saṃyojanassa uppādo hoti, tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Yathā ca uppannassāti appahīnaṭṭhena pana samudācāravasena vā uppannassa tassa dasavidhassāpi saṃyojanassa yena kāraṇena pahānaṃ hoti, tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Yathā ca pahīnassāti tadaṅgavikkhambhanappahānavasena pahīnassāpi tassa dasavidhassa saṃyojanassa yena kāraṇena āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti, tañca pajānāti. Kena kāraṇena panassa āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti? Diṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsaissāmacchariyabhedassa tāva pañcavidhassa saṃyojanassa sotāpattimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti. Kāmarāgapaṭighasaṃyojanadvayassa oḷārikassa sakadāgāmimaggena, aṇusahagatassa anāgāmimaggena, mānabhavarāgāvijjāsaṃyojanattayassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti.
对于“他觉知耳……了知声……”等文句,也以同样方式理解。此外,此处关于处的详尽论述,应依《清净道论》中“处分别”所阐述的道理来了知。显示巴利原文
Sotañca pajānāti sadde cā tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Apicettha āyatanakathā vitthārato visuddhimagge āyatananiddese vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
如此,“或于内”的意思,即依内处的把握,或于自身诸法,或于他人诸法,随观法而住;依外处的把握,或于他人诸法,或于自身诸法,随观法而住;时或于自,时或于他,随观法而住。至于这里的集与灭:色处应归入色蕴来观察;无色处中,意处应归入识蕴来观察;法处则归入其余诸蕴来观察,并依“由无明集故眼集”等所说的方式推演。出世间法不应作如此执取而观察。从此以后,便都只是如前所说的方法了。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ ajjhattikāyatanapariggahaṇena attano vā dhammesu, bāhirāyatanapariggahaṇena parassa vā dhammesu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha ‘‘avijjāsamudayā cakkhusamudayo’’ti rūpāyatanassa rūpakkhandhe, arūpāyatanesu manāyatanassa viññāṇakkhandhe, dhammāyatanassa sesakkhandhesu vuttanayena nīharitabbā. Lokuttaradhammā na gahetabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
在这里,只要将能把握处的正念,连结为“苦谛”而作意,便能了知:对于正在把握处的比丘,这便是出离之门。其余内容,亦复如是。显示巴利原文
Kevalañhi idha āyatanapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā āyatanapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
觉支品的注释显示巴利原文
Bojjhaṅgapabbavaṇṇanā
118 如此,依内、外六处分别了法随观之后,现在为依觉支而分别,又说“再者,诸比丘……”等开头。其中,“诸觉支中”是指在能觉知者的支分中。“存在”是指由获得而现前。“念觉支”即名为念的正觉支。此处,从努力修观的行者开始即能觉知,故称为正觉;或者,凭借那由念等所组成的七法集合而觉知、从烦恼睡眠中醒来,或通达诸谛,这个法集就是正觉。那正觉的支分,或对于那正觉而言的支分,故说为正觉支。因此说“名为念的正觉支”。其余诸觉支也应以这样的方式来理解词义。显示巴利原文
118. Evaṃ cha ajjhattikabāhirāyatanavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni bojjhaṅgavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparanti ādimāha. Tattha bojjhaṅgesūti bujjhanakasattassa aṅgesu. Santanti paṭilābhavasena saṃvijjamānaṃ. Satisambojjhaṅganti satisaṅkhātaṃ sambojjhaṅgaṃ. Ettha hi sambujjhati āraddhavipassakato paṭṭhāya yogāvacaroti sambodhi, yāya vā so satiādikāya sattadhammasāmaggiyā sambujjhati kilesaniddāto uṭṭhāti, saccāni vā paṭivijjhati, sā dhammasāmaggī sambodhi. Tassa sambodhissa, tassā vā sambodhiyā aṅganti sambojjhaṅgaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satisaṅkhātaṃ sambojjhaṅga’’nti. Sesasambojjhaṅgesupi imināva nayena vacanattho veditabbo.
“不存在”是指因未获得而不存在。至于“未生起者如何生起”等内容,对于念觉支,首先这样说:“诸比丘,有念觉支处之法,在此,如理作意多多修习,这就是使未生的念觉支生起之食,也是令已生的念觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满之食。”如此便得生起。这里,念本身就是念觉支处之法。如理作意即具有如前所述的特征,若在那里多次修习它,念觉支便会生起。显示巴利原文
Asantanti appaṭilābhavasena avijjamānaṃ. Yathā ca anuppannassātiādīsu pana satisambojjhaṅgassa tāva – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.183) evaṃ uppādo hoti . Tattha satiyeva satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇoyeva, taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati.
又有四种法能令念觉支生起:念与正知、避开失念之人、亲近具念之人、心倾向于彼。即在前进、后退等七种场合,以念与正知,避开像弃食的乌鸦那样的失念之人,亲近像帝须达多长老、无畏长老那样具念的人,并在站立、坐下等场合,为了令念生起而让心倾向于、斜向于、朝向于念,念觉支便生起。如此,由四种因缘生起此念觉支后,依阿拉汉道而达到修习圆满,他如是了知。显示巴利原文
Apica cattāro dhammā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti satisampajaññaṃ muṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanatā upaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti. Abhikkantādīsu hi sattasu ṭhānesu satisampajaññena bhattanikkhittakākasadise muṭṭhassatipuggale parivajjanena tissadattattheraabhayattherasadise upaṭṭhitassatipuggale sevanena ṭhānanisajjādīsu satisamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatāya ca satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Evaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
对于择法觉支,是这样说的:“诸比丘,有善与不善法……乃至……有黑白相对之法。于此诸法中,多修习如理作意,即是未生择法觉支生起之食,亦是已生择法觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满之食。”(《相应部》5.232)如此便得生起。显示巴利原文
Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pana – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā…pe… kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti.
又有七法能令择法觉支生起:多请问、令依处清净、令诸根平衡、远离劣慧之人、亲近具慧之人、省察甚深智行之理、心倾向于彼(择法觉支)。其中,多请问是指对于蕴、界、处、根、力、觉支、道支、禅支、止、观的义理,多多请问。显示巴利原文
Apica satta dhammā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti paripucchakatā vatthuvisadakiriyā indriyasamattapaṭipādanā duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā paññavantapuggalasevanā gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha paripucchakatāti khandhadhātuāyatanaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgajhānaṅgasamathavipassanānaṃ atthasannissitaparipucchābahulatā.
“令依处清净”是指令内、外依处得以清净的作为。若其头发、指甲、体毛等过长,或身体积聚过多的污垢并为汗垢所染,那时内依处便不清净、不净。若其衣已破损、垢腻、散发恶臭,或坐卧具不洁,那时外依处便不清净、不净。因此,应先令人剪除须发等,再以吐下等方法令身轻快,乃至涂香沐浴,使内依处得以清净。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvisadakiriyāti ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yadā hissa kesanakhalomā atidīghā honti, sarīraṃ vā ussannadosañceva sedamalamakkhitañca, tadā ajjhattikaṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ . Yadā pana cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ duggandhaṃ hoti, senāsanaṃ vā uklāpaṃ, tadā bāhiraṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Tasmā kesādicchedāpanena uddhaṃvirecanaadhovirecanādīhi sarīrasallahukabhāvakaraṇena ucchādananhāpanena ca ajjhattikaṃ vatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ.
应通过缝补、洗涤、染色、整理等作业,令外依处清净。的确,当内外依处不清净时,所生起的心与心所,其智亦不清净,犹如依不清净的灯盏、灯盘、灯芯和油所生的灯焰,其光明也不清净。相反,当内外依处清净时,所生起的心、心所与智便得以清净,犹如依清净的灯盏、灯盘、灯芯和油所生的灯焰,其光明清净。因此说:“令依处清净能令择法觉支生起。”显示巴利原文
Sūcikammadhovanarajanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇādīhi bāhiraṃ vatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ. Etasmiñhi ajjhattikabāhire vatthusmiṃ avisade uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi aparisuddhaṃ hoti, aparisuddhāni dīpakapallakavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Visade pana ajjhattikabāhire vatthumhi uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi visadaṃ hoti, parisuddhāni dīpakapallakavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vatthuvisadakiriyā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattatī’’ti.
“令诸根平衡”是指让信等诸根达到平衡的状态。如果他的信根过强,其余诸根较弱,那么精进根便无法发挥策励的作用,念根无法发挥安住的作用,定根无法发挥不散乱的作用,慧根无法发挥了见的作用。因此,应通过审察法的自性,或以适当的方式,对因作意而增强的信根,通过不作意来使它减弱。于此可举婆迦梨长老的故事为例。如果精进根变得过强,那么信根便无法履行决意的功能,其余诸根也无法各自完成其作用。因此,应通过修习轻安等来让它减弱。关于这一点,也可举首那长老的故事为例。应当了知,当其他诸根中有一根变强时,其余诸根便不能圆满各自的作用。显示巴利原文
Indriyasamattapaṭipādanā nāma saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Sace hissa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, itarāni mandāni. Tato vīriyindriyaṃ paggahakiccaṃ, satindriyaṃ upaṭṭhānakiccaṃ, samādhindriyaṃ avikkhepakiccaṃ, paññindriyaṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vā yathā vā manasikaroto balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena hāpetabbaṃ. Vakkalittherassa vatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Sace pana vīriyindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, atha neva saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, na itarāni itarakiccabhedaṃ. Tasmā taṃ passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabbaṃ. Tatrāpi soṇattherassa vatthu dassetabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi ekassa balavabhāve sati itaresaṃ attano kiccesu asamatthatā veditabbā.
此处特别赞叹信与慧、定与精进的平衡。因为信强而慧弱的人会变成盲信者,对不应信的对象也生信。慧强而信弱的人则偏向狡诈虚伪的一面,如同因用药不当而引发的疾病,难以治愈。仅仅凭着“心念生起便是善”的想法而越过本分,不修布施等善行,便会投生地狱。二者平衡时,他才只对可信的对象生信。再者,定强而精进弱时,由于定属于懈怠的方面,懈怠便会压倒他。精进强而定弱时,由于精进属于掉举的方面,掉举便会压倒他。然而,定若被精进所约束,便不会陷入懈怠;精进若被定所约束,便不会陷入掉举。因此,这两者应当令其平衡。唯有两者平衡,安止才能生起。显示巴利原文
Visesato panettha saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānaṃ ca samataṃ pasaṃsanti. Balavasaddho hi mandapañño mudhāpasanno hoti, avatthusmiṃ pasīdati. Balavapañño mandasaddho kerāṭikapakkhaṃ bhajati. Bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hoti. Cittuppādamatteneva kusalaṃ hotīti atidhāvitvā dānādīni akaronto niraye uppajjati. Ubhinnaṃ samatāya vatthusmiṃyeva pasīdati . Balavasamādhiṃ pana mandavīriyaṃ samādhissa kosajjapakkhattā kosajjaṃ adhibhavati. Balavavīriyaṃ mandasamādhiṃ vīriyassa uddhaccapakkhattā uddhaccaṃ adhibhavati . Samādhi pana vīriyena saṃyojito kosajje patituṃ na labhati. Vīriyaṃ samādhinā saṃyojitaṃ uddhacce patituṃ na labhati. Tasmā tadubhayaṃ samaṃ kātabbaṃ. Ubhayasamatāya hi appanā hoti.
此外,对修止的行者而言,信根强也是合适的。因为他如是深信、净信,便能证得安止。至于定与慧二者,修止行者的心一境性(定)强是合适的,如此他便能证得安止;修观行者则以慧强为合适,如此他便能通达诸相。当然,两者平衡时也能获得安止。然而,念在任何情况下都应强而有力,因为念能守护心:当信、精进、慧这些属于掉举方面的心所起作用时,念能防止心落入掉举;当定这种属于懈怠方面的心所起作用时,念能防止心落入懈怠。因此,念就像一切调味料中的盐味,又像国王一切事务中的全能大臣,在一切处所都应希求。所以世尊这样说:‘念确实于一切处都有必要。何以故?因为心以念为皈依,念的特相是守护,若无念,便无法对心进行策励与抑制。’显示巴利原文
Apica samādhikammikassa balavatīpi saddhā vaṭṭati. Evaṃ saddahanto okappento appanaṃ pāpuṇissati. Samādhipaññāsu pana samādhikammikassa ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati, evañhi so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Vipassanākammikassa paññā balavatī vaṭṭati, evañhi so lakkhaṇappaṭivedhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ubhinnaṃ pana samatāyapi appanā hotiyeva. Sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭati. Sati hi cittaṃ uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ saddhāvīriyapaññānaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato, kosajjapakkhikena ca samādhinā kosajjapātato rakkhati. Tasmā sā loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu sabbakammikaamacco viya ca sabbarājakiccesu sabbattha icchitabbā. Tenāha – ‘‘sati ca pana sabbatthikā vuttā bhagavatā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Cittañhi sati paṭisaraṇaṃ, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā ca sati, na ca vinā satiyā cittassa paggahaniggaho hotī’’ti.
“远离劣慧之人”,是说远离那些对蕴等种种差别未能深入通达的愚痴无慧者。“亲近具慧之人”,是说亲近那些具备能摄持五十相等、成就生灭智的智慧之人。“省察甚深智行之理”,是说审察那活动于甚深蕴等处的甚深智慧的种种类别。“倾向于彼”,是说在行、住、坐、卧等一切姿态中,为了让择法觉支生起,心倾注、朝向、转向于法。而对于这样生起的择法觉支,他应知:依阿拉汉道,它的修习得以圆满。显示巴利原文
Duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā nāma khandhādibhede anogāḷhapaññānaṃ dummedhapuggalānaṃ ārakāva parivajjanaṃ. Paññavantapuggalasevanā nāma samapaññāsalakkhaṇapariggāhikāya udayabbayapaññāya samannāgatapuggalasevanā. Gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā nāma gambhīresu khandhādīsu pavattāya gambhīrapaññāya pabhedapaccavekkhaṇā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
精进觉支——“诸比丘,有发勤界、出离界、勇猛界。于此如理作意、反复修习,这便是令未生起的精进觉支生起的食,也是令已生起的精进觉支增长、广大、修习圆满的食。”(《相应部》5.232)如此,精进觉支便会生起。显示巴利原文
Vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ārabbhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu, tattha yoniso manasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti.
再者,有十一种法能令精进觉支生起:省察恶趣的怖畏、见到功德、省察所行之道、恭敬钵食、省察遗产的伟大、省察导师的伟大、省察出生的伟大、省察同梵行者的伟大、远离懈怠之人、亲近精进勤修之人,以及全心倾向于此。显示巴利原文
Apica ekādasa dhammā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇatā ānisaṃsadassāvitā gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇatā piṇḍapātāpacāyanatā dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇatā satthumahattapaccavekkhaṇatā jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā sabrahmacārimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā kusītapuggalaparivajjanatā āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti.
其中,在地狱,从遭受五种束缚的业报刑罚开始,领受极大痛苦之时;在畜生道,被网、钩、笼等捕捉之时,或遭鞭杖、荆棘等打击,被驱役拉车等时;在饿鬼界,纵经数千年乃至一佛间隔之久,仍为饥渴所逼迫之时;在黑垢阿修罗中,身体只剩六十肘或八十肘高,皮包骨头,遭受风、热等苦之时——在所有这些时候,精进觉支都无从生起。唯有当下——‘比丘,现在正是你应当精勤之时!’——如此省察恶趣的怖畏,精进觉支便会生起。显示巴利原文
Tattha nirayesu pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇato paṭṭhāya mahādukkhaṃ anubhavanakālepi, tiracchānayoniyaṃ jālakkhipakumīnādīhi gahitakālepi, pājanakaṇṭakādippahāratunnassa pana sakaṭavāhanādikālepi, pettivisaye anekānipi vassasahassāni ekaṃ buddhantarampi khuppipāsāhi āturitakālepi, kālakañjikaasuresu saṭṭhihatthaasītihatthappamāṇena aṭṭhicammamatteneva attabhāvena vātātapādidukkhānubhavanakālepi na sakkā vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṃ uppādetuṃ. Ayameva te bhikkhu kālo vīriyakaraṇāyāti evaṃ apāyabhayaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi vīriyasambojjhaṅgo uppajjati.
‘懈怠者无法证得九种出世间法,唯有精进勤修者才能证得,这便是精进的功德。’——如此见到功德,也能令精进觉支生起。‘由一切佛、独觉佛、大弟子们所走过的道路,必须去行走;而懈怠者无法行走此道。’——如此省察所行之道,也能生起。‘那些以饮食等供养你的人们,并非你的亲属,也非你的奴仆或雇工,更不是怀着“我们将依靠你而活命”的想法才布施这些殊胜饮食等,而是期望自己的布施能获致大果报才布施的。导师并非为了看到你“受用这些资具后,身体强健、安乐而住”而允许你接受资具,而是为了让你“受用后,能修习沙门法,从轮回的苦中解脱”才开许资具的。如今,你若懈怠而住,便无法恭敬报答那一钵之食;唯有精进勤修者,才称得上恭敬钵食。’——如此省察恭敬钵食的道理,精进觉支便能生起,如同大末得长老的事例一样。显示巴利原文
‘‘Na sakkā kusītena navalokuttaradhammaṃ laddhuṃ, āraddhavīriyeneva sakkā ayamānisaṃso vīriyassā’’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsadassāvinopi uppajjati. ‘‘Sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhamahāsāvakehi te gatamaggo gantabbo, so ca na sakkā kusītena gantu’’nti evaṃ gamanavīthiṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati. ‘‘Ye taṃ piṇḍapātādīhi upaṭṭhahanti, ime te manussā neva ñātakā, na dāsakammakarā, nāpi ‘taṃ nissāya jīvissāmā’ti te paṇītāni piṇḍapātādīni denti, atha kho attano kārānaṃ mahapphalataṃ paccāsīsamānā denti, satthārāpi ‘ayaṃ ime paccaye paribhuñjitvā kāyadaḷhībahulo sukhaṃ viharissatī’ti na evaṃ sampassatā tuyhaṃ paccayā anuññātā, atha kho ‘ayaṃ ime paribhuñjamāno samaṇadhammaṃ katvā vaṭṭadukkhato muccissatī’ti te paccayā anuññātā, so dāni tvaṃ kusīto viharanto na taṃ piṇḍaṃ apacāyissasi, āraddhavīriyasseva hi piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ nāma hotī’’ti evaṃ piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati mahāmittattherassa viya.
据说,长老住在名叫农夫窟的地方。在他行脚托钵的村庄中,有一位大近事女,将长老视如己子般照料。某一天,她准备前往森林时,对女儿说:“女儿,旧米在某处,乳在某处,酥油在某处,糖蜜在某处。等你的圣友兄弟到来时,你便煮好饭,配上乳、酥油和糖蜜供养他,你自己也一同吃。我昨天是把煮好的别住食拌着酸粥吃了。”“母亲,那您白天吃什么?”“你只需煮一点菜叶碎米酸粥放着就好,女儿。”显示巴利原文
Thero kira kassakaleṇe nāma paṭivasati. Tassa ca gocaragāme ekā mahāupāsikā theraṃ puttaṃ katvā paṭijaggati. Sā ekadivasaṃ araññaṃ gacchantī dhītaraṃ āha – ‘‘amma asukasmiṃ ṭhāne purāṇataṇḍulā, asukasmiṃ khīraṃ, asukasmiṃ sappi, asukasmiṃ phāṇitaṃ, tava bhātikassa ayyamittassa āgatakāle bhattaṃ pacitvā khīrasappiphāṇitehi saddhiṃ dehi, tvaṃ ca bhuñjeyyāsi, ahaṃ pana hiyyo pakkaṃ pārivāsikabhattaṃ kañjikena bhuttāmhī’’ti. Divā kiṃ bhuñjissasi ammāti? Sākapaṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā kaṇataṇḍulehi ambilayāguṃ pacitvā ṭhapehi ammāti.
长老披上袈裟,正要取出钵时听到了这番话,便自我教诫道:“这位大近事女,据说拌着酸粥吃了别住食,白天也将只吃菜叶碎米酸粥。可是为了你,她却指明旧米等细软之物。她这样做,并非期望田地、房产、食物或衣物,而是希求三种成就才作此布施。你能给她这些成就吗?还是不能?再者,这团食,你断不能以贪、嗔、痴来取用。”如此思惟后,他将钵收回袋中,解开袋口结,返回农夫窟,把钵放在床下,将衣搭在衣竿上,下定决心:“不证阿拉汉果,绝不出此门!”便如此发奋精进而坐。这位长久以来从未放逸的比丘,增修观禅,便于食前证得阿拉汉果,犹如盛开的莲花。这位大漏尽者面含微笑,走了出来。居住在洞口树上的天神便说:显示巴利原文
Thero cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattaṃ nīharantova taṃ saddaṃ sutvā attānaṃ ovadi – ‘‘mahāupāsikā kira kañjiyena pārivāsikabhattaṃ bhuñji, divāpi kaṇapaṇṇambilayāguṃ bhuñjissati, tuyhaṃ atthāya pana purāṇataṇḍulādīni ācikkhati, taṃ nissāya kho panesā neva khettaṃ na vatthuṃ na bhattaṃ na vatthaṃ paccāsīsati, tisso pana sampattiyo patthayamānā deti, tvaṃ etissā tā sampattiyo dātuṃ sakkhissasi na sakkhissasīti, ayaṃ kho pana piṇḍapāto tayā sarāgena sadosena samohena na sakkā gaṇhitunti pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvā gaṇṭhikaṃ muñcitvā nivattitvā kassakaleṇameva gantvā pattaṃ heṭṭhāmañce cīvaraṃ cīvaravaṃse ṭhapetvā arahattaṃ apāpuṇitvā na nikkhamissāmī’’ti vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā nisīdi. Dīgharattaṃ appamatto hutvā nivutthabhikkhu vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā purebhattameva arahattaṃ patvā vikasitaṃ viya padumaṃ mahākhīṇāsavo sitaṃ karontova nikkhami. Leṇadvāre rukkhamhi adhivatthā devatā –
礼敬你,人中最胜者,礼敬你,人中至上者;
您的诸漏已尽,您是应供者,贤者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama; Yassa te āsavā khīṇā, dakkhiṇeyyosi mārisā’’ti. –
如此发出感叹语后,她又说:“尊者,像您这样的阿拉汉入村乞食,那些老妇人供养了食物之后,将从苦中解脱。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ udānaṃ udānetvā ‘‘bhante, piṇḍāya paviṭṭhānaṃ tumhādisānaṃ arahantānaṃ bhikkhaṃ datvā mahallakitthiyo dukkhā muccissantī’’ti āha.
长老起身,开门观察时辰,知道尚是清晨,便取了钵与衣进村。少女也已备好食物,坐着望向门口,心想:“现在我的兄弟要来了,就要来了。”长老到达家门口时,她接过钵,盛满拌入酥油和糖蜜的乳粥,放到他手中。长老说:“愿你快乐!”作随喜后便离开了。少女一直目送他离去。那时长老的肤色极为清净,诸根澄净,面容如同从系缚中解脱的棕榈果一般,分外光耀。大近事女从森林回来后问:“女儿,你兄弟来了吗?”少女便将全部经过告诉了她。近事女知道:“今天我的儿子完成了出家应做之事”,便说:“女儿,你的兄弟在佛陀教法中得安乐,不会厌倦了。”显示巴利原文
Thero uṭṭhahitvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā kālaṃ olokento pātoyevāti ñatvā pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṃ pāvisi. Dārikāpi bhattaṃ sampādetvā ‘‘idāni me bhātā āgamissati , idāni āgamissatī’’ti dvāraṃ olokayamānā nisīdi. Sā there gharadvāraṃ sampatte pattaṃ gahetvā sappiphāṇitayojitassa khīrapiṇḍapātassa pūretvā hatthe ṭhapesi. Thero ‘‘sukhaṃ hotū’’ti anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sāpi taṃ olokayamānāva aṭṭhāsi. Therassa hi tadā ativiya parisuddho chavivaṇṇo ahosi, vippasannāni indriyāni, mukhaṃ bandhanā pamuttatālapakkaṃ viya ativiya virocittha. Mahāupāsikā araññā āgantvā ‘‘kiṃ amma, bhātiko te āgato’’ti pucchi. Sā sabbaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Sā upāsikā ‘‘ajja me puttassa pabbajitakiccaṃ matthakaṃ patta’’nti ñatvā ‘‘abhiramati te amma bhātā buddhasāsane na ukkaṇṭhatī’’ti āha.
然而,导师的遗产极为伟大——也就是所谓的七圣财,懈怠者是得不到的。正如行为不端的儿子,父母认为‘他不是我们的儿子’而将他摈弃在外,父母过世后他便得不到遗产;同样,懈怠者也得不到这圣财的遗产,唯有精进者方能获得。当他如此省察遗产的伟大性时,喜觉支便生起。再者,你的导师也极为伟大:导师入母胎时、降生时、成正觉时、转法轮时、显现双神变时、从天降下时、舍弃寿行时、入般涅槃时,十千世界悉皆震动。你在如此伟大的导师教法中出家,却还懈怠,这合适吗?当他如此省察导师的伟大性时,喜觉支也会生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mahantaṃ kho panetaṃ satthu dāyajjaṃ, yadidaṃ sattaariyadhanaṃ nāma, taṃ na sakkā kusītena gahetuṃ. Yathā hi vippaṭipannaṃ puttaṃ mātāpitaro ‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ aputto’ti paribāhiraṃ karonti, so tesaṃ accayena dāyajjaṃ na labhati, evaṃ kusītopi idaṃ ariyadhanadāyajjaṃ na labhati, āraddhavīriyova labhatī’’ti dāyajjamahattataṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. ‘‘Mahā kho pana te satthā, satthuno hi mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇakālepi abhinikkhamanepi abhisambodhiyampi dhammacakkappavattanayamakapāṭihāriyadevorohaṇa-āyusaṅkhāravossajjanesupi parinibbānakālepi dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha, yuttaṃ nu te evarūpassa satthuno sāsane ‘pabbajitvā kusītena bhavitu’’’nti evaṃ satthumahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
再者,通过省察种姓:‘你现在并非卑劣的种姓,而是来自未混杂的大选举统系,生于甘蔗王族,是净饭大王和摩诃摩耶夫人的孙子,是罗睺罗跋陀的弟弟。你作为这样的胜者之子,却懈怠度日,这是不合适的。’这样省察种姓的伟大性时,喜觉支便生起。‘舍利弗、目犍连以及八十位大弟子,都是凭精进才证悟出世间法的。身为同梵行者的你,是要跟随他们的道路,还是不跟随呢?’这样省察同梵行者的伟大性时,喜觉支也会生起。当他远离那些如饱食的蟒蛇般身心怠惰的人,亲近精进、意志坚定的人,并在行、住、坐、卧中,为激发精进而使心倾向精进、朝向精进、专注精进时,喜觉支便会生起。当喜觉支如此生起,他了知:修习经由阿拉汉道而达到圆满。显示巴利原文
Jātiyāpi – ‘‘tvaṃ idāni na lāmakajātiko, asambhinnāya mahāsammatapaveṇiyā āgato, ukkākarājavaṃse jātosi, suddhodhanamahārājassa mahāmāyādeviyā ca nattā, rāhulabhaddassa kaniṭṭho, tayā nāma evarūpena jinaputtena hutvā na yuttaṃ kusītena viharitu’’nti evaṃ jātimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. ‘‘Sāriputtamoggallānā ceva asīti ca mahāsāvakā vīriyeneva lokuttaradhammaṃ paṭivijjhiṃsu, tvaṃ etesaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ maggaṃ paṭipajjissasi na paṭipajjissasī’’ti evaṃ sabrahmacārimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. Kucchiṃ pūretvā ṭhitaajagarasadise vissaṭṭhakāyikacetasikavīriye kusītapuggale parivajjantassāpi, āraddhavīriye pahitatte puggale sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu vīriyuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
喜觉支:‘诸比丘,有喜觉支生起处之法。对此,多修如理作意,这是使未生的喜觉支生起的食,也是使已生的喜觉支增长、广大、修习圆满的食。’(《相应部》5.232)喜觉支就是这样生起的。其中,喜觉支生起处之法就是指喜本身;能令它生起的作意,称为如理作意。显示巴利原文
Pītisambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha pītiyeva pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma, tassa uppādakamanasikāro yonisomanasikāro nāma.
再者,有十一种法能引生喜觉支:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、施随念、天随念、寂止随念、回避粗野之人、亲近温和之人、省察能令人净信的经典,以及心倾向于此。显示巴利原文
Apica ekādasa dhammā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti buddhānussati dhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatānussati upasamānussati lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā siniddhapuggalasevanatā pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇatā tadadhimuttatāti.
因为随念佛功德时,喜觉支能遍满全身,生起乃至近行定。随念法与僧的功德时也是如此;长时无缺地守护四遍清净戒,省察戒行时也是如此;在家者省察所持十戒或五戒时,也是如此;遭遇饥荒等怖畏时,将殊胜饮食施予同梵行者,随后省察‘我们作了这样的布施’之舍德时,也是如此;在家者于彼时省察对持戒者所作的布施时,也是如此;省察‘那些天人具足何等功德而生天界,而那样的功德在我自身中亦有’时,也是如此;省察‘被等至所镇伏的烦恼,即使六十年、七十年也不会现行’时,也是如此;回避那些粗野之人——他们礼拜塔庙、菩提树或长老时,因不恭敬而显露粗野之相,对佛等无净信、无敬爱,心如驴背尘土般粗涩——回避这种人,喜觉支也会生起;亲近对佛等具足净信、心柔软滋润之人,也会生起;省察那些阐扬三宝功德、令人净信的经典,也会生起;为在行、住、坐、卧等威仪中令喜生起,而将心倾向、投向、朝向它,也会生起。当它如此生起后,比丘了知:‘此喜觉支,依阿拉汉道而达修习圆满。’显示巴利原文
Buddhaguṇe anussarantassāpi hi yāva upacārā sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno pītisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Dhammasaṅghaguṇe anussarantassāpi, dīgharattaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā rakkhitaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihino dasasīlapañcasīlaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, dubbhikkhabhayādīsu paṇītaṃ bhojanaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ datvā ‘‘evaṃ nāma adamhā’’ti cāgaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihinopi evarūpe kāle sīlavantānaṃ dinnadānaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, yehi guṇehi samannāgatā devatā devattaṃ pattā, tathārūpānaṃ guṇānaṃ attani atthitaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, ‘‘samāpattiyā vikkhambhitā kilesā saṭṭhipi, sattatipi vassāni na samudācarantī’’ti paccavekkhantassāpi, cetiyadassanabodhidassanatheradassanesu asakkaccakiriyāya saṃsūcitalūkhabhāve buddhādīsu pasādasinehābhāvena gadrabhapiṭṭhe rajasadise lūkhapuggale parivajjantassāpi, buddhādīsu pasādabahule muducitte siniddhapuggale sevantassāpi, ratanattayaguṇaparidīpake pasādanīye suttante paccavekkhantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu pītiuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
轻安觉支——依‘诸比丘,有身轻安与心轻安。于此,多多修习如理作意,即是未生轻安觉支生起之食,亦是已生轻安觉支增长、广大、修习圆满之食’而如是生起。显示巴利原文
Passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kāyapassaddhi cittapassaddhi, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti evaṃ uppādo hoti.
再者,有七种法能引生轻安觉支:受用殊胜的食物、享用适宜的气候、安住舒适的威仪、中道的加行、远离身躁动者、亲近身轻安者,以及心倾向于轻安。显示巴利原文
Apica satta dhammā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti paṇītabhojanasevanatā utusukhasevanatā iriyāpathasukhasevanatā majjhattapayogatā sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā passaddhakāyapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti.
因为受用殊胜、润泽、合宜的食物时,以及在寒、热等气候和行、立等威仪中,依适合的气候与威仪而住时,轻安便会生起。然而,这并非就大人种性者而言,他们于一切气候、一切威仪皆能安忍。这话是针对那些于气候、威仪有适应与不适应差别的人说的:他只要避开不适应的气候和威仪,采取适应的,轻安也会生起。所谓“中道的加行”,是指省察自他业力各有所属;依此中道的加行,轻安也会生起。若有人惯以土块、棍棒等伤害他人而行,远离这类身躁动者,轻安也会生起;亲近那些收摄手足、身得轻安之人,轻安也会生起;为了在行、立、坐、卧等威仪中令轻安生起,而将心倾向、投入、朝向于它,轻安也会生起。如此生起之后,他知晓:‘此轻安觉支,经由阿拉汉道而达至修习圆满。’显示巴利原文
Paṇītañhi siniddhaṃ sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjantassāpi, sītuṇhesu utūsu ṭhānādīsu iriyāpathesu sappāyaṃ utuṃ ca iriyāpathaṃ ca sevantassāpi passaddhi uppajjati. Yo pana mahāpurisajātiko sabbautuiriyāpathakkhamova hoti, na taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yassa sabhāgavisabhāgatā atthi, tasseva visabhāge utuiriyāpathe vajjetvā sabhāge sevantassāpi uppajjati. Majjhattapayogo vuccati attano ca parassa ca kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇā, iminā majjhattapayogena uppajjati. Yo leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi paraṃ viheṭhayamānova vicarati. Evarūpaṃ sāraddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ parivajjantassāpi, saṃyatapādapāṇiṃ passaddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu passaddhiuppādanatthāya ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
定觉支的生起,是这么说的:“诸比丘,有止相,有不散乱相。于此,多修习如理作意,即是未生起的定觉支生起之食,也是已生起的定觉支增长、广大、修习圆满之食。”(《相应部》5.232)此处,止本身就是“止相”;在不散乱的意义上,亦称为“不散乱相”。显示巴利原文
Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, samathanimittaṃ abyagganimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha samathova samathanimittaṃ, avikkhepaṭṭhena ca abyagganimittanti.
再者,有十一法能引生定觉支:依处清净、诸根平衡具足、善巧于相、适时策励心、适时抑制心、适时令心喜悦、适时令心舍置、远离未得定之人、亲近得定之人、省察禅那与解脱,以及心向定倾斜。其中,“依处清净”与“诸根平衡具足”应按前文所说来理解。显示巴利原文
Apica ekādasa dhammā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti vatthuvisadakiriyatā indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā nimittakusalatā samaye cittassa paggahaṇatā samaye cittassa niggahaṇatā samaye sampahaṃsanatā samaye ajjhupekkhanatā asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā samāhitapuggalasevanatā jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha vatthuvisadakiriyatā ca indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
“善巧于相”,指善巧地执取遍相。“适时策励心”:当心因精进过于沉滞等原因而陷入昏沉时,应在那时策发择法觉支与精进觉支,以策励其心。“适时抑制心”:当心因精进过于亢奋等原因而变得掉举时,应在那时策发轻安觉支、定觉支与舍觉支,以抑制其心。“适时令心喜悦”:当心因运用智慧之力薄弱,或因尚未证得寂止之乐而味同嚼蜡时,应在那时通过省察八种悚惧事令其悚惧。八种悚惧事即:生、老、病、死四种;恶趣之苦为第五;过去轮回根本之苦;未来轮回根本之苦;以及现在以觅食为根本之苦。再以随念三宝功德令净信生起。此即名为“适时令心喜悦”。显示巴利原文
Nimittakusalatā nāma kasiṇanimittassa uggahaṇakusalatā. Samaye cittassa paggahaṇatāti yasmiṃ samaye atisithilavīriyatādīhi līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayavīriyasambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa paggahaṇaṃ. Samaye cittassa niggahaṇatāti yasmiṃ samaye accāraddhavīriyatādīhi uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa niggahaṇaṃ. Samaye sampahaṃsanatāti yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paññāpayogamandatāya vā upasamasukhānadhigamena vā nirassādaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye aṭṭhasaṃvegavatthupaccavekkhaṇena saṃvejeti. Aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūni nāma jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni cattāri, apāyadukkhaṃ pañcamaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ dukkhanti. Ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena ca pasādaṃ janeti. Ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘samaye sampahaṃsanatā’’ti.
“适时令心舍置”:当心依于正行,不昏沉、不掉举、不枯燥,于所缘上相续平稳而转,步入奢摩他之道时,此时便不再于策励、抑制及令喜悦上着力,如同御者对于已平稳奔驰之马那样。这便称为“适时令心舍置”。“远离未得定之人”,指远离那些未得近行定或安止定、心散乱者。“亲近得定之人”,指依止、靠近、亲近那些通过近行定或安止定而得定者。“心向定倾斜”:即在行、立、坐、卧等一切威仪中,心只是朝向定、倾向于定、趣向于定,以令定生起。如此修习之人,其定觉支便会生起。当它生起后,他了知:通过阿拉汉道,定觉支的修习已达圆满。显示巴利原文
Samaye ajjhupekkhanatā nāma yasmiṃ samaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ āgamma alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ anirassādaṃ ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadāssa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu na byāpāraṃ āpajjati sārathi viya samappavattesu. Assesu. Ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘samaye ajjhupekkhanatā’’ti. Asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā nāma upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā appattānaṃ vikkhittacittānaṃ puggalānaṃ ārakā parivajjanaṃ. Samāhitapuggalasevanatā nāma upacārena vā appanāya vā samāhitacittānaṃ sevanā bhajanā payirupāsanā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu samādhiuppādanatthaṃyeva ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evañhi paṭipajjato esa uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
舍觉支的生起如此说:“诸比丘,有舍觉支住立之法。于这些法中,如理作意的多修习,即是未生舍觉支生起之食,也是已生舍觉支增长、广大、修习圆满之食。”(《相应部》5.232)其中,所谓“舍觉支住立之法”,指的正是舍本身。显示巴利原文
Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha upekkhāyeva upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma.
更有五种法令舍觉支生起:对有情的中舍性、对诸行的中舍性、回避偏爱有情与诸行之人、亲近于有情与诸行保持中舍之人,以及心倾向于舍。显示巴利原文
Apica pañca dhammā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti sattamajjhattatā saṅkhāramajjhattatā sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti.
其中,以两种方式生起对有情的中舍:以“你依自己的业而来,也将依自己的业而去;此人亦是依自己的业而来,依自己的业而去,你贪恋他作什么?”如是省察业的所有性;以及以“从究竟义上说,有情本不存在,你贪恋他作什么?”如是省察无有情。以两种方式生起对诸行的中舍:以“这件袈裟将逐渐变色、朽坏,终成擦脚布,之后被弃于垃圾桶;倘若它有主人,便不会任凭自己如此毁坏”如是省察无有主人;以及以“它是无常的、暂时的”如是省察暂时性。不仅对袈裟如此,对钵等诸物也应当这样运用。显示巴利原文
Tattha dvīhākārehi sattamajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti – ‘‘tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attano kammena gamissasi, esopi attano kammena āgantvā attano kammena gamissati, tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’’ti evaṃ kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇena ca, ‘‘paramatthato sattoyeva natthi, so tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’’ti evaṃ nissattapaccavekkhaṇena ca. Dvīhevākārehi saṅkhāramajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti – ‘‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ anupubbena vaṇṇavikāraṃ ceva jiṇṇabhāvaṃ ca upagantvā pādapuñchanacoḷakaṃ hutvā yaṭṭhikoṭiyā chaḍḍanīyaṃ bhavissati, sace panassa sāmiko bhaveyya, nāssa evaṃ vinassituṃ dadeyyā’’ti evaṃ asāmikabhāvaṃ paccavekkhaṇena, ‘‘anaddhaniyaṃ idaṃ tāvakālika’’nti evaṃ tāvakālikatāpaccavekkhaṇena ca. Yathā ca cīvare, evaṃ pattādīsupi yojanā kātabbā.
“回避偏爱有情与诸行的人”:此处,若有人——在家人贪爱自己的儿女等,出家人贪爱自己的弟子、同亲教师等——亲手为他们剃发、缝衣、洗衣、染衣、煮钵等,片刻不见便问:“某某沙弥在何处?某某年少比丘在何处?”如迷路的鹿般到处张望;当别人为了剃发等事宜请求“请暂时让某某过来一下”时,他也不应允,说:“我们自己都不让他做自己的事,你们把他带去只会让他劳累。”这种人称为“偏爱有情者”。又若有人贪爱钵、衣、铜碗、剪刀、拐杖等物品,连他人用手碰一下也不许可,别人临时借用时,他说:“我自己爱惜这东西都不怎么用,如何能给你们?”这种人称为“偏爱诸行者”。若有人对这两类对象都保持中舍、态度淡然,则称为“对有情与诸行中舍者”。如此,舍觉支会于远离这种偏爱有情与诸行的人、亲近对有情与诸行中舍的人,并在行、住、坐、卧等一切威仪中将心倾向于它的人身上生起。当它这样生起之后,应了知:通过阿拉汉道,它的修习便已圆满。显示巴利原文
Sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatāti ettha yo puggalo gihi vā attano puttadhītādike, pabbajito vā attano antevāsikasamānupajjhāyakādike mamāyati, sahattheneva nesaṃ kesacchedanasūcikammacīvaradhovanarajanapattapacanādīni karoti, muhuttampi apassanto ‘‘asuko sāmaṇero kuhiṃ, asuko daharo kuhi’’nti bhantamigo viya ito cito ca āloketi , aññena kesacchedanādīnaṃ atthāya ‘‘muhuttaṃ tāva asukaṃ pesethā’’ti yācīyamānopi ‘‘amhepi taṃ attano kammaṃ na kārema, tumhe taṃ gahetvā kilamessathā’’ti na deti. Ayaṃ sattakelāyano nāma. Yo pana pattacīvarathālakakattarayaṭṭhiādīni mamāyati, aññassa hatthena parāmasitumpi na deti, tāvakālikaṃ yācito ‘‘mayampi idaṃ mamāyantā na paribhuñjāma, tumhākaṃ kiṃ dassāmā’’ti vadati. Ayaṃ saṅkhārakelāyano nāma. Yo pana tesu dvīsupi vatthūsu majjhatto udāsino. Ayaṃ sattasaṅkhāramajjhatto nāma. Iti ayaṃ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo evarūpaṃ sattasaṅkhārakelāyanaṃ puggalaṃ ārakā parivajjantassāpi, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalaṃ sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu taduppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
“如是或于内”等:这是说,如此把握自己或他人的七觉支,或时而把握自之觉支,时而把握他之觉支,于诸法中随观法而安住。而此处觉支的生灭,应通过它们的现起与消逝来了知。此后所说的方法与前相同。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā satta sambojjhaṅge pariggaṇhitvā, parassa vā, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa bojjhaṅge pariggaṇhitvā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha bojjhaṅgānaṃ nibbattinirodhavasena veditabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
此处,仅需将把握觉支的念与“苦圣谛”等相联结,即可了知这位把握觉支比丘的解脱门。其余内容如前所说相同。显示巴利原文
Kevalañhi idha bojjhaṅgapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā bojjhaṅgapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
四谛分注释显示巴利原文
Catusaccapabbavaṇṇanā
119 如此,以七觉支分析了法随观之后,现在为了通过四圣谛来解析,世尊接着开示了“再者,诸比丘……”等起首之语。显示巴利原文
119. Evaṃ sattabojjhaṅgavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni catusaccavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha.
这里,“如实了知此是苦”是指:除去渴爱,对三界诸法,如其自性地了知“这是苦”;对于能生、能集起此苦的前世渴爱,了知“这是苦集”;对于两者都不再转起的涅槃,了知“这是苦灭”;对于遍知苦、断集、证灭的圣道,了知“这是导向苦灭之道”,如其自性地了知。这就是它的义理。其余圣谛的解说,在《清净道论》中已详细阐明。显示巴利原文
Tattha idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ tebhūmake dhamme ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti yathāsabhāvato pajānāti, tasseva kho pana dukkhassa janikaṃ samuṭṭhāpikaṃ purimataṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti, ubhinnaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti, dukkhaparijānanaṃ samudayapajahanaṃ nirodhasacchikaraṇaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti yathāsabhāvato pajānātīti attho. Avasesā ariyasaccakathā visuddhimagge vitthāritāyeva.
“如是于内”等:即通过把握自身的四圣谛,或把握他人的四圣谛,或有时把握自身的、有时把握他人的四圣谛,在诸法上随观法而住。而这里的四谛“生灭”,则当随其可能,从生起与止息来理解。此后的解说,与前述方式相同。显示巴利原文
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā cattāri saccāni pariggaṇhitvā, parassa vā, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa cattāri saccāni pariggaṇhitvā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha catunnaṃ saccānaṃ yathāsambhavato uppattinivattivasena veditabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
在这里,只需将把握四圣谛的念与‘苦圣谛’等相联结,便可了知那位把握圣谛的比丘的出离门路。其余如前。显示巴利原文
Kevalañhi idha catusaccapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā saccapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
至此为止,一共宣说了二十一种业处,即:入出息念、四威仪、四正知、三十二身分、四界差别、九种墓墟观、受随观、心随观、盖的把握、蕴的把握、处的把握、觉支的把握和谛的把握。其中,入出息念、三十二身分和九种墓墟观,这十一种是安止业处。然而,长部诵者大西瓦长老说:‘九种墓墟观是作为过患随观来讲的。’因此,按照他的观点,安止业处只有两种,其余的都属于近行业处。那么,在所有这些业处中,是否都会生起倾向呢?并非如此。因为在威仪、正知、盖和觉支当中,倾向不会生起,而在其余业处中则会生起。然而,大西瓦长老却说:‘在这些当中也会生起倾向。因为他是这样把握的:我有四威仪吗?还是没有?我有四正知吗?还是没有?我有五盖吗?还是没有?我有七觉支吗?还是没有?因此,在一切处都会生起倾向。’显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ānāpānaṃ catuiriyāpathaṃ catusampajaññaṃ dvattiṃsākāraṃ catudhātuvavatthānaṃ navasivathikā vedanānupassanā cittānupassanā nīvaraṇapariggaho khandhapariggaho āyatanapariggaho bojjhaṅgapariggaho saccapariggahoti ekavīsati kammaṭṭhānāni vuttāni. Tesu ānāpānaṃ dvattiṃsākāro navasivathikāti ekādasa appanākammaṭṭhānāni honti. Dīghabhāṇakamahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘navasivathikā ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttā’’ti āha. Tasmā tassa matena dveyeva appanākammaṭṭhānāni, sesāni upacārakammaṭṭhānāni. Kiṃ panetesu sabbesu abhiniveso jāyatīti? Na jāyati. Iriyāpathasampajaññanīvaraṇabojjhaṅgesu hi abhiniveso na jāyati, sesesu jāyatīti. Mahāsīvatthero panāha – ‘‘etesupi abhiniveso jāyati, ayañhi atthi nu kho me cattāro iriyāpathā, udāhu natthi, atthi nu kho me catusampajaññaṃ, udāhu natthi, atthi nu kho me pañcanīvaraṇā, udāhu natthi, atthi nu kho me sattabojjhaṅgā, udāhu natthīti evaṃ pariggaṇhāti, tasmā sabbattha abhiniveso jāyatī’’ti.
137 ‘诸比丘,无论何人’:指的是比丘、比丘尼、优婆塞或优婆夷。‘应如此修习’:即依最初所说的修习次第而修习。‘可预期’:意为应当预期,必定会发生。‘Aññā’:指阿罗汉果。‘若有余依’:即若执取的残余尚存、尚未完全灭尽。‘不来’:即不来果的状态。显示巴利原文
137.Yo hi koci, bhikkhaveti yo hi koci bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā upāsako vā upāsikā vā. Evaṃ bhāveyyāti ādito paṭṭhāya vuttena bhāvanānukkamena bhāveyya. Pāṭikaṅkhanti paṭikaṅkhitabbaṃ, avassaṃ bhāvīti attho. Aññāti arahattaṃ. Sati vā upādiseseti upādānasese vā sati aparikkhīṇe. Anāgāmitāti anāgāmibhāvo.
如此,通过七年时间说明了教法导引至出离的功德之后,为显示更短的时间内亦可成就,世尊说:“诸比丘,且止住……”等语。这一切都是针对中等根器、可引导的补特伽罗而说。而对于利根者,则说:“早晨受教,傍晚即获殊胜;傍晚受教,早晨即获殊胜。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sattannaṃ vassānaṃ vasena sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ dassetvā puna tato appatarepi kāle dassento ‘‘tiṭṭhantu, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Sabbampi cetaṃ majjhimasseva neyyapuggalassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tikkhapaññaṃ pana sandhāya – ‘‘pāto anusiṭṭho sāyaṃ visesaṃ adhigamissati, sāyaṃ anusiṭṭho pāto visesaṃ adhigamissatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.345) vuttaṃ.
如此,世尊开示了“诸比丘,我的教法如此导引至出离”之后,便将宣说于二十一处、以阿罗汉果为顶点的教法作结,说道:“诸比丘,此是唯一之道……如所说者,正是依此而说。”其余的意义都是显而易见的。显示巴利原文
Iti bhagavā ‘‘evaṃniyyānikaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāsana’’nti dassetvā ekavīsatiyāpi ṭhānesu arahattanikūṭena desitaṃ desanaṃ niyyātento ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo…pe… iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti āha. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti.